PC Programming Manual

Hybrid IP-PBX

Model No. KX-NS500

Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic product.

Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use.
In particular, be sure to read "1.1.1 For Your Safety, page 20" before using this product.

KX-NS500: PFMPR Software File Version 007.00000 or later

Manuals and supporting information are provided on the Panasonic Web site at:
https://panasonic.net/cns/pcc/support/pbx/
Introduction

Introduction
About this Programming Manual
The PC Programming Manual is designed to serve as a system programming reference for the Panasonic
IP-PBX. It explains how to programme this PBX using Web Maintenance Console.
The PC Programming Manual is divided into the following sections:

Section 1, Overview
Provides an overview of programming the PBX.

Section 2, Introduction of Web Maintenance Console

Explains the layout and menus of Web Maintenance Console.

Sections 3 – 27, Web Maintenance Console Operating Instructions

Serves as reference operating instructions when using Web Maintenance Console to programme the PBX.

Section 28, Appendix

Provides a list of changes from previous software versions of the PBX.

Feature Programming References

Provides a list of all related programming items for each feature.

References Found in the PC Programming Manual

PC Programming Manual References
Related sections of the PC Programming Manual are listed for your reference.

Feature Manual References

The Feature Manual explains what the PBX can do, as well as how to obtain the most of its many features
and facilities. Sections from the Feature Manual are listed throughout this manual for your reference.

Installation Manual References

The Installation Manual provides instructions detailing the installation and maintenance of the PBX. Sections
from the Installation Manual are listed throughout this manual for your reference.

Links to Other Pages and Manuals

If you are viewing this manual with a PC, certain items are linked to different sections of this and other PBX
manuals. Click on a link to jump to that section.
Linked items include:
• Installation Manual References
• PC Programming Manual References
• Feature Manual References

Trademarks
• Microsoft, Outlook, Internet Explorer, Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• Intel and Intel Core are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
• Mozilla and Firefox are registered trademarks of the Mozilla Foundation.
• All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners.

2 PC Programming Manual
 Introduction

• Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.

Notice
• During a long programming session, it is highly recommended that you periodically save the system data
to the System Memory. If the PBX undergoes a sudden power failure or if the system is reset for some
reason, all the system data in RAM will be lost. However, if system data has been saved to the System
Memory, it can be easily reloaded.
• To save the system data to the System Memory, (1) click the button on the Home screen of Web
Maintenance Console before resetting the PBX or turning off the power, or (2) logout from Web
Maintenance Console so that the PBX automatically saves the system data.

NOTES
• The contents of this manual apply to PBXs with a certain software version, as indicated on the cover of
this manual. To confirm the software version of your PBX, see How do I confirm the software version
of the PBX or installed cards? in Maintenance Console Software in 2.3 Frequently Asked
Questions (FAQ).
• Some optional hardware, software, and features are not available in some countries/areas, or for some
PBX models. Please consult the seller where you purchased this PBX for more information.
• The description of the manual may be different from the actual Web-MC screen.
• Product specifications, including text displayed by the software, are subject to change without notice.
• In this manual, the suffix of each model number (e.g., KX-NS500NE) is omitted unless necessary.
• Operation of the KX-NTV series depends on the PBX software file version and the firmware version of the
KX-NTV series. You can confirm the compatibility on the Panasonic Web site:
https://panasonic.net/cns/pcc/support/pbx/

PC Programming Manual 3
Introduction

4 PC Programming Manual
 Table of Contents

Table of Contents
1 Overview ................................................................................................ 19
1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................... 20
1.1.1 For Your Safety ............................................................................................................. 20
1.1.2 Introduction ................................................................................................................... 21
1.1.3 Entering Characters ...................................................................................................... 21
1.2 PC Programming ........................................................................................................... 26
1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console ............................................................................. 26
1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode ......................................................................... 29
1.2.2.1 Editing and Printing Terminal Labels in Off-line Mode ............................................... 33
2 Introduction of Web Maintenance Console ........................................ 35
2.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................... 36
2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts ........................................................................... 36
2.1.2 Access Levels ............................................................................................................... 37
2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console ..................................................................... 40
2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard ....................................................................................................... 41
2.1.5 Card Status ................................................................................................................... 41
2.1.6 Extension Number Setting ............................................................................................ 41
2.2 Logout ............................................................................................................................ 43
2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ............................................................................. 44
3 Web Maintenance Console Home Screen .......................................... 53
3.1 Home Screen ................................................................................................................. 54
4 Status ..................................................................................................... 59
4.1 Status—Equipment Status ........................................................................................... 60
4.1.1 Status—Equipment Status—UPS ................................................................................ 60
4.1.2 Status—Equipment Status—CS Information ................................................................ 60
4.1.3 Status—Equipment Status—PS Information ................................................................ 61
4.1.4 Status—Equipment Status—UM Port status ................................................................ 61
4.1.5 Status—Equipment Status—USB ................................................................................ 62
5 System Control ..................................................................................... 63
5.1 System Control—Program Update .............................................................................. 64
5.1.1 System Control—Program Update—Download Program File ...................................... 65
5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File .......................................... 66
5.1.3 System Control—Program Update—Plug and Update ................................................. 68
5.2 System Control—MOH .................................................................................................. 69
5.2.1 System Control—MOH—Install .................................................................................... 69
5.2.2 System Control—MOH—Delete ................................................................................... 69
5.2.3 System Control—MOH—Status / Backup .................................................................... 69
5.3 System Control—System Reset ................................................................................... 70
5.4 System Control—System Shutdown ........................................................................... 71
6 Tool ........................................................................................................ 73
6.1 Tool—System Data Backup .......................................................................................... 74
6.1.1 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to USB .............................................................. 74
6.1.2 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to NAS .............................................................. 75
6.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration ............................................................................ 77
6.3 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear ........................................................................................ 78
6.4 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group .................................................................................. 79
6.5 Tool—Extension List View ............................................................................................ 80

PC Programming Manual 5
Table of Contents

6.6 Tool—Import .................................................................................................................. 81

6.7 Tool—Export .................................................................................................................. 86
6.8 Tool—Screen Customise .............................................................................................. 87
6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup ................................................................................................. 88
6.9.1 Tool—UM Data Backup—Manual Backup .................................................................... 88
6.9.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup ............................................................... 89
6.10 Tool—UM Data Restore ................................................................................................. 91
6.11 Tool—UM Backup History ............................................................................................ 93
6.12 Tool—DXDP All OUS ..................................................................................................... 94
6.13 Tool—Contact information ........................................................................................... 95
6.14 Tool—UT Option Setting ............................................................................................... 96
6.15 Tool—URL Information ................................................................................................. 97
6.16 Tool—SVM (Simplified Voice Message) ...................................................................... 98
6.16.1 Tool—SVM (Simplified Voice Message)—Delete All Recording ................................... 98
6.16.2 Tool—SVM (Simplified Voice Message)—Check Current Usage ................................. 98
6.17 Tool—P-SIP Option ....................................................................................................... 98
7 Utility ...................................................................................................... 99
7.1 Utility—Diagnosis ........................................................................................................ 100
7.1.1 Utility—Diagnosis—Card Diagnosis ........................................................................... 100
7.1.2 Utility—Diagnosis—Ping ............................................................................................. 100
7.2 Utility—File ................................................................................................................... 102
7.2.1 Utility—File—File Transfer PC to PBX ....................................................................... 102
7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer PBX to PC ....................................................................... 102
7.2.3 Utility—File—File View ............................................................................................... 103
7.2.4 Utility—File—File Delete ............................................................................................. 103
7.2.5 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PC to PBX ........................................................ 104
7.2.6 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PBX to PC ........................................................ 104
7.3 Utility—Log .................................................................................................................. 105
7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log ............................................................................................... 105
7.3.2 Utility—Log—Syslog ................................................................................................... 107
7.3.3 Utility—Log—Web-MC Event Log .............................................................................. 107
7.3.4 Utility—Log—UM System Log .................................................................................... 108
7.3.5 Utility—Log—Call Control Log .................................................................................... 108
7.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace ................................................................................................. 110
7.4.1 Utility—Monitor/Trace—ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace ................................................... 110
7.4.2 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-IPGW Protocol Trace ........................................................ 110
7.4.3 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-SIPGW Protocol Trace ...................................................... 111
7.4.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—Air Sync Group ..................................... 111
7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—LAN Sync Group .................................. 112
7.4.6 Utility—Monitor/Trace—UM System Trace (Internal) .................................................. 114
7.4.7 Utility—Monitor/Trace—E1 Signalling Bit Monitor ....................................................... 114
7.4.8 Utility—Monitor/Trace—E1 Line Trace ....................................................................... 115
7.4.9 Utility—Monitor/Trace—TCP Trace ............................................................................ 115
7.5 Utility—Report ............................................................................................................. 117
7.5.1 Utility—Report—Digital Trunk Error Report ................................................................ 117
7.5.2 Utility—Report—IP Extension Statistical Information ................................................. 117
7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports ............................................................................. 118
7.5.4 Utility—Report—E-mail Report ................................................................................... 120
7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information ............................................................................ 121
7.5.5.1 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—IP-CS Statistical Information ......................... 121
7.5.5.2 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—LAN Sync Information ................................... 122
7.5.5.3 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—PS Call Disconnect Log ................................ 124
7.6 Utility—Activation Key Installation ............................................................................ 125
7.7 Utility—Email Notification .......................................................................................... 126

6 PC Programming Manual
 Table of Contents

7.7.1 Utility—Email Notification—Alert ................................................................................ 126

7.7.2 Utility—Email Notification—System Analysis ............................................................. 127
7.7.3 Utility—Email Notification—Test Email ....................................................................... 127
7.8 Utility—Command ....................................................................................................... 128
7.8.1 Utility—Command—UM Command ............................................................................ 128
7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation ......................................................... 129
7.10 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording .................................................................... 131
7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting ...................................... 131
7.10.2 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting ....................................... 131
7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List ................................ 131
7.10.4 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Maintenance .............................................. 133
7.11 Utility—UM - System Maintenance ............................................................................ 134
7.12 Utility—CS-Web Connection ...................................................................................... 135
8 Users .................................................................................................... 137
8.1 Users—User Profiles ................................................................................................... 138
8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting ................................................................... 140
8.2 Users—Add User ......................................................................................................... 145
8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User ................................................................................. 145
8.2.2 Users—Add User—Multiple Users ............................................................................. 148
8.3 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording .................................................................... 150
8.3.1 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Edit a Recording ........................................ 150
8.3.2 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Record List ................................................ 150
8.4 Users—Call Management ........................................................................................... 152
8.4.1 Users—Call Management—Group Monitor ................................................................ 152
8.4.2 Users—Call Management—ACD Report ................................................................... 153
8.4.3 Users—Call Management—ACD Scheduled Export .................................................. 153
8.4.4 Users—Call Management—ACD Export History ........................................................ 154
9 PBX Configuration—[1] Configuration ............................................. 157
9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot ........................................................ 158
9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property ........................ 164
9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main ................. 164
9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site ................... 168
9.2.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Slot Summary ... 182
9.2.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—NSVM ............... 184
9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status ................ 185
9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property ............................. 190
9.4.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Ext) Setting . 190
9.4.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Trunk) Setting ....
190
9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property ...................... 194
9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property ....................... 195
9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Port Type View .......
196
9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-SIPGW ......... 197
9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-SIPGW .......... 200
9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW ........... 201
9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW ........... 218
9.11.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW—GK Settings
..................................................................................................................................... 222
9.11.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW—Hunt Pattern
..................................................................................................................................... 222
9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPGW ............. 224
9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-IPEXT ........... 225

PC Programming Manual 7
Table of Contents

9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT ............ 228

9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-SIPEXT ......... 235
9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT .......... 236
9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-IPCS ............. 242
9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPCS .............. 244
9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-UTEXT .......... 248
9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-UTEXT ........... 249
9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—Extension Type ......
256
9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Extension Type .......
258
9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type ......... 262
9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port ........... 266
9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
....................................................................................................................................... 268
9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port ............ 271
9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port ............ 279
9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type ............ 288
9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type Line
Signal Setting .............................................................................................................. 289
9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2
Setting 1 ....................................................................................................................... 291
9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2
Setting 2 ....................................................................................................................... 293
9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—E1 Port ............. 295
9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Expansion Unit1/Expansion Unit2/
Expansion Unit3 .......................................................................................................... 298
9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—DOORPHONE Card
....................................................................................................................................... 300
9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station ................................... 301
9.36 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option ................................................... 304
9.37 PBX Configuration—[1-4] Configuration—Clock Priority ........................................ 306
9.38 PBX Configuration—[1-5] Configuration—DSP Resource ...................................... 307
9.38.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting ....................... 307
9.38.1.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting—DSP Resource
Advisor ..................................................................................................................... 308
9.38.2 PBX Configuration—[1-5-2] Configuration—DSP Resource—Usage ........................ 309
10 PBX Configuration—[2] System ........................................................ 311
10.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1] System—Date & Time ..................................................... 312
10.1.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-1] System—Date & Time—Date & Time Setting ................ 312
10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving .......... 312
10.1.2.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—
Daylight Saving ........................................................................................................ 313
10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM .............................................. 314
10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters .......................................... 315
10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table ...................................................... 325
10.4.1 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table—Time Setting ................................ 325
10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table ................................................... 326
10.6 PBX Configuration—[2-6] System—Numbering Plan .............................................. 328
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main .................................. 328
10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial .......................... 344
10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature .... 345
10.7 PBX Configuration—[2-7] System—Class of Service .............................................. 348
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings .................... 348

8 PC Programming Manual
 Table of Contents

10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—External Call Block ............ 357

10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3] System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block ............. 358
10.8 PBX Configuration—[2-8] System—Ring Tone Patterns ......................................... 359
10.8.1 PBX Configuration—[2-8-1] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO ................ 359
10.8.2 PBX Configuration—[2-8-2] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from DOORPHONE .....
359
10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others ........... 360
10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options .............................................. 361
10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings ................................ 377
10.11 PBX Configuration—[2-11] System—Audio Gain ..................................................... 378
10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH ............................ 378
10.11.2 PBX Configuration—[2-11-2] System—Audio Gain—Card ........................................ 378
11 PBX Configuration—[3] Group .......................................................... 379
11.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1] Group—Trunk Group ...................................................... 380
11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings ............................ 380
11.1.2 PBX Configuration—[3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority ................ 383
11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification ............... 384
11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan .............................. 386
11.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan—Auto Assign .... 388
11.1.5 PBX Configuration—[3-1-5] Group—Trunk Group—Charge Rate ............................. 389
11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group ........................................................ 391
11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group ............................................. 392
11.3.1 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group—All Setting ............................ 392
11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group .................................................... 394
11.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—All Setting ................................... 394
11.4.2 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—External Pager ........................... 395
11.5 PBX Configuration—[3-5] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group ................... 396
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
..................................................................................................................................... 396
11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group
Settings—Member List ............................................................................................ 401
11.5.2 PBX Configuration—[3-5-2] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time
Table ........................................................................................................................... 402
11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
..................................................................................................................................... 403
11.5.4 PBX Configuration–[3-5-4] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—ACD Supervisor
..................................................................................................................................... 406
11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group ................................ 408
11.6.1 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group—Member List ............. 408
11.7 PBX Configuration—[3-7] Group—UM Group .......................................................... 409
11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings ........................... 409
11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings ................................. 410
11.7.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings—Member List ....... 411
11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group .................................................. 412
11.8.1 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group—Member List ............................. 412
11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group ............................................ 414
11.9.1 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group—Member List ........................ 415
11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group ....................................................... 416
11.11 PBX Configuration—[3-11] Group—VM(DPT) Group ............................................... 417
11.11.1 PBX Configuration—[3-11-1] Group—VM(DPT) Group—System Settings ................ 417
11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings ...................... 418
11.11.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List
.................................................................................................................................. 418
11.12 PBX Configuration—[3-12] Group—VM(DTMF) Group ............................................ 420

PC Programming Manual 9
Table of Contents

11.12.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-1] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings ............. 420

11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings ............... 422
11.12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member
List ........................................................................................................................... 423
12 PBX Configuration—[4] Extension ................................................... 425
12.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1] Extension—Wired Extension ......................................... 426
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings ........ 426
12.1.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP
Generate .................................................................................................................. 441
12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND ..................... 443
12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial .................... 443
12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button .............. 443
12.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible
button data copy ...................................................................................................... 449
12.1.5 PBX Configuration—[4-1-5] Extension—Wired Extension—PF Button ...................... 450
12.1.6 PBX Configuration—[4-1-6] Extension—Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send .......
450
12.1.7 PBX Configuration—[4-1-7] Extension—Wired Extension—CLIP ID Table ................ 450
12.1.8 PBX Configuration—[4-1-8] Extension—Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message ....
451
12.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2] Extension—Portable Station .......................................... 452
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings ......... 452
12.2.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP
Generate .................................................................................................................. 465
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND ..................... 466
12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button ............... 467
12.2.3.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible
button data copy ...................................................................................................... 471
12.2.4 PBX Configuration—[4-2-4] Extension—Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send . 472
12.2.5 PBX Configuration—[4-2-5] Extension—Portable Station—CLIP ID Table ................ 472
12.2.6 PBX Configuration—[4-2-6] Extension—Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message ....
472
12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console ............................................... 474
12.3.1 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console—DSS key data copy ............... 479
13 PBX Configuration—[5] Optional Device ......................................... 481
13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone ........................................ 482
13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—External Pager .................................. 484
13.3 PBX Configuration—[5-3] Optional Device—Voice Message .................................. 485
13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System ......... 485
13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message ...... 489
13.3.3 PBX Configuration—[5-3-3] Optional Device—Voice Message—SVM ...................... 489
13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay ................................... 492
13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor ................................ 493
14 PBX Configuration—[6] Feature ........................................................ 495
14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial ......................................... 496
14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge ................................................ 497
14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code ............................................ 502
14.4 PBX Configuration—[6-4] Feature—Second Dial Tone ............................................ 504
14.5 PBX Configuration—[6-5] Feature—Absent Message ............................................. 505
14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant .............................................................. 506
15 PBX Configuration—[7] TRS ............................................................. 509

10 PC Programming Manual
 Table of Contents

15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied Code ......................................................... 510

15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception Code .................................................... 511
15.3 PBX Configuration—[7-3] TRS—Special Carrier ...................................................... 512
15.4 PBX Configuration—[7-4] TRS—Emergency Dial .................................................... 513
15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous ....................................................... 514
16 PBX Configuration—[8] ARS ............................................................. 517
16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting ..................................................... 518
16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number ................................................... 519
16.3 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time ............................................... 520
16.3.1 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time—Time Setting .......................... 520
16.4 PBX Configuration—[8-4] ARS—Routing Plan Priority ........................................... 521
16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier ................................................................... 522
16.6 PBX Configuration—[8-6] ARS—Leading Number Exception ................................ 524
16.7 PBX Configuration—[8-7] ARS—Authorisation Code for TRG ............................... 525
17 PBX Configuration—[9] Private Network ......................................... 527
17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table ............................................ 528
17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission ............ 530
17.3 PBX Configuration—[9-3] Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP) .................. 532
17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4] Private Network—NDSS Key Table ................................ 533
17.5 PBX Configuration—[9-5] Private Network—Centralised UM/VM Unit ................... 534
18 PBX Configuration—[10] CO & Incoming Call ................................. 535
18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings ...................... 536
18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings ........ 537
18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table ......................... 541
18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Automatic
Registration ................................................................................................................ 542
18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Name Generate ......
543
18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table ................................. 545
18.5 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous .......................... 547
19 PBX Configuration—[11] Maintenance ............................................. 549
19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main ....................................................... 550
19.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2] Maintenance—PT Programming Access .................... 558
19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation ............................. 559
19.3.1 PBX Configuration—[11-3-1] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—Air Synchronisation
..................................................................................................................................... 559
19.3.2 PBX Configuration—[11-3-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Synchronisation
..................................................................................................................................... 560
19.3.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Sync Group
Setting ........................................................................................................................ 562
20 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings .......................................... 565
20.1 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings ................................................................... 566
20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-1] Mailbox Settings—Quick Setting ........................................ 566
20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting ............................................ 567
20.1.3 UM Configuration—[1-3] Mailbox Settings—Auto Configuration ................................ 588
21 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service ........................................... 591
21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service ................................................................... 592
22 UM Configuration—[3] UM Extension / Trunk Service .................... 603

PC Programming Manual 11
Table of Contents

22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group ............. 604

22.2 UM Configuration—[3-2] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Port Assignment ......... 606
23 UM Configuration—[4] Service Settings .......................................... 607
23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing ............... 608
23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters ......................................... 610
23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service ................................. 618
23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer ...... 620
23.3.2 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Date Control ............. 624
23.3.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Time Control ............. 625
23.3.4 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Day Control .............. 626
23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Password ................. 627
23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table ..................................... 630
24 UM Configuration—[5] System Parameters ..................................... 633
24.1 UM Configuration—[5-1] System Parameters—Mailbox Group .............................. 634
24.2 UM Configuration—[5-2] System Parameters—Extension Group .......................... 636
24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement
....................................................................................................................................... 637
24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters ................................... 639
25 UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings ................................................ 653
25.1 UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings ......................................................................... 654
26 UM Configuration—[7] System Security .......................................... 655
26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security ................................................................... 656
27 Network Service .................................................................................. 659
27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports .................................................................... 660
27.2 Network Service—[2] Server Feature ........................................................................ 663
27.2.1 Network Service—[2-1] Server Feature—DHCP ........................................................ 663
27.2.2 Network Service—[2-2] Server Feature—FTP ........................................................... 663
27.2.3 Network Service—[2-4] Server Feature—HTTP ......................................................... 664
27.2.4 Network Service—[2-5] Server Feature—NTP ........................................................... 664
27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP ........................................................ 665
27.2.6 Network Service—[2-7] Server Feature—IMAP4 ....................................................... 665
27.3 Network Service—[3] Client Feature ......................................................................... 666
27.3.1 Network Service—[3-1] Client Feature—FTP ............................................................. 666
27.3.2 Network Service—[3-2] Client Feature—Syslog ......................................................... 666
27.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent ............................................... 667
27.3.4 Network Service—[3-4] Client Feature—HTTP .......................................................... 668
27.3.5 Network Service—[3-5] Client Feature—Remote Maintenance ................................. 669
27.3.6 Network Service—[3-6] Client Feature—SMTP ......................................................... 671
27.4 Network Service—[4] Other ........................................................................................ 673
27.4.1 Network Service—[4-1] Other—Security .................................................................... 673
27.4.2 Network Service—[4-2] Other—NAS .......................................................................... 673
28 Appendix ............................................................................................. 675
28.1 Revision History .......................................................................................................... 676
28.1.1 PFMPR Software File Version 004.1xxxx ................................................................... 676
28.1.2 PFMPR Software File Version 004.2xxxx ................................................................... 678
28.1.3 PFMPR Software File Version 004.3xxxx ................................................................... 679
28.1.4 PFMPR Software File Version 004.4xxxx ................................................................... 679
28.1.5 PFMPR Software File Version 004.6xxxx ................................................................... 680
28.1.6 PFMPR Software File Version 006.0xxxx ................................................................... 681

12 PC Programming Manual
 Table of Contents

28.1.7 PFMPR Software File Version 007.xxxxx ................................................................... 682

Feature Programming References ............................................................................. 683
Absent Message ...................................................................................................... 684
Account Code Entry ................................................................................................. 684
Advice of Charge (AOC) .......................................................................................... 684
Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on) ....................................................................... 684
Automatic Extension Release .................................................................................. 684
Automatic Fax Transfer ........................................................................................... 685
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) ............................................................................ 685
Automatic Setup ...................................................................................................... 685
Background Music (BGM) ........................................................................................ 686
Budget Management ............................................................................................... 686
Built-in FOS Interface .............................................................................................. 686
Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) ................................................................. 686
CA (Communication Assistant) ................................................................................ 687
Call Billing for Guest Room ...................................................................................... 687
Call Charge Services ............................................................................................... 687
Call Distribution Port Group ..................................................................................... 688
Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP) .................................................................. 688
Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P) ..................................................................... 688
Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG .............................................................................. 688
Call Forwarding (FWD) ............................................................................................ 689
Call Hold .................................................................................................................. 689
Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN .................................................................................... 689
Call Monitor .............................................................................................................. 690
Call Park .................................................................................................................. 690
Call Pickup ............................................................................................................... 690
Call Transfer ............................................................................................................ 691
Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN ................................................................................... 691
Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG ................................................................................... 691
Call Waiting .............................................................................................................. 692
Call Waiting Tone ..................................................................................................... 692
Caller ID ................................................................................................................... 693
Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution ............................................................. 693
Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection .......................................................... 693
Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) ........................... 693
Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/
Connected Name Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG .................. 694
Centralised Voice Mail ............................................................................................. 695
Class of Service (COS) ............................................................................................ 695
Common Extension Numbering for 2 PBXs ............................................................. 695
Common Extension Numbering for Multiple PBXs .................................................. 695
Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) ..................................................... 696
Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by QSIG .................................... 696
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) .................................................................... 696
Conference .............................................................................................................. 696
Conference Group Call ............................................................................................ 697
Confirmation Tone .................................................................................................... 697
Data Line Security ................................................................................................... 697
Dial Tone .................................................................................................................. 698
Dial Tone Transfer ................................................................................................... 698
Dial Type Selection .................................................................................................. 698
Direct In Line (DIL) ................................................................................................... 698
Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) ................................................ 699
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ...................................................................... 699

PC Programming Manual 13
Table of Contents

Direct SIP Connection ............................................................................................. 700

Display Information .................................................................................................. 700
Distribution Order ..................................................................................................... 700
Do Not Disturb (DND) .............................................................................................. 700
Door Open ............................................................................................................... 701
Doorphone Call ........................................................................................................ 701
DSP Resource Reservation ..................................................................................... 701
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Assignment .................................... 701
E-mail Notification for Extension Users ................................................................... 702
E-mail Notification for Manager ............................................................................... 702
E-mail Notification of System-level Events .............................................................. 702
Emergency Call ....................................................................................................... 702
Enhanced Walking Extension .................................................................................. 702
Executive Busy Override ......................................................................................... 703
Extension Dial Lock ................................................................................................. 703
Extension Feature Clear .......................................................................................... 703
Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) ..................................................... 704
External Feature Access (EFA) ............................................................................... 704
External Relay Control ............................................................................................. 704
External Sensor ....................................................................................................... 704
Flash/Recall/Terminate ............................................................................................ 705
Flexible Buttons ....................................................................................................... 705
Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering ..................................................................... 705
Floating Extension ................................................................................................... 705
FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button .................................................................... 706
Group ....................................................................................................................... 706
Group Call Distribution ............................................................................................. 707
Hands-free Answerback .......................................................................................... 707
Hands-free Operation .............................................................................................. 707
Headset Operation ................................................................................................... 708
Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
.................................................................................................................................. 708
Hot Line ................................................................................................................... 708
Idle Extension Hunting ............................................................................................. 708
Incoming Call Distribution Group Features .............................................................. 708
Incoming Call Log .................................................................................................... 709
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features ................................ 709
Intercept Routing ..................................................................................................... 710
Intercept Routing—No Destination .......................................................................... 710
Intercom Call ............................................................................................................ 710
Internal Call Block .................................................................................................... 710
Internal Call Features ............................................................................................... 711
IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) ............................................................................. 711
IP-CS (KX-NS0154) ................................................................................................. 711
ISDN Extension ....................................................................................................... 712
ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol .............................................................. 712
ISDN Virtual Private Network (ISDN-VPN) .............................................................. 712
KX-UT Series SIP Phones ....................................................................................... 712
Last Number Redial ................................................................................................. 712
LED Indication ......................................................................................................... 713
Legacy Device Connection ...................................................................................... 713
Line Preference—Incoming ..................................................................................... 713
Line Preference—Outgoing ..................................................................................... 713
Local Alarm Information ........................................................................................... 714
Log-in/Log-out .......................................................................................................... 714

14 PC Programming Manual
 Table of Contents

Making a TIE Line Call ............................................................................................. 715

Malicious Call Identification (MCID) ......................................................................... 715
Manager Features ................................................................................................... 715
Message Waiting ..................................................................................................... 715
Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service ............................................... 715
Music on Hold .......................................................................................................... 716
Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) ................................................................ 716
Network ICD Group ................................................................................................. 716
Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA) ..................................................................... 717
Off-hook Monitor ...................................................................................................... 717
One-numbered Extension ........................................................................................ 717
One-touch Dialling ................................................................................................... 717
Operator Features ................................................................................................... 717
Outgoing Message (OGM) ....................................................................................... 718
Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group ....................................... 718
Overflow Feature ..................................................................................................... 718
Paging ...................................................................................................................... 718
Panasonic SIP Phones (P-SIP) ............................................................................... 719
Pause Insertion ........................................................................................................ 719
PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension . 719
Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection ............................................................................... 720
Ping .......................................................................................................................... 720
Portable Station (PS) Connection ............................................................................ 720
Power Failure Transfer ............................................................................................ 720
Printing Message ..................................................................................................... 720
Privacy Release ....................................................................................................... 720
PS Directory ............................................................................................................. 721
PS Ring Group ......................................................................................................... 721
PS Roaming by Network ICD Group ....................................................................... 721
PT Programming ...................................................................................................... 721
QSIG Enhanced Features ....................................................................................... 721
Queuing Feature ...................................................................................................... 722
Quick Dialling ........................................................................................................... 722
Reverse Circuit ........................................................................................................ 722
Ring Tone Pattern Selection .................................................................................... 722
Room Status Control ............................................................................................... 723
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor ............................ 723
Simple Remote Connection ..................................................................................... 723
SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension ............................................................. 725
SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Trunk .................................................................... 725
SIP Portable Station (S-PS) and SIP Cell Station (SIP-CS) .................................... 725
SIP Refer Transfer ................................................................................................... 725
SIP-TLS ................................................................................................................... 725
Software Upgrading ................................................................................................. 725
Special Carrier Access Code ................................................................................... 726
Speed Dialling—Personal/System ........................................................................... 726
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) ............................................................ 726
Supervisory Feature ................................................................................................ 726
Supervisory Feature (ACD) ..................................................................................... 727
Syslog Record Management ................................................................................... 727
Tenant Service ......................................................................................................... 727
Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN ............................................................. 728
TIE Line Service ...................................................................................................... 728
Time Service ............................................................................................................ 728
Timed Reminder ...................................................................................................... 729

PC Programming Manual 15
Table of Contents

Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) ............................................................ 729

Trunk Access ........................................................................................................... 730
Trunk Adaptor Connection ....................................................................................... 731
Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS) ............................................................... 731
Trunk Busy Out ........................................................................................................ 731
Trunk Call Limitation ................................................................................................ 731
Unified Messaging—Alternate Extension Group ..................................................... 732
Unified Messaging—Auto Forwarding ..................................................................... 732
Unified Messaging—Auto Receipt ........................................................................... 732
Unified Messaging—Automated Attendant (AA) ...................................................... 732
Unified Messaging—Automatic Login ...................................................................... 733
Unified Messaging—Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager ........................... 733
Unified Messaging—Call Services ........................................................................... 733
Unified Messaging—Call Transfer Scenario ............................................................ 733
Unified Messaging—Call Transfer Status ................................................................ 734
Unified Messaging—Call Transfer to Outside .......................................................... 734
Unified Messaging—Call-through Service ............................................................... 734
Unified Messaging—Caller ID Call Routing ............................................................. 734
Unified Messaging—Caller ID Callback ................................................................... 734
Unified Messaging—Caller ID Screening ................................................................ 734
Unified Messaging—Caller Name Announcement .................................................. 735
Unified Messaging—Company Greeting ................................................................. 735
Unified Messaging—Covering Extension ................................................................ 735
Unified Messaging—Custom Service ...................................................................... 735
Unified Messaging—Custom Service Builder .......................................................... 735
Unified Messaging—Default Mailbox Template ....................................................... 735
Unified Messaging—Dialling by Name .................................................................... 735
Unified Messaging—Direct Service Access ............................................................. 736
Unified Messaging—Extension Group ..................................................................... 736
Unified Messaging—External Message Delivery Service ........................................ 736
Unified Messaging—Group Distribution Lists .......................................................... 736
Unified Messaging—Hold ........................................................................................ 736
Unified Messaging—Holiday Service ....................................................................... 737
Unified Messaging—Hospitality Mode ..................................................................... 737
Unified Messaging—IMAP Integration ..................................................................... 737
Unified Messaging—Incomplete Call Handling Service ........................................... 737
Unified Messaging—Intercept Routing to a Mailbox ................................................ 737
Unified Messaging—Intercom Paging ..................................................................... 737
Unified Messaging—Interview Service .................................................................... 738
Unified Messaging—List All Names ......................................................................... 738
Unified Messaging—Live Call Screening (LCS) ...................................................... 738
Unified Messaging—Logical Extension (All Calls Transfer to Mailbox) ................... 738
Unified Messaging—Mailbox ................................................................................... 738
Unified Messaging—Manager Service Switching .................................................... 738
Unified Messaging—Message Reception Mode ...................................................... 739
Unified Messaging—Message Transfer ................................................................... 739
Unified Messaging—Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device ....................... 739
Unified Messaging—Message Waiting Notification—Lamp ..................................... 739
Unified Messaging—Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device ................. 739
Unified Messaging—Multilingual Service ................................................................. 740
Unified Messaging—No DTMF Input Operation ...................................................... 740
Unified Messaging—On Hold Announcement Menu ............................................... 740
Unified Messaging—Operator Service .................................................................... 740
Unified Messaging—Password Administration ........................................................ 741
Unified Messaging—Personal Custom Service ....................................................... 741

16 PC Programming Manual
 Table of Contents

Unified Messaging—Personal Greetings ................................................................. 741

Unified Messaging—PIN Call Routing ..................................................................... 741
Unified Messaging—Play System Prompt After Personal Greeting ........................ 741
Unified Messaging—Port Service ............................................................................ 741
Unified Messaging—Remote Call Forwarding Set .................................................. 741
Unified Messaging—Subscriber Tutorial ................................................................. 742
Unified Messaging—System Backup/Restore ......................................................... 742
Unified Messaging—System Prompts ..................................................................... 742
Unified Messaging—System Reports ...................................................................... 742
Unified Messaging—System Security ...................................................................... 742
Unified Messaging—Toll Saver ................................................................................ 742
Unified Messaging—Transfer Recall to a Mailbox ................................................... 743
Unified Messaging—Trunk Service (Universal Port) ............................................... 743
Unified Messaging—Two-way Record/Two-way Transfer ....................................... 743
Unified Messaging—Urgent Message ..................................................................... 743
Unified Messaging—Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button ............................................. 744
Unified Messaging—Voice Mail Service .................................................................. 744
Unified Messaging—Web Programming .................................................................. 744
User Profiles ............................................................................................................ 744
Verification Code Entry ............................................................................................ 745
VIP Call .................................................................................................................... 745
Virtual PS ................................................................................................................. 745
Voice Mail (VM) Group ............................................................................................. 745
Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration ......................................................................... 746
Voice Mail DTMF Integration ................................................................................... 747
Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network ........................................................... 747
Walking COS ........................................................................................................... 747
Walking Extension Features .................................................................................... 748
Walking Extension-Home position control ............................................................... 748
Whisper OHCA ........................................................................................................ 748
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode .................................................................................... 748

PC Programming Manual 17
Table of Contents

18 PC Programming Manual
 Section 1
Overview

This section provides an overview of programming the

PBX.

PC Programming Manual 19
1.1 Introduction

1.1 Introduction
1.1.1 For Your Safety
To prevent personal injury and/or damage to property, be sure to observe the following safety precautions.
The following symbols classify and describe the level of hazard and injury caused when this unit is
operated or handled improperly.

This notice means that misuse could result in death

WARNING or serious injury.

This notice means that misuse could result in injury

CAUTION or damage to property.

The following types of symbols are used to classify and describe the type of instructions to be
observed.

This symbol is used to alert users to a specific operating procedure that must not be
performed.

This symbol is used to alert users to a specific operating procedure that must be followed in
order to operate the unit safely.

WARNING

• Unplug the PBX from the AC outlet if it emits smoke, an abnormal smell or makes unusual noise. These
conditions can cause fire or electric shock. Confirm that smoke has stopped and contact an authorised
Panasonic Factory Service Centre.

CAUTION

• To the Administrator or Installer regarding account passwords

1. Please provide all system passwords to the customer.
2. To avoid unauthorised access and possible abuse of the PBX, keep the passwords secret, and
inform the customer of the importance of the passwords, and the possible dangers if they become
known to others.
3. The PBX has no passwords set initially. For security, select an installer password as soon as the
PBX system is installed at the site.

20 PC Programming Manual
 1.1.2 Introduction

4. Change the passwords periodically.

5. It is strongly recommended that passwords of 10 numbers or characters be used for maximum
protection against unauthorised access.
• There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal
identification number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX.
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a. Keeping PINs secret.
b. Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.
c. Changing PINs frequently.

1.1.2 Introduction
These programming instructions are designed to serve as an overall system programming reference for the
PBX. Each feature in the PBX has default settings that can be changed to customise the PBX to your
requirements. These settings control the functions of the PBX, and changing them is referred to as "system
programming".
Programming can be performed by system installers, on-site managers, and individual users. However,
managers and individual users may only change a limited number of settings. For details, see 2.1.1 Web
Maintenance Console Accounts.
All features and settings of the PBX can be programmed through system programming with Web
Maintenance Console. Starting Web Maintenance Console is described in 1.2 PC Programming. Individual
system programming items are described from 3 Web Maintenance Console Home Screen.

Programming Modes
There are two different modes available for programming using Web Maintenance Console:
• On-line Mode
On-line mode allows you to use Web Maintenance Console on a PC that is connected to the PBX to
modify the system data and settings used by the PBX. Settings can be modified and results are displayed
in real time. Modifications to settings change the information in the PBX’s temporary memory (DRAM). To
finalise the changes, you must either save the changes to the PBX’s System Memory by clicking or log
out of Web Maintenance Console by clicking . For details, see Web Maintenance Console Features
in 3.1 Home Screen.
• Off-line Mode
Off-line mode allows you to connect to a version of Web Maintenance Console running on your PC. Using
Off-line mode, you can create new system data files and make modifications to system data files stored
on your PC, without being connected to the PBX. After you finish configuring settings, they can be saved
and uploaded to the PBX, which will update the PBX’s settings. For details, see Uploading Programmed
Settings to the PBX in 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode.

1.1.3 Entering Characters

The characters on a white background below can be used when storing a name, message, password or
other text entry data using a PC. The available characters vary according to the model of PBX.

Note
For NE models, the tables differ depending on the Area Code selected in Easy Setup.

PC Programming Manual 21
1.1.3 Entering Characters

Table 1 (Standard)

22 PC Programming Manual
 1.1.3 Entering Characters

Table 2 (For NE model)

PC Programming Manual 23
1.1.3 Entering Characters

Table 3 (For RU/UC model)

24 PC Programming Manual
 1.1.3 Entering Characters

Table 4 (For Greece)

PC Programming Manual 25
1.2 PC Programming

1.2 PC Programming
1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console
System programming, diagnosis and administration can be performed with a PC using Web Maintenance
Console. Web Maintenance Console is accessed through a Web browser running on a networked PC.
This section describes how to set up and access Web Maintenance Console.

System Requirements
Required Operating System
• Microsoft® Windows® 7, Windows 8.1, Windows 8.1 Professional, or Windows 10 operating system

Note
In Windows 8.1 / 8.1 Professional, Web Maintenance Console runs only in desktop mode. It is not
available from the Windows 8.1 Start screen.

Recommended Display Settings

• Screen resolution: XGA (1024 × 768)
• DPI setting: Normal size (96 DPI)
Supported Browsers for use with Web Maintenance Console
• Windows Internet Explorer 11
• Mozilla® Firefox® version 57 or ESR52

Always apply the latest updates to your Web browser software. For details, refer to your Web browser’s
documentation. Only the browsers and browser versions listed above are supported for use with Web
Maintenance Console.

Note
When using Windows Internet Explorer, there may be a delay when displaying some screens of Web
Maintenance Console. A message may be displayed that reads "Stop running this script?". This
message is automatically displayed when a script takes a long time to complete. If this message is
displayed, click No to continue using Web Maintenance Console. If you click Yes, you will have to close
the browser window for Web Maintenance Console and log in again. For information about disabling this
prompt, refer to your Web browser’s on-line support resources.
Browser Setting Requirements
The following functions must be enabled in the Web browser’s settings to use Web Maintenance Console:
• Cookies
• JavaScript
• The ability to download files
• The display of animations
• The display of images
For details regarding the above settings, refer to your Web browser’s documentation.

PC Specifications (for programming)

The following are recommended specifications for PCs used for programming. For details about
programming in Off-line mode, see 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode.

26 PC Programming Manual
 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console

Recommended Specification
CPU 3.2 GHz Intel® Core™ 2 Duo processor or comparable CPU
RAM 2048 MB
Hard Disk 10 GB available space

Copyright for MD5

This software uses the Source Code of RSA Data Security, Inc. described in the RFC1321 (MD5 Message-
Digest Algorithm).

Copyright (C) 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc. Created 1991. All rights reserved.

Licence to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as the "RSA Data Security, Inc.
MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing this software or this function.

Licence is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such works are identified as
"derived from the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or
referencing the derived work.

RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either the merchantability of this software or
the suitability of this software for any particular purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied
warranty of any kind.
These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation and/or software.

PC Connection (On-line Mode)

To connect to Web Maintenance Console in On-line mode, both the PC and the PBX must be connected.
The connection can be made through a local area network (LAN), a virtual private network (VPN), or over
the Internet. A PC can also be connected directly to the maintenance port of the PBX.

Connecting to Web Maintenance Console (On-line Mode)

Below is the procedure for connecting to Web Maintenance Console to programme in On-line mode:
1. Connect the PC to the PBX:
• Connect the PBX to a network with the LAN port and access the PBX from a PC in your LAN or VPN.
• Connect the PBX to a network with the LAN port and access the PBX from a PC using an Internet
connection.
2. Access Web Maintenance Console:

LAN or VPN connection:

Launch your Web browser and input the IP address of the PBX followed by the Web Maintenance
Console port number into the address bar. The input method will differ according to the PC’s connection
to the PBX.
The default IP address for the LAN port of the PBX is 192.168.0.101, and the default Web Maintenance
Console port number is 80. Accordingly, the address to enter to connect to the PBX for the first time will
be as follows (enter the address exactly as shown):
http://192.168.0.101

MNT Port connection:

Launch your Web browser and in the address bar, enter one of the following addresses exactly as
shown:
– 223.0.0.1
or

PC Programming Manual 27
1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console

– http://kx-ns500.

Note
• If entering "http://kx-ns500.", be sure to include the period at the end as shown.
• If connecting using 223.0.0.1 takes a long time, configure a static IP address for the PC.

Internet Connection:
You can connect to the PBX in On-line mode using the Off-line Web Maintenance Console Programme
Launcher. For details, see Connecting in On-line Mode using the Programme Launcher in 1.2.2 PC
Programming Using Off-line Mode.
3. The Web Maintenance Console login screen is displayed. For details about logging in, see
2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console.
• If this is the first time the PBX is accessed (i.e., it is in its initialised, factory default state), you must
log in using the Installer level account. Once you log in, the Easy Setup Wizard will launch. For
details, see 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard.
• If the PBX has been set up using the Easy Setup Wizard, PBX system programming can be
performed. To perform programming, enter the login name and password according to your status
and authorisation level. For details about the differences between levels of authorisation, see
2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts.
4. After you successfully log in to Web Maintenance Console, the Home screen will be displayed and
programming can be performed. For details about accessing the different features of Web Maintenance
Console, see 3.1 Home Screen.

Connecting to Web Maintenance Console (Remote Access)

Below is the procedure for connecting to Web Maintenance Console to programme via Remote Access:
1. Connect the PC to the PBX.
• Install the Remote card, connect the PBX to an analogue line, and access the PBX from a PC via a
remote modem.
• Connect the PBX to an ISDN line and access the PBX from a PC via an ISDN modem.
For more details, refer to "5.2 PC Connection—Connection via RMT Card (KX-TDA0196)" or "5.2 PC
Connection—Connection via PRI23 Card (KX-NS5290), PRI30/E1 Card (KX-NS5290CE), BRI2 Card
(KX-NS5282), or BRI4 Card (KX-NS5284)" in the Installation Manual.
2. Start the Off-line Web Maintenance launcher :
Analogue Line connection:
1) Click the Connect-Online Mode button.
2) Select the Modem tab.
3) Set the following:
– Dial Number / Dial Type / Port / Baud Rate (bps) / Flow Control / Command
4) Enter the Password.
5) Click the Connect button.
ISDN Line connection:
1) Click the Connect-Online Mode button.
2) Select the ISDN Remote tab.
3) Enter the Telephone Number.
4) Enter the Password.
5) Click the Connect button.
3. The Web Maintenance Console login screen is displayed. For details about logging in, see
2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console.

28 PC Programming Manual
 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode

4. After you successfully log in to Web Maintenance Console, the Home screen will be displayed and
programming can be performed. For details about accessing the different features of Web Maintenance
Console, see 3.1 Home Screen.

Connecting to Web Maintenance Console (Off-line Mode)

To connect to Web Maintenance Console in Off-line mode, use the New -Offline Mode or Open -Offline
Mode operations in the Off-line Web Maintenance Console programme launcher. For details, refer to
1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode.

1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode

PC Programming is performed by connecting to the PBX using Web Maintenance Console, which is also
known as On-line mode. However, as certain programming requires installed cards to be set to out of
service (OUS), or requires system settings to be changed, some programming cannot be performed while
the PBX is in use. Off-line mode programming is performed using the Off-line version of Web Maintenance
Console, which you install on your PC.
Off-line mode allows you to create new system data files and make modifications to system data files stored
on your PC, without being connected to the PBX. The programming changes can be saved and then later
uploaded to the PBX.
The following procedures outline how to install and use the Off-line Web Maintenance Console for Off-line
mode programming.

Installation
Note
• Be sure to install and use the latest version of "KX-NS Unified Web Maintenance Console".
• Before beginning the installation of Off-line Web Maintenance Console, the following software must
be installed on the PC:
– Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0
– Microsoft .NET Framework 4
This software can be downloaded from Microsoft’s online Download Center.
• To install or uninstall the software on a PC running Windows 7, Windows 8.1, Windows 8.1
Professional or Windows 10, you must be logged in as a user in the "Administrators" group.
1. Copy the "KX-NS Unified Web Maintenance Console" setup file to your PC.
2. Double-click the setup file to run the installer.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions provided by the installation wizard.

The Programme Launcher

After Off-line Web Maintenance Console has been installed, you can run the Programme Launcher from the
Windows Start menu.

PC Programming Manual 29
1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode

Off-line Web Maintenance Console Programme Launcher

Note
Off-line Web Maintenance Console cannot be used when the PBX Web Manager for Unified PC
Maintenance Console (for KX-TDA/KX-TDE/KX-NCP PBXs) is running on the PC.
To disable the PBX Web Manager:
1. In the Unified PC Maintenance Console launcher, click Option→PBX Web Manager.
2. Deselect the Enable Web Server check box.
3. Click OK.

Starting a New System Data File

You can start a new session of PBX programming in Off-line mode. You can then programme PBX settings
in Off-line Web Maintenance Console and then save them to a file you can later upload to the PBX.

Note
Since selecting this option creates a blank system data file, uploading this file to the PBX will overwrite
all previous settings. Use this function only when necessary.
To create a new system data file
1. In the Programme Launcher, click New -Offline Mode. The Off-line Web Maintenance Console login
screen will be displayed in your PC’s Web browser. For details about the login screen, see
2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console.
2. Log in to Off-line Web Maintenance Console using the Installer level account and password to start the
Easy Setup Wizard. For details, see 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard.

To convert a KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200’s or KX-TE’s system data file to KX-NS500

KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 or KX-TE system data can be converted for use with the KX-NS500 by using the
Database Converter.

30 PC Programming Manual
 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode

1. In the Programme Launcher, click Database Converter. The Database Converter screen will be
displayed in your PC.
For details, refer to "Converting KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 or KX-TE series System Data for Use with the
KX-NS500" in "5.3 Starting Web Maintenance Console" in the Installation Manual.

Opening an Existing System Data File

This operation will load a PBX settings system data file from your PC for programming in Off-line mode. The
system data file can be a file created earlier using Off-line Web Maintenance Console, or a system data file
downloaded from a PBX. You can then programme PBX settings using Off-line Web Maintenance Console
and then save the settings to a file you can later upload to the PBX.
When you use the following procedure to open a system file created using a previous version of the PBX
software, a confirmation screen will be displayed asking whether you want to convert the system data to the
latest software version. Click Yes to convert the data and proceed with Off-line programming.
To open a system data file
1. In the Programme Launcher, click Open -Offline Mode.
The Open dialogue box will be displayed.
2. Navigate to the folder containing the system data file you want to open.
3. Select the file.
4. Click Open, and then click OK.
The file will be loaded and the Off-line Web Maintenance Console login screen will be displayed in your
PC’s Web browser. For details about the login screen, see 2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance
Console.
5. Log in using an account name and password associated with the system data file that was loaded.

Note
User (User) level accounts cannot be used to log in to Off-line Web Maintenance Console. For details
about account types, refer to 2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts.

Connecting in On-line Mode using the Programme Launcher

You can also use the Programme Launcher to log in to Web Maintenance Console in On-line mode. You can
save the IP address and port information for each PBX in a profile. This feature is useful when there are
multiple PBXs in your network. For details about connecting to the PBX in On-line mode, see Connecting
to Web Maintenance Console (On-line Mode) in 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console.
To connect in On-line mode using the Programme Launcher
1. In the Programme Launcher, click Connect -Online Mode(C).
The Connection dialogue box will be displayed.
2. Select a profile from the drop-down list, or enter the IP address and Port manually.
3. Click Connect.
The Web Maintenance Console login screen for connecting directly to the PBX in On-line mode will be
displayed in your PC’s Web browser. For details about the login screen, see 2.1.3 Logging in to Web
Maintenance Console.

Editing and Printing Terminal Labels

You can create and print key label sheets that match the Flexible Button settings and then use the labels on
extensions. In the Programme Launcher, click Terminal Label Print. The screen for editing and printing key
labels will be displayed. For details, see 1.2.2.1 Editing and Printing Terminal Labels in Off-line Mode.

PC Programming Manual 31
1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode

Options
You can specify the display language of the Programme Launcher, as well as set the web server port
number for Off-line Web Maintenance Console. In the Programme Launcher, click Options and change the
settings as necessary.
Adding Additional Languages
Additional display language files may be made available. To add a display language not listed in the
language selection menu, select Additional language, and then click Browse to specify the language file.
After specifying a language file, click OK to change to the selected language.

VoIP Test Tool

Click the VoIP Test Tool button to launch the VoIP Test Tool. This tool is identical to the VoIP Test Tool
included with the Unified PC Maintenance Console for KX-TDA/KX-TDE/KX-NCP PBXs.

IP Terminal Utility
Click the IP Terminal button to launch the IP Terminal setup utility. This utility is identical to the IP Terminal
utility included with the Unified PC Maintenance Console for KX-TDA/KX-TDE/KX-NCP PBXs.

IP Trace File Converter

Click the IP Trace File Converter button to launch the IP Trace File Converter utility. This utility will convert
locally-saved IP trace file data collected by the system utilities listed below into a format that can be
analysed by general packet analysis software tools.
– 7.4.2 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-IPGW Protocol Trace
– 7.4.3 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-SIPGW Protocol Trace
Others
Others is a tool used to edit files saved by using the Export tool. Copy files from the Others folder to edit
them. After saving edited files, import them to the PBX.
The following types of data types can be edited.
• Feature – Speed Dial and Caller ID
• Incoming Call – DDI/DID Table
• Wired Extension
• PS Extension
For details, see "6.6 Tool—Import" and "6.7 Tool—Export".

Programming in Off-line Mode

Once you have logged in to Off-line Web Maintenance Console, programming is very similar to On-line
mode. The title bar will be coloured differently from when in On-line mode:

When programming in On-line mode:

When programming in Off-line mode:

Some items are not programmable when in Off-line mode, and those items will be greyed out. Some tools
and utilities are also not available in Off-line mode. For details, refer to 2.1.2 Access Levels.

32 PC Programming Manual
 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode

Notice
• In Off-line mode, changes made in 6.8 Tool—Screen Customise will not be reflected in On-line
mode. This is because these settings are not stored in the system data file (DFSYS).
• When you load the system data file to the PBX, you must install any required activation keys in On-
line mode. Activation keys are required for mailboxes. Settings such as mailbox passwords will be
cleared if the number of activation keys for mailboxes is insufficient.

Uploading Programmed Settings to the PBX

When programming in Off-line mode, clicking the icon will open a save dialogue box. Specify a location
and file name for the system data file. This file can then be uploaded to the PBX in On-line mode using the
"File Transfer PC to PBX" utility. For details, refer to 7.2.1 Utility—File—File Transfer PC to PBX.

Notice
• If the PC running the Off-line Web Maintenance Console is shut down, the Web browser is closed, or
the user logs out, any changes that have not been saved will be lost. Be sure to regularly save data
while programming.
• When you upload a system setting file to the PBX, all existing settings on the PBX will be overwritten
with the settings in the file, including settings you may not want to change. To change only specific
settings in Off-line mode, follow the procedure below:
1. Use the "File Transfer PBX to PC" utility in On-line mode to save a file with the PBX’s current
settings. For details, refer to 7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer PBX to PC.
2. Use the Open -Offline Mode command in the Programme Launcher to load the PBX system file
in Off-line mode.
For details, refer to Opening an Existing System Data File above.
3. Perform the desired programming in Off-line mode, and then click the icon to save the
modified system settings to your PC.
4. Log in to Web Maintenance Console in On-line mode, and then use the "File Transfer PC to
PBX" utility to upload the modified data to the PBX.

1.2.2.1 Editing and Printing Terminal Labels in Off-line Mode

Follow the procedure below to print key label sheets for use with your system’s extensions and DSS
consoles.
1. In On-line mode, export PBX system data to your PC, and then open the exported data in Off-line mode.
a. In On-line mode, use the File Transfer PBX to PC utility to save your system’s data and settings to
your PC. For details, see 7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer PBX to PC.
b. Use the Programme Launcher to open the system data in Off-line mode. For details, see Opening
an Existing System Data File in 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode.
2. In Off-line mode, export the key settings to a CSV file.
a. After logging in to Off-line Web Maintenance Console, access the screen from which key settings will
be exported:
– For extensions: Setup → PBX Configuration → Extension → Wired Extension → Flexible
Button
– For DSS consoles: Setup → PBX Configuration → Extension → DSS Console
b. Click Export, specify a location to save the flexible key settings data, and then click OK.

PC Programming Manual 33
1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode

Note
The Export button is available only when in Off-line mode.
3. Open the exported CSV data in the Terminal Label Print utility, and then edit the label settings as
necessary.
a. In the Programme Launcher, click Terminal Label Print.
b. Select Open. Specify the exported CSV file in the dialogue that is displayed, and then click OK.
c. Edit the following settings as necessary:
Label Specifies the label that will be printed next to the corresponding
button. (Max. 20 characters)
Colour of Font Specifies the colour used for the label text for the corresponding
button. Click Choose to select a colour.
Colour of Background Specifies the colour used for the label background for the
corresponding button. Click Choose to select a colour.
Font Size Specifies the size of the font on the label for the corresponding
button. (Size value range: 4–15)
Telephone Type Specifies the model number of the telephone to determine the
size and shape of the label template.

4. Once the settings have been configured, click Key Label Print on the settings screen. Follow the Key
Label Print Wizard to print the key labels or to output the data as a PDF file.

34 PC Programming Manual
 Section 2
Introduction of Web Maintenance Console

This section serves as reference operating instructions

when using Web Maintenance Console to programme
the PBX.

PC Programming Manual 35
2.1 Introduction

2.1 Introduction
2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts
User account levels
Access to Web Maintenance Console requires a login name and password, which are assigned to accounts
in the PBX. Also, access to Web Maintenance Console is controlled by different levels of authorisation. The
Installer level is the highest authorisation level. There are also two levels for end users, Administrators and
Users. The usage for each level and number of accounts available for each level are as follows:
Level Description Number of Accounts
Installer For dealers and system installers 1
User For on-site managers 8
(Administrator)
User (User) For end users 492

Differences between user levels

• Installer
The installer level account is the highest authorisation account of the three levels. This account level is to
be used by dealers or system installers. All system programming settings are available, and this account
is used for overall system installation and maintenance. The installer level can be used to programme
which menus in Web Maintenance Console are accessible by Administrator accounts.
• User (Administrator)
Administrator accounts are for general maintenance of users and user settings. This account level is used
by on-site managers and network administrators. Administrator level accounts can use Web Maintenance
Console to add users or programme user settings.
User (Administrator) accounts are intended for maintenance functions only. To manage their own PBX
user settings, on-site managers and network administrators should create their own User (User) accounts
for programming.
• User (User)
User accounts are for individual users of the PBX system. Users can use Web Maintenance Console to
change their extension settings, speed dial settings, or other personal settings by accessing a limited
number of pre-defined menus.

Note
• User (User) accounts cannot be used when programming in Off-line mode. For details, refer to
1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode.

Account Login Names and Passwords

Each account has a login name and password and are specified as follows. All account passwords are set
in Web Maintenance Console (see 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User).

36 PC Programming Manual
 2.1.2 Access Levels

Level Login Name Password

Installer INSTALLER 4-16 character password, using a-z, A-Z,
and 0-9 (case sensitive).
For an initialised PBX that has not yet been
set up, the default Installer level password is
"1234". You will be prompted to choose a
new password for the Installer level account
when the Easy Setup Wizard is run (see
2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard).
Administrator 1-16 character login name, using a-z, 4-16 character password, using a-z, A-Z,
A-Z, and 0-9 (case sensitive). Set and 0-9 (case sensitive). Set during account
User
during account creation. creation.
(see 8.2.1 Users—Add User— (see 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single
Single User) User)

For more information about creating and managing end user accounts, see 8 Users.

CAUTION
To the Administrator or Installer regarding account passwords
1. Please provide all system passwords to the customer.
2. To avoid unauthorised access and possible abuse of the PBX, keep the passwords secret, and
inform the customer of the importance of the passwords, and the possible dangers if they become
known to others.
3. The PBX has no passwords set initially. For security, select an installer password as soon as the
PBX system is installed at the site.
4. Change the passwords periodically.
5. It is strongly recommended that passwords of 10 numbers or characters be used for maximum
protection against unauthorised access.

2.1.2 Access Levels

Access to menu options within Web Maintenance Console is restricted depending on the level of the
account and the current programming mode (see Programming Modes in 1.1.2 Introduction). When a
menu option is limited to certain access levels, this is noted in this manual in the initial description of that
menu option, for example:
"This option is only available at Installer level."

The options available for each programming mode and access level are shown below.
The access levels are abbreviated as follows:
U: User (User); A: User (Administrator); I: Installer

Note
User (User) accounts cannot be used when programming in Off-line mode.
A check mark indicates that the menu option is available for that access level.

Home Screen
Menu Option Off-line On-line
A I U A I
System Information ü ü ü ü ü

PC Programming Manual 37
2.1.2 Access Levels

Menu Option Off-line On-line

A I U A I
Logout ü ü ü ü ü

Tool
Menu Option Off-line On-line
A I U A I
System Data Backup to USB ü ü
System Data Backup to NAS ü ü
BRI Automatic Configuration ü
NDSS Link Data Clear ü
Call Pickup for My Group ü ü
Extension List View ü ü ü ü ü
Import→Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID ü ü ü ü
Import→Incoming Call - DDI/DID Table ü ü
Import→ARS - Leading Digit ü ü
Import→ARS - Except Code ü ü
Import→ARS - Routing Plan ü ü
Import→Wired Extension ü ü
Import→PS Extension ü ü
Import→Quick Dial ü ü
Import→SIP Extension ü ü
Import→V-IPGW GW Settings ü ü
Import→V-IPGW DN2IP ü ü
Import→V-SIPGW Settings ü ü
Import→V-SIPGW Provider ü ü
Export→Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID ü ü ü ü
Export→Incoming Call - DDI/DID Table ü ü
Export→ARS - Leading Digit ü ü
Export→ARS - Except Code ü ü
Export→ARS - Routing Plan ü ü
Export→Wired Extension ü ü
Export→PS Extension ü ü
Export→Quick Dial ü ü
Export→SIP Extension ü ü
Export→V-IPGW GW Settings ü ü
Export→V-IPGW DN2IP ü ü

38 PC Programming Manual
 2.1.2 Access Levels

Menu Option Off-line On-line

A I U A I
Export→V-SIPGW Settings ü ü
Export→V-SIPGW Provider ü ü
Screen Customise ü ü
UM Data Backup ü
UM Data Restore ü
UM Backup History ü
DXDP All OUS ü
Contact information ü ü ü ü
UT Option Setting ü ü
URL Information ü ü

Utility
Menu Option Off-line On-line
A I U A I
Diagnosis→Card Diagnosis ü ü
Diagnosis→Ping ü
File Transfer PC to PBX ü
File Transfer PBX to PC ü
File View ü
File Delete ü
Message File Transfer PC to PBX ü
Message File Transfer PBX to PC ü
Error Log ü ü
Syslog ü
Web-MC Event Log ü ü
UM System Log ü
ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace ü
V-IPGW Protocol Trace ü
V-SIPGW Protocol Trace ü
CS Status Monitor→Air Sync Group ü
CS Status Monitor→LAN Sync Group ü
UM System Trace (Internal) ü
E1 Signalling Bit Monitor ü
E1 Line Trace ü
Digital Trunk Error Report ü

PC Programming Manual 39
2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console

Menu Option Off-line On-line

A I U A I
IP Extension Statistical Information ü
UM View Reports ü ü
E-mail Report ü ü
IP-CS Information → IP-CS Statistical Information ü
IP-CS Information → LAN Sync Information ü
Activation Key Installation ü
Email Notification—Alert ü ü
Email Notification—System Analysis ü
Email Notification—Test Email ü
UM Command ü
UM – System Prompts Customisation ü ü
Automatic Two-way Recording ü ü ü ü
UM - System Maintenance ü ü
CS-Web Connection ü ü

2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console

After establishing a connection to Web Maintenance Console (see 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance
Console), the login window is displayed, and a login name and password must be entered. If this is the first
time to log in to Web Maintenance Console, and the PBX is in its initialised, factory default state, you must
log in using the Installer level account to begin the Easy Setup Wizard (see 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard).
For information about account names and passwords, see 2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts.

Login Screen

Login Restrictions
• Up to 32 User (User) and User (Administrator) level accounts may log in at one time to Web Maintenance
Console in On-line mode.
• Only 1 user may log in using the Installer level account at a time. If someone using the Installer level
account is logged in to Web Maintenance Console and is making changes, and another user logs in using
the Installer level account, the user logging in may override the other logged-in user so that programming

40 PC Programming Manual
 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard

can be performed (a warning screen will be displayed for the user that is about to override the currently
logged-in user).
• Users can view only menus and setting items they may access according to their account level. For User
(Administrator) level accounts, the items that can be viewed can be set by the Installer level account. For
details, see 6.8 Tool—Screen Customise.
• If two logged-in users change the same setting, the change made last will be the effective setting.
• If a user attempts to log in, but enters an incorrect password three times, the failure is recorded in the
error log of the PBX and the user may not attempt to log in again for a 5-minute period.

2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard

In the Easy Setup Wizard, you will configure the mandatory settings required for the PBX. When you log in
to Web Maintenance Console for a PBX that is in its initialised, factory default state, the Easy Setup Wizard
for that PBX will launch automatically.
You must log in using the Installer level account name and password.
– The Installer level account name is "INSTALLER".
– The default Installer level account password is "1234".
After logging in, the Easy Setup Wizard welcome screen is displayed. Select a language, and then click
Install. Refer to 5.4.1 Easy Setup Wizard in the Installation Manual for detailed and important information
about configuring the PBX using the Easy Setup Wizard.

2.1.5 Card Status

Certain tools, utilities and settings require that the target card be set to out-of-service (OUS) or in-service
(INS) status before the operation is carried out. Where required, this is noted in the description of each item.
Card status changes can be performed only in On-line mode (see Programming Modes in
1.1.2 Introduction).
• "In service" means that the card is installed correctly in the PBX, and is capable of being used normally.
• "Out of service" means that the card is installed correctly in the PBX, but has been temporarily removed
from use. This allows settings to be modified or software to be upgraded.
• "Fault" means that the card is not installed in the PBX correctly, or is not functioning correctly. For more
information, see the Installation Manual.
For details about how to change the status of a card, see To change the status (INS/OUS) of a card (On-
line mode only) in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

2.1.6 Extension Number Setting

Many screens within the Maintenance Console software allow you to select extensions as part of
programming various features (for example, as members of a group). These screens use a standard
window to make selecting multiple extensions easy, accessed by clicking a button. This section explains
how to use this Extension Number Setting window.

To select multiple extension numbers, select the type of extension to display, highlight the extensions you
wish to add, then click the Add button. When finished, click OK. Data for the selected extensions will be
added to the first free spaces on the original screen.

PC Programming Manual 41
2.1.6 Extension Number Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Selects the types of extension numbers to display in Wired Extension,
Type Extension Numbers & Names List. Multiple items can Portable Station,
be selected. Items that are not available are shown with ICD Group, PS Ring
a grey checkbox. Group, OGM
(DISA), External
Pager, UM / VM
Extension, UM
Group, VM(DPT)
Group, VM(DTMF)
Group
Extension Displays all available extensions of the types selected in Matching
Numbers & Extension Type, and names. Click entries to select extensions
Names List them, and click the Add button when finished, to add the
selected extensions. To deselect an entry, click it again.
Available Specifies which fields in the original form to add Available fields
Column extension data to. For example, if both extension
numbers and names can be entered in the original form,
it is possible to specify that extension name data not be
transferred, by deselecting that field here.
To select or deselect a field, click its name.
Selected Displays the extensions that have been selected to be Selected extensions
Extension added to member data. To remove an extension from this
List list, click it to select it and click Delete.

42 PC Programming Manual
 2.2 Logout

2.2 Logout
To logout of Web Maintenance Console, click the button to end the programming session and return to
the Login screen. When this option is chosen, system data is automatically saved from the temporary
memory (DRAM) of the PBX to the System Memory.

To logout
1. Click the button.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
2. Click Yes.

Note
• If the PC running the Web browser that is connected to Web Maintenance Console is shut down, or
the Web browser is closed, any changes that have not been saved to the System Memory will be lost.
To save settings while programming, click the button on the Home screen. Always end your
programming session by clicking the button.
• If you are logged in but do not perform any operations in Web Maintenance Console for 60 minutes
(default value), you will be automatically logged out.

PC Programming Manual 43
2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

This section provides answers to some common questions about using the Maintenance Console software
to programme the PBX. The information is divided into the following topics:
Title Description
Connection Connecting to the PBX using Maintenance Console.
Maintenance Console Software Using the Maintenance Console software.
Card Status Changing the status (INS/OUS) of cards.
Portable Stations Setting up portable stations, including registration and deregistration.
Numbering Changing the numbering plan for the PBX, or numbers of individual
extensions or features.
Saving Modified Data Safely saving PBX data edited with Maintenance Console.
Setting Features Setting up individual features.

Connection
Q The Maintenance Console cannot connect to the PBX via a LAN connection.
A • Is the PC connected to the LAN?
• Have the IP address and port number of the PBX been set correctly? For more details, see
27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports.
• Is the login name and password correct?

Q Can I perform initial setup of the PBX without being connected to the PBX?
A • Yes. This is possible in Off-line mode.
Create a new system data file in Off-line mode (see 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line
Mode), modify settings as necessary, and then upload this file to the PBX later (see 7.2.1 Utility
—File—File Transfer PC to PBX).

Maintenance Console Software

Q How do I confirm the software version of the PBX or installed cards?
A • From 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot, place the mouse cursor over the
System Property button and click Site. The software version of the PBX is displayed on this
screen.
• From 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot, place the mouse cursor over the
System Property button and click Slot Summary. Summary information is displayed for all
cards installed in the PBX.

Q Not all of the characters of a setting can be displayed because the column is too narrow.
A • Move the mouse to the line between the names of 2 setting items, at the top of the table.
The pointer will change to a double arrow. Click and drag the line to the right until all characters
are displayed.

Card Status
Q The status of a new card will not change to "INS".

44 PC Programming Manual
 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

A • With the new card installed, does the total number of extensions or trunks exceed the maximum
supported by the PBX?
• Is the type of card installed in the slot different from the card type set as "Pre-Install" for that slot?
Confirm that the correct card is installed in the slot.
• Is the card firmly and fully installed in the slot? Confirm that the card is installed correctly in the
slot.
• Confirm that the card is not damaged.

Q I cannot change an LCO port to INS status.

A • Is the card installed in the appropriate slot?
• Is the card installed in the correct slot, but not functioning correctly?
Check the condition of the card.
• Is the card itself in INS status?
Set it to INS status.
• Is a trunk line connected to the appropriate port?
• Is the port in FAULT status, even though a trunk is connected?
Run diagnosis on the relevant slot.

Q How do I prevent newly installed cards automatically being changed to "INS"?

A • Change New Card Installation—Card Status for any Card in 9.36 PBX Configuration—[1-3]
Configuration—Option from "In Service (INS)" to "Out of Service (OUS)".

Portable Stations
Q I cannot register Portable Stations using the method described in 9.35 PBX Configuration—
[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station.
A • Do the PINs (Personal Identification Numbers) of the PBX and the Portable Station match?
Confirm that they are the same.
• Is the Portable Station within transmission range of the CS?
• Has the Portable Station previously been registered at another location?
It is not possible to register a Portable Station at 2 locations, so use the Forced De-registration
option to delete the previous registration.

Q I cannot delete the extension number of a Portable Station.

A • First, de-register the Portable Station itself, and then delete the extension number.

Q I cannot de-register a Portable Station.

A • Is the Portable Station turned on? If not, turn it on.
• Is the Portable Station within transmission range of the CS? If not, move it closer to the CS and
try the de-registration operation again.

Q The Portable Station I want to de-register is broken, and will not turn on, or is not available,
or the registration information was deleted first from the Portable Station, so it cannot be de-
registered.
A • The Portable Station can be forcibly de-registered by following the procedure shown in Forced
De-registration of 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station.

PC Programming Manual 45
2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

Q I changed the extension number of a Portable Station, but the display of the Portable Station
still shows the old extension number.
A • Turn the Portable Station off and back on again, to force it to re-register its location.

Q I changed the FCO of a Portable Station, but the display of the Portable Station still shows
the old FCO.
A • Turn the Portable Station off and back on again, to force it to re-register its location.

Q If I delete the extension number of a Portable Station, and then turn the Portable Station off
and back on again, it does not function correctly.
A • Do not delete the extension number of the Portable Station, as this information is necessary for it
to operate.

Numbering
Q How do I change the extension number of a wired extension?
A • Change the extension number of the target port to the new number, and click Apply. Next, set
the port to OUS status, and then back to INS status.

Q I changed the extension number of a wired extension while the extension was engaged in a
call, but the display still shows the previous extension number.
A • The extension number will not change while the extension is in use. When the conversation is
finished, set the port to OUS status, and then back to INS status.

Q How do I change the extension numbering plan from 3-digit numbers to 4-digit numbers?
A • Perform the following steps:
1. Open the 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main screen.
2. Enter a 2-digit number in Leading Number, or change No. of Additional Digits from "x" to
"xx".
For more details, see What is the procedure to modify the Numbering Plan? in
Numbering.

Q How do I set a 3-digit numbering plan?

A • Select 3-digits for Select Default value of Numbering Plan in the Easy Setup Wizard. If you
want to change to a 3-digit extension numbering plan after the PBX system is already running
using a 4-digit extension numbering plan, follow the procedure below. There are 2 methods of
creating a 3-digit numbering plan, using 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—
Numbering Plan—Main:
1. Set the leading number to be 2 digits, with one additional digit. This method allows a
maximum of 10 extensions.
Example: Leading Number = 10; No. of Additional Digits = x
In this example, extension numbers 100 to 109 can be used.
2. Set the leading number to be one digit, with 2 additional digits. This method allows a
maximum of 100 extensions.
Example: Leading Number = 1; No. of Additional Digits = xx
In this example, extension numbers 100 to 199 can be used.
For more details, see What is the procedure to modify the Numbering Plan? in Numbering.

46 PC Programming Manual
 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

Q What is the procedure to modify the Numbering Plan?

A • Perform the following steps:
1. Confirm that the Numbering Plan you will change is not currently being used by any
extensions (see 6.5 Tool—Extension List View).
If it is being used by extensions, temporarily change the extension numbers of those
extensions to that of another numbering plan, or delete the extension number (see
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
and 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension
Settings).
2. Clear the Leading Number cell.
3. Click Apply.
4. Modify the No. of Additional Digits cell as required.
5. Click Apply.
6. Enter the desired value in the Leading Number cell.
7. Click Apply.
8. Set all extension ports to OUS status.
9. On the relevant screens, set the extension numbers of extensions to the desired values.
10. Set all extension ports back to INS status.

Q When modifying the Numbering Plan, I cannot change the Leading Number.
A • It is not possible to use the same Leading Number for 2 extension blocks, or to use a number
that could possibly overlap with another Leading Number.
So, for example, if "2" is already set as a Leading Number it is not possible to set "21" as another
Leading Number because of the possible overlap of extension numbers.
The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by:
– A feature number
– Another extension block
– A Dial setting (see 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table)
– Quick Dialling (see 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick
Dial)
In any of these cases, choose another number.

Q When modifying the Numbering Plan, how do I set a 1-digit extension number?

PC Programming Manual 47
2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

A • Perform the following steps:

1. Clear the Leading Number cell.
2. Click Apply.
3. Set No. of Additional Digits to "None".
4. Click Apply.
5. Enter the desired value in the Leading Number cell.
6. Click Apply.
7. Set all extension ports to OUS status.
8. On the relevant screens, set the extension numbers of extensions to the desired values.
9. Set all extension ports back to INS status.

Q How do I change a feature number?

A • Perform the following steps:
1. Open the 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main screen
and navigate to the Features tab.
2. Change the value in the Dial cell of the desired feature.
3. Click Apply.

Q I cannot change a feature number.

A • It is not possible to use the same number for 2 items.
The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by:
– A feature number
– An extension
– A Dial setting (see 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table)
– Quick Dialling (see 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick
Dial)
In any of these cases, choose another number.

Q How do I change the code used to access another PBX?

A • Perform the following steps:
1. Open the 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main screen.
2. Select the Other PBX Extension tab.
3. Change the value in the Dial cell of the desired feature.
4. Click Apply.

Q I cannot change an Other PBX Extension code.

48 PC Programming Manual
 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

A • It is not possible to use the same number for 2 items.

The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by:
– A feature number
– An extension
– A Dial setting (see 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table)
– Quick Dialling (see 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick
Dial)
In any of these cases, choose another number.

Q I cannot change a feature number on the B/NA DND Call Feature screen.
A • The number you are trying to store is already being used by another call feature.
Please choose a different number.

Q How do I prevent extension numbers being automatically assigned to a newly installed card?
A • Change New Card Installation—Automatic Extension Number Set for Extension Card in the
9.36 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option screen from "Enable" to "Disable".

Saving Modified Data

Q Modified settings have not been updated in the PBX.
A • Click Apply or OK in the main screen.

Q If I reset the PBX directly after modifying settings, the modified settings are not updated in
the PBX.
A • When you click Apply, the settings are updated in the PBX, but are not yet saved to the System
Memory. If system data is not saved to the System Memory, the PBX will restore the data that
was last saved to the card in the event that the PBX is reset, or power is turned off and back on
again.
Therefore, before resetting the PBX, click the button on the Home screen to save the system
data to the System Memory. Also, when you finish a programming session, be sure to click the
button to logout and save the system data to the System Memory.

Q After reinitialising the PBX, I restored system data from a previous backup.
However, some of the settings have not been restored to their previous values.
A • The following setting data is not saved to the System Memory, so will be deleted when the PBX is
initialised. This data is stored in the PBX’s battery backup memory.
– Advice of Charge (AOC)
– Hospitality guest billing data
– Timed Reminder
– ICD Group login status
(All extensions are set to Login by default.)
– Remote Extension Dial Lock

Setting Features
Q How do I change the dialling mode of an analogue trunk?

PC Programming Manual 49
2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

A • From the 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port

screen, change the Dialling Mode setting of the target port to "DTMF" or "Pulse", as required.

Q How do I set disconnect detection (CPC Detection) for an analogue trunk?

A • From the 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
screen, modify the CPC Signal Detection Time—Outgoing, Incoming setting of the target port.
The required value varies by carrier. Transmission and reception can be set separately.

Q What settings do I change to enable use of an extension ISDN telephone?

A • From the 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
screen, set the Port Type of the port you want to use to "EXT".

Q How do I connect to another PBX using QSIG?

A • From the 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port or
9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port screen, set the
Port Type of the port you want to use to either "QSIG-Slave" or "QSIG-Master".

Q How do I edit a Class of Service, or create a new Class of Service?

A • Class of Service feature restrictions can be set from the 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1]
System—Class of Service—COS Settings screen.

Q How do I restrict calls between 2 extensions?

A • Calls between extensions can be restricted from the 10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3] System
—Class of Service—Internal Call Block screen. Click in the relevant cells to select the COS
levels whose extensions are blocked from calling each other.

Q How do I restrict trunk calls made by extensions?

A • Trunk calls made by extensions can be restricted from the 10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2]
System—Class of Service—External Call Block screen. Click in the relevant cells to select the
trunk groups that cannot be used by extensions associated with a particular COS in each time
mode.
To prevent extensions associated with a COS from making trunk calls, set all trunk groups for
that COS to "Block" (blue).

Q How do I modify the hold operation for SLTs?

A • It is possible to choose how to hold a line and transfer a call with an SLT using the SLT—SLT
Hold Mode option on the 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options screen.
For more details, see "2.13.1 Call Hold" of the Feature Manual.

Q How do I set up an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) group to receive trunk calls directly?

50 PC Programming Manual
 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

A • Perform the following steps:

1. On the 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—
Group Settings screen, enter the floating extension number you chose for the ICD group in
the Floating Extension Number cell.
2. Click Apply.
3. On the 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group
—Group Settings—Member List screen, select the ICD group you created from the ICD
Group No. drop-down list.
4. Enter the extension numbers of member extensions in the Extension Number column.
5. Click Apply.
6. On the DIL tab of the 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table &
Port Settings screen, enter the floating extension number of the ICD group as the DIL
Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night of each time mode.
7. Modify other settings as required from the Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group
submenu.

Q How do I set the queuing operation for an Incoming Call Distribution group?
A • Perform the following steps:
1. On the 11.5.2 PBX Configuration—[3-5-2] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—
Queuing Time Table screen, set the actions as required for each queuing table.
2. On the 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—
Group Settings screen, from the Queuing Time Table tab, select the number of the
Queuing Time Table to use in each time mode.

Q How do I add an extension as a member of an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) group?

A • Perform the following steps:
1. On the 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group
—Group Settings—Member List screen, from the ICD Group No. drop-down list, select
the group you want to modify.
The ICD group must have an extension number set.
2. Enter the extension number of the extension you want to add in a blank cell of the
Extension Number column.
3. Set Delayed Ring as necessary.
4. Click Apply.
Note that it is necessary to set the extension number of the ICD group in advance.

Q I have set FWD through system programming, but calls are still not being forwarded.
A • Perform the following steps:
1. Check that the Forward / DND settings of the target extension on the 12.1.2 PBX
Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND or 12.2.2 PBX
Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND screen are set to one of
the forwarding settings.
2. Create a FWD button on the target extension if one does not already exist.
3. Press the FWD button so that it changes to FWD status.

PC Programming Manual 51
2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

52 PC Programming Manual
 Section 3
Web Maintenance Console Home Screen

This section explains how to setup the main PBX and

other connected PBXs from the Home Screen of Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 53
3.1 Home Screen

3.1 Home Screen

When you log in to Web Maintenance Console, the home screen is displayed. For information about
connecting to Web Maintenance Console and logging in, see 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console.
The home screen of Web Maintenance Console is divided into several areas, as shown below:

2
1 3

1. Logged in Account Level

The logged in account level is displayed.
2. Menu Buttons
Provides access to the three main components of Web Maintenance Console:
Button Description
Clicking this button will load the Home Screen. From the Home Screen, you can:
• View the Main unit configuration and the status of cards.
For more information, see 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Home Screen
Clicking this button will display the Maintenance Screen tree view items. From the
Maintenance Screen, you can:
• Check the status and equipment of the PBX
• Backup or update PBX system files
Maintenance • Use tools and reports to monitor and analyse system usage
Screen For more information, see Maintenance Screen Tree View Items below.

54 PC Programming Manual
 3.1 Home Screen

Button Description
Clicking this button will display the Setup Screen tree view items. From the Setup
Screen, you can:
• Configure PBX hardware and virtual cards
• Programme settings for extensions and call handling
Setup Screen • Configure network settings and auxiliary PBX functions
• Configure the Unified Messaging (UM) system
For more information, see Setup Screen Tree View Items below.

3. Web Maintenance Console Features

Clicking these buttons provides features for Web Maintenance Console, as follows:
Button Description
Clicking this button will save any changes made to settings to the System Memory.
Programming changes that are not saved will be lost if the PBX is reset or is turned
off. Changes may also be lost if Web Maintenance Console is suddenly terminated
Save Data or the PC running Web Maintenance Console loses power unexpectedly. Be sure to
save the data periodically while programming, especially during long programming
sessions.
Clicking this button displays the Web Maintenance Console software version,
copyright notices, and licences.

System Note
Information Licence information is not displayed when programming in Off-line mode.
Clicking this button will save any programming changes to the PBX’s System
Memory and log you out of Web Maintenance Console. For more information, see
2.2 Logout.
Logout
Clicking this button will display the Extension List View in a separate window. For
details, see 6.5 Tool—Extension List View.

Extension
List View

PC Programming Manual 55
3.1 Home Screen

Button Description
Clicking this button will switch the tab display. There are two types of tab display,
Tab Mode and Single Mode. When Tab Mode is used, items clicked in the tree are
displayed in new tabs. When Single Mode is used, the current tab displays the
clicked item.

Note
Tab
Selection • When the Menu button is clicked or when you log out in Tab Mode, all child
tabs are closed.
• When a parent tab is closed, all of its child tabs are closed.
• When Tab Mode is used:
– Up to 10 tabs can be opened including the parent tab.
– Tabs are displayed according to the tab settings of the browser*1 used.
*1 To enable Tab Mode for Internet Explorer, select Tools → Internet Options from the menu
bar, open the General tab and under Tabs, and then click Settings.
In the displayed window, check “Always switch to new tabs when they are created”, and then
select “Always open pop-ups in a new tab”.

Notice
Do not reload the web page during in Tab Mode. Doing so will close all child
tabs.

4. Tree View
When the Maintenance Screen or Setup Screen is selected, the tree view is displayed. The tree view is
used to display PBX setting items. Setting items are listed in categories, and by clicking items in the
tree, setting items are displayed to the right in the settings programming area. Some tree items have
sub-categories with additional options and settings. Clicking a sub-category will open an additional
layer of settings. Below is a summary of the tree view menu items for the Setup Screen and the
Maintenance Screen.

Maintenance Screen Tree View Items

Item Primary Functions
Status • Check the status of the PBX’s system hardware
• Check the status of PBX equipment (PSs, CSs, etc.)
• Check the status of extensions used by the Unified Messaging system
For details, see 4 Status.
System Control • Download and update PBX software files
• Manage music on hold (MOH) data
• Reset or shutdown the system
For details, see 5 System Control.
Tool • Backup system data to a USB memory device
• View a list of PBX extensions
• Import and export PBX settings and user information
• Backup or restore Unified Messaging data
For details, see 6 Tool.

56 PC Programming Manual
 3.1 Home Screen

Item Primary Functions

Utility • Perform tests for PBX cards and network connections
• Transfer files between the PBX and a connected PC
• View reports, error logs, event logs, and programme update logs
• Monitor and trace PBX communications and protocols
• Manage activation keys
For details, see 7 Utility.

Setup Screen Tree View Items

Item Primary Functions
Users • Manage, view, and add PBX user profiles and account information
For details, see 8 Users.
PBX Configuration • Configure PBX hardware settings for cards, equipment, and networking
• Configure network-wide programming such as BGM and Class of Service
• Configure dialling features, call routing, and incoming call settings
• Configure call logging (SMDR) and other PBX maintenance items
For details, see 9 PBX Configuration—[1] Configuration to 19 PBX
Configuration—[11] Maintenance.
UM Configuration • Configure Unified Messaging mailboxes and voice mail subscriber settings
• Configure service settings and system parameters
• Configure hardware options
For details, see 20 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings to 26 UM
Configuration—[7] System Security.
Network Service • Configure server and client features for the PBX
• Configure connections settings and network security
For details, see 27 Network Service.

Standard Buttons
There are standard buttons that are displayed on many screens within the Maintenance Console.
The standard buttons are as follows:
Button Function
OK Temporarily implements changes to the system’s memory (DRAM) and
closes the current screen.
Cancel Abandons changes and closes the current screen.
Apply Temporarily implements changes to the system’s memory (DRAM) and
remains on the same screen.

Copying and Pasting Data

Many setting items in Web Maintenance Console can be copied and pasted to other items on the same
screen. When the icon is displayed, clicking it will open a menu where you can specify the copy source
and the paste destinations.
1. On a programming screen, click . The copy window will be displayed.

PC Programming Manual 57
3.1 Home Screen

Note
The icon may not be displayed for some programming screens.
2. Select the copy source from the Copy From drop-down menu.
3. In Copy To, select one or more paste destinations. Hold down the "Ctrl" key and click to select
destinations one at a time, or hold down the "Shift" key and click to select a range of destinations.
4. In Items, select one or more items to copy from the source selected in Copy From. Hold down the "Ctrl"
key and click to select items one at a time, or hold down the "Shift" key and click to select a range of
items.
5. Click Copy. The programming item(s) selected in Items for the copy source specified in Copy From will
be copied to the destination(s) specified in Copy To.

Individual items can also be copied and pasted in a manner similar to other software programmes. Press
"Ctrl"+"c" to copy a highlighted (orange-coloured) programming item entry, select a target cell by pressing
the keyboard arrow keys, and then press "Ctrl"+"v" to paste the copied information to the selected cell.

58 PC Programming Manual
 Section 4
Status

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Status menu of the Maintenance screen of Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 59
4.1 Status—Equipment Status

4.1 Status—Equipment Status

4.1.1 Status—Equipment Status—UPS
Information is provided about the status of the UPS device and the connection to the PBX
• UPS Connection Status
Displays if the UPS system is connected or not connected. If a UPS system is connected, the information
below will be displayed for the UPS system.
• Battery Voltage (V)
The voltage of the UPS battery is displayed (0-240 V).
• Battery Charge Percentage (%)
The remaining charge of the UPS battery is displayed (percentage value).
• Power Supply
Displays the usage status of the UPS (if the UPS is engaged in supplying power to the PBX).
• UPS Shutdown Conditions - Battery level
From the drop-down list, select the amount of remaining battery level for when to initiate PBX shutdown
procedures.

4.1.2 Status—Equipment Status—CS Information

Displays information stored by the PBX regarding each Cell Station (CS).
This option is only available for the Installer level account in On-line mode and requires that the target
V-IPCS4 card be set to INS status.

The displayed items are as follows:

Item Description
Shelf Number of the shelf
Slot Number of the slot
Port Number of the port
CS Name Name of the attached CS
Status Service status of the attached CS: INS, OUS, or FAULT.
If the status is FAULT, subsequent data items for that port will be left blank.
Version Version number of the programme file stored in the CS
Revision Revision number of the programme file stored in the CS
CSID 12-digit ID number of the CS
Path Number of the wireless extension currently using each path. In the case of
a group, several extensions may be using the same floating extension
number.
When an extension number is not registered, the display shows "OFF". The
number of paths that can be used varies for each CS model. For more
details, see the documentation for your CS.
Group Call Number of PSs registered to the attached CS that are members of a PS
Ring Group.

60 PC Programming Manual
 4.1.3 Status—Equipment Status—PS Information

To view CS information
1. From the Target CS I/F Shelf-Slot No. drop-down list, select the target shelf and slot.
• To display information on a single card, select the shelf number, slot number and name of that card.
• To display information on all matching cards, select "All".
2. From the Interval Timer drop-down list, select the number of seconds between each automatic screen
refresh.
3. If you want to save the CS information, click Capture.
a. Create a file for saving the data.
b. Click Start.
c. Click Close.
4. Click Start to begin monitoring.
Monitoring will be performed and the screen will refresh according to the interval specified.
5. Click Stop to end monitoring.
6. If you started to save the CS information in step 3, click Capture, then click Stop to record the
information to the specified file.
7. Click Close to return to the main screen.

4.1.3 Status—Equipment Status—PS Information

Displays Portable Station (PS) registration information, including the associated Cell Station (CS).
This option is only available for the Installer level account in On-line mode.

The displayed items are as follows:

Item Description
PS No. PS location number.
Only registered PSs will be displayed.
Extension Number Extension number of the PS.
Location Slot Slot number of the CS that the PS is registered with.
Location Port Port number of the CS that the PS is registered with.
Model Name *1
Model name of the PS.
Version*1 Software version of the PS.

*1 This information is displayed for certain PSs only. For more information, refer to the documentation for your PS.

4.1.4 Status—Equipment Status—UM Port status

The UM Port status screen displays each port’s status and number for the Unified Messaging system. The
screen will be updated every 30 seconds. Each port’s status will be displayed in one of the following ways:
• Online (Ready): The port is ready to be used.
• Incoming Call: The port is handling an incoming call.
• Outgoing Call: An outgoing service is being processed.
• Error Occurred: An error has been detected.
• Off Line: The port is offline.

PC Programming Manual 61
4.1.5 Status—Equipment Status—USB

This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

4.1.5 Status—Equipment Status—USB

USB Mount Status indicates if a USB memory device is connected to the PBX. There is also an Unmount
button.
• Mounted: A USB memory device is connected to the PBX. Before removing the USB memory device
from the PBX, click Unmount.

Note
If a mounted memory device is removed from the PBX without first clicking Unmount, the data on the
USB memory device may be damaged.
• None: No USB memory device is detected by the PBX.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

62 PC Programming Manual
 Section 5
System Control

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the System Control menu of the Maintenance screen
when programming using Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 63
5.1 System Control—Program Update

5.1 System Control—Program Update

The programme files for the following hardware components can be updated with the Program Update
feature.
Each file must be named as indicated in the table to be recognised by the PBX.

Hardware that can be updated using Program Update

Programme Type Target of Update File Name
MPR Programme KX-NS500 Mother Board PFMPR
Expansion Unit KX-NS520 Mother Board PEXPS
Programme
LPR Programmes DHLC/DLC PDHLC2
PT Programmes KX-NT265 PNT265A
KX-NT343, KX-NT346, KX-NT343 PNT300
KX-NT321 PNT321
KX-UT133, KX-UT136 PUT13X
KX-UT113, KX-UT123 PUT1XX
KX-NT511 PNT511
KX-NT543, KX-NT546 PNT540
KX-NT551, KX-NT553, KX-NT556 PNT550
KX-NT560 PNT560
KX-UT248 PUT248
KX-UT670 PUT670
KX-NT630 PNT630
KX-NT680 PNT680
LCD picture file (for KX-NT680) PNTPICT
– The maximum file size is 1MB.
– The aspect ratio of the image is preferably 16:9.
– Supported file formats are as follows:
JPEG / PNG / BMP / GIF
– This file is updated from the local PC only.
Firmware for KX-NS500 PFPGA PFPGA
PARMIRNR PARMIRNR
PARMVDNR PARMVDNR
PARMIREP PARMIREP
PARMVDEP PARMVDEP
PC300NR PC300NR
PC300EP PC300EP
PC300DAG PC300DAG

64 PC Programming Manual
 5.1.1 System Control—Program Update—Download Program File

Programme Type Target of Update File Name

CS Programmes (PS CS using a DHLC/DLC card for DECT Portable PDCSDECT
Programmes) Station
CS using a DHLC/DLC card for 2.4 GHz Portable PDCS24G
Station
High-density CS for DECT Portable Station PHCSDECT
IP-CS for DECT Portable Station PICSDCT
TCAx85 + IP-CS (KX-NS0154)*1 PNS0154

*1 Software updates for PSs (e.g., KX-TCA185) are bundled with software updates for an IP-CS (KX-NS0154 only).

5.1.1 System Control—Program Update—Download Program

File
Software updates for PBX hardware components can be downloaded to the PBX. Manual and automatic
methods are available.
Programme downloading can be performed only in On-line mode.

Note
• When using an FTP server with this feature, the programme files to be downloaded to the PBX must
be named on the FTP server in a specific way that includes the version number.
Example: "PNT300_xxx_xxx_xxx"
("xxx_xxx_xxx" is the version number.)

Manual
Using manual operations, the location of updated PBX software is specified and downloaded to the Main
unit.
To download programme files manually
1. In Location of program files, specify the location of the updated files from the Look in drop-down list.
The choices are as follows:
• Local PC
Click Browse and specify the location of the updated programme files stored on the PC logged in to
Web Maintenance Console.
• USB Memory
If a USB memory device is inserted into the PBX, the contents of the following directory on the
device will be checked for updated files:
/private/meigroup/psn/ippbx/update
• FTP Server
The PBX connects to the specified FTP server and checks for updated files. Specify an FTP server
from the FTP connection name drop-down list, and specify the number of attempts to connect to
the FTP server in No. of retries.
To specify a new FTP site, see 27.3.1 Network Service—[3-1] Client Feature—FTP.
• NAS
Specify the location of the updated programme files stored on a directory of the NAS to Web
Maintenance Console.
2. Specify which PBX programme files will be automatically downloaded by checking the boxes next to
each hardware item.
3. For FTP Server only

PC Programming Manual 65
5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File

Click Check to confirm the connection to the FTP server. If a connection is established, the Execute
button will become active.
4. Click Execute, and then click OK on the confirmation message that appears. When the transfer is
complete, click OK.

Note
• If downloading cannot be completed within 10 minutes (due to slow network speeds or other
connection problems), the download operation will be cancelled.

Automatic
The Main unit is set to automatically check an FTP server for updated programme files. If an update is
available, the Main unit will download the data.
To download programme files automatically
1. For Download Server, select an FTP site.
To specify a new FTP site, see 27.3.1 Network Service—[3-1] Client Feature—FTP.
2. For Download mode, select one of the following:
• None: No actions are taken (automatic downloading is disabled).
• Check only: The specified download server is checked at the specified times. If an e-mail is entered
in Email notification, an e-mail notification is sent when updated files have been discovered.

Note
If Check only is selected, updated files will have to be downloaded manually (see the manual
procedure above).
• Download automatically: The specified download server is checked at the specified times. If
updated files are discovered, they will be downloaded automatically to the PBX. If an e-mail is entered
in Email notification, an e-mail notification is sent when updated files have been downloaded.
3. In Check time and date, specify when the PBX will contact the server to check for updates. The check
can be performed on a daily or weekly basis.
4. In Email notification specify up to 2 e-mail addresses that will receive an e-mail notification when
updated files have been discovered or when updated files have been downloaded.

Note
If Download automatically is not selected in step 2, specify at least one e-mail address so that an
administrator will be notified when updated files have been discovered.
5. To begin automatic checking for updates according to Check time and date, click Execute.
6. The PBX will now periodically perform checks and downloads as specified in the settings. Click
Download Cancel on this screen to stop automatic programme updates.

Note
When the system is downloading data from an FTP server, if downloading cannot be completed within
10 minutes (due to slow network speeds or other connection problems), the download operation will be
cancelled.

5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File

Once updated programme files have been downloaded and are stored on a PBX, they can be used to
update the system files of the PBX. The update process can be set to be automatically performed at a
specified time, or the update process can be carried out manually.

66 PC Programming Manual
 5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File

You must be connected to the PBX in On-line mode to update programme files.

Note
• Before updating programme files, we strongly recommend making a backup of all system files. For
details, refer to the following:
– 6.1 Tool—System Data Backup
– 6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup
• Do not upgrade KX-UT series SIP phones at the same time as the Main unit.
• When upgrading the system software to version 004.1xxxx from an older version, the following SRAM
data is cleared.
– Timed Reminder
– Remote Station Lock Status
– Room Status
– Login/Logout Status
– SMDR
– Billing Information
– Hotel Check In/Check Out
– Hotel Specifications
Save SRAM data before upgrading the firmware.
When you upgrade the software, a message will be shown. Then, you can save the following SRAM
data into the Storage Memory Card as "smdrdata.zip".
– SMDR
– Billing Information
– Hotel Specifications
• The updated PBX resets when the update is complete.
• Once the update starts, the STATUS LED on the front of the PBX flashes in green (120 times per
minute) until shutdown.

For Program Update Type, select Immediately or Timed Update.

Immediately (Manual update)

Specify which cards or devices to update, and perform the update immediately.
1. In Email Notification, specify up to 2 e-mail addresses that will receive a notification when programme
files have been updated.
2. Updated programme files that can be used to update cards or devices installed in the system are listed
in Available Program File(s). In Select the target to update, specify which cards or devices will be
updated using the files listed by checking the boxes next to each item.

Note
• When selecting an item, a warning message may be displayed. Confirm the contents of the
warning, and then click OK to continue.
• If you are updating the software for a PS, select the port of an IP-CS (e.g., KX-NS0154) that
supports this feature. For details about which PSs can be updated, see 5.1.3 System Control—
Program Update—Plug and Update.
3. Click Apply.

PC Programming Manual 67
5.1.3 System Control—Program Update—Plug and Update

4. Click Execute.
The programme files are updated to the PBX.

Timed Update (Automatic update)

Specify which cards or devices to update and a time to execute the update.
1. In Email Notification, specify up to 2 e-mail addresses that will receive a notification when programme
files have been updated.
2. Updated programme files that can be used to update cards or devices installed in the system are listed
in Available Program File(s). In Select the target to update, specify which cards or devices will be
updated using the files listed by checking the boxes next to each item.

Note
When selecting an item, a warning message may be displayed. Confirm the contents of the warning,
and then click OK to continue.
3. In Update Time, specify the time of day when the update will be executed.
4. Click Apply.
5. Click Execute.
The programme files will be updated to the PBX at the specified time.

Note
• For CS programme files, in order for CS cards to be displayed on this screen, the cards must be set
to INS, and the ports of the card must be set to OUS.

5.1.3 System Control—Program Update—Plug and Update

The Plug and Update feature allows IP-PTs, IP-CSs, and certain PSs to be automatically updated to the
latest software version when they are registered to the PBX. When Plug and Update is enabled, the version
number of the system software stored on the Main unit is compared to the system software currently in the
device, after the device has been registered to the PBX. If the software on the Main unit is newer, it is
downloaded to the device. By default, Plug and Update is set to Off for all device types.
1. For each device type, select On for the features you want to enable.
• Plug & Update for IP-PT/IP-CS: Enable Plug and Update for IP-PTs and IP-CSs.
• Plug & Update for TCAx85: Enable Plug and Update for supported PSs.
• Manual Update for TCAx85: Enable manual updates for supported PSs.
2. Click OK.

Note
• Plug & Update for TCAx85 and Manual Update for TCAx85 cannot be set to enable at the same
time.
• The following PSs support this feature:
– KX-TCA185
– KX-TCA285
– KX-TCA385

68 PC Programming Manual
 5.2 System Control—MOH

5.2 System Control—MOH

5.2.1 System Control—MOH—Install
Sound files on the programmer’s PC can be installed to each PBX for use as Music on Hold (MOH).
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. Click Browse and select a WAV file to install as an MOH file. Only one file may be installed at a time.
2. As uploading the file to the PBX may require some time, a time can be set in Time Set.
3. In BGM No., specify which BGM number the MOH file will occupy.
4. Click Execute to confirm the settings. If "Now" is set for Time Set, the installation will begin at this
time.

Note
• Only WAV files can be installed, and file names must not exceed 57 characters in length (including
the file extension ".wav"). Only use ASCII characters in file names.
• Files may not be larger than 40 MB in size.
• User (User) level accounts cannot perform this procedure.
• A WAV file is pre-installed as BGM 1. When a new WAV file is installed to BGM 1, the pre-installed file
will be overwritten. If you need the pre-installed file in the future, backup the file before installing a
new file. For details, see 5.2.3 System Control—MOH—Status / Backup.

5.2.2 System Control—MOH—Delete

MOH files that are occupying BGM numbers can be deleted.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. In BGM No., specify the BGM numbers to delete MOH files from. Specify "All" to delete the data saved
in all BGM numbers.
2. Click Execute to delete the files of the specified BGM numbers.

Note
• User (User) level accounts cannot perform this procedure.

5.2.3 System Control—MOH—Status / Backup

MOH files stored on a PBX can be downloaded to the user’s PC.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. The MOH files saved to the PBX will be listed. Click Backup for the file you would like to back up. One
file can be backed up at a time.
2. A save file dialogue will appear. Specify the directory on the PC to back up the file to.
3. Click OK when finished.

Note
• Remained Capacity Time indicates the amount of time available for new MOH files to be added. The
amount of time of any MOH files scheduled to be uploaded in 5.2.1 System Control—MOH—Install
is not reflected in this value.
• User (User) level accounts cannot perform this procedure.

PC Programming Manual 69
5.3 System Control—System Reset

5.3 System Control—System Reset

When programming changes or other changes to PBX settings require a system reset, this command allows
a reset to be performed remotely from Web Maintenance Console.
When the system is reset, any settings not saved to the System Memory are lost. A backup should be
performed before the reset to ensure no data is lost. However, a backup should not be performed if settings
or data have recently been imported into the system, because performing a backup would overwrite the
imported data with the current PBX settings.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

[Manual System Reset]

1. Select the System Reset tab.
2. Confirm the contents of the displayed warning message.
3. Click Backup or Skip according to the system’s status:
• Backup: Click to backup system settings. The system will be reset after the backup has been
performed.
• Skip: The system is reset without performing a backup.
If you are logged in to the PBX that is reset using this command, it is necessary to re-log in to Web
Maintenance Console to continue programming.

[System Reset by Timed Schedule]

1. Select the Timed Reset tab.
2. Select the Reset Mode (None, One Time, One Time (KX-NT only), Daily).
3. Set the Reset Time (00:00-23:59).
4. Click Apply or OK to set the system reset.
The PBX will have its system reset at the specified mode and reset time, according to the above settings.

70 PC Programming Manual
 5.4 System Control—System Shutdown

5.4 System Control—System Shutdown

In order to turn off the power to a PBX, it must first be issued a shutdown command using Web Maintenance
Console. Follow the procedure below to prepare a PBX for system shutdown.
When the system is shut down, any settings not saved to the System Memory are lost. A backup should be
performed before the shutdown to ensure no data is lost. However, a backup should not be performed if
settings or data have recently been imported into the system, because performing a backup would overwrite
the imported data with the current PBX settings.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. Confirm the contents of the displayed warning message.
2. Click Backup or Skip according to the system's status:
• Backup: Click to backup system settings. The system will be reset after the backup has been
performed.
• Skip: The system is reset without performing a backup.
3. The STATUS LED on the front of the PBX will flash amber. When shutdown preparations are
completed, the STATUS LED will stop flashing and remain a solid amber. Once the STATUS LED stops
flashing, you may turn off the power switch on the back of the PBX.

PC Programming Manual 71
5.4 System Control—System Shutdown

72 PC Programming Manual
 Section 6
Tool

This section serves as reference for the Tool menu of

the Maintenance screen of Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 73
6.1 Tool—System Data Backup

6.1 Tool—System Data Backup

6.1.1 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to USB
A PBX’s system data can be backed up to a USB memory device inserted into the PBX’s USB port. At a
later time, the USB memory device can be used to restore the backed up system data to a PBX.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

To back up the system data to a USB memory device

1. Insert a USB memory device into the USB port of the PBX.

Note
• To check the inserted USB memory’s status, see 4.1.5 Status—Equipment Status—USB
• The USB memory device must be compatible for use with the PBX. For details, refer to "4.10
Connection of Peripherals—USB Interface for USB Memory Device—Using a USB memory
device" in the Installation Manual.
2. Select the system data items to backup.
• System Data
System data includes programming information for the PBX, including extension and network
configuration information.
• MOH + OGM
MOH (Music on Hold) and OGM (Outgoing Message) sound files stored on the PBX are backed up.
• Activation Key
Activation key files that were installed on the PBX are backed up.
Any or all of the above items may be selected. However, the system cannot be restored unless System
Data is specified.
3. Click Execute to back up the specified files. If backup data already exists on the USB memory device,
it will be deleted. A confirmation message will be displayed. Click Continue.
4. A time estimation for the backup will be displayed. Click Continue.
5. A progress bar is displayed to indicate the progress of the backup. A message will be displayed when
the backup is finished. Click OK.

Note
• Unified Messaging (UM) data must be backed up using a separate process. See 6.9 Tool—UM Data
Backup.
• Use a USB memory device with a capacity of at least 512 MB. During the backup process, if an error
message is displayed indicating there is not enough free memory space on the USB memory device,
delete other unnecessary files on the USB memory device, or use a USB memory device with a larger
capacity.
• The following characters cannot be used in the names of the backup files: open bracket, close
bracket, space, forward slash ("/"), period ("."), or 0 (zero).

Restoring backed up data from a USB memory device to a PBX

Follow the procedure below to restore the backed up data to a PBX.

Note
The restoration process first requires an initialisation of the PBX, which returns the PBX to its factory
default state. Under the following conditions, restoration may not be possible, even though the PBX has
been initialised.

74 PC Programming Manual
 6.1.2 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to NAS

• The USB memory device hardware is faulty.

• The data on the USB memory device has become corrupted.
• The USB memory device is removed from the USB port of the PBX during the restoration process.
• The following characters cannot be used in the names of the backup files: open bracket, close
bracket, space, forward slash ("/"), period ("."), or 0 (zero).
To minimise the potential of a failed backup, connect the USB memory device to a PC to confirm the
USB memory device is operational and that the backup data is intact before starting this restore
process.
1. The PBX must be in a powered-off state.
2. Insert the USB memory device with the backup data into the USB port of the PBX.
3. Set the PBX’s System Mode Switch to the "SYSTEM INITIALIZE" position.
4. Turn on the PBX’s power switch. The STATUS indicator will flash green. Slide the System Mode Switch
back to the "NORMAL" position. The restore process will begin and the STATUS indicator will flash
rapidly.
5. When the restoration process is completed, the PBX will restart automatically.

6.1.2 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to NAS

A PBX’s system data can be backed up to a NAS (Network Attached Storage) in the PBX’s LAN network.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

To back up the system data to a NAS

1. Connect a NAS and PBX.
Set the parameters necessary to connect the NAS to the PBX (IP address of the NAS, etc.), and then
confirm the connection. See 27.4.2 Network Service—[4-2] Other—NAS.
2. Select the system data items to backup.
• System Data
System data includes programming information for the PBX, including extension and network
configuration information.
• MOH + OGM
MOH (Music on Hold) and OGM (Outgoing Message) sound files stored on the PBX are backed up.
3. Click Execute to back up the specified files. If backup data already exists on the NAS, it will be
deleted. A confirmation message will be displayed. Click Continue.
4. A progress bar is displayed to indicate the progress of the backup. A message will be displayed when
the backup is finished. Click OK.

Note
• Unified Messaging (UM) data must be backed up using a separate process. See 6.9 Tool—UM Data
Backup.
• Data backed up from the PBX to a NAS cannot be restored directly from the NAS to the PBX. The
backup data must be copied from the NAS to a local PC. Then the data can be restored from the local
PC to the PBX.
• The following characters cannot be used in the names of the backup files: open bracket, close
bracket, space, forward slash ("/"), period ("."), or 0 (zero).
• When using a NAS, make sure there is sufficient network bandwidth.
• When using a NAS, select the protocol NFS (Ver.4 only) or CIFS. For more information, see
27.4.2 Network Service—[4-2] Other—NAS.

PC Programming Manual 75
6.1.2 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to NAS

PC Programming Manual References

27.4.2 Network Service—[4-2] Other—NAS

76 PC Programming Manual
 6.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration

6.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration

Automatically configures the network settings of the BRI card.
This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode.
This tool automatically inputs values into the fields L1 Mode, L2 Mode, Access Mode, and TEI Mode, on
the Network tab of the 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
screen.

Note
• To use this tool, the card to be configured must be pre-set to OUS status. For more details, see
2.1.5 Card Status.
• At any time on this screen, you can click Cancel to return to the previous screen without saving.
To configure the BRI card
1. In Check, select the card, and then click OK.
2. Click Execute.
The results of the automatic configuration will be displayed.
3. Click the Check Box cell for the ports that have been configured.
4. Click to Data Apply save these results to the BRI card.

PC Programming Manual 77
6.3 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear

6.3 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear

Clears NDSS Link Data stored in the connected PBX. While this tool clears both monitor extension and
monitored extension data, it only clears it at the connected PBX. To clear this data at other PBXs in the
QSIG network, it is necessary to run this tool at those PBXs.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

To clear the NDSS Link Data

When this tree menu item is selected, a confirmation screen will be displayed.
• Click OK to clear the data.
• Click Cancel to keep the data, and close the screen.

78 PC Programming Manual
 6.4 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group

6.4 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group

Allows you to automatically configure settings in 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering
Plan—Quick Dial and 12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial so
that users can answer calls to their Call Pickup Group by pressing " 0".

To activate this tool

1. When this tree menu item is selected, a confirmation screen will be displayed.
2. Click Yes.
The Group Call Pickup feature number (default: 40) + the extension user group number of the
extension is assigned to first personal speed dial.

Note
This tool can only be activated if all of the following conditions are met:
– The first Quick Dial setting is empty or is already set to " 0".
– " 0" is not used for another feature number.
– The Group Call Pickup feature number has been assigned.
– The Personal Speed Dialling feature number has been assigned.
– The extension user group number does not exceed the highest Call Pickup Group number.

PC Programming Manual 79
6.5 Tool—Extension List View

6.5 Tool—Extension List View

Displays a list of all programmed extension numbers and types. It is possible to sort the information
according to Extension Number, Type, Extension Name, Shelf, Slot, or Port. There is also a key-word
searching feature.

The types that can be displayed are as follows:

Type Detail
Intercom Wired Extension
Portable Station Wireless Extension (Portable Station)
SIP / IP-PT / S-PS SIP/IP-PT/S-PS Extension
UM / VM Unified Messaging UM Group/VPS Voice Mail
ICD Group Incoming Call Distribution Group
PS Ring Group Portable Station Ring Group
UM Group Unified Messaging UM Group
VM(DPT) Group VM (DPT) Group
VM(DTMF) Group VM (DTMF) Group
Pager External Pager
OGM (DISA) DISA
DSS DSS Console
DPT-I/F CS PT-interface CS
SVM Simplified Voice Message
MODEM MODEM
ISDN Remote ISDN Remote

80 PC Programming Manual
 6.6 Tool—Import

6.6 Tool—Import
Allows several types of system data files or tables to be imported.
Except for Speed Dial and Caller ID, this option is only available at Installer level.
The files from which data can be imported are files that were previously saved at this or another PBX using
the Export tool (see 6.7 Tool—Export), or comma-separated value (CSV) files. Unsupported file types
cannot be opened.
For all tables except ARS - Routing Plan, it is possible to edit the CSV file directly using an appropriate
editor, before importing.

The types of data that can be imported using this tool, and the matching destination fields, are as follows:

Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID

Data Type Import Destination
System Speed Dialling Number Location
Name Name
CO Line Access Number + Telephone Dial
Number
CLI Destination CLI Destination

Related programming: 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial

Note
Imported Speed Dial and Caller ID data can be copied to a specific speed dial destination. The copy
range can be specified by selecting the from/to of the index.

Incoming Call - DDI/DID Table

Data Type Import Destination
Location Location
DDI/DID Number Dial In Number
DDI/DID Name Dial In Name
DDI/DID Destination-Day Destination-Day
DDI/DID Destination-Lunch Destination-Lunch
DDI/DID Destination-Break Destination-Break
DDI/DID Destination-Night Destination-Night
Tenant Number Tenant Number
Service Group No. Group number for VPS answer
VM Trunk Group No. VM Trunk Group No.
CLI Ring for DDI/DID-Day CLI Ring - Day
CLI Ring for DDI/DID-Lunch CLI Ring - Lunch
CLI Ring for DDI/DID-Break CLI Ring - Break
CLI Ring for DDI/DID-Night CLI Ring - Night

Related programming: 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

PC Programming Manual 81
6.6 Tool—Import

ARS - Leading Digit

Data Type Import Destination
Location Location
Leading Number Leading Digit
Additional Number of Digits Additional Dial Digits
Routing Plan Number Route Plan Number

Related programming: 16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number

ARS - Except Code

Data Type Import Destination
Location Location
Leading Number Exception Exception Code

Related programming: 16.6 PBX Configuration—[8-6] ARS—Leading Number Exception

ARS - Routing Plan

Data Type Import Destination
(no fields to select) (no fields to select)

Related programming: 16.3 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time

Wired Extension
Data Type Import Destination
No. Location (selected automatically)
Extension Number Extension Number (selected automatically)
Extension Name Extension Name (selected automatically)

Related programming: 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension

Settings

PS Extension
Data Type Import Destination
No. Location (selected automatically)
Extension Number*1 Extension Number (selected automatically)
Extension Name Extension Name (selected automatically)

*1 This data can only be exported, and cannot be imported.

Related programming: 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension

Settings

Quick Dial
Data Type Import Destination
No. Location

82 PC Programming Manual
 6.6 Tool—Import

Data Type Import Destination

Dial Dial
Phone Number Phone Number

Related programming: 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial

SIP Extension
Data Type Import Destination
No. Location
Extension Number Extension Number
Password Password

Related programming: 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT

V-IPGW GW Settings
Data Type Import Destination
No. Location
GW Name GW Name
GW IP Address GW IP Address
GW Group GW Group No.
Connection for IP-GW Connection for IP-GW
Protocol Protocol
Progress Tone Send Mode Progress Tone Send Mode
IP Codec Priority 1st IP Codec Priority 1st
IP Codec Priority 2nd IP Codec Priority 2nd
IP Codec Priority 3rd IP Codec Priority 3rd
Packet Sampling Time (G.711A) Packet Sampling Time (G.711A)
Packet Sampling Time (G.711Mu) Packet Sampling Time (G.711Mu)
Packet Sampling Time (G.729A) Packet Sampling Time (G.729A)
Voice Activity Detection for G.711 Voice Activity Detection for G.711
FAX Sending Method FAX Sending Method
Maximum Bit Rate Maximum Bit Rate
FAX Detection Ability FAX Detection Ability
DTMF DTMF
Payload Type Payload Type
T38 FAX Max Datagram T38 FAX Max Datagram
T38 FAX UDPTL Error Correction – T38 FAX UDPTL Error Correction – Redundancy
Redundancy
T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for T.30 messages
for T.30 messages

PC Programming Manual 83
6.6 Tool—Import

Data Type Import Destination

T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for data
for data
T38 FAX Rate Management Method T38 FAX Rate Management Method

Related programming: 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main—

V-IPGW–GW Settings–Main

V-IPGW DN2IP
Data Type Import Destination
No. Location
Leading Number Leading Number
Remaining Number of Digits Remaining Number of Digits
GW No./GW Group Selection GW No./GW Group Selection
GW Group GW Group
GW No. GW No.

Related programming: 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main—

V-IPGW–DN2IP

V-SIPGW Settings
Data Type Import Destination
(no fields to select) (no fields to select)

Related programming: 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW

V-SIPGW Provider
Data Type Import Destination
(no fields to select) (no fields to select)

Related programming: 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW

PS Registration
Data Type Import Destination
(no fields to select) (no fields to select)

Related programming: 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station

Note
Before importing PS registration settings, be sure to de-register any PSs already registered to the PBX.

To import system data

1. From the Tool tree menu, select Import, and then click the type of data to import.
2. Navigate to the folder containing the system data file you want to open.
3. Select the file.
4. Click OK to open the file.

84 PC Programming Manual
 6.6 Tool—Import

If applicable, a list of field names found in the imported file will be displayed.
5. For the Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID table, select the Speed Dial table to which to import the
data (system or tenant) from the drop-down list.
6. If required, select import fields.
When import fields can be selected, the selection screen is displayed automatically. Matching origin and
destination fields are entered by default.
• To change the destination for an import field, select the preferred field from the drop-down list.
• To not import a field, select the blank option from the drop-down list.
7. Click OK to perform the import operation.
Depending on the type of data imported, the relevant programming screen may be displayed.
• Click OK or Apply to complete the import operation.
If data in a field being imported does not match the required format for the import destination, an error
message will be displayed when the import operation is attempted, and the operation will be cancelled.
This can occur when, for example, the destination field can only accept numeric data, but the data being
imported contains alphabet characters, as the correct fields were not linked together.

Notices Regarding Importing Data from KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 PBXs to the PBX

Quick Dial
The PBX only supports an 8-digit Quick Dial format. Therefore, KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 Quick Dial data in
the 4-digit format cannot be imported.

PC Programming Manual 85
6.7 Tool—Export

6.7 Tool—Export
Allows several types of system data to be exported to files. These files can be used with the Import tool (see
6.6 Tool—Import) to update another PBX.
Except for ARS - Routing Plan, tables are exported as comma-separated value (CSV) files.
Except for Speed Dial and Caller ID, this option is only available at Installer level.

Note
The separator used in CSV files created using the Export tool is decided by the unit specified in List
Separator, found in the Windows Control Panel’s "Regional Options".

To export system data

1. From the Tool tree menu, select Export, and then click the type of data to export.
2. Select the check boxes next to the names of the fields to export, and then click OK.
3. If a message window is displayed, click OK.
4. In the file selection screen, select the Save check box, and then click OK.

86 PC Programming Manual
 6.8 Tool—Screen Customise

6.8 Tool—Screen Customise

Allows you to specify which Setup and Maintenance screens can be accessed in the User (Administrator)
account level.
This option is only available at Installer level.
Selected check boxes will be displayed in the tree menus of Web Maintenance Console to users with the
User (Administrator) account level.

To modify displayed screens

1. Click the access level to modify.
2. Select the items that you want to have displayed.
• Clear the check box beside the names of items you do not want to have displayed.
• Select the check box beside the names of items you want to have displayed.
3. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual 87
6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup

6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup

The UM Data Backup tool can be used to backup and restore Unified Messaging (UM) data.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
The following voice data can be backed up or restored as individual files. The data can be backed up to a
USB memory device connected to the PBX or a NAS.
a. System Prompts
– Installed Prompts
– Custom Service Menu
– Company Name
– Company Greetings
– System Mailbox Group Voice Label
– System Caller Name
– Prompt Selection
– Hold Announce Menu
b. Mailbox Prompts
– Owner Name
– Personal Greetings
– Personal Caller ID Name
– Interview
– Personal Group List Name
– EMD List Member Name
c. Mailbox Messages

Note
Mailbox data may not be backed up if the mailbox is in use during the backup process. Additionally,
Unified Messaging system response time may be affected when backing up data. For these reasons, we
recommend backing up data when the Unified Messaging system is not in use.
Use only the ASCII character set for directory/file names.
The UM Data Backup tool can be executed manually or scheduled to run automatically at regular intervals.
Refer to the following:
• 6.9.1 Tool—UM Data Backup—Manual Backup
• 6.9.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup

6.9.1 Tool—UM Data Backup—Manual Backup

Use this procedure to manually back up Unified Messaging system data. For details on the items that can
be backed up, see 6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup.
1. To back up system prompts, select the check box next to System Prompts and select the check boxes
of the items you want to back up.
2. To back up mailbox prompts, select the check box next to Mailbox Prompts and select which prompts
to back up.
3. To back up the prompts for specific mailboxes, click Mailbox Prompts to open the mailbox list. Check
the top checkbox to select all mailboxes, or select the mailboxes for which you wish to back up
prompts, then click OK.

88 PC Programming Manual
 6.9.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup

4. To back up mailbox messages, check the box next to Mailbox Messages button and click Mailbox
Messages to open the mailbox list. Select the top check box to select all mailboxes, or select the
mailboxes you wish to back up, and then click OK.
5. Select the destination for the backed up data:
• Local PC: After the backup is started, a file download will begin in your web browser. Specify a
location on your local PC to save the backup data.
• USB Flash Drive (Main Unit): Back up the data to a USB memory device connected to the Main
unit. When USB Flash Drive (Main Unit) is selected, a folder selection menu becomes active.
Specify a folder on the USB memory device for saving the backup data.

Note
Before selecting this option, make sure that a USB memory device is connected to the Main unit.
• NAS: Back up the data to a NAS. When NAS is selected, a folder selection menu becomes active.
Specify a folder on the NAS for saving the backup data.
6. Click OK to start the backup.

Note
• The system will prepare the data to be backed up, and the backup will begin about 30 seconds later.
The time needed to backup the data will vary depending on the communication speed and the
amount of data that is being backed up.
• Deleted messages will not be backed up when backing up Mailbox Messages.
• When Local PC is selected, individual messages that are larger than 100 MB cannot be backed up.
• Depending on your browser or your browser’s settings, a prompt may appear during the backup for
each file to be downloaded. Be sure to select an action for each prompt that appears.

6.9.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup

You can schedule backups in advance. The Unified Messaging system will automatically back up the
selected data at the scheduled times to a USB memory device or NAS connected to the PBX. (Scheduled
backups cannot be made to a local PC.) For details on the items that can be backed up, see 6.9 Tool—UM
Data Backup.
Follow the procedure below to schedule an automatic backup.
1. Click to create a new scheduled backup.
2. Enter a description for the backup.
3. Set the frequency (daily, weekly, etc.) and time of day when the backup should take place.
4. Check the desired item(s) to backup.
5. Click Edit next to Mailbox Prompts.
6. Check either All Mailboxes or select the mailboxes you wish to backup.
7. Click OK.
8. Click Edit next to Mailbox Messages.
9. Check either All Mailboxes or select the mailboxes you wish to backup. You can also specify the
following backup conditions:
• Retention Days: Back up only messages that have been stored on the system for at least the
number of days specified.
• Remaining mailbox Capacity (min): Only perform a backup if the remaining mailbox capacity has
reached the specified amount.

PC Programming Manual 89
6.9.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup

• Delete After Backup: Specify to delete messages that have been backed up from the mailbox.
• Message Type: Specify to back up all messages, or only messages marked as "old".

Note
An invalid combination of these settings may prevent a backup from occurring. For example, if a
mailbox is full, but there are no messages older than the number of days specified in Retention
Days, or no messages are marked as "old", the backup will not be performed.
10. In System Backup, select USB Flash Drive (Main Unit) or NAS, and then specify the folder on the
selected device where you want to save the system backup file.
11. Click OK.
12. In Status, select Enable and click OK.

Note
• Up to 20 backup events can be scheduled.
• If a backup is scheduled, but a USB memory device is not connected to the PBX at the time of the
scheduled backup, the backup will not be performed.
• When using a NAS, make sure there is sufficient network bandwidth.
Editing a scheduled backup
1. From the Scheduled Backup screen, select the backup you wish to edit.
2. Click Edit.
3. Edit the settings as desired.
4. Click OK.

Deleting a scheduled backup

1. From the Scheduled Backup screen, select the backup you wish to delete.
2. Click Delete.
3. Click Yes.
4. Click OK.

90 PC Programming Manual
 6.10 Tool—UM Data Restore

6.10 Tool—UM Data Restore

Follow the procedure below to restore data backed up using the UM Data Backup tool.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
For more information about the UM Data Backup tool, see 6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup. You can restore
data from a USB memory device connected to the PBX or from a file on your local PC.
1. Select the check boxes of the items to restore.
2. In System Restore, select Local PC or USB Flash Drive (Main Unit).
• Local PC
Click Browse and select a backup file from your local PC. The file must have been saved using the
UM Data Backup tool.
• USB Flash Drive (Main Unit)
When USB Flash Drive (Main Unit) is selected, the folder selection menu becomes active. Specify
the folder on the USB memory device where the backup data is saved.
• NAS
When NAS is selected, the folder selection menu becomes active. Specify the folder on the NAS
where the backup data is saved.

Note
Before selecting USB Flash Drive (Main Unit), make sure that the USB memory device with the
backup data is connected to the Main unit.
To restore a single file:
Files that match the selected types of items to restore will be highlighted.
Click a file in the list to display its name in the text box. You can also click a folder name to display that
folder’s contents, and then click a file to select it.
To restore multiple files at once:
Folders whose contents match the selected types of items to restore will be highlighted.
Click a folder in the list to display its name in the text box. You can also click a folder name to display
that folder’s contents, and then click a folder to select it.

Note
When restoring data from a local PC, up to 40 files can be selected at one time. When there are a
large number of files to restore, they should be restored from the folder on the USB memory
device.
3. Click OK to restore the selected file or folder of files.
• Local PC
The results of the data restore will be downloaded from the PBX as a text file called
"UM_data_restore_result.txt". Save the file to your local PC to view its contents.
• USB Flash Drive (Main Unit)
The results of the data restore will be saved in a text file called "UM_data_restore_result.txt" on the
USB memory device. To view this file, you must connect the USB memory device to a PC and then
open the text file.
• NAS
The results of the data restore will be saved in a text file called "UM_data_restore_result.txt" on the
NAS. To view this file, you must connect to the NAS and copy to a PC and then open the text file.

PC Programming Manual 91
6.10 Tool—UM Data Restore

Note
• When restoring multiple items, only files that match the items for which check boxes have been
selected will be restored. Also, even if data exists in the specified folder of the USB memory device,
the data will not be restored unless the check box of the matching item has been selected.
• Data in sub-folders of a selected folder will not be restored.
• If more than one file matches a selected item, the newest file will be restored.
• The following characters cannot be used in the names of the backup files: open bracket, close
bracket, space, forward slash ("/"), period ("."), or 0 (zero).
• The backup file names stored on the USB memory device should not be changed. If the file names
are changed, the system may not be able to detect which backup files correspond to which UM data
items.
• A backed up message cannot be restored to the subscriber’s mailbox if the mailbox still contains a
New/Old/Deleted copy of the same message.
• Voice data recorded by users in a KX-TVM series VPS can be converted and used as voice data in
the PBX’s Unified Messaging system. For details, refer to "5.3 Starting Web Maintenance Console—
KX-TVM System Prompt and Mailbox Data Import" in the Installation Manual.

92 PC Programming Manual
 6.11 Tool—UM Backup History

6.11 Tool—UM Backup History

The following records for backup that have been performed can be checked on this screen:
• Description
• Parameters
• Completion Status
• Date & Time
• Total Elapsed Time (HH:MM:SS)
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

PC Programming Manual 93
6.12 Tool—DXDP All OUS

6.12 Tool—DXDP All OUS

Sets the status of all DXDP/XDP extension ports to "OUS" simultaneously for the PBX.

To set all DXDP/XDP ports to OUS for the PBX

1. Access Tool—DXDP All OUS from the Maintenance Screen tree view.
2. Click OK.

94 PC Programming Manual
 6.13 Tool—Contact information

6.13 Tool—Contact information

Dealers can set contact information for the user of the PBX here. When users select this tree menu item,
this information will be displayed for the user’s reference.
1. Input the following information, and then click OK.
• Company Name
• Telephone Number
• Fax Number
• Address
• URL
• Email Address

PC Programming Manual 95
6.14 Tool—UT Option Setting

6.14 Tool—UT Option Setting

Option settings can be specified for KX-UT series SIP phones on a system-wide level.

Note
The following apply when programming in On-line mode only:
• To set these parameters, all installed V-UTEXT cards must first be set to OUS. For details, see
9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Numbering Plan for UT Series Terminal

One or more number dialling plans can be specified for KX-UT series SIP phones. Enter the dial plan text
string into the text box, and then click OK. A dial plan text string may also be copied and pasted into the text
box from another source.

Note
• For more information about dial plans, refer to the Administrator Guide of the relevant KX-UT series
SIP phone.
• You can enter up to 500 characters in the dial plan text box.
• You can assign up to 20 dial plans, separating them with a "|" (vertical bar).
• You can assign up to 32 digits per dial plan.
• When OK is clicked, the entered text string will be validated. If there is a validation error, a message
will be displayed.

Timer for UT Series Terminal

This timer specifies for KX-UT series SIP phones how long the system waits for another digit to be dialled
before determining that dialling has finished. This value will apply for all KX-UT series SIP phones
connected to the PBX. Specify a number of seconds in Extension Inter-digit (s), and then click OK.
If the value for the timer is changed, the new value will be applied to each KX-UT series SIP phone after it is
restarted.

96 PC Programming Manual
 6.15 Tool—URL Information

6.15 Tool—URL Information

The URL address for downloading the IMAP tool can be specified on this screen. This URL address will be
used for the Unified Messaging Plug in download button displayed to users when they view the Unified
Message tab of their profile in the User menu. For details, see 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User.

Specify a valid URL address for Unified Messaging Plug in, and then click OK.

PC Programming Manual 97
6.16 Tool—SVM (Simplified Voice Message)

6.16 Tool—SVM (Simplified Voice Message)

6.16.1 Tool—SVM (Simplified Voice Message)—Delete All
Recording
Deletes all voice messages recorded by the SVM feature.

To delete SVM recording data

1. Access Tool—SVM (Simplified Voice Message)—Delete All Recording.
2. Click OK.

6.16.2 Tool—SVM (Simplified Voice Message)—Check Current

Usage
Displays information on the voice messages stored by the SVM feature. For each message, the type of
message and the associated extension are displayed.

To check the current usage

1. Access Tool—SVM (Simplified Voice Message)—Check Current Usage.

6.17 Tool—P-SIP Option

You can export the root certificate to be used for SIP-TLS.

98 PC Programming Manual
 Section 7
Utility

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Utility menu of the Maintenance screen of Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 99
7.1 Utility—Diagnosis

7.1 Utility—Diagnosis
7.1.1 Utility—Diagnosis—Card Diagnosis
Performs diagnostic tests on cards installed in the PBX, to identify the source of problems.
If any of the tests listed here returns the result "NG" ("No Good"), contact the seller where you purchased
this PBX.
When testing is complete, any cards that were set to OUS status must be returned to INS status if they are
to be used again.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

Card Test
Tests the relevant functions of a card to ensure that it is operating correctly. The tests carried out vary
according to the type of card being tested.

The tests that are performed on each card are listed below.

Test Type Available Cards

Local loop back diagnosis DLC2, DLC8, DLC16, LCOT6 (Pre-installed/Option), BRI2, BRI4,
PRI23, PRI30/E1
DTMF Receive test port DHLC4, MCSCL8, MCSLC16 (Pre-installed/Option)
PT loop back diagnosis DLC2, DLC8, DLC16, DHLC4

To perform a card test

1. Click on the Status cell of the card to be tested, and set it to "OUS".
2. Click on the cell showing the card type.
A new window will be displayed.
3. Select the Card Test option, and then click Execute.
The error report will be displayed. When all tests are completed, the words "Test End!" will be shown on
the last line of the output.
4. Select an option:
• Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information.
1. Specify a save destination and file name.
2. Click Save.
• Click Cancel to return to the Diagnosis screen.

Note
To run consecutive card tests on the BRI2/BRI4 card, you must change the card’s status to INS, then
OUS again after running each test.

7.1.2 Utility—Diagnosis—Ping
Performs a connection test on network devices. This function sends echo requests to a particular IP address
across an IP network, and displays the result of responses and round-trip time.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

To perform a Ping test

100 PC Programming Manual

 7.1.2 Utility—Diagnosis—Ping

1. Enter a specific IP address in the IP Address box.

2. Click Test to perform the test.
The result will be displayed.
3. Select an option:
• Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information.
1. Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite.
2. Click Save.
• Click Cancel to return to the Ping screen.

PC Programming Manual 101

7.2 Utility—File

7.2 Utility—File
7.2.1 Utility—File—File Transfer PC to PBX
Copies PBX system data files from the connected PC to the System Memory installed in the PBX. Pre-
existing files in System Memory Card are overwritten.
This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode.

To install new main system data that has been copied to the PBX, use the System Reset utility (see
5.3 System Control—System Reset) for DFSYS files.

The PBX examines the header information of a file to determine 2 things: whether the file contains
supported data, and which system component the file applies to.
Only files whose header information matches that of a system file supported by the PBX can be transferred.
Attempting to transfer any other type of file results in an error message.

The names of all files that can be stored in the System Memory are as follows:

System Data
Name on System Memory Corresponding Card
DFSYS Mother Board
DFSYS_R Mother Board*1

*1 DFSYS-file-format data that is transferred to the PBX is saved as "DFSYS_R".

To transfer files to the System Memory
1. The dialogue box will be displayed.
2. Select the file to upload, and click OK.
A window showing the upload progress will be displayed.
While transferring files to the System Memory, the PBX automatically renames them according to the
header information.
A message will be displayed when the transfer is complete.
3. Click OK.

7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer PBX to PC

Copies system data files from the System Memory and SD card installed in the PBX to the connected PC.
This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode.

The files that can be downloaded from the System Memory and SD card are as follows:
File Name File Type
DFSYS System data
$SYSERR Error data
$SYSERR1–$SYSERR9
UT_ACS KX-UT series SIP phone configuration data

• Downloading the DFSYS system data file allows you to make a backup of the configuration of the PBX.
• The error data files are snapshots of the configuration of the PBX taken automatically when a major error
causes a system reset. If they are generated, consult the seller where you purchased this PBX to identify

102 PC Programming Manual

 7.2.3 Utility—File—File View

the cause of the problem. If there is only one error data file, its name will be $SYSERR. If there is more
than one file, the files will be numbered in chronological order, up to a maximum of 9 files.
• KX-UT series SIP phone configuration data can be transferred to a PC, and then imported using the
phone’s Web user interface. For details, refer to the Administrator Guide of the relevant KX-UT series SIP
phone.
To transfer files to the PC
1. Select the file to download from the list of files on System Memory and SD card.
Only the files listed in the table above can be downloaded. Selecting any other file will cause an error
message to be displayed.
2. Click Transfer.
The Save dialogue box will be displayed.
3. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
4. Enter a file name.
5. Click Save.
• A window showing the download progress will be displayed.
• A message will be displayed when the transfer is complete.
6. Click OK.

7.2.3 Utility—File—File View

Displays a list of files in System Memory and SD card.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
The name, date and time of creation, and size of files are displayed.
This utility can also display information on activation key files stored in the System Memory and SD card.
The effective date, PFMPR-ID, activation key type, number of activation keys, and expiration date of
activation keys are displayed on the Detail screen.
To view information of programme and activation key files stored in the System Memory and SD
card
1. Click on the name of the desired programme or activation key file.
2. Click Detail. The Detail screen will be displayed. You can select different files from the File drop-down
menu to view the details for each file.

7.2.4 Utility—File—File Delete

Allows you to delete files from the System Memory.
This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode.
The DFSYS system file cannot be deleted by this utility.

Note
Programme files cannot be deleted if the Program Update feature’s timed update is set, or if an update
is currently being performed. For details, see 5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update
Program File.
To delete files from the System Memory
1. Click on the file to be deleted.
2. Click Delete.
A confirmation screen will be displayed.
3. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual 103

7.2.5 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PC to PBX

The display will return to the File Delete screen.

7.2.5 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PC to PBX

Transfers Outgoing Message (OGM) files from the PC to the System Memory.
This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode.
Uploaded files are automatically renamed as necessary. If the location specified already contains an OGM, it
will be overwritten by the newly uploaded message.
To transfer OGMs to the System Memory
1. From the Utility menu, select Message File Transfer PC to PBX.
2. Select the destination to transfer the OGM files to from the drop-down list, and then click Browse.
The Open dialogue box will be displayed.
3. Select the message files to upload. The files must be in the WAV format.
It is possible to select multiple files.

Note
• When selecting files to copy to the PBX, the file names (apart from the file extension) cannot be
more than 33 characters in length.
• When selecting G.711 codec WAV files to copy to the PBX, the total file size of all selected files
combined cannot exceed 32 megabytes.
4. Click OK.
• The files will be uploaded. Files that do not contain message data will be ignored.
• An index number (01 to 64) will be appended automatically to the file names of message files
transferred to the PBX.
• When complete, the display will return to the main screen.

7.2.6 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PBX to PC

Transfers Outgoing Message (OGM) files from the System Memory to the PC.
This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode.

To transfer OGMs to the PC

1. From the lower drop-down list, select the messages to transfer.
• To transfer a certain message, select the number of that message.
• To transfer all messages at once, select "All".
The Save dialogue box will be displayed.
2. Enter a file name.
3. Click Save.
4. Click OK.
• When you choose to transfer all messages, each message is saved as an individual file, with a
number appended to the file name corresponding to that message’s location in the System Memory.
• When complete, the display will return to the main screen.

104 PC Programming Manual

 7.3 Utility—Log

7.3 Utility—Log
7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log
Collects and displays system error information.
Whenever there is a system failure, the PBX stores the error code generated. The connected PC collects all
of these codes, along with other information, and displays an explanatory error message.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

The functions of the buttons on this screen are as follows:

Button Function
Cancel Closes the Error Log screen without saving.
Save Saves the currently displayed Error Log information as a text file.
Minor Displays minor errors, which affect only a certain part of system operation.
Major Displays major errors, which affect operation of the whole system, or result in
system failure.
Clear Erases the stored error log information from both the screen and the PBX.
Log Information Displays probable causes of the errors and their solutions.

The items displayed on screen are as follows:

Item Description
Date The date of the error detection.
Time The time of the error detection.
Error Code The 3-digit error code assigned by the PBX. For details about the error code, refer to
the "Log Information" item in this table.
Sub Code SMDR:
The 8-digit sub code of the relevant hardware (BBWXYYZZ).
Web Maintenance Console:
The 6-digit sub code of the relevant hardware (WXYYZZ).
For information about the digits of the Sub Code, refer to table "Sub Code Details"
below.
Error Message A description of the error.
Log Information Clicking this button displays a list of errors and solutions in PDF format, as shown
below.

[Sample] List of Errors and Solutions

For each error code, the error message, probable cause, and solutions are explained.

PC Programming Manual 105

7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log

Sub Code Details

Sub Code Description
BB 00 (Standalone operation)
or
01–15 (Corresponding to the site number in a One-look network [2 to 16])
W Slot Type
For physical slots (including physical slots of Expansion Units)
– " " (blank)
For virtual slots
– "*" (asterisk)
X Shelf Number
– Main Unit: 1
– Expansion Unit: 2–4
– Non-PBX process: 5

106 PC Programming Manual

 7.3.2 Utility—Log—Syslog

Sub Code Description

YY Slot Number
When X is not 5
Physical shelf
Mother board slot: 00
Regular slots: 01–07
Expansion Unit
EXP-S card: 00
Optional physical service card slots: 01–05
Virtual shelf
Virtual Trunk slots: 01–04
Virtual Extension slots: 05–08
Virtual IP-CS slots: 09–12
When X is 5
YY: Process code
ZZ Port Number
When X is not 5
ZZ: Optional service card port number (01–XX)

When X is 5
ZZ: Process number (determined by each process)

Note
When there is no parameter for slot and port number, YY and ZZ will be displayed as "00".
Example: Sub code for the mother board = "00 10000"

7.3.2 Utility—Log—Syslog
Displays a log of system events. Each entry in the log includes the following information:
• Type: Describes the type of system event.
• Date: The date and time the system event occurred.
• Message: Details about the system event.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

7.3.3 Utility—Log—Web-MC Event Log

The Web-MC Event Log retains information about user interaction with Web Maintenance Console.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
The items displayed on screen are as follows:
Item Description
Date The date of the event.
Time The time of the event.
User The account name of the user accessing Web Maintenance Console.
Description A description of the action taken by the user. (i.e. "Login to Web-MC")
IP Address The IP address of the PC used to access Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 107

7.3.4 Utility—Log—UM System Log

To save the event log as a text file

1. From the Web-MC Event Log screen, select Save.
The Save dialogue box will be displayed.
2. Enter a file name.
3. Click Save.

To clear the event log

1. From the Web-MC Event Log screen, select Clear.

Note
Users logged in to a Main unit can see all events.

7.3.4 Utility—Log—UM System Log

You can export a log of events from the Unified Messaging system for troubleshooting purposes.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. Click OK to export a UM System Log file.
2. Click Save to save the data to a local file.
3. Click OK.

7.3.5 Utility—Log—Call Control Log

Collects and displays Logical Partitioning Call Control Log information.
To show the setting change information for the Logical Partitioning feature, press the Condition button.
To show the call restriction status of the Logical Partitioning feature, press the Status button.

Condition
Item Description
Date The date on which the setting change of the logical partitioning feature
occurred.
Time The time at which the setting change of the logical partitioning feature
occurred.
Information "Logical Partition" is displayed.
Status The new setting status of the following settings is displayed.
9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—
Site—Main—Area ID for logical partition
10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 2—
Applying logical partitioning

Status
Item Description
Date The date on which the call restriction event from the logical partitioning
feature occurred.
Time The time at which the call restriction event from the logical partitioning
feature occurred.

108 PC Programming Manual

 7.3.5 Utility—Log—Call Control Log

Item Description
Function The call restriction types are as follows:
– CO call
– CO-CO call
– Conference call
Information The restricted extension number and/or trunk number is displayed.
Status "Restricted (Logical Partitioning)" is displayed.

PC Programming Manual 109

7.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace

7.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace
7.4.1 Utility—Monitor/Trace—ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace
This utility collects protocol trace data from the BRI or PRI card, and displays it on the PC.
This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode, and requires that the target BRI or PRI card
be set to INS status.
Protocol trace data is continually accumulated on ISDN cards, and 3 types of data can be downloaded:
• Real Time Trace: Pseudo-real-time data is collected through data polling at one-second intervals. The
displayed information is updated beginning when the Start button is clicked.
• Accumulation Trace: Previously accumulated data is retrieved and displayed.
• Error Accumulation Trace: Previously accumulated error data is retrieved and displayed. This trace
shows the data snapshot that is taken just before a card resets.
To view trace data
1. From the Shelf-Slot No. drop-down list, select the target slot. Each card will be preceded by the pattern
"X-Y" as follows:
• X: Shelf number (1-4)
– 1: Main unit
– 2: Expansion Unit1
– 3: Expansion Unit2
– 4: Expansion Unit3
• Y: Slot number (1-7)
2. From the Trace Data Type drop-down list, select the type of data to view.
3. Click Start.
Trace information will be displayed.
4. Select an option:
• Click Capture to save the displayed trace information.
• Click Clear to clear the screen display.
5. Click Cancel to return to the main screen.

7.4.2 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-IPGW Protocol Trace

This utility collects trace data of protocol activity from V-IPGW card.
This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode, and requires that the target V-IPGW card be
set to INS status.

To save trace data to the System Memory

1. From the Utility menu, select V-IPGW Protocol Trace.
When the progress bar disappears, the protocol trace is complete. The trace data has been saved to
the System Memory (file name: "PRTH323").

To transfer trace data to the PC

1. Click the File Transfer PBX to PC link to access the file transfer screen.
The list of files will be displayed.

110 PC Programming Manual

 7.4.3 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-SIPGW Protocol Trace

Note
The file transfer screen can also be accessed from the tree menu (see 7.2.2 Utility—File—File
Transfer PBX to PC).
2. Select the desired trace data file.
3. Click Transfer.
4. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
5. Enter a file name.
6. Click Save.
7. Click OK.

7.4.3 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-SIPGW Protocol Trace

The trace data of protocol activity can be collected from the V-SIPGW card and saved to a PC using the
V-SIPGW Protocol Trace.
This option requires that the target V-SIPGW card be set to INS status.
This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode.
Follow the steps below to trace and file V-SIPGW card protocol activity:
To save trace data to the System Memory
1. From the tree menu, select V-SIPGW Protocol Trace.
When the progress bar disappears, the protocol trace is complete. The trace data has been saved to the
System Memory (file name: "PRTSIPC").
To transfer trace data to the PC
1. Click the File Transfer PBX to PC link to access the file transfer screen.
The list of files will be displayed.

Note
The file transfer screen can also be accessed from the tree menu (see 7.2.2 Utility—File—File
Transfer PBX to PC).
2. Select the desired trace data file.
3. Click Transfer.
4. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
5. Enter a file name.
6. Click Save.
7. Click OK.

7.4.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—Air Sync

Group
This utility monitors the status of CSs being synchronised with air synchronisation. CSs receive data from
other CSs that they are currently synchronised with. Current Sync CS information is displayed for IP-CSs
that are in INS status.
This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode.

The displayed items for the Current Sync CS of each CS are as follows:

PC Programming Manual 111

7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—LAN Sync Group

Item Description
CS Type Type of CS that each CS is currently synchronised with.
Shelf The shelf number (or Virtual for IP-CSs) of the CS that each CS is
currently synchronised with.
Slot Slot number of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with.
Port Port number of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with.
CS / Repeater Indicates whether the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with is a
CS or Repeater.
CS Name Name of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with.
CS ID 12-digit ID number of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with.
Monitored Value Monitored value (dBm) of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised
with.
Monitored Level Monitored level (signal strength level) of the CS that each CS is currently
synchronised with.
Error Rate (%) Error Rate of the CS for each CS that it is currently synchronised with.

To monitor the status of CSs

1. From the Air Synchronisation Group Number drop-down list, select the desired Air Synchronisation
Group number.
2. From the Interval Timer drop-down list, select the number of seconds between each automatic screen
refresh.
3. Click Start to monitor the status of air synchronisation.
Monitoring will be performed and the screen will refresh according to the specified interval.
4. Click Stop to end monitoring.
5. To refresh the screen manually at any time, click Refresh.
6. To collect the monitored data, click Start Capture.
7. Click Stop Capture to finish and save the monitored data.
A dialogue box will be displayed.
8. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
9. Enter a file name.
10. Click Save.
The dialogue box will close.

7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—LAN Sync

Group
This utility monitors the status of CSs being synchronised with LAN synchronisation (KX-NS0154 only). CSs
receive data from other CSs that they are currently synchronised with. Information is displayed for IP-CSs
that are in INS status.
This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode.

The displayed items for each CS are as follows:

112 PC Programming Manual

 7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—LAN Sync Group

Item Description
Index A unique index for the CS. (This depends on the number of V-IPCS4
cards and the number of connected CSs.)
Shelf Always displays "Virtual".
Slot The slot number of the CS in the selected synchronisation group.
Port The port number of the CS.
Connection The connection status of the CS (OUS/INS/Fault).
LAN Sync Status The current synchronisation status of the CS, as follows:
1. No Sync.: Attempting to establish synchronisation
2. Establishing Sync.: Establishing synchronisation
3. Good: Currently synchronised
4. Keep Sync.: Maintaining synchronisation
5. Unstable: The CS is running unsynchronised
6. Sync. Lost: Synchronisation has been lost
7. Out of system: Cannot communicate with the PBX
8. Sync. Master: CS is the sync master or is a slave acting as the sync
master
LAN Sync Quality Level Shows the quality of the synchronisation, depending on the value of LAN
Sync Status, as follows:
• 1, 7, 8: "–" is displayed.
• 6: The quality of the synchronisation before synchronisation was lost is
displayed.
• Other: A number indicating the quality of the synchronisation (-16384–
16384 ns).

To monitor the status of CSs

1. From the LAN Synchronisation Group Number drop-down list, select the desired LAN
Synchronisation Group number.
2. From the Interval Timer drop-down list, select the number of seconds between each automatic screen
refresh.
3. Click Start to monitor the status of LAN synchronisation.
Monitoring will be performed and the screen will refresh according to the specified interval.
4. Click Stop to end monitoring.
5. To refresh the screen manually at any time, click Refresh.
6. To collect the monitored data, click Start Capture.
7. Click Stop Capture to finish and save the monitored data.
A dialogue box will be displayed.
8. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
9. Enter a file name.
10. Click Save.
The dialogue box will close.

PC Programming Manual 113

7.4.6 Utility—Monitor/Trace—UM System Trace (Internal)

7.4.6 Utility—Monitor/Trace—UM System Trace (Internal)

Unified Messaging (UM) system processes can be monitored and logged.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
The following data can be traced and logged for each UM port, or all UM ports:
• DTMF / Dial: data regarding DTMF signals received by the Unified Messaging system.
• Guidance: guidance data that the Unified Messaging system played.
• Message: Unified Messaging system activity for messages such as creating, playing and deleting.
• Process Event: events occurred between Unified Messaging system processes such as Application, Call
Processor and DSP.
• Caller ID: received Caller ID information.
• DID: received DID numbers.
• PIN: PINs received by the Unified Messaging system.
Follow the steps below to monitor or log the system trace data.
1. Select Internal Trace, Display, or Trace Clear.
– Setting
1. Check Enable / Disable Trace Data.
2. Check the data and UM ports you wish to monitor.
3. Click OK.
– Display: Displays the trace data and/or error data.
1. Check the data and UM ports you wish to monitor.
2. To include error data, click the Error Trace tab and check Error Data.
3. Click OK.
4. The selected data will be displayed in a new window. Click the Trace Data or Error Trace tabs
to switch views. Click Save Log File to save a copy of the displayed data.
5. Click Cancel when finished.
– Trace Clear: Clears saved trace data.
1. Select the trace data to clear.
2. Click OK to clear the selected trace data.
3. The message "System Trace Clear Successful" will be displayed. Click OK to continue.

7.4.7 Utility—Monitor/Trace—E1 Signalling Bit Monitor

Displays reference signalling bit information for all channels of a E1 card that is installed in an Expansion
Unit by monitoring sent and received A, B, C and D bits. This utility is intended for use by dealers.
For information about Expansion Units see 9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—
Expansion Unit1/Expansion Unit2/Expansion Unit3.
This option is only available at the Installer level, and requires that the target card be set to INS status.
While monitoring is being performed, any displayed bits whose value changes from 0 to 1 or vice versa will
be highlighted in red until the next screen refresh is performed.
To view signalling bit information
1. From the Shelf-Slot No. drop-down list, select the target slot. Each card will be preceded by the pattern
"X-Y" as follows:
• X: Shelf number (1-4)

114 PC Programming Manual

 7.4.8 Utility—Monitor/Trace—E1 Line Trace

– 1: Main Unit
– 2: Expansion Unit1
– 3: Expansion Unit2
– 4: Expansion Unit3
• Y: Slot number (1-7)
2. From the Interval Timer drop-down list, select the number of seconds between each automatic screen
refresh.
3. Click Start.
Monitoring will be performed and the screen will refresh according to the interval specified.
4. Click Stop to end monitoring.
To refresh the screen at any time while monitoring is stopped, click Refresh.

7.4.8 Utility—Monitor/Trace—E1 Line Trace

Traces the sent and received signalling bits and dial numbers on the specified channel of the E1 line card.
This utility is intended for use by dealers.
For information about Expansion Units, see 9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—
Expansion Unit1/Expansion Unit2/Expansion Unit3.
This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target card be set to INS status.

To view trace data

1. From the Shelf-Slot No. drop-down list, select the target slot. Each card will be preceded by the pattern
"X-Y" as follows:
• X: Shelf number (1-4)
– 1: Main Unit
– 2: Expansion Unit1
– 3: Expansion Unit2
– 4: Expansion Unit3
• Y: Slot number (1-7)
2. From the CH No drop-down list, select the target channel.
3. Click Start.
Trace information will be displayed. The information is automatically updated whenever the data being
monitored changes.
4. Click Stop to end the trace.
5. Select an option:
• Click Capture to save the displayed trace information.
Information will be saved to the PC as a text-format file.
• Click Clear to erase the information.

7.4.9 Utility—Monitor/Trace—TCP Trace

The TCP trace result of LAN port transmission activity can be output to the USB port.
You must log in using the Installer level account to use this feature.
You must access the TCP trace output destination device directly from the Web Maintenance Console when
using this feature. In a One-look network, you cannot access this feature via the Master PBX’s Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 115

7.4.9 Utility—Monitor/Trace—TCP Trace

TCP trace data is output to a USB memory device connected to the USB port. The TCP trace file is saved
without an extension in the root directory of the USB memory device.
The file name uses the time stamp from when the operation was started, and is "TCP_YYMMDDhhmmssN",
where YY: year, MM: month, DD: day, hh: hour, mm: minute, ss: second, and N: serial number.
If the generated TCP trace file exceeds 30 MB, it is split into separate files of up to 30 MB, as follows:
• TCP_YYMMDDhhmmss (The first file is not given a serial number.)
• TCP_YYMMDDhhmmss1
• TCP_YYMMDDhhmmss2
:
• TCP_YYMMDDhhmmssN
TCP trace data output stops when the remaining space in the USB memory device reaches 50 MB.

To output LAN port TCP trace data to a USB memory device

1. Click Start.
2. Click Stop to end the trace.

116 PC Programming Manual

 7.5 Utility—Report

7.5 Utility—Report
7.5.1 Utility—Report—Digital Trunk Error Report
Displays accumulated information on various types of errors occurring on digital trunks.
This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode.
The value displayed for each error item is the number of times that each error occurred during the time
period selected. Average values for these items vary depending upon many factors, such as the equipment
being used, and the distance from the telephone company.

The displayed items are as follows:

Item Description
Time Time of error
Slot Relevant slot and card type
Counter of Digital Trunk Out of SYNC (#300) Digital trunk out of sync (Loss of Signal)
Error Logs logged in
RAI (#301) Digital trunk RAI signal reception
"Minor Error" Log
AIS (#302) Digital trunk Alarm Indication Signal reception
Frame Failure (#300) Digital trunk frame failure (Loss of Frame)
Counter of minor CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check error
communication error
SF Severely errored frame (or Severe Framing
Error)
FE Frame synchronisation bit-error
LV Line Code Violation
SL Controlled slip

To view digital trunk information

1. From the Slot drop-down list, select the target slot.
• To generate a report on a specific card, select the slot number and card name.
• To generate a report on all matching cards simultaneously, select "All".
2. From the Display form drop-down list, select the time period to view.
3. Click Execute.
The error report will be displayed.

7.5.2 Utility—Report—IP Extension Statistical Information

Displays accumulated statistical information on IP extensions, IP-CSs (KX-NS0154 only), V-IPEXT cards,
V-IPCS cards, and the DSP card.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

The displayed items are as follows:

Item Description
Collection Started Time Date and time the port was last reset.

PC Programming Manual 117

7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports

Item Description
Port No. Number of the port.
RTP Receive Packet Counter Total number of packets received.
RTP Receive Lost Packet Counter Total number of packets lost.
RTP Receive Abandoned Packet Counter Total number of packets abandoned.
RTP Arrive Packet Interval (MAX.) [ms] Maximum time taken for a packet to arrive.
RTP Arrive Packet Interval (MIN.) [ms] Minimum time taken for a packet to arrive.

To view IP extension information

1. From the Card Selection drop-down list, select the slot number for the card.
2. Click Execute.
The statistical information will be displayed.
3. Select an option:
• Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information.
1. Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite.
2. Click Save.
• Click Clear to erase the information and reset the Collection Started Time.
4. Click Cancel to return to the main screen.

7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports

Unified Messaging (UM) system reports can be generated in order to monitor voice mail operations. Reports
can be displayed on a PC, printed, or exported.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

To view a report
1. In the View Report tab, select the desired report from the Report Parameters drop-down list.
2. Specify a range of mailbox numbers in the From and To boxes, or click Select all mailboxes.
3. Click View Report.
Some reports can be viewed as a table or as a graph. For these reports, select "Table" or "Graph"
under View As before clicking View Report.

To export a report
A report can be printed from Web Maintenance Console or exported as a text file or CSV file.
1. When viewing a report, select Print Out (PC), Text, or Comma-separated values (CSV) from the
drop-down menu.
2. Click Export.
3. If you select Print Out (PC):
A print command is sent to the PC. Follow any prompts to print the report.
If you select Text or Comma-separated values (CSV):
A file save dialogue is displayed. Specify the folder to export the report file to.

To clear a report
For each report, all data can be cleared. Follow the steps below to clear all report data. Some reports can
also be set to automatically clear at specified times.

118 PC Programming Manual

 7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports

1. Select the Report Data Clear (Manual) tab.

2. Select the desired report from Report Parameters.
3. Click Report Data Clear.

To automatically clear report data:

1. Select the Report Data Clear (Scheduled) tab.
2. Select Daily, Weekly, Monthly, or Yearly, and specify the time, the day of week or day of month, and
the month, as necessary.
3. Select the desired report from Report Parameters.
4. Click OK.

Note
For scheduling the Automatic Report Data Clear, if a day is specified that does not exist (i.e., February
31), the Automatic Report Data Clear will not be performed.

Unified Messaging System Reports

Report Type Description
Mailbox Information Report The mailbox information report displays configuration parameters
(from owner’s extension to e-mail options) for a specified mailbox
or a range of mailboxes. 50 records are displayed at a time for
this report.
Call Account Report*1 The call account report displays information about outgoing call
activity. Information can be shown by UM port or by mailbox. The
report includes date, starting time, used port, connection time,
called telephone number, call type, exit status of each callout,
total callouts number and the connection time for local or long
distance call, and total number of outgoing calls. 400 records are
displayed at a time for this report.
UM Extn. Usage Report*1 The port usage report displays information about each UM port,
such as connection time and percentage of time which each UM
port was busy.
Memory Card Usage Report*1 The memory usage report indicates the amount of storage space
used and the amount of available space. Available space is
expressed in minutes. Information for the number of messages
stored in and deleted from the Unified Messaging system is
displayed.
Mailbox Usage Report*1 The mailbox usage report displays information for a specified
mailbox or range of mailboxes, including the number of recorded
messages, the total time of outgoing calls, external messages,
message notification, and group message delivery.
• Specify the mailboxes for which you want to display a report,
then click View Report.
• Items not marked as "current" are accumulated indications
since the last clearing of this report.
100 records are displayed at a time for this report.

PC Programming Manual 119

7.5.4 Utility—Report—E-mail Report

Report Type Description

Fax Transfer Report*1 The fax transfer report displays information about faxes received
by the Unified Messaging system and transferred to a fax
extension. It includes the fax reception date, the port number
used, and the fax transfer status for a maximum of 64 fax
messages.
Call Handling Statistic Report*1 The call handling statistic report displays both a summary of and
details of Unified Messaging activity over a specified period of
time for the Automated Attendant service. This report includes the
total number of incoming calls, transferred calls, held calls, calls
which left a message, the result of transferred calls, etc.
Custom Service Report*1 The Custom Service report displays information such as Custom
Service settings, message recording status, number of access,
time of access, and number of access to each key.
Message Status Report The message status report provides the status of all messages of
specified subscribers.
Subscriber Setup Report The subscriber setup report displays the basic settings (owner’s
name, password, personal greeting, etc.) for a specified mailbox
or range of mailboxes.
Security Information Report The security information report displays information about mailbox
accesses. The report includes the date of the last change and last
access, number of total accesses, login, and failed accesses.
Hourly Statistics Report*1 The hourly statistics report displays information about the number
of incoming or outgoing calls, the connected time per hour, etc.

*1 This report can be set to be automatically cleared according to scheduled settings.

7.5.4 Utility—Report—E-mail Report

A log of information about e-mail messages sent using the functions of the PBX can be viewed in the E-mail
Report.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
The information in the report includes the following items for each e-mail message sent:
• User name under which the message was sent
• Unified Messaging mailbox number
• Time sent
• Destination e-mail address
• Sending status of the e-mail message

The maximum number of entries included in the report is as follows, depending on the type of the message:
• Voice mail notifications: 5,000 entries
• Missed call notifications: 1,000 entries
• Other e-mail messages (system messages, etc.): 1,000 entries

Note
Messages sent by the PBX, such as system alerts, will list the user as "System" and the mailbox
number as "—".

120 PC Programming Manual

 7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information

If these maximum amounts are exceeded, older records beyond the maximum amount for each type will be
deleted as new entries are recorded. To delete all e-mail report records, click Delete all E-mail report.

Exporting the E-mail Report

1. Select an export format from the drop-down list.
2. Click Export.
3. A download dialogue for the e-mail report will be displayed. Open the file to view it, or save the file to the
PC.

7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information

7.5.5.1 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—IP-CS Statistical
Information
Displays accumulated statistical information on the usage of wireless channels and air synchronisation of
IP-CSs.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

The displayed items are as follows:

Item Description
Date The date the information was acquired.
Time The time the information was acquired. Statistics are collected
every hour.
Available Channel (Max / Min / Maximum, minimum, and average number of available channels
Average) for the previous 1 hour.
Number of Location Registration The number of successful, failed, and total location registrations
(OK / NG / Total) for the previous 1 hour.
Number of Outgoing Call (OK / NG / The number of successful, failed, and total number of outgoing
Total) calls made by the CS for the previous 1 hour.
Number of Incoming Call (OK / NG / The number of successful, failed, and total number of incoming
Total) calls received by the CS for the previous 1 hour.
Number of etc. (OK / NG / Total) The number of successful, failed, and total number of other
transactions made by the CS for the previous 1 hour.
Air Sync Change*1 The number of times the CS has changed its air synchronisation
destination in the previous 1 hour.
Air Sync Self Running*1 The number of times the CS has switched to self-running mode in
the previous 1 hour.
Air Sync Lost*1 The number of times the CS has lost synchronisation in the
previous 1 hour.

*1 A dash is displayed if the selected CS is synchronised using LAN synchronisation.

To view IP-CS statistical information
1. In the Target IP-CS: CS Name drop-down list, select the CS whose statistics you want to view. Only
CSs that support this feature are displayed in the drop-down list.
The selected CS’s CSID is displayed in CSID, and the statistics for the selected CS are displayed.
2. To refresh the display with the latest statistics, click Refresh.

PC Programming Manual 121

7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information

Note
You can view a list of disconnected calls at the CS by clicking the "PS Call Disconnect Log" link in the
upper-right corner of the screen. For details, see 7.5.5.3 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—PS Call
Disconnect Log.

7.5.5.2 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—LAN Sync Information

Displays accumulated statistical information on the performance of CSs being synchronised using LAN
synchronisation. On this screen, you can view the performance of wireless devices on the LAN, which is
useful for troubleshooting and determining whether the number of channels needs to be increased.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

The displayed items are as follows:

Item Description
Date The date the information was acquired.
Time The time the information was acquired. Statistics are collected
every hour.
IP Address The IP address of the selected CS.
Sync Change The number of times the CS has changed its synchronisation
destination in the previous 1 hour.
Sync Lost The number of times the CS has lost its synchronisation in the
previous 1 hour.
Keep Sync The number of times the CS has switched to keep sync in the
previous 1 hour.
H.O Unable The number of times handover has not been possible in the
previous 1 hour.
Keep Sync Ratio (%) The percentage of time the CS has been in keep sync in the
previous 1 hour.
H.O Unable Ratio (%) The percentage of time the CS has been unable to do handover in
the previous 1 hour.
Keep Sync Time The length of time in minutes the CS has been in keep sync.
H.O Unable Time The length of time in minutes the CS has been unable to do
handover.

122 PC Programming Manual

 7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information

Item Description
Short Term Diag The short term (within the previous 1 hour) diagnosis for LAN
synchronisation.
• Indeterminable: Status cannot be determined.
• Indeterminable (IGMP Querier not found): Status cannot be
determined because the IGMP querier could not be found.
• Under Diagnosis: Diagnosis is being performed.
• OK: Synchronisation is OK.
• Not OK (Signal Jitter): Synchronisation is susceptible to jitter.
• Not OK (Signal delay): Synchronisation is susceptible to delay.
• Conditional OK (Signal Jitter): Synchronisation is OK, but jitter
is possible.
• Conditional OK (Signal delay): Synchronisation is OK, but delay
is possible.
• Out of Sync: Synchronisation cannot be established.
• Out of Sync (10base-T): Synchronisation cannot be established
on a 10Base-T connection.
• Out of Sync (100base-TX half): Synchronisation cannot be
established on a 100Base-TX half-duplex connection.
• Out of Sync (IGMP Querier not found): Synchronisation cannot
be established because an IGMP querier could not be found.
Long Term Diag The long term diagnosis for LAN synchronisation.
• Indeterminable: Status cannot be determined.
• Indeterminable (IGMP Querier not found): Status cannot be
determined because the IGMP querier could not be found.
• Under Diagnosis: Diagnosis is being performed.
• OK: Synchronisation is OK.
• Not OK (Signal Jitter): Synchronisation is susceptible to jitter.
• Not OK (Signal delay): Synchronisation is susceptible to delay.
• Conditional OK (Signal Jitter): Synchronisation is OK, but jitter
is possible.
• Conditional OK (Signal delay): Synchronisation is OK, but delay
is possible.
• Out of Sync: Synchronisation cannot be established.
• Out of Sync (10base-T): Synchronisation cannot be established
on a 10Base-T connection.
• Out of Sync (100base-TX half): Synchronisation cannot be
established on a 100Base-TX half-duplex connection.
• Out of Sync (IGMP Querier not found): Synchronisation cannot
be established because an IGMP querier could not be found.

PC Programming Manual 123

7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information

To view LAN synchronisation information

1. In the Target IP-CS: CS Name / MAC Address drop-down list, select the CS whose statistics you want
to view. Only CSs that support this feature are displayed in the drop-down list.
The selected CS’s MAC address is displayed in the text box, and the statistics for the selected CS are
displayed. The master CS’s name and MAC address are also displayed for reference.
2. To refresh the display with the latest statistics, click Refresh.

Note
You can view a list of disconnected calls at the CS by clicking the "PS Call Disconnect Log" link in the
upper-right corner of the screen. For details, see 7.5.5.3 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—PS Call
Disconnect Log.

7.5.5.3 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—PS Call Disconnect Log

Displays a list of PS calls that have been disconnected at the CS selected on the parent screen. This log
can be saved as a text file.
This screen can be accessed by clicking the "PS Call Disconnect Log" link on either the IP-CS Statistical
Information screen or the LAN Sync Information screen.
See 7.5.5.1 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—IP-CS Statistical Information and 7.5.5.2 Utility—
Report—IP-CS Information—LAN Sync Information.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

The displayed items are as follows:

Item Description
Index The entry’s index.
Date The date the call was disconnected.
Time The time the call was disconnected.
Error Message The reason the call was disconnected.
• Connection Error: There was an error in the connection.
Extension Number The extension number of the PS where the call was disconnected.
PS-ID The ID of the PS where the call was disconnected.

To save the log

1. Click Save.
The log information of CSs that support this feature is saved.
2. A download dialogue for the call disconnect report will be displayed. Open the file to view it, or save the
file to the PC.

124 PC Programming Manual

 7.6 Utility—Activation Key Installation

7.6 Utility—Activation Key Installation

Activation keys for various features of the PBX can be installed using this screen. Activation key files are
copied from a PC to the PBX and activated. Use the below procedure to install activation key files to a PBX.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. Click Browse and specify the directory where the activation key files are stored, and click Open.
2. A list of activation key files stored in the specified directory is displayed. Check the boxes next to the
activation keys to install to the PBX, and click Install.
3. The activation keys will be copied to the Main unit. When installation is complete, the message, "The
activation key has been installed and activated successfully!" is displayed.
4. Click OK.

Note
You can click the provided link to directly access 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—
Activation Key Status to view activation key information and programme the number of activated
IP-GW trunks and IP softphones.

PC Programming Manual 125

7.7 Utility—Email Notification

7.7 Utility—Email Notification

7.7.1 Utility—Email Notification—Alert
You can specify e-mail addresses that will receive messages regarding the PBX’s status.

System Alarm
An e-mail message will be sent to the specified address when there is a system alarm. The e-mail message
will contain details about the alarm.
1. For Filtering Setting, select the check boxes to specify whether to receive e-mails when there is a
Major alarm, a Minor alarm, or both.
2. Specify one or two e-mail addresses that will receive system alarm alert messages.
Notice
Be sure to enter e-mail addresses correctly. If an address is incorrectly entered, an alert will not be
received when there is a system alarm, or information regarding the PBX may be sent
unintentionally to a third party.
3. In Subject enter the text that will be used for the subject header of e-mails that are sent.
For Format—Message body type, select the check boxes to specify whether to include the subject in
the message body.
• Type1: Message body does not include the subject
• Type2: Message body includes the subject
4. Click OK when finished.
Licence Expiry
• Partner activation keys (product activation keys with an expiration date)*1
A notification e-mail will be sent to the specified addresses at midnight, 40 days before the activation key
expires. Or, if the PBX is started within 40 days of the activation key’s expiration, a notification e-mail will
be sent at that time to the specified addresses. Only 1 notification will be sent.
• Non-product activation keys with an expiration date
A notification e-mail will be sent to the specified addresses at midnight, 10 days before the activation key
expires if the PBX is turned on. If the PBX is started within 10 days of the activation key’s expiration, a
notification e-mail will be sent each time the PBX is started.
*1 For the following activation keys, the e-mail will be sent 40 days before the activation key expires.

– Poltys CCAccounting A.L.

– Poltys CCAcc. Enterprise A.L.

– Poltys CCView A.L.

– Poltys CCView add. PBX A.L.

– Poltys CCView Supervisor A.L. (1 user)

– Poltys CCView Supervisor A.L. (5 users)

– Poltys CCView CRM P-up A.L. (1 user)

– Poltys CCView CRM P-up A.L. (5 users)

– Poltys Number notice A.L.

– Poltys CCAgent A.L. (1 user)

– Poltys CCAgent A.L. (5 users)

126 PC Programming Manual

 7.7.2 Utility—Email Notification—System Analysis

– Poltys CCRecord Analogue A.L. (4 ports)

– Poltys CCRecord Analogue A.L. (8 ports)

– Poltys CCRecord Analogue A.L. (12 ports)

– Poltys CCRecord Analogue A.L. (16 ports)

– Poltys CCRecord Analogue A.L. (24 ports)

– Poltys CCRecord Digital A.L. (8 ports)

– Poltys CCRecord Digital A.L. (16 ports)

– Poltys CCRecord Digital A.L. (24 ports)

– Poltys CCRecord PRI A.L. (1 port)

– Poltys CCRecord PRI A.L. (2 ports)

– Poltys CCRecord SIP A.L. (4 ports)

1. Specify one or two e-mail addresses that will receive expiry notice messages.
Notice
Be sure to enter e-mail addresses correctly. If an address is incorrectly entered, an alert will not be
received when activation keys are about to expire, or information regarding the PBX may be sent
unintentionally to a third party.
2. In Subject enter the text that will be used for the subject header of e-mails that are sent.
For Format—Message body type, select the check boxes to specify whether to include the subject in
the message body.
• Type1: Message body does not include the subject
• Type2: Message body includes the subject
3. Click OK when finished.

7.7.2 Utility—Email Notification—System Analysis

Send a specific log file to the designated e-mail address(es).
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. Check the Log File Type drop-down menu, select a log file to send to the e-mail address.
2. Enter up to 2 e-mail addresses in Email Address 1 and Email Address 2.
3. In Subject, enter text to be used as the subject line of the e-mail sent.
4. Click Execute and the mail will be sent at that time.

7.7.3 Utility—Email Notification—Test Email

Send a test e-mail to confirm e-mail sending settings are correctly configured.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. Enter up to 2 e-mail addresses in Email Address 1 and Email Address 2.
2. In Subject, enter text to be used as the subject line of the e-mail sent.
3. Click Execute. A test mail will be sent to the specified address(es).
Mail settings can be viewed and set in 27.3.6 Network Service—[3-6] Client Feature—SMTP.

PC Programming Manual 127

7.8 Utility—Command

7.8 Utility—Command
7.8.1 Utility—Command—UM Command
System commands can be sent directly to the Unified Messaging system using the Commands dialogue.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Follow the steps below to use the Commands dialogue:
1. Enter the desired command, then click RUN. Results from entered commands are displayed.
2. When finished, click Close.

128 PC Programming Manual

 7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation

7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation

The System Prompts customisation screen is used to view, play, add, or delete system prompts. The
programmer can also check the prompt number and text for these prompts.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
The following categories of system prompts can be customised from the System Prompts customisation
screen:
a. System Guidance
b. Custom Service Menus
c. Company Greetings
d. Other
– Company Name
– Language Select Menu
– Hold Announce Menu
– Mailbox Group List
– System Caller ID
To customise system prompts, select a tab in the System Prompts dialogue box.

Notice
The system prompts initially installed on the SD Memory Card cannot be restored to their original state
by initialising or resetting the PBX; any changes made to the initially installed system prompts cannot be
undone. Before changing any system prompts, perform a backup of the initial system prompt data. See
6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup for details. Then, you can restore the system prompts to their initial state by
restoring the backup data. See 6.10 Tool—UM Data Restore for details.

Deleting Prompts
The programmer is able to delete specified system prompts.
To delete a specific system prompt:
1. Select the cell for the desired prompt number.
2. Click Delete.

Recording System Prompts

1. Select the desired system prompt to record, and click Play/Record.
2. Select "Record from extension" or "Import from recorded file".
When "Record from extension" is selected:
1. Specify the extension number of the telephone used for recording, then click Connect.
2. When the specified extension rings, go off-hook.
3. Click Record, Stop, or Play to record or play a system prompt.
4. Click Disconnect.
5. Click OK.
When "Import from recorded file" is selected:
1. Click Browse.
The Open dialogue box appears.
2. Navigate to the folder containing the WAV files you wish to import.
WAV files must meet the following specifications:

PC Programming Manual 129

7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation

– G.711 PCM codec

– 8 kHz, 8-bit sampling rate
– Monaural
– A-law or µ-law encoding
3. Select the desired WAV file.
4. Click Open to import the file.
5. Click OK.

Starting and Stopping System Prompt Playback

1. Select the desired system prompts.
2. Click Play/Record.
3. Click Play or Stop.

130 PC Programming Manual

 7.10 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording

7.10 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording

7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor
Setting
Specify the extensions of supervisors that will control the Automatic Two-way Recording feature for agent
extensions. These settings may be changed by a programmer with a User (Administrator) account.
1. Click Add/Delete.
2. Select supervisor extensions from the list, and click OK.
3. Repeat this procedure to add multiple supervisors. Click OK when finished.

7.10.2 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension

Setting
Specify the Automatic Two-way Recording settings for each supervisor. These settings may be changed by
a programmer with a User (Administrator) account.
1. From the Select a Supervisor drop-down list, select a supervisor (specified in 7.10.1 Utility—
Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting).
2. In UM Destination Mailbox specify the mailbox where the Automatic Two-way Recording data will be
sent. Select Add New Mailbox and specify a new mailbox number, or select an existing mailbox from
the Select Mailbox drop-down list.
3. In What type of calls to record, check the boxes to specify if internal calls, external calls, and/or calls
made to an incoming call distribution group will be recorded to the mailbox.
4. In Select User Extensions, click Add.
5. Select the check boxes for the agent extensions that the supervisor will control, and then click OK.
6. Click List View to confirm the current Automatic Two-way Recording settings for each supervised
extension.
7. Click OK when you have finished configuring settings and adding agent extensions for a supervisor.
Once these settings have been configured, supervisors can change settings for agent extensions they have
been assigned in 8.3.1 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Edit a Recording.

7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension

Setting List
In this list you can view the settings of extensions that are programmed to have calls recorded by the
Automatic Two-way Recording feature. Information for each extension, including the extension’s supervisor,
UM Group number, and Automatic Two-way Recording destination mailbox is displayed.
You can specify which types of calls will recorded for each extension. These settings may be changed by a
programmer with a User (Administrator) account.
1. For an extension, select a setting for Internal Call, External Call, and ICDG Incoming Only. (See
below for details.)
• Internal Call: Extension-to-extension calls are recorded.
• External Call: Calls with outside parties are recorded.
• ICDG Incoming Only: Only calls from outside parties that are received through an incoming call
distribution group are recorded.
2. Select On or Off for that setting.

PC Programming Manual 131

7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List

3. Click OK when finished.

The programming items displayed on this screen are as follows.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Indicates the extension number of the Max. 5 digits
Number extension (reference only). (consisting of
0–9)
Extension Indicates the name of the extension Max. 20
Name (reference only). characters
Internal Call Specifies whether intercom calls for the On, Off Feature Manual
extension will be automatically References
recorded. 3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way
Recording for Manager
Note
Calls between extensions that are
connected in a QSIG network are
seen as external calls, irrespective
of whether an activation key for
QSIG enhanced features is used. To
enable Automatic Two-way
Recording for this type of call, set
External Call to On.
External Call Specifies whether trunk calls for the On, Off Feature Manual
extension are automatically recorded. References
3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way
Recording for Manager
ICDG Specifies whether only trunk calls that On, Off Feature Manual
Incoming are received through an incoming call References
Only distribution group to the extension are 3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way
automatically recorded. Recording for Manager
Note
External Call must be set to "On" to
set this item to "On".
Supervisor Indicates the extension designated as a Extension PC Programming
supervisor that may play, delete, or number and Manual References
confirm the information of two-way user name 7.10.1 Utility—Automatic
recordings (reference only). Two-way Recording—
Supervisor Setting
Feature Manual
References
3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way
Recording for Manager

132 PC Programming Manual

 7.10.4 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Maintenance

Name Description Value Range Links

Mailbox Indicates the Unified Messaging Mailbox PC Programming
Number mailbox where two-way recordings will number Manual References
be stored (reference only). 7.10.2 Utility—Automatic
Two-way Recording—
Extension Setting
Feature Manual
References
3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way
Recording for Manager

7.10.4 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Maintenance

Automatic Two-way Recording can be enabled or disabled, or set to record until a specified date and time
by a programmer with a User (Administrator) account.
1. To start Automatic Two-way Recording, click Start. The button will change to display Stop.
Two-way recording for all designated extensions will continue until one of the following occurs:
• The Stop button is clicked.
• The two-way recording time limit or memory capacity has been reached.
• The date and time set in Recording Period is reached.
2. To set a specific time when Automatic Two-way Recording will stop:
a. In Recording Period, select Yes for Setting.
b. In Date & Time, enter a year, month, day, hour, and minute. Click on the calendar and clock
numbers to select them.
c. Click OK.
3. To end Automatic Two-way Recording any time, click Stop.

PC Programming Manual 133

7.11 Utility—UM - System Maintenance

7.11 Utility—UM - System Maintenance

Programme settings for Unified Messaging (UM) system maintenance.

System Maintenance Mode

Specifies whether to enable or disable System Maintenance Mode.

System Maintenance Start Time

Specifies the System Maintenance start time.
After specifying the settings on this screen, click OK.

134 PC Programming Manual

 7.12 Utility—CS-Web Connection

7.12 Utility—CS-Web Connection

You can specify the URL of the Super Master CS for your system, which will be used for accessing online
CS-Web system programming. For details about the Super Master CS and setting up SIP-CSs, refer to the
SIP-CS Installation Guide.
1. In Super Master CS-Web URL, enter the URL of the Super Master CS.
2. Click Test to confirm if the input URL is correct. If the URL is correct, the CS-Web login screen will open
in your web browser.
3. Click OK.
When programming in other screens, clicking the SIP-CS Web button on that screen will access CS-Web
system programming at the URL specified here.

PC Programming Manual 135

7.12 Utility—CS-Web Connection

136 PC Programming Manual

 Section 8
Users

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Users menu of the Setup screen of Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 137

8.1 Users—User Profiles

8.1 Users—User Profiles

Manage PBX settings on a per-user level. Information for each user account is displayed and can be added,
edited, or and deleted by a User (Administrator) or Installer level account.

Note
• For User (Administrator) accounts to change User (User) account settings, the Installer account must
use the Screen Customise tool to allow User (Administrator) accounts to view the Users—User
Profiles screen. For details, see 6.8 Tool—Screen Customise.
• When a User (User) level account accesses this screen, he may view and edit items for his account
as explained in 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User. In addition, some advanced settings are
available for User (User) level accounts only. For details, see 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—
Advanced setting.
The settings that can be changed in the User Profile List for each user are as follows:

Common
Item Description
First Name Specifies the first name of the user.
Last Name Specifies the last name of the user.
User Group Specifies the user’s group.
User groups can be set in Extension Settings:
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—
Extension Settings
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—
Extension Settings
Ext. No. Specifies the extension number associated with this user.
Extension numbers can be set in Extension Settings:
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—
Extension Settings
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—
Extension Settings
Ext. COS Select a Class of Service (COS) for the user from the drop-down list.
COS settings can be set in 10.7 PBX Configuration—[2-7] System—Class of
Service.
Mailbox No. Specifies the UM mailbox number for the user.
Mailbox COS Select a mailbox COS for the user from the drop-down list. Mailbox COS settings
can be set in 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service.

FWD/DND
Item Description
First Name Specifies the first name of the user.
Last Name Specifies the last name of the user.
FWD/DND setting - call from CO Specifies the FWD/DND setting for calls from trunks.
Mode

138 PC Programming Manual

 8.1 Users—User Profiles

Item Description
FWD setting - call from CO Specifies the FWD destination for calls from trunks.
Destination
FWD/DND setting - call from Ext. Specifies the FWD/DND setting for calls from extensions.
Mode
FWD setting - call from Ext. Specifies the FWD destination for calls from extensions.
Destination

For settings and details for FWD/DND items, refer to the following:
• 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND
• 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND
Option
Item Description
Rule of copy to extension name Determines how the First Name and Last Name set in User
Profiles is used for the Extension Name of the following settings.
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired
Extension—Extension Settings
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable
Station—Extension Settings

User Controls
• Add Button
To add a user profile for a single extension, click the button to open the Add User Wizard. See
8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User.
• Edit Button
To edit information on an individual user level, select a user from the list by clicking on the row of the user
to edit, then clicking the button to open the Add User Wizard with the selected user’s information filled
in. See 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User.
• Delete Button
To delete users:
1. Check the box(es) next to the user’s name(s) and click the button.
2. A confirmation message will appear. Click OK.
3. The user’s information is deleted from the list.
• Add Range Button
To add multiple user profiles for a range of extensions at one time, click the button. See 8.2.2 Users—
Add User—Multiple Users.

Note
• In order to edit the settings of the Unified Message tab by clicking the button, you must be logged
in to the PBX with the associated UM Group that your mailbox is assigned to. If you are logged in to a
PBX that is different from the PBX with the associated UM Group of your mailbox, the following items
will be greyed out:
– Prompt Registration
– Mailbox Password

PC Programming Manual 139

8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting

– Mailbox Password (Message Client)

– Advanced setting
If these items are greyed out, click Direct Login to log in directly to the PBX associated with the UM
Group of your mailbox to make changes to these items.
• The , , and buttons are not visible for User (User) level accounts.

8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting

When User (User) level accounts access their user profiles, they may view and edit items for their account
as explained in 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User. In addition, some advanced settings can also be
programmed by users.

Note
The advanced settings described here are displayed only for User (User) level accounts.
Accessing advanced user profile settings
1. Log in Web Maintenance Console using a User (User) level account.
2. In the user profile, click the Unified Message tab.
3. Click the Advanced setting button.
4. In addition to normal mailbox settings, Advanced Call Transfer Setting and Scenario Setting will be
displayed.

Advanced Call Transfer Setting

By combining the settings for Call Transfer and Incomplete Call Handling, you can create a call handling
"scenario" for your extension. Up to 20 scenarios can be created, and a scenario can be assigned to each
absent message. Click the Edit button in Advanced Call Transfer Setting to open the window for
programming. Select a Scenario number (1–20) from the drop-down menu, then programme the settings for
that scenario. Click OK at the bottom of the window when finished.
Name Description Value Range Links
Scenario Specify a name for the scenario for Max. 32 Characters Feature Manual
Name identification. References
3.2.2.6 Call
Transfer Scenario

140 PC Programming Manual

 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Call Transfer Determines how the Unified None: Rings the Feature Manual
Status— Messaging system will handle a call subscriber’s extension. References
Selection in the selected scenario. Call blocking: Handles 3.2.2.6 Call
the call according to the Transfer Scenario
Incomplete Call Handling
for No Answer setting for
the subscriber’s
extension. The
subscriber’s extension
will not ring.
Call screening: The
caller is prompted to
record his or her name.
The Unified Messaging
system then calls the
subscriber and plays
back the caller name.
The subscriber can
choose whether to
answer the call.
Leave a Message:
Transfers the caller to the
mailbox.
Intercom Paging: Pages
the subscriber by
intercom.
Transfer to specified
Custom Service Menu:
Transfers the caller to the
specified Custom
Service.
Call Transfer Specifies whether calls from certain Enable, Disable Feature Manual
Status—VIP telephone numbers will be References
Filter transferred directly to a specified 3.2.2.6 Call
extension or telephone number. Transfer Scenario
Note
This setting can only be set to
"Enable" when Call Transfer
Status—Selection is set to
"Leave a Message".
Call Transfer Specifies the telephone numbers Max. 32 digits Feature Manual
Status— that the VIP Filter setting will be References
Telephone applied to. When a call is received 3.2.2.6 Call
Number 1, 2, from any of the numbers specified Transfer Scenario
3 here, the call will be transferred
immediately to the destination
specified in Call Transfer Status—
Transfer to (Selection/Other).

PC Programming Manual 141

8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Call Transfer Specifies the transfer destination for Extension: The call is Feature Manual
Status— calls transferred according to the transferred to the user’s References
Transfer to VIP Filter setting. extension. 3.2.2.6 Call
(Selection/ Other: The call is Transfer Scenario
Other) transferred to the
telephone number that is
specified in Transfer to
(Other).
Call Transfer Select a Custom Service from the Custom Service PC
Status— drop-down menu if "Transfer to Programming
Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu" is Manual
specified selected for Call Transfer Status— References
Custom Selection.
23.3 UM
Service Menu
Configuration—
[4-3] Service
Settings—Custom
Service
Feature Manual
References
3.2.2.6 Call
Transfer Scenario
Call Transfer If "None" or "Call screening" is Max. 32 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Status— selected for Call Transfer Status— of 0–9, , and #) References
Transfer to Selection, specifying a telephone 3.2.2.6 Call
specified number here will transfer the caller Transfer Scenario
telephone to that telephone number.
number - 1
Note
If "Call screening" is selected,
the transfer destination will hear
the call screening prompt before
the call is transferred.

142 PC Programming Manual

 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Call Transfer If "None" or "Call screening" is Other, Extension, Feature Manual
Status— selected for Call Transfer Status— Covering Extension References
Transfer to Selection, and the call could not be If "Other" is specified, 3.2.2.6 Call
specified transferred to the number specified enter a maximum of 32 Transfer Scenario
telephone in Call Transfer Status—Transfer digits consisting of 0–9,
number 2, 3, to specified telephone number - 1, , and #.
4, 5 the call will be transferred according
(Selection/ to these settings for this scenario, in
Other) numerical order of priority.

Note
• This sequence has higher
priority than the alternate
extension transfer sequence
specified in 24.4 UM
Configuration—[5-4] System
Parameters—Parameters—
PBX Environment—
Alternate Extension
Transfer Sequence (Up to 16
digits / [0-9 * # D R F T
X , ;]).
• If "Call screening" is selected,
the transfer destination will
hear the call screening prompt
before the call is transferred.
Incomplete Specifies how the scenario handles Leave a Message: Feature Manual
Call Handling a call when there is no answer. Allows the caller to References
for No Answer record a message. 3.2.2.6 Call
Note Transfer to a covering Transfer Scenario
More than one option can be extension: Transfers the
selected. caller to a covering
extension.
Page the mailbox
owner by intercom
paging: Pages the
subscriber by intercom.
Transfer to operator:
Transfers the caller to an
operator.
Return to top menu:
Lets the caller return to
the top menu and try
another extension.
Transfer to specified
Custom Service Menu:
Transfers the caller to the
specified Custom
Service.

PC Programming Manual 143

8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Incomplete Specifies how the scenario handles Leave a Message: Feature Manual
Call Handling a call when the destination is busy. Allows the caller to References
for Busy record a message. 3.2.2.6 Call
Note Transfer to a covering Transfer Scenario
More than one option can be extension: Transfers the
selected. caller to a covering
extension.
Page the mailbox
owner by intercom
paging: Pages the
subscriber by intercom.
Transfer to operator:
Transfers the caller to an
operator.
Return to top menu:
Lets the caller return to
top menu and try another
extension.
Transfer to specified
Custom Service Menu:
Transfers the caller to the
specified Custom
Service.

Scenario Setting
You can select scenarios set in 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting for your extension. A
scenario can be set temporarily, or scenarios can be selected for use according to the Absent Message
setting of the extension of the subscriber. (→ 14.5 PBX Configuration—[6-5] Feature—Absent Message)
Temporary Scenario: Setting a scenario here will use that scenario indefinitely. A scenario set here will be
used regardless of the subscriber’s extension status. Selecting "None" will remove the setting.
Absent Message 1–9: The selected scenario will be used when the indicated Absent Message is set at the
extension.

144 PC Programming Manual

 8.2 Users—Add User

8.2 Users—Add User

8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User
The Add User—Single User screen provides a method to create user accounts and establish PBX settings
on a per-user level. When adding a user, the following settings can be specified. This screen will also be
displayed with information already entered when editing an existing user.

Note
User (User) level accounts may access this screen to edit their account information, but only the items
marked with a "*".

User Information
Item Description
First Name* Specifies the first name of the user (max 20 characters).*1
Last Name* Specifies the last name of the user (max 20 characters).*1
Change Language* Select the Web Maintenance Console language displayed for the user from the
drop-down list. Users may select different display languages without affecting
the display of other users.
Department Specifies a department description of up to 64 characters.
Section Specifies a section description of up to 64 characters.
User Group Select a User Group from the drop-down list.
User groups can be set in Extension Settings:
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—
Extension Settings
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—
Extension Settings
User Level Select a User Level from the drop-down list.
• The Installer level account may select User (User) or User (Administrator)
levels.
• User (Administrator) level accounts may only select the User (User) level.
*1 The First Name and Last Name set on this screen are applied to system settings as follows.

• The First Name and Last Name are copied to the Extension Name for the user’s extension number in the following settings.
A. 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main
B. 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main
The format of the extension name is determined by the setting in the User Profiles—Option tab:

– Rule-A: [First Name] [space] [Last Name]

– Rule-B: [Last Name] [,] [First Name]

Notice
If the length of the name copied to the Extension Name is longer than the maximum number of characters allowed for the
setting, the letters at the end of the name exceeding the maximum will be discarded.

• The First Name and Last Name are copied to the corresponding First Name and Last Name on the following screen for the
specified mailbox number.
C. 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters

• Changing the name settings in the Extension Settings or Mailbox Settings screens listed above will not change the First Name
or Last Name on this screen (the copying function is one-way).

PC Programming Manual 145

8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User

Contact
Item Description
Extension No. Select an extension for the user from the drop-down list.
Device Displays the device type of the selected extension.
Extension PIN* Specifies the user’s extension PIN.*1
DDI Specifies the user’s Direct Dial In (DDI) number.
Fax* Specifies the user’s fax number.
Phone (Home)* Specifies the user’s home telephone phone number.
Phone (Mobile)* Specifies the user’s mobile telephone phone number.
Email 1–3* Specifies the user’s e-mail address(es).*2

*1 The Extension PIN set on this screen is applied to system settings as follows.

• The Extension PIN is copied to the Extension PIN for the user’s extension number in the following settings.
A. 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main
B. 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main

• If Automatic copy to Mailbox Password is checked when the Extension PIN is input, the Extension PIN is also copied to
the following settings according to the user’s designated mailbox.

– Mailbox Password in the User Profiles—Unified Message tab.

– 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters—Mailbox Password

Notice
If the Extension PIN to be copied has less characters than the minimum number of characters required for the Mailbox
Password, the data will not be copied and an error message is displayed. See 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System
Security—Subscriber—Minimum Password Length (0-16 digits).
*2 The e-mail addresses set for Email 1–3 on this screen are applied to system settings as follows.

• If Use for missed call notification is checked when the Email 1–3 information is input, the user will receive an e-mail at the
address(es) specified when a trunk call is missed.

• If Automatic copy to UM message notification is checked when the Email 1–3 information is input, the input address(es) are
copied to the following setting. This process is one-way; changes to the below setting will not change the information input on
this screen.

– 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters—E-mail/Text Message Device—

Device No. 1, 2, 3—E-mail Address

Unified Message
Item Description
Mailbox Number Enter the UM mailbox for the user.
Class of Service Select a COS for the user from the drop-down list.
(COS)

146 PC Programming Manual

 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User

Item Description
Prompt Registration* Click Prompt Registration to open the User Prompt Registration screen. The
following prompts can be recorded in this screen:
• Mailbox owner name
• Personal greetings (No Answer, Busy, After Hour, Caller ID Greeting,
Temporary Greeting and Absent Message)
• Interview mailbox questions
• Personal caller ID name
To record a prompt
Select a prompt number and click Play/Record.
When "Record from extension" is selected:
1. Specify the extension number of the telephone used for recording, then
click Connect.
2. When the specified extension rings, go off-hook.
3. Click Record, Stop, or Play to record or play a system prompt.
4. Click Disconnect.
When "Import from recorded file" is selected:
1. Click Browse. The Open dialogue box appears.
2. Navigate to the folder containing the WAV files you wish to import.
3. Select the desired WAV file.
4. Click Open to import the file.
5. Click Upload.
6. Click OK.
To start and stop prompt playback
1. Select the desired prompt.
2. Click Play/Record.
3. Click Play or Stop.
4. Click OK.
To delete a specific prompt
1. Select the desired prompt.
2. Click Delete.
3. Click OK.
Mailbox Password* Click to specify the password for the mailbox.

Note
If Extension PIN is input in the Contact tab, and Automatic copy to
Mailbox Password is checked, the extension PIN will be copied to this
setting and overwrite any previously input data here.
Mailbox Password Click to specify the messaging client password for the mailbox.
(Message Client)*

PC Programming Manual 147

8.2.2 Users—Add User—Multiple Users

Item Description
Advanced setting* Click to view the selected mailbox’s settings. See 20.1 UM Configuration—[1]
Mailbox Settings.

Note
When User (User) level accounts access these settings, additional items
are displayed. See 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting.
Unified Messaging Click to open a new window in your Web browser and access the download
Plug in site for the IMAP Session Controller software.

Telephony Feature
Item Description
Class of Service Select the COS for the user from the drop-down list.
(COS)
Forward / Do Not Specifies the user’s FWD/DND settings for trunk calls.
Disturb—For external For the FWD destination, Phone (Home) or Phone (Mobile) (as specified in
calls* the Contact tab), or a manually input number can be specified.
Forward / Do Not Specifies the user’s FWD/DND settings for extension calls.
Disturb—For internal For the FWD destination, Phone (Home) or Phone (Mobile) (as specified in
calls* the Contact tab), or a manually input number can be specified.
Speed Dialling View/ Click this button to open the Speed Dial screen. The appropriate screen (wired
Edit* extension or portable station) will be opened according to the extension
specified for the user.
Flexible Button View/ Click this button to open the Flexible Button screen. The appropriate screen
Edit* (wired extension or portable station) will be opened according to the extension
specified for the user.

Login Account
Item Description
Login ID Set a login ID for the user. (4-16 characters in length)

Note
Login IDs must be unique for each user.
Password* Set a password for the user. (4-16 characters in length)
Re-enter* Re-enter the password for confirmation.

When all relevant information has been set, click OK to add or reflect changes to the user account.

Note
If the user changes any of their own settings, they will be applied to the user the next time they log into
Web Maintenance Console.

8.2.2 Users—Add User—Multiple Users

The Add User—Multiple Users screen provides a method to create multiple user profiles for a range of
extensions at one time.
1. In the From and To fields, specify the range of extensions to create profiles for.

148 PC Programming Manual

 8.2.2 Users—Add User—Multiple Users

2. Select the Create mailboxes with the same number as the extensions check box if you want to
create Unified Messaging mailboxes whose mailbox numbers are the same as the assigned extension
numbers.
3. If you choose to create mailboxes in step 2, select where the mailboxes will be created:
4. Click OK.
Settings automatically programmed for each user
• First Name/Last Name
The Extension Name, which is the name displayed on extension LCDs, can be copied all at once to the
First Name and Last Name settings for each extension. The format for copying the Extension Name
can be selected as follows.
1. Click Setup → Users → User Profiles.
2. On the Option tab, for Rule of copy to extension name select one of the following.
– Rule-A: [First Name] [space] [Last Name]
– Rule-B: [Last Name] [,] [First Name]
For more information, refer to "5.9 Configuration of Users" in the Installation Manual.
• Login ID: The extension number (i.e., if the extension is "101", the Login ID for the user will also be
"101")
• Password: "PWD" + the extension number for the user (e.g., "PWD101")

Note
• When OK is clicked, if any extensions within the range specified in step 1 already have user accounts
associated with them, the process will not complete, and an error message will be displayed.
• If the Create mailboxes with the same number as the extensions check box is selected and a
mailbox number has already been assigned to another extension, the user profile will be created
without a UM mailbox assigned to it.
• If the maximum number of digits for a mailbox number (Mailbox No. Max. Length (3-8) in 24.4 UM
Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters) is less than the number of digits for the
specified extensions, the maximum number of digits for a mailbox number will be automatically
increased to match the number of digits for the specified extensions.
• A maximum of 500 users can be created at once using this feature.

PC Programming Manual 149

8.3 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording

8.3 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording

This screen is accessible only by users designated as Automatic Two-way Recording supervisors. See
7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

8.3.1 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Edit a Recording

On this screen, a user designated as a supervisor may change Automatic Two-way Recording settings for
extensions they are supervising. Information for each extension, including the extension’s supervisor, and
Automatic Two-way Recording destination mailbox is displayed.
You can specify which types of calls will recorded for each extension.
1. For an extension, click the setting for Internal Call, External Call, or ICDG Incoming Only.
• Internal Call: Extension-to-extension calls are recorded.
• External Call: Calls with outside parties are recorded.
• ICDG Incoming Only: Only calls that are received by the extension through an incoming call
distribution group are recorded.
2. Select On or Off for that setting.

Note
To set ICDG Incoming Only to "On", External Call must first be set to "On".
3. Click OK when finished.

8.3.2 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Record List

Users designated as supervisors can view and play messages recorded using the Automatic Two-way
Recording feature.
1. Select one or more mailboxes, and click OK.
2. Messages recorded in the selected mailbox(es) will be displayed. You can filter the list of messages
displayed or play a message.
To filter the list of messages:
Specify any number of the following conditions, and then click Search to display the messages that
match those conditions.
• Mailbox: Specify an Automatic Two-way Recording mailbox, or select All.
• Extension: Specify an extension to view all calls that were recorded using Automatic Two-way
Recording for that extension, or select All.
• Status: Specify the status for the recorded messages in the mailbox.
• Internal/External: Specify whether the recorded conversations were intercom calls or trunk calls, or
specify both.
• Call Type: Specify whether the recorded conversations were incoming calls or outgoing calls, or
specify both.
– If Internal/External is set to "Internal" or "Both", Call Type will be set to "Both".
– If Internal/External is set to "External", Call Type can be set to "Incoming", "Outgoing", or "Both".
• Phone Number: Specify the phone number of the party calling the recorded extension.
• Caller Name: Specify the name of the party that called the recorded extension (may not be available
for all recorded messages).
• Length: Specify the length of the recorded conversations.

150 PC Programming Manual

 8.3.2 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Record List

• Period: Specify a time period in which calls were recorded.

To play a message:
For playback on the PC:
1. Select the check box of a message to play.
2. At the bottom of the screen, select PC.
3. Click the button.
The message will be downloaded as an audio file for playback on the PC being used to connect to
Web Maintenance Console.
For playback using the supervisor’s designated extension:
1. In the Mailbox filter, select the mailbox whose messages you want to display, and then click
Search.
2. Select the check boxes for one or more messages to play.
3. At the bottom of the screen, select Phone.
4. Click the button.

Note
If All has been selected for the Mailbox filter, the button will be disabled. Select a specific
mailbox to enable the button.
5. In the window that appears, enter the extension number in Specify Extension of the extension at
which to play back the messages, and then click Connect.
6. Go off-hook when the extension rings to establish a call with the UM message playback system.
7. During the call, click Play to listen to the currently selected message. If multiple messages were
selected in step 2, you can click Prev and Next to cycle through and listen to the selected
messages.
8. When you are finished listening to messages, click Disconnect or go on-hook.

PC Programming Manual 151

8.4 Users—Call Management

8.4 Users—Call Management

This screen is accessible only by users designated as an ACD supervisor. This screen can be accessed
only in On-line mode.

8.4.1 Users—Call Management—Group Monitor

Description
Users designated as an ACD supervisor can specify an ICD group to monitor, set monitoring conditions, and
begin monitoring.
Name Description Value Range Links
Supervisor Selects the ACD supervisor from a drop- Registered Feature Manual
selection down list. ACD References
This operation is available only at the User supervisors 2.2.2.10 Supervisory
(Administrator) level. Feature (ACD)
For details about ACD supervisor settings,
see 11.5.4 PBX Configuration–[3-5-4]
Group—Incoming Call Distribution
Group—ACD Supervisor.
Start Monitor Click the Start Monitor button to start Feature Manual
monitoring the target ICD group. This References
feature requires the Call Centre Feature 2.2.2.10 Supervisory
Enhancement activation key or the Built-in Feature (ACD)
ACD report activation key. If this activation
key is not installed, the Start Monitor
button is greyed out.
Basic Settings— Specifies the layout of monitoring results. 1 Group, 4 Feature Manual
Layout Groups References
2.2.2.10 Supervisory
Feature (ACD)
Basic Settings— Selects the ICD groups to be managed by ICD groups Feature Manual
Select ICD Group the ACD supervisor, from a drop-down list. References
2.2.2.10 Supervisory
Feature (ACD)
Options—Member Specifies the display mode of the status of Standard, Feature Manual
Status View Mode group members. Simple References
2.2.2.10 Supervisory
Feature (ACD)
Options— Specifies the threshold number of current 1–30 Feature Manual
Highlighted waiting calls. When this number is References
Display Settings matched or exceeded, calls are 2.2.2.10 Supervisory
—Number of highlighted on the monitor screen. Feature (ACD)
Current Waiting
Calls (1-30)

152 PC Programming Manual

 8.4.2 Users—Call Management—ACD Report

Name Description Value Range Links

Options— Specifies the waiting time after which calls 0–10’00 Feature Manual
Highlighted are highlighted on the monitor screen. References
Display Settings When this setting is set to "0", all waiting 2.2.2.10 Supervisory
—Waiting Time calls are highlighted. Feature (ACD)
(0-10 min/10 sec)
Options— Specifies the colour mode of highlighted Mode 1, Mode Feature Manual
Highlighted items on the monitor screen. 2, Mode 3 References
Display Settings 2.2.2.10 Supervisory
—Colour Mode Feature (ACD)
Options— Specifies whether highlighted items blink Enable, Feature Manual
Highlighted on the monitor screen. Disable References
Display Settings 2.2.2.10 Supervisory
—Blinking Feature (ACD)
Options— Select the display resolution of the monitor Disable, Feature Manual
Highlighted screen for full screen display. Automatic, References
Display Settings 1024 × 768, 2.2.2.10 Supervisory
—Full Screen Note 1280 × 1024, Feature (ACD)
Display (pixels) When you select Automatic, the 1920 × 1080
system automatically recognises the
specified resolution of your PC display
and selects a full screen resolution
from the following display resolutions.
If any of these sizes do not match the
specified resolution for your PC
display, select the resolution that is
smaller than and closest to your
monitor’s maximum display resolution.

8.4.2 Users—Call Management—ACD Report

Description
The ACD supervisor can check the conditions of the ICD group and extension lines. Follow the instructions
on the screen. Refer to "2.2.2.10 Supervisory Feature (ACD)" in Feature Manual.

8.4.3 Users—Call Management—ACD Scheduled Export

On this screen, users can register or delete the schedule for the automatic export of ACD Report data. The
PBX system will automatically export the selected ACD Report data at the scheduled times to an E-mail
(SMTP), USB memory device or NAS connected to the PBX. (ACD scheduled exports cannot be made to a
local PC.) For details about ACD reports, see 8.4.2 Users—Call Management—ACD Report.

Follow the procedure below to schedule the automatic export of ACD Report data.
1. Click to create a new scheduled export.
2. In Description / E-mail Title, enter a description for the export or an E-mail Title (maximum 32
characters). This information is shown as the description of the ACD Scheduled Export.
3. Select a report profile to be used for the scheduled export. If no report profile is selected, all items will
be exported.
For the details about report profiles, see 8.4.2 Users—Call Management—ACD Report.

PC Programming Manual 153

8.4.4 Users—Call Management—ACD Export History

4. Specify the file name for the exported ACD report data (maximum 32 characters).
5. Set the frequency (daily, weekly, etc.) and time of day for when the export should take place.
6. Select the type of CSV separator value to be used for the exported CSV files.
7. In Export to, select a USB memory device or NAS, and then specify the folder on the selected device
where you want to save the ACD scheduled export file. Or select E-mail (SMTP) to send an email,
attaching the ACD report file that is scheduled and exported.
8. Click OK.

Note
• Installer and User (Administrator) level accounts can select a supervisor from the Supervisor
selection drop-down list in 8.4.3 Users—Call Management—ACD Scheduled Export.
Each supervisor can register up to 10 schedules for the automatic export of ACD reports.
• If an ACD report export is scheduled and a USB memory device has been selected in Export to,
but a USB memory device is not connected to the PBX at the time of the scheduled export, the
ACD scheduled export will not be performed.
• When using a NAS, make sure there is sufficient network bandwidth.
• If an ACD report export is scheduled and E-mail (SMTP) is selected in Export to, attach the ACD
scheduled export files of User, Group, and Call when e-mailing.

Editing ACD export schedules

1. From the ACD Report–ACD Scheduled Export screen, select the schedule you wish to edit.
2. Click .
3. Edit the settings as desired.
4. Click OK.

Deleting a scheduled export

1. From the ACD Report–ACD Scheduled Export screen, select the schedule you wish to delete.
2. Click .
3. Click OK.

8.4.4 Users—Call Management—ACD Export History

The export history for ACD Report data can be checked on this screen. The following items are recorded for
each export:
• Date/Time
• Description
• Parameters
• Report Profile
• Completion Status
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

Note
• Installer and User (Administrator) level accounts can select a supervisor from the Supervisor selection
drop-down list in 8.4.2 Users—Call Management—ACD Report.
• The date/time display can be switched between 12 hour and 24 hour in 10.9 PBX Configuration—
[2-9] System—System Options—Option 1—PT LCD—Time Display.

154 PC Programming Manual

 8.4.4 Users—Call Management—ACD Export History

The export history of ACD Report data on the current screen is saved as a text file.
When you export the ACD report manually, a hyphen will be displayed for the report profile in the ACD
Report data export history.

PC Programming Manual 155

8.4.4 Users—Call Management—ACD Export History

156 PC Programming Manual

 Section 9
PBX Configuration—[1] Configuration

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Configuration menu of the PBX Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 157

9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

The operating characteristics associated with each service card can be programmed.
Move the mouse pointer over an installed card to display the menu of options for that card. To view a
summary of status and versions for all cards installed in the PBX, click the Slot Summary button (see
9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property).

To select a shelf in the PBX

Click one of the following buttons to view the shelf in the PBX:
• Basic Unit: View the basic unit.
• Expansion Unit1: View the physical card shelf of the Expansion Unit connected to connection port 1 of
the EXP-M card.
• Expansion Unit2: View the physical card shelf of the Expansion Unit connected to connection port 2 of
the EXP-M card.
• Expansion Unit3: View the physical card shelf of the Expansion Unit connected to connection port 3 of
the EXP-M card.
• Virtual Slot: View the virtual card shelf.

To install a new physical card to the PBX

1. Click on the name of the card to install in the list on the right.
An image of the card will be displayed, and information about the card will be shown.
2. Click and drag the image of the card to the slot, and release it.
The card will move into the slot space.
3. Click OK to confirm.

To add new virtual cards to the PBX

1. Click on the name of the card to install at the top.
2. Click and drag the image of the card to the slot, and release it. The card will move into the slot space.
3. Click OK to confirm.

To access card properties

1. Move the mouse pointer over a card.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Select Card Property.
The property screen for that card will be displayed.

To access port properties of cards

1. Move the mouse pointer over a card. For combination physical cards, move the mouse pointer over the
individual card name.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Select Port Property.
The property screen for that card’s port or ports will be displayed.

To remove a card from the PBX

1. Move the mouse pointer over the card to remove.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.

158 PC Programming Manual

 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

2. Select Delete.
3. Click OK to confirm.
The card will be removed.

Note
The cards in Slot No.1-No.3 of the Basic Unit and the card in Slot No.1 of the Expansion Unit cannot
be deleted because these cards are pre-installed.

To display the status information of a card

1. Move the mouse pointer over the card.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Select Status.
The status information of the card will be displayed in a pop-up window.

To change the status (INS/OUS) of a card (On-line mode only)

1. Move the mouse pointer over the card.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Select the desired status:
• Click INS to set the card to in-service status.
• Click OUS to set the card to out-of-service status.

To access IP-PT port properties

1. When you place the mouse cursor over the IP Phone Registration button on the Slot screen, the
following choices appear. Click an option to open a port properties programming screen:

IP-PT: For KX-NT300/KX-NT500 series and KX-NT265 (software version 2.00 or later) IP-PTs
(→ 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT)

SIP-MLT: For KX-UT series SIP phones, S-PSs, and SIP-CSs

(→ 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-UTEXT)

Standard SIP Phone: For third party SIP Phones

(→ 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT)

Option: Opens the Site Property—Main screen.

(→ 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—Main)

PC Programming Manual 159

9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

Card Types Supported by the Main Unit

Max. No/ Max. No/Line
Installation Type Card Type Card Programming
Card Type Type
9.11 PBX Configuration—
V-IPGW16: Virtual 16-
[1-1] Configuration—Slot
Channel VoIP 2
—Shelf Property—
Gateway Card
4 V-IPGW
(Trunk) 9.8 PBX Configuration—
V-SIPGW16: Virtual
[1-1] Configuration—Slot
16-Channel SIP Trunk 4
—Shelf Property—
Card
V-SIPGW
9.13 PBX Configuration—
V-IPEXT32: Virtual 32-
[1-1] Configuration—Slot
Channel VoIP 4
Virtual —Card Property—
Extension Card
V-IPEXT
9.15 PBX Configuration—
V-SIPEXT32: Virtual
4 [1-1] Configuration—Slot
32-Channel SIP 4
(Extension) —Card Property—
Extension Card
V-SIPEXT
V-UTEXT32: Virtual 9.19 PBX Configuration—
32-Channel SIP [1-1] Configuration—Slot
4
Proprietary Extension —Card Property—
Card V-UTEXT
V-IPCS4: Virtual 4 IP 9.17 PBX Configuration—
8
Cell Station Interface 8 [1-1] Configuration—Slot
(IP CS)
Card —Card Property—V-IPCS
9.23 PBX Configuration—
LCOT6: 6-port 1 [1-1] Configuration—Slot
1
Analogue Trunk Card (Trunk) —Card Property - LCO
type
Pre-Installed DLC2: 2-port Digital 1 9.21 PBX Configuration—
1
Extension Card (Extension) [1-1] Configuration—Slot
—Card Property—
MCSLC16: 16-port 1 Extension Type
1
SLT Card (Extension)

160 PC Programming Manual

 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

Max. No/ Max. No/Line

Installation Type Card Type Card Programming
Card Type Type
9.23 PBX Configuration—
LCOT6: 6-port [1-1] Configuration—Slot
1
Analogue Trunk Card —Card Property - LCO
type
PRI23: PRI23 Trunk 9.25 PBX Configuration—
1
Card [1-1] Configuration—Slot
—Card Property - BRI
1 type/PRI type
PRI30/E1: PRI30/E1 (Trunk) 9.28 PBX Configuration—
1
Option - Trunk / Trunk Card [1-1] Configuration—Slot
Doorphone Slot —Card Property—E1 type
BRI2: BRI2 Trunk 9.25 PBX Configuration—
1
Card [1-1] Configuration—Slot
—Card Property - BRI
BRI4: BRI4 Trunk
1 type/PRI type
Card
9.34 PBX Configuration—
DPH2: 2-port
1 [1-1] Configuration—Slot
Doorphone Interface 1
(Doorphone) —Card Property—
Card
DOORPHONE Card
DHLC4: 4-port Digital
2
Hybrid Extension Card
DLC8: 8-port Digital 2
2
Extension Card (Extension)
9.21 PBX Configuration—
Option - MCSLC8: 8-port SLT [1-1] Configuration—Slot
2
Extension Slot Card —Card Property—
Extension Type
DLC16: 16-port Digital
1
Extension Card 1
MCSLC16: 16-port (Extension)
1
SLT Card

Card Types Supported by Expansion Units

Max. No/ Max. No/Line
Installation Type Card Type Card Programming
Card Type Type
9.21 PBX Configuration—
MCSLC16: 16-port 1 [1-1] Configuration—Slot
Pre-Installed 1
SLT Card (Extension) —Card Property—
Extension Type

PC Programming Manual 161

9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

Max. No/ Max. No/Line

Installation Type Card Type Card Programming
Card Type Type
9.23 PBX Configuration—
LCOT6: 6-port [1-1] Configuration—Slot
2
Analogue Trunk Card —Card Property - LCO
type
PRI23: PRI23 Trunk 9.25 PBX Configuration—
1
Card [1-1] Configuration—Slot
—Card Property - BRI
2 type/PRI type
PRI30/E1: PRI30/E1 (Trunk) 9.28 PBX Configuration—
1
Option - Trunk / Trunk Card [1-1] Configuration—Slot
Doorphone Slot —Card Property—E1 type
BRI2: BRI2 Trunk 9.25 PBX Configuration—
2
Card [1-1] Configuration—Slot
—Card Property - BRI
BRI4: BRI4 Trunk
2 type/PRI type
Card
9.34 PBX Configuration—
DPH2: 2-port
1 [1-1] Configuration—Slot
Doorphone Interface 1
(Doorphone) —Card Property—
Card
DOORPHONE Card
DHLC4: 4-port Digital
2
Hybrid Extension Card
DLC8: 8-port Digital 2
2
Extension Card (Extension)
9.21 PBX Configuration—
Option - MCSLC8: 8-port SLT [1-1] Configuration—Slot
2
Extension Slot Card —Card Property—
Extension Type
DLC16: 16-port Digital
1
Extension Card 1
MCSLC16: 16-port (Extension)
1
SLT Card

For more information on the virtual cards and other optional cards, see the following sections in the
Installation Manual:
→ 4.4 Virtual Cards
→ 4.5 Physical Trunk and Extension Cards
For information about cards supported by Expansion Units, see System Components for Expansion Unit in
the Installation Manual.

Common Programming Reference Items

When programming settings for cards, extensions, and other devices using Web Maintenance Console,
depending on the screen being accessed, the following items may be listed on the screen for your
reference:

162 PC Programming Manual

 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

Item Description
Shelf Indicates the physical or virtual shelf where the card, extension, or device is located in
the PBX.
• Shelf "1" is the physical shelf of the Main Unit.
• Shelf "2" corresponds to the Expansion unit connected to EXP-M port 1.
• Shelf "3" corresponds to the Expansion unit connected to EXP-M port 2.
• Shelf "4" corresponds to the Expansion unit connected to EXP-M port 3.
Slot Indicates the slot number within the shelf where the card, extension, or device is
located.
Port Indicates the port number assigned to the extension or device.

PC Programming Manual 163

9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property

9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—

System Property
9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System
Property—Main
The properties of the PBX system can be specified.

Main
Value
Name Description Links
Range
DSP CODEC G.711 Specifies whether or not to only use the Enable,
only (SIP extension) G.711 codec for SIP extension calls. Disable
DSP CODEC G.711 Specifies whether or not to only use the Enable,
only (IP-GW) G.711 codec for IP trunk calls. Disable
DSP CODEC Specifies whether or not to only use the Enable,
Priority-1 value only priority 1 codec set for the following Disable
(others) types of calls:
• IP extension calls
• SIP trunk calls
System Speed Dial Specifies the maximum number of 0–300 PC Programming
Download For UT system speed dial entries that will be Manual References
Extensions downloaded to KX-UT series SIP 9.20 PBX Configuration
phones. —[1-1] Configuration—
Slot—Port Property—
V-UTEXT—Option—
System Speed Dial
Download

System Status
Name Description Value Range Links
CPU Usage Displays the system CPU’s current processor load, expressed 0–100%
as a percentage of total capacity (reference only).
Memory Usage Displays the amount of system memory currently being used, 0–100%
displayed as a percentage of total capacity (reference only).
SD card Usage Displays the amount of SD Memory Card memory currently 0–100%
being used, displayed as a percentage of total capacity
(reference only).

V-IPGW
Name Description Value Range Links
Call Signalling Model Specifies whether to carry out a call control Direct, GateKeeper
(H.225) process directly between the cards
or through a gatekeeper.

164 PC Programming Manual

 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Gatekeeper Connection Specifies the time between periodic checks 0 (disabled), 1–1440
Checking Interval (*60s) of connection to the gatekeeper.
Terminal type to Specifies the connection service type Terminal, Gateway
Gatekeeper notified to the gatekeeper.
Gatekeeper ID to Specifies the authentication ID notified to Max. 20 Characters
Gatekeeper the gatekeeper.
Bandwidth to Specifies the used bandwidth information 1–255 kbps
Gatekeeper notified to the gatekeeper.
Primary Gatekeeper IP Specifies the IP address of the primary 1.0.0.0–
Address gatekeeper. 223.255.255.255
Primary Gatekeeper Port Specifies the port number of the primary 1–65535
Number gatekeeper.
Secondary Gatekeeper Specifies the IP address of the secondary 1.0.0.0–
IP Address gatekeeper. 223.255.255.255
Secondary Gatekeeper Specifies the port number of the secondary 1–65535
Port Number gatekeeper.
H.225 Port Number Specifies the port number for the H.225 1–65535
protocol (call control) in an H.323 protocol
suite.
RAS Port Number Specifies the port number for the H.225 1–65535
protocol (RAS) in an H.323 protocol suite.
QSIG Connectionless Specifies the TCP port number for 1–65535
Tunnelling TCP Port connectionless tunnelling between gateway
Number devices at different locations in a QSIG
network.
QSIG Connectionless Specifies the UDP port number for 1–65535
Tunnelling UDP Port connectionless tunnelling between gateway
Number devices at different locations in a QSIG
network.
H.323 Dynamic Port Specifies the starting port number from 1–65000
Number which 448 contiguous ports are used as
dynamic ports.

V-IPGW–GW Settings–Main
Name Description Value Range Links
GW Name Specifies the name of the destination gateway Max. 20 characters
device for programming reference.
GW IP Address Specifies the IP address of the destination gateway 1.0.0.0–
device. 223.255.255.255
GW Group Specifies the number of the gateway group to 1–256, None
which the gateway entry belongs. A maximum of
256 gateway groups can be created.

PC Programming Manual 165

9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Connection for Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection Disable (TDE), Enable
IP-GW feature between the V-IPGW and KX-TDE/KX-TDA (TDA)
IP-GW cards.
Protocol Specifies the type of protocol for connectionless TCP, UDP
tunnelling between gateway devices at different
locations in a QSIG network.
Progress Tone Specifies whether to send call progress tones to External, Internal
Send Mode the destination. When selecting External, call
progress tones are audible at the destination.

V-IPGW–GW Settings–Option 1
Name Description Value Range Links
GW Name Specifies the name of the destination gateway Max. 20 characters
device for programming reference.
IP Codec Specifies the priority of the codecs to be used. For 1st:
Priority—1st, For fax communications, it is necessary to G.711A, G.711Mu, G.
2nd, 3rd specify G.711A or G.711Mu for 1st priority. 729A
For 2nd and 3rd:
None, G.711A, G.711Mu,
G.729A
Packet Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50
Sampling Time measurements (samples) of sound data during a ms, 60 ms
(G.711A) conversation. The smaller this number, the
higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
Packet Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50
Sampling Time measurements (samples) of sound data during a ms, 60 ms
(G.711Mu) conversation. The smaller this number, the
higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
Packet Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50
Sampling Time measurements (samples) of sound data during a ms, 60 ms
(G.729A) conversation. The smaller this number, the
higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

V-IPGW–GW Settings–Option 2
Name Description Value Range Links
GW Name Specifies the name of the destination Max. 20
gateway device for programming characters
reference.
Voice Activity Enables the use of the Voice Activity Disable, Enable
Detection for Detection feature for the G.711 codec.
G.711 This feature conserves bandwidth by
detecting silent periods during a call and
suppressing the packets of silence from
being sent to the network.
FAX Sending Specifies the method of transporting the G.711 Inband, T.38
Method fax signal.

166 PC Programming Manual

 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Maximum Bit Specifies the maximum bit rate of the fax No Speed Limit,
Rate signal. 2400 bps, 4800
bps, 7200 bps,
9600 bps, 12000
bps, 14400 bps
FAX Enables the use of the FAX Detection Disable, Enable PC Programming
Detection Ability feature. Since fax signals using a Manual
Ability codec other than G.711 cannot be References
received accurately at the destination,
9.2.1 PBX
this feature automatically switches the
Configuration—[1-1]
codec to G.711 to enable end-to-end fax
Configuration—Slot—
signal relay over the network.
System Property—
Main—V-IPGW–GW
Settings–Option 1—IP
Codec Priority—1st,
2nd, 3rd
DTMF Specifies the method to transport DTMF Inband, Outband
tones. (RFC2833),
Outband (H.245)
Payload Type Specifies the payload type for DTMF 96–127
tones using RFC2833. Programming this
parameter is only necessary if DTMF is
set to Outband (RFC2833).

V-IPGW–GW Settings–Option 3
Name Description Value Range Links
GW Name Specifies the name of the destination Max. 20
gateway device for programming reference. characters
T38 FAX Max Datagram Specifies the maximum datagram size when 272–512
using the T.38 protocol.
T38 FAX UDPTL Error Specifies whether to enable the redundancy Disable, Enable
Correction – Redundancy feature when using the T.38 protocol.
T38 FAX UDPTL Specifies the redundancy count for T.30 0–7
Redundancy count for T.30 messages when using the T.38 protocol.
messages
T38 FAX UDPTL Specifies the redundancy count for data 0–3
Redundancy count for data when using the T.38 protocol.
T38 FAX Rate Management Specifies the rate management method Transferred TCF,
Method when using the T.38 protocol. Local TCF

V-IPGW–DN2IP
Name Description Value Range Links
Leading Number Specifies the leading digits in dialled numbers by which Max. 30 digits
to associate calls with the appropriate destination. (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual 167

9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site

Name Description Value Range Links

Remaining Specifies the number of digits to be dialled following 0–29
Number of Digits the leading number to access the destination.
GW No./GW Specifies the type of destination when making calls: a GW Group, GW
Group Selection gateway device or a gateway group. No.
GW Group Specifies the number of the destination gateway group. 1–256
This setting is only available when GW No./GW Group
Selection on this screen is set to GW Group.
GW No. Specifies the number of the destination gateway 1–512
device. This setting is only available when GW No./GW
Group Selection on this screen is set to GW No..

9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System

Property—Site
The properties of the PBX site can be specified. When you place the mouse cursor over the System
Property button and click the Site button, the Main and NSVM buttons are displayed. Click a button to open
that site property screen.

Main
Name Description Value Range Links
Site Name Indicates the site name of the PBX Site Name
(reference only).
Location (MIB) Indicates the MIB info - Max. 255 characters
SysLocation setting in
27.3.3 Network Service—[3-3]
Client Feature—SNMP Agent
(reference only).
PBX Region Indicates the region of the PBX PBX Region
(reference only).
IP Address Indicates the IP address of the 1.0.0.0 -
PBX (reference only). 255.255.255.255
MAC Address Indicates the MAC address of the 00:00:00:00:00:00–
PBX (reference only). FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF
PBX Version Indicates the software version of 0000.00000 -
the PBX (reference only). 9999.99999
Data Version Indicates the version number of 0000.0000 - 9999.9999
the data (reference only).
SRAM Version Indicates the version number of 000 - 999
the SRAM (reference only).
System Up Indicates the system up time Days, Hours and
Time (reference only). Minutes
Storage Indicates the size of the installed Card Size
Memory Size storage memory card (reference
only).

168 PC Programming Manual

 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site

Name Description Value Range Links

Area ID for Specifies the area ID for the 1 - 16 PC Programming
logical partition Logical Partitioning feature. Manual
References
7.3.5 Utility—Log—
Call Control Log
10.9 PBX
Configuration—[2-9]
System—System
Options—Option 2—
Applying logical
partitioning
Feature Manual
References
2.11.8 Trunk Call
Limitation
P2P Group Specifies the peer-to-peer group of 1–32 Feature Manual
the site. References
5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer
(P2P) Connection
P2P Group Indicates the selected peer-to-peer P2P Group Name Feature Manual
Name group’s name (reference only). References
5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer
(P2P) Connection
LLDP Packet Specifies whether the PBX notifies Disable, Enable
Sending Ability IP-CSs (KX-NS0154 only) to
enable or disable the ability to
send and receive LLDP packets.
IP Terminal Specifies the IP terminal Manual, Full Automatic, Installation
Registration registration mode for registering IP Extension Input Manual
Mode telephones to the PBX. References
5.4.1 Easy Setup
Wizard
IP-CS Specifies the registration mode for Manual, Full Automatic
Registration registering IP-CSs to the PBX.
Mode
SIP over TCP/IP Specifies whether or not to use Disable, Enable
(V-SIPGW) *) SIP over TCP/IP protocol for the
site. When this setting is enabled,
SIP trunks cannot use the UDP/IP
protocol.

Note
If this setting is changed, the
V-IPGW cards and/or
V-SIPGW cards installed at the
site will be deleted.

PC Programming Manual 169

9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site

VoIP-DSP Options
The settings in this tab relate to IP extensions and IP trunks.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
IP Extension Count of Specifies how many IP-PTs connected to 0–117 Feature
BGM the mother board can send out BGM. Manual
References
2.30.1
Background
Music (BGM)
Echo Cancellation Ports Specifies the number of ports to be used for 0–64
echo cancellation.
Send Music On Hold to IP Enables the sending of hold music to an IP Disable,
trunk (for P2P trunk during a P2P connection call between Enable
conversation) an IP extension and IP trunk.
Jitter Compensation Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature for Disable,
Operation for G.711 voice communications using the G.711 Enable
codec.
P2P Group Jitter Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature for Disable,
Compensation Operation fax communications using the G.711 codec. Enable
for G.711 FAX
Jitter Compensation Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature for Disable,
Operation for G.729A communications using the G.729A codec. Enable
Jitter Buffer Delay Min. for Specifies the minimum size of the jitter 0–200 ms
Voice buffer for voice communications.
Jitter Buffer Delay Max. Specifies the maximum size of the jitter 0–200 ms
for Voice buffer for voice communications.
Jitter Buffer Delay Init. for Specifies the initial size of the jitter buffer 0–200 ms
Voice for voice communications.
Jitter Buffer Adaptation Specifies the length of time that the jitter 1000–65530
Period for Voice buffer is applied for voice communications. ms
Jitter Buffer Delay Min. for Specifies the minimum size of the jitter 0–200 ms
FAX buffer for fax communications.
Jitter Buffer Delay Max. Specifies the maximum size of the jitter 0–200 ms
for FAX buffer for fax communications.
Jitter Buffer Delay Init. for Specifies the initial size of the jitter buffer 0–200 ms
FAX for fax communications.
Jitter Buffer Adaptation Specifies the length of time that the jitter 1000–65530
Period for FAX buffer is applied for fax communications. ms
DTMF Detection Level for Specifies the level of DTMF detection for -45– -12 dB
G.711A the G.711A codec.
DTMF Detection Level for Specifies the level of DTMF detection for -39– -6 dB
G.711Mu the G.711Mu codec.

170 PC Programming Manual

 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site

Value
Name Description Links
Range
CNG Signal Effective Specifies the length of time that the PBX 20–5000 ms
Detection Width 1 (ON) detects the CNG signal.
CNG Signal Effective Specifies the length of time that the PBX 20–5000 ms
Detection Width 2 (OFF) waits until another CNG signal is detected.
CNG Signal Fixation Specifies the number of times the CNG 1–3
Detection Counter signal must be detected before the PBX
proceeds the fax operation.
CNG Signal Fixation Specifies the CNG signal pattern to be OFF, ON
Detection Pattern detected before the PBX proceeds the fax
operation.
CED Signal Fixation Specifies the minimum length of time 50 × n (n=1–
Detection Time required for the CED (called station 100) ms
identification) signal to be detected by the
PBX.
CNG Signal Effective Specifies the length of time that the PBX 20 × n (n=1–
Detection Width 1 (ON) - detects the CNG signal for SIP extensions. 250) ms
SIP Extension
CNG Signal Effective Specifies the length of time that the PBX 20 × n (n=1–
Detection Width 2 (OFF) - waits until another CNG signal is detected 250) ms
SIP Extension for SIP extensions.
CNG Signal Fixation Specifies the number of times the CNG 1–3
Detection Counter - SIP signal must be detected before the PBX
Extension proceeds the fax operation for SIP
extensions.
CNG Signal Fixation Specifies the CNG signal pattern to be Off, On
Detection Pattern - SIP detected before the PBX proceeds the fax
Extension operation for SIP extensions.
CED Signal Fixation Specifies the minimum length of time 50 × n (n=1–
Detection Time - SIP required for the CED (called station 100) ms
Extension identification) signal to be detected by the
PBX for SIP extensions.
T38 FAX Transmit Level Specifies the transmission level of G3 fax -13–2 dB
(Network to PBX) A-Law signals after being converted from T.38
protocol packets, when the codec used is
G.711A.
T38 FAX Transmit Level Specifies the transmission level of G3 fax -7–8 dB
(Network to PBX) Mu-Law signals after being converted from T.38
protocol packets, when the codec used is
G.711Mu.
T38 FAX Transmit Level Specifies the transmission level of G3 fax -13–2 dB
A-Law - SIP Extension signals after being converted from T.38
protocol packets, when the codec used is
G.711A for SIP extensions.

PC Programming Manual 171

9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site

Value
Name Description Links
Range
T38 FAX Transmit Level Specifies the transmission level of G3 fax -7–8 dB
Mu-Law - SIP Extension signals after being converted from T.38
protocol packets, when the codec used is
G.711Mu for SIP extensions.

Port Number
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Voice (RTP) UDP Specifies the UDP port used by the 1024– Feature Manual
Port No. (Server) system to transmit and receive RTP 64000 References
(Real-time Transfer Protocol) data. 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
This must be changed if another Telephone (IP-PT)
network application is using the same
port.
For voice communications, the system
uses 128 contiguous UDP ports,
starting from the port number specified
here.
Voice (RTP) UDP Specifies the UDP port used to 1024– Feature Manual
Port No. (IP-PT / transmit and receive RTP (Real-time 65535 References
SIP-MLT) Transfer Protocol) data on the IP-PT 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
side. This must be changed if another Telephone (IP-PT)
network application is using the same
port.
For voice communications, an IP-PT
uses 128 contiguous UDP ports,
starting from the port number specified
here.
To change the value displayed here,
click Common Settings and set the
desired value.
UDP Port No. for SIP Specifies the UDP port number used 1024– Feature Manual
Extension Server for the SIP Extension server. 65535 References
To change the value displayed here, 5.2.2 SIP (Session
click Common Settings and set the Initiation Protocol)
desired value. Extension
TLS Port No. for SIP Specifies the TLS port number used 1024– Feature Manual
Extension Server by the SIP extension server. 65535 References
5.2.2.5 SIP-TLS

172 PC Programming Manual

 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Signalling (PTAP) Specifies the UDP port used by the 1024– Feature Manual
UDP Port No. V-IPEXT card to transmit and receive 65535 References
(Server) PTAP (Panasonic Telephony 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Administration Protocol) data. This Telephone (IP-PT)
must be changed if another network
application is using the same port.
To change the value displayed here,
click Common Settings and set the
desired value.
Signalling (MGCP) Specifies the UDP port used by the 1024– Feature Manual
UDP Port No. V-IPEXT card to transmit and receive 65535 References
(Server) MGCP (Media Gateway Control 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Protocol) data. This must be changed Telephone (IP-PT)
if another network application is using
the same port.
To change the value displayed here,
click Common Settings and set the
desired value.
Signalling (MGCP) Specifies the TLS port number used 1024–
TLS Port No. for the MGCP signalling server. 65535
(Server)
CWMP (HTTP) Port Specifies the HTTP port of the PBX- 0–65535 Feature Manual
No. for SIP-MLT side ACS for control communication (Setting "0" References
with KX-UT series SIP phones. will close 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote
port access Connection
for this
feature)
CWMP (HTTPS) Port Specifies the HTTPS port of the PBX- 0–65535 Feature Manual
No. for SIP-MLT side ACS for control communication (Setting "0" References
with KX-UT series SIP phones. will close 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote
port access Connection
for this
feature)
Data Transmission Specifies the HTTP port of the PBX- 0–65535 Feature Manual
Protocol (HTTP) Port side ACS for data communication with (Setting "0" References
No. for SIP-MLT KX-UT series SIP phones. will close 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote
port access Connection
for this
feature)
Data Transmission Specifies the HTTPS port of the PBX- 0–65535 Feature Manual
Protocol (HTTPS) side ACS for data communication with (Setting "0" References
Port No. for SIP-MLT KX-UT series SIP phones. will close 5.2.2.3 Simple Remote
port access Connection
for this
feature)
Firmware Update Specifies the IP-PT/IP-CS firmware 0–65535
Port No. for IP-PT/ update port number.
IP-CS (Media Relay)

PC Programming Manual 173

9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site

Value
Name Description Links
Range
LOGIN Port Number Specifies the port number used to 1024–
login to the PBX via the LAN. 65535
CTI Port Number Specifies the port number used to 0, 1024– Feature Manual
operate CTI via the LAN. Selecting "0" 65535 References
disables the 3rd Party CTI feature. 2.26 Computer
Telephony Integration
(CTI) Features
Built-in Specifies the port number for the 0, 1024– PC Programming
Communication Communication Assistant (CA) 65535 Manual References
Assistant Server application. 12.1.1 PBX
Configuration—[4-1-1]
Extension—Wired
Extension—Extension
Settings—Option 9—
Built-in Communication
Assistant
12.2.1 PBX
Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable
Station—Extension
Settings—Option 9—
Built-in Communication
Assistant
Feature Manual
References
2.26.2 CA
(Communication
Assistant)
FOS Interface Port Specifies the port number used to 0, 1024– Feature Manual
Number communicate with a hotel application 65535 References
(FOS). 2.23.4 Built-in FOS
Interface

LAN Status
Name Description Value Range Links
LINK for Main Port Indicates the current connection status of the 1: Disconnect, 0: Connect
main port (reference only).

Media Relay
Name Description Value Range Links
Common—NAT - Specifies the NAT device Blank, 1.0.0.1– Feature Manual
External IP Address external IP address (common). 223.255.255.254 References
(IP address), Max. 5.2.2.3 Simple
255 characters Remote Connection
(FQDN)

174 PC Programming Manual

 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site

Name Description Value Range Links

Common—DNS Specifies the DNS interval time. 1–60
Interval Time (min)
IP Extension / IP-CS Specifies the outside-facing 1–65535 Feature Manual
—NAT - MGCP Server MGCP port of the PBX-side References
Port No. network gateway for remote 5.2.2.3 Simple
connections. Remote Connection
IP Extension / IP-CS Specifies the outside-facing 0–65535
—NAT - MGCP-TLS MGCP-TLS port of the PBX-side
Server Port No. network gateway for remote
connections.
IP Extension / IP-CS Specifies the outside-facing 1–65535 Feature Manual
—NAT - MGCP Server MGCP port of the PBX-side References
Port No. for IP-CS network gateway for remote 5.2.2.3 Simple
connections. Remote Connection
IP Extension / IP-CS Specifies the type of Keep Alive Blank UDP, None Feature Manual
—Keep Alive Packet packets to be sent out for remote References
Type connections for IP extensions. 5.2.2.3 Simple
Remote Connection
IP Extension / IP-CS Specifies the type of Keep Alive Blank UDP, None Feature Manual
—Keep Alive Packet packets to be sent out for remote References
Type for IP-CS connections for IP-CS 5.2.2.3 Simple
(KX-NS0154 only). Remote Connection
IP Extension / IP-CS Specifies the time interval 10–60 s Feature Manual
—Keep Alive Packet between transmissions of Keep References
Sending Interval Time Alive packets. 5.2.2.3 Simple
(s) Remote Connection
IP Extension / IP-CS Specifies the port number of FTP 1–65535 Feature Manual
—NAT - FTP Server server for IP-CS (KX-NS0154 References
Port No. only). 5.2.2.3 Simple
Remote Connection
SIP Extension / UT Specifies the outside-facing port 0–65535 (except Feature Manual
Extension—NAT - SIP of the network gateway "50xx" and "x50xx") References
Proxy Server Port No. connected to the SIP proxy 5.2.2.3 Simple
server. Remote Connection
SIP Extension / UT Specifies the outside-facing port 0–65535 (except Feature Manual
Extension—NAT - SIP of the network gateway "50xx" and "x50xx") References
TLS Server Port No. connected to the SIP-TLS server. 5.2.2.5 SIP-TLS
UT Extension—NAT - Specifies the outside-facing 1–65535 Feature Manual
CWMP Server (HTTP) HTTP port of the PBX-side References
Port No. network gateway for remote 5.2.2.3 Simple
connections. Remote Connection

PC Programming Manual 175

9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site

Name Description Value Range Links

UT Extension—NAT - Specifies the outside-facing 1–65535 Feature Manual
CWMP Server HTTPS port of the PBX-side References
(HTTPS) Port No. network gateway for remote 5.2.2.3 Simple
connections. Remote Connection
UT Extension—NAT - Specifies the outside-facing 1–65535 Feature Manual
CWMP Server (HTTP) HTTP port of the PBX-side References
Port No. for Network network gateway for remote 5.2.2.3 Simple
Survivability connections. This setting Remote Connection
specifies the port number used
for the secondary server for
network survivability.
UT Extension—NAT - Specifies the outside-facing 1–65535 Feature Manual
CWMP Server HTTPS port of the PBX-side References
(HTTPS) Port No. for network gateway for remote 5.2.2.3 Simple
Network Survivability connections. This setting Remote Connection
specifies the port number used
for the secondary server for
network survivability.
UT Extension—NAT - Specifies the outside-facing 1–65535 Feature Manual
SIP-MLT Data HTTP port of the PBX-side References
Download Server network gateway for remote 5.2.2.3 Simple
(HTTP) Port No. connections used for Remote Connection
downloading data to KX-UT
series SIP phones.
UT Extension—NAT - Specifies the outside-facing 1–65535 Feature Manual
SIP-MLT Data HTTPS port of the PBX-side References
Download Server network gateway for remote 5.2.2.3 Simple
(HTTPS) Port No. connections used for Remote Connection
downloading data to KX-UT
series SIP phones.
UT Extension—NAT - Specifies the outside-facing port 1–65535 Feature Manual
NTP Server Port No. of the network gateway References
connected to the NTP server. 5.2.2.3 Simple
Remote Connection
UT Extension—Keep Specifies the type of Keep Alive Register, Blank Feature Manual
Alive Packet Type packets to be sent out for remote UDP, None References
connections. 5.2.2.3 Simple
Remote Connection
UT Extension—Keep Specifies the time interval 10–60 s Feature Manual
Alive Packet Sending between transmissions of Keep References
Interval Time (s) Alive packets. 5.2.2.3 Simple
Remote Connection
UT Extension—SIP Specifies the length of time that 10–3600 s Feature Manual
Register Expire Time will elapse before the current References
(s) registration expires. 5.2.2.3 Simple
Remote Connection

176 PC Programming Manual

 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site

Name Description Value Range Links

UT Extension— Specifies whether alive Disable, Enable Feature Manual
PERIODIC Ability monitoring is performed for References
connected remote extensions. 5.2.2.3 Simple
Remote Connection
UT Extension— Specifies the polling interval for 30–3600 s Feature Manual
PERIODIC Packet alive monitoring when PERIODIC References
Sending Interval Time Ability is set to Enable. 5.2.2.3 Simple
(s) Remote Connection
Option—NAT - RTP IP Specifies the RTP server’s IP Blank, 1.0.0.1– Feature Manual
Address address. If using a separate IP 223.255.255.254 References
address from Common—NAT - 5.2.2.3 Simple
External IP Address, configure Remote Connection
this setting.
Option—NAT - SIP Specifies the outside-facing IP Blank, 1.0.0.1– Feature Manual
Proxy Server IP address or host name of the 223.255.255.254 References
Address network gateway connected to 5.2.2.3 Simple
the SIP proxy server. If using a Remote Connection
separate IP address from
Common—NAT - External IP
Address, configure this setting.
Option—NAT - CWMP Specifies the outside-facing IP Blank, 1.0.0.1– Feature Manual
Server IP Address address of the PBX-side network 223.255.255.254 References
gateway for remote connections. 5.2.2.3 Simple
If using a separate IP address Remote Connection
from Common—NAT - External
IP Address, configure this
setting.
Option—NAT - CWMP Specifies the outside-facing IP Blank, 1.0.0.1– Feature Manual
Server IP Address for address of the PBX-side network 223.255.255.254 References
Network Survivability gateway for remote connections. 5.2.2.3 Simple
This setting specifies the port Remote Connection
number used for the secondary
server for network survivability.
Option—NAT - NTP Specifies the outside-facing IP Blank, 1.0.0.1– Feature Manual
Server IP Address address of the network gateway 223.255.255.254 References
connected to the NTP server. If 5.2.2.3 Simple
using a separate IP address from Remote Connection
Common—NAT - External IP
Address, configure this setting.

SIP Extension
Name Description Value Range Links
SIP Location Hold Specifies the maximum length of 10–3600 s Feature Manual
Time Max. time that the PBX holds References
information on the location of SIP 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Extensions. Initiation Protocol)
Extension

PC Programming Manual 177

9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site

Name Description Value Range Links

SIP Location Hold Specifies the minimum length of 10–3600 s Feature Manual
Time Min. time that the PBX holds References
information on the location of SIP 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Extensions. Initiation Protocol)
Extension
SIP Location Hold Specifies the interval time that the 1–10 s Feature Manual
Time Interval PBX waits before starting to hold References
information on location of SIP 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Extensions. Initiation Protocol)
Extension
SIP Session Timer Specifies the minimum length of 90–3600 s Feature Manual
Min. time that the PBX waits before References
disconnecting SIP sessions when 5.2.2 SIP (Session
no communication is detected. Initiation Protocol)
Extension
Setting parameters Specifies the outside-facing IP 1.0.0.0– Feature Manual
assigned to Remote address or host name of the PBX- 223.255.255.255 References
SIP-MLT—NAT - side network gateway for remote (IP address), Max. 5.2.2.3 Simple
CWMP Server IP connections. 100 characters Remote
Address (host name) Connection
Setting parameters Specifies the outside-facing HTTP 1–65535 Feature Manual
assigned to Remote port of the PBX-side network References
SIP-MLT—NAT - gateway for remote connections. 5.2.2.3 Simple
CWMP Server (HTTP) Remote
Port No. Connection
Setting parameters Specifies the outside-facing 1–65535 Feature Manual
assigned to Remote HTTPS port of the PBX-side References
SIP-MLT—NAT - network gateway for remote 5.2.2.3 Simple
CWMP Server connections. Remote
(HTTPS) Port No. Connection
Setting parameters Specifies the outside-facing HTTP 1–65535 Feature Manual
assigned to Remote port of the PBX-side network References
SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP- gateway for remote connections 5.2.2.3 Simple
MLT Data Download used for downloading data to Remote
Server (HTTP) Port KX-UT series SIP phones. Connection
No.
Setting parameters Specifies the outside-facing 1–65535 Feature Manual
assigned to Remote HTTPS port of the PBX-side References
SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP- network gateway for remote 5.2.2.3 Simple
MLT Data Download connections used for downloading Remote
Server (HTTPS) Port data to KX-UT series SIP phones. Connection
No.

178 PC Programming Manual

 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site

Name Description Value Range Links

Setting parameters Specifies the outside-facing IP 1.0.0.0– Feature Manual
assigned to Remote address or host name of the 223.255.255.255 References
SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP network gateway connected to the (IP address), Max. 5.2.2.3 Simple
Proxy Server IP SIP proxy server. 100 characters Remote
Address (host name) Connection
Setting parameters Specifies the outside-facing port of 1–65535 (except Feature Manual
assigned to Remote the network gateway connected to "50xx" and "x50xx") References
SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP the SIP proxy server. 5.2.2.3 Simple
Proxy Server Port No. Remote
Connection
Setting parameters Specifies the outside-facing IP 1.0.0.0– Feature Manual
assigned to Remote address or host name of the 223.255.255.255 References
SIP-MLT—NAT - NTP network gateway connected to the (IP address), Max. 5.2.2.3 Simple
Server IP Address NTP server. 100 characters Remote
(host name) Connection
Setting parameters Specifies the outside-facing port of 1–65535 Feature Manual
assigned to Remote the network gateway connected to References
SIP-MLT—NAT - NTP the NTP server. 5.2.2.3 Simple
Server Port No. Remote
Connection
Setting parameters Specifies the type of Keep Alive Register, Blank Feature Manual
assigned to Remote packets to be sent out for remote UDP, None References
SIP-MLT—NAT - Keep connections. 5.2.2.3 Simple
Alive Packet Type Remote
Connection
Setting parameters Specifies the time interval between 10–60 s Feature Manual
assigned to Remote transmissions of the Keep Alive References
SIP-MLT—NAT - Keep packet. 5.2.2.3 Simple
Alive Packet Sending Remote
Interval Time (s) Note
Connection
• This interval must be shorter
than the NAT binding time of
the router. The default value
is appropriate in most
cases.
• This setting is available only
when NAT - Keep Alive
Packet Type is set to "Blank
UDP".

PC Programming Manual 179

9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site

Name Description Value Range Links

Setting parameters Specifies the length of time that 10–3600 s Feature Manual
assigned to Remote will elapse before the current References
SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP registration expires. 5.2.2.3 Simple
Register Expire Time Remote
(s) Note
Connection
This setting is available only
when NAT - Keep Alive
Packet Type is set to
"Register".
Setting parameters for Specifies the outside-facing IP 1.0.0.0– Feature Manual
Networking address or host name of the PBX- 223.255.255.255 References
Survivability, assigned side network gateway for remote (IP address), Max. 5.2.2.3 Simple
to Remote SIP-MLT— connections that is used when the 100 characters Remote
NAT - CWMP Server gateway specified in Setting (host name) Connection
IP Address parameters assigned to Remote
SIP-MLT is not available.
Setting parameters for Specifies the outside-facing HTTP 1–65535 Feature Manual
Networking port of the PBX-side network References
Survivability, assigned gateway for remote connections 5.2.2.3 Simple
to Remote SIP-MLT— that is used when the gateway Remote
NAT - CWMP Server specified in Setting parameters Connection
(HTTP) Port No. assigned to Remote SIP-MLT is
not available.
Setting parameters for Specifies the outside-facing 1–65535 Feature Manual
Networking HTTPS port of the PBX-side References
Survivability, assigned network gateway for remote 5.2.2.3 Simple
to Remote SIP-MLT— connections that is used when the Remote
NAT - CWMP Server gateway specified in Setting Connection
(HTTPS) Port No. parameters assigned to Remote
SIP-MLT is not available.
Control Condition of Specifies whether alive monitoring Enable, Disable Feature Manual
Remote SIP-MLT— is performed for connected remote References
PERIODIC Ability extensions. 5.2.2.3 Simple
Remote
Connection
Control Condition of Specifies the polling interval for 30–3600 s Feature Manual
Remote SIP-MLT— alive monitoring when PERIODIC References
PERIODIC Packet Ability is set to "Enable". 5.2.2.3 Simple
Sending Interval Time Remote
(s) Connection

Echo Cancellation
The settings in this tab are for non-IP calls.
Name Description Value Range Links
Echo Cancellation Specifies the echo canceller ability time. OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms
Ability

180 PC Programming Manual

 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site

Name Description Value Range Links

DSP Digital Gain Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down -14–6 dB
(Down) voice path.
DSP Digital Gain (Up) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up -14–6 dB
voice path.
EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. -14–6 dB
NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) Disable, Weak,
setting to control echo sound quality. Normal, Strong

DSP Conference
Name Description Value Range Links
DSP Conference Priority Specifies the Conference Priority (the Preferential:
conference resource you want to use). Conference
resource on DSP
card
Alternative: Default
conference
resource
DSP Digital Gain (Up) on Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up -14–6 dB
V-IPEXT side for voice path for conference calls using an
conference extension of a V-IPEXT card.
DSP Digital Gain (Up) on Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up -14–6 dB
V-SIPEXT side for voice path for conference calls using an
conference extension of a V-SIPEXT card.
DSP Digital Gain (Up) on Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up -14–6 dB
V-UTEXT side for voice path for conference calls using an
conference extension of a V-UTEXT card.
DSP Digital Gain (Up) on Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up -14–6 dB
Multisite GW side for voice path for conference calls using a
conference gateway between sites.
Echo Cancellation Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time for OFF, 64 ms, 128
on TDM side for conferencing using TDM circuit mode ms
conference communication.
DSP Digital Gain (Up) on Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up -14–6 dB
TDM side for conference voice path for conferencing using TDM
circuit mode communication.
DSP Digital Gain (Down) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down -14–6 dB
on TDM side for voice path for conferencing using TDM
conference circuit mode communication.
EC Gain on TDM side for Specifies the error correction gain for -14–6 dB
conference conferencing using TDM circuit mode
communication.
NLP Setting on TDM side Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) Disable, Weak,
for conference setting for conferencing using TDM circuit Normal, Strong
mode communication.

PC Programming Manual 181

9.2.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Slot Summary

QoS
Name Description Value Range Links
Setting for extension Specifies the type of value to be stored ToS
RTP*1—QoS Ability in the ToS field in the IP header, it sends DSCP
to IP terminals from the PBX. HEX
Setting for extension Specifies the priority level in the ToS 0-7: When "ToS" is selected
RTP*1—QoS-ToS field, it sends to IP terminals from the in QoS Ability
Priority PBX. 0-63: When "DSCP" is
selected in QoS Ability
00-FF: When "HEX" is
selected in QoS Ability
Setting for extension Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field Normal
RTP*1—QoS-ToS when "ToS" is selected in Setting for Monetary Cost
Type extension RTP—QoS Ability Reliability
Throughput
Delay

*1 Applies to incoming communication from the PBX main unit to the IP terminals. The QoS setting of the IP terminals is configured
individually for each terminal.

9.2.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System

Property—Slot Summary
Summary information is displayed for all cards installed in the PBX.
Click one of the following tabs to view a summary of the shelf in the PBX:
• Physical Shelf: View the physical card shelf.
• Virtual Shelf: View the virtual card shelf.

Physical Shelf
The Shelf and Slot for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming
Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

182 PC Programming Manual

 9.2.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Slot Summary

Name Description Value Range Links

Card Indicates the Card Type: PC Programming Manual
Type service cards LCOT6: 6-Port Analogue Trunk Card References
installed in the DLC2: 2-Port Digital Extension Card 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
slots of the MCSLC16: 16-Port Single Line Configuration—Slot
physical shelf Telephone Extension Card 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
(reference only). BRI2: BRI2 Card Configuration—Slot—Card
BRI4: BRI4 Card Property—Extension Type
PRI23: PRI23 Card 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
PRI30: PRI30 Card Configuration—Slot—Card
E1: E1 Trunk Card Property - LCO type
DPH2: 2-Port Doorphone Card 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
DHLC4: 4-Port Digital Hybrid Configuration—Slot—Card
Extension Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
DLC8: 8-Port Digital Extension Card
DLC16: 16-Port Digital Extension Card
MCSLC8: 8-Port Single Line
Telephone Extension Card
EXP-S: Expansion Slave Card for
connecting Expansion Units
Status Indicates the card INS: The card is in service. PC Programming Manual
status (reference OUS: The card is out of service. References
only). Fault: The card is not communicating 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
with the network. Configuration—Slot
Pre-Install: A card has been added to
the slot.
Idle: No card is installed in the slot.
Version Indicates the Version number PC Programming Manual
software version References
of the installed 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
card (reference Configuration—Slot
only).

Virtual Shelf
The Shelf and Slot for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming
Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Slot Indicates the type of Trunk, Extension PC Programming Manual
Type card slot (reference References
only). 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot
Card Indicates the type of V-SIPGW16, V-IPGW16, PC Programming Manual
Type virtual card installed V-IPEXT32, V-SIPEXT32, References
(reference only). V-IPCS4, V-UTEXT32 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot

PC Programming Manual 183

9.2.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—NSVM

Name Description Value Range Links

Status Indicates the card INS: The card is in service. PC Programming Manual
status (reference OUS: The card is out of service. References
only). Fault: The card is not 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
communicating with the network. Configuration—Slot
Pre-Install: A card has been added
to the slot.

9.2.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System

Property—NSVM
Settings related to audio quality and sound detection for the PBX site can be specified.
Name Description Value Range Links
Echo Cancellation Specifies the echo canceller ability time. OFF, 64 ms,
Ability 128 ms
DSP Digital Gain Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice -14–6 dB
(Down) path.
DSP Digital Gain (Up) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path. -14–6 dB
EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. -14–6 dB
NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to Disable, Weak,
control echo sound quality. Normal, Strong
FAX Detection Ability Enables the use of the FAX Detection Ability feature. Disable,
Since fax signals using a codec other than G.711 Enable
cannot be received accurately at the destination, this
feature automatically switches the codec to G.711 to
enable end-to-end fax signal relay over the network.
CNG Signal Effective Specifies the length of time that the PBX detects the 20–5000 ms
Detection Width 1 CNG signal.
(ON)
CNG Signal Effective Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits until 20–5000 ms
Detection Width 2 another CNG signal is detected.
(OFF)
CNG Signal Fixation Specifies the number of times the CNG signal must 1–3
Detection Counter be detected before the PBX proceeds the fax
operation.
CNG Signal Fixation Specifies the CNG signal pattern to be detected OFF, ON
Detection Pattern before the PBX proceeds the fax operation.
Maximum Silence Specifies the length of time of silence that the PBX 1000–60000
Time will detect as the end of a call. (ms)
Maximum Continuous Specifies the length of time of a continuous tone that 1000–60000
Tone Time the PBX will detect as the end of a call. (ms)
Unique Cyclic Tone Specifies whether the system will detect the end of a Disable,
Detection call when there is a unique cyclic tone. Enable
Maximum Cyclic Tone Specifies the length of time of a continuing cyclic 1000–60000
Time tone that the PBX will detect as the end of a call. (ms)

184 PC Programming Manual

 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status

9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—

Activation Key Status
Refreshes and displays information about activation keys provided by any activation key files in the System
Memory and by pre-installed activation keys on the mother board. To access this screen, click the
Activation Key button on the Configuration—Slot main screen.
It is possible to programme how the number of available IP Trunk channels is to be divided for H.323 and
SIP trunks. In Number of activated IP-GW, type the number of IP Trunk channels to be used for H.323
trunks. The remaining number of IP Trunk channels will be used for SIP trunks.

Note
If you have changed the value for Number of activated IP-GW, you must click Execute to restart the
V-IPGW cards for the change to take effect.
Similarly, you can programme how many IP softphones can be used through the IP Softphone/IP Proprietary
Telephone activation key. In Number of activated IP-Softphone, type the number of IP softphones to be
used through the IP Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone activation key, and then click OK. The remainder is
the number of IP-PTs that can be used through the IP Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone activation key. By
default, only IP softphones can be used.
You can click the Activation Key Installation link to access the Activation Key Installation screen (see
7.6 Utility—Activation Key Installation) for installing activation keys.

Trial Activation Keys

The PBX includes free trials for some PBX features that normally require activation keys. The trials have a
60-day limit. To begin using the free trials:
1. Click Activate Pre-installed Activation keys. A list of trial activation keys is displayed in a new
window.
2. Select the check boxes next to the trial activation keys you want to activate.
3. Click OK.
The trial period for the selected trial activation keys will begin.

Trial activation keys:

• One-look Network
• Two-way Recording Control
• Message Backup
• Two-way Recording (30 users)
• CTI interface
• CSTA Multiplexer (session)
• Mobile Extension (30 users)
• CA PRO (128 users)
• CA Supervisor (1 user)
• CA Operator Console (1 user)
• CA Thin Client Server
• Call Centre Feature Enhancement
• Enhanced Built-In ACD Report
• Call Statistics Report

PC Programming Manual 185

9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status

• Poltys CCAccounting
• Poltys CCAcc. Enterprise
• Poltys CCView
• Poltys CCView add. PBX
• Poltys CCView Supervisor (5 users)
• Poltys CCView CRM P-up (5 users)
• Poltys Number notice
• Poltys CCAgent (5 users)
• Poltys CCRecord SIP (4 ports)
Name Description Value Range Links
MPR-ID Indicates the ID number ID number of the mother board
of the mother board
(reference only).

186 PC Programming Manual

 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status

Name Description Value Range Links

Activated Indicates the type of IP Trunk (ch): Activate H.323 IP-GW or SIP-Trunk
Feature activation keys IP Proprietary Telephone/IP Softphone/P-SIP
(reference only). Extension (ch): Activate Soft-phone /IP-PT /SIP-
Note that the types of MLT /P-SIP
activation keys are IP Proprietary Telephone/P-SIP Extension (ch):
subject to change Activate IP-PT/SIP-MLT/P-SIP
without notice. For CA SIP Extension (ch): Activate SIP-Phone for 3rd
activation keys, refer to party /IP Conference Phone
the documentation for IP-CS channel expansion (CS unit): IP-CS channel
CA. expansion to 8ch
One-look Network: Multi site connection with
KX-NS1000 PBXs
QSIG Network: QSIG Networking
Remote Maintenance: Remote Maintenance annual
Key
Two-way Recording Control: Two-way recording
(Manager control)
Message Backup: UM Message Back UP
UM Port (ch): Unified Message ports
UM/E-mail (user): Email (IMAP4) client / Email
Notification (Voice/Fax message)
Two-way Recording (user): Two-way Recording /
Two-way Transfer
CTI interface: CTI Server (3rd Party CTI link)
CSTA Multiplexer (session): CSTA(CTI) Multi-
session
Mobile Extension (user): Working with cellular phone
CA Basic (No limit): CA Basic
CA Pro (user): CA PRO
CA Supervisor (user): CA ACD Supervisor
CA Network Feature (user): CA Network
CA Operator Console (user): CA Operator Console
CA Thin Client Server: Thin Client Server
Connection
Call Centre Feature Enhancement: Built-in ACD
Report, Announcement of waiting number for
queuing
Queue Position Announcement: Announcement of
waiting number for queuing
Built-in ACD Report: Built-in ACD Report
Enhanced Built-In ACD Report: Enhanced Built-In
ACD Report
Call Statistics Report: Call Statistics Report

PC Programming Manual 187

9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status

Name Description Value Range Links

Poltys CCAccounting: CCAccounting
Poltys CCAccounting A.L.: CCAccounting (annual
licence)
Poltys CCAcc. Enterprise: CCAccounting Enterprise
Edition Additional Connection licence
Poltys CCAcc. Enterprise A.L.: CCAccounting
Enterprise Edition Additional Connection licence
(annual licence)
Poltys CCView: CCView
Poltys CCView A.L.: CCView (annual licence)
Poltys CCView add. PBX: CCView Enterprise
Edition. Additional PBX Connection licence
Poltys CCView add. PBX A.L.: CCView Enterprise
Edition. Additional PBX Connection licence (annual
licence)
Poltys CCView Supervisor: CCView Supervisor
Poltys CCView Supervisor A.L.: CCView Supervisor
(annual licence)
Poltys CCView CRM P-up: Independent Desktop
CRM Popup SW with 1st Party TSP
Poltys CCView CRM P-up A.L.: Independent
Desktop CRM Popup SW with 1st Party TSP (annual
licence)
Poltys Number notice: Dial Number Notification
Poltys Number notice A.L.: Dial Number Notification
(annual licence)
Poltys CCAgent: CCAgent With Internal CRM
Poltys CCAgent A.L.: CCAgent With Internal CRM
(annual licence)
Poltys CCRecord Analogue: CCRecord Analog
Extensions/Trunks
Poltys CCRecord Analogue A.L.: CCRecord Analog
Extensions/Trunks (annual licence)
Poltys CCRecord Digital: CCRecord Digital
Extensions
Poltys CCRecord Digital A.L.: CCRecord Digital
Extensions (annual licence)
Poltys CCRecord PRI: CCRecord for E1/T1 (PRI)
Poltys CCRecord PRI A.L.: CCRecord for E1/T1
(PRI) (annual licence)
Poltys CCRecord SIP: CCRecord SIP Extensions/
Trunks
Poltys CCRecord SIP A.L.: CCRecord SIP
Extensions/Trunks (annual licence)
PSDN Option-1: PSDN partner’s optional licence No.
1
PSDN Option-2: PSDN partner’s optional licence No.
2
Pre-installed Indicates the number of Not applicable.
channels (or CA users)
provided by the mother
board (reference only).

188 PC Programming Manual

 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status

Name Description Value Range Links

Activation Indicates the number of Not applicable.
Key channels (or CA users)
provided by activation
key files in the System
Memory (reference
only).
Features in Indicates the total Not applicable.
total number of channels (or
CA users) provided by
the mother board and
activation key files in
the System Memory
(reference only).

PC Programming Manual 189

9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property

9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—

VoIP Property
9.4.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP
Property—VoIP (Ext) Setting
Allows you to install or remove IP extension cards by entering the number of IP extensions (IP-PT, UT/UDT
or SIP extension) and to set IP Terminal Registration Mode.
When you place the mouse cursor over the VoIP Property button on the Slot screen, click the VoIP(Ext)
Setting button to open the VoIP(Ext) Setting screen.
Name Description Value Range Links
Number of IP Extensions— Specifies the required number of 0–128
Number of IP Extensions— IP-PT(NT) extensions to install or
IP-PT(NT) remove V-IPEXT32 cards.
Number of IP Extensions— Specifies the required number of 0–128
Number of IP Extensions— UT/UDT extensions to install or remove
UT/UDT V-UTEXT32 cards.
Number of IP Extensions— Specifies the required number of SIP 0–128
Number of IP Extensions—SIP- extensions to install or remove
Phone V-SIPEXT32 cards.
Number of IP Extensions— Indicates the total number of required IP 0–128
Number of IP Extensions—Total Extensions (IP-PT(NT), UT/UDT, SIP
Phone) (reference only).
Number of IP Extensions— Indicates the number of installed 0–4
Number of cards—V-IPEXT32 V-IPEXT32 cards (reference only).
Number of IP Extensions— Indicates the number of installed 0–4
Number of cards—V-UTEXT32 V-UTEXT32 cards (reference only).
Number of IP Extensions— Indicates the number of installed 0–4
Number of cards—V-SIPEXT32 V-SIPEXT32 cards (reference only).
Number of IP Extensions— Indicates the number of total installed IP 0–4
Number of cards—Total Extension cards (reference only).
IP Terminal Registration Mode Specifies the IP Terminal registration Manual, Full
mode for registering IP telephones to the Automatic,
PBX. Extension
Number Input

9.4.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP

Property—VoIP (Trunk) Setting
Allows you to add new SIP trunk accounts by entering the number of SIP trunk port and some SIP trunk
settings.
When you place the mouse cursor over the VoIP Property button on the Slot screen, click the VoIP
(Trunk) Setting button to open the VoIP (Trunk) Setting screen.

190 PC Programming Manual

 9.4.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Trunk) Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Number of IP Displays the number 0-64
Trunks—SIP of SIP trunks that
Trunk (Available) can be assigned.
Number of IP Specifies the 0-32
Trunks— number of SIP Trunk
Additional to install V-SIPGW
Number of SIP cards.
Trunks
Account Setting— Specifies the user Max. 64 characters
User Name (64 name (SIP Account) The available characters are those allowed in
characters) provided by the SIP RFC3986.
provider. "0"–"9"
"a"–"z"
"A"–"Z"
"-", ".", "_", ":", "/", "?", "#", "[", "]", "@", "!", "$", "&",
"'", "(", ")", "*", "+", ",", ";", "="
Other characters are not allowed.
Account Setting— Specifies the Max. 64 characters
Authentication ID authentication ID The available characters are those allowed in
(64 characters) required for RFC3986.
registration with the "0"–"9"
SIP server. "a"–"z"
"A"–"Z"
"-", ".", "_", ":", "/", "?", "#", "[", "]", "@", "!", "$", "&",
"'", "(", ")", "*", "+", ",", ";", "="
Other characters are not allowed.
Account Setting— Specifies the Max. 32 characters
Authentication authentication The available characters are those allowed in
Password (32 password used for RFC3986.
characters) registration with the "0"–"9"
SIP provider. "a"–"z"
"A"–"Z"
"-", ".", "_", ":", "/", "?", "#", "[", "]", "@", "!", "$", "&",
"'", "(", ")", "*", "+", ",", ";", "="
Other characters are not allowed.
Account Setting— Specifies the Max. 100 characters
SIP Server domain name of the
Name / Outbound SIP proxy server.
Proxy Name
( Max.100 Note
characters) Specify the
domain name of
the outbound
proxy server, if
provided by the
SIP provider.

PC Programming Manual 191

9.4.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Trunk) Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Account Setting— Specifies the IP 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
SIP Server IP address of the SIP
Address proxy server. This
setting is
compulsory when
not using the DNS
server.

Note
Specify the IP
address of the
outbound proxy
server, if
provided by the
SIP provider.
Account Setting— Specifies the Max. 100 characters
SIP Server domain name
Domain / Proxy provided by the SIP
Domain ( Max.100 provider.
characters)
Property Setting— Select the SIP Max. 100 characters
Select Service service provider
Provider after importing SIP
service provider file.
Property Setting— Specifies whether to Disable, Enable
Register Ability send the REGISTER
message to the SIP
server.
Property Setting— Specifies the length 90–3600 s
Session Expire of time that the PBX
Timer (s) waits before
terminating SIP
sessions when no
reply to the repeated
requests is received.
Property Setting— Specifies the value User Name, Authentication ID, PBX-CLIP
From Header - to be stored in the
user Part username part of the
SIP-URI of the From
header.
Property Setting— Specifies the header From Header, P-Preferred-Identity Header
Header Type of the SIP message
in which the caller
information is
stored.

192 PC Programming Manual

 9.4.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Trunk) Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Property Setting— Specifies the format Display name and SIP-URI, Display name only
Anonymous of the "From" header
format in "From" when not sending Note
header caller ID. If "Display name and SIP-URI" is selected, the
display name part and the SIP-URI of the
"From" header will be displayed as
"Anonymous".
[Example]
From: Anonymous
<sip:[email protected]>
If "Display name only" is selected, only the
display name part of the "From" header will be
displayed as "Anonymous".
[Example]
From: Anonymous <sip:[email protected]>
Property Setting— Specifies the G.711 Inband, T.38
FAX Sending method of
Method transporting the fax
signal.

PC Programming Manual 193

9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property

9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—

UM Card Property
The properties of the Unified Messaging (UM) system can be specified.
Place the mouse cursor over the UM Property button on the Slot screen, and click the Card Property
button to open the UM Card Property screen.

Main
Name Description Value Range Links
Echo Cancellation Specifies the echo canceller ability time. OFF, 64 ms,
Ability 128 ms
DSP Digital Gain Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice -14–6 dB
(Down) path.
DSP Digital Gain (Up) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice -14–6 dB
path.
EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. -14–6 dB
NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting Disable, Weak,
to control echo sound quality. Normal, Strong
FAX Detection Ability Enables the use of the FAX Detection Ability Disable, Enable
feature. Since fax signals using a codec other than
G.711 cannot be received accurately at the
destination, this feature automatically switches the
codec to G.711 to enable end-to-end fax signal
relay over the network.
CNG Signal Effective Specifies the length of time that the PBX detects 20–5000 ms
Detection Width 1 (ON) the CNG signal.
CNG Signal Effective Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits until 20–5000 ms
Detection Width 2 another CNG signal is detected.
(OFF)
CNG Signal Fixation Specifies the number of times the CNG signal must 1–3
Detection Counter be detected before the PBX proceeds the fax
operation.
CNG Signal Fixation Specifies whether or not the Unified Messaging OFF, ON
Detection Pattern system will respond to CNG signals.

194 PC Programming Manual

 9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property

9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—

UM Port Property
The properties of the Unified Messaging (UM) system’s ports can be specified.
Place the mouse cursor over the UM Property button on the Slot screen, and click the Port Property
button to open the UM Port Property screen.
The Port for each item is displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference
Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension Max. 5 digits (consisting of
Number number of the port. 0–9)
Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in service. PC Programming
change the status of the port, OUS: The port is out of Manual References
click the desired cell in the service. 9.1 PBX Configuration—
column, and then select INS Fault: The port is not [1-1] Configuration—Slot–
or OUS for the port. communicating with the To change the status
This option is only available in network. (INS/OUS) of a card (On-
On-line mode. line mode only)

PC Programming Manual 195

9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Port Type View

9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—

Port Property—Port Type View
Displays the number of connected telephones, devices, and Cell Stations (CSs). This screen can be
accessed from the Port Property screen of any extension cards in use in the PBX system, including
extension cards of Expansion Units. For information about Expansion Units, see 9.33 PBX Configuration—
[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Expansion Unit1/Expansion Unit2/Expansion Unit3.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Name Description Value Range Links
Type Indicates the types of IP-EXT, SIP-MLT, SIP, DPT PC Programming
telephones, devices, or CSs (40V) (KX-DT300 series/ Manual References
(reference only). KX-DT500 series/KX-T7600 9.1 PBX Configuration—
series DPTs), DPT (15V) (DPTs [1-1] Configuration—Slot
other than KX-DT300 series/
KX-DT500 series/KX-T7600
series), APT (15V), SLT, DSS
Console, UM, VM, Other, CS,
High-density CS, IP-CS, SIP-CS,
S-PS
Total Indicates the total number of Not applicable. PC Programming
Count each type of telephone, device, Manual References
and CS connected to the PBX 9.1 PBX Configuration—
(reference only). CSs are [1-1] Configuration—Slot
counted on the basis of the
number of ports in service plus
the number of extension ports
to which CSs are connected.

196 PC Programming Manual

 9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-SIPGW

9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—

Shelf Property—V-SIPGW
Common settings for all of the V-SIPGW cards installed in the Virtual Shelf can be programmed.

Icon Description
In this section, the following icons show the different parameter type.
Icon Description for Parameter Type
Manual programming is compulsory under certain conditions.
Manual programming is optional.

Main
Name Description Value Range Links
SIP Client Specifies the port number of the PBX used 1024–65535
Port Number for communications with the SIP server.
SIP Called Specifies whether to receive a SIP trunk Disable (High->Low), Disable
Party Number call when receiving the INVITE message (Low->High), Enable
Check Ability with an incorrect target SIP-URI. The
setting specified here is also applied when
the request header is blank or contains
characters that cannot be modified to a
receivable number.
SIP Called Specifies the search mode for the notified Mode 1: Searches SIP
Party Number SIP Called Party Number information. accounts only.
Search Mode Mode 2: Searches SIP
accounts, then DDI/DID
numbers. Searches the SIP
trunks of the tenant of the
search-matched DDI/DID
number, in ascending order
(Low → High).
Mode 3: Searches SIP
accounts, then DDI/DID
numbers. Searches the SIP
trunks of the tenant of the
search-matched DDI/DID
number, in descending order
(High → Low).
Symmetric Enables this feature to request that the Disable, Enable
Response SIP server sends the response back to the
Routing Ability source IP address and port from which the
request originated.

PC Programming Manual 197

9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-SIPGW

Name Description Value Range Links

100rel Ability Specifies whether to add the option tag Disable: This feature is not
100rel to the header field of the INVITE activated.
message. Enable (Active): Activates this
feature only if the other
device supports the feature.
Enable (Passive): Activates
this feature only when
requested by the other
device.
Ringback Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone Disable, Enable
Tone to Outside to an outside caller when the network
Caller cannot send the tone.
SIP QoS Specifies the type of value to be stored in ToS, DSCP, HEX
Ability the ToS field in the IP header.
SIP QoS-ToS Specifies the priority level in the ToS field 0–7
Priority when "ToS" is selected in SIP QoS
Ability.
SIP QoS-ToS Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field Normal, Monetary Cost,
Type when "ToS" is selected in SIP QoS Reliability, Throughput, Delay
Ability.

Timer
Name Description Value Range Links
SIP T1 Specifies the retransmission interval time for INVITE requests 5–255 × 100 ms
and responses.
SIP T2 Specifies the retransmission interval time for INVITE responses 40–255 × 100 ms
and non-INVITE requests.

NAT Traversal 1-8

Name Description Value Range Links
Name Specifies the name of NAT Traversal configuration. Max. 20 characters
This value is displayed in NAT Traversal Table in
9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot
—Port Property—V-SIPGW—NAT
NAT Traversal Specifies the NAT traversal method. Off, Fixed IP Addr.,
STUN
– STUN: A STUN Server, used alongside the SIP
Server, finds out the global IP address of the
router with NAT enabled.
– Fixed IP Addr.: The global IP address of the
router with NAT enabled is fixed.

Note
Manual programming is optional except when
programming is required depending on the
network conditions.

198 PC Programming Manual

 9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-SIPGW

Name Description Value Range Links

NAT - Voice Specifies the starting port number of the dynamic 1024–65535
(RTP) UDP Port ports used for NAT Traversal.
No.
NAT - Keep Specifies whether to send Keep Alive packets in Disable, Enable
Alive Packet order to maintain the NAT binding information. This
Sending Ability setting may be compulsory depending on the
network conditions.
NAT - Keep Specifies the type of Keep Alive packets to be sent Blank UDP, None
Alive Packet Type out.
NAT - Keep Specifies the interval time until the next Keep Alive 1–60 s
Alive Packet packet is sent.
Sending Interval
Note
This interval must be shorter than the NAT
binding time of the router. The default value is
appropriate in most cases.
NAT - Fixed Specifies the global IP address of the router with 1.0.0.0–
Global IP Address NAT enabled. This setting is compulsory if Fixed IP 223.255.255.255
Addr. is selected in NAT Traversal.
STUN Ability Specifies whether to open a protocol port of the Disable, Enable
STUN server to enable STUN feature.
STUN Client Specifies the port number of the PBX used for 1–65535
Port Number communications with the STUN server.
STUN External Specifies the number of times that a query is retried 0–8
Address Detection when no response is received from the STUN
Retry Counter server.
STUN Specifies the length of time until a query is retried 0–1600 ms
Resending Interval when no response is received from the STUN
server.

PC Programming Manual 199

9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-SIPGW

9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—

Card Property—V-SIPGW
Common card settings for all of the V-SIPGW cards installed in the Virtual Shelf can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
DNS SRV Record Specifies whether to request that the DNS server Disable,
Resolve Ability translates domain names into IP addresses using the DNS Enable
SRV record. Click Common Settings to change this
setting.

200 PC Programming Manual

 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW

9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—Port Property—V-SIPGW
Programming Port Properties
Some of the parameters can be automatically programmed by selecting the desired SIP provider for each
virtual SIP gateway port.

Icon Description
In this section, the following icons show the different parameter type.
Icon Description for Parameter Type
Programmed automatically by selecting the desired SIP provider in Select Provider.
Manual programming is compulsory.

Manual programming is compulsory under certain conditions.

Manual programming is optional.

Automatic Programming
Some of the parameters on this screen can be automatically programmed by selecting the desired SIP
provider for each virtual SIP gateway port. A maximum of 32 SIP providers can be programmed, and a
different SIP provider can be assigned to each virtual SIP gateway port.
Follow the steps below to configure a SIP provider.
1. Click Select Provider.
A dialogue box will appear. Available virtual SIP gateway port numbers are displayed in the list.
2. From the Provider menu, select the desired SIP provider.
3. Highlight the desired port numbers or click Select All to select all the virtual SIP gateway port numbers
to be assigned to the SIP provider selected in step 2.
4. Click Execute.
5. Click OK.
6. Click Apply.
Appropriate setting values designated by the SIP provider will be set in the parameters for the virtual SIP
gateway ports.

Manual Programming
Follow the steps below to programme the parameters which are not automatically programmed by selecting
a provider.
1. Click a desired tab.
2. Enter information or select from the list for each parameter.
Adding Settings to Provider Profiles
Follow the steps below to add the settings to provider profiles.
1. Click Add Provider.
A dialogue box will appear. Available virtual SIP gateway port numbers are displayed in the list.
2. Highlight the desired port numbers or click Select All to select all the virtual SIP gateway port numbers
to add the settings to provider profiles.

PC Programming Manual 201

9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW

3. Click Execute.
Trunk Adaptor
To connect to a Trunk Adaptor, follow the steps below.
1. Ensure that the Trunk Adaptor is connected to the network and a power supply, and that all ports to be
set are OUS.
2. Click Trunk Adaptor. The Trunk Adaptor List screen is displayed.
3. Enter a name (20 characters or less) for the Trunk Adaptor in Trunk Adaptor Name.
4. Enter the Trunk Adaptor’s IP address in Trunk Adaptor IP Address.
5. To confirm that the setting is correct, click Connect. If the setting is correct, the Trunk Adaptor’s Web
Maintenance Console will open in a new browser window.
For details about the Trunk Adaptor’s Web Maintenance Console, refer to the documentation of the
Trunk Adaptor.
6. Click Next. The Set Trunk Adaptor window will open.
7. In Virtual SIP Gateway - Port Property - No. Range, specify From and To to select a range of SIP
connections to be used with the Trunk Adaptor. These numbers correspond to the No. column of the
main Port Property screen.
8. In Name : IP Address, select a name and IP address previously entered on the Trunk Adaptor List
screen.
9. In SIP Server Port Number, enter the SIP server’s port number.
10. In SIP Account / User Name, enter a 3- to 5-digit number in From.
11. Click Finish, and the following settings are implemented:
• Provider Name and SIP Server IP Address in the Main tab will be set to match the selected
Trunk Adaptor.
• The User Name and Authentication ID in the Account tab will be set to the value specified in
SIP Account / User Name, increased by 1 for each connection (i.e. if "401" was specified, User
Name and Authentication ID for No. 1 will be set to "401", and then for No. 2 they will be set to
"402", etc.).
12. In the Calling Party tab of the V-SIPGW—Port Property screen, set From Header—User Part to
PBX-CLIP for each port that was set to be used with the Trunk Adaptor.

Main
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in
change the status of the port, service.
click the desired cell in the OUS: The port is out of
column, and then select INS or service.
OUS for the port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available in communicating with the
On-line mode. network.

202 PC Programming Manual

 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW

Name Description Value Range Links

Connection Specifies whether to connect a SIP Provider, Trunk Feature Manual
Attribute port to a Trunk Adaptor or use it Adaptor References
as a SIP gateway. 5.3.1 Trunk
Adaptor
Connection
Trunk Property Specifies the networking type of Public, VPN
each SIP trunk.

Note
If Connection Attribute is
set to "Trunk Adaptor" for
the port, only "Public" will be
available for this setting.

PC Programming Manual 203

9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW

Name Description Value Range Links

Channel Specifies the channel property Basic channel: The
Attribute of each port to enable several subscriber channel that is
sessions to be performed for assigned the SIP
one subscription with the SIP registration information.
provider. Additional channel for
SlotN (N=1–4) ChN
(N=1–16): The
subordinate channel that
uses the same
registration information as
a Basic channel for SIP
sessions. Select the Slot
number and the Basic
channel number to which
the Additional channel
belongs.
Not Used: The channel is
not in use.

Note
• The Basic channel
and Additional
channel can belong
to different
V-SIPGW cards.
• When you save the
data on the Main
screen, for each
virtual SIP gateway
port that has
Channel Attribute
set to Basic
channel, the
following items are
checked for
duplication: SIP
Server Name, SIP
Server IP
Address, and SIP
Service Domain.
A maximum of 32
different SIP
providers can be
programmed.
Provider Name Specifies the name of the SIP Max. 20 characters
provider.

204 PC Programming Manual

 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW

Name Description Value Range Links

SIP Server Specifies the domain name of Max. 100 characters
Name the SIP proxy server.

Note
Specify the domain name of
the outbound proxy server, if
provided by the SIP
provider.
SIP Server IP Specifies the IP address of the 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Address SIP proxy server. This setting is
compulsory when not using the
DNS server.

Note
Specify the IP address of
the outbound proxy server, if
provided by the SIP
provider.
SIP Server IP Specifies the IP address of the 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Address for Failover SIP proxy server for failover.

Note
Specify the IP address of
the outbound proxy server
for failover, if provided by
the SIP provider. This
setting cannot be changed
while the V-SIPGW card is
set to INS.
SIP Server Port Specifies the port number of the 1–65535
Number SIP proxy server.
SIP Service Specifies the domain name Max. 100 characters
Domain provided by the SIP provider.
Subscriber Specifies the number used as Max. 16 digits (consisting
Number the CLIP number. of 0–9, , and #)

PC Programming Manual 205

9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW

Name Description Value Range Links

P2P Group Specifies the peer-to-peer group 1–32 PC
of the IP-Trunk. Programming
Manual
References
9.1 PBX
Configuration—
[1-1]
Configuration—
Slot—Main—P2P
Group
Feature Manual
References
5.2.3 Peer-to-
Peer (P2P)
Connection
P2P Group Indicates the selected peer-to- P2P Group Name PC
Name peer group’s name (reference Programming
only). Manual
References
9.1 PBX
Configuration—
[1-1]
Configuration—
Slot—Main—P2P
Group
Feature Manual
References
5.2.3 Peer-to-
Peer (P2P)
Connection

Account
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in service.
change the status of the OUS: The port is out of service.
port, click the desired cell in Fault: The port is not communicating with
the column, and then select the network.
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available
in On-line mode.

206 PC Programming Manual

 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW

Name Description Value Range Links

User Name Specifies the user name Max. 64 characters
(SIP Account) provided by The available characters are those allowed
the SIP provider. in RFC3986.
"0"–"9"
"a"–"z"
"A"–"Z"
"-", ".", "_", ":", "/", "?", "#", "[", "]", "@", "!",
"$", "&", "'", "(", ")", "*", "+", ",", ";", "="
Other characters are not allowed.
Authentication Specifies the authentication Max. 64 characters
ID ID required for registration The available characters are those allowed
with the SIP server. in RFC3986.
"0"–"9"
"a"–"z"
"A"–"Z"
"-", ".", "_", ":", "/", "?", "#", "[", "]", "@", "!",
"$", "&", "'", "(", ")", "*", "+", ",", ";", "="
Other characters are not allowed.
Authentication Specifies the authentication Max. 32 characters
Password password used for The available characters are those allowed
registration with the SIP in RFC3986.
provider. "0"–"9"
"a"–"z"
"A"–"Z"
"-", ".", "_", ":", "/", "?", "#", "[", "]", "@", "!",
"$", "&", "'", "(", ")", "*", "+", ",", ";", "="
Other characters are not allowed.

Register
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status INS: The port is in
of the port, click the desired cell in the column, service.
and then select INS or OUS for the port. OUS: The port is out of
This option is only available in On-line mode. service.
Fault: The port is not
communicating with the
network.
Register Ability Specifies whether to send the REGISTER Disable, Enable
message to the SIP server.
Register Specifies the maximum length of interval time 10–86400 s
Sending Interval after which the PBX sends the REGISTER
message.
Un-Register Specifies whether to unregister the previous Disable, Enable
Ability when port registration and send the REGISTER message
INS to the SIP server when the port status is set
back to INS.

PC Programming Manual 207

9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW

Name Description Value Range Links

Registrar Specifies the domain name of the SIP server. Max. 100 characters
Server Name
Registrar Specifies the IP address of the SIP server. This 1.0.0.0–
Server IP Address setting is compulsory when a register IP 223.255.255.255
address is provided.
Registrar Specifies the IP address of the SIP registrar 1.0.0.0–
Server IP Address server for failover. 223.255.255.255
for Failover
Note
Specify the IP address of the outbound
registrar server for failover, if provided by
the SIP provider. This setting cannot be
changed while the V-SIPGW card is set to
INS.
Registrar Specifies the port number of the SIP server. 1–65535
Server Port
Number
Register Specifies the interval time for resending the 0-65535 s
Resending Interval REGISTER message.
(s)

NAT
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status INS: The port is in service.
of the port, click the desired cell in the column, OUS: The port is out of
and then select INS or OUS for the port. service.
This option is only available in On-line mode. Fault: The port is not
communicating with the
network.
NAT Selects the NAT traversal configuration to apply None, 1-8
Traversal Table to the port. For details about NAT traversal
settings, see 9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—
V-SIPGW—NAT Traversal 1-8.
STUN Server Specifies the domain name of a STUN server. Max. 100 characters
—Name
STUN Server Specifies the IP address of the STUN server. 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
—IP Address This setting is compulsory when the STUN
method is selected and a DNS server is not
used.
STUN Server Specifies the port number of the STUN server. 1–65535
Port Number

208 PC Programming Manual

 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW

Option
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is in
status of the port, click the desired cell in the service.
column, and then select INS or OUS for the OUS: The port is out of
port. service.
This option is only available in On-line mode. Fault: The port is not
communicating with the
network.
Session Timer Enables the PBX to periodically refresh SIP Disable: This feature is
Ability sessions by sending repeated requests. not activated.
Enable (Active):
Activates this feature
only if the other device
supports the feature.
Enable (Passive):
Activates this feature
only when requested by
the other device.
Session Expire Specifies the length of time that the PBX 90–3600 s
Timer waits before terminating SIP sessions when
no reply to the repeated requests is received.
Session Refresh Specifies the type of request that the PBX UPDATE, re-INVITE
Method sends to periodically refresh SIP sessions.
Session Incoming Specifies the type of method used for UAC, UAS
Refresher Request establishing the session interval.
SIP 200 Response Specifies the amount of time to wait for a SIP 0–18000 × 100 ms
Timer (*100 ms) 200 (OK) response when establishing a
connection between two parties. (Specifying
"0" will disable the timer.)
SIP 18x Response Specifies the amount of time to wait for a 18x 0–255 s
Timer (s) response when establishing a connection
between two parties.
Proxy-Require Specifies option tags in a Proxy-Require Max. 100 characters
Option header field so that the SIP server is notified
that the client is behind a router with NAT
enabled and firewall.
Failover Specifies the amount of time to wait for a 0–30 s
Timer(INVITE) response for an INVITE request.

PC Programming Manual 209

9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW

Name Description Value Range Links

Failover Specifies the amount of time to wait for a 0–30 s
Timer(REGISTER) response for a REGISTER request.

Note
• If 0 is specified, failover operation
follows the T1/T2 timer.
• While monitoring failover with
OPTIONS, the applicable timer setting
is applied to OPTIONS as well.
• This setting cannot be changed while
the V-SIPGW card is set to INS.
• This setting cannot be changed when
an additional channel is active.

Calling Party
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Indicates the port status. INS: The port is in service.
Connection To change the status of OUS: The port is out of service.
the port, click the desired Fault: The port is not communicating with the
cell in the column, and network.
then select INS or OUS
for the port.
This option is only
available in On-line
mode.
Header Specifies the header of From Header, P-Preferred-Identity Header
Type the SIP message in
which the caller
information is stored.
From Specifies the value to be User Name, Authentication ID, PBX-CLIP
Header— stored in the username
User Part part of the SIP-URI of
the From header.
From Specifies the complete Max. 100 characters
Header—SIP- SIP-URI address of the
URI From header. The
configuration in From
Header—User Part will
be invalid if this
parameter is set.
Specifies the value to be User Name, Authentication ID, PBX-CLIP
P-Preferred- stored in the username
Identity part of the SIP-URI of
Header— the P-Preferred-Identity
User Part header.

210 PC Programming Manual

 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW

Name Description Value Range Links

Specifies the complete Max. 100 characters
P-Preferred- SIP-URI address of the
Identity P-Preferred-Identity
Header—SIP- header. The
URI configuration in
P-Preferred-Identity
Header—User Part will
be invalid if this
parameter is set.
Number Selects the format of the International, +International, National
Format CLIP number to be sent
to the called party.
Remove Specifies the number of 0–32
Digit leading digits of the CLIP
number to be removed.
This setting is
compulsory when PBX-
CLIP is selected in From
Header—User Part or
P-Preferred-Identity
Header—User Part.
Additional Specifies the number to Max. 20 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Dial be added to the CLIP
number in the place of
the removed digits. This
setting is compulsory
when PBX-CLIP is
selected in From
Header—User Part or
P-Preferred-Identity
Header—User Part.
Specifies the format of Display name and SIP-URI, Display name only
Anonymous the "From" header when
format in not sending caller ID. Note
"From" If "Display name and SIP-URI" is selected, the
header display name part and the SIP-URI of the
"From" header will be displayed as
"Anonymous".
[Example]
From: Anonymous
<sip:[email protected]>
If "Display name only" is selected, only the
display name part of the "From" header will be
displayed as "Anonymous".
[Example]
From: Anonymous <sip:[email protected]>

PC Programming Manual 211

9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW

Name Description Value Range Links

Select whether to include Disable, Enable
P-Asserted- a P-Asserted-Identity
Identity header with caller Note
header information. This header • To copy values from one location to another,
will be sent independent click Copy to.
of the selection for
Header Type (From • If the Channel Attribute setting of the port is
Header/P-Preferred- "Additional", the setting cannot be changed.
Identity Header).

Called Party
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is in service.
status of the port, click the desired cell in OUS: The port is out of
the column, and then select INS or OUS service.
for the port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available in On-line communicating with the
mode. network.
Number Format Specifies the format of an incoming call International,
number. +International, National
Type Specifies the header of the incoming SIP Request-URI, To header
message in which the dialled number is
stored.
MEX - Prefix for Specifies the Mobile Device Access prefix Max. 16 characters
Incoming/E.164 - for incoming calls from MEX-enabled
Prefix for own mobile devices.
system
MEX - Prefix for Specifies the Mobile Device Access Max. 16 characters
Outgoing/E.164 - outgoing prefix for calls made to MEX-
Prefix for other enabled mobile devices.
system
MEX/E.164 - Specifies additional digits to be inserted Max. 7 digits (consisting of
Additional Dial before the dialled number of an incoming 0–9, *, and #)
call from a MEX-enabled mobile device.

Voice/FAX
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is in service.
status of the port, click the desired cell in OUS: The port is out of
the column, and then select INS or OUS service.
for the port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available in On-line communicating with the
mode. network.

212 PC Programming Manual

 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW

Name Description Value Range Links

IP Codec Specifies the priority of the codecs to be G.711A, G.711Mu, G.729A,
Priority—1st, used. None is only available for 2nd and None
2nd, 3rd 3rd priorities.
Packet Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms,
Sampling Time measurements (samples) of sound data 60 ms
(G.711A) during a conversation. The smaller this
number, the higher the quality of the
transmitted sound.
Packet Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms,
Sampling Time measurements (samples) of sound data 60 ms
(G.711Mu) during a conversation. The smaller this
number, the higher the quality of the
transmitted sound.
Packet Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms,
Sampling Time measurements (samples) of sound data 60 ms
(G.729A) during a conversation. The smaller this
number, the higher the quality of the
transmitted sound.
Voice Activity Enables the use of the Voice Activity Disable, Enable
Detection for G. Detection feature for the G.711 codec.
711 This feature conserves bandwidth by
detecting silent periods during a call and
suppressing the packets of silence from
being sent to the network.
Inform Annex Specifies whether to inform that Annex B Disable, Enable
B Status (G. for the G.729 codec is not supported.
729A) Note
Annex B expansion
features for the G.729
codec are not supported
by the V-SIPGW card.
However, it is necessary to
inform some carriers of
this fact to avoid having
calls disconnected.
Carriers can be informed
by enabling this feature.
FAX Sending Specifies the method of transporting the G.711 Inband, T.38
Method fax signal.
Maximum Bit Specifies the maximum bit rate of the fax No Speed Limit, 2400 bps,
Rate signal. 4800 bps, 7200 bps, 9600
bps, 12000 bps, 14400 bps
FAX Detection Enables the use of the FAX Detection Disable, Enable
Ability Ability feature. This feature enables end-
to-end fax signal relay when the other
party prefers a codec other than G.711.
This feature functions only if the other
party supports G.711.

PC Programming Manual 213

9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW

Name Description Value Range Links

DTMF Specifies the method to transport DTMF Inband, Outband (RFC2833),
tones. Outband (SIP INFO)
Payload Type Specifies the payload type of RFC2833 for 96–127
DTMF tones.

Note
Manual programming is required if
DTMF is set to Outband (RFC2833).

RTP/RTCP
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is in service.
status of the port, click the desired cell in the OUS: The port is out of
column, and then select INS or OUS for the service.
port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available in On-line mode. communicating with the
network.
RTP QoS Specifies the type of value to be stored in ToS, DSCP, HEX
Ability the ToS field in the IP header.
RTP QoS-ToS Specifies the priority level in the ToS field. 0–7
Priority
RTP QoS-ToS Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field. Normal, Monetary Cost,
Type Reliability, Throughput,
Delay
RTP QoS- Specifies the value in the ToS field by a 0–63
DSCP DSCP for DiffServ.
RTP QoS-HEX Specifies the value in the ToS field by a 00–FF
hexadecimal number.
RTCP Packet Specifies whether to enable each port to Disable, Enable
Sending Ability send RTCP packets.
RTCP Packet Specifies the interval time until the next 5–60 s
Interval RTCP packet is sent.
Keep Alive Specifies the length of time to send Keep 0 s, 10 s, 20 s, 30 s, 40 s,
Timer Alive packets for the connection. Specifying 50 s, 60 s
"0 s" will disable the sending of Keep Alive
packets.

T.38
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

214 PC Programming Manual

 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW

Name Description Value Range Links

Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is in
status of the port, click the desired cell in service.
the column, and then select INS or OUS OUS: The port is out of
for the port. service.
This option is only available in On-line Fault: The port is not
mode. communicating with the
network.
T38 FAX Max Specifies the maximum datagram size 272–512
Datagram when using the T.38 protocol.
T38 FAX UDPTL Specifies whether to enable the Disable, Enable
Error Correction – redundancy feature when using the T.38
Redundancy protocol.
T38 FAX UDPTL Specifies the redundancy count for T.30 0–7
Redundancy count for messages when using the T.38 protocol.
T.30 messages
T38 FAX UDPTL Specifies the redundancy count for data 0–3
Redundancy count for when using the T.38 protocol.
data
T38 FAX Rate Specifies the rate management method Transferred TCF, Local
Management Method when using the T.38 protocol. TCF
Reject T.38 Request Specifies whether T.38 protocol data Disable, Enable
from Network requests are rejected or accepted.
T.38 FAX NAT Specifies the NAT Traversal packet type Disable, Blank UDP
Traversal when sending or receiving faxes using the
T.38 protocol.

T.38 Option
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of INS: The port is in
the port, click the desired cell in the column, and service.
then select INS or OUS for the port. OUS: The port is out of
This option is only available in On-line mode. service.
Fault: The port is not
communicating with the
network.
T38 FAX QoS Specifies the type of value to be stored in the ToS, DSCP, HEX
Available ToS field in the IP header when using the T.38
protocol.
T38 FAX Specifies the priority level in the ToS field when 0–7
QoS-ToS Priority using the T.38 protocol.
T38 FAX Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field when Normal, Monetary Cost,
QoS-ToS Type using the T.38 protocol. Reliability, Throughput,
Delay

PC Programming Manual 215

9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW

Name Description Value Range Links

T38 FAX Specifies the value in the ToS field by a DSCP for 0–63
QoS-DSCP DiffServ when using the T.38 protocol. This
setting is compulsory when DSCP is selected in
T38 FAX QoS Available.
T38 FAX Specifies the value in the ToS field by a 00–FF
QoS-HEX hexadecimal number when using the T.38
protocol. This setting is compulsory when HEX is
selected in T38 FAX QoS Available.

DSP
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is in service.
status of the port, click the desired cell in OUS: The port is out of
the column, and then select INS or OUS service.
for the port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available in On-line communicating with the
mode. network.
Echo Specifies the echo canceller ability time. OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms
Canceller Ability
DSP Digital Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the -14–6 dB
Gain (Down) down voice path.
DSP Digital Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up -14–6 dB
Gain (Up) voice path.
EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. -14–6 dB
NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) Disable, Weak, Normal,
setting to control echo sound quality. Strong

Supplementary Service
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is in service.
status of the port, click the desired cell in OUS: The port is out of
the column, and then select INS or OUS service.
for the port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available in On-line communicating with the
mode. network.

216 PC Programming Manual

 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW

Name Description Value Range Links

CLIP (Receive) Specify where caller information about P-Asserted-Identity Header,
an incoming call is obtained: From Header
• Prioritised: P-Asserted-Identity→P- Note
Preferred-Identity→From Header
• To copy values from
• Fixed: From Header one location to another,
click Copy to.
• If the Channel
Attribute setting of the
port is "Additional", the
setting cannot be
changed.
CLIR Specifies whether to allow restriction of Yes, No
the display of the CLIP number on the
called party’s telephone when making a
SIP trunk call.
CNIP (Send) Specifies whether to send the caller’s Yes, No
name to be displayed on the called
party’s telephone when making a SIP
trunk call.
CNIP (Receive) Specifies whether to receive the caller’s Yes, No
name to be displayed on the called
party’s telephone when receiving a SIP
trunk call.
Blind Specifies whether to allow blind transfers Yes, No
Transfer(REFER) using REFER.
Attended Specifies whether to allow attended Yes, No
Transfer(REFER) transfers using REFER.

Advanced
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status INS: The port is in service.
of the port, click the desired cell in the OUS: The port is out of
column, and then select INS or OUS for the service.
port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available in On-line mode. communicating with the
network.
Diversion Enable this setting to allow the specified SIP Disable, Enable
Header trunks to detect incoming Mobile Device
Access calls from MEX-enabled mobile
devices.

PC Programming Manual 217

9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW

9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—Shelf Property—V-IPGW
Common settings for all of the V-IPGW cards installed in the Virtual Shelf can be programmed.

Main
Name Description Value Range Links
Gatekeeper Specifies whether to use a gatekeeper. Disable, Enable
Available
RTCP Packet Specifies whether to enable the PBX to Disable, Enable
Sending Ability send RTCP packets.
RTCP Packet Specifies the length of time until the 5–60 s
Interval PBX retries to send RTCP packets
when no reply is received.
RTP QoS Specifies the type of value to be stored ToS, DSCP, HEX
Available in the ToS field of the packet.
RTP QoS-ToS Specifies the priority level in the ToS 0–7
Priority field.
RTP QoS-ToS Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field. Normal, Monetary
Type Cost, Reliability,
Throughput,
Delay
RTP QoS-DSCP Specifies the value in the ToS field by a 0–63
DSCP for DiffServ.
RTP QoS-HEX Specifies the value in the ToS field by a 00–FF
hexadecimal number.
T38 FAX QoS Specifies the type of value to be stored ToS, DSCP, HEX
Available in the ToS field in the IP header when
using the T.38 protocol.
T38 FAX QoS-ToS Specifies the priority level in the ToS 0–7
Priority field when using the T.38 protocol.
T38 FAX QoS-ToS Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field Normal, Monetary
Type when using the T.38 protocol. Cost, Reliability,
Throughput,
Delay
T38 FAX QoS- Specifies the value in the ToS field by a 0–63
DSCP DSCP for DiffServ when using the T.38
protocol. This setting is compulsory
when DSCP is selected in T38 FAX
QoS Available.
T38 FAX QoS- Specifies the value in the ToS field by a 00–FF
HEX hexadecimal number when using the T.
38 protocol. This setting is compulsory
when HEX is selected in T38 FAX QoS
Available.

218 PC Programming Manual

 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW

Name Description Value Range Links

Echo Canceller Specifies the echo canceller ability time. OFF, 64 ms, 128 Feature Manual
Ability ms References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
DSP Digital Gain Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the -14–6 dB Feature Manual
(Down) down voice path. References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
DSP Digital Gain Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the -14–6 dB Feature Manual
(Up) up voice path. References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. -14–6 dB Feature Manual
References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Disable, Weak, Feature Manual
Processor) setting to control echo sound Normal, Strong References
quality. 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
QSIG-CT Enables a call to be transferred to a No, Yes Feature Manual
destination extension at another PBX in References
a QSIG network. 4.3.4.4 Call
Transfer (CT)—by
QSIG
QSIG-CF Enables a call to be forwarded to a No, Yes Feature Manual
destination extension at another PBX in References
a QSIG network. 4.3.4.3 Call
Forwarding (CF)—
by QSIG
Trunk Property Indicates the networking type of each Public, Private,
trunk. VPN

Outgoing Call
Name Description Value Range Links
First-digit Timer Specifies the length of time within which the first digit of a 5–30 s
(T302-1) dial number must be dialled after seizing a virtual IP trunk.
Inter-digit Timer Specifies the length of time within which subsequent digits 1–10 s
(T302-2) of a dial number must be dialled.
Dial End Code Specifies the delimiter code to be used to signal the end of 0–9, #, *
a dialled number.

PC Programming Manual 219

9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW

Incoming Call
Name Description Value Range Links
Voice Activity Enables the use of the Voice Activity Disable, Enable
Detection for G. Detection feature for the G.711 codec.
711 This feature conserves bandwidth by
detecting silent periods during a call and
suppressing the packets of silence from
being sent to the network.
Voice Codec Specifies the highest priority codec type. G.711A, G.711Mu,
Priority 1st For fax communications, it is necessary G.729A
to specify G.711A or G.711Mu for this
parameter.
Voice Codec Specifies the second highest priority None, G.711A, G.
Priority 2nd codec type. 711Mu, G.729A
Voice Codec Specifies the third highest priority codec None, G.711A, G.
Priority 3rd type. 711Mu, G.729A
Packet Sampling Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, 40
Time for G.711A measurements (samples) of sound data ms, 50 ms, 60 ms
during a conversation. The smaller this
number, the higher the quality of the
transmitted sound.
Packet Sampling Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, 40
Time for G.711Mu measurements (samples) of sound data ms, 50 ms, 60 ms
during a conversation. The smaller this
number, the higher the quality of the
transmitted sound.
Packet Sampling Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, 40
Time for G.729A measurements (samples) of sound data ms, 50 ms, 60 ms
during a conversation. The smaller this
number, the higher the quality of the
transmitted sound.
FAX Detection Enables the use of the FAX Detection Disable, Enable PC
Ability Ability feature. Since fax signals using a Programming
codec other than G.711 cannot be Manual
received accurately at the destination, References
this feature automatically switches the
9.11 PBX
codec to G.711 to enable end-to-end fax
Configuration—
signal relay over the network.
[1-1]
Configuration—
Slot—Shelf
Property—
V-IPGW—
Incoming Call —
Voice Codec
Priority 1st
FAX Sending Specifies the method of transporting the G.711 Inband, T.38
Method fax signal.

220 PC Programming Manual

 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW

Name Description Value Range Links

Maximum Bit Rate Specifies the maximum bit rate of the No Speed Limit,
fax signal. 2400 bps, 4800
bps, 7200 bps,
9600 bps, 12000
bps, 14400 bps
DTMF Specifies the type of DTMF tone to be Inband, Outband
sent out. (RFC2833),
Outband (H.245)
Payload Type Specifies the payload type for DTMF 96–127
tones using RFC2833. Programming
this parameter is only necessary if
DTMF is set to Outband (RFC2833).
T38 FAX Max Specifies the maximum datagram size 272–512
Datagram when using the T.38 protocol.
T38 FAX UDPTL Specifies whether to enable the Disable, Enable
Error Correction – redundancy feature when using the T.38
Redundancy protocol.
T38 FAX UDPTL Specifies the redundancy count for T.30 0–7
Redundancy count messages when using the T.38 protocol.
for T.30 messages
T38 FAX UDPTL Specifies the redundancy count for data 0–3
Redundancy count when using the T.38 protocol.
for data
T38 FAX Rate Specifies the rate management method Transferred TCF,
Management when using the T.38 protocol. Local TCF
Method

Timer
Name Description Value Range Links
T301 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after 0–18000 × 100 ms
making a call.
T302 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an 0–600 × 100 ms
incoming call. Applies to overlap receiving.
T303 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after 0–600 × 100 ms
sending the SETUP (call setting) message.
T304 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an 0–3000 × 100 ms
outgoing call. Applies to overlap sending.
T305 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after 0–3000 × 100 ms
sending the DISC (disconnection) message.
T308 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after 0–600 × 100 ms
receiving the Release message.
T309 Specifies the length of time after which the PBX tries to disconnect 0–3000 × 100 ms
the data link, before disconnecting the call.

PC Programming Manual 221

9.11.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW—GK Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

T310 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a continuance 0–3000 × 100 ms
message after receiving the Incoming Call Proceeding message.
T313 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after 0–600 × 100 ms
sending the Connect message.
T316 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after 0–3000 × 100 ms
sending the Restart message.
T318 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after 0–600 × 100 ms
sending the Resume message.
T319 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after 0–600 × 100 ms
sending the Suspend message.
T322 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after 0–600 × 100 ms
sending the Status enquiry message.
T3D3 Specifies the length of time after which the PBX tries to establish 0–3000 × 100 ms
L2 in "Permanent" mode.
T3D9 Specifies the length of time after which the PBX tries to disconnect 0–3000 × 100 ms
L2 in "Call by Call" mode.

9.11.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf

Property—V-IPGW—GK Settings
Gatekeeper registration information can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
Destination Specifies a telephone number to register Max. 30 digits (consisting of
Number with a gatekeeper. 0–9)
Device Name Specifies the name of the device for Max. 20 characters
programming reference.

9.11.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf

Property—V-IPGW—Hunt Pattern
The related settings of hunt patterns can be programmed. The hunt pattern determines how to route
incoming calls through virtual IP trunks to the PBX.
A maximum of 32 hunt patterns can be programmed.

Hunt Pattern 1–16

Name Description Value Range Links
Leading Specifies the leading digits of Max. 30 digits
Number dialled numbers by which to (consisting of 0–9)
determine the call distribution
port group to direct incoming
calls.

222 PC Programming Manual

 9.11.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW—Hunt Pattern

Name Description Value Range Links

Call Distribution Specifies the number of the For 1st: PC Programming Manual
Port Group— call distribution port group to CDPG1–CDPG48 References
1st–16th which incoming calls are For 2nd–16th: 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
directed in priority. None, CDPG1– Configuration—Slot—Port
CDPG48 Property—V-IPGW—Call
Distribution Port Group
Feature Manual
References
4.3.2.3 Call Distribution Port
Group

PC Programming Manual 223

9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPGW

9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—Port Property—V-IPGW
Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP Gateway port.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Trunk Adaptor
To connect to a Trunk Adaptor, follow the steps below.
1. Ensure that the Trunk Adaptor is connected to the network and a power supply.
2. Click Trunk Adaptor. The Trunk Adaptor List screen is displayed.
3. Enter a name (20 characters or less) for the Trunk Adaptor in Trunk Adaptor Name.
4. Enter the Trunk Adaptor’s IP address in Trunk Adaptor IP Address.
5. To confirm that the setting is correct, click Connect. If the setting is correct, the Trunk Adaptor’s Web
Maintenance Console will open in a new browser window.
For details about the Trunk Adaptor’s Web Maintenance Console, refer to the documentation of the
Trunk Adaptor.
6. Click OK.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is in
status of the port, click the desired cell service.
in the column, and then select INS or OUS: The port is out of
OUS for the port. service.
This option is only available in On-line Fault: The port is not
mode. communicating with the
network.
Connection Specifies whether to connect a port to a Gateway, Trunk Feature Manual
Attribute Trunk Adaptor or use it as an IP Adaptor References
gateway. 5.3.1 Trunk
Adaptor
Connection
Call Specifies a call distribution port group 1–48 Feature Manual
Distribution to which incoming trunk calls are References
Port Group directed through the virtual VoIP 4.3.2.3 Call
gateway port. Distribution Port
Group
Ringback Tone Enables the PBX to send a ringback Disable, Enable
to Outside tone to an outside caller when the
Caller network cannot send the tone.

224 PC Programming Manual

 9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-IPEXT

9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—Card Property—V-IPEXT
The properties of the V-IPEXT card can be specified.
Name Description Value Range Links
Signalling Indicates the UDP port used to transmit 2427 Feature Manual
(MGCP) UDP and receive MGCP (Media Gateway References
Port No. (IP-PT) Control Protocol) data on the IP-PT 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
side (reference only). Telephone (IP-PT)
Keep Alive Time- Specifies the length of time that the Disable, 10–120 Feature Manual
Out PBX will continue to consider an IP-PT s References
to be active even if it receives no 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
transmissions from that IP-PT. The Telephone (IP-PT)
PBX constantly confirms the status of
IP-PTs. If no communications are
received from an IP-PT for the duration
specified here, the PBX considers the
IP-PT to be unreachable, and sets the
port status to Fault.
During operation, set between 10 s and
60 s. Settings over 60 s, and Disable,
are used for debugging purposes, and
IP-PTs cannot be guaranteed to
function normally in these
circumstances. Do not use debugging
settings unless instructed to do so.
To change the value displayed here,
click Common Settings and set the
desired value.
First Resending Specifies the length of time that the 500 × n (n=1– Feature Manual
Time (PTAP) PBX waits before starting to resend 16) ms References
PTAP (Panasonic Telephony 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Administration Protocol) data. Telephone (IP-PT)
To change the value displayed here,
click Common Settings and set the
desired value.
Resending Time Specifies the length of time after which 150–240 s Feature Manual
Out (PTAP) the PBX terminates resending PTAP References
(Panasonic Telephony Administration 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Protocol) data. Telephone (IP-PT)
To change the value displayed here,
click Common Settings and set the
desired value.

PC Programming Manual 225

9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-IPEXT

Name Description Value Range Links

First Resending Specifies the length of time that the 500 × n (n=1–8) Feature Manual
Time (MGCP) PBX waits before starting to resend ms References
MGCP (Media Gateway Control 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Protocol) data. Telephone (IP-PT)
To change the value displayed here,
click Common Settings and set the
desired value.
Resending Time Specifies the length of time after which 75–120 s Feature Manual
Out (MGCP) the PBX terminates resending MGCP References
(Media Gateway Control Protocol) 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
data. Telephone (IP-PT)
To change the value displayed here,
click Common Settings and set the
desired value.
LCD Off Timer These setting items are downloaded to Refer to the Web
the IP-PT. Maintenance
Console.
Brightness when
colour LCD is
turned off
Automatic
switching of page
for keys
Picture display
PT Tone volume
(except the
incoming call)
NT500 Series— Specifies the echo canceller ability OFF, 64 ms, 128 Feature Manual
Echo Canceller time. ms References
Ability 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
NT500 Series— Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the -14–6 dB Feature Manual
DSP Digital Gain down voice path. References
(Down) 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
NT500 Series— Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the -14–6 dB Feature Manual
DSP Digital Gain up voice path. References
(Up) 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
NT500 Series— Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. -14–6 dB Feature Manual
EC Gain References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)

226 PC Programming Manual

 9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-IPEXT

Name Description Value Range Links

NT500 Series— Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Disable, Weak, Feature Manual
NLP Setting Processor) setting to control echo Normal, Strong References
sound quality. 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
NT300 Series— Specifies the echo canceller ability OFF, 64 ms, 128 Feature Manual
Echo Canceller time. ms References
Ability 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
NT300 Series— Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the -14–6 dB Feature Manual
DSP Digital Gain down voice path. References
(Down) 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
NT300 Series— Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the -14–6 dB Feature Manual
DSP Digital Gain up voice path. References
(Up) 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
NT300 Series— Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. -14–6 dB Feature Manual
EC Gain References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
NT300 Series— Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Disable, Weak, Feature Manual
NLP Setting Processor) setting to control echo Normal, Strong References
sound quality. 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)

PC Programming Manual 227

9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT

9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—Port Property—V-IPEXT
Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP extension port.

Exporting and Importing IP-PT registration information

You can export/import the extension number, extension name, MAC address of the IP-PT (KX-NT series) in
CSV file format.

IP-PT Registration and De-registration

An IP-PT must be registered to the PBX by programming the PBX and IP-PT before it can be used.
Programming instructions for the PBX are given below.
It is possible to de-register the IP-PT later.
IP-PT Registration, De-registration, and Forced De-registration can be performed only in On-line mode.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Preparation Open 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports—Basic Settings,
and confirm that the IP addresses of the mother board and DSP card,
subnet mask address, and default gateway address are set.
Registration Follow the steps below to register the IP-PT.
1. Connect the IP-PT to be registered to the network and, if
necessary, the power supply.
2. Click Registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Non-registered (available) extension
numbers and names are displayed on the left.
3. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select
them for registration. Click Next.
4. Click Next.
5. If the registration is still in progress, the dialogue box will show
"Registration Executing".
If the registration is successful, the dialogue box will show
"Registration Completed". Click Close.
Once the IP-PT is successfully registered, the status of the IP-PT
will update to show "Registered".

228 PC Programming Manual

 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT

Value
Name Description Links
Range
De- Follow the steps below to de-register the IP-PT.
registration
1. Click De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers and
names are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select
them for de-registration. Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "De-
registration Succeed".
4. Click Close.
Once the IP-PT is successfully de-registered, the status of the
IP-PT will update to show "None".
Forced De- Follow the steps below to forcibly de-register the IP-PT when normal
registration de-registration has been unsuccessful or IP address settings have
been changed or deleted only on the IP-PT.
1. Click Forced De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers and
names are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select
them for forced de-registration. Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click OK.
A dialogue box will appear.
4. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show
"Forced De-registration Succeed".
5. Click Close.
Once the IP-PT is successfully de-registered, the status of the
IP-PT will update to show "None".

Main
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number Max. 5 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Number of the port. of 0–9) References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
Extension Specifies the extension name of Max. 20 characters Feature Manual
Name the port. References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)

PC Programming Manual 229

9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT

Name Description Value Range Links

IP-PT Type Displays the IP-PT type of the
terminal that is currently
connected or was connected to
the port. For KX-NT265, a
hyphen(-) is displayed. For IP
softphone, KX-NT3xxS is
displayed.
Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in Feature Manual
change the status of the port, service. References
click the desired cell in the OUS: The port is out of 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
column, and then select INS or service. Telephone (IP-PT)
OUS for the port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available in communicating with the
On-line mode. network.
Status Indicates whether a certain None, Registered Feature Manual
IP-PT is registered (reference References
only). 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
IP Phone Specifies the MAC address of 00:00:00:00:00:00– Feature Manual
Registration ID the IP-PT. FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF References
(MAC This parameter can only be 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Address) modified when Connection on Telephone (IP-PT)
this screen is set to OUS.
Current IP Indicates the current IP address 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Feature Manual
Address of the IP-PT (reference only). References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
Program Ver. Indicates the programme Version number Feature Manual
software file version of the IP-PT References
(reference only). 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)

Option
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number of Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Number the port. (consisting of 0–9) References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
Extension Specifies the extension name of the Max. 20 characters Feature Manual
Name port. References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)

230 PC Programming Manual

 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT

Name Description Value Range Links

Connection Indicates the port status. To change INS: The port is in Feature Manual
the status of the port, click the service. References
desired cell in the column, and then OUS: The port is out 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
select INS or OUS for the port. of service. Telephone (IP-PT)
This option is only available in On- Fault: The port is not
line mode. communicating with
the network.
Headset Turns on or off the use of a headset Headset OFF, Feature Manual
OFF/ON with the IP-PT. Headset ON References
2.11.4 Headset
Operation
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
C.Waiting When headset mode is enabled, PT Tone, Headset Feature Manual
with Headset selects whether a call waiting tone is References
heard through the telephone’s 2.10.4.2 Call Waiting
speaker phone or the ear piece of the Tone
headset. However, this setting is 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
available only for telephones that Telephone (IP-PT)
support both EHS headsets and
waiting tone path switching.
(KX-NT556, KX-NT553 only)
Ringing Tone Selects the dual-tone switching A: 64 ms (697 Hz), 64 Feature Manual
pattern of the ring tone for incoming ms (852 Hz) References
calls. B: 32 ms (697 Hz), 32 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
ms (852 Hz) Telephone (IP-PT)
C: 128 ms (697 Hz),
128 ms (852 Hz)
D: 32 ms (697 Hz), 96
ms (852 Hz)
IP Codec Specifies the codec used for G.711, G.729A, G. Feature Manual
Priority compression and decompression of 722 References
transmitted data. 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Some codecs may become Telephone (IP-PT)
unavailable depending on the value
set here, as follows:
– When G.722 is selected, the
priority is G.722 → G.711 → G.
729A.
– When G.711 is selected, the
priority is G.711 → G.729A (G.722
is unavailable).
– When G.729A is selected, both G.
711 and G.722 are unavailable.

PC Programming Manual 231

9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT

Name Description Value Range Links

Packet Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, Feature Manual
Sampling measurements (samples) of sound 60 ms References
Time (G. data during a conversation. 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
711/G.722) The smaller this number, the higher Telephone (IP-PT)
the quality of the transmitted sound.
Packet Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, Feature Manual
Sampling measurements (samples) of sound 60 ms References
Time (G. data during a conversation. 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
729A) The smaller this number, the higher Telephone (IP-PT)
the quality of the transmitted sound.
Announce Specifies if the extension’s built-in Enable, Disable Feature Manual
Mode ANNOUNCE feature is enabled. A References
KX-NT265, KX-NT300 series, or 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
KX-NT500 series phone in a remote Telephone (IP-PT)
location with ANNOUNCE enabled
can provide the PBX’s IP Address
information to other terminals in the
remote location in place of manually
programming the PBX’s IP address
at each terminal.
Colour LCD Select the Colour LCD Design Mode. Type 1, Type 2
Design Mode
IP-PT Log Sets the IP-PT Log Collection feature Enable, Disable PC Programming
Collection to Enable (KX-NT600 series only). Manual References
This item is recorded by Syslog. 7.3.2 Utility—Log—
Syslog

Voice
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number of Max. 5 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Number the port. of 0–9) References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
Extension Specifies the extension name of Max. 20 characters Feature Manual
Name the port. References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in Feature Manual
change the status of the port, click service. References
the desired cell in the column, and OUS: The port is out of 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
then select INS or OUS for the service. Telephone (IP-PT)
port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available in communicating with the
On-line mode. network.

232 PC Programming Manual

 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT

Name Description Value Range Links

DTMF Specifies the type of DTMF tone Inband, Outband Feature Manual
to be sent out. (RFC2833) References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
Payload Specifies the payload type for 96–127 Feature Manual
Type DTMF tones using RFC2833. References
Programming this parameter is 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
only necessary if DTMF is set to Telephone (IP-PT)
Outband (RFC2833).

Remote Place (Location / P2P)

The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension Max. 5 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Number number of the port. of 0–9) References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
Extension Specifies the extension Max. 20 characters Feature Manual
Name name of the port. References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in Feature Manual
change the status of the service. References
port, click the desired cell in OUS: The port is out of 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
the column, and then select service. Telephone (IP-PT)
INS or OUS for the port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available communicating with the
in On-line mode. network.
Phone Specifies the type of Local only: The Feature Manual
Location extension connected to the extension is located on References
port. the same network as the 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
PBX (standard Telephone (IP-PT)
configuration).
Remote + Local: The
extension is accessing
the PBX remotely (use
Media Relay Gateway).
MGCP-TLS / Specifies whether to enable Disable, Enable
SRTP the MGCP-TLS / SRTP (in (Remote only)
case of KX-NT600 series
with remote connection).
The DSP resource
consumption used by the
SRTP (G.711) is 1.3 times
larger than the RTP (G.711).

PC Programming Manual 233

9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT

Name Description Value Range Links

P2P Group Specifies the peer-to-peer 1–32 PC Programming Manual
group of the IP-PT. References
9.2.1 PBX Configuration—
[1-1] Configuration—Slot—
System Property—Main—
P2P Group
Feature Manual
References
5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P)
Connection
P2P Group Indicates the selected peer- P2P Group Name PC Programming Manual
Name to-peer group’s name References
(reference only). 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—
[1-1] Configuration—Slot—
System Property—Site—Main
—P2P Group
Feature Manual
References
5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P)
Connection

NT Local Settings
You can set the NT Local Settings from this tab. For more detail, refer to the Web Maintenance Console.

Note
For the following settings where a connecting destination PBX is specified, IP Address or FQDN can be
entered.
– Primary PBX IP Address
– Secondary PBX IP Address

234 PC Programming Manual

 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-SIPEXT

9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—Card Property—V-SIPEXT
The properties of the virtual SIP Extension card can be specified.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Name Description Value Range Links
Echo Canceller Specifies the echo canceller OFF, 64 ms, Feature Manual References
Ability ability time. 128 ms 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation
Protocol) Extension
DSP Digital Specifies the DSP Digital Gain -14–6 dB Feature Manual References
Gain (Down) for the down voice path. 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation
Protocol) Extension
DSP Digital Specifies the DSP Digital Gain -14–6 dB Feature Manual References
Gain (Up) for the up voice path. 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation
Protocol) Extension
EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller -14–6 dB Feature Manual References
Gain. 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation
Protocol) Extension
NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Disable, Weak, Feature Manual References
Processor) setting to control Normal, Strong 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation
echo sound quality. Protocol) Extension

PC Programming Manual 235

9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT

9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—Port Property—V-SIPEXT
Various settings can be programmed for each virtual SIP extension port.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Forced De- The following settings are
registration deleted.
• Password
• SIP Phone Type
• Current IP Address

Main
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number Max. 5 digits (consisting of Feature Manual
Number (SIP (SIP Username) of the port. 0–9) References
Username) 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension
Password Specifies the password used for 4–16 characters Feature Manual
registering a SIP Extension to (consisting of 0–9, a–z, A– References
the PBX. While it is possible to Z) 5.2.2 SIP (Session
enter a password manually for Initiation Protocol)
each SIP Extension, you can Extension
copy Extension Number to
Password by clicking the Copy
to button. This parameter can
only be modified when the virtual
SIP extension port is set to OUS,
and the programmer must be in
On-line mode.
Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in service. Feature Manual
change the status of the port, OUS: The port is out of References
click the desired cell in the service. 5.2.2 SIP (Session
column, and then select INS or Fault: The port is not Initiation Protocol)
OUS for the port. communicating with the Extension
This option is only available in network.
On-line mode.
SIP Phone Indicates the connected SIP KX-HDV/TGP600 Feature Manual
Type phone type (reference only). KX-NTV References
Mobile Softphone 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Other Initiation Protocol)
Extension

236 PC Programming Manual

 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT

Name Description Value Range Links

Current IP Indicates the current IP address 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Feature Manual
Address of the SIP Extension (reference References
only). 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension
MWI Method Selects the method of receiving Standard, Unsolicited Feature Manual
Message Waiting Indications for References
SIP extensions. Note
2.20.1 Message
If "Standard" is Waiting
selected, a maximum 5.2.2 SIP (Session
of 64 SIP extensions Initiation Protocol)
can be used. Extension

Option
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number (SIP Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Number (SIP Username) of the port. (consisting of 0–9) References
Username) 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension
Password Specifies the password used for 4–16 characters Feature Manual
registering a SIP Extension to the (consisting of 0–9, a–z, References
PBX. While it is possible to enter a A–Z) 5.2.2 SIP (Session
password manually for each SIP Initiation Protocol)
Extension, you can copy the value for Extension
Extension Number to Password by
clicking the Copy to button. This
parameter can only be modified when
the virtual SIP extension port is set to
OUS, and the programmer must be in
On-line mode.
Connection Indicates the port status. To change INS: The port is in Feature Manual
the status of the port, click the desired service References
cell in the column, and then select INS OUS: The port is out of 5.2.2 SIP (Session
or OUS for the port. This option is only service Initiation Protocol)
available in On-line mode. Fault: The port is not Extension
communicating with
the network.
Bearer Selects the bearer mode. When Automatic, Speech, Feature Manual
Automatic is selected, the bearer Audio References
mode is set to Speech automatically. 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension

PC Programming Manual 237

9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT

Name Description Value Range Links

Packet Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, Feature Manual
Sampling measurements (samples) of sound 50 ms, 60 ms References
Time (G. data during a conversation. The 5.2.2 SIP (Session
711/G.722) smaller this number, the higher the Initiation Protocol)
quality of the transmitted sound. Extension
Packet Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, Feature Manual
Sampling measurements (samples) of sound 50 ms, 60 ms References
Time (G. data during a conversation. The 5.2.2 SIP (Session
729A) smaller this number, the higher the Initiation Protocol)
quality of the transmitted sound. Extension

Remote Place (Location / P2P)

The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Number (SIP Username) of the port. (consisting of 0–9) References
(SIP 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Username) Initiation Protocol)
Extension
Password Specifies the password used for 4–16 characters Feature Manual
registering a SIP Extension to the (consisting of 0–9, a– References
PBX. While it is possible to enter a z, A–Z) 5.2.2 SIP (Session
password manually for each SIP Initiation Protocol)
Extension, you can copy the value Extension
for Extension Number to
Password by clicking the Copy to
button. This parameter can only
be modified when the virtual SIP
extension port is set to OUS, and
the programmer must be in On-
line mode.
Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in Feature Manual
change the status of the port, click service References
the desired cell in the column, and OUS: The port is out 5.2.2 SIP (Session
then select INS or OUS for the of service Initiation Protocol)
port. This option is only available Fault: The port is not Extension
in On-line mode. communicating with
the network.

238 PC Programming Manual

 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT

Name Description Value Range Links

Phone Specifies the type of extension Local only: The Feature Manual
Location connected to the port. extension is located References
on the same network 5.2.2 SIP (Session
as the PBX (standard Initiation Protocol)
configuration). Extension
Remote + Local: The
extension is
accessing the PBX
remotely (Media
Relay Gateway).
Panasonic Enable this setting to allow only Yes (Only), No Feature Manual
SIP Phone P-SIP phones connect to the PBX. References
only 5.2.2.4 Panasonic SIP
Note
Phones (P-SIP)
This setting cannot be
changed while Phone
Location is set to Local only.
If Phone Location is set to
Remote + Local, this setting
will be set to Yes (Only)
automatically.
P2P Group Specifies the peer-to-peer group. 1–32 PC Programming
Manual References
9.2.2 PBX Configuration—
[1-1] Configuration—Slot—
System Property—Site—
Main—P2P Group
Feature Manual
References
5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P)
Connection
P2P Group Indicates the selected peer-to- P2P Group Name PC Programming
Name peer group’s name (reference Manual References
only). 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—
[1-1] Configuration—Slot—
System Property—Site—
Main—P2P Group
11.10 PBX Configuration—
[3-10] Group—P2P Group
Feature Manual
References
5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P)
Connection

FAX/T.38
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

PC Programming Manual 239

9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Specifies the extension number Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Number (SIP (SIP Username) of the port. (consisting of 0–9) References
Username) 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension
Password Specifies the password used for 4–16 characters Feature Manual
registering a SIP Extension to (consisting of 0–9, a– References
the PBX. While it is possible to z, A–Z) 5.2.2 SIP (Session
enter a password manually for Initiation Protocol)
each SIP Extension, you can Extension
copy the value for Extension
Number to Password by
clicking the Copy to button. This
parameter can only be modified
when the virtual SIP extension
port is set to OUS, and the
programmer must be in On-line
mode.
Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in Feature Manual
change the status of the port, service References
click the desired cell in the OUS: The port is out 5.2.2 SIP (Session
column, and then select INS or of service Initiation Protocol)
OUS for the port. This option is Fault: The port is not Extension
only available in On-line mode. communicating with
the network.
FAX Detection Enables the use of the FAX Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Ability Detection Ability feature. References
5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension
FAX Sending Specifies the method of G.711 Inband, T.38 Feature Manual
Method transporting the fax signal. References
5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension
Maximum Bit Specifies the maximum bit rate No Speed Limit, 2400 Feature Manual
Rate of the fax signal. bps, 4800 bps, 7200 References
bps, 9600 bps, 12000 5.2.2 SIP (Session
bps, 14400 bps Initiation Protocol)
Extension
T38 FAX Max Specifies the maximum 272–512 Feature Manual
Datagram datagram size when using the T. References
38 protocol. 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension

240 PC Programming Manual

 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT

Name Description Value Range Links

T38 FAX UDPTL Specifies whether to enable the Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Error Correction redundancy feature when using References
– Redundancy the T.38 protocol. 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension
T38 FAX UDPTL Specifies the redundancy count 0–7 Feature Manual
Redundancy for T.30 messages when using References
count for T.30 the T.38 protocol. 5.2.2 SIP (Session
messages Initiation Protocol)
Extension
T38 FAX UDPTL Specifies the redundancy count 0–3 Feature Manual
Redundancy for data when using the T.38 References
count for data protocol. 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension
T38 FAX Rate Specifies the rate management Transferred TCF, Feature Manual
Management method when using the T.38 Local TCF References
Method protocol. 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension

PC Programming Manual 241

9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-IPCS

9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—Card Property—V-IPCS
The properties of the V-IPCS card can be specified.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Signalling Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPCS card to transmit and 1024–
(PTAP) UDP receive PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) 65535
Port No. data. This must be changed if another network application is
(Server) using the same port.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings
and set the desired value.
Signalling Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPCS card to transmit and 1024–
(MGCP) UDP receive MGCP (Media Gateway Control Protocol) data. This 65535
Port No. must be changed if another network application is using the
(Server) same port.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings
and set the desired value.
Signalling Indicates the UDP port used to transmit and receive MGCP 2427
(MGCP) UDP (Media Gateway Control Protocol) data on the IP-CS side
Port No. (IP- (reference only).
CS)
Voice (RTP) Specifies the UDP port used to transmit and receive RTP (Real- 1024–
UDP Port No. time Transfer Protocol) data on the IP-CS side. This must be 65024
(IP-CS) changed if another network application is using the same port.
For voice communications, an IP-CS uses 128 contiguous UDP
ports, starting from the port number specified here.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings
and set the desired value.
Keep Alive Specifies the length of time that the PBX will continue to Disable,
Time-Out consider an IP-CS to be active even if it receives no 10–120 s
transmissions from that IP-CS. The PBX constantly confirms the
status of IP-CSs. If no communications are received from an
IP-CS for the duration specified here, the PBX considers the
IP-CS to be unreachable, and sets the port status to Fault.
During operation, set between 10 s and 60 s. Settings over 60
s, and Disable, are used for debugging purposes, and IP-CSs
cannot be guaranteed to function normally in these
circumstances. Do not use debugging settings unless instructed
to do so.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings
and set the desired value.
First Resending Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to 500 × n
Time (PTAP) resend PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) (n=1–16)
data. ms
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings
and set the desired value.

242 PC Programming Manual

 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-IPCS

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Resending Specifies the length of time after which the PBX terminates 150–240 s
Time Out resending PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol)
(PTAP) data.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings
and set the desired value.
First Resending Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to 500 × n
Time (MGCP) resend MGCP (Media Gateway Control Protocol) data. (n=1–8) ms
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings
and set the desired value.
Resending Specifies the length of time after which the PBX terminates 75–120 s
Time Out resending MGCP (Media Gateway Control Protocol) data.
(MGCP) To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings
and set the desired value.
CS Repeater Specifies the CS Repeater Mode setting. If Normal is selected, Normal,
Mode DECT communication will not be encrypted. Optional
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings
and set the desired value.

PC Programming Manual 243

9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPCS

9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—Port Property—V-IPCS
Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP-CS port.

IP-CS Registration and De-registration

An IP-CS must be registered to the PBX by programming the PBX and IP-CS before it can be used.
Programming instructions for the PBX are given below.
It is possible to de-register the IP-CS later.
IP-CS Registration, De-registration, and Forced De-registration can be performed only in On-line mode.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Preparation Open 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports—Basic Settings,
and confirm that the IP addresses of the mother board and DSP card,
subnet mask address, and default gateway address are set.
Registration Follow the steps below to register the IP-CS.
1. Connect the IP-CS to be registered to the network and, if
necessary, the power supply.
2. Click Registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Non-registered (available) IP-CSs are
displayed on the left.
3. Highlight IP-CSs and click the right arrow to select them for
registration. Click Next.
4. If the registration is still in progress, the dialogue box will show
"Registration Executing".
If the registration is successful, the dialogue box will show
"Registration Completed". Click Close.
Once the IP-CS is successfully registered, the status of the IP-CS
will update to show "Registered".
De- Follow the steps below to de-register the IP-CS.
registration
1. Click De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered IP-CSs are displayed on the
left.
2. Highlight IP-CSs and click the right arrow to select them for de-
registration. Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "De-
registration Succeed".
4. Click Close.
Once the IP-CS is successfully de-registered, the status of the
IP-CS will update to show "None".

244 PC Programming Manual

 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPCS

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Forced De- Follow the steps below to forcibly de-register the IP-CS when normal
registration de-registration has been unsuccessful or IP address settings have
been changed or deleted only on the IP-CS.
1. Click Forced De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered IP-CSs are displayed on the
left.
2. Highlight IP-CSs and click the right arrow to select them for forced
de-registration. Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click OK.
A dialogue box will appear.
4. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show
"Forced De-registration Succeed".
5. Click Close.
Once the IP-CS is successfully de-registered, the status of the
IP-CS will update to show "None".

Main
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
CS Name Specifies the CS name of the port. Max. 20 characters
Connection Indicates the port status. To change INS: The port is in
the status of the port, click the desired service.
cell in the column, and then select OUS: The port is out of
INS or OUS for the port. service.
This option is only available in On-line Fault: The port is not
mode. communicating with the
network.
Status Indicates whether a certain IP-CS is None, Registered
registered (reference only).
Channel Specifies whether to expand the For KX-NS0154: Yes, No
expansion number of channels for the IP-CS. For other IP-CSs: -
This setting is available only for (hyphen)
KX-NS0154 IP-CSs. This setting will
be greyed out if the IP-CS's port is
not set to OUS, or a non-supported
type of IP-CS (e.g., KX-NCP0158) is
connected to the port.
MAC Indicates the MAC address of the 00:00:00:00:00:00–
Address IP-CS (reference only). FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF
Current IP Indicates the current IP address of 1.0.0.0–
Address the IP-CS (reference only). 223.255.255.255

PC Programming Manual 245

9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPCS

Name Description Value Range Links

Program Ver. Indicates the programme software file Version number
version of the IP-CS (reference only).
Air Sync Assigns an Air Synchronisation Group None, 1–4 PC Programming
Group No number to the IP-CS. Manual
This setting is available only if the References
IP-CS’s port is set to OUS.
19.3.1 PBX
Configuration—
[11-3-1]
Maintenance—CS
Synchronisation—
Air Synchronisation
LAN Sync Specifies the LAN sync group number None, 1–4 PC Programming
Group No. when using an IP-CS (KX-NS0154 Manual
only) in a LAN sync group. A References
maximum of 32 IP-CSs can be
19.3.2 PBX
assigned to one group.
Configuration—
This setting is available only if the
[11-3-2]
IP-CS’s port is set to OUS.
Maintenance—CS
Synchronisation—
LAN
Synchronisation
19.3.3 PBX
Configuration—
[11-3-3]
Maintenance—CS
Synchronisation—
LAN Sync Group
Setting

Option
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
CS Name Specifies the CS name of the port. Max. 20 characters
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of INS: The port is in
the port, click the desired cell in the column, and service.
then select INS or OUS for the port. OUS: The port is out of
This option is only available in On-line mode. service.
Fault: The port is not
communicating with the
network.
IP Codec Specifies the codec used for compression and G.711, G.729A
Priority decompression of transmitted data.
Packet Specifies the time interval between measurements 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50
Sampling Time (samples) of sound data during a conversation. ms, 60 ms
(G.711) The smaller this number, the higher the quality of
the transmitted sound.

246 PC Programming Manual

 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPCS

Name Description Value Range Links

Packet Specifies the time interval between measurements 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50
Sampling Time (samples) of sound data during a conversation. ms, 60 ms
(G.729A) The smaller this number, the higher the quality of
the transmitted sound.
Voice Activity Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection Disable, Enable
Detection for G. feature for the G.711 codec. This feature
711 conserves bandwidth by detecting silent periods
during a call and suppressing the packets of
silence from being sent to the network.
Announce Specifies if the IP-CS's (KX-NS0154 only) built-in Disable, Enable
Mode ANNOUNCE feature is enabled. An IP-CS
(KX-NS0154 only) in a remote location with
ANNOUNCE enabled can provide the PBX’s IP
Address information to other terminals in the
remote location in place of manually programming
the PBX’s IP address at each terminal.

Remote Place
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
CS Name Specifies if the IP-CS Max. 20 characters
(KX-NS0154 only) name of the
port.
Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in service. Feature Manual
change the status of the port, OUS: The port is out of service. References
click the desired cell in the Fault: The port is not 5.2.7 IP-CS
column, and then select INS or communicating with the network. (KX-NS0154)
OUS for the port. This option is
only available in On-line mode.
Phone Specifies the location of IP-CS Local: The IP-CS (KX-NS0154 Feature Manual
Location (KX-NS0154 only) connected to only) is located on the same References
the port. network as the PBX (standard 5.2.7 IP-CS
configuration). (KX-NS0154)
Remote (MRG): The IP-CS
(KX-NS0154 only) is accessing
the PBX remotely (use Media
Relay Gateway).

PC Programming Manual 247

9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-UTEXT

9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—Card Property—V-UTEXT
Various settings can be programmed for V-UTEXT cards.
Click Common Settings to change these settings.

Main
Name Description Value Range Links
Echo Cancellation Specifies the echo canceller ability time. OFF, 8, 16, 24,
Ability 32, 40, 48, 56,
64, 72, 80, 88,
96, 104, 112,
120, 128 ms
DSP Digital Gain Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice -14–6 dB
(Down) path.
DSP Digital Gain Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path. -14–6 dB
(Up)
EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. -14–6 dB
NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to Disable, Weak,
control echo sound quality. Normal, Strong
PERIODIC Inform Specifies whether alive monitoring is performed for Enable, Disable
connected extensions.
PERIODIC Inform Specifies the polling interval for alive monitoring 30–3600 s
Interval when PERIODIC Inform is set to "Enable".
INFORM Specifies the number of times the PERIODIC Inform 2–10 times
retransmission is sent for extensions when attempting to establish a
counter connection.
NTP Query Interval Specifies the interval at which connected extensions 1–24 hours
poll the specified NTP server for a time update.
Failover Timer (For Specifies the time period after which a SIP-CS that 0–64 s
S-PS/SIP-CS) cannot connect to its primary PBX will re-route to its
assigned secondary PBX.

Note
For SIP-CSs, primary PBX and secondary PBX
settings must be made through the Web
programming interface of the Master SIP-CS or
through configuration file programming. For
details, refer to the documentation of the SIP-
CS.

248 PC Programming Manual

 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-UTEXT

9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—Port Property—V-UTEXT
Various settings can be programmed for the ports of V-UTEXT cards.

KX-UT Series SIP Phone, S-PS, and SIP-CS Registration and De-registration
A KX-UT series SIP phone, S-PS, or SIP-CS must be registered to the PBX by programming the PBX and
SIP phone, S-PS, or SIP-CS before it can be used.
Programming instructions for the PBX are given below.
It is possible to de-register the SIP phone, S-PS, or SIP-CS later.
Registration, De-registration, and Forced De-registration can be performed only in On-line mode.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Preparation Open 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports—Basic Settings,
and confirm that the IP addresses of the mother board and DSP card,
subnet mask address, and default gateway address are set.
Registration Follow the steps below to register a SIP phone.
1. Connect the device to be registered to the network and, if
necessary, the power supply.
2. Click Registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Non-registered (available) extension
numbers and names are displayed on the left.
3. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select
them for registration. Click Next.
4. Click Next.
5. If the registration is still in progress, the dialogue box will show
"Registration Executing".
If the registration is successful, the dialogue box will show
"Registration Completed". Click Close.
Once the device is successfully registered, the status of the device
will update to show "Registered".

Note
S-PSs and SIP-CSs will be automatically registered to the PBX
after settings have been made via CS web programming for the
Super Master CS. For details, refer to the documentation for the
SIP-CS.

PC Programming Manual 249

9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-UTEXT

Value
Name Description Links
Range
De- Follow the steps below to de-register a SIP phone, S-PS, or SIP-CS.
registration
1. Click De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers and
names are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select
them for de-registration. Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "De-
registration Succeed".
4. Click Close.
Once the device is successfully de-registered, the status of the
device will update to show "None".
Forced De- Follow the steps below to forcibly de-register a SIP phone, S-PS, or
registration SIP-CS when normal de-registration has been unsuccessful or IP
address settings have been changed or deleted only on the target
device.
1. Click Forced De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers and
names are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select
them for forced de-registration. Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click OK.
A dialogue box will appear.
4. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show
"Forced De-registration Succeed".
5. Click Close.
Once the device is successfully de-registered, the status of the
device will update to show "None".
SIP-CS Web To access the system’s Super Master CS for related programming,
click SIP-CS Web. The CS Web login screen will open in your web
browser.

Note
For this button to be enabled, you must specify the URL of the
Super Master CS on the Utility—CS-Web Connection screen.
See 7.12 Utility—CS-Web Connection.

Main
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

250 PC Programming Manual

 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-UTEXT

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Specifies the extension number of Max. 5 digits (consisting of Feature Manual
Number the port. 0–9) References
5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension
Extension Specifies the extension name of Max. 20 characters Feature Manual
Name the port. References
5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension
Telephone Specifies the connected device UT: A KX-UT series SIP Feature Manual
Type type. phone is connected. References
S-PS: A SIP Portable Station 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Note phone is connected. Initiation Protocol)
• This setting cannot be SIP-CS: A SIP Cell Station is Extension
changed if a device has connected.
already been registered for Master-CS: A SIP Master
the port. De-register the Cell Station is connected.
device set for the port
before changing the setting.
• To change this setting when
programming in Off-line
mode, and a device is
already registered to the
port, change the setting of
IP Phone Registration ID
(MAC Address) for the port
to "00:00:00:00:00:00", and
then click Apply. The
setting can then be
changed.
Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in service. Feature Manual
change the status of the port, click OUS: The port is out of References
the desired cell in the column, and service. 5.2.2 SIP (Session
then select INS or OUS for the Fault: The port is not Initiation Protocol)
port. communicating with the Extension
This option is only available in On- network.
line mode.
Password Specifies the password used for 4–16 characters (consisting Feature Manual
registering a SIP phone, S-PS, or of 0–9, a–z, A–Z) References
SIP-CS to the PBX. This 5.2.2 SIP (Session
parameter can only be modified Initiation Protocol)
when the virtual SIP extension port Extension
is set to OUS.

PC Programming Manual 251

9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-UTEXT

Name Description Value Range Links

Status Indicates whether a certain SIP None, Registered Feature Manual
phone, S-PS, or SIP-CS is References
registered (reference only). 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension
IP Phone Specifies the MAC address of the 00:00:00:00:00:00– Feature Manual
Registration SIP phone, S-PS, or SIP-CS. FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF References
ID (MAC This parameter can only be 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Address) modified when Connection on this Note
Initiation Protocol)
screen is set to OUS. For S-PSs and SIP-CSs, Extension
this value will be
"FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF".
Current IP Indicates the current IP address of 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Feature Manual
Address the SIP phone, S-PS, or SIP-CS References
(reference only). 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension
Program Indicates the programme software Version number Feature Manual
Ver. file version of the SIP phone References
(reference only). 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Note
Extension
Software file version numbers
are not displayed for S-PSs or
SIP-CSs.
P2P Group Specifies the peer-to-peer group. 1–32 PC Programming
Manual
References
11.10 PBX
Configuration—
[3-10] Group—P2P
Group
Feature Manual
References
5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer
(P2P) Connection

252 PC Programming Manual

 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-UTEXT

Name Description Value Range Links

P2P Group Indicates the selected peer-to-peer P2P Group Name PC Programming
Name group’s name (reference only). Manual
References
11.10 PBX
Configuration—
[3-10] Group—P2P
Group
Feature Manual
References
5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer
(P2P) Connection

Option
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number of the Max. 5 digits
Number port. (consisting of 0–9)
Extension Name Specifies the extension name of the Max. 20 characters
port.
Connection Indicates the port status. To change INS: The port is in
the status of the port, click the desired service.
cell in the column, and then select INS OUS: The port is out
or OUS for the port. of service.
This option is only available in On-line Fault: The port is not
mode. communicating with
the network.
System Speed Specifies if the connected SIP phone Enable, Disable PC
Dial Download will download system speed dial Programming
entries from the PBX. Manual
References
9.2.1 PBX
Configuration—
[1-1] Configuration
—Slot—System
Property—Main—
System Speed
Dial Download For
UT Extensions
SIP QoS-DSCP Specifies the value in the ToS field by 0–63
a DSCP for DiffServ.
RTP QoS-DSCP Specifies the value in the ToS field by 0–63
a DSCP for DiffServ.

PC Programming Manual 253

9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-UTEXT

Name Description Value Range Links

UT Codec Specifies the priority of the codecs to G.722, G711A, G.
Priority - 1st— be used. None is only available for 729A, G711Mu, None
UT Codec 2nd, 3rd, and 4th priorities.
Priority - 4th
Packet Sampling Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms
Time measurements (samples) of sound
data during a conversation. The
smaller this number, the higher the
quality of the transmitted sound.
Jitter Buffer - Specifies the maximum size of the 3–50 ms
Maximum Delay jitter buffer for voice communications.
Jitter Buffer - Specifies the minimum size of the 1–2 ms
Minimum Delay jitter buffer for voice communications.
Jitter Buffer - Specifies the initial size of the jitter 1–7 ms
Initial Delay buffer for voice communications.
Gain Type Specifies the type of gain file to Default, Type1, Type2,
distribute to connected SIP devices. Type3

Remote Place
The settings on this screen are for programming the Simple Remote Connection feature for connecting SIP
phones in remote locations to the PBX. For details and conditions regarding the use of this feature, refer to
"5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection" in the Feature Manual.

The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Number of the port.
Extension Specifies the extension name of Max. 20 characters
Name the port.
Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in service.
change the status of the port, OUS: The port is out of service.
click the desired cell in the Fault: The port is not
column, and then select INS or communicating with the network.
OUS for the port.
This option is only available in
On-line mode.
Phone Specifies the type of extension Local: The extension is located Feature
Location connected to the port. on the same network as the PBX Manual
(standard configuration). References
Remote (SBC): The extension is
5.2.2.3 Simple
accessing the PBX remotely
Remote
(Simple Remote Connection).
Connection
Remote (MRG): The extension is
accessing the PBX remotely (use
Media Relay Gateway).

254 PC Programming Manual

 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-UTEXT

Name Description Value Range Links

Web-MC Specifies whether the Web Enable, Disable Feature
Ability programming is allowed on the Manual
KX-UT series SIP phone References
connected to the port by enabling
5.2.2.3 Simple
the Web port setting on the
Remote
phone’s menu. For details about
Connection
Web programming for KX-UT
series SIP phones, refer to the
documentation of the phone.
Protocol for Specifies the protocol to use for HTTPS, HTTP Feature
Remote SIP- remote SIP phone data Manual
MLT communication. HTTPS is Note References
strongly recommended for A total of 20 HTTPS 5.2.2.3 Simple
remote SIP-MLT connections. connections can be set per Remote
PBX site. If "HTTPS" is Connection
selected but the total number
of HTTPS connections
available at the site will be
exceeded by changing this
setting, a warning message
will be displayed and the
setting change will be
cancelled.

PC Programming Manual 255

9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—Extension Type

9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—Card Property—Extension Type
The property for the extension cards can be specified.
Name Description Value Range Links
SLT Pulse Dial Selects the type of pulse dial Normal, Sweden, New
Mode transmission appropriate to your area. Zealand
SLT Off Hook Specifies the minimum length that a 8 × n (n=3–255) ms
Time pulse dial sent from an SLT must be for
the PBX to recognise it as an off-hook
signal.
SLT Off Hook Specifies the length of guard time used 8 × n (n=12–63) ms
Guard Time for off-hook signals from SLTs, to prevent
the PBX mistaking them for pulse dials.
SLT Pulse Specifies the maximum length of the 8 × n (n=9–20) ms
Maximum Break break signal in a pulse dial.
Width
SLT Pulse Specifies the minimum length of the 8 × n (n=1–5) ms
Minimum Make make signal in a pulse dial.
Width
SLT Flash Enables the PBX to detect the flash Disable: The PBX Feature
Detection signal sent when an SLT user presses disconnects the line to Manual
the hookswitch or the Flash/Recall prevent placing the References
button. call on hold.
2.13.3 Call
Enable: The PBX
Splitting
places the call on
consultation hold.
Flash Timing - Specifies the minimum length that a 8 × n (n=3–63) ms
Min. signal sent from an SLT must be for the
PBX to recognise it as a hookswitch
flash signal.
Flash Timing - Specifies the maximum length that a 8 × n (n=3–191) ms
Range signal sent from an SLT can be for the
PBX to recognise it as a hookswitch
flash signal.
DTMF-R STD Specifies the minimum length that a 2 × n (n=1–31) ms
Detection Time DTMF tone must be for the PBX to
recognise it as a DTMF tone.
SLT Power Selects the voltage that enables an SLT 85 V, 145 V Feature
Supply to activate the Message Waiting lamp. Manual
When an MCSLC card is installed, the References
value for this setting is fixed at "85 V".
2.20.1
Message
Waiting

256 PC Programming Manual

 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—Extension Type

Name Description Value Range Links

APT/SLT Parallel Enables an SLT connected in parallel to Disable, Enable Feature
Connection an APT to ring with the APT for calls. Manual
References
2.11.10
Parallelled
Telephone
Ringing Start Specifies the Ringing Start Mode of Mode 1: With Pre-ring
Mode of Extension Caller ID. Please consult the signal
Extension Caller seller where you purchased this PBX for Mode 2: Without Pre-
ID more information. ring signal

PC Programming Manual 257

9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Extension Type

9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—Port Property—Extension Type
Various settings can be programmed for each extension port.
To view the total number of each type of extension connected, click Port Type View.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Note
Other programming items that are displayed on this screen but not listed below are used only when
programming extensions connected to an Expansion Unit.
For information about Expansion Units, see 9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—
Expansion Unit1/Expansion Unit2/Expansion Unit3.
Name Description Value Range Links
Port Type Indicates the port type (reference only). SLT/DPT/S-Hybrid/S-
Hybrid(S-DPT)/S-
Hybrid(SLT)/IP-EXT/
SIP-MLT/SIP/ISDN/UM
Telephone Indicates the connected telephone type APT/DPT/DSS/VM/
Type (reference only). ISDN-Extension/
IP-PT/UT/SIP/SIP-
CS/S-PS/CS/CS-M/CS-
S1/CS-S2/CS-S3/No
Connection/Unknown
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is in
status of the port, click the desired cell in service.
the column, and then select INS or OUS OUS: The port is out of
for the port. service.
This option is only available in On-line Fault: The port is not
mode. communicating with the
PBX.
Extension Specifies the extension number of the Max. 5 digits
Number port. (consisting of 0–9)
Extension Specifies the extension name of the port. Max. 20 characters
Name
XDP Mode Turns XDP mode on or off for the port. On: XDP enabled (The Feature Manual
This setting is only available when Port main telephone and References
Type on this screen is set to S-Hybrid. sub telephone have 2.11.10 Parallelled
different extension Telephone
numbers. This is called 5.2.6 Extension
XDP Mode.) Port Configuration
Off: XDP disabled (The
main telephone and
sub telephone both
have the main
telephone’s extension
number. This is called
Parallel Mode.)

258 PC Programming Manual

 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Extension Type

Name Description Value Range Links

Parallel Specifies whether the sub telephone Yes, No Feature Manual
Telephone (SLT) rings at the same time as the main References
Ringing telephone (DPT) for an incoming call. 2.11.10 Parallelled
This setting is only available when Port Telephone
Type on this screen is set to S-Hybrid.
DPT Type— Selects the port type. Normal: For connecting Feature Manual
Type To change the port type of an extension a DPT or CS References
port, follow the steps below: DSS: For connecting a 2.28.1 Voice Mail
DSS Console (A (VM) Group
1. Set the status of the extension port
maximum of 8 DSS 2.26.1 Computer
to "OUS".
Consoles can be Telephony
2. Change the port type of the connected to the PBX.) Integration (CTI)
extension port, then click Apply. VM(DPT): For
connecting a
3. Set the status of the extension port
Panasonic VPS
to "INS".
through DPT
When changing the port type of an
Integration
extension port for which Wireless XDP
PC Console: For
has been set on the 12.1.1 PBX
connecting a PC
Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired
Console (A maximum
Extension—Extension Settings screen,
of 8 PC Consoles can
the Wireless XDP setting must be
be connected to the
deleted first.
PBX.)
When changing the type of a port for
which one or more SDN buttons are set
(except when changing between PC
Console and Telephone), all SDN
buttons customised for that device will
be deleted. When you attempt to apply
the new settings, a warning message is
displayed showing the slot and port
number for which SDN buttons will be
deleted. If you do not wish to delete SDN
buttons for this port, click Cancel.

PC Programming Manual 259

9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Extension Type

Name Description Value Range Links

DPT Type— Specifies the location number of the 1-8 Feature Manual
Location No. connected DSS Console or PC Console. References
This setting is only available when DPT 2.26.1 Computer
Type—Type on this screen is set to DSS Telephony
or PC Console. Integration (CTI)
Note that, depending on system traffic,
there may be a limit to the number of PC
Consoles that can be supported by a
single DLC/DHLC card.
When changing the location number of a
DSS Console for which one or more
SDN buttons are set, all SDN buttons
customised for that device will be
deleted. When you attempt to apply the
new settings, a warning message is
displayed showing the slot and port
number for which SDN buttons will be
deleted. If you do not wish to delete SDN
buttons for this port, click Cancel.
DPT Type— Selects the unit number of the 1-2 Feature Manual
VM Unit No. connected VPS. This setting is only References
available when DPT Type—Type on this 2.28.1 Voice Mail
screen is set to VM(DPT). (VM) Group
DPT Type— Specifies the VM port number for the 1-12 Feature Manual
VM Port No. port. This setting is only available when References
DPT Type—Type on this screen is set to 2.28.1 Voice Mail
VM(DPT). (VM) Group
DPT Type— Assigns an Air Synchronisation Group None, 1 PC
Air Sync number to the CS. This setting is only Programming
Group No available when DPT Type—Type on this Manual
screen is set to Normal. References
19.3.1 PBX
Configuration—
[11-3-1]
Maintenance—CS
Synchronisation—
Air
Synchronisation
Headset Turns on or off the use of a headset with Headset OFF, Headset Feature Manual
OFF/ON a DPT. This setting is only available ON References
when Port Type on this screen is set to 2.11.4 Headset
DPT, DPT(S-DPT), S-Hybrid, or S- Operation
Hybrid(S-DPT).

260 PC Programming Manual

 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Extension Type

Name Description Value Range Links

C.Waiting Selects the Call Waiting tone generating PT Tone, Headset
with Headset device when using a headset. This
setting is only available when Port Type
on this screen is set to DPT, DPT(S-
DPT), S-Hybrid, or S-Hybrid(S-DPT).
This setting is displayed when "Headset
ON" is selected for Headset OFF/ON.
Ringing Tone Selects the dual-tone switching pattern A: 64 ms (697 Hz), 64
of the ring tone for incoming calls when ms (852 Hz)
Port Type on this screen is set to DPT, B: 32 ms (697 Hz), 32
DPT(S-DPT), S-Hybrid, S-Hybrid(SLT), ms (852 Hz)
or S-Hybrid(S-DPT). This setting is not C: 128 ms (697 Hz),
available for the APTs, or SLTs. 128 ms (852 Hz)
D: 32 ms (697 Hz), 96
ms (852 Hz)

PC Programming Manual 261

9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—Card Property - LCO type
The properties of the analogue trunk cards can be specified.
Name Description Value Range Links
Outgoing Guard Specifies the length of time after a 3–6 s
Time trunk is disconnected, during which
the PBX cannot seize the line.
First Dial Timer (CO) Specifies the minimum time that the 0.5 × n (n=1–
PBX waits after seizing a trunk, 16) s
before sending the dialled digits to
the telephone company. This allows
the telephone company to have
enough time to accept the dialled
digits correctly.
CO Feed Back Tone Specifies whether the pulse No, Yes
feedback tone is turned on or not.
For outgoing trunk calls, audible
tones can be heard as the dialled
number is sent out, which informs
the extension user that the number
has been dialled.
Bell Detection—Bell Specifies the minimum length of a 24 × n (n=1–
Start Detection Timer bell signal that can be recognised by 50) ms
the PBX as the bell signal sent from
the telephone company, before the
PBX detects an arriving call.
Bell Detection—Bell Specifies the duration of the bell off 1.0 s–15.0 s
Off Detection Timer detection timer. If the PBX receives
no bell signal from the telephone
company for the length of time
specified here, the PBX treats the
call as lost.
Pulse / DTMF Dial— Specifies the length of the DTMF 64 + 16 × n
DTMF Inter-digit inter-digit pause. This allows the (n=0–11) ms
Pause telephone company to have enough
time to accept the dialled digits
correctly.
Pulse / DTMF Dial— Specifies the length of the pulse 630 ms, 830
Pulse Inter-digit inter-digit pause. This allows the ms, 1030 ms
Pause telephone company to have enough
time to accept the dialled digits
correctly.

262 PC Programming Manual

 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

Name Description Value Range Links

Low Speed Pulse Specifies the % break for a low Other, 60%, PC Programming
Dial—Pulse % Break speed pulse dial. This is the ratio 67% Manual References
between the break (on-hook) signal 9.24 PBX Configuration
and make (off-hook) signal in a —[1-1] Configuration—
pulse dial. Slot—Port Property -
LCO Port
Low Speed Pulse Specifies the maximum length of the 20 + (4 × n) PC Programming
Dial—Break Width break signal in a low speed pulse (n=1–15) ms Manual References
dial. Low Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse 9.24 PBX Configuration
% Break on this screen determines —[1-1] Configuration—
the value that can be specified here. Slot—Port Property -
LCO Port
Low Speed Pulse Specifies the minimum length of the 4 × n (n=3–15) PC Programming
Dial—Make Width make signal in a low speed pulse ms Manual References
dial. Low Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse 9.24 PBX Configuration
% Break on this screen determines —[1-1] Configuration—
the value that can be specified here. Slot—Port Property -
LCO Port
High Speed Pulse Specifies the % break for a high Other, 60%, PC Programming
Dial—Pulse % Break speed pulse dial. This is the ratio 67% Manual References
between the break (on-hook) signal 9.24 PBX Configuration
and make (off-hook) signal in a —[1-1] Configuration—
pulse dial. Slot—Port Property -
LCO Port
High Speed Pulse Specifies the maximum length of the 12+ (4 × n) PC Programming
Dial—Break Width break signal in a high speed pulse (n=1–15) ms Manual References
dial. High Speed Pulse Dial— 9.24 PBX Configuration
Pulse % Break on this screen —[1-1] Configuration—
determines the value that can be Slot—Port Property -
specified here. LCO Port
High Speed Pulse Specifies the minimum length of the 4 × n (n=3–15) PC Programming
Dial—Make Width make signal in a high speed pulse ms Manual References
dial. High Speed Pulse Dial— 9.24 PBX Configuration
Pulse % Break on this screen —[1-1] Configuration—
determines the value that can be Slot—Port Property -
specified here. LCO Port
Pulse Type Selects the type of pulse dial Normal,
transmission appropriate to your Sweden, New
area. Zealand

PC Programming Manual 263

9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

Name Description Value Range Links

Option Card Indicates the type of the card that is None, Caller ID PC Programming
Equipment—Option installed on the LCOT card Card Manual References
1 and Option 2 (reference only). 9.24 PBX Configuration
—[1-1] Configuration—
Slot—Port Property -
LCO Port—Caller ID
Detection
Feature Manual
References
2.19.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID Selects the type of Caller ID FSK, FSK (with Feature Manual
Signalling signalling provided by the telephone Visual Caller References
company. ID), DTMF 2.19.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Max Specifies the maximum number of 0 (no limit), 1, Feature Manual
Receive Time Caller ID series that are sent from 2, 3 References
the network. 2.19.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID Enables the PBX to detect the Disable, Feature Manual
(FSK) Carrier carrier when receiving Caller ID. To Enable References
Detection enable this setting, Caller ID— 2.19.1 Caller ID
Caller ID Signalling on this screen
should be set to FSK.
Caller ID—Caller ID Selects the method used to detect Length + Feature Manual
(FSK) END the end of Caller ID information. Timer, Timer References
Detection 2.19.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID Enables the PBX to check the Disable, Feature Manual
(FSK) Header header of received Caller ID Enable References
Examination information. To enable this setting, 2.19.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID Signalling on
this screen should be set to FSK.
Caller ID—Caller ID Specifies the length of time that the None, 80 × n Feature Manual
(FSK) Detection PBX waits before attempting to (n=1–15) ms References
Start Timer detect Caller ID information, after 2.19.1 Caller ID
receiving a call. To enable this
setting, Caller ID—Caller ID
Signalling on this screen should be
set to FSK.
Caller ID—Caller ID Specifies the total time required by 1040 + (80 × n) Feature Manual
(FSK) Detection the PBX to detect Caller ID (n=0–37) ms References
Timer information. To enable this setting, 2.19.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID Signalling on
this screen should be set to FSK.
Caller ID—Caller ID Selects the DTMF code used to None, *, #, A, Feature Manual
(DTMF) Start Code 1 detect the beginning of a Caller ID B, C, D References
and Start Code 2 series. Start Code 1 is prior to Start 2.19.1 Caller ID
Code 2.

264 PC Programming Manual

 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

Name Description Value Range Links

Caller ID—Caller ID Selects the DTMF code used to None, *, #, A, Feature Manual
(DTMF) Information detect the beginning of the B, C, D References
Start Code information segment of a Caller ID 2.19.1 Caller ID
series.
Caller ID—Caller ID Selects the DTMF code used to None, *, #, A, Feature Manual
(DTMF) End Code detect the end of a Caller ID series. B, C, D References
2.19.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID Specifies the number used to Max. 16 digits Feature Manual
(DTMF) Information identify each type of information (consisting of References
Code-PRIVATE, code. 0–9, *, and #) 2.19.1 Caller ID
OUT OF AREA,
TECHNICAL
REASON,
UNKNOWN
NUMBER,
RESTRICTED
NUMBER
Caller ID—Caller ID Selects the type of the 3rd header in DDN, Caller ID Feature Manual
Header[03] a Caller ID signal. References
2.19.1 Caller ID

PC Programming Manual 265

9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port

9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—Port Property - LCO Port
Various settings can be programmed for each analogue trunk port.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Port Type Select to use the port with either the CO, MOH, Installation Manual
CO, MOH, or External Pager External Pager References
features. (Only LCOT6 is installed by 4.3.4 LCOT6 in KX-NS500
default.) (installed by default)
2 ports, an odd and an even port, are
programmed in a pair.
Connection Indicates the port status. To change INS: The port is in
the status of the port, click the service.
desired cell in the column, and then OUS: The port is
select INS or OUS for the port. out of service.
This option is only available in On-
line mode.
This option can only be changed
when CO is selected for the Port
Type.
Busy Out Indicates the Busy Out status Normal, Busy Out Feature Manual
Status (reference only). References
2.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out
Dialling Mode Selects the type of signal used to dial DTMF, Pulse Feature Manual
out to the analogue trunk. References
2.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection
CPC Signal Specifies the length of time required None, 6.5 ms, 8 × Feature Manual
Detection by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on n (n=1–112) ms References
Time— outgoing or incoming trunk calls 2.11.9 Calling Party
Outgoing, before disconnecting the line. When Control (CPC) Signal
Incoming None is selected here, the line will Detection
not be disconnected when a CPC
signal is not detected.
DTMF Width Selects the length of the DTMF tone 80 ms, 160 ms
sent to the analogue trunk.
Pulse Speed Selects the speed at which pulse Low, High
dials are sent to the analogue trunk.

266 PC Programming Manual

 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port

Name Description Value Range Links

Reverse Selects the type of trunk call for Disable: For no Feature Manual
Detection which the reverse signal from the trunk call References
telephone company is detected. Outgoing: For 2.5.4.5 Reverse Circuit
outgoing trunk
calls only
Both Call: For
both outgoing and
incoming trunk
calls
Caller ID Enables the PBX to detect a Caller Disable, Enable PC Programming
Detection ID signal from the analogue trunk. Manual References
9.23 PBX Configuration—
[1-1] Configuration—Slot—
Card Property - LCO type
Feature Manual
References
2.19.1 Caller ID
Pause Time Specifies the length of a pause. 1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, Feature Manual
4.5 s References
2.5.4.7 Pause Insertion
2.5.4.8 Host PBX Access
Code (Access Code to the
Telephone Company from
a Host PBX)
2.5.4.9 Special Carrier
Access Code
Flash Time Specifies the length of a flash signal. None, 16 × n Feature Manual
(n=1–255) ms References
2.11.7 External Feature
Access (EFA)
Disconnect Specifies the length of time after a 0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, Feature Manual
Time trunk is disconnected, during which 4.0 s, 12.0 s References
the PBX cannot seize the line. 2.11.6 Flash/Recall/
Terminate

PC Programming Manual 267

9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
The properties of the BRI or PRI card can be specified.
Name Description Value Range Links
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave waits for a reply after sending the L2 ms
—T200 command to ISDN.
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100 Feature
Master / QSIG Slave waits for a reply after resending the request to ms Manual
—T202 use an ISDN line as a TIE line. References
4.3.1 TIE
Line Service
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the length of time to detect no 0–600 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave communication status of L2. ms
—T203
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–18000 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave waits for a reply after making a call to ISDN. ms
—T301
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time allowed between 0–600 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave each digit on an incoming call. Applies to ms
—T302 overlap receiving.
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call ms
—T303 setting) message to ISDN.
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time allowed between 0–3000 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave each digit on an outgoing call. Applies to ms
—T304 overlap sending.
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–3000 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave waits for a reply after sending the DISC ms
—T305 (disconnection) message to ISDN.
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave waits for a reply after receiving the Release ms
—T308 message from ISDN.
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries 0–3000 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave to disconnect the data link, before ms
—T309 disconnecting the call.
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–3000 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave waits for a continuance message after ms
—T310 receiving the Incoming Call Proceeding
message.
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave waits for a reply after sending the Connect ms
—T313 message.

268 PC Programming Manual

 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

Name Description Value Range Links

ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–3000 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave waits for a reply after sending the Restart ms
—T316 message.
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave waits for a reply after sending the Resume ms
—T318 message.
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave waits for a reply after sending the Suspend ms
—T319 message.
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave waits for a reply after sending the Status ms
—T322 enquiry message.
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries 0–3000 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave to establish L2 in "Permanent" mode. ms
—T3D3
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries 0–3000 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave to disconnect L2 in "Call by Call" mode. ms
—T3D9
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100
T200 waits for a reply after sending the L2 ms
command to ISDN.
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100
T201 waits for a reply after resending the TEI check ms
request to ISDN.
ISDN Extension— Specifies the length of time to detect no 0–600 × 100
T203 communication status of L2. ms
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–18000 × 100
T301 waits for a reply after making a call to ISDN. ms
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time allowed between 0–600 × 100
T302 each digit on an incoming call. Applies to ms
overlap receiving.
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100
T303 waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call ms
setting) message to ISDN.
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time allowed between 0–3000 × 100
T304 each digit on an outgoing call. Applies to ms
overlap sending.
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–3000 × 100
T305 waits for a reply after sending the DISC ms
(disconnection) message to ISDN.
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–3000 × 100
T306 waits for a reply after sending the DISC ms
(disconnection) message to ISDN. This setting
is used when inband tones are supplied.

PC Programming Manual 269

9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

Name Description Value Range Links

ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–6000 × 100
T307 maintains a suspended call, before restarting. ms
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100
T308 waits for a reply after receiving the Release ms
message from ISDN.
ISDN Extension— Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries 0–3000 × 100
T309 to disconnect the data link, before ms
disconnecting the call.
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–3000 × 100
T310 waits for a reply after receiving the Incoming ms
Call Proceeding message.
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100
T312 waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call ms
setting) message to ISDN.
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–3000 × 100
T316 waits for a reply after sending the Restart ms
message.
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–3000 × 100
T320 waits for packet protocol. ms
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100
T322 waits for a reply after sending the Status ms
enquiry message.
ISDN Extension— Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries 0–3000 × 100
T3D3 to establish L2 in "Permanent" mode. ms
ISDN Extension— Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries 0–3000 × 100
T3D9 to disconnect L2 in "Call by Call" mode. ms

270 PC Programming Manual

 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—Port Property - BRI Port
Various settings can be programmed for each BRI port.

Main
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Port Type Selects the port type. CO: For connecting to public Feature
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network Manual
network must have a master port on Extension: For connecting to References
one PBX and a slave port on extension
4.1.2.1
another PBX. ISDN extensions can QSIG-Slave: For connecting to
Integrated
belong to an incoming call private network (slave port)
Services Digital
distribution group or idle extension QSIG-Master: For connecting
Network (ISDN)
hunting group. In this case, an MSN to private network (master port)
—SUMMARY
can be assigned.
4.3.4.1 QSIG
Standard
Features—
SUMMARY
Connection Indicates the port status. To change INS: The port is in service.
the status of the port, click the OUS: The port is out of service.
desired cell in the column, and then Fault: The port is not
select INS or OUS for the port. communicating with the
This option is only available in On- network.
line mode.
LLC Enables the PBX to send LLC (Low Disable, Enable
Information Level Compatibility) information to
the network when an outgoing call is
made when the ISDN bearer mode
is speech.
Status Specifies whether the Status No Transmission: Status
Message Message is sent to the network. Message is not sent.
When Mandatory error
detection: Send the Status
Message when an error
(Mandatory) is detected.
When Option / Mandatory error
detection: Send the Status
Message when an error
(Option or Mandatory) is
detected.
Status Selects what happens to a call when Ignore: Ignore the Status
Receive the Status Message from the Message from the network.
network does not match the actual Disconnect: Disconnect the
status of the call. call.

PC Programming Manual 271

9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

ISDN CO
Parameters for ISDN CO are not applicable for the BRI extension port.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Port Type Selects the port type. CO: For connecting to
Each ISDN connection in a public network
QSIG network must have a Extension: For connecting
master port on one PBX and a to extension
slave port on another PBX. QSIG-Slave: For
ISDN extensions can belong to connecting to private
an incoming call distribution network (slave port)
group or idle extension hunting QSIG-Master: For
group. In this case, an MSN connecting to private
can be assigned. network (master port)
Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in service.
change the status of the port, OUS: The port is out of
click the desired cell in the service.
column, and then select INS or Fault: The port is not
OUS for the port. communicating with the
This option is only available in network.
On-line mode.
Subscriber Specifies the number used as Max. 16 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Number the CLIP number. of 0–9, *, and #) References
4.1.2.2 Calling/
Connected Line
Identification
Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)
Ringback Enables the PBX to send a Disable, Enable
Tone to ringback tone to an outside
Outside caller when the network cannot
Caller send the tone.

272 PC Programming Manual

 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Name Description Value Range Links

ISDN Selects the method used to En-bloc: The PBX sends PC Programming
Outgoing send dialled digits to the all of the dialled digits at Manual References
Call Type network. once after the extension 9.1 PBX Configuration—
user completes dialling. [1-1] Configuration—Slot
The PBX recognises the 10.3 PBX Configuration
end of dialling when (1) # —[2-3] System—Timers
is dialled, if programmed, & Counters—Dial /
(2) a pre-programmed IRNA / Recall / Tone—
telephone number is Dial—Extension Inter-
dialled, or (3) the inter-digit digit (s)
timer expires. 10.9 PBX Configuration
Overlap: The PBX sends —[2-9] System—System
dialled digits one at a time. Options—Option 2—
ISDN en Bloc Dial—[#]
as End of Dial for en Bloc
mode
11.1.4 PBX Configuration
—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk
Group—Dialling Plan
Feature Manual
References
4.1.2.1 Integrated
Services Digital Network
(ISDN)—SUMMARY
ISDN Enables the use of the Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Centrex telephone company’s ISDN References
Centrex Service features. 4.1.2.1 Integrated
Services Digital Network
(ISDN)—SUMMARY
BRI Data Assigns one or two TEIs 1-link: One TEI is assigned
Link (P-MP) (Terminal Endpoint Identifier) to the BRI CO port.
Mode to the BRI CO port. To use the 2-link: Two TEIs are
ISDN Hold supplementary assigned to the BRI CO
service with point-to-multipoint port. (Available when
configuration, this parameter Access Mode on the
should be set to 2-link in some Network tab is set to
countries/areas. P-MP.)
Networking Enables transmission of Off, On PC Programming
Data extension status data to Manual References
Transfer connected PBXs in a network. 17 PBX Configuration—
This setting is only available [9] Private Network
when Port Type on this screen
has been set to QSIG-Slave or Feature Manual
QSIG-Master. References
A maximum of two ports of 4.3.5.1 Network Direct
each BRI card can be Station Selection (NDSS)
assigned to transmit extension
status information.

PC Programming Manual 273

9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

ISDN Extension
Parameters for ISDN Extension are not applicable for BRI ports assigned as CO ports.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Port Type Selects the port type. CO: For connecting to public Feature
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network Manual
network must have a master port on Extension: For connecting to References
one PBX and a slave port on extension
5.2.5.1 ISDN
another PBX. ISDN extensions can QSIG-Slave: For connecting
Extension
belong to an incoming call to private network (slave
distribution group or idle extension port)
hunting group. In this case, an MSN QSIG-Master: For
can be assigned. connecting to private
network (master port)
Connection Indicates the port status. To change INS: The port is in service. Feature
the status of the port, click the OUS: The port is out of Manual
desired cell in the column, and then service. References
select INS or OUS for the port. Fault: The port is not
5.2.5.1 ISDN
This option is only available in On- communicating with the
Extension
line mode. network.
Ring Mode Selects the ring mode when Ring All Extension for MSN: Feature
(ISDN MSN receiving an incoming call with an Ring all ISDN extensions Manual
Last No. 0 or MSN ending with "0" or "00". This that are addressed with References
00) setting is only available when Port MSN.
5.2.5.1 ISDN
Type on this screen is set to Ring AN Extension for MSN:
Extension
Extension. Ring only one of the ISDN
extensions that are
addressed with MSN.
ISDN Enables the PBX to send call Disable, Enable Feature
Extension progress tones to the ISDN Manual
Progress extension. This setting is only References
Tone available when Port Type on this
5.2.5.1 ISDN
screen is set to Extension.
Extension

Network
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Port Type Selects the port type. CO: For connecting to public
Each ISDN connection in a network
QSIG network must have a Extension: For connecting to
master port on one PBX and a extension
slave port on another PBX. QSIG-Slave: For connecting
ISDN extensions can belong to to private network (slave port)
an incoming call distribution QSIG-Master: For connecting
group or idle extension hunting to private network (master
group. In this case, an MSN can port)
be assigned.

274 PC Programming Manual

 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Name Description Value Range Links

Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in service.
change the status of the port, OUS: The port is out of
click the desired cell in the service.
column, and then select INS or Fault: The port is not
OUS for the port. communicating with the
This option is only available in network.
On-line mode.
Network Selects the network type of the 0–56 Feature Manual
Type port. (2 UK (Domestic), 5 References
Netherlands, 6 SwissNET2, 7 4.1.2.1 Integrated
SwissNET3, 8 Euro ISDN Services Digital
(Standard), 14 France Network (ISDN)—
(Domestic), 19 Finland, 20 SUMMARY
Norway, 27 Australia, 51 US
National ISDN 2)
L1 Mode Selects the active mode of L1 Call, Permanent Feature Manual
(Layer 1) on the BRI port. References
4.1.2.1 Integrated
Services Digital
Network (ISDN)—
SUMMARY
L2 Mode Selects the active mode of L2 Call, Permanent Feature Manual
(Layer 2) on the BRI port. References
4.1.2.1 Integrated
Services Digital
Network (ISDN)—
SUMMARY
Access Selects the configuration of the P-P: Point-to-Point Feature Manual
Mode BRI port. P-MP: Point-to-multipoint References
4.1.2.1 Integrated
Services Digital
Network (ISDN)—
SUMMARY
TEI Mode Specifies the TEI mode Automatic, Fix 0–Fix 63 Feature Manual
assigned to the BRI port. References
4.1.2.1 Integrated
Services Digital
Network (ISDN)—
SUMMARY

Network Numbering Plan

The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

PC Programming Manual 275

9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Name Description Value Range Links

Port Type Selects the port type. CO: For connecting to
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG public network
network must have a master port on Extension: For connecting
one PBX and a slave port on to extension
another PBX. ISDN extensions can QSIG-Slave: For
belong to an incoming call connecting to private
distribution group or idle extension network (slave port)
hunting group. In this case, an MSN QSIG-Master: For
can be assigned. connecting to private
network (master port)
Connection Indicates the port status. To change INS: The port is in service.
the status of the port, click the OUS: The port is out of
desired cell in the column, and then service.
select INS or OUS for the port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available in On- communicating with the
line mode. network.
Trunk Property Selects the trunk property of the Public: Public network Feature
port. Private: Private Network Manual
VPN: Virtual Private References
Network
4.3.1 TIE Line
Service
4.3.3 ISDN
Virtual Private
Network
(ISDN-VPN)
Calling Party Selects the numbering plan ID that Unknown, ISDN-
Number— applies to outgoing trunk calls Telephony, National
Numbering Plan routed through public and private Standard, Private
ID—Public, networks.
Private
Calling Party Selects the type of number that Unknown, International,
Number—Type of applies to outgoing trunk calls National, Network,
Number—Public, routed through public or private Subscriber
Private networks.
Called Party Selects the numbering plan ID that Unknown, ISDN-
Number— applies to incoming trunk calls Telephony, National
Numbering Plan routed through public and private Standard, Private
ID—Public, networks.
Private
Called Party Selects the type of number that Unknown, International,
Number—Type of applies to incoming trunk calls National, Network,
Number—Public, routed through public and private Subscriber
Private networks.

Supplementary Service
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

276 PC Programming Manual

 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Name Description Value Range Links

Port Type Selects the port type. CO: For connecting to
Each ISDN connection in a public network
QSIG network must have a Extension: For connecting
master port on one PBX and to extension
a slave port on another PBX. QSIG-Slave: For
ISDN extensions can belong connecting to private
to an incoming call network (slave port)
distribution group or idle QSIG-Master: For
extension hunting group. In connecting to private
this case, an MSN can be network (master port)
assigned.
Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in
change the status of the service.
port, click the desired cell in OUS: The port is out of
the column, and then select service.
INS or OUS for the port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available communicating with the
in On-line mode. network.
COLP, CLIR, Specifies whether each For COLP, CLIR, COLR, Feature Manual
COLR, CNIP, ISDN or QSIG CNIP, CONP, CNIR, References
CONP, CNIR, supplementary service is CONR, CF (Rerouting), 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected
CONR, CF used. CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC- Line Identification
(Rerouting), E: Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
CT, CCBS, No, Yes 4.1.2.3 Advice of Charge
AOC-D, AOC- (AOC)
E, 3PTY For 3PTY: 4.1.2.5 Call Forwarding
No, Yes-3Pty (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)
4.1.2.7 Call Transfer (CT)
—by ISDN
4.1.2.8 Three-party
Conference (3PTY)—by
ISDN
4.1.2.10 Completion of
Calls to Busy Subscriber
(CCBS)
4.3.4.2 Calling/Connected
Line Identification
Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
and Calling/Connected
Name Identification
Presentation (CNIP/
CONP)—by QSIG
4.3.4.3 Call Forwarding
(CF)—by QSIG
4.3.4.4 Call Transfer (CT)
—by QSIG
4.3.4.5 Completion of Calls
to Busy Subscriber
(CCBS)—by QSIG

PC Programming Manual 277

9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

CCBS Option
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Port Type Selects the port type. CO: For connecting to
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG public network
network must have a master port on one Extension: For
PBX and a slave port on another PBX. connecting to extension
ISDN extensions can belong to an QSIG-Slave: For
incoming call distribution group or idle connecting to private
extension hunting group. In this case, an network (slave port)
MSN can be assigned. QSIG-Master: For
connecting to private
network (master port)
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is in
status of the port, click the desired cell in service.
the column, and then select INS or OUS OUS: The port is out of
for the port. service.
This option is only available in On-line Fault: The port is not
mode. communicating with the
network.
CCBS Type Selects the type of call from the network All, Unknown, Feature
initiated by the CCBS (Completion of International, National, Manual
Calls to Busy Subscriber) feature, from Network specific, References
which the specified number of digits are Subscriber, Abbreviated
4.1.2.10
deleted.
Completion of
CCBS Delete Digits on this screen
Calls to Busy
specifies the number of digits to delete
Subscriber
from the received number.
(CCBS)
CCBS Specifies the number of digits to delete 0–15 Feature
Delete Digits from the received number when Manual
receiving a call of the specified type References
initiated by the CCBS feature from the
4.1.2.10
network. CCBS Type on this screen
Completion of
specifies the applicable type of call.
Calls to Busy
Subscriber
(CCBS)

278 PC Programming Manual

 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—Port Property - PRI Port
Various settings can be programmed for each PRI port.

Main
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Port Type Selects the port type. CO: For connecting to Feature
public network Manual
Note Extension: For connecting References
• Each ISDN connection in a QSIG to extension
4.1.2.1
network must have a master port QSIG-Slave: For connecting
Integrated
on one PBX and a slave port on to private network (slave
Services
another PBX. port)
Digital Network
QSIG-Master: For
• ISDN extensions can belong to an (ISDN)—
connecting to private
incoming call distribution group or SUMMARY
network (master port)
idle extension hunting group. In 4.3.4.1 QSIG
this case, an MSN can be Standard
assigned. Features—
SUMMARY
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is in service.
status of the port, click the desired cell in OUS: The port is out of
the column, and then select INS or OUS service.
for the port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available in On-line communicating with the
mode. network.
Status Specifies whether the Status Message is No Transmission: Status
Message sent to the network. Message is not sent.
When error detection
(Mandatory): Send the
Status Message when an
error (Mandatory) is
detected.
When error detection
(Option / Mandatory): Send
the Status Message when
an error (Option or
Mandatory) is detected.
Status Selects what happens to a call when the Ignore: Ignore the Status
Receive Status Message from the network does Message from the network.
not match the actual status of the call. Disconnect: Disconnect the
call.

PC Programming Manual 279

9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Name Description Value Range Links

CRC4 Mode Enables the use of CRC4 for error Disable, Enable
checking. CRC (Cyclic Redundancy
Check) is an error checking control
technique that uses a specific binary
prime divisor that results in a unique
remainder. It is usually a 16- to 32-bit
character. (Assignable only when using
the PRI30 card.)
Line Coding Selects the line coding type of the PRI B8ZS, AMI
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) for the
port. This setting is only available when
using the PRI23 card.
Frame Selects the type of frame sequence for Extended Multi frame
Sequence the port. This setting is only available (ESF), 4-Frame Multi frame
when using the PRI23 card. (F4), 12-Frame Multi frame
(F12)

CO Setting
CO Setting parameters are not applicable to ports assigned as Extension in Port Type.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Port Type Selects the port type. CO: For connecting to
public network
Note Extension: For
• Each ISDN connection in connecting to extension
a QSIG network must QSIG-Slave: For
have a master port on connecting to private
one PBX and a slave port network (slave port)
on another PBX. QSIG-Master: For
connecting to private
• ISDN extensions can network (master port)
belong to an incoming
call distribution group or
idle extension hunting
group. In this case, an
MSN can be assigned.
Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in
change the status of the port, service.
click the desired cell in the OUS: The port is out of
column, and then select INS or service.
OUS for the port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available in communicating with the
On-line mode. network.

280 PC Programming Manual

 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Name Description Value Range Links

Subscriber Specifies the number used as Max. 16 digits Feature Manual
Number the CLIP number. (consisting of 0–9, *, and References
#) 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected
Line Identification
Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)
Ringback Enables the PBX to send a Disable, Enable
Tone to ringback tone to an outside
Outside caller when the network cannot
Caller send the tone.
ISDN Selects the method used to En-bloc: The PBX sends PC Programming
Outgoing send dialled digits to the all of the dialled digits at Manual References
Call Type network. once after the extension 9.1 PBX Configuration—
user completes dialling. [1-1] Configuration—Slot
The PBX recognises the 10.3 PBX Configuration—
end of dialling when (1) # [2-3] System—Timers &
is dialled, if programmed, Counters—Dial / IRNA /
(2) a pre-programmed Recall / Tone—Dial—
telephone number is Extension Inter-digit (s)
dialled, or (3) the inter- 10.9 PBX Configuration—
digit timer expires. [2-9] System—System
Overlap: The PBX sends Options—Option 2—ISDN
dialled digits one at a en Bloc Dial—[#] as End
time. of Dial for en Bloc mode
11.1.4 PBX Configuration
—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk
Group—Dialling Plan
Feature Manual
References
4.1.2.1 Integrated
Services Digital Network
(ISDN)—SUMMARY
ISDN Enables the use of the Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Centrex telephone company’s ISDN References
Centrex Service features. 4.1.2.1 Integrated
Services Digital Network
(ISDN)—SUMMARY
Networking Enables transmission of Off, On PC Programming
Data extension status data to Manual References
Transfer connected PBXs in a network. 17 PBX Configuration—[9]
This setting is only available Private Network
when Port Type on this screen
has been set to QSIG-Slave or Feature Manual
QSIG-Master. References
4.3.5.1 Network Direct
Station Selection (NDSS)

PC Programming Manual 281

9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Name Description Value Range Links

Loopback Enables a loopback test started Disable, Enable
Test started from the network side, to be
by Network performed on the PRI23 card.

Extension Setting
Extension Setting parameters are applicable only for the PRI extension port.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Port Type Selects the type of the port. CO: For connecting to public
network
Note Extension: For connecting to
• Each ISDN connection in a extension
QSIG network must have a QSIG-Slave: For connecting to
master port on one PBX and a private network (slave port)
slave port on another PBX. QSIG-Master: For connecting
to private network (master
• ISDN extensions can belong to port)
an incoming call distribution
group or idle extension hunting
group. In this case, an MSN
can be assigned.
Connection Indicates the port status. To change INS: The port is in service.
the status of the port, click the OUS: The port is out of
desired cell in the column, and then service.
select INS or OUS for the port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available in On-line communicating with the
mode. network.
Ring Mode Selects the ring mode when receiving Ring All Extension for MSN: Feature
(ISDN MSN an incoming call with an MSN ending Ring all ISDN extensions that Manual
Last No. 0 or with "0" or "00". are addressed with MSN. References
00) Ring AN Extension for MSN:
5.2.5.1 ISDN
Ring only one of the ISDN
Extension
extensions that are addressed
with MSN.

Network Configuration
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

282 PC Programming Manual

 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Name Description Value Range Links

Port Type Selects the port type. CO: For connecting to public
network
Note Extension: For connecting to
• Each ISDN connection in a extension
QSIG network must have a QSIG-Slave: For connecting to
master port on one PBX and a private network (slave port)
slave port on another PBX. QSIG-Master: For connecting
to private network (master port)
• ISDN extensions can belong
to an incoming call distribution
group or idle extension
hunting group. In this case, an
MSN can be assigned.
Connection Indicates the port status. To change INS: The port is in service.
the status of the port, click the OUS: The port is out of service.
desired cell in the column, and then Fault: The port is not
select INS or OUS for the port. communicating with the
This option is only available in On- network.
line mode.
Network Selects the network type of the port. 0–56 Feature
Type (2 UK (Domestic), 5 Manual
Netherlands, 6 SwissNET2, 7 References
SwissNET3, 8 Euro ISDN
4.1.2.1
(Standard), 14 France
Integrated
(Domestic), 19 Finland, 20
Services Digital
Norway, 27 Australia, 51 US
Network (ISDN)
National ISDN 2)
—SUMMARY

Network Numbering Plan

The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Port Type Selects the port type. CO: For connecting to
public network
Note Extension: For connecting
• Each ISDN connection in a to extension
QSIG network must have a QSIG-Slave: For
master port on one PBX and a connecting to private
slave port on another PBX. network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For
• ISDN extensions can belong to connecting to private
an incoming call distribution network (master port)
group or idle extension hunting
group. In this case, an MSN can
be assigned.

PC Programming Manual 283

9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Name Description Value Range Links

Connection Indicates the port status. To change INS: The port is in
the status of the port, click the desired service.
cell in the column, and then select INS OUS: The port is out of
or OUS for the port. service.
This option is only available in On-line Fault: The port is not
mode. communicating with the
network.
Trunk Property Selects the trunk property of the port. Public: Public network Feature
Private: Private Network Manual
VPN: Virtual Private References
Network
4.3.1 TIE Line
Service
4.3.3 ISDN
Virtual Private
Network
(ISDN-VPN)
Calling Party Selects the numbering plan ID that Unknown, ISDN-
Number— applies to outgoing trunk calls routed Telephony, National
Numbering Plan through public and private networks. Standard, Private
ID—Public,
Private
Calling Party Selects the type of number that Unknown, International,
Number—Type applies to outgoing trunk calls routed National, Network,
of Number— through public or private networks. Subscriber
Public, Private
Called Party Selects the numbering plan ID that Unknown, ISDN-
Number— applies to incoming trunk calls routed Telephony, National
Numbering Plan through public and private networks. Standard, Private
ID—Public,
Private
Called Party Selects the type of number that Unknown, International,
Number—Type applies to incoming trunk calls routed National, Network,
of Number— through public and private networks. Subscriber
Public, Private

Supplementary Service
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

284 PC Programming Manual

 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Name Description Value Range Links

Port Type Selects the port type. CO: For connecting to
public network
Note Extension: For
• Each ISDN connection in a connecting to
QSIG network must have a extension
master port on one PBX and QSIG-Slave: For
a slave port on another PBX. connecting to private
network (slave port)
• ISDN extensions can belong QSIG-Master: For
to an incoming call connecting to private
distribution group or idle network (master port)
extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be
assigned.
Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in
change the status of the port, click service.
the desired cell in the column, and OUS: The port is out
then select INS or OUS for the of service.
port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available in On- communicating with
line mode. the network.

PC Programming Manual 285

9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Name Description Value Range Links

COLP, CLIR, Specifies whether each ISDN or For COLP, CLIR, Feature Manual
COLR, CNIP, QSIG supplementary service is COLR, CNIP, CONP, References
CONP, CNIR, used. CNIR, CONR, CF 4.1.2.2 Calling/
CONR, CF The available services depend on (Rerouting), CT, Connected Line
(Rerouting), the setting of Port Type on this CCBS, AOC-D, AOC- Identification
CT, CCBS, screen. E, E911: Presentation (CLIP/
AOC-D, AOC- No, Yes COLP)
E, E911, 4.1.2.3 Advice of Charge
3PTY For 3PTY: (AOC)
No, Yes-3Pty 4.1.2.5 Call Forwarding
(CF)—by ISDN (P-P)
4.1.2.7 Call Transfer
(CT)—by ISDN
4.1.2.8 Three-party
Conference (3PTY)—by
ISDN
4.1.2.10 Completion of
Calls to Busy Subscriber
(CCBS)
4.3.4.2 Calling/
Connected Line
Identification
Presentation (CLIP/
COLP) and Calling/
Connected Name
Identification
Presentation (CNIP/
CONP)—by QSIG
4.3.4.3 Call Forwarding
(CF)—by QSIG
4.3.4.4 Call Transfer
(CT)—by QSIG
4.3.4.5 Completion of
Calls to Busy Subscriber
(CCBS)—by QSIG
CCBS Type Selects the type of call from the All, Unknown, Feature Manual
network initiated by the CCBS International, National, References
(Completion of Calls to Busy Network specific, 4.1.2.10 Completion of
Subscriber) feature, from which the Subscriber, Calls to Busy Subscriber
specified number of digits are Abbreviated (CCBS)
deleted.
CCBS Delete Digits on this
screen specifies the number of
digits to delete from the received
number.

286 PC Programming Manual

 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Name Description Value Range Links

CCBS Delete Specifies the number of digits to 0–15 Feature Manual
Digits delete from the received number References
when receiving a call of the 4.1.2.10 Completion of
specified type initiated by the Calls to Busy Subscriber
CCBS feature from the network. (CCBS)
CCBS Type on this screen
specifies the applicable type of
call.

PC Programming Manual 287

9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type

9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—Card Property—E1 type
The properties of the E1 card can be specified.
To adjust related settings, click Line Signal Setting, MFC-R2 Setting 1, and MFC-R2 Setting 2.
Name Description Value Range Links
Line Coding Selects the line coding type of E1 PCM (Pulse HDB3, AMI
Code Modulation) for the E1 card.
Frame Sequence Selects the type of frame sequence for the E1 PCM30, PCM30-CRC
card.
Frame Option Selects the value for C-bit and D-bit. C=A, D=B; C=0, D=0;
C=0, D=1; C=1, D=0;
C=1, D=1
First Dial Timer Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits 32 x n (n=1–255) ms
(TIE) after seizing a DDI/DID or TIE line, before
sending the dialled digits to the telephone
company or to another PBX. This allows the
telephone company or the other PBX to have
enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.
Answer Specifies the length of time required by the PBX 32 x n (n=1–255) ms
Detection Timer to recognise the answer signal. This allows the
telephone company to have enough time to
accept the dialled digits correctly.
Seizure ACK Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for 0.5 x n (n=1–20) s
Wait Timer the seizure ACK signal.
LIU Send Option Indicates the transmitting level (Transmit Pulse Mode 1-Mode 8
Amplitude) of LIU (reference only).
LIU Receive Selects the receiving level (Receive Equalisation) Automatic, 6 dB, 12 dB,
Option of LIU. 18 dB, 24 dB
RAI Signal Selects the RAI signal detection mode. Type1, Type2
Detection Mode
DTMF Tone— Specifies the length of the DTMF inter-digit 64 + 16 x n (n=0–11)
DTMF Inter-digit pause. ms
Pause

288 PC Programming Manual

 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type Line Signal Setting

9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—Card Property—E1 type Line Signal Setting
Name Description Value Range Links
DR2 Setting Type Selects the control type of the DR2 Normal, Option 1,
(Digital System R2) signal. Option 3
Inter-digit Timer Specifies the pseudo-answer time. This 3-15
setting is available only when Option 1
or Option 3 is selected in DR2 Setting
Type on this screen.
Bit Position for Selects the position of the pulse dial A-bit, B-bit
Dial Pulse control bit in a DR2 signal.
Bit Position for Selects the position of the clear-back A-bit, B-bit, A&B-bit
Clear Back signal control bit in a DR2 signal.
Forced Release Enables the PBX to send a forced Disable, Enable
release signal.
Forced Release Selects the bit pattern for a forced A=0/B=0, A=0/B=1,
Pattern release signal. A=1/B=0, A=1/B=1
Meter Pulse Specifies the mode for call charge meter No Detection: Meter Feature
Detection—Mode pulses. pulses are not sent Manual
or received. References
Outgoing call only:
2.29.1 E1 Line
Sends a call charge
Service
meter pulse for
outgoing trunk calls.
Both calls: Sends
and receives call
charge meter pulses.
Meter Pulse Specifies the bit position of a call charge A-bit, B-bit, C-bit, D- Feature
Detection—Bit meter pulse. bit Manual
Position References
2.29.1 E1 Line
Service
Meter Pulse Specifies the length that a call charge 8 × n (n=1–80) ms Feature
Detection—Length meter pulse must be for the PBX to Manual
recognise it as a call charge meter References
pulse.
2.29.1 E1 Line
Service
DSP Gain Specifies the output power of the DTMF -12 dB–3 dB
Adjustment— signal sent from the DSP (Digital Signal
DTMF Transmit Processor).
DSP Gain Specifies the strength range within which -42 - 0 dB – -11- 0
Adjustment— a DTMF signal must be for the DSP to dB
DTMF Receive recognise it as a DTMF signal.

PC Programming Manual 289

9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type Line Signal Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

DSP Gain Specifies the output power of MFC-R2 -31 dB–0 dB
Adjustment—MFC- signals sent from the DSP.
R2 Transmit
DSP Gain Specifies the strength range within which -38 - 0 dB – -23 - 0
Adjustment—MFC- an MFC-R2 signal must be for the DSP dB
R2 Receive to recognise it as an MFC-R2 signal.
Frame Error Specifies whether the PBX detects No, Yes
Detection—Error frame synchronisation errors.
Detection
Frame Error Specifies the number of frame errors per No limit, 16 x n (n=1–
Detection—Error second which the PBX needs to 7) errors/s
Rate recognise a remote alarm. To enable this
setting, Frame Error Detection—Error
Detection on this screen should be set
to Yes.

290 PC Programming Manual

 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 1

9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 1
Name Description Value Range Links
ANI Service—Mode Selects the ANI (Automatic Number None: ANI service is
Identification) service mode. not activated.
Incoming call only:
Receives the caller’s
number from the E1
line.
Outgoing call only:
Sends the caller’s
number to the E1 line.
Both calls: Sends and
receives the caller’s
number through the
E1 line.
ANI Service—ANI Max. Specifies the maximum number of digits None, 1–16
digits to be received via ANI when receiving a
call with ANI.
MFC-R2 Timer—Forward Specifies the maximum time that the 1–30 s
PBX waits for an MFC-R2 forward
signal sent from the telephone
company.
MFC-R2 Timer—Backward Specifies the maximum time that the 1–30 s
PBX waits for an MFC-R2 backward
signal sent from the telephone
company.
MFC-R2 Timer— Specifies the maximum time that the 1–30 s
Disappearance PBX waits for an MFC-R2
disappearance signal sent from the
telephone company.
Group-l Code Assignment— Specifies the code used to indicate the Undefined, 1–15
ANI Start beginning of an ANI number.
Group-l Code Assignment— Specifies the code used to indicate the ANI Complete (1): 1–
ANI Complete (1)–(4) end of an ANI number. 15
ANI Complete (2)–(4):
Undefined, 1–15
Group-l Code Assignment— Specifies the code used to reject an ANI 1–15
ANI Reject number.
Group-l Code Assignment— Specifies the code used to recognise Undefined, 1–15
End of Digit the end of each digit in an ANI number.
Group-l Code Assignment— Specifies the length of time that the 1–15
End of Digit Timer PBX waits for further signal before
detecting the end of digit of an ANI
number.

PC Programming Manual 291

9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 1

Name Description Value Range Links

Group-l Code Assignment— Specifies the code for sending Group-ll 1–15
G-ll Code Outgoing Call code to the telephone company.
Group-l Code Assignment— Specifies the destination of incoming Undefined,
G-ll Code Incoming Call [1]– trunk calls for each Group-ll code Subscriber, Operator,
[15] respectively. Collect Call
Group-l Code Assignment— Specifies the Group-ll ANI start code. 1–15
Group-ll ANI
MFC-R2 Group-1[*][#]—E1 Specifies the code value of the Group-1 11–15
MFC-R2 Group1[*] code code when the received Group-1 code
is [*].
MFC-R2 Group-1[*][#]—E1 Specifies the code value of the Group-1 11–15
MFC-R2 Group1[#] code code when the received Group-1 code
is [#].

292 PC Programming Manual

 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 2

9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 2
Name Description Value Range Links
Group-A Code Specifies the address complete (completion of 1–15
Assignment—Address dial reception) code sent to the telephone
Complete company.
Group-A Code Specifies the code used to request the telephone 1–15
Assignment—ANI company to send an ANI number.
Request
Group-A Code Specifies the code used to request the telephone 1–15
Assignment—ANI (N+1) company to send the (N+1)th digit of an ANI
number.
Group-A Code Specifies the second code when two codes are Undefined, 1–
Assignment—ANI (N+1) needed to request the telephone company to 15
Additional Code send the (N+1)th digit of an ANI number.
Group-A Code Specifies the setup speech path code sent to the Undefined, 1–
Assignment—Set up telephone company. 15
Speech Path
Group-A Code Specifies the code used to request the telephone Undefined, 1–
Assignment—(First) company to send the first digit of an ANI number. 15
Request
Group-A Code Specifies the code used to request the telephone Undefined, 1–
Assignment—(N) company to send the (N)th digit of an ANI 15
Request number.
Group-A Code Specifies the code used to request the telephone Undefined, 1–
Assignment—(N-1) company to send the (N-1)th digit of an ANI 15
Request number.
Group-A Code Specifies the code used to request the telephone Undefined, 1–
Assignment—(N-2) company to send the (N-2)th digit of an ANI 15
Request number.
Group-A Code Specifies the code used to request the telephone Undefined, 1–
Assignment—(N-3) company to send the (N-3)th digit of an ANI 15
Request number.
Group-B Code Specifies the code used normally to inform the Undefined, 1–
Assignment—Idle (1) telephone company that the status of the called 15
destination is idle.
Group-B Code Specifies the code used in special Undefined, 1–
Assignment—Idle (2) circumstances, such as an international call, to 15
inform the telephone company that the status of
the called destination is idle.
Group-B Code Specifies the code used to inform the telephone Undefined, 1–
Assignment—Idle (3) company that the status of the called destination 15
is idle when the call is disconnected by the caller.

PC Programming Manual 293

9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—E1 type MFC-R2 Setting 2

Name Description Value Range Links

Group-B Code Specifies the code used to inform the telephone Undefined, 1–
Assignment—Busy company that the status of the called destination 15
is busy.
Group-B Code Specifies the code used to inform the telephone Undefined, 1–
Assignment— company that the received number is not 15
Unallocated defined.
Group-B Code Specifies the code used to inform the telephone Undefined, 1–
Assignment—Congestion company that the network is congested. 15
Group-B Code Specifies the code used to inform the telephone Undefined, 1–
Assignment—Out-of- company that the status of the called destination 15
Service is out of service.
Group-B Code Specifies the code used to inform the telephone Undefined, 1–
Assignment—No Billing company that the call is not charged. 15
Group-B Code Specifies the code used to inform the telephone Undefined, 1–
Assignment—Collect company that the collect call has been rejected. 15
Call Reject

294 PC Programming Manual

 9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—E1 Port

9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—Port Property—E1 Port
Various settings can be programmed for each E1 channel. To change the status of ports, click Command.
Name Description Value Range Links
Shelf Indicates the shelf position (reference Shelf number
only).
Slot Indicates the slot position (reference Slot number
only).
CH Indicates the channel number channel number
(reference only).
Connection Indicates the channel status INS: The channel is in
(reference only). service.
This column offers two ways to open OUS: The channel is
the screen to select the channel out of service.
command: Fault: The channel is
not communicating with
• Click the desired cell in the
the network.
column.
• Select the desired cell in the
column, and then click Command.
Subscriber Specifies the number used as the Max. 16 digits Feature Manual
Number CLIP number. (consisting of 0–9, *, References
and #) 4.1.2.2 Calling/
Connected Line
Identification
Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)
Channel Type Selects the channel type. Undefined: Not Feature Manual
assigned References
DR2: Digital System R2 2.29.1 E1 Line
Service
Trunk Selects the trunk property of the E&M Public: Use the Feature Manual
Property channel. DIL/DDI/DID method to References
distribute incoming 2.1.1.1 Incoming
trunk calls. Trunk Call Features
Private: Use the TIE —SUMMARY
line service between 4.1.2.1 Integrated
two or more PBXs. Services Digital
Network (ISDN)—
SUMMARY
4.3.1 TIE Line
Service

PC Programming Manual 295

9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—E1 Port

Name Description Value Range Links

CO Dial Mode Selects the type of signal used to dial DTMF, MFC-R2 Feature Manual
out to a trunk. References
If MFC-R2 is selected, the PBX (not 2.5.4.4 Dial Type
the telephone company) sends a dial Selection
tone to the caller when making a 2.29.1 E1 Line
trunk call using an E1 line. Service
E1 Receiver Selects the type of signal the PBX DTMF, MFC-R2, Feature Manual
Type receives from the E1 line. Undefined References
This should be set to MFC-R2 when 2.29.1 E1 Line
receiving ANI (Automatic Number Service
Identification) numbers from the E1
line.
Receive Digits Specifies the maximum number of 0–15
digits to be received from a DDI/DID
number when receiving a call with the
DDI/DID number.
CPC Specifies the length of time required None, 80 x n (n=2–75) Feature Manual
Detection by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on ms References
Time—Out, In outgoing or incoming trunk calls 2.11.9 Calling Party
before disconnecting the line. When Control (CPC)
None is selected here, the line will Signal Detection
not be disconnected when a CPC
signal is not detected.
DTMF Width Selects the length of the DTMF tone 80 ms, 160 ms
sent to the E1 channel.
Ringback Enables the PBX to send a ringback Disable, Enable
Tone to tone to an outside caller when the
Outside Caller network cannot send the tone.
Dial Tone to Enables the PBX to send a dial tone Disable, Enable
Extension to an extension making a call when
the network cannot send the tone.
Answer Wait Selects the length of time that the None, 1–4
Timer (*60s) PBX waits for the called outside party
to answer an outgoing trunk call. The
line will be disconnected
automatically when this timer expires.
Pause Time Specifies the length of a pause. 1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s Feature Manual
References
2.5.4.7 Pause
Insertion
2.5.4.8 Host PBX
Access Code
(Access Code to the
Telephone Company
from a Host PBX)
2.5.4.9 Special
Carrier Access Code

296 PC Programming Manual

 9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—E1 Port

Name Description Value Range Links

Flash Time Specifies the length of a flash signal. None, 16 x n (n=1–255)
ms
Disconnect Specifies the length of time after a 0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s, Feature Manual
Time trunk is disconnected, during which 12.0 s References
the PBX cannot seize the line. 2.11.6 Flash/Recall/
Terminate

PC Programming Manual 297

9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Expansion Unit1/Expansion Unit2/Expansion Unit3

9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—Expansion Unit1/Expansion Unit2/Expansion
Unit3
Settings for Expansion Units connected to the PBX over a stacking connection can be programmed. Click
Expansion Unit1, Expansion Unit2 or Expansion Unit3 on the Slot screen to view the physical card shelf
of the Expansion Unit.

Note
• Expansion Units must first be pre-installed before they can be programmed. For details, see To pre-
install PBXs connected to the EXP-M card in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
• For information about hardware configuration restrictions and conditions for Expansion Units, refer to
4.6 Expansion Card in the Installation Manual.

To install a new physical card in an Expansion Unit

1. Click on the name of the card to install in the list on the right. An image of the card will be displayed, and
information about the card will be shown.
2. Click and drag the image of the card to the slot, and release it. The card will move into the slot space.
3. Click OK to confirm.

To change the status (INS/OUS) of an Expansion Unit

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Shelf Status button. A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Select the desired status:
• Click INS to set the shelf to in-service status.
• Click OUS to set the shelf to out-of-service status.

To remove an Expansion Unit from the EXP-M card

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Shelf Status button. A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Click Delete. The Expansion Unit will be deleted from the system and the corresponding shelf button will
become greyed out.

Note
The Expansion Unit must be set to OUS before it can be deleted.

Programming cards installed in an Expansion Unit

You can access the card properties and port properties of the physical cards installed in an Expansion Unit
using the Web Maintenance Console Interface. The settings, setting values, and other information is similar
to programming using the Unified PC Maintenance Console. Refer to the PC Programming Manual of the
Expansion Unit PBX for programming information.

Programming Card Properties for cards installed in Expansion Units

For your reference, the following information is included on each Card Property screen for cards installed in
Expansion Units:
Shelf: The shelf number of the EXP-M card Expansion Unit connection:
• 2: Expansion Unit1

298 PC Programming Manual

 9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Expansion Unit1/Expansion Unit2/Expansion Unit3

• 3: Expansion Unit2
• 4: Expansion Unit3
Slot: The physical slot number within the Expansion Unit where the card is installed.

Programming Port Properties for cards installed in Expansion Units

To change the status of a port when programming via Web Maintenance Console, click the desired cell in
the Connection column, and then select INS or OUS for the port.

PC Programming Manual 299

9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—DOORPHONE Card

9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—Card Property—DOORPHONE Card
The doorphone card’s settings can be programmed.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Port Status Specifies the port’s status. INS: The port is in service.
This option is only available in On-line OUS: The port is out of
mode. service.
Fault: There is a
communication error.
For Output - Device Selects the type of connected output Ringer, Relay, Door Opener
Type device (for output ports only).
For Sensor - Input Specifies the minimum duration of 32 × n (n=2–255) ms
Signal Decision Time continuous input from the triggered
sensor before the PBX recognises the
input and makes a sensor call.
For Sensor - Input Specifies the length of time after the 10 × n (n=1–255) s
Signal Detection sensor has been triggered during which
Reopening Time any further input from the sensor will be
ignored.

300 PC Programming Manual

 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station

9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—

Portable Station
Various portable station (PS) settings can be programmed.

PS Registration and De-registration

A PS must be registered to the PBX by programming both the PBX and PS before it can be used.
Programming instructions of the PBX are given below; programming instructions of the PS are found in the
Installation Manual.
It is possible to de-register the PS later.
PS Registration, De-registration, and Forced De-registration can be performed only in On-line mode.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Registration Follow the steps below to register the PS.
1. Click Registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Non-registered
(available) extension numbers and names
are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight PBX sites and click the right arrow
to select them for registration. Click Next.
3. If the registration is still in progress, the
dialogue box will show "Registration
Executing".
If the registration is successful, the dialogue
box will show "Registration Completed". Click
Close.
Once a PS is successfully registered, the
status of the PS will update to show
"Registered".
De- Follow the steps below to de-register the PS.
registration
1. Click De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered
extension numbers and names are displayed
on the left.
2. Highlight numbers and names and click the
right arrow to select them for de-registration.
Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the
dialogue box will show "De-registration
Succeed".
4. Click Close.
Once the PS is successfully de-registered,
the status of the PS will update to show
"None".

PC Programming Manual 301

9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Forced De- Follow the steps below to forcibly de-register the
registration PS when normal de-registration has been
unsuccessful or de-registration has been
performed only on the PS.
1. Click Forced De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered
extension numbers and names are displayed
on the left.
2. Highlight numbers and names and click the
right arrow to select them for forced de-
registration. Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click OK.
A dialogue box will appear.
4. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the
dialogue box will show "Forced De-
registration Succeed".
5. Click Close.
Once the PS is successfully de-registered,
the status of the PS will update to show
"None".
Personal Specifies the Personal Identification Number 4 digits Feature Manual
Identification (PIN) of the PBX, used to avoid registering a PS (consisting References
Number to the wrong PBX. of 0–9) 5.2.4.1 Portable
Note that the same PIN should be entered at the Station (PS)
PS, before the PS is registered to the PBX. Connection
Index Indicates the PS number (reference only). 1–128 Feature Manual
References
5.2.4.1 Portable
Station (PS)
Connection
Extension Specifies the extension number of the PS. Max. 5 Feature Manual
No. In Wireless XDP Parallel Mode, the PS can be digits References
used as a sub telephone with a wired main (consisting 5.2.4.1 Portable
telephone (PT/SLT), and two of them will share of 0–9) Station (PS)
one extension number of the main telephone. Connection
However, note that the PS extension number 5.2.4.5 Wireless
specified here will not be altered by the extension XDP Parallel Mode
number of the main telephone even if the PS is in
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode.

302 PC Programming Manual

 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Extension Specifies the name of the PS. Max. 20 PC Programming
Name characters Manual
References
12.2.1 PBX
Configuration—
[4-2-1] Extension—
Portable Station—
Extension Settings—
Main—Extension
Name
Feature Manual
References
5.2.4.1 Portable
Station (PS)
Connection
Status Indicates whether a certain PS is registered None, Feature Manual
(reference only). Registered References
5.2.4.1 Portable
Station (PS)
Connection

PC Programming Manual 303

9.36 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option

9.36 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—

Option
System options can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
System Wireless Indicates the radio system ID used to Not applicable.
—System ID register a PS (reference only).
To clear the System ID
1. Click the Clear Master CS button.
2. A warning will be displayed.
Confirm the contents of the
warning, and then click Yes.

Note
The System ID can be cleared
using this procedure only in Off-
line mode.
System Wireless Selects whether to display the CO Enable, Disable
—CO Status status on the LCD of the PS when in
Display in stand-by mode (KX-WT125 only).
Standby
(KX-WT125 only) Note
(Need System • The KX-WT125 is available
Restart) only in Canada.
• For users in Canada, this
setting is also available for the
KX-WT126.
New Card Selects the initial status of cards after In Service, Out of
Installation—Card installation. Service
Status for any
Card
New Card Selects whether extension numbers Disable, Enable
Installation— are assigned to extension ports
Automatic automatically or manually.
Extension
Number Set for
Extension Card

304 PC Programming Manual

 9.36 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option

Name Description Value Range Links

New Card Specifies whether a PRI23 card is ISDN Standard Feature Manual
Installation— automatically set to ISDN Standard Mode: The CCBS, References
ISDN Standard Mode or T1-LCOT mode when it is CF, CT, and Unified 2.1.1.2 Direct In
Mode for PRI23 installed for the first time. Messaging features Line (DIL)
Card are supported. DIL 2.1.1.3 Direct
and DID call Inward Dialling
distribution are (DID)/Direct Dialling
available for the D In (DDI)
channel. 4.3.4.3 Call
T1-LCOT mode: DIL Forwarding (CF)—
and DID call by QSIG
distribution are 4.3.4.4 Call Transfer
available for all 23B (CT)—by QSIG
channels. The 4.3.4.5 Completion
CCBS, CF, CT, and of Calls to Busy
Unified Messaging Subscriber (CCBS)
features are not —by QSIG
available in this 4.3.5.2 Centralised
mode. Voice Mail

PC Programming Manual 305

9.37 PBX Configuration—[1-4] Configuration—Clock Priority

9.37 PBX Configuration—[1-4] Configuration—

Clock Priority
Name Description Value Range Links
Shelf- Selects and prioritises slot numbers for the BRI and None, Shelf and Slot
Slot PRI cards that are used to forward a clock pulse from number
Number an external source to the PBX. Shelf and slot numbers
Obtain the master clock time from the outside line that are listed using the pattern
the telephone company provides. "X-Y":
To change Clock Priority, follow the steps below:
• X: Shelf number (1–4)
1. Assign a Clock Priority to each slot. – 1: Main unit
2. Set the status of the present clock source card to – 2: Expansion Unit1
"OUS", then "INS".
– 3: Expansion Unit2
Note – 4: Expansion Unit3
If multiple PBXs are used to establish a private
• Y: Slot number (1–7)
network (TIE line service, QSIG network, etc.)
without being connected through the telephone
company, assign only one PBX as the clock source
on the network. That PBX should have a card
connected to a telephone company line selected as
its clock source. All other PBXs should have cards
connected to the network selected as the clock
source. This enables all PBXs on the network to
synchronise their timing.

306 PC Programming Manual

 9.38 PBX Configuration—[1-5] Configuration—DSP Resource

9.38 PBX Configuration—[1-5] Configuration—DSP

Resource
IP communications that are handled by the PBX require DSP resources. DSP resources can be reserved for
various functions of the PBX.
The DSP resource advisor is a tool that analyses the configuration and user requirements for the system in
order to recommend which DSP card should be used. Click DSP Resource Advisor to access this feature.
(See 9.38.1.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting—DSP Resource
Advisor.)

9.38.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource

—Setting
Set the amount of DSP resources to reserve for each PBX function that uses DSP resources.
Name Description Value Range Links
Option DSP Indicates the total amount of available Resource amount (3 Feature Manual
Power DSP resources based on the installed digits) References
DSP card (reference only). 5.5.4 DSP
The number of resources provided by Resource Usage
each type of DSP card is as follows:
• DSP S card: 63
• DSP M card: 127
• DSP L card: 254
One DSP card can be installed on the
mother board.
Because the system reserves 2
resources for internal system
functions, the total amount of
available resources indicated will be 2
less than the total resources of the
installed card(s).
Option DSP Indicates the type of the installed DSP DSP S, DSP M, DSP L Feature Manual
card (reference only). References
5.5.4 DSP
Resource Usage
Services—VoIP Specifies the number of simultaneous 0–252 VoIP calls Feature Manual
(G.711) VoIP calls to reserve DSP resources References
for. 5.5.4 DSP
Resource Usage
Services— Specifies the number of UM ports to 0–24 ports Feature Manual
Unified reserve DSP resources for. References
message 5.5.4 DSP
Resource Usage

PC Programming Manual 307

9.38.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Services—Two- Specifies the number of UM ports 0–24 ports (cannot Feature Manual
way Recording reserved in Services—Unified exceed the value set in References
message to use for Two-way Services—Unified 5.5.4 DSP
Recording. message) Resource Usage
Services— Specifies the number of OGM ports to 0–64 ports Feature Manual
OGM reserve DSP resources for. References
5.5.4 DSP
Resource Usage
Services— Specifies the number of conference 0–24 conference Feature Manual
Conference rooms to reserve DSP resources for. rooms References
trunk 5.5.4 DSP
Resource Usage
Services—Free Indicates the amount of free DSP 0–252 DSP resources Feature Manual
resources (G. resources available to allocate References
711) (reference only). 5.5.4 DSP
Resource Usage
Select a time to Specifies when the settings made on • Set: Specify a date
apply the set this screen are applied. and time to apply the
values changes, and click
Note OK. The changes
Any calls being made that use will be applied at the
DSP resources will be specified date and
disconnected when setting values time.
are changed and applied. • Apply now: The
changes are applied
immediately. Click
OK to apply the
settings immediately.

9.38.1.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—

Setting—DSP Resource Advisor
The DSP Resource Advisor assists programmers in the allocation of DSP resources to various PBX
functions.
1. Note the value of Total Power. This is the total capacity for allocating DSP resources, depending on
the DSP card installed in the PBX.
2. In the Ports column, enter the number of ports to allocate to each PBX function.
3. For voice calls, it is useful to estimate how often each call function is used, as every extension or trunk
is not in use all the time. In the Busy Ratio (%) column, specify the anticipated ratio of time the type of
voice call function will be used.
4. As values are entered, the values in the Power column will increase to reflect the resource required for
the input amounts. Likewise, the value for Free resources (G.711) will decrease.

Note
Click Clear to reset the input values and start again.

308 PC Programming Manual

 9.38.2 PBX Configuration—[1-5-2] Configuration—DSP Resource—Usage

5. When all items are allocated, confirm that the amount of resources input does not exceed the value
indicated in Total Power.
• Click Apply to insert the specified allocation settings into the DSP Resource—Setting screen.
• Click Cancel to return to the DSP Resource—Setting screen without making any changes.
For details, refer to "5.5.4.2 DSP Resource Advisor" in the Feature Manual.

9.38.2 PBX Configuration—[1-5-2] Configuration—DSP Resource

—Usage
The Usage screen is a graphical display of DSP resource usage. This information is useful to analyse usage
patterns over time to determine DSP resource needs and optimal configuration settings.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
• The graph displays DSP resource usage over time. The time frame displayed can be displayed in
increments of 1 hour, 4 hours, or 24 hours. Up to 30 days of usage data can be stored.
• Only DSP resources that have been reserved in 9.38.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—
DSP Resource—Setting are displayed.

PC Programming Manual 309

9.38.2 PBX Configuration—[1-5-2] Configuration—DSP Resource—Usage

310 PC Programming Manual

 Section 10
PBX Configuration—[2] System

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the System menu of the PBX Configuration menu of
the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 311

10.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1] System—Date & Time

10.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1] System—Date &

Time
10.1.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-1] System—Date & Time—Date &
Time Setting
The date and time of the PBX can be programmed. The date and time will be shown on the display of
extensions (e.g., PT, PS).
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Name Description Value Range Links
Date & Indicates the current date and time. Values can be entered by Year: 2000–2035
Time clicking the parameter you want to change and typing the new Month: 01–12
value, or by clicking the up/down arrows beside the date and time. Day: 01–31
Hour: 00–23
Note Minute: 00–59
• When this setting is changed and applied, it may take Second: 00–59
between 1 minute and several hours (depending on the
configuration of the PBX network) for all connected IP-PTs
to reflect this change on their displays.
• At default settings, KX-UT series SIP phones synchronise
to the PBX’s date and time once every hour.

10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—

SNTP / Daylight Saving
Automatic clock adjustment and Summer time (daylight saving time) settings of the PBX can be
programmed. Automatic clock adjustment can be performed using one of two methods, ISDN & Caller ID or
SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol).
To set Summer time, click 10.1.2.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight
Saving—Daylight Saving.

Note
The NTP server function of the PBX must be enabled for connected KX-UT series SIP phones to receive
automatic time adjustment information from the PBX. See 27.2.4 Network Service—[2-5] Server
Feature—NTP.
Name Description Value Range Links
Automatic Time Enables the PBX to automatically Disable, ISDN & Feature Manual
Adjustment adjust its clock every day according Caller ID (FSK), References
to the time information provided by SNTP 5.5.5 Automatic
the network. Setup
SNTP—SNTP Specifies the IP address or host 1.0.0.0– Feature Manual
Server—IP name of the SNTP server. 223.255.255.255 (IP References
Address address), Max. 253 5.5.5 Automatic
characters (host Setup
name)

312 PC Programming Manual

 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving

Name Description Value Range Links

SNTP—SNTP Indicates the port number used for 1–65535 Feature Manual
Server—Port communication with an SNTP server References
Number (reference only). 5.5.5 Automatic
Setup
SNTP—Time Specifies your local UTC -14:00–+14:00 Feature Manual
Zone—Time Zone (Coordinated Universal Time) time References
zone using the up and down arrows. 5.5.5 Automatic
Setup
Note
If KX-UT series SIP phones are
connected to the PBX, and this
setting is changed, they must be
restarted for the new time zone
setting to take effect.
SNTP—Time Indicates the UTC (Coordinated -14:00–+14:00 Feature Manual
Zone—Time Zone Universal Time) time zone of the PC References
for PC (reference only). 5.5.5 Automatic
Setup

10.1.2.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP /

Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving
Summer time can be programmed. Summer time sets the clock one hour forward at 2:00 AM on the start
date, and one hour back at 2:00 AM on the end date. The start and end dates of a maximum of 20 different
summer times can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
Setting Enables Summer Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual References
time. 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—
Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving
Feature Manual References
5.5.5 Automatic Setup
Start Date— Specifies the start Year: 2000–2035 PC Programming Manual References
Year, Month, date of daylight Month: 1–12 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—
Day savings time. Day: 1–31 Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving
Feature Manual References
5.5.5 Automatic Setup
End Date— Specifies the end Year: 2000–2035 PC Programming Manual References
Year, Month, date of daylight Month: 1–12 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—
Day savings time. Day: 1–31 Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving
Feature Manual References
5.5.5 Automatic Setup

PC Programming Manual 313

10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM

10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator &

BGM
Settings related to the PBX operator and audio sources can be specified.
Name Description Value Range Links
PBX Specifies the extension number or Max. 5 digits PC Programming
Operator— floating extension number of incoming (consisting of Manual References
Day, Lunch, call distribution group to be designated 0–9) 10.4 PBX Configuration—
Break, Night as the PBX operator in each time [2-4] System—Week Table
mode (day/lunch/break/night). To 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—
select an extension number, click [2-6-1] System—Numbering
Destination Setting (see Plan—Main
2.1.6 Extension Number Setting). 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—
If Automatic copy to UM Operator [3-5-1] Group—Incoming
(No.1) is checked here, the PBX Call Distribution Group—
Operator extension number(s) set for Group Settings
Day/Lunch/Break/Night will be copied 23.2 UM Configuration—
to the Unified Messaging service’s [4-2] Service Settings—
Operator Extension for Operator Parameters—Automated
Service No. 1 (see 23.2 UM Attendant—Operator Service
Configuration—[4-2] Service
Settings—Parameters—Automated Feature Manual
Attendant—Operator Service). References
5.1.5 Operator Features
BGM and Selects the audio source for Music on Tone, BGM1, Feature Manual
Music on Hold. BGM2, BGM3, References
Hold—Music BGM4, BGM5, 2.13.4 Music on Hold
on Hold BGM6, BGM7,
BGM8
BGM and Selects the audio source for Music for Same as Feature Manual
Music on Transfer (either the same music source Music on Hold, References
Hold—Sound chosen for the Music on Hold, or Ringback Tone 2.12.1 Call Transfer
on Transfer ringback tone).

314 PC Programming Manual

 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters

10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers &

Counters
Various system timers and counters can be programmed.

Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Automatic Redial Specifies the number of times 0–10 Feature Manual
—Repeat Automatic Redial is attempted before References
Counter being cancelled. 2.6.3 Last Number Redial
Automatic Redial Specifies the length of time between 10 × n Feature Manual
—Repeat Interval repeated Automatic Redial attempts. (n=1–120) References
(x10s) s 2.6.3 Last Number Redial
Automatic Redial Specifies the length of time that the 10 × n Feature Manual
—Redial Call PBX waits for the called party to answer (n=1–30) s References
Ring Duration an Automatic Redial attempt. This is the 2.6.3 Last Number Redial
(x10s) length of time that the called party’s
extension will ring for each attempt.
Automatic Redial Specifies the length of time before the 0–15 s Feature Manual
—Analogue CO PBX stops muting the caller’s voice and References
Mute / Busy cancels busy tone detection when 2.6.3 Last Number Redial
Detection Timer Automatic Redial to analogue trunk is
(s) performed.
Dial—Hot Line Specifies the length of time between 0–180 s Feature Manual
(Pickup Dial) going off-hook and the start of automatic References
Start (s) dialling when the Hot Line feature is set. 2.6.6 Hot Line
Dial—Extension Specifies the length of time after going 1–250 s Feature Manual
First Digit (s) off-hook within which the first digit of a References
feature number or destination must be 2.5.2 Automatic Extension
dialled before a reorder tone is heard. Release
Dial—Extension Specifies the length of time within which 1–250 s Feature Manual
Inter-digit (s) subsequent digits must be dialled References
before the PBX sends a reorder tone. 2.5.2 Automatic Extension
Release
Dial—Analogue Specifies the length of time within which 1–15 s
CO First Digit (s) the first digit of a telephone number
must be sent to an analogue trunk. If no
digit is sent before this time expires, the
PBX recognises end of dialling and
stops muting the caller’s voice over the
analogue trunk.

PC Programming Manual 315

10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Dial—Analogue Specifies the length of time within which 1–15 s
CO Inter-digit (s) subsequent digits of a telephone
number must be sent to an analogue
trunk. If no digit is sent before this time
expires, the PBX recognises end of
dialling and stops muting the caller’s
voice over the analogue trunk.
Dial—Analogue Specifies the length of time between the 0–60 s Feature Manual
CO Call Duration end of dialling and the start of the References
Start (s) SMDR timer for outgoing analogue 2.22.1.1 Station Message
trunk calls. Detail Recording (SMDR)
Intercept Routing Specifies the length of time until an 1–240 s PC Programming
No Answer unanswered trunk call is redirected to Manual References
(IRNA)—Day (s), the intercept routing destination in each 12.1.1 PBX Configuration
Lunch (s), Break time mode. —[4-1-1] Extension—Wired
(s), Night (s) Note that this setting is only valid for Extension—Extension
extensions whose Intercept No Settings—Intercept No
Answer Time—Day, Lunch, Break, Answer Time—Intercept No
Night is set to "0". Answer Time—Day, Lunch,
Break, Night
Feature Manual
References
2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing
Recall—Hold Specifies the length of time until the 0 (disable Feature Manual
Recall (s) holding extension receives a Hold the Hold References
Recall ring or alarm tone when a held Recall)– 2.13.1 Call Hold
call remains unretrieved. 240 s
Recall—Transfer Specifies the length of time that a 1–240 s PC Programming
Recall (s) transferred call waits to be answered, Manual References
before being redirected to the Transfer 12.1.1 PBX Configuration
Recall destination assigned to the —[4-1-1] Extension—Wired
original transferring extension. Extension—Extension
Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration
—[4-2-1] Extension—
Portable Station—
Extension Settings
Feature Manual
References
2.12.1 Call Transfer

316 PC Programming Manual

 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Recall—Call Park Specifies the length of time that a 1–240 s PC Programming
Recall (s) parked call waits to be retrieved, before Manual References
the Transfer Recall destination assigned 12.1.1 PBX Configuration
to the extension that parked the call —[4-1-1] Extension—Wired
hears a Call Park Recall ring. Extension—Extension
Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration
—[4-2-1] Extension—
Portable Station—
Extension Settings
Feature Manual
References
2.13.2 Call Park
Recall— Specifies the length of time after an 60 × n (n = Feature Manual
Disconnect after extension with a trunk call on hold 1–30) s References
Recall (x60s) receives a Hold Recall tone that the 2.13.1 Call Hold
held call is disconnected.
Tone Length— Specifies the length of time that a 1–15 s Feature Manual
Busy Tone / DND busy/DND tone is heard when a call is References
Tone (s) made to an extension in busy status or 2.3.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
DND mode. A reorder tone will be sent 2.10 Busy Line/Busy Party
when this timer expires. (For a call Features
through DISA, the call will be
disconnected when this timer expires.)
Tone Length— Specifies the length of time that a 1–15 s Feature Manual
Reorder Tone for reorder tone is heard when using a PT References
PT Handset (s) handset. The PT will return to idle status 2.5.2 Automatic Extension
when this timer expires. Release
Tone Length— Specifies the length of time that a 1–15 s Feature Manual
Reorder Tone for reorder tone is heard from the built-in References
PT Hands-free speaker of a PT in hands-free mode. 2.5.2 Automatic Extension
(s) The PT will return to idle status when Release
this timer expires. This setting is applied 2.11.1 Hands-free
to PSs as well as PTs. Operation

PC Programming Manual 317

10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters

DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf

Value
Name Description Links
Range
DISA—Delayed Specifies the length of time that 0–30 s PC Programming Manual
Answer Timer (s) the caller hears a ringback tone References
before hearing an OGM. 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2]
Optional Device—Voice Message—
DISA Message
Feature Manual References
2.16.1 Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)
DISA—Mute & Specifies the length of time until 0.0–12.0 PC Programming Manual
OGM Start Timer the caller hears an OGM after s References
after answering (s) reaching the DISA line. 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2]
Optional Device—Voice Message—
DISA Message
Feature Manual References
2.16.1 Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)
DISA—No Dial Specifies the length of time after 0–120 s PC Programming Manual
Intercept Timer (s) the OGM finishes playing in References
which the caller must begin 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2]
dialling before the call is System—Operator & BGM
redirected to the operator. 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2]
Optional Device—Voice Message—
DISA Message
14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6]
Feature—Tenant—Operator
(Extension Number)
Feature Manual References
2.16.1 Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)
DISA—2nd Dial Specifies the length of time in 0–5 s PC Programming Manual
Timer for AA (s) which the caller must dial the References
second digit before the DISA 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2]
AA Service activates. Optional Device—Voice Message—
DISA Message
Feature Manual References
2.16.1 Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)

318 PC Programming Manual

 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters

Value
Name Description Links
Range
DISA—Intercept Specifies the length of time until 0–60 s PC Programming Manual
Timer—Day (s), an unanswered DISA call is References
Lunch (s), Break intercepted and redirected to 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
(s), Night (s) the intercept routing destination Extension—Wired Extension—
after the original destination Extension Settings—Intercept
receives the call in each time Destination—Intercept Destination
mode. —When called party does not
answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—
Extension Settings—Intercept
Destination—Intercept Destination
—When called party does not
answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2]
Optional Device—Voice Message—
DISA Message
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing
2.16.1 Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)
DISA—Disconnect Specifies the length of time that 0–60 s PC Programming Manual
Timer after an intercepted DISA call rings at References
Intercept (s) the intercept routing destination 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2]
before being disconnected. Optional Device—Voice Message—
DISA Message
Feature Manual References
2.16.1 Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)
DISA—CO-to-CO Specifies the number of times 0–15 PC Programming Manual
Call Prolong that the caller can prolong a References
Counter trunk-to-trunk call on a DISA 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2]
line. (Selecting "0" enables the Optional Device—Voice Message—
caller to prolong the trunk-to- DISA Message
trunk call without restriction.)
Feature Manual References
2.16.1 Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)
DISA—CO-to-CO Specifies the length of time that 60 × n (n PC Programming Manual
Call Prolong Time a trunk-to-trunk call on a DISA = 0–7) s References
(x60s) line is prolonged each time that 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2]
the caller prolongs the call. Optional Device—Voice Message—
(Selecting "0" prevents the DISA Message
caller from prolonging the trunk-
to-trunk call.) Feature Manual References
2.16.1 Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)

PC Programming Manual 319

10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters

Value
Name Description Links
Range
DISA—Progress Specifies the length of time that 0–60 s PC Programming Manual
Tone Continuation a progress tone is sent to the References
Time before manager extension before 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2]
Recording recording an OGM. Optional Device—Voice Message—
Message (s) DISA Message
Feature Manual References
2.30.2 Outgoing Message (OGM)
DISA—Reorder Specifies the length of time that 0–15 s PC Programming Manual
Tone Duration (s) a reorder tone is sent to the References
caller before the call is 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2]
disconnected. If "0" is specified, Optional Device—Voice Message—
no reorder tone is sent and the DISA Message
call is disconnected
immediately. Feature Manual References
2.16.1 Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)
Doorphone—Call Specifies the length of time that 10 × n PC Programming Manual
Ring Duration a call from a doorphone rings (n=1–15) References
(x10s) until the call is cancelled when s 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1]
there is no answer. Optional Device—Doorphone
Feature Manual References
2.18.1 Doorphone Call
Doorphone—Call Specifies the length of time until 10 × n PC Programming Manual
Duration (x10s) an answered doorphone call is (n=0–30) References
disconnected. s 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1]
Optional Device—Doorphone
Feature Manual References
2.18.1 Doorphone Call
Doorphone—Open Specifies the length of time that 2–7 s PC Programming Manual
Duration (s) a door stays unlocked after References
being opened from an 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1]
extension. Optional Device—Doorphone
Feature Manual References
2.18.2 Door Open
Timed Reminder— Specifies the number of times 1–15 Feature Manual References
Repeat Counter that an alarm is repeated. 2.24.4 Timed Reminder
Timed Reminder— Specifies the length of time 10 × n Feature Manual References
Interval Time between the repeated alarms. (n=1–120) 2.24.4 Timed Reminder
(x10s) s
Timed Reminder— Specifies the length of time that 10 × n Feature Manual References
Alarm Ringing an alarm rings. (n=1–30) 2.24.4 Timed Reminder
Duration (x10s) s

320 PC Programming Manual

 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Unattended Specifies the length of time until 60 × n (n Feature Manual References
Conference— the conference originator = 0–60) s 2.14.2 Conference
Recall Start Timer receives an Unattended
(x60s) Conference Recall tone.
Unattended Specifies the length of time until 0–240 s Feature Manual References
Conference— the parties involved in an 2.14.2 Conference
Warning Tone Unattended Conference receive
Start Timer (s) a warning tone after the
conference originator receives
the Unattended Conference
Recall tone but does not return
to the conference.
Unattended Specifies the length of time until 0–240 s Feature Manual References
Conference— an Unattended Conference is 2.14.2 Conference
Disconnect Timer disconnected after the parties
(s) involved in the conference
receive a warning tone but the
conference originator does not
return to the conference.

Miscellaneous
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Caller ID—Waiting to Specifies the length of time that the 0–15 s PC Programming
receive (s) PBX waits to receive Caller ID from Manual References
an analogue trunk. If the Caller ID is 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—
received through an analogue trunk [3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group
card on which no Caller ID card is —Caller ID Modification
mounted or through a port to which 14.1 PBX Configuration—
Caller ID Detection is disabled, this [6-1] Feature—System
timer is not applicable. Speed Dial
Feature Manual
References
2.19.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Visual Specifies the length of time that a 0–250 s Feature Manual
Caller ID Display (s) Caller ID number, with the Call References
Waiting tone offered by an analogue 2.1.3.3 Call Waiting
line from the telephone company, is 2.10.4.2 Call Waiting Tone
shown on the display. The Caller ID 2.19.1 Caller ID
number flashes on the display for
five seconds, followed by a 10-
second pause, then flashes again
for five seconds.

PC Programming Manual 321

10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Extension PIN—Lock Specifies the number of successive None, 1– Feature Manual
Counter incorrect PIN entries allowed before 15 References
the extension PIN is locked. A 2.7.5 Walking COS
locked extension PIN cannot be 2.7.6 Verification Code Entry
used until reset from the extension 2.24.1 Extension Personal
assigned as manager. (Specifying Identification Number (PIN)
"None" disables this counter.)
External Sensor— Specifies the length of time that the 10 × n Feature Manual
Ring Duration (s) PBX waits for the called party to (n=1–15) References
answer before cancelling a sensor s 2.18.3 External Sensor
call.
Incoming Call Inter- Specifies the length of time between 0–30 s PC Programming
digit Timer—DDI / digits when receiving a DDI/DID Manual References
DID (s) number from a public network. The 18.3 PBX Configuration—
call will be redirected to a PBX [10-3] CO & Incoming Call—
operator when this timer expires. DDI / DID Table
Feature Manual
References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling
(DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
Incoming Call Inter- Specifies the length of time between 3–30 s PC Programming
digit Timer—TIE (s) digits when receiving a dialled Manual References
number from a TIE line. The call will 17.1 PBX Configuration—
be redirected to a PBX operator [9-1] Private Network—TIE
when this timer expires. Table
Feature Manual
References
4.3.1 TIE Line Service
PT Display—PT Last Specifies the length of time that the 1–15 s
Display Duration in current information remains on the
Idle Mode (s) display after the extension returns to
idle status.
Air Synchronisation Specifies the length of time that a 60 × n PC Programming
—Watching Slave CS can maintain an ongoing (n=0– Manual References
Degeneracy (x60s) call after air synchronisation is lost. 300) s 19.3.1 PBX Configuration—
[11-3-1] Maintenance—CS
Synchronisation—Air
Synchronisation
Voice Mail (Caller Specifies the length of time from 1–30 s Feature Manual
from VM to CO)— when the voice mail seizes a trunk References
On-hook Wait Time (for example, to transfer a call) until 3.1.1 Unified Messaging
(s) the voice mail goes on hook. If the System Overview
time specified here is too short, the
voice mail will be unable to dial the
number and make a connection.

322 PC Programming Manual

 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters

Value
Name Description Links
Range
During Conversation Specifies the length of time that a 80 ms,
—DTMF Signal DTMF signal is sent when a number 160 ms,
Length (ms) is dialled from a PT or PS during a 240 ms,
conversation. 320 ms
During Conversation Specifies the length of time between 64 + 16 ×
—DTMF Inter-digit DTMF signals when numbers are n (n=0–
Pause (ms) dialled in succession from a PT or 15) ms
PS during a conversation.
During Conversation Specifies the length of the pause 1.5 s, 2.5 Feature Manual
—Pause Signal Time inserted when the PAUSE button is s, 3.5 s, References
(s) pressed during a conversation. 4.5 s 2.5.4.7 Pause Insertion
System Wireless— When the destination of an incoming 0–30 s PC Programming
PS Out of Range call is a PS, specifies the length of Manual References
Timer (s) time the PBX searches for the PS 10.9 PBX Configuration—
before setting its status to Out of [2-9] System—System
Range. Options—System Wireless—
If "0" is assigned, the timer is Out of Range Registration
controlled by the cell station.
Feature Manual
References
4.3.6.1 PS Roaming by
Network ICD Group
SVM—Recording Specifies the maximum length of a 1–600 s PC Programming
Time (s) message recorded by the SVM Manual References
feature. 12.1.8 PBX Configuration—
[4-1-8] Extension—Wired
Extension—Simplified Voice
Message
12.2.6 PBX Configuration—
[4-2-6] Extension—Portable
Station—Simplified Voice
Message
Feature Manual
References
2.16.3 Built-in Simplified
Voice Message (SVM)

PC Programming Manual 323

10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters

Value
Name Description Links
Range
SVM—Dial Tone Specifies the length of time that dial 1–60 s PC Programming
Continuous Time (s) tone 3 is heard after all messages Manual References
stored by the SVM feature for an 12.1.8 PBX Configuration—
extension are finished playing. [4-1-8] Extension—Wired
Extension—Simplified Voice
Message
12.2.6 PBX Configuration—
[4-2-6] Extension—Portable
Station—Simplified Voice
Message
Feature Manual
References
2.16.3 Built-in Simplified
Voice Message (SVM)
Conference Group Specifies the length of time that a 0–120 s PC Programming
Call—Ring Duration conference group call will ring. The Manual References
(s) conference group call will be 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—
established with members who [2-6-1] System—Numbering
answer within this time. If no Plan—Main—Features—
members answer the call before this Conference Group Call
timer expires, the call is cancelled. Operation
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
[2-7-1] System—Class of
Service—COS Settings—
Miscellaneous—Conference
Group Call Operation
11.9 PBX Configuration—
[3-9] Group—Conference
Group
Feature Manual
References
2.15.1 Conference Group
Call
Call Pickup Group Specifies how long the indication of 5, 10, 15 Feature Manual
Monitor—LCD an incoming call that can be s References
Display Duration (s) answered by an extension in a call 2.4.3 Call Pickup
pickup group is shown on PTs’
displays.

324 PC Programming Manual

 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table

10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table

A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation depending on the time of
day. The time mode can be switched either automatically or manually. Select the desired switching mode
from the Time Service Switching Mode option.
Time Table numbers correspond to tenant numbers (for example, Tenant 1 uses Time Table 1). Select the
desired Time Table from the Time Table No. list.
When in Automatic Switching mode, the time modes of the tenant are switched as programmed in the
corresponding Time Table. Manual switching is possible only from an authorised extension (determined by
COS).
• To adjust the currently displayed Time Table, click and drag the divisions between two time periods.
• To programme the time blocks of the currently displayed Time Table, including adding or deleting time
blocks, click Time Setting.

10.4.1 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table—Time

Setting
The start times of 4 different time blocks can be programmed for each day of the week, for the selected
Time Table, as well as the start and end times of up to 3 break periods.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
1. Day/Lunch/Night Enables the setting of the start time Disable, Feature Manual
—Day1 Start, Lunch for each time block. Enable References
Start, Day2 Start, 5.1.3 Tenant Service
Night Start—Setting 5.1.4 Time Service
1. Day/Lunch/Night Specifies the start time for each time 00:00– Feature Manual
—Day1 Start, Lunch block. Times can only be set when 1. 23:59 References
Start, Day2 Start, Day/Lunch/Night—Day1 Start, 5.1.3 Tenant Service
Night Start—Hour, Lunch Start, Day2 Start, Night Start 5.1.4 Time Service
Minute —Setting is set to Enable.
2. Break—Break 1–3 Enables the setting of the start time Disable, Feature Manual
Start—Setting for each break period. Enable References
5.1.3 Tenant Service
5.1.4 Time Service
2. Break—Break 1–3 Specifies the start time for each break 00:00– Feature Manual
Start—Hour, Minute period. Times can only be set when 2. 23:59 References
Break—Break 1–3 Start—Setting is 5.1.3 Tenant Service
set to Enable. 5.1.4 Time Service
2. Break—Break 1–3 Specifies the end time for each break 00:00– Feature Manual
End—Hour, Minute period. Times can only be set when 2. 23:59 References
Break—Break 1–3 Start—Setting is 5.1.3 Tenant Service
set to Enable. 5.1.4 Time Service

PC Programming Manual 325

10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table

10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday

Table
A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation during holidays. Select the
desired time mode from the Holiday Mode list.
The start and end dates of a maximum of 24 different holidays can be programmed.
You can click the UM Parameter tab to open the Holiday Table used for features of the Unified Messaging
system. These settings are synchronised with Unified Messaging system Holiday settings.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Holiday Enables the setting of the holiday. Disable, PC Programming Manual
Table— Enable References
Setting 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service
Settings—Holiday Table—Setting
Feature Manual References
5.1.4 Time Service
Holiday Specifies the month of the 1–12 PC Programming Manual
Table—Start holiday start date. References
Date—Month 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service
Settings—Holiday Table—Start Date
(Month Day)
Feature Manual References
5.1.4 Time Service
Holiday Specifies the day of the holiday 1–31 PC Programming Manual
Table—Start start date. References
Date—Day 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service
Settings—Holiday Table—Start Date
(Month Day)
Feature Manual References
5.1.4 Time Service
Holiday Specifies the time of day on the Hour and PC Programming Manual
Table—Start specified date at which to begin Minute References
Time the holiday service. Click the cell 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service
to display an array of hours and Settings—Holiday Table
minutes. Select an hour of the
day and a minute of the hour to Feature Manual References
set the time. 5.1.4 Time Service
Holiday Specifies the month of the 1–12 PC Programming Manual
Table—End holiday end date. References
Date—Month 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service
Settings—Holiday Table—End Date
(Month Day)
Feature Manual References
5.1.4 Time Service

326 PC Programming Manual

 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Holiday Specifies the day of the holiday 1–31 PC Programming Manual
Table—End end date. References
Date—Day 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service
Settings—Holiday Table—End Date
(Month Day)
Feature Manual References
5.1.4 Time Service
Holiday Specifies the time of day on the Hour and PC Programming Manual
Table—End specified date at which to end the Minute References
Time holiday service. Click the cell to 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service
display an array of hours and Settings—Holiday Table
minutes. Select an hour of the
day and a minute of the hour to Feature Manual References
set the time. 5.1.4 Time Service
Holiday If "Yes" is selected, the holiday Yes, No PC Programming Manual
Table— will not end regardless of the end References
Retain time setting. To end the holiday 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service
Holiday setting when Yes is selected and Settings—Holiday Table
the end time has already passed,
set Setting to "Disable" or re- Feature Manual References
programme the settings for the 5.1.4 Time Service
holiday.

PC Programming Manual 327

10.6 PBX Configuration—[2-6] System—Numbering Plan

10.6 PBX Configuration—[2-6] System—Numbering

Plan
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—
Main
Details of the extension numbering schemes, feature access numbers, and numbers to access other PBXs
in a network can be programmed here.
For more information on flexible numbering, see "5.5.7 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the Feature
Manual.

Note
• Numbering does not necessarily have to be uniform; varying numbers of digits can be used for each
setting.
• To programme these settings, all installed V-SIPEXT and V-UTEXT cards must first be set to OUS.
For details, see 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Extension
The leading numbers and the number of additional digits of the extension numbers for a maximum of 64
different extension numbering schemes can be programmed.

328 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Leading Specifies the leading number of Max. 3 digits PC Programming Manual
Number extension numbers and floating (consisting of References
extension numbers. 0–9) 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9]
System—System Options—
Note
Option 9—Extension / Mailbox
Changing this value will also affect Setting—Mailbox Number
the following settings. Synchronization with Extension
• Extension Number as set in Number
User Profiles and UM 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—
Configuration [3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call
Distribution Group—Group
• Mailbox Number when set to Settings
synchronise with Extension
11.7.2 PBX Configuration—
Number settings
[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit
(However, Mailbox Number
Settings
synchronisation depends on the
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—
setting 10.9 PBX Configuration
[4-1-1] Extension—Wired
—[2-9] System—System
Extension—Extension Settings
Options—Option 9—
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—
Extension / Mailbox Setting—
[4-2-1] Extension—Portable
Mailbox Number
Station—Extension Settings
Synchronization with
13.3.2 PBX Configuration—
Extension Number.)
[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice
Message—DISA Message
19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1]
Maintenance—Main
20.1 UM Configuration—[1]
Mailbox Settings—Mailbox
Number
No. of Specifies the number of additional None: 0 digit
Additional digits following the leading number. X: 1 digit
Digits XX: 2 digits

Features
Feature numbers to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features are available
while hearing a dial tone.
Name Description Value Range Links
Operator Call Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
number used to call the (consisting of 0– References
operator. 9, *, and #) 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2]
System—Operator & BGM
14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6]
Feature—Tenant
Feature Manual References
5.1.5 Operator Features

PC Programming Manual 329

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Idle Line Access Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
(Local Access) number used to make a (consisting of 0– References
trunk call by Idle Line 9, *, and #) 11.1.2 PBX Configuration—[3-1-2]
Access (selects an idle Group—Trunk Group—Local
trunk automatically). Access Priority
Feature Manual References
2.5.5.3 Trunk Access
Trunk Group Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Access number used to make a (consisting of 0– References
trunk call using an idle 9, *, and #) 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1]
trunk from a certain trunk CO & Incoming Call—CO Line
group. Settings
TIE Line Access Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
number used to make a (consisting of 0– References
TIE line call. 9, *, and #) 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1]
Private Network—TIE Table
Feature Manual References
4.3.1 TIE Line Service
Redial Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
number used to redial the (consisting of 0– 2.6.3 Last Number Redial
last number dialled. 9, *, and #)
System Speed Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Dialling / number used to make a (consisting of 0– References
Personal Speed call using a System/ 9, *, and #) 12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3]
Dialling Personal Speed Dialling Extension—Wired Extension—
number. Speed Dial
14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1]
Feature—System Speed Dial
Feature Manual References
2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/
System
Personal Speed Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Dialling - number used to (consisting of 0– 2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/
Programming programme Personal 9, *, and #) System
Speed Dialling numbers at
an extension.
DOORPHONE Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Call number used to make a (consisting of 0– References
call to a doorphone. 9, *, and #) 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1]
Optional Device—Doorphone
Feature Manual References
2.18.1 Doorphone Call

330 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Group Paging Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
number used to page a (consisting of 0– References
certain paging group. 9, *, and #) 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4]
Group—Paging Group
Feature Manual References
2.17.1 Paging
External BGM Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
On / Off number, available for (consisting of 0– References
manager extensions, used 9, *, and #) 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2]
to turn on or off the System—Operator & BGM
external BGM. 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1]
System—Class of Service—COS
Settings—Manager—Manager
Feature Manual References
2.30.1 Background Music (BGM)
OGM Record / Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Clear / Playback number, available for (consisting of 0– References
manager extensions, used 9, *, and #) 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2]
to record, clear, or play Optional Device—Voice Message
back a certain OGM. —DISA Message
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1]
System—Class of Service—COS
Settings—Manager—Manager
Feature Manual References
2.30.2 Outgoing Message (OGM)
Single CO Line Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Access number used to make a (consisting of 0– References
trunk call using a certain 9, *, and #) 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1]
trunk. CO & Incoming Call—CO Line
Settings
Feature Manual References
2.5.5.3 Trunk Access

PC Programming Manual 331

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Parallel Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Telephone (Ring) number used to set or (consisting of 0– 2.11.10 Parallelled Telephone
Mode Set / cancel an SLT connected 9, *, and #)
Cancel in parallel with a DPT to
ring when receiving an
incoming call.

Note
This feature is
restricted to extensions
connected Expansion
Units. For information
about connecting SLTs
and DPTs in parallel,
refer to 2.11.10
Parallelled Telephone
in the Feature Manual.
Group Call Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Pickup number used to answer a (consisting of 0– References
call ringing at a certain call 9, *, and #) 11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3]
pickup group. Group—Call Pickup Group
Feature Manual References
2.4.3 Call Pickup
Directed Call Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Pickup number used to answer a (consisting of 0– References
call ringing at a certain 9, *, and #) 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
extension. Extension—Wired Extension—
Extension Settings—Option 3—
Call Pickup Deny
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—
Extension Settings—Option 3—
Call Pickup Deny
Feature Manual References
2.4.3 Call Pickup
TAFAS Answer Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
number used to answer a (consisting of 0– References
trunk call notified through 9, *, and #) 13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2]
an external pager. Optional Device—External Pager
Feature Manual References
2.17.2 Trunk Answer From Any
Station (TAFAS)

332 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Group Paging Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Answer number used to answer a (consisting of 0– References
page to a paging group. 9, *, and #) 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4]
Group—Paging Group
Feature Manual References
2.17.1 Paging
Automatic Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Callback Busy number used to cancel (consisting of 0– 2.10.1 Automatic Callback Busy
Cancel Automatic Callback Busy. 9, *, and #) (Camp-on)
User Remote Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Operation / number used to change the (consisting of 0– References
Walking COS / COS of an extension 9, *, and #) 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1]
Verification Code temporarily, and also System—Class of Service—COS
change the feature settings Settings—Optional Device &
(for example, FWD, DND) Other Extensions—Remote
of an extension from Operation by Other Extension
another extension or
through DISA. Feature Manual References
2.7.5 Walking COS
2.7.6 Verification Code Entry
Wireless XDP Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Parallel Mode number used to set or (consisting of 0– References
Set / Cancel cancel Wireless XDP 9, *, and #) 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1]
Parallel mode. System—Class of Service—COS
Settings—Optional Device &
Other Extensions—Accept
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set
by PS
Feature Manual References
5.2.4.5 Wireless XDP Parallel
Mode
Account Code Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Entry number used to enter an (consisting of 0– 2.5.4.3 Account Code Entry
Account Code. 9, *, and #)
Call Hold / Call Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Hold Retrieve number used to hold a call (consisting of 0– 2.13.1 Call Hold
or retrieve a call on hold 9, *, and #)
from the holding extension.
Call Hold Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Retrieve : number used to retrieve a (consisting of 0– 2.13.1 Call Hold
Specified with a held call from a different 9, *, and #)
Holding extension by specifying a
Extension holding extension number.
Number

PC Programming Manual 333

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Call Park / Call Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Park Retrieve number used to hold a call (consisting of 0– 2.13.2 Call Park
in a parking zone or 9, *, and #)
retrieve a call held in a
parking zone.
Hold Retrieve : Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Specified with a number used to retrieve a (consisting of 0– 2.13.1 Call Hold
Held CO Line held trunk call from a 9, *, and #)
Number different extension by
specifying the held trunk
number.
Door Open Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
number used to open a (consisting of 0– References
door. 9, *, and #) 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1]
Optional Device—Doorphone
Feature Manual References
2.18.2 Door Open
External Relay Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Access number used to activate a (consisting of 0– References
relay. 9, *, and #) 13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4]
Optional Device—External Relay
Feature Manual References
2.18.4 External Relay Control
External Feature Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Access number used to access the (consisting of 0– 2.11.7 External Feature Access
features of a host PBX or 9, *, and #) (EFA)
the telephone company.
SIP Refer(Blind) Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
number used to perform a (consisting of 0– 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation
blind transfer from the PBX 9, *, and #) Protocol) Extension
to the SIP trunk.

Note
This feature is not
available from an ISDN
extension or a SIP
extension.
ISDN Hold Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
number used to hold a call (consisting of 0– 4.1.2.6 Call Hold (HOLD)—by
using the ISDN service of 9, *, and #) ISDN
the telephone company,
instead of the PBX feature.

334 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

COLR Set / Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Cancel number used to set or (consisting of 0– References
cancel COLR, which 9, *, and #) 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
suppresses the Configuration—Slot—Port
presentation of the called Property - BRI Port—
party’s number to the Supplementary Service—COLP,
caller. CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP,
CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting),
CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E,
3PTY
9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Port
Property - PRI Port—
Supplementary Service—COLP,
CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP,
CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting),
CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E,
E911, 3PTY
Feature Manual References
4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)
4.3.4.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP) and Calling/Connected
Name Identification Presentation
(CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG

PC Programming Manual 335

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

CLIR Set / Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Cancel number used to set or (consisting of 0– References
cancel CLIR, which 9, *, and #) 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
suppresses the Configuration—Slot—Port
presentation of the caller’s Property - BRI Port—
number to the called party. Supplementary Service—COLP,
CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP,
CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting),
CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E,
3PTY
9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Port
Property - PRI Port—
Supplementary Service—COLP,
CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP,
CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting),
CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E,
E911, 3PTY
Feature Manual References
4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)
4.3.4.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP) and Calling/Connected
Name Identification Presentation
(CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG
Switch CLIP of Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
CO Line / number used to send either (consisting of 0– References
Extension the CLIP number of the 9, *, and #) 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
trunk in use (subscriber’s Configuration—Slot—Port
number) or the extension to Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO—
the network. Subscriber Number
9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Port
Property - PRI Port—CO Setting
—Subscriber Number
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
Extension—Wired Extension—
Extension Settings—CLIP—CLIP
ID
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—
Extension Settings—CLIP—CLIP
ID
Feature Manual References
4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)

336 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

MCID Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
number used to ask the (consisting of 0– 4.1.2.9 Malicious Call
telephone company to 9, *, and #) Identification (MCID)
trace a malicious call. This
feature can be used during
a call or while hearing a
reorder tone after the caller
hangs up.
ISDN-FWD Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
(MSN) Set / number used to set or (consisting of 0– 4.1.2.4 Call Forwarding (CF)—by
Cancel / Confirm cancel the FWD of 9, *, and #) ISDN (P-MP)
incoming ISDN calls to an 4.1.2.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—by
outside party using the ISDN (P-P)
ISDN service of the
telephone company
(instead of the PBX), or
confirm the FWD setting.
Extension users can set
the FWD destination to the
network on an MSN basis.
Message Waiting Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Set / Cancel / number used to set or (consisting of 0– 2.20.1 Message Waiting
Call Back cancel Message Waiting, 9, *, and #)
or call back the caller.
FWD/DND Set / Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Cancel: Call from number used to set or (consisting of 0– References
CO & Extension cancel FWD/DND for 9, *, and #) 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2]
incoming trunk and Extension—Wired Extension—
intercom calls. FWD/DND
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2]
Extension—Portable Station—
FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
2.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do
Not Disturb (DND) Features
FWD/DND Set / Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Cancel: Call from number used to set or (consisting of 0– References
CO cancel FWD/DND for 9, *, and #) 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2]
incoming trunk calls. Extension—Wired Extension—
FWD/DND
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2]
Extension—Portable Station—
FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
2.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do
Not Disturb (DND) Features

PC Programming Manual 337

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

FWD/DND Set / Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Cancel: Call from number used to set or (consisting of 0– References
Extension cancel FWD/DND for 9, *, and #) 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2]
incoming intercom calls. Extension—Wired Extension—
FWD/DND
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2]
Extension—Portable Station—
FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
2.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do
Not Disturb (DND) Features
FWD No Answer Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Timer Set number used to set the (consisting of 0– References
length of time before a call 9, *, and #) 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2]
is forwarded. Extension—Wired Extension—
FWD/DND
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2]
Extension—Portable Station—
FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
Group FWD Set / Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Cancel: Call from number used to set or (consisting of 0– References
CO & Extension cancel FWD for incoming 9, *, and #) 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1]
trunk and intercom calls to Group—Incoming Call Distribution
an incoming call Group—Group Settings
distribution group.
Feature Manual References
2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do
Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY
Group FWD Set / Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Cancel: Call from number used to set or (consisting of 0– References
CO cancel FWD for incoming 9, *, and #) 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1]
trunk calls to an incoming Group—Incoming Call Distribution
call distribution group. Group—Group Settings
Feature Manual References
2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do
Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY
Group FWD Set / Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Cancel: Call from number used to set or (consisting of 0– References
Extension cancel FWD for incoming 9, *, and #) 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1]
intercom calls to an Group—Incoming Call Distribution
incoming call distribution Group—Group Settings
group.
Feature Manual References
2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do
Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY

338 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Call Pickup Deny Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Set / Cancel number used to set or (consisting of 0– 2.4.3 Call Pickup
cancel Call Pickup Deny 9, *, and #)
(i.e., preventing other
extensions from picking up
calls to your extension).
Paging Deny Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Set / Cancel number used to set or (consisting of 0– References
cancel Paging Deny (i.e., 9, *, and #) 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4]
preventing other Group—Paging Group
extensions from paging
your extension). Feature Manual References
2.17.1 Paging
Walking Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Extension number used to use the (consisting of 0– 2.24.3 Walking Extension
same extension settings at 9, *, and #) Features
a new extension.
Data Line Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Security Set / number used to set or (consisting of 0– 2.11.5 Data Line Security
Cancel cancel Data Line Security 9, *, and #)
(i.e., preventing signals
from other extensions
during data transmission).
Manual Call Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Waiting for number used to set or (consisting of 0– 2.1.3.3 Call Waiting
Extension Call change the method of 9, *, and #)
receiving a Call Waiting
notification from an
extension.
Automatic Call Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Waiting number used to set or (consisting of 0– 2.1.3.3 Call Waiting
cancel a Call Waiting 9, *, and #)
notification from a trunk,
doorphone, or a call via an
incoming call distribution
group.
Executive Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Override Deny number used to set or (consisting of 0– References
Set / Cancel cancel Executive Busy 9, *, and #) 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1]
Override (i.e., preventing System—Class of Service—COS
other extensions from Settings—Executive—Executive
joining your conversation). Busy Override
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1]
System—Class of Service—COS
Settings—Executive—Executive
Busy Override Deny
Feature Manual References
2.10.2 Executive Busy Override

PC Programming Manual 339

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Not Ready Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
(Manual Wrap- number used to enter or (consisting of 0– References
up) Mode On / leave Not Ready mode. 9, *, and #) 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1]
Off Group—Incoming Call Distribution
Group—Group Settings
Feature Manual References
2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-out
Log-in / Log-out Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
number used to join or (consisting of 0– References
leave an incoming call 9, *, and #) 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1]
distribution group. Group—Incoming Call Distribution
Group—Group Settings
Feature Manual References
2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-out
Incoming Call Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Queue Monitor number, available only for (consisting of 0– References
extensions assigned as a 9, *, and #) 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1]
supervisor, used to monitor Group—Incoming Call Distribution
the status of an incoming Group—Group Settings—
call distribution group with Miscellaneous—Supervisor
the extension display. Extension Number
Feature Manual References
2.2.2.9 Supervisory Feature
Hot Line (Pickup Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Dial) Program number used to set/cancel (consisting of 0– References
Set / Cancel the Hot Line feature, or 9, *, and #) 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3]
programme the number to System—Timers & Counters—
be automatically dialled. Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial
—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start (s)
Feature Manual References
2.6.6 Hot Line
Absent Message Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Set / Cancel number used to set or (consisting of 0– 2.20.2 Absent Message
cancel the display of an 9, *, and #)
Absent Message.
BGM Set / Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Cancel number used to set or (consisting of 0– References
cancel the BGM heard 9, *, and #) 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2]
through the telephone System—Operator & BGM
speaker while on-hook.
Feature Manual References
2.30.1 Background Music (BGM)

340 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Remote Timed Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Reminder number used to set or (consisting of 0– 2.24.4 Timed Reminder
(Remote Wakeup cancel a Timed Reminder 9, *, and #)
Call) remotely (Wake-up Call).
Timed Reminder Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Set / Cancel number used to set or (consisting of 0– 2.24.4 Timed Reminder
cancel a Timed Reminder. 9, *, and #)
Printing Message Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
number used to select a (consisting of 0– References
Printing Message to be 9, *, and #) 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2]
output on SMDR. Feature—Hotel & Charge—Main
—SMDR for External Hotel
Application 2—Printing Message
1–8
Feature Manual References
2.22.2 Printing Message
Extension Dial Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Lock Set / Cancel number used to lock or (consisting of 0– 2.7.3 Extension Dial Lock
unlock an extension to 9, *, and #)
make certain trunk calls
and change the forwarding
destination, using the
Extension Dial Lock
feature.
Time Service Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
(Day / Lunch / number, available for (consisting of 0– References
Break / Night) manager extensions, used 9, *, and #) 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1]
Switch to change the time mode System—Class of Service—COS
manually. Settings—Manager—Time
Service Switch
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1]
System—Class of Service—COS
Settings—Manager—Manager
Feature Manual References
5.1.4 Time Service
Remote Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Extension Dial number, available for (consisting of 0– References
Lock Off manager extensions, used 9, *, and #) 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1]
to unlock other extensions System—Class of Service—COS
using the Extension Dial Settings—Manager—Manager
Lock feature.
Feature Manual References
2.7.3 Extension Dial Lock

PC Programming Manual 341

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Remote Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Extension Dial number, available for (consisting of 0– References
Lock On manager extensions, used 9, *, and #) 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1]
to lock other extensions System—Class of Service—COS
using the Extension Dial Settings—Manager—Manager
Lock feature.
Feature Manual References
2.7.3 Extension Dial Lock
Extension Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Feature Clear number used to reset (consisting of 0– 2.24.2 Extension Feature Clear
certain features of an 9, *, and #)
extension to the default
values.
Extension PIN Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
Set / Cancel number used to set a PIN (consisting of 0– 2.24.1 Extension Personal
for an extension. 9, *, and #) Identification Number (PIN)
Dial Information Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits Feature Manual References
(CTI) number used to send dial (consisting of 0– 2.26.1 Computer Telephony
information to the CTI 9, *, and #) Integration (CTI)
feature instead of the PBX.
Conference Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Group Call number used to make a (consisting of 0– References
Operation conference group call. 9, *, and #) 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3]
System—Timers & Counters—
Miscellaneous—Conference
Group Call—Ring Duration (s)
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1]
System—Class of Service—COS
Settings—Miscellaneous—
Conference Group Call Operation
11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9]
Group—Conference Group
Feature Manual References
2.15.1 Conference Group Call
Centralised BLF Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Monitor Cancel number used to cancel (consisting of 0– References
monitoring of an extension 9, *, and #) 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1]
using an NDSS button. Private Network—TIE Table
Feature Manual References
4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station
Selection (NDSS)

342 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Busy Out Cancel Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
number used to cancel the (consisting of 0– References
Busy Out status of an 9, *, and #) 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9]
analogue trunk. System—System Options—
Option 5—Busy Out—Busy Out
for Analogue CO
Feature Manual References
2.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out
Simplified Voice Specifies the feature Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Message Access number used to access the (consisting of 0– References
SVM feature to record, 9, *, and #) 12.1.8 PBX Configuration—[4-1-8]
listen to and delete Extension—Wired Extension—
messages. Simplified Voice Message
12.2.6 PBX Configuration—[4-2-6]
Extension—Portable Station—
Simplified Voice Message
Feature Manual References
2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice
Message (SVM)

Other PBX Extension

Other PBX extension numbers can be used to easily call extensions connected to PBXs at different
locations in a TIE line network. The leading numbers of all PBXs in the network that will be called should be
entered in this table. A maximum of 16 leading numbers can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
Dial Specifies the leading Max. 3 digits PC Programming Manual References
extension number of (consisting of 0–9, *, 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private
the other PBX. and #) Network—TIE Table—Leading Number
Feature Manual References
4.3.1 TIE Line Service

KX-T7710
The settings of the MESSAGE key and One-touch keys on the KX-T7710 can be programmed.

Note
• This tab is for programming extensions connected to Expansion Units. For information about setting
up Expansion Units, see 9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Expansion Unit1/
Expansion Unit2/Expansion Unit3.
• For further information about programming for KX-T7710 phones, refer to the 2.6.7 KX-T7710 One-
touch Dialling in the Feature Manual.

PC Programming Manual 343

10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial

Name Description Value Range Links

Dial Indicates the DTMF tone dial B: For MESSAGE Key
required by the PBX to recognise it A1: For One-touch Dial 01
and dial the pre-programmed Key
number for each key (reference A2: For One-touch Dial 02
only). Key
A3: For One-touch Dial 03
Key
A4: For One-touch Dial 04
Key
A5: For One-touch Dial 05
Key
A6: For One-touch Dial 06
Key
A7: For One-touch Dial 07
Key
A8: For One-touch Dial 08
Key
Message Specifies the feature number or Max. 32 digits (consisting of PC Programming
Key— telephone number dialled when the 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] Manual
Phone MESSAGE key on the KX-T7710 is [Secret], P [Pause], and F References
Number pressed. By default, this is set to [Flash])
10.6.1 PBX
the feature number used to call
Configuration—
back a caller who left a message
[2-6-1] System—
waiting indication, Message
Numbering Plan—
Waiting Set / Cancel / Call Back.
Main—Features—
This is available only when the
Message Waiting
position of the Mode switch lever on
Set / Cancel / Call
the KX-T7710 is set to "PBX".
Back
One-touch Specifies the number dialled when Max. 32 digits (consisting of
Dial 01–08 a one-touch key on the KX-T7710 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ]
—Phone is pressed. [Secret], P [Pause], and F
Number This is available only when the [Flash])
position of the Mode switch lever on
the KX-T7710 is set to "PBX".

10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—

Quick Dial
Quick Dialling numbers are used to call extensions or outside parties, or access certain features without
having to dial their full numbers. It is possible to register Quick Dialling numbers that overlap with other
registered numbers (refer to "Automatic Rerouting of VoIP Calls to Public Trunks" in the Feature Manual).
For more information on flexible numbering, see "5.5.7 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the Feature
Manual.

344 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature

Name Description Value Range Links

Use Quick Dial Specifies whether Quick Dialling On, Off Feature Manual
for CO can be used to make a trunk call References
rerouting during via an extension registered at 2.6.5 Quick Dialling
"Break" Mode. another site in a One-look 5.1.4 Time Service
network, when the Time Service
mode is Break mode.
Use quick dial Specifies whether Quick Dialling On, Off Feature Manual
for rerouting to can be used for rerouting to a References
public CO when public trunk when a TIE line is 2.6.5 Quick Dialling
TIE line does not operating.
not work.
Dial Specifies the Quick Dialling 1–4000: Max. 8 Feature Manual
number. digits (consisting of References
0–9, *, and #) 2.6.5 Quick Dialling
4.3.2 Voice over Internet
Protocol (VoIP) Network
5.5.7 Flexible Numbering/
Fixed Numbering
Phone Number Specifies the number to be Max. 32 digits Feature Manual
dialled when the corresponding (consisting of 0–9, References
Quick Dialling number is used. *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] 2.6.5 Quick Dialling
[Secret], P [Pause], 4.3.2 Voice over Internet
and F [Flash]) Protocol (VoIP) Network
5.5.7 Flexible Numbering/
Fixed Numbering

10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—

B/NA DND Call Feature
Feature numbers used to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features are
available while hearing a busy, DND, or ringback tone. Each feature must have a unique feature number.
For more information on flexible numbering, see "5.5.7 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the Feature
Manual.

PC Programming Manual 345

10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature

Value
Name Description Links
Range
BSS / Specifies the feature number 1 digit (0– PC Programming Manual
OHCA / used to notify a busy 9, *, or #) References
Whisper extension of a second call by 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
OHCA / DND Call Waiting, or call an Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
Override extension in DND mode. Settings—Option 2—Manual C. Waiting
for Extension Call
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—Extension
Settings—Option 2—Manual C. Waiting
for Extension Call
Feature Manual References
2.1.3.3 Call Waiting
2.3.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
2.10.4.2 Call Waiting Tone
2.10.4.4 Whisper OHCA
Executive Specifies the feature number 1 digit (0– PC Programming Manual
Busy used to interrupt an existing 9, *, or #) References
Override call to establish a three-party 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System
conference call. —Class of Service—COS Settings—
Executive—Executive Busy Override
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
Settings—Option 3—Executive Override
Deny
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—Extension
Settings—Option 3—Executive Override
Deny
Feature Manual References
2.10.2 Executive Busy Override
Alternate Specifies the feature number 1 digit (0– Feature Manual References
Calling - used to allow a caller to 9, *, or #) 2.5.3 Intercom Call
Ring / Voice change the called extension’s
preset call receiving method
to ring tone or voice.
Message Specifies the feature number 1 digit (0– Feature Manual References
Waiting Set used to leave a Message 9, *, or #) 2.20.1 Message Waiting
Waiting notification.

346 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Call Monitor Specifies the feature number 1 digit (0– PC Programming Manual
used to listen to a busy 9, *, or #) References
extension’s conversation. 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System
—Class of Service—COS Settings—
Executive—Call Monitor
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
Settings—Option 3—Executive Override
Deny
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—Extension
Settings—Option 3—Executive Override
Deny
Feature Manual References
2.10.3 Call Monitor
Automatic Specifies the feature number 1 digit (0– Feature Manual References
Callback used to reserve a busy line 9, *, or #) 2.10.1 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-
Busy and receive callback ringing on)
when the line becomes idle.
BSS / Specifies the feature number 1 digit (0– PC Programming Manual
OHCA / used to notify a busy 9, *, or #) References
Whisper extension of a second call by 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
OHCA / DND Call Waiting, or call an Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
Override-2 extension in DND mode. This Settings—Option 2—Manual C. Waiting
is the same setting as BSS / for Extension Call
OHCA / Whisper OHCA / 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
DND Override on this Extension—Portable Station—Extension
screen, and can be used to Settings—Option 2—Manual C. Waiting
provide two methods of for Extension Call
activating the specified
features. This can be useful, Feature Manual References
for example, if users prefer to 2.1.3.3 Call Waiting
use a separate feature 2.3.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
number to activate DND 2.10.4.2 Call Waiting Tone
Override. 2.10.4.4 Whisper OHCA

PC Programming Manual 347

10.7 PBX Configuration—[2-7] System—Class of Service

10.7 PBX Configuration—[2-7] System—Class of

Service
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—
COS Settings
Each extension, doorphone port, incoming call distribution group, and trunk group is assigned a Class of
Service (COS). Certain features can be programmed to behave differently depending on the COS. A
maximum of 64 COS levels can be programmed.

TRS
Restrictions to features related to making trunk calls can be programmed for each COS.
Name Description Value Range Links
COS Name Specifies the name Max. 20 characters Feature Manual References
of the COS. 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)
TRS Level Specifies the Toll 1: Allows all trunk PC Programming Manual References
—Day, Restriction (TRS)/ calls 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—
Lunch, Call Barring 2–6: Restricts trunk Week Table
Break, (Barring) level for calls according to the 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—
Night making trunk calls combination of the Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main—COS
in each time mode. Denied and 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—
Exception Code Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group
Tables Settings—Main—COS
7: Restricts all trunk 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
calls Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
Settings—Main—COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—Extension
Settings—Main—COS
13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional
Device—Doorphone—COS
15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—
Denied Code
15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—
Exception Code
Feature Manual References
2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring
(Barring)

348 PC Programming Manual

 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

TRS Level Specifies the TRS/ 1: Allows all trunk PC Programming Manual References
on Barring level for calls 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
Extension making trunk calls 2–6: Restricts trunk Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
Lock when an extension calls according to the Settings—Main—COS
is locked using the combination of the 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension Dial Lock Denied and Extension—Portable Station—Extension
feature. Exception Code Settings—Main—COS
Tables 15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—
7: Restricts all trunk Denied Code
calls 15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—
Exception Code
Feature Manual References
2.7.3 Extension Dial Lock
TRS Level Specifies the TRS/ 1: Allows all trunk PC Programming Manual References
for System Barring level for calls 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
Speed making a trunk call 2–6: Restricts trunk Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
Dialling using System calls according to the Settings—Main—COS
Speed Dialling combination of the 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
numbers, which Denied and Extension—Portable Station—Extension
overrides the TRS/ Exception Code Settings—Main—COS
Barring set for the Tables 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—
current time mode. 7: Restricts all trunk System Speed Dial
calls 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—
Miscellaneous—TRS Override by System
Speed Dialling
Feature Manual References
2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring
(Barring)

CO & SMDR
Value
Name Description Links
Range
COS Name Specifies the name of the Max. 20 Feature Manual References
COS. characters 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)

PC Programming Manual 349

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Extension- Enables the extension- Disable, PC Programming Manual References
CO Line Call to-trunk call duration Enable 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—
Duration feature. The maximum System Options—Option 2—Extension - CO
Limit call duration can be set Call Limitation—For Incoming Call
using Extension-CO 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—
Duration Time (*60s) on Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main—COS
11.1.1 PBX 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension
Configuration—[3-1-1] —Wired Extension—Extension Settings—
Group—Trunk Group— Main—COS
TRG Settings. 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension
—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main
—COS
Feature Manual References
2.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation
Transfer to Enables the transferring Disable, PC Programming Manual References
CO of calls to trunks. Enable 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension
—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—
Main—COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension
—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main
—COS
Feature Manual References
2.12.1 Call Transfer
Call Forward Enables the forwarding Disable, PC Programming Manual References
to CO of calls to trunks. Enable 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension
—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—
Main—COS
12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension
—Wired Extension—FWD/DND
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension
—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main
—COS
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension
—Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
Account Specifies whether the Option, PC Programming Manual References
Code Mode entry of an account code Forced 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension
is optional or mandatory —Wired Extension—Extension Settings—
when making a trunk call. Main—COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension
—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main
—COS
Feature Manual References
2.5.4.3 Account Code Entry

350 PC Programming Manual

 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Value
Name Description Links
Range
CF (MSN) Enables forwarding of Disable, Feature Manual References
ISDN calls to an outside Enable 4.1.2.4 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-
party using the ISDN MP)
service of the telephone 4.1.2.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)
company, instead of the
PBX, on an MSN basis.
Outgoing CO Enables the automatic Disable, PC Programming Manual References
Call Printout recording of information Enable 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension
(SMDR) about outgoing trunk —Wired Extension—Extension Settings—
calls on SMDR. Main—COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension
—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main
—COS
19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance
—Main
Feature Manual References
2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording
(SMDR)

Assistant
Name Description Value Range Links
COS Name Specifies the name Max. 20 characters Feature Manual References
of the COS. 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)
Call Pickup Enables using a DSS Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual
by DSS button to pick up a References
call to a specified 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
extension. Extension—Wired Extension—
Extension Settings—Main—COS
12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4]
Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible
Button
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—
Extension Settings—Main—COS
12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3]
Extension—Portable Station—Flexible
Button
Feature Manual References
2.4.3 Call Pickup

PC Programming Manual 351

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

DND Enables making a Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual
Override call to an extension References
in DND mode by 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
entering the feature Extension—Wired Extension—
number. Extension Settings—Main—COS
12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2]
Extension—Wired Extension—
FWD/DND
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—
Extension Settings—Main—COS
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2]
Extension—Portable Station—
FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
2.3.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
OHCA / Enables using Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual
Whisper OHCA/Whisper References
OHCA OHCA as a method 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
of second call Extension—Wired Extension—
notification by Extension Settings—Main—COS
entering the feature 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
number. Extension—Portable Station—
Extension Settings—Main—COS
Feature Manual References
2.10.4 Second Call Notification to Busy
Extension
2.10.4.4 Whisper OHCA
Transfer to Enables a transferred Disable: The call is not PC Programming Manual
busy call to be queued transferred. (If the References
Extension when the transfer transfer destination has 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System
w/o BSS destination is busy. enabled the call waiting —Timers & Counters—Recall—
Operation notification feature, it is Transfer Recall (s)
possible to inform the
destination about the Feature Manual References
call transfer.) 2.12.1 Call Transfer
Enable: The transferred
call is queued for the
time period specified in
Recall—Transfer
Recall (s) in 10.3 PBX
Configuration—[2-3]
System—Timers &
Counters.

352 PC Programming Manual

 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Automatic Enables a caller to Disable: Even if the Feature Manual References
Answer have calls destination has set 2.4.4 Hands-free Answerback
(Caller) automatically Hands-free
answered when the Answerback, the call
destination has set will not be automatically
Hands-free answered.
Answerback. Enable: The call will be
automatically answered.

Executive
Value
Name Description Links
Range
COS Name Specifies the name Max. 20 Feature Manual References
of the COS. characters 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)
Call Monitor Enables listening to a Disable, PC Programming Manual References
busy extension’s Enable 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—
conversation. Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—
Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
COS
Feature Manual References
2.10.3 Call Monitor
Executive Enables interrupting Disable, PC Programming Manual References
Busy an existing call to Enable 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—
Override establish a three- Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
party conference call. COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—
Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
COS
Feature Manual References
2.10.2 Executive Busy Override
Executive Enables preventing Disable, PC Programming Manual References
Busy other extensions Enable 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—
Override from interrupting Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
Deny calls. COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—
Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
COS
Feature Manual References
5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)

PC Programming Manual 353

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Manager
Name Description Value Range Links
COS Name Specifies the Max. 20 characters Feature Manual References
name of the COS. 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)
Group Forward Enables setting Disable: An extension PC Programming Manual
Set call forwarding for cannot set call References
calls to an forwarding for any 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1]
incoming call group. Group—Incoming Call Distribution
distribution group. Enable-All: An Group—Group Settings—Member List
extension can set call 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
forwarding for all Extension—Wired Extension—
groups. Extension Settings—Main—COS
Enable-Group: An 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
extension can only set Extension—Portable Station—
call forwarding for the Extension Settings—Main—COS
group to which the
extension belongs. Feature Manual References
2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
PT Specifies the level Disable: A PT user PC Programming Manual
Programming of authorisation for cannot perform any References
Mode Level performing PT programming. 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
programming. PROG Only: A PT user Extension—Wired Extension—
can perform only Extension Settings—Main—COS
personal programming. 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
PROG **/*#: A PT user Extension—Portable Station—
can perform Extension Settings—Main—COS
Administrator level and
User level Feature Manual References
programming. 5.5.3 PT Programming
Manager Specifies the Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual
authorisation to References
use manager 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
features. Extension—Wired Extension—
Extension Settings—Main—COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—
Extension Settings—Main—COS
Feature Manual References
5.1.6 Manager Features

354 PC Programming Manual

 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Time Service Enables manual Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual
Switch switching of time References
modes. 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System
—Week Table
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
Extension—Wired Extension—
Extension Settings—Main—COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—
Extension Settings—Main—COS
Feature Manual References
5.1.4 Time Service

PDN/SDN
An SDN button allows a PT user to see the current status of the corresponding PDN extension, and to pick
up or transfer calls to that extension easily. The settings here control how SDN buttons operate for
extensions at each COS level.
Name Description Value Range Links
COS Name Specifies the name of the Max. 20 Feature Manual References
COS. characters 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)
SDN Key Mode Selects what happens when an Enhanced DSS: Feature Manual References
extension user presses an The registered 2.9.1 Primary Directory Number
SDN button while on hook. (owner) (PDN)/Secondary Directory
extension is Number (SDN) Extension
called.
Standard SDN:
A dial tone is
heard.
Making call by Selects whether an extension Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual
COS of SDN that uses an SDN button to References
key’s owner make calls is given the COS of 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
the SDN button’s registered [2-7-1] System—Class of Service
(owner) extension. —COS Settings—PDN/SDN—
This setting is only available COS Name
when SDN Key Mode above is
set to "Standard SDN". Feature Manual References
2.9.1 Primary Directory Number
(PDN)/Secondary Directory
Number (SDN) Extension
SDN Key Selects whether PT users can Disable, Enable Feature Manual References
Assignment by create SDN buttons on their 2.9.1 Primary Directory Number
PT Program own extensions using PT (PDN)/Secondary Directory
programming. Number (SDN) Extension

PC Programming Manual 355

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Optional Device & Other Extensions

Value
Name Description Links
Range
COS Name Specifies the name Max. 20 Feature Manual References
of the COS. characters 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)
Door Unlock Enables using the Disable, PC Programming Manual References
door opener feature. Enable 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—
Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—
Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
COS
Feature Manual References
2.18.2 Door Open
External Enables access to Disable, PC Programming Manual References
Relay Access external relays. Enable 13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device
—External Relay
Feature Manual References
2.18.4 External Relay Control
Accept the Enables reception of Disable, PC Programming Manual References
Call from calls from DISA. Enable 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—
DISA Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—
Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
COS
13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional
Device—Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Manual References
2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Remote Allows the Walking Allow, Deny PC Programming Manual References
Operation by COS feature to be 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—
Other used from a remote Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
Extension location (inside the COS
PBX, or outside the 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—
PBX using DISA). Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
COS
Feature Manual References
2.7.5 Walking COS
Accept Allows Wireless XDP Allow, Deny PC Programming Manual References
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode to be 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—
Parallel Mode set by a PS. Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
Set by PS COS
Feature Manual References
5.2.4.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode

356 PC Programming Manual

 10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—External Call Block

CA
Name Description Value Range Links
COS Specifies the name of the Max. 20 Feature Manual References
Name COS. characters 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)
CA Chat Enables the chat feature Disable, PC Programming Manual References
when using Enable 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—
Communication Assistant Class of Service—COS Settings—CA—CA
(CA) Client. ICD Group Log Out
Feature Manual References
2.26.2 CA (Communication Assistant)
CA ICD Enables logging out of ICD Disable, PC Programming Manual References
Group groups when using Enable 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—
Log Out Communication Assistant Class of Service—COS Settings—CA—CA
(CA) Client. Chat
Feature Manual References
2.26.2 CA (Communication Assistant)

Miscellaneous
Name Description Value Range Links
COS Name Specifies the name Max. 20 Feature Manual References
of the COS. characters 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)
Conference Enables making Disable, PC Programming Manual References
Group Call conference group Enable 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—
Operation calls. Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—
Conference Group Call—Ring Duration (s)
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—
Numbering Plan—Main—Features—
Conference Group Call Operation
11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—
Conference Group
Feature Manual References
2.15.1 Conference Group Call
Accept a collect Enables accepting Disable,
call (for Brazil) collect calls. Enable

10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—

External Call Block
Each COS can have different trunk groups available for making trunk calls, depending on the time mode
(day/lunch/break/night). Select the desired time mode from the list.

PC Programming Manual 357

10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3] System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Outgoing Specifies the Block PC Programming Manual References
Trunk Group available trunk (blue), Non 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table
1–64 groups. Block 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired
Extension—Extension Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—
Portable Station—Extension Settings
18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—
CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
2.5.5.3 Trunk Access

10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3] System—Class of Service—

Internal Call Block
Internal Call Block determines the restrictions placed on making intercom calls. The extensions, incoming
call distribution groups, and doorphones belonging to a certain COS can be programmed to not receive
intercom calls from those belonging to a certain COS.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
COS Number of Specifies the Block PC Programming Manual References
the Extension combinations of (blue), 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—
Which Receive COS levels for Non Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
the Call from which intercom Block —Main—COS
Other Extension calls are blocked. 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—
1–64 Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—
Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
COS
13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—
Doorphone—COS
Feature Manual References
2.1.2.2 Internal Call Block

358 PC Programming Manual

 10.8 PBX Configuration—[2-8] System—Ring Tone Patterns

10.8 PBX Configuration—[2-8] System—Ring Tone

Patterns
10.8.1 PBX Configuration—[2-8-1] System—Ring Tone Patterns
—Call from CO
Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming trunk calls depending on the trunk group that the
calls are received on. A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table
can be selected for use by an extension.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Ring Tone Specifies the ring Single, PC Programming Manual References
Pattern tone pattern for Double, 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—
Plan 1–8 incoming trunk Triple, CO Line Settings—Trunk Group Number
calls. Option1, 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired
Option2 Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—Ring
Pattern Table
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—
Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—Ring
Pattern Table
Feature Manual References
2.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection

10.8.2 PBX Configuration—[2-8-2] System—Ring Tone Patterns

—Call from DOORPHONE
Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming doorphone calls depending on the doorphone port
that the calls originate from. A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any
pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.
Name Description Value Range Links
Ring Tone Specifies the ring Single, PC Programming Manual References
Pattern tone pattern for Double, 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired
Plan 1–8 incoming Triple, S- Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—Ring
doorphone calls. Double, Pattern Table
Option 1, 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—
Option 2 Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—
Ring Pattern Table
13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—
Doorphone
Feature Manual References
2.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
2.18.1 Doorphone Call

PC Programming Manual 359

10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others

10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns

—Call from Others
Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming intercom calls and ringing triggered by certain PBX
features (Timed Reminder, Call Back, and Live Call Screening). A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables
can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.
For more information on ring tone patterns, see "2.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection" in the Feature Manual.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension—Ring Specifies the ring Single, PC Programming Manual References
Tone Pattern tone pattern for Double, 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension
Plan 1–8 incoming intercom Triple, Option —Wired Extension—Extension Settings—
calls. 1, Option 2 Option 1—Ring Pattern Table
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension
—Portable Station—Extension Settings—
Option 1—Ring Pattern Table
Timed Reminder Specifies the ring Single, PC Programming Manual References
—Ring Tone tone pattern for Double, 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension
Pattern Plan 1–8 Timed Reminder Triple, Option —Wired Extension—Extension Settings—
alarms. 1, Option 2 Option 1—Ring Pattern Table
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension
—Portable Station—Extension Settings—
Option 1—Ring Pattern Table
Call Back—Ring Specifies the ring Single, PC Programming Manual References
Tone Pattern tone pattern for Double, 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension
Plan 1–8 callback ringing by Triple, S- —Wired Extension—Extension Settings—
Automatic Callback Double, Option 1—Ring Pattern Table
Busy. Option 1, 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension
Option 2 —Portable Station—Extension Settings—
Option 1—Ring Pattern Table
Live Call Specifies the ring Single, PC Programming Manual References
Screening—Ring tone pattern for Double, 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension
Tone Pattern LCS warning tones. Triple, Option —Wired Extension—Extension Settings—
Plan 1–8 1, Option 2 Option 1—Ring Pattern Table
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension
—Portable Station—Extension Settings—
Option 1—Ring Pattern Table
External Sensor Specifies the ring Single, PC Programming Manual References
—Ring Tone tone pattern for Double, 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension
Pattern Plan 1–8 calls from an Triple, Option —Wired Extension—Extension Settings—
external sensor. 1, Option 2 Option 1—Ring Pattern Table
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension
—Portable Station—Extension Settings—
Option 1—Ring Pattern Table

360 PC Programming Manual

 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System

Options
Various system settings can be programmed.

Option 1
Name Description Value Range Links
PT LCD—Date Selects the order that the Date-Month, Month-
Display month and date are shown Date
on the displays of
extensions.
PT LCD—Time Selects the time format 12H, 24H Feature Manual
Display shown on the displays of References
extensions. The time display 2.24.4 Timed Reminder
format assigned here applies
when setting the Timed
Reminder feature.
PT LCD— Selects whether passwords Hide, Display Feature Manual
Password / PIN and PINs (Personal References
Display Identification Number) are 2.24.1 Extension Personal
hidden or shown on the Identification Number (PIN)
displays of extensions while
being entered.
PT Fwd / DND Selects the light pattern of On (Solid): Red on PC Programming
—Fwd LED the FWD/DND button while Flash: Slow red Manual References
the FWD feature is activated. flashing 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—
[4-1-2] Extension—Wired
Extension—FWD/DND
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—
[4-2-2] Extension—Portable
Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual
References
2.3.1 Call Forwarding
(FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)
—SUMMARY
2.21.3 LED Indication

PC Programming Manual 361

10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Name Description Value Range Links

PT Fwd / DND Selects the light pattern of On (Solid): Red on PC Programming
—DND LED the FWD/DND button while Flash: Slow red Manual References
the DND feature is activated. flashing 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—
[4-1-2] Extension—Wired
Extension—FWD/DND
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—
[4-2-2] Extension—Portable
Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual
References
2.3.1 Call Forwarding
(FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)
—SUMMARY
2.21.3 LED Indication
PT Fwd / DND Selects the function of the FWD/DND Setting PC Programming
—Fwd/DND key FWD/DND button (fixed Mode: Enter Manual References
mode when Idle button) when it is pressed in programming mode 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—
idle status. (A FWD/DND for the FWD/DND [4-1-2] Extension—Wired
button customised on a setting. Extension—FWD/DND
flexible button is always in FWD/DND Cycle 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—
FWD/DND Cycle Switch Switch: Switch the [4-2-2] Extension—Portable
mode, and the mode cannot FWD on/DND on/Off Station—FWD/DND
be changed.) mode instead of
entering the Feature Manual
programming mode References
for the FWD/DND 2.3.1 Call Forwarding
setting. (When there (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)
are separate —SUMMARY
FWD/DND settings
for calls from trunks
and calls from
extensions, mode
switching cannot be
performed.)
PT Fwd / DND Specifies whether Do Not Page, Page PC Programming
—Paging to extensions can receive Manual References
DND Extension paging when in DND mode. 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—
[4-1-2] Extension—Wired
Extension—FWD/DND
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—
[4-2-2] Extension—Portable
Station—FWD/DND
11.4 PBX Configuration—
[3-4] Group—Paging Group
Feature Manual
References
2.17.1 Paging

362 PC Programming Manual

 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Name Description Value Range Links

PT Fwd / DND Specifies whether an Idle, Busy PC Programming
—Extension extension is shown as idle or Manual References
Status of Mobile busy when it forwards a call 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—
Integration to a trunk on no answer. [4-1-2] Extension—Wired
(FWD NA to Extension—FWD/DND
CO) 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—
[4-2-2] Extension—Portable
Station—FWD/DND
Feature Manual
References
2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
PT Operation— Enables the use of Off-Hook Disable: The PT Feature Manual
Off Hook Monitor with D-PTs and user’s voice is sent References
Monitor IP-PTs. through the handsfree 2.11.2 Off-hook Monitor
microphone. The
other party’s voice is
heard through the
hands-free speaker.
Enable: The PT
user’s voice is sent
through the handset
microphone. The
other party’s voice is
heard through both
the hands-free
speaker and the
handset.
PT Operation— Selects the function of the S- Enable: Pressing the Feature Manual
Privacy Release CO button during a trunk S-CO button activates References
by SCO key call. the Privacy Release 2.14.3 Privacy Release
feature
Disable: Pressing the
S-CO button switches
the information shown
on the PT display.
PT Operation— Specifies whether calls in Enable, Disable Feature Manual
One-touch Busy progress can be joined References
Override by (Executive Busy Override) 2.10.2 Executive Busy
SCO key simply by pressing the S-CO Override
button.
PT Operation— Selects the speed at which Normal, High Speed
JOG Dial Speed items scroll on the display
when the Jog Dial is used.
PT Operation— Specifies whether incoming Disable, Enable Feature Manual
PT Ring Off call ringing can be turned off References
Setting at individual extensions. If 2.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern
disabled, users cannot Selection
prevent incoming calls from
ringing.

PC Programming Manual 363

10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Name Description Value Range Links

PT Operation— Specifies the number of No Ring, 1 Ring, 2 Feature Manual
Automatic times a PT in Hands-free Rings, 3 Rings References
Answer for Call Answerback mode will ring 2.4.4 Hands-free
from CO after before a conversation is Answerback
established automatically
when it receives a call from a
trunk.
PT Operation— Selects whether calls are Disable (Disconnect), PC Programming
Automatic Hold disconnected or held when Enable Manual References
by ICM / CO / an INTERCOM, PDN, CO, or 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—
ICD Group Key ICD Group button is pressed [4-1-4] Extension—Wired
while having a conversation. Extension—Flexible Button
12.2.3 PBX Configuration—
[4-2-3] Extension—Portable
Station—Flexible Button
Feature Manual
References
2.13.1 Call Hold
PT Operation— Selects which extensions Hold: Any extension Feature Manual
Hold key mode can retrieve a held call or a can retrieve a held References
call that is transferred by Call call. 2.13.1 Call Hold
Transfer without Exclusive Hold: Only
Announcement feature. the holding extension
can retrieve a held
call.

Option 2
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Clear Specifies whether the Call Clear, Do not Feature Manual
—Call Waiting Waiting setting is cleared clear References
when Extension Feature Clear 2.24.2 Extension Feature Clear
is performed.
Extension Clear Specifies whether the Clear, Do not Feature Manual
—Fwd/DND FWD/DND setting is cleared clear References
when Extension Feature Clear 2.24.2 Extension Feature Clear
is performed.
Extension Clear Specifies whether the Hot Clear, Do not Feature Manual
—Hot Line (Pick- Line setting is cleared when clear References
up Dial) Extension Feature Clear is 2.24.2 Extension Feature Clear
performed.
CODEC— Selects the codec type for A-Law, Mu-Law
System CODEC PSs.
CODEC— Selects the codec type for A-Law, Mu-Law
Network CODEC ISDN lines.

364 PC Programming Manual

 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Name Description Value Range Links

CODEC—Priority Specifies whether the priority Enable, Disable
Notification from notification from the SIP
SIP Network (for network is used in place of the
Incoming Call) PBX’s codec priority for SIP
trunks.
ISDN en Bloc Specifies whether to Enable, Disable PC Programming Manual
Dial—[#] as End automatically send "#" as an References
of Dial for en Bloc end code when dialling to an 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
mode ISDN line; if used as the end Configuration—Slot—Port
code, "#" will not be dialled Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO
out as part of a number even —ISDN Outgoing Call Type
when the "#" key is pressed. 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Port
Property - PRI Port—CO
Setting—ISDN Outgoing Call
Type
Feature Manual
References
4.1.2.1 Integrated Services
Digital Network (ISDN)—
SUMMARY
Redial— Selects whether Automatic Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual
Automatic Redial Redial to an ISDN line is References
when No Answer performed when the called 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3]
(ISDN) party does not answer within System—Timers & Counters—
a pre-programmed time Automatic Redial—Redial Call
period. Ring Duration (x10s)
Feature Manual
References
2.6.3 Last Number Redial
Redial— Selects whether Automatic Enable, Disable PC Programming Manual
Automatic Redial Redial to an analogue trunk is References
for Analogue CO performed when the called 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3]
party does not answer within System—Timers & Counters—
a pre-programmed time Automatic Redial—Redial Call
period. Ring Duration (x10s)
Feature Manual
References
2.6.3 Last Number Redial
Redial—Save Specifies whether any digits Enable, Disable Feature Manual
Dial After dialled after the called party References
Connection to answers (for example, to 2.6.3 Last Number Redial
Redial Memory access a specific extension
within another company) are
also saved as part of the
redial number.

PC Programming Manual 365

10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Name Description Value Range Links

Redial—Call Log Enables display of the Enable, Disable Feature Manual
by Redial key Outgoing Call Log on a References
display PT by pressing the 2.6.3 Last Number Redial
REDIAL button while on hook.
Extension - CO Selects whether the time limit Enable, Disable PC Programming Manual
Call Limitation— for extension-to-trunk calls References
For Incoming Call applies to outgoing calls only 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
or for both outgoing and [2-7-1] System—Class of
incoming calls. COS Service—COS Settings—CO &
determines the use of this SMDR—Extension-CO Line
feature, and the length of the Call Duration Limit
time limit can be assigned on 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—
a trunk group basis. [3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—
TRG Settings—Main—
Extension-CO Duration Time
(*60s)
Feature Manual
References
2.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation
CO - CO Call Selects whether to allow a call Enable: The call Feature Manual
Limitation—After between 2 outside will be References
Conference destinations to continue after disconnected. 2.14.2 Conference
the originator of the Disable: The call 4.3.5 QSIG Enhanced Features
conference has left the will continue.
conference.
Applying logical Selects whether to use the Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual
partitioning logical partitioning feature. References
7.3.5 Utility—Log—Call Control
Log
9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—System
Property—Site—Main—Area
ID for logical partition

Option 3
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Confirmation Tone— Enables the PBX to send Disable, Feature Manual
Tone 1 : Called by Confirmation Tone 1. Confirmation Enable References
Voice Tone 1 is heard from a PT when it 2.18.1 Doorphone Call
receives a call in voice-calling mode. 2.25.2 Confirmation Tone
Confirmation Tone— Enables the PBX to send Disable, Feature Manual
Tone 2 : Paged / Confirmation Tone 2. Confirmation Enable References
Automatic Answer Tone 2 is heard from a PT when it 2.4.4 Hands-free
receives a call in Hands-free Answerback
Answerback mode, or paging. 2.17.1 Paging
2.25.2 Confirmation Tone

366 PC Programming Manual

 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Confirmation Tone— Enables the PBX to send Disable, Feature Manual
Tone 3-1 : Start Confirmation Tone 3-1. Confirmation Enable References
Talking after Making Tone 3-1 is heard from an extension 2.25.2 Confirmation Tone
Call / Call from when, for example, it pages another
DOORPHONE extension, or from a doorphone when
the doorphone button is pressed.
Confirmation Tone— Enables the PBX to send Disable, Feature Manual
Tone 3-2 : Start Confirmation Tone 3-2. Confirmation Enable References
Talking after Tone 3-2 is heard from an extension 2.25.2 Confirmation Tone
Answering Call when answering a call by, for
example, the Call Pickup feature.
Confirmation Tone— Enables the PBX to send Disable, Feature Manual
Tone 4-1 : Start Confirmation Tone 4-1. Confirmation Enable References
Conference Tone 4-1 is heard from an extension 2.14.2 Conference
when a new party joins a conference 2.25.2 Confirmation Tone
call.
Confirmation Tone— Enables the PBX to send Disable, Feature Manual
Tone 4-2 : Finish Confirmation Tone 4-2. Confirmation Enable References
Conference Tone 4-2 is heard from an extension 2.14.2 Conference
when a party leaves a conference 2.25.2 Confirmation Tone
call.
Confirmation Tone— Enables the PBX to send Disable, Feature Manual
Tone 5 : Hold Confirmation Tone 5. Confirmation Enable References
Tone 5 is heard from an extension 2.25.2 Confirmation Tone
when it holds a call.
Dial Tone—Distinctive Enables the PBX to send dial tones Disable, Feature Manual
Dial Tone at different frequencies depending on Enable References
the setting of the extension. 2.25.1 Dial Tone
Dial Tone—Dial Tone Selects the dial tone the PBX sends Type A, Feature Manual
for Extension to extensions to inform about the Type B References
features activated on them. 2.25.1 Dial Tone

PC Programming Manual 367

10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Dial Tone—Dial Tone Selects the dial tone the PBX Type A, PC Programming
for ARS (instead of the network) sends to the Type B Manual References
caller when a call is made using the 9.26 PBX Configuration—
ARS feature, or ISDN En Bloc [1-1] Configuration—Slot
dialling. —Port Property - BRI Port
9.27 PBX Configuration—
[1-1] Configuration—Slot
—Port Property - PRI Port
16.1 PBX Configuration—
[8-1] ARS—System
Setting
Feature Manual
References
2.8.1 Automatic Route
Selection (ARS)
2.25.1 Dial Tone
Echo Cancel— Enables the use of echo cancelling Disable, Feature Manual
Conference for conference calls. Enable References
2.14.2 Conference
Echo Cancel—CO-to- Enables the use of echo cancelling Disable,
CO for trunk-to-trunk calls. Enable
Echo Cancel— Enables the use of echo cancelling Disable,
Extension to Analogue for extension-to-analogue trunk calls. Enable
Line
Echo Cancel— Enables the use of echo cancelling Disable,
Extension to Digital for extension-to-ISDN line calls. Enable
Line If set to "Enable", echo cancelling is
used for extension-to-ISDN line calls.
If set to "Disable", echo cancelling is
not used for extension-to-ISDN line
calls.

Option 4
Name Description Value Range Links
DSS Key—DSS Enables the use of a DSS button On or Flash, Off Feature Manual
key mode for to pick up an incoming call to References
Incoming Call another extension or an ICD 2.4.3 Call Pickup
group. 2.21.3 LED Indication

368 PC Programming Manual

 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Name Description Value Range Links

DSS Key—Call Specifies whether a DSS button Disable: The DSS Feature Manual
Pick-up by DSS will light up or flash when a call button will light up References
key for Direct rings at the specified extension. when a call arrives, 2.4.3 Call Pickup
Incoming Call To enable this setting, DSS Key but pressing it will
—DSS key mode for Incoming not pick up the call.
Call on this screen must be set Enable: The DSS
to "ON or Flash". button will flash
when a call arrives,
and pressing it will
pick up the call.
DSS Key—Call Specifies whether a DSS button Disable: The DSS Feature Manual
Pick-up by DSS will light up or flash when a call button will light up References
key for ICD Group rings at the specified incoming when a call arrives, 2.4.3 Call Pickup
Call call distribution group. but pressing it will
To enable this setting, DSS Key not pick up the call.
—DSS key mode for Incoming Enable: The DSS
Call on this screen must be set button will flash
to "ON or Flash". when a call arrives,
and pressing it will
pick up the call.
DSS Key— Specifies whether pressing a Disable: The PBX Feature Manual
Automatic DSS or SDN button during an disconnects the References
Transfer for extension-to-extension call current call, and 2.12.1 Call Transfer
Extension Call disconnects the current call or calls the extension
places the call on consultation assigned to the
hold. DSS or SDN
button.
Enable: The PBX
places the current
call on consultation
hold.
DSS Key—Caller Specifies whether incoming Enable: Pressing Feature Manual
Information caller information is displayed the DSS button References
Display before after pressing the DSS button displays the caller’s 2.4.3 Call Pickup
Call Pick-up when a call is ringing at the information.
designated extension, instead of Disable: Pressing
answering the call. the DSS button
answers the call.
Private Network— Specifies the minimum length of 0–15 Feature Manual
Public Call Caller ID required for a call from References
through Private a private network to be 2.19.1 Caller ID
Network— considered as a call from a
Minimum Public public network.
Caller ID Digits

PC Programming Manual 369

10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Name Description Value Range Links

Private Network— Enables extensions at two PBXs Disable, Enable PC Programming
TIE Call by connected in a network to have Manual References
Extension the same leading number. For 17.1 PBX Configuration—
Numbering example, extension 101 is [9-1] Private Network—
registered at PBX 1, and TIE Table—Leading
extension 102 is registered at Number
PBX 2. Only the Extension
Number Method is supported. Feature Manual
If disabled, different leading References
numbers need to be assigned for 4.3.1 TIE Line Service
extensions at each PBX.
Send CLIP of CO Enables the transfer of related Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Caller—when call CLIP information when a party References
is transferred to on hold is transferred. When set 4.1.2.2 Calling/
CO (CLIP of Held to "Enable", the transfer Connected Line
Party) destination will receive the Identification
original caller’s CLIP information, Presentation (CLIP/
not the information of the COLP)
extension that performed the
transfer.
Send CLIP of CO Selects whether the CLIP Disable: The CLIP Feature Manual
Caller—when call number of the calling party or the number assigned to References
is forwarded to CLIP number of the forwarding the forwarding 2.2.2.3 Outside
CO extension or virtual PS is sent to extension or virtual Destinations in Incoming
the forwarding destination to PS is sent. Call Distribution Group
identify the origin of a trunk call. Enable: The CLIP 4.1.2.2 Calling/
number of the Connected Line
calling party is sent. Identification
Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)
4.3.6 Network ICD Group
Send CLIP of Selects whether the CLIP Disable: The CLIP Feature Manual
Extension Caller number of the calling extension number assigned to References
—when call is or the CLIP number of the the forwarding 2.2.2.3 Outside
forwarded to CO forwarding extension or virtual extension or virtual Destinations in Incoming
PS is sent to the forwarding PS is sent. Call Distribution Group
destination to identify the origin Enable: The CLIP 4.1.2.2 Calling/
of a call. number of the Connected Line
calling extension is Identification
sent. Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)
4.3.6 Network ICD Group

370 PC Programming Manual

 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Name Description Value Range Links

System Wireless Selects whether the PBX can set Disable, Enable PC Programming
—Out of Range the status of a PS to Out of Manual References
Registration Range if no signal is received 10.3 PBX Configuration—
from the PS for a preset length [2-3] System—Timers &
of time. This feature must be Counters—System
enabled to allow PS roaming. Wireless—PS Out of
Range Timer (s)
Feature Manual
References
4.3.6.1 PS Roaming by
Network ICD Group
System Wireless Selects whether call information Disable, Enable PC Programming
—SDN Delayed (such as Caller ID) is shown on Manual References
Ringing with LCD the display of a PDN extension 12.2.3 PBX Configuration
PS (i.e., a PS with one or more —[4-2-3] Extension—
PDN buttons) when a call is Portable Station—
received while delayed ringing is Flexible Button—
set. Parameter Selection (for
SDN)
Feature Manual
References
2.9.1 Primary Directory
Number (PDN)/
Secondary Directory
Number (SDN) Extension
Transfer— Enables transferred calls Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Automatic Answer (including direct extension calls) References
for Transferred to be automatically answered, 2.4.4 Hands-free
Call when using the Hands-free Answerback
Answerback feature.
Display If Automatic Walking COS is Extension Number, Feature Manual
Information from being used, this selects whether MEX CLIP References
Mobile Extension to show the CLI destination’s 2.16.1 Direct Inward
(MEX)—when extension number as the CLIP System Access (DISA)
using Automatic information (Extension Number),
Walking COS or the MEX CLIP information
(MEX CLIP) when the incoming
call is recognised as coming
from a MEX terminal.

Option 5
Name Description Value Range Links
SLT—SLT Hold Mode Selects how to hold a line and Mode 1, Mode 2, Feature
transfer a call with an SLT. For Mode 3, Mode 4 Manual
details of each mode, see "2.13.1 References
Call Hold" in the Feature Manual.
2.13.1 Call Hold

PC Programming Manual 371

10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Name Description Value Range Links

SLT—Message Specifies the Message Waiting Lamp 1–12 Feature
Waiting Lamp Pattern light pattern of SLTs. Manual
References
Note
2.20.1 Message
This setting is not applied to Waiting
Message Waiting by FSK.
Whisper OHCA—for Enables the use of Whisper OHCA to Disable, Enable Feature
SLT SLTs and IP-PTs Manual
References
2.10.4.4 Whisper
OHCA
Call Waiting— Selects whether Busy Station Disable, Enable Feature
Automatic Call Signalling (BSS) is automatically Manual
Waiting for Extension performed when an extension user References
Call calls a busy extension.
2.1.3.3 Call
Waiting
Busy Out—Busy Out Enables the PBX to automatically set Disable, Enable Feature
for Analogue CO a trunk to Busy Out status when a Manual
loop current is not detected, References
preventing that trunk from being
2.5.4.6 Trunk
used.
Busy Out
ISDN Voice Path Enables the voice path of an ISDN Disable, Enable
Connection—Connect line to connect even when an "Alert"
when "Alert" is sent signal is received from the telephone
from ISDN company.
PT Feature Access— Specifies the System Feature None, Call Back
No. 1–8 Access Menu (1–8) shown on the Cancel, Call Pickup
display of an extension. Direct, Call Pickup
Group,
DOORPHONE Call,
Door Open, Relay
On, External BGM,
Paging
ISDN Option—Fwd Specifies whether alert messages Mode1: Disable
from ISDN to ISDN are sent to the ISDN network. This Mode2: Enable
setting should be enabled for
networks that disconnect a call if an
alert message is not received.
ISDN Option—Calling Specifies whether the name of the Enable, Disable
Party Name calling party is displayed when
Presentation to PRI23 making a call to the ISDN network.
ISDN Option—Calling Specifies the sending format of the Display, Facility
Party Name Sending calling party name when making a
Format call to the ISDN network.

372 PC Programming Manual

 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Option 6 (CTI)
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Built-in Communication Specifies the length of time until the alive 0–60 s Feature Manual
Assistant—System check is retried when no response is References
status retry interval received, for First Party Call Control CTI 2.26.1 Computer
timer such as Communication Assistant (CA). Telephony
Integration (CTI)
Built-in Communication Specifies the number of times that the 0–10 Feature Manual
Assistant—System alive check is repeated for First Party Call References
status retry counter Control CTI such as Communication 2.26.1 Computer
Assistant (CA). When the alive check has Telephony
been attempted the programmed number Integration (CTI)
times without success, the PBX assumes
that the logical connection with the CTI
application software has been lost.
3rd Party CTI—System Specifies the length of time until the alive 0–60 s Feature Manual
status retry interval check is retried when no response is References
timer received, for Third Party Call Control CTI. 2.26.1 Computer
Telephony
Integration (CTI)
3rd Party CTI—System Specifies the number of times that the 0–10 Feature Manual
status retry counter alive check is repeated for Third Party Call References
Control CTI. When the alive check has 2.26.1 Computer
been attempted the programmed number Telephony
of times without success, the PBX Integration (CTI)
assumes that the logical connection with
the CTI application software has been lost.
3rd Party CTI—CDR Specifies the length of time until the alive 0–60 s Feature Manual
retry interval timer check of CDR is retried when no response References
is received, for Third Party Call Control 2.26.1 Computer
CTI. Telephony
Integration (CTI)
3rd Party CTI—CDR Specifies the number of times that the 0–10 Feature Manual
retry counter alive check of CDR is repeated for Third References
Party Call Control CTI. When the alive 2.26.1 Computer
check has been attempted the Telephony
programmed number times, the Integration (CTI)
association is released automatically.
CTI Make Call—SLT Specifies whether to ring an SLT when a Enable,
Ring call is made from CTI, instead of the SLT. Disable
CTI Hold—Forced Idle Selects whether to force an extension to Enable, Feature Manual
when Hold by become idle while having a call held on a Disable References
PDN/SDN Key PDN/SDN button. 2.9.1 Primary
Directory Number
(PDN)/Secondary
Directory Number
(SDN) Extension

PC Programming Manual 373

10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Option 7
Name Description Value Range Links
Incoming Call Log Specifies whether the following types of Enable (Not Feature Manual
—Busy/Intercept calls are recorded in the incoming call log Answered), References
(when Called Party of the original destination. Disable 2.19.2 Incoming Call
is Busy)
• Calls received when the extension is Log
busy.
• Calls rerouted via the Intercept Routing
—Busy feature.
If this setting is enabled, calls are
recorded as "Not Answered".
Incoming Call Log Specifies whether the following types of Enable (Not Feature Manual
—Fwd All/Fwd calls are recorded in the incoming call log Answered), References
Busy of the original destination. Disable 2.19.2 Incoming Call
• Calls rerouted via the FWD—All Calls Log
feature.
• Calls rerouted via the FWD—Busy
feature.
If this setting is enabled, calls are
recorded as "Not Answered".
Incoming Call Log Specifies how calls answered using the Answered, Not Feature Manual
—Call Pickup Call Pickup feature are recorded in the Answered References
incoming call log of the original 2.19.2 Incoming Call
destination. Log
Incoming Call Log Specifies whether extension/TIE calls are Enable, Feature Manual
—Extension / TIE recorded in the answering extension’s Disable References
Call incoming call log. 2.19.2 Incoming Call
Log
Outgoing Call Log Specifies whether extension/TIE calls are Enable, Feature Manual
—Extension Call recorded in the calling extension’s Disable References
outgoing call log. 2.6.3 Last Number
Redial

Option 8
Name Description Value Range Links
P2P Group—Priority Voice Specifies the order of priority Priority Voice 1: Feature Manual
1/Priority Voice 2/Priority of the codecs to use for P2P G.729, G.711, G. References
Voice 3 groups. 722 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer
Priority Voice 2/ (P2P) Connection
Priority Voice 3:
G.729, G.711, G.
722, None
P2P Group—Video Specifies the availability of Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Conference video conferencing for References
capable extensions within 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer
P2P groups. (P2P) Connection

374 PC Programming Manual

 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension - Trunk P2P—IP Specifies whether P2P Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Extension - SIP Trunk P2P connections are enabled References
between SIP trunks and IP 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer
extensions. (P2P) Connection
Conference Group— Specifies the maximum 8 Party, 32 Party Feature Manual
Maximum Number of number of participants that References
Speakers During a can speak during a 2.14.1 Conference
Conference Group Call Conference Group Call. Features—SUMMARY
2.14.2 Conference
Display extension name Specifies whether to enable Enable, Disable
on key (KX-NT) the respective features.
Use Message key as VM
key
LCD zoom display

Option 9
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Extension / Mailbox Enables the Enable, PC Programming Manual References
Setting—Mailbox synchronisation of Disable 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
Number Mailbox Number and Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
Synchronization with Extension Number Settings—Main—Extension Number
Extension Number settings. 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—Extension
Settings—Main—Extension Number
20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox
Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters
—Mailbox Number
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview
Extension / Mailbox Enables the Enable, PC Programming Manual References
Setting—Mailbox synchronisation of a Disable 8.1 Users—User Profiles
COS user’s Ext. COS 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
Synchronization with setting and Mailbox Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
Extension COS COS setting. Settings—Main—COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—Extension
Settings—Main—COS
20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox
Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters
—Class of Service (Mailbox)
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

PC Programming Manual 375

10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Walking Extension Selects whether to use Enable, PC Programming Manual References
Option—Home the Home position Disable 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System
position control control feature for —Numbering Plan—Main—Features—
Walking Extension or Walking Extension
Enhanced Walking
Extension. Feature Manual References
2.24.3 Walking Extension Features
2.24.3.1 Walking Extension
2.24.3.3 Walking Extension-Home position
control

376 PC Programming Manual

 10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings

10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—

Extension CID Settings
Various settings for extension Caller ID can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Caller ID Specifies the modulation V.23(ETSI), Feature Manual
Modulation Type frequency to be used when Bell202(Bellcore) References
sending Caller ID information to an 2.19.1 Caller ID
SLT.
Channel Seizure Specifies the number of seizure 10 × n (n=3–40) bits Feature Manual
Signal Bits bits to send when sending Caller References
ID information to an SLT. 2.19.1 Caller ID
Mark Signal Bits Specifies the number of mark bits 10 × n (n=3–40) bits Feature Manual
to send when sending Caller ID References
information to an SLT. 2.19.1 Caller ID
Channel Seizure Specifies the length of time that 64 × n (n=5–35) ms Feature Manual
Wait Time the PBX waits before starting to References
send the seizure signal following 2.19.1 Caller ID
the first ring when sending Caller
ID information to an SLT.
Caller ID Signal Specifies the type of signal FSK Feature Manual
Type modulation to be used when References
sending Caller ID information to an 2.19.1 Caller ID
SLT (reference only).
Additional Local Enables the PBX to automatically Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Trunk Access Code add a Trunk Access number to the References
to Extension Caller received telephone number when 2.19.1 Caller ID
ID sending the Caller ID number of
an incoming trunk call to an SLT.
Send Caller ID Enables the PBX to send the date Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Date & Time to and time of an incoming call when References
Extension sending Caller ID information to an 2.19.1 Caller ID
SLT.
Send Caller ID Enables the PBX to send the Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Name to Extension caller’s name when sending Caller References
ID information to an SLT. 2.19.1 Caller ID
Send Caller ID Enables the PBX to send a call Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Long Distance to qualifier (Long Distance) (if References
Extension received from the trunk) when 2.19.1 Caller ID
sending Caller ID information to an
SLT.
FSK Transmission Specifies the transmission level for -14 dB, -12 dB, -10 Feature Manual
Level (for MCSLC FSK signal modulation for MCSLC dB, -8 dB, -6 dB, -4 References
Card) cards. dB, -2 dB, 0 dB 2.19.1 Caller ID

PC Programming Manual 377

10.11 PBX Configuration—[2-11] System—Audio Gain

10.11 PBX Configuration—[2-11] System—Audio

Gain
10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—
Paging/MOH
Gain levels for the External Pager/External BGM ports can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
Paging—EPG 1-6 Specifies the paging -15.5–15.5 dB PC Programming Manual
(External Pager volume for External References
1-6) Pager port 1. 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—
Paging Group
Feature Manual References
2.17.1 Paging
Paging—Paging Specifies the volume -15 dB, -12 PC Programming Manual
Level from PT when paging is dB, -9 dB, -6 References
Speaker broadcast through the dB, -3 dB, 0 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—
speaker of a PT. dB, 3 dB, 6 Paging Group
dB
Feature Manual References
2.17.1 Paging
Internal MOH— Specifies the music -31.5–31.5 dB PC Programming Manual
MOH1-2 (Music volume for each internal References
On Hold 1-2) BGM (MOH1-2). 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System
—Operator & BGM
Feature Manual References
2.13.4 Music on Hold
2.30.1 Background Music (BGM)
External MOH— Specifies the music -31.5–31.5 dB PC Programming Manual
MOH 3–8 (Music volume for External References
on Hold 3–8) BGM port 1-6 (MOH 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System
3-8). —Operator & BGM
Feature Manual References
2.13.4 Music on Hold
2.30.1 Background Music (BGM)

10.11.2 PBX Configuration—[2-11-2] System—Audio Gain—Card

Gain levels can be programmed for each type of card.
Name Description Value Range Links
Up Gain (To PBX) Specifies the volume for audio signals from the selected -31.5–31.5 dB
type of card to the PBX.
Down Gain (From Specifies the volume for audio signals from the PBX to -15.5–15.5 dB
PBX) the selected type of card.

378 PC Programming Manual

 Section 11
PBX Configuration—[3] Group

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Group menu of the PBX Configuration Menu of
the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 379

11.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1] Group—Trunk Group

11.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1] Group—Trunk Group

11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG
Settings
Trunks can be organised into trunk groups. The settings of a trunk group are applied to all trunks in the
group. A maximum of 64 trunk groups can be programmed.
For more information on trunk groups, see "5.1.2 Group" in the Feature Manual.

Main
Name Description Value Range Links
Group Name Specifies the name of the trunk Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
group for programming characters References
reference. 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO
& Incoming Call—CO Line Settings
COS Specifies the COS of the trunk 1–64 PC Programming Manual
group, applied when making a References
call from a trunk to another 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1]
trunk with TIE Line Service. System—Class of Service—COS
If you wish to prevent such calls Settings
from being made, ensure that 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO
the COS specified here has a & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings
TRS level of "7" assigned for all
relevant time modes in Feature Manual References
10.7.1 PBX Configuration— 4.3.1 TIE Line Service
[2-7-1] System—Class of
Service—COS Settings.
Line Hunting Specifies the trunk hunting High -> Low, PC Programming Manual
Order sequence for the trunk group. Low -> High, References
The hunting sequence can be Rotation 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO
programmed to start from the & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings
lowest or highest numbered
trunks, or to rotate uniformly Feature Manual References
among all trunks. 2.5.5.3 Trunk Access
CO-CO Specifies the length of time that None, 1–60 PC Programming Manual
Duration Time a trunk-to-trunk call can be (× 60 s) References
(*60s) maintained before being 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO
disconnected. & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
2.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation

380 PC Programming Manual

 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension-CO Specifies the length of time that None, 1–60 PC Programming Manual
Duration Time an extension-to-trunk call can (× 60 s) References
(*60s) be maintained before being 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1]
disconnected. System—Class of Service—COS
Settings
10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9]
System—System Options
18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO
& Incoming Call—CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
2.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation
Caller ID Specifies the table to be used 1–4 PC Programming Manual
Modification for modifying caller information References
Table (telephone number). 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3]
Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID
Modification
18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO
& Incoming Call—CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
2.19.1 Caller ID
Dialling Plan Specifies the table to be used 1–4 PC Programming Manual
Table for en-bloc dialling. References
11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4]
Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan

Tone Detection
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Group Name Specifies the name of the Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
trunk group for characters References
programming reference. 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO &
Incoming Call—CO Line Settings
DISA Tone Enables the disconnection Disable, PC Programming Manual
Detection— of a DISA-originated trunk- Enable References
Silence to-trunk call by silence 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1]
detection. Optional Device—Voice Message—
DISA System
18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO &
Incoming Call—CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access
(DISA)

PC Programming Manual 381

11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Value
Name Description Links
Range
DISA Tone Enables the disconnection Disable, PC Programming Manual
Detection— of a DISA-originated trunk- Enable References
Continuous to-trunk call by continuous 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1]
signal detection. Optional Device—Voice Message—
DISA System
18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO &
Incoming Call—CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access
(DISA)
DISA Tone Enables the disconnection Disable, PC Programming Manual
Detection— of a DISA-originated trunk- Enable References
Cyclic to-trunk call by cyclic 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1]
signal detection. Optional Device—Voice Message—
DISA System
18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO &
Incoming Call—CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access
(DISA)
Simplified Voice Enables the disconnection Disable, PC Programming Manual
Message Tone of an SVM-originated Enable References
Detection— trunk-to-trunk call by None
Silence silence detection.
Feature Manual References
2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message
(SVM)
Simplified Voice Enables the disconnection Disable, PC Programming Manual
Message Tone of an SVM-originated Enable References
Detection— trunk-to-trunk call by None
Continuous continuous signal
detection. Feature Manual References
2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message
(SVM)
Simplified Voice Enables the disconnection Disable, PC Programming Manual
Message Tone of an SVM-originated Enable References
Detection— trunk-to-trunk call by cyclic None
Cyclic signal detection.
Feature Manual References
2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message
(SVM)

382 PC Programming Manual

 11.1.2 PBX Configuration—[3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority

Host PBX Access Code

Name Description Value Range Links
Group Specifies the name of Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
Name the trunk group for characters References
programming reference. 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO &
Incoming Call—CO Line Settings
Host PBX Specifies the feature Max. 10 digits PC Programming Manual
Access number used to access (consisting of 0– References
Code 1–10 a trunk from the host 9, *, and #) 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO &
PBX. Incoming Call—CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
2.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access
Code to the Telephone Company from a
Host PBX)

Collect Call Reject (for Brazil)

Name Description Value Range Links
Group Name Specifies the name of the trunk group Max. 20 PC Programming
for programming reference. characters Manual
References
18.1 PBX
Configuration—[10-1]
CO & Incoming Call—
CO Line Settings
Collect Call Enables the PBX to automatically reject Disable, Enable
Reject (for collect calls. This setting is only for
Brazil)—Mode users in Brazil.
Collect Call Selects the length of time that the PBX 500 ms, 1000 ms,
Reject (for waits before sending a flash signal to 1500 ms, 2000
Brazil)—Wait reject a collect call. This setting is only ms
Time for users in Brazil.
Collect Call Selects the length of the flash signal 1000 ms, 1500
Reject (for that the PBX sends to reject a collect ms, 2000 ms,
Brazil)—Flashing call. This setting is only for users in 2500 ms
Time Brazil.

11.1.2 PBX Configuration—[3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—Local

Access Priority
Trunk groups can be assigned a priority for Idle Line Access. When making a trunk call by Idle Line Access,
the PBX will search trunk groups for an idle trunk according to the priority assigned here.

PC Programming Manual 383

11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Trunk Specifies the trunk group assigned Trunk Group PC Programming Manual
Group No. to the corresponding priority level. No. 1–64 References
& Name Select the blank option to not 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO
assign a trunk group to the priority. & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
2.5.5.3 Trunk Access

11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller

ID Modification
The telephone numbers of incoming callers can be modified automatically according to pre-programmed
modification tables, and then recorded for calling back.

Leading Digits
After the caller’s number is modified by the Length of Digits Modification Tables or CLIP Modification Tables,
the PBX checks the leading digits of the modified number for an area code programmed in the Caller ID
Modification Table assigned to that trunk group. If it finds such a code, it removes digits and adds a number
to the modified number. If this number is stored as a System Speed Dialling number, the caller’s name can
be shown on a PT display and the call can be routed to a certain extension (CLI destination). A maximum of
4 Caller ID Modification Tables, each containing 10 local/international call data and 1 long distance code,
can be programmed. Each trunk group can select a table for use. Select the desired table from the
Modification Table list.
If the modified number does not contain an area code programmed here, the PBX applies the Long
Distance Code settings to the modified number.
Name Description Value Range Links
Area Code (for Specifies the leading Max. 6 digits Feature Manual References
Local / number (area code) to (consisting of 0– 2.19.1 Caller ID
International Call look for in the incoming 9, *, and #)
Data 1–10) caller’s number.
Removed Specifies the number of 0–9 PC Programming Manual
Number of Digits digits to be removed References
from the beginning of the 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1]
incoming caller’s Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings
number. —Caller ID Modification Table
14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1]
Feature—System Speed Dial
Feature Manual References
2.19.1 Caller ID

384 PC Programming Manual

 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification

Name Description Value Range Links

Added Number Specifies the number to Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
be added to the (consisting of 0– References
incoming caller’s number 9, *, and #) 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1]
in the place of the Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings
removed digits. —Caller ID Modification Table
14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1]
Feature—System Speed Dial
Feature Manual References
2.19.1 Caller ID

Length of Digits
The PBX adds a certain number of digits to the caller’s number depending on the length of digits, as
programmed in the Length of Digits Modification Tables assigned to the trunk group. This modification is
applied to incoming trunk calls routed through public networks when the type of network numbering plan is
Unknown or not specified.
A maximum of 4 Length of Digits Modification Tables can be programmed. Select the desired table from the
Modification Table list.
If the length of digits of an incoming trunk call is less than the Minimum Caller ID Digits (for National), the
caller’s number is not modified.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Minimum Caller Specifies the minimum number of digits 1–31 Feature Manual
ID Digits (for required in the caller’s number for it to be References
International) recognised as an international call. The value 2.19.1 Caller ID
specified here must be larger than Minimum
Caller ID Digits (for National).
Minimum Caller Specifies the minimum number of digits 0–30 Feature Manual
ID Digits (for required in the caller’s number for it to be References
National) recognised as a national call. The value 2.19.1 Caller ID
specified here must be smaller than
Minimum Caller ID Digits (for
International).
Added Number Specifies the number to be added to the Max. 8 Feature Manual
(for International) incoming telephone number when the total digits (0–9, References
number of digits exceeds Minimum Caller ID *, and #) 2.19.1 Caller ID
Digits (for International).
Added Number Specifies the number to be added to the Max. 8 Feature Manual
(for National) incoming telephone number when the total digits (0–9, References
number of digits exceeds Minimum Caller ID *, and #) 2.19.1 Caller ID
Digits (for National) but does not exceed
Minimum Caller ID Digits (for
International).

CLIP
When incoming caller information is sent through an ISDN line and the type of the network numbering plan
is International, National, or Subscriber, the caller’s number can be modified as programmed in the
Modification Tables assigned to the trunk group. The modified number will then be recorded, and it is used
for sending to the network as a CLIP number.

PC Programming Manual 385

11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan

A maximum of 4 CLIP Modification Tables can be programmed. Select the desired table from the
Modification Table list.
Name Description Value Range Links
Removed Specifies the number of 0–9 PC Programming Manual References
Number of leading digits to be 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—
Digits removed from the Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Calling Party
incoming caller’s Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
number for each type of 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—
network numbering Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Called Party
plan. Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
Feature Manual References
2.19.1 Caller ID
Added Specifies the number to Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual References
Number be added to the (consisting of 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—
incoming caller’s 0–9, *, and #) Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Calling Party
number in the place of Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
the removed digits for 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—
each type of network Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Called Party
numbering plan. Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
Feature Manual References
2.19.1 Caller ID

11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—

Dialling Plan
The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after an extension user completes dialling. The PBX can
recognise the end of dialling when the dialled telephone number starts with the programmed dial (32 digits)
and contains the programmed total number of digits.
When the PBX recognises the end of dialling to an analogue trunk, the PBX cancels the muting of the
caller’s voice sent to the analogue trunk immediately. If the PBX cannot recognise the end of dialling, the
PBX mutes the caller’s voice sent to an analogue trunk from the time at which the last digit is dialled until the
analogue trunk inter-digit timer expires.
4 tables can be programmed, each with a maximum of 50 dials (32 digits). Select the table to programme
from the Dialling Plan Table list.
To assign a set of dials (32 digits) automatically, click Auto Assign.

386 PC Programming Manual

 11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan

Dialling plan
Name Description Value Range Links
Dial (32 Specifies the dial (32 Max. 32 digits PC Programming Manual
digits) digits) to be regarded (consisting of 0–9, *, #, References
as the beginning of N [2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9], P 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3]
dialling. [0, 1], and X [0–9, *, System—Timers & Counters—Dial /
and #]) IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial—Analogue
CO First Digit (s)
10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3]
System—Timers & Counters—Dial /
IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial—Analogue
CO Inter-digit (s)
11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1]
Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings
—Main—Dialling Plan Table
Feature Manual References
4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital
Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
Removed Specifies the number 0–15 Feature Manual References
Number of of leading digits to be 4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital
Digits removed from the Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
number dialled by en-
bloc dialling.
Added Specifies the number Max. 32 digits Feature Manual References
Number to be added to the (consisting of 0–9, *, 4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital
number dialled by en- and #) Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
bloc dialling in the
place of the removed
digits.

Charge
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Apply charge Specifies whether to apply the call charge Feature Manual
calculation for calculation to incoming calls for trunk (incoming References
incoming calls calls from external numbers). If you want to 2.2.2.11 Automatic
apply, check the checkbox. Call Charge
Calculation
Leading Digits Displays the contents of Dial (32 digits) settings Feature Manual
before the first occurrence of "X" on the Dialling References
plan tab screen. 2.2.2.11 Automatic
Call Charge
Calculation

PC Programming Manual 387

11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Flat Charge Specifies the fixed rate that is charged first when 0– Feature Manual
a call starts. 9999999 References
The number of decimal places that can be 2.2.2.11 Automatic
specified here depends on the value specified in Call Charge
Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point in Calculation
14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel &
Charge.
Flat Charge Specifies the number of seconds that you can 1-9999 Feature Manual
Duration (s) call with the flat rate charged first that is specified References
in Flat Charge setting. 2.2.2.11 Automatic
Call Charge
Calculation
Unit Charge Specifies the rate of call charge that is charged 0– Feature Manual
when the Flat Charge Duration (s) passes after a 9999999 References
call is started. 2.2.2.11 Automatic
The number of decimal places that can be Call Charge
specified here depends on the value specified in Calculation
Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point in
14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel &
Charge.
Unit Charge Specifies the number of seconds that you can 1-9999 Feature Manual
Duration (s) call with the rate specified in Unit Charge setting. References
2.2.2.11 Automatic
Call Charge
Calculation

11.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling

Plan—Auto Assign
It is possible to assign a set of dials (32 digits) automatically.

388 PC Programming Manual

 11.1.5 PBX Configuration—[3-1-5] Group—Trunk Group—Charge Rate

Name Description Value Range Links

Select Auto Selects the set of preset dial (32 Type A: PC Programming
Assigning digits) values to assign to the active Manual References
• 1: N11
Table dialling plan table. When Type D is 11.1.4 PBX
selected, you will be prompted to • 2: NXX XXXX
Configuration—[3-1-4]
enter a 3-digit area code, and 7 • 3: 1NXX NXX XXXX Group—Trunk Group—
"X"s, in cells 1 through 47 of the Dialling Plan
dialling plan table. • 4–50: Not stored
Type B:
• 1: N11
• 2: NNX XXXX
• 3: 1NPX NXX XXXX
• 4–50: Not stored
Type C:
• 1: N11
• 2: NXX XXXX
• 3: 1NNX XXXX
• 4: 1NPX NXX XXXX
• 5–50: Not stored
Type D:
• 1–47: Not stored
• 48: N11
• 49: NXX XXXX
• 50: 1NXX NXX XXXX
Type E:
• 1: N11
• 2: NXX NXX XXXX
• 3: 1NXX NXX XXXX
• 4–50: Not stored

11.1.5 PBX Configuration—[3-1-5] Group—Trunk Group—Charge

Rate
The rate charged per pay tone signal (sent from the telephone company) can be assigned for each trunk
group.
Name Description Value Range Links
Trunk Indicates the name of the trunk group Max. 20
Group (reference only). characters
Name

PC Programming Manual 389

11.1.5 PBX Configuration—[3-1-5] Group—Trunk Group—Charge Rate

Name Description Value Range Links

Rate Specifies the call charge rate. 0–9999999 PC Programming Manual
The number of decimal places that can be References
specified here depends on the value set in 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2]
Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Feature—Hotel & Charge
Point in 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2]
Feature—Hotel & Charge. Feature Manual
References
2.22.3 Call Charge Services

390 PC Programming Manual

 11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group

11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group

Extensions can be assigned to a tenant according to their extension user groups. An extension user group
can belong to only one tenant. However, one extension user group can belong to several call pickup groups
and several paging groups. A maximum of 8 tenants can be programmed.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
User Specifies the name Max. 20 PC Programming Manual References
Group of the extension characters 11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup
Name user group. Group
11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired
Extension—Extension Settings—Main—User Group
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—
Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—User
Group
Feature Manual References
5.1.2 Group
Tenant Specifies the 1–8 PC Programming Manual References
Number tenant to which the 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired
extension user Extension—Extension Settings
group belongs. 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—
Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
5.1.2 Group
5.1.3 Tenant Service

PC Programming Manual 391

11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group

11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup

Group
Extensions can be assigned to a call pickup group according to their extension user groups. One extension
user group can belong to up to 8 call pickup groups. A maximum of 64 call pickup groups can be
programmed.
To assign extension user groups to call pickup groups easily, click All Setting.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
User Indicates the name of the Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
Group extension user group (reference characters References
Name only). 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—Extension
Settings
Feature Manual References
2.4.3 Call Pickup
5.1.2 Group
Pickup Selects the call pickup groups None, 01:– PC Programming Manual
Group— that the extension user group 64: References
1st–8th belongs to. One extension user 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
group can be assigned to a Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
maximum of 8 call pickup Settings
groups on this screen. To assign 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
an extension user group to more Extension—Portable Station—Extension
than 8 call pickup groups, click Settings
All Setting.
Feature Manual References
2.4.3 Call Pickup
5.1.2 Group

11.3.1 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group—All

Setting
Extensions can be assigned to a call pickup group according to their extension user groups. One extension
user group can belong to multiple call pickup groups.

392 PC Programming Manual

 11.3.1 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group—All Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Call Pickup Specifies the name of the call Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
Group Name pickup group. characters References
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
Extension—Wired Extension—
Extension Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—
Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
2.4.3 Call Pickup
5.1.2 Group
Main—Call For a pickup group, specifies Enable, Feature Manual References
Pickup whether display indications Disable 2.4.3 Call Pickup
Group and tones are enabled to
Monitor notify extension users when a
Feature call that can be answered by
an extension in the pickup
group arrives.
User Group Specifies whether the ON (blue), PC Programming Manual
1–32 extension user group belongs OFF References
to the corresponding pickup 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
group. Extension—Wired Extension—
Extension Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—
Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
2.4.3 Call Pickup
5.1.2 Group

PC Programming Manual 393

11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group

11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging

Group
Extensions can be assigned to a paging group according to their extension user groups. External pagers
can also be assigned to a paging group. One extension user group or external pager can belong to multiple
paging groups. A maximum of 32 paging groups can be programmed.
To assign external pagers to paging groups, click External Pager. To assign extension user groups to
paging groups easily, click All Setting.
Name Description Value Range Links
User Indicates the name of the Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
Group extension user group (reference characters References
Name only). 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—Extension
Settings
Feature Manual References
2.17.1 Paging
5.1.2 Group
Paging Selects the paging groups that None, 01–32 PC Programming Manual
Group— the extension user group References
1st–8th belongs to. One extension user 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
group can be assigned to a Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
maximum of 8 paging groups Settings
on this screen. To assign an 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
extension user group to more Extension—Portable Station—Extension
than 8 paging groups, click All Settings
Setting.
Feature Manual References
2.17.1 Paging
5.1.2 Group

11.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—All

Setting
Extensions can be assigned to a paging group according to their extension user groups. One extension user
group or external pager can belong to multiple paging groups.
Name Description Value Range Links
Paging Specifies the name of Max. 20 PC Programming Manual References
Group the paging group. characters 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—
Name Wired Extension—Extension Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—
Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
2.17.1 Paging
5.1.2 Group

394 PC Programming Manual

 11.4.2 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—External Pager

Name Description Value Range Links

User Specifies whether the ON (blue), PC Programming Manual References
Group 1– extension user group OFF (white) 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—
32 belongs to the Wired Extension—Extension Settings
corresponding paging 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—
group. Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
2.17.1 Paging
5.1.2 Group

11.4.2 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—

External Pager
External pagers can be assigned to a paging group. One external pager can belong to multiple paging
groups.
Name Description Value Range Links
Paging Indicates the name of Max. 20 PC Programming Manual References
Group the paging group characters 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—
Name (reference only). Wired Extension—Extension Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—
Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
2.17.1 Paging
5.1.2 Group
External Specifies whether the ON (blue), PC Programming Manual References
Pager 1–6 external pager belongs OFF 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—
to the corresponding Wired Extension—Extension Settings
paging group. 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—
Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
2.17.1 Paging
5.1.2 Group

PC Programming Manual 395

11.5 PBX Configuration—[3-5] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group

11.5 PBX Configuration—[3-5] Group—Incoming

Call Distribution Group
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call
Distribution Group—Group Settings
Extensions can be assigned as members of an incoming call distribution group. Calls to an incoming call
distribution group are distributed to its member extensions as programmed. A maximum of 128 incoming
call distribution groups can be programmed.
To set the Call Forwarding (FWD) settings of ICD groups easily, click Group FWD. To assign extensions to
ICD groups and change extension settings, click Member List.
For more information on ICD Groups, see "2.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY"
in the Feature Manual.

Main
Name Description Value Range Links
Floating Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits
Extension number of the incoming call (consisting of
Number distribution group. 0–9)
Group Name Specifies the name of the Max. 20
incoming call distribution characters
group.
Distribution Selects the method for Ring, UCD, Feature Manual References
Method distributing calls to idle Priority 2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution
extensions of the incoming call Hunting
distribution group.
Call Waiting Selects the call waiting All, Distribution Feature Manual References
Distribution distribution method for busy 2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution
extensions of the incoming call
distribution group.
FWD Mode Specifies whether extensions No Ring, Ring PC Programming Manual
in FWD mode ring when a call References
is received at the incoming call 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2]
distribution group. Extension—Wired Extension—
FWD/DND
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2]
Extension—Portable Station—
FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution

396 PC Programming Manual

 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

DND Mode Specifies whether extensions No Ring, Ring PC Programming Manual
in DND mode ring when a call References
is received at the incoming call 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2]
distribution group. Extension—Wired Extension—
FWD/DND
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2]
Extension—Portable Station—
FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution
Tenant Specifies the tenant to which 1–8 PC Programming Manual
Number the incoming call distribution References
group belongs, to determine 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2]
the Time Table and the audio System—Operator & BGM
source for the group. (The 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4]
tenant number corresponds to System—Week Table
the Time Table number.) 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6]
Feature—Tenant—Music On Hold
Feature Manual References
2.13.4 Music on Hold
5.1.3 Tenant Service
COS Specifies the COS of the 1–64 PC Programming Manual
incoming call distribution References
group. Depending on the COS, 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1]
calls from certain extensions System—Class of Service—COS
are restricted as determined by Settings
the Internal Call Block feature. 10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2]
Also, when calls are forwarded System—Class of Service—External
or overflowed to a trunk, the Call Block
TRS/Barring assigned for the 10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3]
COS of the incoming call System—Class of Service—Internal
distribution group applies. Call Block
Feature Manual References
2.1.2.2 Internal Call Block
CLIP on ICD Specifies the CLIP number Max. 16 digits Feature Manual References
Group Button sent to the network when (consisting of 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
making calls using the ICD 0–9, *, and #) Identification Presentation (CLIP/
Group button. COLP)

Overflow Queuing Busy

Name Description Value Range Links
Floating Extension Specifies the floating Max. 5 digits
Number extension number of the (consisting of 0–9)
incoming call distribution
group.

PC Programming Manual 397

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Group Name Specifies the name of the Max. 20 characters
incoming call distribution
group.
Queuing Busy— Specifies the overflow Max. 32 digits PC Programming
Destination-Day, destination of calls that (consisting of 0–9, *, Manual References
Lunch, Break, cannot be queued in each #, [ ] [Secret], and P 10.4 PBX Configuration—
Night time mode. [Pause]) [2-4] System—Week
Table
Feature Manual
References
2.2.2.7 Overflow Feature
Queuing Busy Specifies the number of calls None, 1–100 Feature Manual
Queue Call that can wait in a queue. References
Capacity 2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

Overflow No Answer
Name Description Value Range Links
Floating Specifies the floating Max. 5 digits
Extension extension number of the (consisting of 0–9)
Number incoming call distribution
group.
Group Name Specifies the name of the Max. 20
incoming call distribution characters
group.
Time out & Specifies the overflow Max. 32 digits PC Programming Manual
Manual Queue destination of queued calls (consisting of 0–9, References
Redirection— when they are not answered *, #, [ ] [Secret], 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4]
Destination-Day, or are redirected by Manual and P [Pause]) System—Week Table
Lunch, Break, Queue Redirection in each
Night time mode. Feature Manual
References
2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
2.2.2.7 Overflow Feature
Time out & Specifies the length of time None, 10 × n Feature Manual
Manual Queue calls wait in a queue before (n=1–125) s References
Redirection they are redirected to the 2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
Overflow Time overflow destination. 2.2.2.7 Overflow Feature

398 PC Programming Manual

 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Hurry-up Level Specifies the number of calls None, 1–30 PC Programming Manual
to hold in the queue before References
prompting Manual Queue 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—
Redirection by flashing the [4-1-4] Extension—Wired
Hurry-up button. Extension—Flexible Button
12.2.3 PBX Configuration—
[4-2-3] Extension—Portable
Station—Flexible Button
Feature Manual
References
2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

Queuing Time Table

Name Description Value Range Links
Floating Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits
Extension number of the incoming call (consisting of 0–9)
Number distribution group.
Group Name Specifies the name of the incoming Max. 20
call distribution group. characters
Queuing Time Specifies the Queuing Time Table to None, Table 1– PC Programming
Table—Day, be used in each time mode. Table 64 Manual References
Lunch, Break, 10.4 PBX Configuration
Night —[2-4] System—Week
Table
Feature Manual
References
2.2.2.4 Queuing
Feature
Queuing Time Enables the PBX to play Disable (Ringback
Table When messages/BGM to the caller Tone), Enable
Extension according to the Queuing Time
Ringing Table, when the call arrives at an
extension without being queued or
after being queued.

Miscellaneous
Name Description Value Range Links
Floating Specifies the floating extension number Max. 5 digits
Extension of the incoming call distribution group. (consisting of 0–9)
Number
Group Name Specifies the name of the incoming call Max. 20 characters
distribution group.

PC Programming Manual 399

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension No Specifies the length of time that a call None, 10 × n Feature Manual
Answer queues at an extension before it is (n=1–15) s References
Redirection Time redirected to the next member 2.2.2.2 Group Call
extension of the incoming call Distribution
distribution group, in UCD or Priority 2.2.2.4 Queuing
Hunting distribution method. Feature
No. of Specifies the number of consecutive None, 1–15 Feature Manual
Unanswered Calls unanswered calls before a member References
for Automatic extension is automatically logged out 2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-
Log-out from the incoming call distribution out
group.
Maximum No. of Specifies the number of extensions that Max.: Call arrives Feature Manual
Busy Extension can accept calls simultaneously in the at an idle References
incoming call distribution group. extension. 2.2.2.2 Group Call
1–32: Call will not Distribution
arrive at an idle
extension when
the number of busy
extensions
exceeds the
assigned number.
Status of FWD for Specifies whether a virtual PS in an Idle, Busy Feature Manual
Virtual PS ICD group is shown as idle or busy References
when it forwards a call to a trunk on no 2.3.2 Call
answer. Forwarding (FWD)
Last Extension Specifies whether the last extension Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Log-out logged-in to the incoming call References
distribution group is allowed to log out. 2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-
out
VIP Call Mode Enables VIP Call mode, to prioritise Disable, Enable Feature Manual
calls received from multiple incoming References
call distribution groups. 2.2.2.6 VIP Call
Supervisor Specifies the extension number of the Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Extension incoming call distribution group’s (consisting of 0–9) References
Number supervisor. The supervisor can monitor 2.2.2.9 Supervisory
and control the status of each member Feature
of the group using a 6-line display PT.
The supervisor extension need not
belong to the group.
Programmed Specifies the mailbox number of the Max. 16 digits
Mailbox No. (16 incoming call distribution group’s (consisting of 0–9,
Digits) mailbox for Voice Processing Systems *, and #)
(VPS) with DTMF Integration.

400 PC Programming Manual

 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Group Log / Group FWD

Name Description Value Range Links
Floating Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits
Number number of the incoming call (consisting of 0–9)
distribution group.
Group Name Specifies the name of the Max. 20 characters
incoming call distribution group.
Incoming Call Log Specifies the number of 0–100 Feature Manual
Memory unanswered calls to the incoming References
call distribution group that can be 2.19.2 Incoming Call
logged in the call log memory. Log
Group FWD Call Indicates the current FWD status Off, On Feature Manual
from CO—Setting for incoming trunk calls References
(reference only). 2.3.2 Call Forwarding
(FWD)
Group FWD Call Specifies the forward destination Max. 32 digits Feature Manual
from CO— of incoming trunk calls directed to (consisting of 0–9, *, References
Destination the incoming call distribution #, [ ] [Secret], and P 2.3.2 Call Forwarding
group. [Pause]) (FWD)
Group FWD Call Indicates the current FWD status Off, On Feature Manual
from Extension— for incoming intercom calls References
Setting (reference only). 2.3.2 Call Forwarding
(FWD)
Group FWD Call Specifies the forward destination Max. 32 digits Feature Manual
from Extension— of incoming intercom calls (consisting of 0–9, *, References
Destination directed to the incoming call #, [ ] [Secret] and P 2.3.2 Call Forwarding
distribution group. [Pause]) (FWD)

11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call

Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
Each incoming call distribution group can have a maximum of 128 members (extensions) assigned to it, and
each member can have its own delayed ringing and Wrap-up time settings. An extension can be a member
of multiple incoming call distribution groups. An ICD Group can also contain cellular phones, and network
ICD groups (ICD groups at other PBXs in a network) using virtual PS (see "5.2.4.6 Virtual PS" in the
Feature Manual). The forward destination assigned to a virtual PS (e.g., a cellular phone) can act as a
member of an ICD group. Select the desired ICD group (1–128) from the ICD Group No. list.
To assign members to the group, enter directly or click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension
Number Setting). To copy the members to another group, click Member list copy, select the group, and
click OK.

PC Programming Manual 401

11.5.2 PBX Configuration—[3-5-2] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Specifies the extension number Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Number of each member. In addition to (consisting of References
the extension numbers of PT, 0–9) 11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group
SLT, and PS extensions, floating —PS Ring Group
extension numbers of PS Ring
groups can also be specified. Feature Manual References
2.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution
Group Features—SUMMARY
Extension Indicates the name of the Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
Name extension (reference only). characters References
11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group
—PS Ring Group
Feature Manual References
2.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution
Group Features—SUMMARY
Delayed Specifies the delayed ringing Immediate, 1– Feature Manual References
Ring setting of each member. 6 Rings, No 2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution
(Applicable when the call Ring
distribution method of the
incoming call distribution group is
set to Ring.)
Wrap-up Specifies the length of time that 10 × n (n=0– PC Programming Manual
Timer must pass after completing a call 300) s References
before the member extension can 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3]
accept another call. Group—Incoming Call Distribution
This timer is used when "Options Group—Miscellaneous—Options—
—Wrap-up Timer based on" is Wrap-up Timer based on
set to "ICD Group Member" in 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
11.5.3 PBX Configuration— Extension—Wired Extension—
[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Extension Settings—Option 8—
Distribution Group— Wrap-up Timer
Miscellaneous. 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—
Extension Settings—Option 8—
Wrap-up Timer
Feature Manual References
2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-out

11.5.2 PBX Configuration—[3-5-2] Group—Incoming Call

Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table
A Queuing Time Table can contain up to 16 sequences which control how calls waiting in a queue are
handled. A maximum of 64 Queuing Time Tables can be programmed.

402 PC Programming Manual

 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous

Name Description Value Range Links

Queuing Specifies the None: Redirects the call to the next sequence. Feature Manual
Sequence— command Overflow: Redirects the call to the overflow References
Sequence activated by the destination when there is no answer. 2.2.2.4 Queuing
01–16 corresponding Disconnect: Disconnects the line. Feature
sequence. Sequence 01–16: Redirects the call to a different 2.2.2.7 Overflow
sequence. Feature
Wait 5 × n (n=1–16) s: If preceded by an OGM, 2.13.4 Music on
plays the Music on Hold for the specified period Hold
of time; if not preceded by an OGM, sends a 2.30.2 Outgoing
ringback tone for the specified period of time. Message (OGM)
OGM 01–64: Sends a certain OGM.
Queue No.: Announces how many calls precede
the caller in the waiting queue.
Queue No. and Time: Announces how many
calls precede the caller in the waiting queue and
the estimated wait time.

11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call

Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
Optional settings related to Incoming Call Distribution Groups can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
Options—Call Log to Selects whether answered calls Disable, Enable Feature Manual
ICD Group when to an ICD Group are also logged References
ICD Member in the Incoming Call Log for the 2.2.2.1 Incoming Call
Answered group, in addition to the log of the Distribution Group
extension that answered the call. Features—SUMMARY
Options—Call Log to Selects whether the calls to an Disable, Enable Feature Manual
ICD Group when ICD Group that are redirected References
Overflow Destination and are answered by the 2.2.2.1 Incoming Call
Answered overflow destination are also Distribution Group
logged in the Incoming Call Log Features—SUMMARY
for the group, in addition to the
log of the extension that
answered the call.

PC Programming Manual 403

11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous

Name Description Value Range Links

Options—ICD Group Selects whether ICD Group Group DN, PC Programming
Key Mode buttons at extensions operate as Enhanced Manual References
normal or in Enhanced Phantom Phantom 11.5.1.1 PBX
button mode. Configuration—[3-5-1]
When set to Enhanced Phantom Group—Incoming Call
mode, creating an ICD Group Distribution Group—
button at an extension using PT Group Settings—
personal programming Member List—Delayed
automatically registers the Ring
extension as a member of the
relevant ICD Group. The Feature Manual
extension user can also specify References
the delayed ringing settings. 2.2.2.1 Incoming Call
Distribution Group
Features—SUMMARY
Options—Longest Selects whether incoming calls Disable (UCD), Feature Manual
Idle Distribution are distributed to idle extensions Enable (ACD) References
evenly in order (UCD), or to the 2.2.2.2 Group Call
extension that has been idle the Distribution
longest (ACD).
Options—Wrap-up Selects whether the ICD Group Extension: The PC Programming
Timer based on member wrap-up timer or timer is activated Manual References
extension wrap-up timer is used. after all calls to 11.5.1.1 PBX
If Extension is selected here, or from the Configuration—[3-5-1]
Wrap-up Timer on 11.5.1.1 PBX extension, Group—Incoming Call
Configuration—[3-5-1] Group— including a Distribution Group—
Incoming Call Distribution retrieved call on Group Settings—
Group—Group Settings— hold. Member List—Wrap-up
Member List becomes ICD Group Timer
unavailable. If ICD Group Member: The 12.1.1 PBX
Member is selected, Wrap-up timer is only Configuration—[4-1-1]
Timer on 12.1.1 PBX activated after Extension—Wired
Configuration—[4-1-1] calls to the Extension—Extension
Extension—Wired Extension— extension Settings—Option 8—
Extension Settings and through an ICD Wrap-up Timer
12.2.1 PBX Configuration— Group. 12.2.1 PBX
[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Configuration—[4-2-1]
Station—Extension Settings Extension—Portable
become unavailable. Station—Extension
Settings—Option 8—
Wrap-up Timer
Feature Manual
References
2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-out
Options—Overflow Specifies whether overflow Enable (Queuing Feature Manual
immediately when All redirection is processed when all Busy References
Logout members of an ICD group are Destination), 2.2.2.1 Incoming Call
logged out. Disable (Keep Distribution Group
Queuing) Features—SUMMARY

404 PC Programming Manual

 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous

Name Description Value Range Links

Options—Call Log Specifies whether to log call Enable (all trunk Feature Manual
for Built-in ACD information for the Built-in ACD calls), Enable References
Report Report. This feature requires an (ICD group calls 2.2.2.1 Incoming Call
activation key. only), Disable Distribution Group
Features—SUMMARY
Note
2.2.2.10 Supervisory
When this setting is enabled, Feature (ACD)
certain hospitality features 2.23.2 Room Status
cannot be used. For details, Control
refer to the relevant chapter 2.23.3 Call Billing for
in the Feature Manual. Guest Room
Options—Call Log Specifies whether to log call Enable, Disable Feature Manual
for Built-in ACD information of unanswered calls References
Report—ICD Group when the ICD group distribution 2.2.2.10 Supervisory
Unanswered Call method is set to Uniform Call Feature (ACD)
Log Distribution or Priority Hunting,
for the Built-in ACD Report.
Options—ICD Group Specifies the screen update 5–60 Feature Manual
Call Monitor View— interval time for the ICD Group References
Screen Update Time Call Monitor View. 2.2.2.1 Incoming Call
(s) Distribution Group
Features—SUMMARY
Options— Specifies the method to Average waiting Feature Manual
Announcement of announce the estimated wait time time: The References
Estimated Waiting to calls waiting in an ICD group average wait 2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
Time—Calculated queue. The amount of time time is used for
based on (the announced is calculated using calculating the
following time x the time set here for each call in announced
number of calls in the queue. amount of wait
queue) time.
Predefined
time: A set
amount of time
(10–3600 s) is
used for
calculating the
announced
amount of wait
time.
Options— Specifies the threshold wait time 10–60 min Feature Manual
Announcement of for when calls waiting in an ICD References
Estimated Waiting group queue will hear the special 2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
Time—Threshold announcement.
Time for Special
Announce (10-60
min)

PC Programming Manual 405

11.5.4 PBX Configuration–[3-5-4] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—ACD Supervisor

Name Description Value Range Links

Options—UM Specifies the announcement Guidance No.1– Feature Manual
System Guidance— heard by callers in an ICD queue 8 References
UM System about the estimated wait time. 2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
Guidance for Queue Select an announcement from
No. / Queue No. and the specified Unified Messaging
Time System Guidance messages.
Options—ICD Group Select the distribution method for FIFO, Circular Feature Manual
Distribution order member extensions that belong References
to multiple ICD groups and 2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
become idle.
Options—2nd line Select the information displayed Last destination, Feature Manual
LCD display on the second line of the PT's First destination References
information for ICD display when an incoming call is 2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
Group redirected call redirected to the ICD group that
the extension belongs to.

11.5.4 PBX Configuration–[3-5-4] Group—Incoming Call

Distribution Group—ACD Supervisor
This screen is only available at Installer level.

Description
After specifying an ICD Group to be monitored, specify a User (User) or User (Administrator) as an ACD
supervisor to begin monitoring. The ACD supervisor can monitor an ICD Group, manage and analyse
statistical information, and create an ACD report.
For details about ICD Group management by the ACD supervisor, see "2.2.2.10 Supervisory Feature
(ACD)" in the Feature Manual.

To set the ACD Supervisor

1. Click the button. The Set ACD Supervisor screen is displayed.
2. From the users listed in the Normal User window, click a user to select it as the ACD supervisor, and
then click the right arrow button to move the selected user to the ACD Supervisor window. To remove a
selected user, click a user on the ACD Supervisor window to select it, and then click the left arrow
button.
3. Click OK.
The ACD supervisor selected above is displayed as follows.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
First The first name of the ACD supervisor (reference only).
Name
Last The last name of the ACD supervisor (reference only).
Name

406 PC Programming Manual

 11.5.4 PBX Configuration–[3-5-4] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—ACD Supervisor

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Ext. No. The extension number of the ACD supervisor (reference only). Feature
To assign the ICD Groups that are monitored by the ACD Manual
Supervisor. References
1. In the ICD Group column, click the Edit button for the ACD 2.2.2.10
supervisor. The Set ACD Supervisor ICD Group screen is Supervisory
displayed. Feature (ACD)

2. From the ICD Groups listed in the Available ICD Group

window, click an ICD Group to select it for assignment to the
ACD supervisor, and then click the right arrow button to
move the selected ICD Group to the Selected ICD Group
list. To remove a selected ICD Group, click an ICD Group on
the Selected ICD Group list to select it, and then click the
left arrow button.
3. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual 407

11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group

11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension

Hunting Group
If an extension within an idle extension hunting group is called when it is busy or in DND mode, the call can
be redirected to another extension in the same hunting group, according to a pre-programmed hunting type.
If there is no idle extension in the group, the call can then be redirected to the overflow destination, which
can be different depending on the time mode (day/lunch/break/night). A maximum of 64 hunting groups can
be programmed, each containing up to 16 extensions.
To assign members to the group, click Member List. To assign extensions as overflow destinations easily,
click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).
Name Description Value Range Links
Hunting Group Specifies the name of the Max. 20 characters Feature Manual
Name hunting group. References
2.2.1 Idle Extension
Hunting
Hunting Type Specifies the hunting type Circular: Circulates until the Feature Manual
for the hunting group. call is answered or overflowed References
Terminated: Terminates at the 2.2.1 Idle Extension
last extension Hunting
5.1.2 Group
Overflow— Specifies the overflow Max. 32 digits (consisting of Feature Manual
Day, Lunch, destination of an 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] References
Break, Night unanswered call in each [Secret], P [Pause], and F 2.2.1 Idle Extension
time mode. [Flash]) Hunting

11.6.1 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting

Group—Member List
Each hunting group can contain up to 16 extensions. Select the hunting group to programme from the
Hunting Group No. list.
To assign members to the group, enter the extension numbers in Extension Number or click Extension
No. Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Number number of the hunting (consisting of 0– References
group member. 9) 11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—
Extension Hunting Group
Feature Manual References
2.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting
Extension Indicates the name of the Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
Name extension, when an characters References
extension number is 11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—
specified in Extension Extension Hunting Group
Number above (reference
only). Feature Manual References
2.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting

408 PC Programming Manual

 11.7 PBX Configuration—[3-7] Group—UM Group

11.7 PBX Configuration—[3-7] Group—UM Group

11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System
Settings
The Unified Messaging (UM) ports of a PBX make up a group, called a UM group. This group has a floating
extension number, which can be the destination for incoming calls, redirected calls, transferred calls, etc.
When a call is received at the UM group, the Unified Messaging system can direct the caller to leave a voice
message or dial a number to reach the desired party.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Call Waiting Enables the queuing of calls when all Disable, PC Programming Manual
on UM extension ports of the UM group are Enable References
Group busy. (Call Waiting tone is not sent to 9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
any UM port.) Configuration—Slot—UM Port
Property
Feature Manual References
2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System
Overview—UM Ports and the UM
Group
Intercept to Enables the PBX to send the mailbox Disable, PC Programming Manual
Mailbox for number of the called extension to the Enable References
Call to Unified Messaging system when a call 9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Extension is redirected to the UM group by Configuration—Slot—UM Port
Intercept Routing. When the Unified Property
Messaging system receives the mailbox 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
number, the Unified Messaging system Extension—Wired Extension—
answers the call with the appropriate Extension Settings—Intercept
mailbox. Destination—Intercept Destination
—When called party does not
answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—
Extension Settings—Intercept
Destination—Intercept Destination
—When called party does not
answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System
Overview—UM Ports and the UM
Group

PC Programming Manual 409

11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Overflow to Enables the PBX to send the mailbox Disable, Feature Manual References
Mailbox for number of the called extension to the Enable 2.2.2 Incoming Call Distribution
Call to ICD UM when a call is redirected from an Group Features
Group incoming call distribution group to the
UM group by Intercept Routing. When
the Unified Messaging system receives
the mailbox number, it answers the call
with the appropriate mailbox.
Transfer Enables the PBX to send the mailbox Disable, PC Programming Manual
Recall to number of the transfer destination Enable References
Mailbox extension to the Unified Messaging 9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
system in these situations: (1) when a Configuration—Slot—UM Port
call is transferred to an extension by the Property
Call Transfer without Announcement
feature using the Automated Attendant Feature Manual References
(AA) service of the Unified Messaging 3.1.1 Unified Messaging System
system, and the call is not answered Overview—UM Ports and the UM
within a programmed time period; (2) Group
when the Unified Messaging system is
assigned as the Transfer Recall
destination of a certain extension.
When the Unified Messaging system
receives the mailbox number, the
Unified Messaging system answers the
call with the appropriate mailbox.

11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit

Settings
A UM group has a floating extension number, which can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls
and incoming calls.
To assign extension numbers to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension
numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 6.5 Tool—Extension List View).
Name Description Value Range Links
Floating Specifies the floating Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Extension extension number of the (consisting of References
No. UM group. 0–9) 9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration
—Slot—UM Port Property
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview
—UM Ports and the UM Group

410 PC Programming Manual

 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Group Specifies the name of the Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
Name UM group, which will be characters References
shown on the display of 9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration
extensions that call the —Slot—UM Port Property
UM group.
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview
—UM Ports and the UM Group

Centralised VM Unit Setting

Name Description Value Range Links
Floating Specifies the floating Max. 8 digits PC Programming Manual
Extension extension number of the (consisting of References
No. (TIE) centralised VM (DPT) group. 0–9, *, and #) 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1]
This floating extension System—Numbering Plan—Main—
number must start with the Features—TIE Line Access
number used to access a TIE 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1]
line or the extensions of System—Numbering Plan—Main—
another PBX. Other PBX Extension
Feature Manual References
2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital)
Integration
4.3.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail
Group Specifies the name of the Max. 20 Feature Manual References
Name centralised VM (DPT) group, characters 2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
which will be shown on the 2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital)
display of extensions that call Integration
the VM (DPT) group. 4.3.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail

11.7.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit

Settings—Member List
Displays information about all UM ports that belong to the selected UM group.
Name Description Value Range Links
No. Indicates the UM port 1–24 PC Programming Manual References
number (reference 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—
only). UM Group—Unit Settings
Extension Indicates the extension Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual References
No. number assigned to (consisting of 0– 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—
the UM port (reference 9) UM Group—Unit Settings
only).
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview
—UM Ports and the UM Group

PC Programming Manual 411

11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group

11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring

Group
A PS ring group is a group of PS extensions that receives incoming calls. Each group has a floating
extension number and name. One PS can belong to multiple PS ring groups. A maximum of 32 PS ring
groups can be programmed, each containing up to 128 PS extensions.
To add PSs to the PS Ring Group, click Member List.
Name Description Value Range Links
Floating Specifies the floating extension number of Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Extension the PS ring group. (consisting of References
Number 0–9) 5.2.4.2 PS Ring
Group
Group Name Specifies the name of the PS ring group, Max. 20 Feature Manual
which will be shown on the display of characters References
extensions that call the PS ring group when 5.2.4.2 PS Ring
Incoming Trunk Call Information Display Group
on this screen is set to Called Number.
Incoming Specifies the information of the incoming Caller ID, Feature Manual
Trunk Call trunk call to be shown on the displays of Called Number References
Information the PSs that belong to the PS ring group. If 5.2.4.2 PS Ring
Display the caller’s name or called party’s name is Group
not recognised, the telephone number will
be shown.

11.8.1 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group—

Member List
Each PS Ring Group can have up to 128 PS extensions assigned. Select the group to programme from the
PS Ring Group Number list.
To assign members to the PS Ring Group, enter directly or click Extension No. Setting (see
2.1.6 Extension Number Setting). To copy members to another group, click Member list copy, select the
group, and click OK.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual References
Number extension number of 11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring
the PS assigned to the Group
PS Ring Group. 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—
Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
5.2.4.2 PS Ring Group

412 PC Programming Manual

 11.8.1 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group—Member List

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Indicates the name of Max. 20 PC Programming Manual References
Name the PS (reference characters 11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring
only). Group
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—
Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
5.2.4.2 PS Ring Group

PC Programming Manual 413

11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group

11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference

Group
A conference group is a group of telephones (extensions or outside destinations) that ring when a
conference group call is made. One destination number can be assigned to multiple conference groups. Up
to 31 members can be assigned to each of 8 conference groups. To assign members to a group, click
Member List.
When Broadcast Mode is set to "Disable", only up to 7 members can be assigned to a group. All of these
members are automatically allowed to speak when the call starts.
Name Description Value Range Links
Conference Specifies the name of the Max. 20 characters Feature Manual
Group Name conference group. References
2.15.1 Conference Group
Call
Broadcast Specifies whether only the original Disable: The Feature Manual
Mode caller can speak or up to 8 people original caller and References
can speak at the start of a up to 7 participants 2.15.1 Conference Group
conference group call. can speak at the Call
start of a
conference group
call.
Enable: Only the
original caller can
speak at the start
of a conference
group call.
Ability to Talk Enables PT, SLT and PS users to Disable, Enable PC Programming
use the push-to-talk feature during Manual References
a conference group call, when 11.9 PBX Configuration—
Broadcast Mode is set to [3-9] Group—Conference
"Enable". The push-to-talk feature Group—Broadcast Mode
allows PT, SLT and PS users to
speak during the call by pressing Feature Manual
any of their dial keys. References
2.15.1 Conference Group
Call
Automatic Specifies if the extensions of the Disable, Enable PC Programming
Answer w/o conference will automatically Manual References
Extension answer a conference group call, 11.9 PBX Configuration—
Setting even if Hands-free Answerback is [3-9] Group—Conference
not set for those extensions. This Group—Broadcast Mode
setting can be used with PTs and
KX-TCA175/KX-TCA275/ Feature Manual
KX-TCA185/KX-TCA285/ References
KX-TCA385 PSs. 2.15.1 Conference Group
Call

414 PC Programming Manual

 11.9.1 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group—Member List

11.9.1 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group—

Member List
Up to 31 members can be assigned to each conference group. Select the group to programme from the
Conference Group No. list.
When Broadcast Mode is set to "Disable", only up to 7 members can be assigned to a group. All of these
members are automatically allowed to speak when the call starts.
To copy the numbers to another group, click Member list copy, select the group to copy to, and click OK.
To assign destinations for conference groups easily, click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension
Number Setting).
Name Description Value Range Links
Dial Specifies the destination Max. 32 digits PC Programming Manual
Number number of each member (consisting of 0–9, References
of the conference group. *, #, [ ] [Secret], 11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group
and P [Pause]) —Conference Group
Feature Manual References
2.15.1 Conference Group Call
Extension Indicates the name of the Max. 20 characters PC Programming Manual
Name extension, when an References
extension number is 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
specified in Dial Number Extension—Wired Extension—
above (reference only). Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
2.15.1 Conference Group Call

PC Programming Manual 415

11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group

11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P

Group
Settings for peer-to-peer (P2P) groups can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
P2P Group Specifies the name of the P2P Max. 20 Feature Manual
Name group. characters References
5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P)
Connection
Bandwidth Specifies whether to use the Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Control bandwidth precedence setting of References
the P2P group for calling among 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P)
different P2P groups. Connection

416 PC Programming Manual

 11.11 PBX Configuration—[3-11] Group—VM(DPT) Group

11.11 PBX Configuration—[3-11] Group—VM(DPT)

Group
11.11.1 PBX Configuration—[3-11-1] Group—VM(DPT) Group—
System Settings
A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) with DPT Integration can be connected to DPT ports of the
PBX. The DPT ports that are connected to the VPS are called a VM (DPT) Group. 2 VM (DPT) Groups can
be programmed.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Call Waiting Enables the queuing of calls when all Disable, PC Programming Manual
on VM extension ports of the VM (DPT) group Enable References
Group are busy. (Call Waiting tone is not sent 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
to any VM port.) Configuration—Slot—Port Property
—Extension Type
Feature Manual References
2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
Intercept to Enables the PBX to send the mailbox Disable, PC Programming Manual
Mailbox for number of the called extension to the Enable References
Call to VPS when a call is redirected to the 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Extension VM (DPT) group by Intercept Routing. Configuration—Slot—Port Property
When the VPS receives the mailbox —Extension Type
number, the VPS answers the call with 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
the appropriate mailbox. Extension—Wired Extension—
Extension Settings—Intercept
Destination—Intercept Destination
—When called party does not
answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—
Extension Settings—Intercept
Destination—Intercept Destination
—When called party does not
answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Feature Manual References
2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
Overflow to Enables the PBX to send the mailbox Disable, Feature Manual References
Mailbox for number of the called extension to the Enable 2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
Call to ICD VM when a call is redirected from an 2.2.2 Incoming Call Distribution
Group incoming call distribution group to the Group Features
VM group by Intercept Routing. When
the VPS receives the mailbox number,
it answers the call with the appropriate
mailbox.

PC Programming Manual 417

11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Transfer Enables the PBX to send the mailbox Disable, PC Programming Manual
Recall to number of the transfer destination Enable References
Mailbox extension to the VPS in these 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
situations: (1) when a call is Configuration—Slot—Port Property
transferred to an extension by the Call —Extension Type
Transfer without Announcement
feature using the Automated Attendant Feature Manual References
(AA) service of the VPS, and the call is 2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
not answered within a programmed 2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital)
time period; (2) when the VPS is Integration
assigned as the Transfer Recall
destination of a certain extension.
When the VPS receives the mailbox
number, the VPS answers the call with
the appropriate mailbox.

11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—

Unit Settings
A VM (DPT) group has a floating extension number, which can be assigned as the destination for redirected
calls and incoming calls.
To assign extension numbers to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension
numbers and types, click Extension List View.
Name Description Value Range Links
Floating Specifies the floating Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Extension extension number of the (consisting of References
No. VM (DPT) group. 0–9) 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Port Property—
Extension Type
Feature Manual References
2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Group Specifies the name of the Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
Name VM (DPT) group, which characters References
will be shown on the 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
display of extensions that Configuration—Slot—Port Property—
call the VM (DPT) group. Extension Type
Feature Manual References
2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

11.11.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit

Settings—Member List
Displays information on the settings of all relevant ports. Only ports set to VM(DPT) in DPT Type—Type of
9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Extension Type will be displayed. In

418 PC Programming Manual

 11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings

addition, the other information displayed here can also be set in 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Extension Type.
Name Description Value Range Links
Shelf Indicates the shelf Shelf number PC Programming Manual References
position (reference 11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—
only). VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
Slot Indicates the slot Slot number PC Programming Manual References
position (reference 11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—
only). VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
Port Indicates the port Port number PC Programming Manual References
number (reference 11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—
only). VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
Feature Manual References
5.2.6 Extension Port Configuration
VM Unit No. Indicates the unit 1, 2 PC Programming Manual References
number of the 11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—
connected VPS VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
(reference only).
Feature Manual References
2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
VM Port Indicates the VM port 1-12 PC Programming Manual References
No. number for the port 11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—
(reference only). VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
Feature Manual References
2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
Extension Indicates the Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual References
No. extension number (consisting of 11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—
assigned to the VM 0–9) VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
port (reference only). 11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—
VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
Feature Manual References
2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Extension Indicates the name of Max. 20 PC Programming Manual References
Name the extension characters 11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—
(reference only). VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
Feature Manual References
2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

PC Programming Manual 419

11.12 PBX Configuration—[3-12] Group—VM(DTMF) Group

11.12 PBX Configuration—[3-12] Group—VM(DTMF)

Group
11.12.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-1] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—
System Settings
A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) with DTMF Integration can be connected to SLT ports of the
PBX. The SLT ports that are connected to the VPS are called a VM (DTMF) Group. 2 VM (DTMF) Groups
can be programmed. For more information on Voice Mail groups and DTMF integration, see 2.28.1 Voice
Mail (VM) Group and 2.28.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration in the Feature Manual.
Name Description Value Range Links
VM DTMF Status Specifies the DTMF status signal the Max. 4 digits
Signal—Ringback PBX sends to the VPS when the (consisting of 0–9, *,
Tone called extension is ringing. #, and P [pause])
VM DTMF Status Specifies the DTMF status signal the Max. 4 digits
Signal—Busy PBX sends to the VPS when the (consisting of 0–9, *,
Tone called extension is busy. #, and P [pause])
VM DTMF Status Specifies the DTMF status signal the Max. 4 digits
Signal—Reorder PBX sends to the VPS when the (consisting of 0–9, *,
Tone dialled number is invalid. #, and P [pause])
VM DTMF Status Specifies the DTMF status signal the Max. 4 digits
Signal—DND PBX sends to the VPS when the (consisting of 0–9, *,
Tone called extension is in DND mode. #, and P [pause])
VM DTMF Status Specifies the DTMF status signal the Max. 4 digits
Signal—Answer PBX sends to the VPS when the (consisting of 0–9, *,
called extension has answered the #, and P [pause])
call.
VM DTMF Status Specifies the DTMF status signal the Max. 4 digits
Signal—Confirm PBX sends to the VPS when a certain (consisting of 0–9, *,
feature (e.g., Message Waiting) has #, and P [pause])
been successfully set or cancelled on
an extension.
VM DTMF Status Specifies the DTMF status signal the Max. 4 digits
Signal— PBX sends to the VPS when the (consisting of 0–9, *,
Disconnect caller hangs up. #, and P [pause])
VM DTMF Status Specifies the DTMF status signal the Max. 4 digits
Signal—FWD to PBX sends to the VPS when the call (consisting of 0–9, *,
VM Ringback has been forwarded to the VPS and #, and P [pause])
Tone the PBX is calling another port of the
VPS.
VM DTMF Status Specifies the DTMF status signal the Max. 4 digits
Signal—FWD to PBX sends to the VPS when the call (consisting of 0–9, *,
VM Busy Tone has been forwarded to the VPS and #, and P [pause])
all ports of the VPS are busy.

420 PC Programming Manual

 11.12.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-1] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

VM DTMF Status Specifies the DTMF status signal the Max. 4 digits
Signal—FWD to PBX sends to the VPS when the call (consisting of 0–9, *,
Extension has been forwarded to another #, and P [pause])
Ringback Tone extension and the PBX is calling the
destination extension.
VM DTMF Specifies the DTMF command the Max. 16 digits
Command— PBX sends to the VPS when a call is (consisting of 0–9, *,
Recording forwarded, intercepted, or transferred #, H [mailbox number],
Message to the VPS, so that the caller can and P [pause])
leave a message in a certain mailbox.
VM DTMF Specifies the DTMF command the Max. 16 digits Feature Manual
Command— PBX sends to the VPS when an (consisting of 0–9, *, References
Listening extension user answers a message #, H [mailbox number], 2.20.1 Message
Message waiting notification from the VPS, so and P [pause]) Waiting
that the extension user can retrieve a
new message in a certain mailbox
without having to dial the mailbox
number manually.
VM DTMF Specifies the DTMF command the Max. 16 digits
Command— PBX sends to the VPS to switch from (consisting of 0–9, *,
Switching to AA VM Service Mode to AA Service #, H [mailbox number],
Mode. and P [pause])
VM DTMF Specifies the DTMF command the Max. 16 digits
Command— PBX sends to the VPS to switch from (consisting of 0–9, *,
Switching to VM AA Service Mode to VM Service #, H [mailbox number],
Mode. and P [pause])
Timing—DTMF Specifies the length of DTMF signals 80 ms, 160 ms
Length for VM the PBX sends to the VPS.
Timing—Inter- Specifies the length of pause time 80 ms, 160 ms
digit Time between DTMF signals the PBX
sends to the VPS.
Timing—Waiting Specifies the length of time that the 0.5 s, 1.0 s, 1.5 s, 2.0
Time before PBX waits before sending the Follow s
Sending Follow on ID to the VPS after the VPS has
on ID answered a call.
Timing—Waiting Specifies the length of time that the 0.5 s, 1.0 s, 1.5 s, 2.0
Time before PBX waits before sending the DTMF s
Sending VM status signal to the VPS after the VPS
DTMF Status has finished dialling.
Signal
Others—Call Enables the queuing of calls when all Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Waiting on VM extension ports of the VM (DTMF) References
Group group are busy. (Call Waiting tone is 2.2.2.4 Queuing
not sent to any VM port.) Feature

PC Programming Manual 421

11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Others—FWD to Specifies which DTMF commands the None, Answer by
the VPS VPS receives from the PBX when a Mailbox, AA
Sequence call is forwarded to the VPS, so that
the VPS can answer the call either
with a mailbox or in the AA service
mode. It is also possible to send no
DTMF signal to the VPS.
Others—Intercept Specifies which DTMF commands the None, Answer by
Routing to the VPS receives from the PBX when a Mailbox, AA
VPS Sequence call is intercepted to the VPS, so that
the VPS can answer the call either
with a mailbox or in the AA service
mode. It is also possible to send no
DTMF signal to the VPS.
Others—Mailbox Specifies whether the mailboxes use Extension Number, PC
for Extension the same numbers as the extensions Programmed Mailbox Programming
and incoming call distribution groups, Number Manual
or use different numbers as References
programmed for each extension or
11.5.1 PBX
incoming call distribution group.
Configuration—
[3-5-1] Group—
Incoming Call
Distribution Group
—Group Settings
12.1.1 PBX
Configuration—
[4-1-1] Extension
—Wired
Extension—
Extension
Settings
12.2.1 PBX
Configuration—
[4-2-1] Extension
—Portable Station
—Extension
Settings
Others—Message Specifies whether the PBX or VPS By PBX, BY VM
Waiting Lamp cancels the Message Waiting feature
Control (e.g., turning off the MESSAGE
button light) when an extension user
answers the message waiting
notification from the VPS.

11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—

Group Settings
A VM (DTMF) group has a floating extension number, and can be assigned as the destination for redirected
calls and incoming calls. To assign members to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all
programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View.

422 PC Programming Manual

 11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Floating Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Ext. No. number of the VM (DTMF) group. (consisting of 0–9) References
2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM)
Group
Group Specifies the name of the VM (DTMF) Max. 20 Feature Manual
Name group, which will be shown on the characters References
display of extensions that call the VM 2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM)
(DTMF) group. Group
Type Specifies the initial service mode in AA, VM Feature Manual
which the VPS answers calls. References
2.28.2 Voice Mail DTMF
Integration

11.12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—

Group Settings—Member List
Select the group to programme from the VM(DTMF) Group Number list.
To assign members to the group, enter directly or click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension
Number Setting). To copy members to another group, click Member list copy, select the group, and then
click OK.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Number of the number assigned to the (consisting of 0– References
SLT Port SLT port that is 9) 11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2]
Connected to connected to the VPS. Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group
VM Settings
Feature Manual References
2.28.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
Extension Name Indicates the name of Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
the extension characters References
(reference only). 11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2]
Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group
Settings
Feature Manual References
2.28.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration

PC Programming Manual 423

11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings

424 PC Programming Manual

 Section 12
PBX Configuration—[4] Extension

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Extension menu of the PBX Configuration Menu
of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 425

12.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1] Extension—Wired Extension

12.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1] Extension—Wired

Extension
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension
—Extension Settings
For each slot in which an extension card is installed, a certain number of extension ports are displayed. For
each extension port, various extension settings can be assigned.
To search for a specific extension, enter the extension number or the extension name in the search box and
click Find Next.
To copy the settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy to. The copied data includes FWD/
DND, personal speed dialling, and flexible button settings.
To assign a set of CLIP numbers automatically, click CLIP Generate.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Main
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number of Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Number the extension.
Extension Specifies the name of the Max. 20 characters
Name extension.
Port Type Indicates the extension port type DPT: DPT port (DLC)
(reference only). SLT: SLT port (MCSLC)
S-Hybrid: Super Hybrid port
(DHLC)
S-Hybrid(SLT): XDP port of
Super Hybrid port (DHLC)
S-Hybrid(S-DPT): Digital XDP
port of Super Hybrid port
(DHLC)
DPT(S-DPT): Digital XDP port
of DPT port (DLC)
ISDN: ISDN port (BRI/PRI)
IP-EXT: IP-Extension port
(V-IPEXT)
SIP: General SIP Extension
port (V-SIPEXT)
SIP-MLT: KX-UT series SIP
phone/S-PS/SIP-CS Extension
port (V-UTEXT)
UM: Unified Messaging System
Extension port

426 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Telephone Indicates the type of telephone DPT (15V)/DPT (40V): DPT is
Type connected to the extension port connected.
(reference only). APT (15V): APT is connected.
DSS: DSS Console is
connected.
VM: VPS is connected.
ISDN-Extension: ISDN
telephone is connected.
CS: CS is connected.
IP-PT: IP-PT belonging to the
V-IPEXT card is connected.
P-SIP: Panasonic SIP Phone is
connected.
UT: KX-UT series SIP phone is
connected.
SIP: General SIP Extension is
connected.
S-PS: SIP Portable Station is
connected.
SIP-CS: SIP Cell Station is
connected.
CS-M: High-density CS is
connected with its master port.
CS-S1–3: High-density CS is
connected with its slave port.
No Connection: No telephone
is connected.
Unknown: SLT is connected (or
no telephone is connected to
the Super Hybrid or SLT port).
User Specifies the extension user 1–32 Feature Manual
Group group to which the extension References
belongs. Extension user groups 5.1.2 Group
are used to compose tenants, call 5.1.3 Tenant
pickup groups and paging groups. Service
COS Specifies the COS of the 1–64 PC
extension. Programming
Manual
References
10.7.1 PBX
Configuration—
[2-7-1] System—
Class of Service—
COS Settings
Feature Manual
References
5.1.1 Class of
Service (COS)

PC Programming Manual 427

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Specifies the PIN of the Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0– Feature Manual
PIN extension. 9) References
2.24.1 Extension
CAUTION
Personal
There is a risk that fraudulent Identification
telephone calls will be made if Number (PIN)
a third party discovers a
personal identification number
(PIN) (verification code PIN or
extension PIN) of the PBX.
The cost of such calls will be
billed to the owner/renter of
the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this
kind of fraudulent use, we
strongly recommend:
a. Keeping PINs secret.
b. Selecting complex,
random PINs that cannot
be easily guessed.
c. Changing PINs
frequently.
To change an Extension PIN:
1. Click Edit under Extension
PIN for the extension to
change.
2. In the window that appears,
enter the new extension PIN
and then enter it again to
confirm it.
3. Click OK.

Intercept Destination
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension Max. 5 digits
Number number of the extension. (consisting of 0–9)
Extension Name Specifies the name of the Max. 20 characters
extension.

428 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Intercept Specifies the Intercept Max. 32 digits PC Programming
Destination— Routing destination of calls in (consisting of 0–9, *, Manual References
When called party each time mode for Intercept #, [ ] [Secret], and P 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—
does not answer Routing–No Answer and [Pause]) [4-1-1] Extension—Wired
—Day, Lunch, Intercept Routing–DND. Extension—Extension
Break, Night Note that Intercept Routing– Settings—Intercept
Busy calls are routed using Destination—Intercept
Intercept Destination— Destination—When Called
When Called Party is Busy Party is Busy
below.
Feature Manual
References
2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing
Intercept Specifies the Intercept Max. 32 digits Feature Manual
Destination— Routing destination of calls (consisting of 0–9, *, References
When Called when the extension is busy. #, [ ] [Secret], and P 2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing
Party is Busy [Pause])

Intercept No Answer Time

Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension Max. 5 digits
Number number of the extension. (consisting of 0–
9)
Extension Specifies the name of the Max. 20
Name extension. characters
Intercept No Specifies the length of time 0–240 s PC Programming Manual
Answer Time— until an unanswered call is References
Day, Lunch, redirected to the intercept 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3]
Break, Night routing destination in each time System—Timers & Counters—
mode. Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—
When this setting is set to "0", Intercept Routing No Answer
the system timer is used. (IRNA)—Day (s), Lunch (s),
Break (s), Night (s)
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

CLIP
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension Max. 5 digits (consisting
Number number of the of 0–9)
extension.
Extension Specifies the name of Max. 20 characters
Name the extension.

PC Programming Manual 429

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

CLIP ID Specifies the CLIP Max. 16 digits Feature Manual References
number sent to the (consisting of 0–9, *, 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
public network to show and #) Identification Presentation
on the called party’s (CLIP/COLP)
telephone display when
making a trunk call.
CLIP on Selects the CLIP Extension: Show the PC Programming Manual
Extension/CO number to show on the CLIP number specified References
called party’s telephone. in CLIP ID. 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
CO: Show the CLIP Configuration—Slot—Port
number specified in Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO
Subscriber Number in —Subscriber Number
9.26 PBX 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port
Configuration—Slot— Property - PRI Port—CO
Port Property - BRI Setting—Subscriber Number
Port or 9.27 PBX 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—
Configuration—[1-1] [4-1-1] Extension—Wired
Configuration—Slot— Extension—Extension Settings
Port Property - PRI —CLIP—CLIP ID
Port.
Feature Manual References
4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation
(CLIP/COLP)
CLIR Specifies whether to Disable, Enable Feature Manual References
restrict the display of the 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
CLIP number on the Identification Presentation
called party’s telephone (CLIP/COLP)
when making a public
network trunk call.
COLR Specifies whether to Disable, Enable Feature Manual References
restrict the display of the 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
CLIP number of the Identification Presentation
extension on the caller’s (CLIP/COLP)
telephone display when
answering a call.

UM
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number of Max. 5 digits
Number the extension. (consisting of 0–9)
Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Max. 20 characters
Two-way Specifies whether to enable the two- Enable, Disable Feature Manual
Recording way recording feature for the References
extension using the Unified 3.2.2.30 Two-way
Messaging system. Record/Two-way
Transfer

430 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Option 1
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number of Max. 5 digits
Number the extension. (consisting of 0–
9)
Extension Specifies the name of the Max. 20
Name extension. characters
Wireless XDP / Specifies the extension number of Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Shared the PS with which Wireless XDP (consisting of 0– References
Extension Parallel Mode is established. To 9) 2.11.11 One-numbered
enable Wireless XDP Parallel Extension
Mode, the PS must be turned off 5.2.4.5 Wireless XDP
once and then turned on after Parallel Mode
assigning this setting.
This setting also specifies the sub
extension for the main extension of
a one-numbered extension.

Note
When Wireless XDP, S-PSs
cannot be used with this setting.
Ring Pattern Specifies the Ring Tone Pattern 1–8 PC Programming
Table Table to be used by the extension. Manual References
10.8.1 PBX Configuration—
[2-8-1] System—Ring Tone
Patterns—Call from CO
10.8.2 PBX Configuration—
[2-8-2] System—Ring Tone
Patterns—Call from
DOORPHONE
10.8.3 PBX Configuration—
[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone
Patterns—Call from Others
Feature Manual
References
2.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern
Selection
Programmed Specifies the mailbox number of the Max. 16 digits
Mailbox No. incoming call distribution group’s (consisting of 0–
mailbox for Voice Processing 9, *, and #)
Systems (VPS) with DTMF
Integration.
Transfer Recall Specifies the transfer recall Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Destination destination when an extension user (consisting of 0– References
transfers a call with the Call 9) 2.12.1 Call Transfer
Transfer without Announcement
feature and the transferred call is
not answered within a certain time
period.

PC Programming Manual 431

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

ARS Itemised Specifies the itemised billing code Max. 10 digits PC Programming
Code used by the ARS feature for (consisting of 0– Manual References
identifying calls made from the 9, *, and #) 16.5 PBX Configuration—
extension for accounting and billing [8-5] ARS—Carrier
purposes.
Feature Manual
References
2.7.6 Verification Code Entry
2.8.1 Automatic Route
Selection (ARS)

Option 2
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number of Max. 5 digits
Number the extension. (consisting of 0–9)
Extension Specifies the name of the Max. 20 characters
Name extension.
Manual C. Selects the method of receiving Off: No notification Feature Manual
Waiting for call waiting notification from other BSS: Tone from the References
Extension extensions. handset or built-in 2.1.3.3 Call Waiting
Call speaker 2.10.4.1 Second Call
OHCA: Voice from Notification to Busy
the built-in speaker Extension—SUMMARY
W-OHCA: Voice
from the handset
Automatic C. Specifies whether to receive call Off, On Feature Manual
Waiting waiting notifications for calls from References
a trunk, doorphone calls, and 2.1.3.3 Call Waiting
calls via an incoming call
distribution group.
Pickup Dial Sets or cancels the Hot Line Off, On PC Programming
Set feature. The number specified in Manual References
Pickup Dial No. on this screen is 10.3 PBX Configuration—
dialled automatically after going [2-3] System—Timers &
off-hook when the Hot Line Counters—Dial / IRNA /
feature is active. Recall / Tone—Dial—Hot
Line (Pickup Dial) Start (s)
Feature Manual
References
2.6.6 Hot Line
Pickup Dial Specifies the number to be dialled Max. 32 digits Feature Manual
No. automatically after going off-hook (consisting of 0–9, *, References
when the Hot Line feature is #, T [Transfer], [ ] 2.6.6 Hot Line
active. [Secret], P [Pause],
and F [Flash])

432 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Data Mode Sets or cancels the protection Off, On Feature Manual
against tones or interruptions References
from other extensions during 2.11.5 Data Line Security
communication.

Option 3
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number Max. 5 digits (consisting of
Number of the extension. 0–9)
Extension Specifies the name of the Max. 20 characters
Name extension.
Call Pickup Specifies whether calls can be Disable: Allows other Feature Manual
Deny picked up by other extensions. extension users to pick up References
calls to your extension 2.4.3 Call Pickup
Enable: Prevents other
extension users from
picking up calls to your
extension
Call Pickup Specifies how incoming calls Display & Tone1, Display & Feature Manual
Group that can be answered by an Tone2, Display & Tone3, References
Monitoring extension in a pickup group are Display only, Disable 2.4.3 Call Pickup
indicated on a PT (display, tone,
etc.). Note
• Supported terminals
are: DPT, DPT (S-
DPT), S-Hybrid, S-
Hybrid (S-DPT),
IP-EXT
• The number of
terminals are limited
to 256.
Executive Specifies whether calls can be Disable: Allows other Feature Manual
Override interrupted by other extensions. extension users to interrupt References
Deny an existing call 2.10.2 Executive Busy
Enable: Prevents other Override
extension users from
interrupting an existing call
Absent Specifies the Personal Absent Max. 16 characters Feature Manual
Message Message which, unlike the References
System Absent Message, can 2.20.2 Absent
be customised for each Message
extension.

PC Programming Manual 433

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Charge Limit Specifies the maximum limit of 0–9999999 PC Programming
call charges allowed for the Manual References
extension. When this limit is 14.2 PBX
reached, the extension cannot Configuration—[6-2]
be used to make further trunk Feature—Hotel &
calls. Charge
The number of decimal places
that can be specified here Feature Manual
depends on the value set in References
Charge Options—Digits After 2.7.2 Budget
Decimal Point in 14.2 PBX Management
Configuration—[6-2] Feature—
Hotel & Charge.
Intercom Selects the method of receiving Tone Call, Voice Call, Deny Feature Manual
Call by Voice intercom calls. When Deny Voice Call References
Voice Call is selected, the 2.5.3 Intercom Call
extension will always ring when
receiving calls, regardless of
how the caller wants to make the
call.

Option 4
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Number number of the extension.
Extension Specifies the name of the Max. 20 characters
Name extension.
Outgoing Selects the line to be No Line: No line is seized. PC Programming
Preferred seized after going off- Idle: An idle trunk is seized Manual References
Line hook to make a call. automatically from the 12.1.4 PBX
programmed trunk groups. Configuration—[4-1-4]
ICM/PDN: An extension line is Extension—Wired
seized, or, for a PDN extension, Extension—Flexible
an idle PDN button is selected. Button
F-1–F-84: A trunk programmed
for a flexible button (F-1–F-84) is Feature Manual
seized. A flexible button References
customised as a Single-CO, 2.5.5.2 Line Preference
Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD —Outgoing
Group button must be selected.

434 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Incoming Selects the line on which No Line: No line is selected. PC Programming
Preferred an incoming call is Select a line by pressing the Manual References
Line answered after going off- desired Line Access button to 12.1.4 PBX
hook. answer a call. Configuration—[4-1-4]
Note that even if a Ringing Line: The longest ringing Extension—Wired
specific PDN button is call is selected. Extension—Flexible
selected here, a call PDN: The call arriving at any Button
ringing at any PDN button PDN button is selected.
on the extension will be F-1–F-84: The call arriving at a Feature Manual
answered when going off- flexible button (F-1–F-84) is References
hook. selected. A flexible button 2.4.2 Line Preference—
customised as a Single-CO, Incoming
Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD
Group button must be selected.
Call Waiting Selects the type of Call CW Tone 1, CW Tone 2 Feature Manual
Tone Type Waiting tone sent to the References
busy extension. 2.10.4.2 Call Waiting
Tone
LCS Specifies whether to Stop Record, Keep Record Feature Manual
Recording continue or stop References
Mode recording the message in 3.1.1 Unified Messaging
the extension’s mailbox System Overview
when the extension user
answers a call that was
being monitored.
LCS Answer Specifies whether the Hands free: Monitor through the Feature Manual
Mode extension’s mailbox is built-in speaker References
monitored in Hands-free Private: Monitor through the 2.11.1 Hands-free
or Private mode. handset or the built-in speaker Operation
after hearing a warning tone 3.1.1 Unified Messaging
System Overview

Option 5
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number of the Max. 5 digits
Number extension. (consisting of 0–9)
Extension Specifies the name of the extension. Max. 20 characters
Name
Display Selects the display language of the Language1– Feature Manual
Language extension telephone. Language5 References
2.21.4 Display
Information
Incoming Call Selects which caller information is Caller ID Name, Feature Manual
Display shown on the first line of the extension’s CO Line Name, References
display. DDI/DID Name 2.21.4 Display
Information

PC Programming Manual 435

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Automatic LCD Enables the first line of the display to Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Switch when show the call duration automatically References
Start Talking after answering a trunk call. 2.21.4 Display
Information
Key Pad Tone Specifies whether key pad tones are Off, On
heard when dialling.
Automatic Enables the extension to answer an Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Answer for CO incoming trunk call automatically after a References
Call certain number of rings without going 2.4.4 Hands-free
off-hook, when Hands-free Answerback Answerback
has been set on the extension. This
setting is only effective when Forced
Automatic Answer on this screen has
been set to Off.

Option 6
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number of the Max. 5 digits (consisting
Number extension. of 0–9)
Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Max. 20 characters
Forced Specifies whether the extension Off, On
Automatic automatically answers all incoming calls
Answer (both intercom and trunk calls) without
going off-hook, regardless of the Hands-
free Answerback setting.
Flexible Button Specifies whether the extension user No Limitation, One-
Programming can modify all flexible buttons without touch Dial
Mode limitation, or only the One-touch Dialling
buttons. When the mode is set to One-
touch Dial, there is no need to enter "2"
before the number when customising a
One-touch Dialling button.
ICM Tone Selects the ring tone for incoming calls IP-PT (except
arriving at the INTERCOM button or KX-NT265/KX-NT321):
PDN buttons. Note that the ring tone 1–30
specified here is applied to all PDN KX-NT265/KX-NT321:
buttons on an extension. 1–8 (Even if ring tone
9–30 is selected, ring
tone 1 is heard.)
Other telephones: 1–8
(Even if ring tone 9–30
is selected, ring tone 2
is heard.)

436 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Display Locks or unlocks the Incoming Call Log Unlock, Lock Feature
Lock/SVM Lock display (i.e., specifies whether other Manual
extension users can see the Incoming References
Call Log information at the extension).
2.19.2
Incoming Call
Log
Paging Deny Specifies whether paging of the Disable, Enable Feature
extension from other extensions is Manual
enabled. References
2.17.1 Paging

Option 7
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Number Specifies the extension number of Max. 5 digits
the extension. (consisting of 0–
9)
Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Max. 20
characters
Character Input Selects the character table to be Table 1: Standard
Mode used for entering characters. mode
Table 2: Option
mode
Flash Mode during Selects the function of the FLASH/ EFA, Terminate, Feature Manual
CO Conversation RECALL button during a trunk Flash Recall References
conversation. 2.11.6 Flash/Recall/
Terminate
2.11.7 External
Feature Access (EFA)
Incoming Call Log Specifies the number of incoming 0–100 Feature Manual
Memory trunk calls that are retained in the References
extension’s Incoming Call Log 2.19.2 Incoming Call
memory. Log
Outgoing Call Log Specifies the number of telephone 1–100 Feature Manual
Memory numbers dialled by the extension that References
are retained in the extension’s 2.6.3 Last Number
Outgoing Call Log memory. Redial
ISDN Bearer Selects the ISDN bearer mode. Automatic, Feature Manual
When Automatic is selected, the Speech, Audio References
bearer mode is set automatically 4.1.2.1 Integrated
depending on the extension’s Services Digital
telephone type as follows: Network (ISDN)—
PT: Speech SUMMARY
SLT: Audio

PC Programming Manual 437

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Option 8
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number of the Max. 5 digits
Number extension. (consisting of
0–9)
Extension Specifies the name of the extension. Max. 20
Name characters
Group CW Enables an incoming call to an incoming call Disable,
w/o Tone distribution group to arrive at a previously Enable
(Ring after busy extension at the moment that the
Call) extension goes on-hook for the previous call.
Extension Enables the extension to send Caller ID Disable, Feature Manual
Caller ID information. Enable References
Sending 2.19.1 Caller ID
Note
This setting is available only when Port
Type is set to one of the following.
SLT/S-Hybrid/S-Hybrid(S-DPT)/S-
Hybrid(SLT)
Incoming Specifies the length of time that the ringing 0–15 s Feature Manual
Call Wait for a call is delayed when the call follows References
Timer for immediately after the previous unanswered 2.19.1 Caller ID
Extension call. When receiving two calls in quick
Caller ID succession (e.g., when a call waiting in a
queue is directed to an extension
immediately after the previous unanswered
call stops ringing), some SLTs require a
pause, after the first call stops ringing, to
receive the second call’s Caller ID
information.

Note
This setting is available only when Port
Type is set to one of the following.
SLT/S-Hybrid/S-Hybrid(S-DPT)/S-
Hybrid(SLT)
SLT MW Enables the use of the Message Waiting Disable, MW- Feature Manual
Mode Lamp on an SLT extension connected to the Lamp References
extension port. 2.20.1 Message Waiting
Note
This setting must be disabled for
Message Waiting by FSK.

438 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Wrap-up Specifies the length of time that must pass 0–3000 s PC Programming
Timer after completing a call before an extension Manual References
will accept another call when logged in as a 11.5.1.1 PBX
member of an Incoming Call Distribution Configuration—[3-5-1]
Group. Group—Incoming Call
This timer is used when "Options—Wrap-up Distribution Group—
Timer based on" is set to "Extension" in Group Settings—
11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group— Member List—Wrap-up
Incoming Call Distribution Group— Timer
Miscellaneous. 11.5.3 PBX
Configuration—[3-5-3]
Group—Incoming Call
Distribution Group—
Miscellaneous—Options
—Wrap-up Timer based
on
Feature Manual
References
2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-out

Option 9
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Number Specifies the extension number Max. 5 digits
of the extension. (consisting of 0–
9)
Extension Name Specifies the name of the Max. 20
extension. characters
PDN Delayed Specifies the delayed ringing Immediate, 1 Feature Manual
Ringing setting for calls to a PDN Ring, 2 Rings, 3 References
extension (an extension with Rings, 4 Rings, 5 2.9.1 Primary Directory
one or more PDN buttons). Rings, 6 Rings Number (PDN)/Secondary
Directory Number (SDN)
Extension
Built-in Specifies whether to enable or Disable, Basic PC Programming Manual
Communication disable the Communication Only, Enable References
Assistant Assistant (CA) application for 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—
each extension. [1-1] Configuration—Slot—
System Property—Site—Port
Number—Built-in
Communication Assistant
Server
Feature Manual
References
2.26.2 CA (Communication
Assistant)

PC Programming Manual 439

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Mobile Extension Specifies whether to enable or Disable, Enable Feature Manual
disable mobile extension References
features (with a cellular phone 2.27.1 Cellular Phone
or other outside destination) for Features—SUMMARY
the extension.
Guest Room Specifies "Yes" to the Guest Yes, No Feature Manual
Room the each extension port References
when hotel uses a FOS system 2.23.4 Built-in FOS Interface
(Front Office Software).

FWD / DND
Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings for each extension can be referred. FWD and
DND settings can be programmed separately for each extension in 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2]
Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension Max. 5 digits
Number number of the extension. (consisting of 0–9)
Extension Specifies the name of the Max. 20 characters
Name extension.
FWD Mode for Indicates the forwarding None, FWD All, PC Programming Manual
Call from CO type of incoming trunk calls FWD Busy, FWD References
(reference only). N/A, FWD Busy 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—
N/A [4-1-2] Extension—Wired
Extension—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
FWD Indicates the forwarding Max. 32 digits PC Programming Manual
Destination for destination of incoming (consisting of 0–9, References
Call from CO trunk calls (reference only). *, #, [ ] [Secret], 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—
and P [Pause]) [4-1-2] Extension—Wired
Extension—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
FWD Mode for Indicates the forwarding None, FWD All, PC Programming Manual
Call from type of incoming intercom FWD Busy, FWD References
Extension calls (reference only). N/A, FWD Busy 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—
N/A [4-1-2] Extension—Wired
Extension—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

440 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

FWD Indicates the forwarding Max. 32 digits PC Programming Manual
Destination for destination of incoming (consisting of 0–9, References
Call from intercom calls (reference *, #, [ ] [Secret], 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—
Extension only). and P [Pause]) [4-1-2] Extension—Wired
Extension—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
FWD No Specifies the length of time 0–120 s PC Programming Manual
Answer Time that an incoming call rings References
at the extension before the 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—
call is forwarded. [4-1-2] Extension—Wired
Extension—FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
Keep ring after Specifies whether an Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual
FWD NA to CO extension continues to ring References
after forwarding an 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—
incoming call to an outside [4-1-2] Extension—Wired
destination via FWD N/A or Extension—FWD/DND
FWD Busy N/A.
Feature Manual References
2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
Remote FWD Specifies the COS that Disable, 1–64 Feature Manual References
COS allows the FWD setting on 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
the extension to be
changed from another
extension. This COS must
then be set for the
extensions that will
remotely change the FWD
setting.

12.1.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—

Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together. Pre-
assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten.
If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded.

PC Programming Manual 441

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Location Entry Specifies the extension Wired PC Programming Manual
—Beginning number of the first location extension References
Entry Location to be programmed. number 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
(Ext. Number) Extension—Wired Extension—
Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)
Location Entry Specifies the number of 1–total number PC Programming Manual
—Number to locations to be of connected References
Generate programmed. wired 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
A CLIP number will only be extensions Extension—Wired Extension—
assigned to connected Extension Settings
wired extensions, even if
the number entered here is Feature Manual References
larger than the total number 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
of wired extensions. Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)
Parameter— Specifies the number of 0–5 PC Programming Manual
Deleting Digits digits to be deleted from the References
start of an extension 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
number when using it as Extension—Wired Extension—
part of the CLIP number. Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)
Parameter— Specifies a prefix number to Max. 16 digits PC Programming Manual
Head of ID be applied to all generated (consisting of References
CLIP numbers. 0–9, *, and #) 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
Extension—Wired Extension—
Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)
Parameter— Specifies a suffix number to Max. 16 digits PC Programming Manual
Tail of ID be applied to all generated (consisting of References
CLIP numbers. 0–9, *, and #) 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
Extension—Wired Extension—
Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)

442 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension

—FWD/DND
For each extension, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be
programmed for incoming intercom and trunk calls. Select the desired extension from the Extension
Number / Name list.
To copy the FWD/DND settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy to.
Name Description Value Range Links
Forward / Specifies the FWD/DND setting for Always (All), Feature Manual
DND—For external calls. Busy, No References
external calls If Always (All), Busy, No Answer, or Answer, Busy / 2.3.1 Call Forwarding
Busy / No Answer is selected, the FWD No Answer, Do (FWD)/Do Not Disturb
destination field can be set. Not Disturb, Off (DND)—SUMMARY
Forward / Specifies the FWD/DND setting for Always (All), Feature Manual
DND—For internal calls. Busy, No References
internal calls If Always (All), Busy, No Answer, or Answer, Busy / 2.3.1 Call Forwarding
Busy / No Answer is selected, the FWD No Answer, Do (FWD)/Do Not Disturb
destination field can be set. Not Disturb, Off (DND)—SUMMARY
If For both external calls and internal
calls is checked, this setting becomes
unavailable, and the value set for external
calls is applied to internal calls.

12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired Extension

—Speed Dial
Personal Speed Dialling allows extension users to dial frequently dialled numbers using two-digit speed
dialling numbers (00–99). A maximum of 100 Personal Speed Dialling numbers can be programmed for
each extension. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
Name Description Value Range Links
Speed Dialling Specifies the name of the Max. 20 characters Feature Manual
- Personal Personal Speed Dialling number References
Name to call using the Personal Speed 2.6.4 Speed Dialling—
Dialling Directory shown on the Personal/System
extension’s display.
Speed Dialling Specifies the number to be Max. 32 digits Feature Manual
- Personal dialled by the Personal Speed (consisting of 0–9, *, #, References
Number Dialling number. T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], 2.6.4 Speed Dialling—
P [Pause], and F Personal/System
[Flash])

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension

—Flexible Button
Overview
Each flexible button can be customised to allow one-touch access to a certain feature. A maximum of 84
flexible buttons can be customised for each extension. Select the desired extension from the Extension
Number / Name list.

PC Programming Manual 443

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Note
• Rows whose Key Location field is coloured can be customised.
• The number of available flexible buttons is displayed in Available Keys on the screen.
• This feature is available only for DPTs and IP-PTs.
KX-NT505 Flexible Buttons
KX-NT553/KX-NT556 IP-PTs can be connected to up to 4 KX-NT505 48 key add-on units. When an
extension that has one or more KX-NT505 units connected is selected in the Extension Number / Name
list, Number of Connections NT505 and NT505 Location No. are displayed. In Number of Connections
NT505, specify the number of connected KX-NT505 units (a maximum of 4). This configuration is available
at the Installer level only. Then, in NT505 Location No., select a KX-NT505 to program. Up to 48 flexible
buttons can be programmed for each KX-NT505 unit.

Note
Up to 8 KX-NT505 units can be connected to the PBX system.

Copying Flexible Button Settings

To copy the flexible button settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy to. This operation
(Copy to) is available at the User (Administrator) level.

Note
The Copy to button can be used with KX-NT505 units, even if the number of connected KX-NT505 units
differs between extensions. Settings for NT505 Location No. will be copied to the same number of the
copy target extension. However, if a matching NT505 Location No. does not exist at the target
destination, those settings will not be copied.

For more information on flexible buttons, see "2.21.2 Flexible Buttons" in the Feature Manual.
Once flexible buttons have been programmed, the Terminal Label Print utility can be used to print label
sheets, which can be attached to extension telephones for quick reference. For details, see 1.2.2.1 Editing
and Printing Terminal Labels in Off-line Mode.
To access the Super Master CS for related programming, click SIP-CS Web. The CS Web login screen will
open in your web browser.

Note
For this button to be enabled, you must specify the URL of the Super Master CS in the Utility—CS-Web
Connection screen. See 7.12 Utility—CS-Web Connection.

444 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Name Description Value Range Links

Type Specifies the feature to be Not Stored, Loop CO, PC Programming
assigned to the flexible button. Single CO, Group CO, Manual References
DSS, One-touch, ICD 12.1.4.1 PBX
Group, Message Waiting, Configuration—[4-1-4]
FWD/DND (Both), Extension—Wired
FWD/DND (External), Extension—Flexible
FWD/DND (Internal), Button—Flexible button
Group Fwd (Both), Group data copy
Fwd (External), Group
Fwd (Internal), Account,
Conference, Terminate,
EFA, Charge, Call Park,
Call Log, Log-in/Log-out,
Hurry-up, Wrap-up,
System Alarm, Time
Service, Answer,
Release, TRS Level
Change, ISDN Service,
CLIR, COLR, ISDN Hold,
Headset, Time Service -
Automatic/Manual, Check
In, Check Out, Cleaned
Up, Two-way Record,
Two-way Transfer, LCS,
Voice Mail Transfer,
NDSS, CTI, PDN, SDN,
DN
Notice
For each KX-UT
series SIP phone that
is connected to the
PBX, at least one DN
button must be
assigned to the
extension. Without a
DN button assigned,
the extension will not
be able to make or
receive calls.
Parameter Specifies the trunk to be 1–208 Feature Manual
Selection (for accessed. References
Single CO) 2.5.5.3 Trunk Access
Parameter Specifies the trunk group to be 1–64 Feature Manual
Selection (for accessed. References
Group CO) 2.5.5.3 Trunk Access
Parameter Specifies whether a call is Automatic, Specific Feature Manual
Selection (for parked in an idle parking zone References
Call Park) automatically or in a specific 2.13.2 Call Park
parking zone.

PC Programming Manual 445

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Name Description Value Range Links

Parameter Specifies which incoming call None: The incoming call Feature Manual
Selection (for distribution groups that the distribution group is References
Log-in/Log-out) extension belongs to are selected manually. 2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-out
logged in to or logged out from. All: All incoming call
distribution groups that
the extension belongs to.
Incoming Group: A pre-
specified incoming call
distribution group
Parameter Selects which time modes are All (Day/Night/Lunch/ Feature Manual
Selection (for switched manually. Break), Day/Night/Break, References
Time Service) Day/Night/Lunch, Day/ 5.1.4 Time Service
Night
Parameter Specifies the TRS/Barring level Level 1–Level 7 Feature Manual
Selection (for to be used temporarily on a References
TRS Level certain extension. 2.7.1 Toll Restriction
Change) (TRS)/Call Barring
(Barring)
2.7.4 Dial Tone Transfer
Parameter Specifies the Time Table to be Table 1–Table 8 Feature Manual
Selection (for used when the Time Service References
Time Service - Switching Mode is set to 5.1.4 Time Service
Automatic/ Automatic.
Manual)
Parameter Specifies the delayed ringing Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Feature Manual
Selection (for setting for calls arriving at an Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 References
SDN) SDN button. Rings, 6 Rings, No Ring 2.9.1 Primary Directory
Number (PDN)/
Secondary Directory
Number (SDN)
Extension
Extension Specifies the number of an Max. 5 digits (consisting
Number (for extension to be accessed. of 0–9)
DSS)
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits (consisting
Number (for number of an incoming call of 0–9)
ICD Group) distribution group to be
accessed.
Extension Specifies the number of an Max. 5 digits (consisting
Number (for extension or floating extension of 0–9)
Message number of an incoming call
Waiting) distribution group for which
messages are checked. If this
cell is left empty, the extension
will check its own messages
only.

446 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Number (for number of an incoming call of 0–9) References
Group Fwd distribution group or the 2.3.1 Call Forwarding
(Both)) extension number to set FWD (FWD)/Do Not Disturb
remotely whose intercom and (DND)—SUMMARY
trunk calls will be forwarded. 2.3.2 Call Forwarding
(FWD)
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Number (for number of an incoming call of 0–9) References
Group Fwd distribution group or the 2.3.1 Call Forwarding
(External)) extension number to set FWD (FWD)/Do Not Disturb
remotely whose trunk calls will (DND)—SUMMARY
be forwarded. 2.3.2 Call Forwarding
(FWD)
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Number (for number of an incoming call of 0–9) References
Group Fwd distribution group or the 2.3.1 Call Forwarding
(Internal)) extension number to set FWD (FWD)/Do Not Disturb
remotely whose intercom calls (DND)—SUMMARY
will be forwarded. 2.3.2 Call Forwarding
(FWD)
Extension Specifies the extension’s own Max. 5 digits (consisting
Number (for number or the floating of 0–9)
Call Log) extension number of an
incoming call distribution group
for which call log information is
displayed. If the cell is left
empty, the extension will
display its own call log
information.
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Number (for number of an incoming call of 0–9) References
Log-in/Log-out) distribution group to log-in to or 2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-out
log-out from.
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Number (for number of the incoming call of 0–9) References
Hurry-up) distribution group whose 2.2.2.4 Queuing
longest waiting call will be Feature
redirected (Manual Queue
Redirection).
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Number (for number of the UM/VM (DPT) of 0–9) References
Two-way group containing the 2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT
Record) extension’s mailbox. (Digital) Integration
3.1.1 Unified Messaging
System Overview

PC Programming Manual 447

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Number (for number of the UM/VM (DPT) of 0–9) References
Two-way group containing the desired 2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT
Transfer) mailbox. (Digital) Integration
3.1.1 Unified Messaging
System Overview
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 8 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Number (for number of the UM/VM (DTMF/ of 0–9) References
Voice Mail DPT) group containing the 2.28.2 Voice Mail DTMF
Transfer) desired mailbox. Integration
2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT
(Digital) Integration
3.1.1 Unified Messaging
System Overview
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Number (for number of the PDN extension of 0–9) References
SDN) corresponding to this SDN 2.9.1 Primary Directory
button. Number (PDN)/
Note that the extension Secondary Directory
specified here must have a Number (SDN)
PDN button registered for the Extension
SDN button to function.
Extension Indicates the name of the Max. 20 characters
Name extension, when an extension
number is specified (reference
only).
Dial (for One- Specifies the number to be Max. 32 digits (consisting Feature Manual
touch) dialled. The PBX can have a of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], References
maximum of 2000 One-touch [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], 2.6.2 One-touch Dialling
Dialling buttons for extensions. and F [Flash])
Dial (for ISDN Specifies the number required Max. 32 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Service) to access the telephone of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], References
company’s ISDN service. [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], 4.1.2.11 ISDN Service
and F [Flash]) Access by Keypad
Protocol
Dial (for NDSS) Specifies the network Max. 16 digits (consisting Feature Manual
extension number of the of 0–9) References
extension to be accessed 4.3.5.1 Network Direct
using Network Direct Station Station Selection
Selection. (NDSS)
Note that only extension
numbers that have been
previously registered in
17.4 PBX Configuration—
[9-4] Private Network—NDSS
Key Table can be specified
here.

448 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Name Description Value Range Links

Label Name Specifies the name of each Max. 12 characters Feature Manual
flexible button for KX-NT366 References
and KX-NT553/KX-NT556/ Note
2.21.2 Flexible Buttons
KX-NT560 IP-PTs, and The maximum length
KX-UT248 and KX-UT670 SIP- for KX-UT248 and
MLTs. The name specified KX-UT670 labels is
here is displayed on the LCD 10 characters.
for each button.
Optional Specifies the Time Table to be Table 1–Table 8 Feature Manual
Parameter used for changing time modes References
(Ringing Tone in the Automatic Switching 5.1.4 Time Service
Type Number) mode.
(for Time
Service)
Optional Specifies the ring tone type. IP-PT (except
Parameter KX-NT265/KX-NT321):
(Ringing Tone 1–30
Type Number) KX-NT265/KX-NT321: 1–
(for Loop CO, 8 (Even if ring tone 9–30
Single CO, is selected, ring tone 1 is
Group CO, ICD heard.)
Group, SDN) S-PS: Not available.
Other telephones: 1–8
(Even if ring tone 9–30 is
selected, ring tone 2 is
heard.)
Optional Specifies the number of the Park 00–Park 99 Feature Manual
Parameter parking zone a call is to be References
(Ringing Tone parked in when a Call Park 2.13.2 Call Park
Type Number) button with Parameter
(for Call Park) Selection (for Call Park) on
this screen set to Specific is
pressed.
Ext No. of Specifies the number of the Max. 5 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Mailbox (for extension whose mailbox will of 0–9) References
Two-way be used to record 2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT
Transfer) conversations using One-touch (Digital) Integration
Two-way Transfer. (For 3.1.1 Unified Messaging
example, a secretary can System Overview
record a conversation into the
mailbox of a boss.) If the cell is
left empty, the extension user
must specify the number of an
extension each time.

12.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—

Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy
The flexible button settings (including key label settings) of an extension can be copied to different
extensions.

PC Programming Manual 449

12.1.5 PBX Configuration—[4-1-5] Extension—Wired Extension—PF Button

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Destination Select the number and name of the extension PC Programming
Extension that will receive the copied settings. Multiple Manual References
Line extensions can be selected. To select all 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—
extensions at once, click Select All. [4-1-4] Extension—Wired
When selecting multiple extensions, note that if Extension—Flexible Button
the source extension has an SDN button, the
copy operation cannot be performed.

12.1.5 PBX Configuration—[4-1-5] Extension—Wired Extension

—PF Button
Each Programmable Feature (PF) button can be customised to access a certain feature with one touch. A
maximum of 12 PF buttons can be customised for each extension. Select the desired extension from the
Extension Number / Name list.
Name Description Value Range Links
Type Specifies whether to store a Not Stored, One Touch Feature Manual
dialling number for the one- References
touch access. 2.21.2 Flexible Buttons
Dial Specifies the number to be Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, Feature Manual
dialled. *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P References
[Pause], and F [Flash]) 2.21.2 Flexible Buttons

12.1.6 PBX Configuration—[4-1-6] Extension—Wired Extension

—NDSS Link Data - Send
It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension’s status data over the network. Select the desired
extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Network BLF Data Selects whether extension status data OFF, ON PC Programming Manual
to NDSS Key of is transmitted over the network for the References
Other PBX - Other selected extension. This setting is 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1]
PBX (Network automatically set to ON when the Private Network—TIE Table
PBX ID=1) feature is used, and can only be
manually changed from ON to OFF, to Feature Manual
cancel data transmission. References
4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station
Selection (NDSS)

12.1.7 PBX Configuration—[4-1-7] Extension—Wired Extension

—CLIP ID Table
Up to 8 CLIP IDs can be set for each wired extension.

450 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.8 PBX Configuration—[4-1-8] Extension—Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
extension (reference only).
Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension Max. 20 characters
(reference only).
CLIP 1–8 Specifies up to 8 CLIP IDs for the Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9,
extension. *, and #)

12.1.8 PBX Configuration—[4-1-8] Extension—Wired Extension

—Simplified Voice Message
The built-in Simplified Voice Message feature can be provided for each extension. This screen allows you to
specify which extension uses this feature, and the maximum number of messages that can be stored for
each extension.
For more information on Simplified Voice Message, see 2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) in
the Feature Manual.
Name Description Value Range Links
Shelf Indicates the shelf position 1-4
(reference only).
Slot Indicates the slot position Slot number
(reference only).
Port Indicates the port number Port number
(reference only).
Extension Indicates the extension number Max. 5 digits PC Programming
Number (reference only). (consisting of 0– Manual References
9) 9.35 PBX Configuration—
[1-2] Configuration—Portable
Station
Extension Indicates the name of the Max. 20 PC Programming
Name extension (reference only). characters Manual References
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—
[4-1-1] Extension—Wired
Extension—Extension
Settings—Main—Extension
Name
Simplified Specifies whether to enable the Enable, Disable
Voice Simplified Voice Message feature.
Message
Maximum Specifies the maximum number of 1-100
SVM Log voice messages (not including
greeting messages) that can be
stored for the extension.

PC Programming Manual 451

12.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2] Extension—Portable Station

12.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2] Extension—Portable

Station
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—
Extension Settings
For each Portable Station (PS), various extension settings can be assigned. A maximum of 128 PSs can be
programmed.
To copy the settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy to. The copied data includes
FWD/DND and flexible button settings.
To assign a set of CLIP numbers automatically, click CLIP Generate. To assign names and tenants to
extension user groups, click Extension User Group Table. See 11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—
User Group for more details.

Main
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Indicates the extension number of the PS Max. 5 digits PC Programming
Number (reference only). (consisting of Manual References
0–9) 9.35 PBX Configuration—
[1-2] Configuration—
Portable Station—
Extension No.
Extension Specifies the name of the PS. Max. 20 PC Programming
Name characters Manual References
9.35 PBX Configuration—
[1-2] Configuration—
Portable Station—
Extension Name
Property Indicates the property (reference only). Portable
Station
User Specifies the extension user group to which 1–32 Feature Manual
Group the PS belongs. The extension user group References
is used to compose tenants, call pickup 5.1.2 Group
groups and paging groups. 5.1.3 Tenant Service
COS Specifies the COS of the PS. 1–64 PC Programming
Manual References
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
[2-7-1] System—Class of
Service—COS Settings
Feature Manual
References
5.1.1 Class of Service
(COS)

452 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Specifies the PIN of the PS. Max. 10 digits Feature Manual
PIN (consisting of References
CAUTION 0–9) 2.24.1 Extension Personal
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone Identification Number (PIN)
calls will be made if a third party
discovers a personal identification
number (PIN) (verification code PIN or
extension PIN) of the PBX.
The cost of such calls will be billed to
the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of
fraudulent use, we strongly
recommend:
a. Keeping PINs secret.
b. Selecting complex, random PINs
that cannot be easily guessed.
c. Changing PINs frequently.
To change an extension PIN:
1. Click Edit under Extension PIN for
the extension to change.
2. In the window that appears, enter the
new extension PIN and then enter it
again to confirm it.
3. Click OK.

Intercept Destination
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Indicates the extension Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Number number of the PS (consisting of 0–9) References
(reference only). 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable Station
—Extension No.
Extension Name Specifies the name of the Max. 20 characters PC Programming Manual
PS. References
9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable Station
—Extension Name

PC Programming Manual 453

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Intercept Specifies the Intercept Max. 32 digits PC Programming Manual
Destination— Routing destination of calls (consisting of 0–9, References
When called in each time mode for *, #, [ ] [Secret], 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—
party does not Intercept Routing–No and P [Pause]) [4-2-1] Extension—Portable
answer—Day, Answer and Intercept Station—Extension Settings—
Lunch, Break, Routing–DND. Intercept Destination—Intercept
Night Note that Intercept Destination—When Called Party
Routing–Busy calls are is Busy
routed using Intercept
Destination—When Feature Manual References
Called Party is Busy 2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing
below.
Intercept Specifies the Intercept Max. 32 digits Feature Manual References
Destination— Routing destination of calls (consisting of 0–9, 2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing
When Called when the extension is *, #, [ ] [Secret],
Party is Busy busy. and P [Pause])

Intercept No Answer Time

Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Indicates the extension Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Number number of the PS (consisting of References
(reference only). 0–9) 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable Station—
Extension No.
Extension Specifies the name of the Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
Name PS. characters References
9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable Station—
Extension Name
Intercept No Specifies the length of time 0–240 s PC Programming Manual
Answer Time until an unanswered call is References
—Day, Lunch, redirected to the intercept 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System
Break, Night routing destination in each —Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA /
time mode. Recall / Tone—Intercept Routing No
When this setting is set to Answer (IRNA)—Day (s), Lunch (s),
"0", the system timer is Break (s), Night (s)
used.
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

CLIP
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Indicates the extension Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Number number of the PS (consisting of 0–9) References
(reference only). 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable Station—
Extension No.

454 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Specifies the name of Max. 20 characters PC Programming Manual
Name the PS. References
9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable Station—
Extension Name
CLIP ID Specifies the CLIP Max. 16 digits Feature Manual References
number sent to the (consisting of 0–9, *, 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
public network to show and #) Identification Presentation (CLIP/
on the called party’s COLP)
telephone display when
making a trunk call.
CLIP on Selects the CLIP Extension: Show the PC Programming Manual
Extension/CO number to show on the CLIP number specified References
called party’s in CLIP ID. 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
telephone. CO: Show the CLIP Configuration—Slot—Port Property
number specified in - BRI Port—ISDN CO—Subscriber
Subscriber Number Number
in 9.26 PBX 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property
Configuration—Slot - PRI Port—CO Setting—
—Port Property - BRI Subscriber Number
Port or 9.27 PBX 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Configuration—[1-1] Extension—Portable Station—
Configuration—Slot Extension Settings—CLIP—CLIP
—Port Property - PRI ID
Port.
Feature Manual References
4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)
CLIR Specifies whether to Disable, Enable Feature Manual References
restrict the display of 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
the CLIP number on Identification Presentation (CLIP/
the called party’s COLP)
telephone when
making a public
network trunk call.
COLR Specifies whether to Disable, Enable Feature Manual References
restrict the display of 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
the CLIP number of the Identification Presentation (CLIP/
PS on the caller’s COLP)
telephone display when
answering a call.

UM
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number of Max. 5 digits
Number the PS (reference only). (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual 455

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Specifies the name of the PS. Max. 20 characters
Name
Two-way Specifies whether to enable the two- Enable, Disable Feature Manual
Recording way recording feature for the PS References
using the Unified Messaging system. 3.2.2.30 Two-way
Record/Two-way
Transfer

Option 1
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Indicates the extension Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Number number of the PS (reference (consisting of 0– References
only). 9) 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable Station—
Extension No.
Extension Specifies the name of the PS. Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
Name characters References
9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable Station—
Extension Name
Ring Pattern Specifies the Ring Tone 1–8 PC Programming Manual
Table Pattern Table to be used by References
the PS. 10.8.1 PBX Configuration—[2-8-1]
System—Ring Tone Patterns—
Call from CO
10.8.2 PBX Configuration—[2-8-2]
System—Ring Tone Patterns—
Call from DOORPHONE
10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3]
System—Ring Tone Patterns—
Call from Others
Feature Manual References
2.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern
Selection
Programmed Specifies the mailbox number Max. 16 digits
Mailbox No. of the incoming call (consisting of 0–
distribution group’s mailbox 9, *, and #)
for Voice Processing Systems
(VPS) with DTMF Integration.

456 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Transfer Recall Specifies the transfer recall Max. 5 digits Feature Manual References
Destination destination when an (consisting of 0– 2.12.1 Call Transfer
extension user transfers a call 9)
with the Call Transfer without
Announcement feature and
the transferred call is not
answered within a certain
time period.
ARS Itemised Specifies the itemised billing Max. 10 digits PC Programming Manual
Code code used by the ARS feature (consisting of 0– References
for identifying the calls made 9, *, and #) 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5]
from the PS for accounting ARS—Carrier
and billing purposes.
Feature Manual References
2.7.6 Verification Code Entry
2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection
(ARS)

Option 2
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Indicates the extension number Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Number of the PS (reference only). (consisting of 0–9) References
9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable Station
—Extension No.
Extension Specifies the name of the PS. Max. 20 characters PC Programming Manual
Name References
9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable Station
—Extension Name
Manual C. Selects the method of receiving Off: No notification Feature Manual References
Waiting for call waiting notification from BSS: Tone from 2.1.3.3 Call Waiting
Extension other extensions. the handset or
Call built-in speaker
Automatic C. Specifies whether to receive Off, On Feature Manual References
Waiting call waiting notification for a call 2.1.3.3 Call Waiting
from trunk, a doorphone call or
a call via an incoming call
distribution group.

PC Programming Manual 457

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Pickup Dial Sets or cancels the Hot Line Off, On PC Programming Manual
Set feature. The number specified References
in Pickup Dial No. on this 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3]
screen is dialled automatically System—Timers & Counters—
after going off-hook when the Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial
Hot Line feature is active. —Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start (s)
Feature Manual References
2.6.6 Hot Line
Pickup Dial Specifies the number to be Max. 32 digits Feature Manual References
No. dialled automatically after going (consisting of 0–9, 2.6.6 Hot Line
off-hook when the Hot Line *, #, T [Transfer],
feature is active. [ ] [Secret], P
[Pause], and F
[Flash])

Option 3
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Indicates the extension number of Max. 5 digits PC Programming
Number the PS (reference only). (consisting of 0–9) Manual References
9.35 PBX Configuration—
[1-2] Configuration—Portable
Station—Extension No.
Extension Specifies the name of the PS. Max. 20 characters PC Programming
Name Manual References
9.35 PBX Configuration—
[1-2] Configuration—Portable
Station—Extension Name
Call Pickup Specifies whether calls can be Disable: Allows other Feature Manual
Deny picked up by other extensions. extension users to References
pick up calls to your 2.4.3 Call Pickup
PS
Enable: Prevents
other extension users
from picking up calls
to your PS
Executive Specifies whether calls can be Disable: Allows other Feature Manual
Override interrupted by other extensions. extension users to References
Deny interrupt an existing 2.10.2 Executive Busy
call Override
Enable: Prevents
other extension users
from interrupting an
existing call
Absent Specifies the Personal Absent Max. 16 characters Feature Manual
Message Message which, unlike the References
System Absent Message, can be 2.20.2 Absent Message
customised for each PS.

458 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Charge Specifies the maximum limit of 0–9999999 PC Programming
Limit call charges allowed for the PS. Manual References
When this limit is reached, the PS 14.2 PBX Configuration—
cannot be used to make further [6-2] Feature—Hotel &
trunk calls. Charge
The number of decimal places
that can be specified here Feature Manual
depends on the value set in References
Charge Options—Digits After 2.7.2 Budget Management
Decimal Point in 14.2 PBX
Configuration—[6-2] Feature—
Hotel & Charge.

Option 4
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Indicates the extension Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) PC Programming
Number number of the PS Manual References
(reference only). 9.35 PBX Configuration—
[1-2] Configuration—
Portable Station—
Extension No.
Extension Specifies the name of Max. 20 characters PC Programming
Name the PS. Manual References
9.35 PBX Configuration—
[1-2] Configuration—
Portable Station—
Extension Name
Outgoing Selects the line to be No Line: No line is seized. PC Programming
Preferred seized after going off- Idle: An idle trunk is seized Manual References
Line hook to make a call. automatically from the 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—
programmed trunk groups. [4-2-3] Extension—Portable
ICM/PDN: An extension line is Station—Flexible Button
seized, or, for a PDN extension,
an idle PDN button is selected. Feature Manual
F-1–F-12: A trunk programmed References
for a flexible button (F-1–F-12) 2.5.5.2 Line Preference—
is seized. A flexible button Outgoing
customised as a Single-CO,
Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD
Group button must be selected.

PC Programming Manual 459

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Incoming Selects the line on which No Line: No line is selected. PC Programming
Preferred an incoming call is Select a line by pressing the Manual References
Line answered after going off- desired Line Access button to 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—
hook. answer a call. [4-2-3] Extension—Portable
Note that even if a Ringing Line: The longest Station—Flexible Button
specific PDN button is ringing call is selected.
selected here, a call PDN: The call arriving at any Feature Manual
ringing at any PDN PDN button is selected. References
button on the extension F-1–F-12: The call arriving at a 2.4.2 Line Preference—
will be answered when flexible button (F-1–F-12) is Incoming
going off-hook. selected. A flexible button
customised as a Single-CO,
Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD
Group button must be selected.
Call Waiting Selects the type of Call CW Tone 1, CW Tone 2 Feature Manual
Tone Type Waiting tone sent to the References
busy extension. 2.10.4.2 Call Waiting Tone
LCS Specifies whether to Stop Record, Keep Record Feature Manual
Recording continue or stop References
Mode recording the message 3.1.1 Unified Messaging
in the PS’s mailbox System Overview
when the PS user
answers a call that was
being monitored.

Option 5
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Indicates the extension Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Number number of the PS (reference (consisting of 0–9) References
only). 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable Station
—Extension No.
Extension Specifies the name of the PS. Max. 20 characters PC Programming Manual
Name References
9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable Station
—Extension Name
Display Selects the display language Language1– Feature Manual References
Language of the PS. Language5 2.21.4 Display Information
Incoming Call Selects which caller Caller ID Name, CO Feature Manual References
Display information is shown on the Line Name, 2.21.4 Display Information
first line of the PS’s display. DDI/DID Name
Automatic Enables the first line of the Disable, Enable Feature Manual References
LCD Switch display to show the call 2.21.4 Display Information
when Start duration automatically after
Talking answering a trunk call.

460 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Option 6
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Indicates the extension number of Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Number the PS (reference only). (consisting of References
0–9) 9.35 PBX Configuration—
[1-2] Configuration—Portable
Station—Extension No.
Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
characters References
9.35 PBX Configuration—
[1-2] Configuration—Portable
Station—Extension Name
Flexible Button Specifies whether the PS user can No Limitation, Feature Manual
Programming modify all flexible buttons without One-touch Dial References
Mode limitation, or only the One-touch 2.6.2 One-touch Dialling
Dialling buttons. When the mode
is set to One-touch Dial, there is
no need to enter "2" before the
number when customising a One-
touch Dialling button.
SVM Lock Selects whether Simplified Voice Unlock, Lock Feature Manual
Message Log information can be References
displayed at the extension or other 2.19.2 Incoming Call Log
extensions.

Option 7
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Indicates the extension number Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Number of the PS (reference only). (consisting of 0– References
9) 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable
Station—Extension No.
Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
characters References
9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable
Station—Extension Name
Character Input Selects the character table to Table 1:
Mode be used for entering characters. Standard mode
Table 2: Option
mode
Flash Mode Selects the function of the EFA, Terminate, Feature Manual
during CO FLASH/RECALL button during Flash Recall References
Conversation a trunk conversation. 2.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate
2.11.7 External Feature
Access (EFA)

PC Programming Manual 461

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Incoming Call Specifies the number of 0–100 Feature Manual
Log Memory incoming trunk calls that are References
retained in the PS’s Incoming 2.19.2 Incoming Call Log
Call Log memory.
Outgoing Call Specifies the number of 1–100 Feature Manual
Log Memory telephone numbers dialled by References
the PS that are retained in the 2.6.3 Last Number Redial
PS’s Outgoing Call Log
memory.
ISDN Bearer Selects the ISDN bearer mode. Automatic, Feature Manual
When Automatic is selected, Speech, Audio References
the bearer mode is set 4.1.2.1 Integrated Services
automatically depending on the Digital Network (ISDN)—
type of the PS. SUMMARY

Option 8
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Indicates the extension number of Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Number the PS (reference only). (consisting of References
0–9) 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable Station
—Extension No.
Extension Specifies the name of the PS. Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
Name characters References
9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable Station
—Extension Name
Group CW Enables an incoming call to an Disable,
w/o Tone incoming call distribution group to Enable
(Ring after arrive at a previously busy extension
Call) at the moment that the extension
goes on-hook for the previous call.
Wrap-up Specifies the length of time that 0–3000 s PC Programming Manual
Timer must pass after completing a call References
before a PS will accept another call 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—
when logged in as a member of an [3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call
Incoming Call Distribution Group. Distribution Group—Group
This timer is used when "Options— Settings—Member List—Wrap-
Wrap-up Timer based on" is set to up Timer
"Extension" in 11.5.3 PBX 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—
Configuration—[3-5-3] Group— [3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call
Incoming Call Distribution Group Distribution Group—
—Miscellaneous. Miscellaneous—Options—Wrap-
up Timer based on
Feature Manual References
2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-out

462 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Option 9
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Indicates the extension Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Number number of the PS (reference (consisting of 0– References
only). 9) 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable Station
—Extension No.
Extension Name Specifies the name of the Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
PS. characters References
9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable Station
—Extension Name
PDN Delayed Specifies the delayed Immediate, 1 Feature Manual References
Ringing ringing setting for calls to a Ring, 2 Rings, 3 2.9.1 Primary Directory Number
PDN extension (an Rings, 4 Rings, (PDN)/Secondary Directory
extension with one or more 5 Rings, 6 Rings Number (SDN) Extension
PDN buttons).
Built-in Specifies whether to enable Disable, Basic PC Programming Manual
Communication or disable the Only, Enable References
Assistant Communication Assistant 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
(CA) application for each Configuration—Slot—System
extension. Property—Site—Port Number—
Built-in Communication Assistant
Server
Feature Manual References
2.26.2 CA (Communication
Assistant)
Mobile Extension Specifies whether to enable Disable, Enable Feature Manual References
or disable mobile extension 2.27.1 Cellular Phone Features—
features (with a cellular SUMMARY
phone or other outside
destination) for the
extension.

FWD / DND
Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings for each PS can be referred. FWD and DND
settings can be programmed separately for each PS in 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—
Portable Station—FWD/DND.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Indicates the extension Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Number number of the PS (consisting of 0– References
(reference only). 9) 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable Station—
Extension No.

PC Programming Manual 463

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Specifies the name of the Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
Name PS. characters References
9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable Station—
Extension Name
FWD Mode for Indicates the forwarding None, FWD All, PC Programming Manual
Call from CO type of incoming trunk FWD Busy, FWD References
calls (reference only). N/A, FWD Busy 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2]
N/A Extension—Portable Station—
FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
FWD Indicates the forwarding Max. 32 digits PC Programming Manual
Destination for destination of incoming (consisting of 0–9, References
Call from CO trunk calls (reference *, #, [ ] [Secret], 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2]
only). and P [Pause]) Extension—Portable Station—
FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
FWD Mode for Indicates the forwarding None, FWD All, PC Programming Manual
Call from type of incoming intercom FWD Busy, FWD References
Extension calls (reference only). N/A, FWD Busy 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2]
N/A Extension—Portable Station—
FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
FWD Indicates the forwarding Max. 32 digits PC Programming Manual
Destination for destination of incoming (consisting of 0–9, References
Call from intercom calls (reference *, #, [ ] [Secret], 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2]
Extension only). and P [Pause]) Extension—Portable Station—
FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
FWD No Specifies the length of 0–120 s PC Programming Manual
Answer Time time that an incoming call References
rings at the PS before the 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2]
call is forwarded. Extension—Portable Station—
FWD/DND
Feature Manual References
2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

464 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Keep ring after Specifies whether a PS Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual
FWD NA to CO continues to ring after References
forwarding an incoming 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2]
call to an outside Extension—Portable Station—
destination via FWD N/A FWD/DND
or FWD Busy N/A.
Feature Manual References
2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
Remote FWD Specifies the COS that Disable, 1–64 Feature Manual References
COS allows the FWD setting on 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
the extension to be
changed from another
extension. This COS must
then be set for the
extensions that will
remotely change the FWD
setting.

12.2.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—

Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together. Pre-
assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten.
If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded.
Name Description Value Range Links
Location Entry Specifies the extension PS extension PC Programming Manual
—Beginning number of the first location number References
Entry Location to be programmed. 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
(Ext. Number) Extension—Portable Station—
Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)
Location Entry Specifies the number of 1–total number PC Programming Manual
—Number to locations to be of connected References
Generate programmed. PS extensions 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
A CLIP number will only be Extension—Portable Station—
assigned to registered PS Extension Settings
extensions, even if the
number entered here is Feature Manual References
larger than the total number 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
of PS extensions. Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)

PC Programming Manual 465

12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Name Description Value Range Links

Parameter— Specifies the number of 0–4 PC Programming Manual
Deleting Digits digits to be deleted from the References
start of an extension 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
number when using it as Extension—Portable Station—
part of the CLIP number. Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)
Parameter— Specifies a prefix number to Max. 16 digits PC Programming Manual
Head of ID be applied to all generated (consisting of References
CLIP numbers. 0–9, *, and #) 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—
Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)
Parameter— Specifies a suffix number to Max. 16 digits PC Programming Manual
Tail of ID be applied to all generated (consisting of References
CLIP numbers. 0–9, *, and #) 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—
Extension Settings
Feature Manual References
4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)

12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—

FWD/DND
For each PS, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be programmed for
incoming intercom and trunk calls. Select the desired PS from the Extension Number / Name list.
To copy FWD/DND values from one location to another, click Copy to.
Name Description Value Range Links
Forward / Specifies the FWD/DND setting for Always (All), Feature Manual
DND—For external calls. Busy, No References
external calls If Always (All), Busy, No Answer, or Answer, Busy / 2.3.1 Call Forwarding
Busy / No Answer is selected, the FWD No Answer, Do (FWD)/Do Not Disturb
destination field can be set. Not Disturb, Off (DND)—SUMMARY

466 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Name Description Value Range Links

Forward / Specifies the FWD/DND setting for Always (All), Feature Manual
DND—For internal calls. Busy, No References
internal calls If Always (All), Busy, No Answer, or Answer, Busy / 2.3.1 Call Forwarding
Busy / No Answer is selected, the FWD No Answer, Do (FWD)/Do Not Disturb
destination field can be set. Not Disturb, Off (DND)—SUMMARY
If For both external calls and internal
calls is checked, this setting becomes
unavailable, and the value set for external
calls is applied to internal calls.

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—

Flexible Button
Each flexible button can be customised to allow one-touch access to a certain feature. A maximum of 12
flexible buttons can be customised for each PS. Select the desired PS from the Extension Number / Name
list.
To copy values from one location to another, click the Copy to button.
For more information on flexible buttons, see "2.21.2 Flexible Buttons" in the Feature Manual.
Name Description Value Range Links
Type Specifies the feature to be Not Stored, Loop CO, PC Programming
assigned to the flexible button. Single CO, Group Manual References
CO, DSS, One-touch, 12.2.3.1 PBX
ICD Group, Message Configuration—[4-2-3]
Waiting, FWD/DND Extension—Portable
(Both), FWD/DND Station—Flexible Button
(External), FWD/DND —Flexible button data
(Internal), Group Fwd copy
(Both), Group Fwd
(External), Group
Fwd (Internal),
Account, Conference,
Terminate, EFA,
Charge, Call Park,
Log-in/Log-out,
Hurry-up, Wrap-up,
Time Service, TRS
Level Change, ISDN
Service, CLIR,
COLR, ISDN Hold,
Time Service -
Automatic/Manual,
Two-way Record,
Two-way Transfer,
LCS, Voice Mail
Transfer, NDSS, CTI,
PDN, SDN
Parameter Specifies the trunk to be 1–208 Feature Manual
Selection (for accessed. References
Single CO) 2.5.5.3 Trunk Access

PC Programming Manual 467

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Name Description Value Range Links

Parameter Specifies the trunk group to be 1–64 Feature Manual
Selection (for accessed. References
Group CO) 2.5.5.3 Trunk Access
Parameter Specifies whether a call is Automatic, Specific Feature Manual
Selection (for parked in an idle parking zone References
Call Park) automatically, or in a specific 2.13.2 Call Park
parking zone.
Parameter Specifies which incoming call None: The incoming Feature Manual
Selection (for distribution groups that the PS call distribution group References
Log-in/Log-out) belongs to are logged in to or is selected manually. 2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-out
logged out from. All: All incoming call
distribution groups
that the PS belongs
to.
Incoming Group: A
pre-specified
incoming call
distribution group
Parameter Selects which time modes are All (Day/Night/Lunch/ Feature Manual
Selection (for switched manually. Break), Day/Night/ References
Time Service) Break, Day/Night/ 5.1.4 Time Service
Lunch, Day/Night
Parameter Specifies the TRS/Barring level Level 1–Level 7 Feature Manual
Selection (for to be used temporarily on a References
TRS Level certain PS. 2.7.1 Toll Restriction
Change) (TRS)/Call Barring
(Barring)
2.7.4 Dial Tone Transfer
Parameter Specifies the Time Table to be Table 1–Table 8 Feature Manual
Selection (for used when the Time Service References
Time Service - Switching Mode is set to 5.1.4 Time Service
Automatic/ Automatic.
Manual)
Parameter Specifies the delayed ringing Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 PC Programming
Selection (for setting for calls arriving at an Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Manual References
SDN) SDN button. Rings, 5 Rings, 6 10.9 PBX Configuration—
The value specified here is only Rings, No Ring [2-9] System—System
used when System Wireless— Options—Option 4—
SDN Delayed Ringing with System Wireless—SDN
LCD on 10.9 PBX Delayed Ringing with
Configuration—[2-9] System— LCD
System Options is set to
"Enable". Feature Manual
References
2.9.1 Primary Directory
Number (PDN)/
Secondary Directory
Number (SDN) Extension

468 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Specifies the number of an Max. 5 digits
Number (for extension to be accessed. (consisting of 0–9)
DSS)
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits
Number (for number of an incoming call (consisting of 0–9)
ICD Group) distribution group to be
accessed.
Extension Specifies the number of an Max. 5 digits
Number (for extension or floating extension (consisting of 0–9)
Message number of an incoming call
Waiting) distribution group for which
messages are checked. If this
cell is left empty, the PS will
check its own messages only.
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Number (for number of an incoming call (consisting of 0–9) References
Group Fwd distribution group or the 2.3.1 Call Forwarding
(Both)) extension number to set FWD (FWD)/Do Not Disturb
remotely whose intercom and (DND)—SUMMARY
trunk calls will be forwarded. 2.3.2 Call Forwarding
(FWD)
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Number (for number of an incoming call (consisting of 0–9) References
Group Fwd distribution group or the 2.3.1 Call Forwarding
(External)) extension number to set FWD (FWD)/Do Not Disturb
remotely whose trunk calls will (DND)—SUMMARY
be forwarded. 2.3.2 Call Forwarding
(FWD)
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Number (for number of an incoming call (consisting of 0–9) References
Group Fwd distribution group or the 2.3.1 Call Forwarding
(Internal)) extension number to set FWD (FWD)/Do Not Disturb
remotely whose intercom calls (DND)—SUMMARY
will be forwarded. 2.3.2 Call Forwarding
(FWD)
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits
Number (for number of an incoming call (consisting of 0–9)
Log-in/Log-out) distribution group to log-in to or
log-out from.
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Number (for number of the incoming call (consisting of 0–9) References
Hurry-up) distribution group whose longest 2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
waiting call will be redirected
(Manual Queue Redirection).

PC Programming Manual 469

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Number (for number of the UM/VM (DPT) (consisting of 0–9) References
Two-way group containing the PS’s 2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT
Record) mailbox. (Digital) Integration
3.1.1 Unified Messaging
System Overview
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Number (for number of the UM/VM (DPT) (consisting of 0–9) References
Two-way group containing the desired 2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT
Transfer) mailbox. (Digital) Integration
3.1.1 Unified Messaging
System Overview
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 8 digits Feature Manual
Number (for number of the UM/VM (DTMF/ (consisting of 0–9) References
Voice Mail DPT) group containing the 2.28.2 Voice Mail DTMF
Transfer) desired mailbox. Integration
2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT
(Digital) Integration
3.1.1 Unified Messaging
System Overview
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Number (for number of the corresponding (consisting of 0–9) References
SDN) (owner) extension for the SDN 2.9.1 Primary Directory
button. Number (PDN)/
Note that the extension specified Secondary Directory
here must have a PDN button Number (SDN) Extension
registered for the SDN button to
function.
Extension Indicates the name of the Max. 20 characters
Name extension, when an extension
number is specified (reference
only).
Dial (for One- Specifies the number to be Max. 32 digits Feature Manual
touch) dialled. The PBX can have a (consisting of 0–9, *, References
maximum of 500 One-touch #, T [Transfer], [ ] 2.6.2 One-touch Dialling
Dialling buttons for PSs. [Secret], P [Pause],
and F [Flash])
Dial (for ISDN Specifies the number required to Max. 32 digits Feature Manual
Service) access the telephone company’s (consisting of 0–9, *, References
ISDN service. #, T [Transfer], [ ] 4.1.2.11 ISDN Service
[Secret], P [Pause], Access by Keypad
and F [Flash]) Protocol

470 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Name Description Value Range Links

Dial (for NDSS) Specifies the network extension Max. 16 digits Feature Manual
number of the extension to be (consisting of 0–9) References
accessed using Network Direct 4.3.5.1 Network Direct
Station Selection. Station Selection (NDSS)
Note that only extension
numbers that have been
previously registered in
17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4]
Private Network—NDSS Key
Table can be specified here.
Optional Specifies the Time Table to be Table 1–Table 8 Feature Manual
Parameter (or used for changing time modes in References
Ringing Tone the Automatic Switching mode. 5.1.4 Time Service
Type Number)
(for Time
Service)
Optional Specifies the number of the Park 00–Park 99 Feature Manual
Parameter (or parking zone a call is to be References
Ringing Tone parked in when a Call Park 2.13.2 Call Park
Type Number) button with Parameter
(for Call Park) Selection (for Call Park) on this
screen set to Specific is
pressed.
Ext No. of Specifies the number of the Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Mailbox (for extension whose mailbox will be (consisting of 0–9) References
Two-way used to record conversations 2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT
Transfer) using One-touch Two-way (Digital) Integration
Transfer. (For example, a 3.1.1 Unified Messaging
secretary can record a System Overview
conversation into the mailbox of
a boss.) If the cell is left empty,
the extension user must specify
the number of an extension each
time.

12.2.3.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—

Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy
The flexible button settings of a PS can be copied to different PSs.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Destination Select the number and name of the PS that will PC Programming
Extension receive the copied settings. Multiple PSs can Manual References
Line be selected. To select all PSs at once, click 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—
Select All. [4-2-3] Extension—Portable
When selecting multiple extensions, note that if Station—Flexible Button
the source extension has an SDN button, the
copy operation cannot be performed.

PC Programming Manual 471

12.2.4 PBX Configuration—[4-2-4] Extension—Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send

12.2.4 PBX Configuration—[4-2-4] Extension—Portable Station—

NDSS Link Data - Send
It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension’s status data over the network. Select the desired
extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Network BLF Data Selects whether extension status data OFF, ON PC Programming Manual
to NDSS Key of is transmitted over the network for the References
Other PBX - Other selected extension. This setting is 17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4]
PBX (Network automatically set to ON when the Private Network—NDSS Key
PBX ID=1) feature is used, and can only be Table
manually changed from ON to OFF, to
cancel data transmission. Feature Manual
References
4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station
Selection (NDSS)

12.2.5 PBX Configuration—[4-2-5] Extension—Portable Station—

CLIP ID Table
Up to 8 CLIP IDs can be set for each wireless extension.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
PS (reference only).
Extension Name Indicates the name of the PS Max. 20 characters
(reference only).
CLIP 1–8 Specifies up to 8 CLIP IDs for the PS. Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9,
*, and #)

12.2.6 PBX Configuration—[4-2-6] Extension—Portable Station—

Simplified Voice Message
The built-in Simplified Voice Message feature can be provided for each PS. This screen allows you to
specify which extension uses this feature, and the maximum number of messages that can be stored for
each extension.
For more information on Simplified Voice Message, see 2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) in
the Feature Manual.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Indicates the extension Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Number number (reference only). (consisting of References
0–9) 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable Station

472 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.6 PBX Configuration—[4-2-6] Extension—Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Indicates the name of the Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
Name extension (reference only). characters References
9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2]
Configuration—Portable Station
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—Extension
Settings
Simplified Specifies whether to Enable, Disable PC Programming Manual
Voice enable the Simplified References
Message Voice Message feature. 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot
Feature Manual References
2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message
(SVM)
Maximum Specifies the maximum 0–100 Feature Manual References
SVM Log number of voice messages 2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message
(not including greeting (SVM)
messages) that can be
stored for the extension.

PC Programming Manual 473

12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console

12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS

Console
A DSS Console can be used in conjunction with a PT. A maximum of 8 DSS Consoles can be programmed.
The DPT Type—Type of the extension port that DSS Console is connected must be set to DSS in 9.22 PBX
Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Extension Type.
Each flexible DSS button can be customised to access a certain feature. A maximum of 66 flexible DSS
buttons can be customised for each DSS Console.
To copy DSS Console setting values from one location to another, click the Copy to button.
For more information on flexible buttons, see 2.21.2 Flexible Buttons in the Feature Manual.
Once flexible DSS buttons have been programmed, the Terminal Label Print utility can be used to print label
sheets, which can be attached to your DSS Console for quick reference. For details, see 1.2.2.1 Editing
and Printing Terminal Labels in Off-line Mode.
Name Description Value Range Links
Pair Extension Specifies the extension number None, Max. 5 digits
of the PT to be used in pair with (consisting of 0–9)
the DSS Console. Note that if
one or more SDN buttons have
been set at the DSS Console,
they must be deleted before this
setting can be changed.
Type Specifies the feature to be Not Stored, Loop CO, PC Programming
assigned to the flexible DSS Single CO, Group CO, Manual References
button. DSS, One-touch, ICD 12.3 PBX Configuration
Group, Message —[4-3] Extension—
Waiting, FWD/DND DSS Console
(Both), FWD/DND
(External), FWD/DND Feature Manual
(Internal), Group Fwd References
(Both), Group Fwd 2.21.2 Flexible Buttons
(External), Group Fwd
(Internal), Account,
Conference, Terminate,
EFA, Charge, Call Park,
Call Log, Log-in/Log-
out, Hurry-up, Wrap-up,
System Alarm, Time
Service, Answer,
Release, TRS Level
Change, ISDN Service,
CLIR, COLR, ISDN
Hold, Headset, Time
Service - Automatic/
Manual, Check In,
Check Out, Cleaned
Up, Two-way Record,
Two-way Transfer, LCS,
Voice Mail Transfer,
NDSS, CTI, SDN

474 PC Programming Manual

 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console

Name Description Value Range Links

Parameter Specifies the trunk to be 1–208 Feature Manual
Selection (for accessed. References
Single CO) 2.5.5.3 Trunk Access
Parameter Specifies the trunk group to be 1–64 Feature Manual
Selection (for accessed. References
Group CO) 2.5.5.3 Trunk Access
Parameter Specifies whether a call is Automatic, Specific Feature Manual
Selection (for parked in an idle parking zone References
Call Park) automatically or in a specific 2.13.2 Call Park
parking zone.
Parameter Specifies which incoming call None: The incoming call Feature Manual
Selection (for distribution groups that the distribution group is References
Log-in/Log-out) paired extension belongs to are selected manually. 2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-out
logged in to or logged out from. All: All incoming call
distribution groups that
the paired extension
belongs to.
Incoming Group: A pre-
specified incoming call
distribution group
Parameter Selects which time modes are All (Day/Night/Lunch/ Feature Manual
Selection (for switched manually. Break), Day/Night/ References
Time Service) Break, Day/Night/ 5.1.4 Time Service
Lunch, Day/Night
Parameter Specifies the TRS/Barring level 1-7 Feature Manual
Selection (for to be used temporarily on a References
TRS Level certain extension. 2.7.1 Toll Restriction
Change) (TRS)/Call Barring
(Barring)
2.7.4 Dial Tone
Transfer
Parameter Specifies the Time Table to be 1-8 Feature Manual
Selection (for used when the Time Service References
Time Service - Switching Mode is set to 5.1.4 Time Service
Automatic/ Automatic.
Manual)
Parameter Specifies the delayed ringing Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Feature Manual
Selection (for setting for calls arriving at an Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, References
SDN) SDN button. 5 Rings, 6 Rings, No 2.9.1 Primary Directory
Ring Number (PDN)/
Secondary Directory
Number (SDN)
Extension
Extension Specifies the number of an Max. 5 digits (consisting
Number (for extension to be accessed. of 0–9)
DSS)

PC Programming Manual 475

12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits (consisting
Number (for number of an incoming call of 0–9)
ICD Group) distribution group to be
accessed.
Extension Specifies the number of an Max. 5 digits (consisting
Number (for extension or floating extension of 0–9)
Message number of an incoming call
Waiting) distribution group for which
messages are checked. If this
cell is left empty, the paired
extension will check its own
messages only.
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Number (for number of an incoming call of 0–9) References
Group Fwd distribution group for which both 2.3 Call Forwarding
(Both)) intercom and trunk calls are (FWD)/Do Not Disturb
forwarded. (DND) Features
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Number (for number of an incoming call of 0–9) References
Group Fwd distribution group for which trunk 2.3 Call Forwarding
(External)) calls are forwarded. (FWD)/Do Not Disturb
(DND) Features
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Number (for number of an incoming call of 0–9) References
Group Fwd distribution group for which 2.3 Call Forwarding
(Internal)) intercom calls are forwarded. (FWD)/Do Not Disturb
(DND) Features
Extension Specifies the paired extension’s Max. 5 digits (consisting
Number (for number or the floating extension of 0–9)
Call Log) number of an incoming call
distribution group for which call
log information is displayed. If
the cell is left empty, the paired
extension will display its own call
log information.
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits (consisting
Number (for number of an incoming call of 0–9)
Log-in/Log-out) distribution group to log-in to or
log-out from.
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Number (for number of the incoming call of 0–9) References
Hurry-up) distribution group whose longest 2.2.2.4 Queuing
waiting call will be redirected Feature
(Manual Queue Redirection).

476 PC Programming Manual

 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Number (for number of the UM/VM (DPT) of 0–9) References
Two-way group containing the paired 2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT
Record) extension’s mailbox. (Digital) Integration
3.1.1 Unified
Messaging System
Overview
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Number (for number of the UM/VM (DPT) of 0–9) References
Two-way group containing the desired 2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT
Transfer) mailbox. (Digital) Integration
3.1.1 Unified
Messaging System
Overview
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 8 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Number (for number of the UM/VM (DTMF/ of 0–9) References
Voice Mail DPT) group containing the 2.28.2 Voice Mail
Transfer) desired mailbox. DTMF Integration
2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT
(Digital) Integration
3.1.1 Unified
Messaging System
Overview
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Number (for number of the PDN extension of 0–9) References
SDN) corresponding to the SDN 2.1.1.2 Direct In Line
button. Note that the extension (DIL)
specified here must have a PDN
button registered for the SDN
button to function.
Extension Indicates the name of the Max. 20 characters
Name extension, when an extension
number is specified (reference
only).
Dial (for One- Specifies the number to be Max. 32 digits Feature Manual
touch) dialled. The PBX can have a (consisting of 0–9, *, #, References
maximum of 2000 One-touch T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], 2.6.2 One-touch
Dialling buttons for extensions P [Pause], and F Dialling
and DSS Consoles. [Flash])
Dial (for ISDN Specifies the number required to Max. 32 digits Feature Manual
Service) access the telephone company’s (consisting of 0–9, *, #, References
ISDN service. T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], 4.1.2.11 ISDN Service
P [Pause], and F Access by Keypad
[Flash]) Protocol

PC Programming Manual 477

12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console

Name Description Value Range Links

Dial (for NDSS) Specifies the network extension Max. 16 digits Feature Manual
number of the extension to be (consisting of 0–9, *, #, References
accessed using Network Direct T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], 4.3.5.1 Network Direct
Station Selection. Note that only P [Pause], and F Station Selection
extension numbers that have [Flash]) (NDSS)
been previously registered in
17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4]
Private Network—NDSS Key
Table can be specified here.
Optional Specifies the Time Table to be 1-8 Feature Manual
Parameter used for changing time modes in References
(Ringing Tone the Automatic Switching mode. 5.1.4 Time Service
Type Number)
(for Time
Service)
Optional Specifies the ring tone type. KX-DT300 series
Parameter (except KX-DT321)/
(Ringing Tone KX-T7600 series
Type Number) (except KX-T7665)/
(for Loop CO, IP-PT (except
Single CO, KX-NT265/KX-NT321):
Group CO, ICD 1–30
Group, SDN) KX-DT321/
KX-T7665/
KX-NT265/KX-NT321:
1–8 (Even if ring tone
9–30 is selected, ring
tone 1 is heard.)
Other telephones: 1–8
(Even if ring tone 9–30
is selected, ring tone 2
is heard.)
Optional Specifies the number of the 0-99 Feature Manual
Parameter parking zone a call is to be References
(Ringing Tone parked in when a Call Park 2.13.2 Call Park
Type Number) button with Parameter Selection
(for Call Park) (for Call Park) on this screen set
to Specific is pressed.
Ext No. of Specifies the number of the Max. 5 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Mailbox (for extension whose mailbox will be of 0–9) References
Two-way used to record conversations 2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT
Transfer) using One-touch Two-way (Digital) Integration
Transfer. (For example, a 3.1.1 Unified
secretary can record a Messaging System
conversation into the mailbox of Overview
a boss.) If the cell is left empty,
the extension user must specify
the number of an extension each
time.

478 PC Programming Manual

 12.3.1 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console—DSS key data copy

12.3.1 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console—DSS

key data copy
The flexible DSS button settings (including key label settings) of a DSS Console can be copied to different
DSS Consoles. Select the DSS Console that has the setting to copy to other DSS Consoles from the DSS
Console No./Pair Extension list, then click Copy to.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Destination Select the number of the DSS Console and PC Programming
DSS Console paired extension. Multiple DSS Consoles can Manual References
be selected. To select all DSS Consoles at 12.3 PBX Configuration—
once, click Select All. [4-3] Extension—DSS
When selecting multiple extensions, note that if Console
the source extension has an SDN button, the
copy operation cannot be performed.

PC Programming Manual 479

12.3.1 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console—DSS key data copy

480 PC Programming Manual

 Section 13
PBX Configuration—[5] Optional Device

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Optional Device menu of the PBX Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 481

13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone

13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—

Doorphone
The settings to establish doorphone calls can be programmed.
To assign destinations for doorphone calls easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number
Setting).
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
DOORPHONE Indicates the number of the Doorphone Feature Manual
Number doorphone (reference only). number References
2.18.1 Doorphone Call
Name Specifies the doorphone name. Max. 20 Feature Manual
characters References
2.18.1 Doorphone Call
Destination— Specifies the destination number Max. 32 digits PC Programming Manual
Day, Lunch, of doorphone calls for each port (consisting of References
Break, Night in each time mode. 0–9, *, #, [ ] 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4]
[Secret], and System—Week Table
P [Pause])
Feature Manual
References
2.18.1 Doorphone Call
Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number for 1–8 PC Programming Manual
the doorphone port in order to References
apply the Time Table (day/lunch/ 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4]
break/night). System—Week Table
Feature Manual
References
2.18.1 Doorphone Call
5.1.3 Tenant Service
COS Specifies the Class of Service 1–64 PC Programming Manual
(COS) number. COS References
programming determines the 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
doorphone ports that are able to [2-7-1] System—Class of
make trunk calls, and sets Service—COS Settings—TRS
restrictions on intercom calls from —TRS Level—Day, Lunch,
certain extensions (Internal Call Break, Night
Block). 10.7.3 PBX Configuration—
[2-7-3] System—Class of
Service—Internal Call Block
Feature Manual
References
2.1.2.2 Internal Call Block
2.18.1 Doorphone Call

482 PC Programming Manual

 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone

Name Description Value Range Links

Service Group Specifies the Service Group None, 1–64 Feature Manual
Number number sent to the Unified References
Messaging system when the 2.18.1 Doorphone Call
incoming call destination is the 3.1.1 Unified Messaging
floating extension number of a System Overview
UM group.
The Service Group number is
used to allow the Unified
Messaging system to send the
applicable greeting message to
the caller.
VM Trunk Group Specifies the number of the VM 1–48
No. trunk group sent to the VPS when
the incoming call destination is
the floating extension number of
a VM (DPT) Group. The VM trunk
group number is used to allow
the VPS to send the applicable
greeting message to the caller.

PC Programming Manual 483

13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—External Pager

13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—

External Pager
Settings for the external pager (external speaker) can be specified.
Click Extension List View to view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types (see 6.5 Tool—
Extension List View).
Name Description Value Range Links
ID Indicates the external pager 1–6
ID (reference only).
Floating Specifies the floating Max. 5 digits Feature Manual References
Extension extension number of the (consisting of 0–9) 2.17.1 Paging
Number external pager. 2.17.2 Trunk Answer From Any
Station (TAFAS)
2.30.1 Background Music (BGM)
Name Specifies the name of the Max. 20 characters Feature Manual References
external pager. 2.17.1 Paging
2.17.2 Trunk Answer From Any
Station (TAFAS)
2.30.1 Background Music (BGM)

484 PC Programming Manual

 13.3 PBX Configuration—[5-3] Optional Device—Voice Message

13.3 PBX Configuration—[5-3] Optional Device—

Voice Message
13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice
Message—DISA System
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) enables outside callers to access specific PBX features as if the caller
were using an SLT extension of the PBX.
For more information on DISA, see "2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)" in the Feature Manual.

Option 1
Name Description Value Range Links
DISA Security— Selects the DISA security None: Intercom calls, TIE Feature Manual
DISA Security mode to prevent unauthorised line calls, and trunk calls References
Mode access to the PBX. In Trunk or can be made. 2.7.5 Walking COS
All Security mode, the caller is Trunk: Intercom calls and 2.7.6 Verification Code
required to override security by TIE line calls without Entry
Walking COS or Verification PBX code can be made.
Code Entry in order to enable TIE line calls with PBX
the restricted feature code and trunk calls are
temporarily. restricted.
All: All calls are
restricted.
DISA Security— Enables registered caller ID Disable, Enable (Get
Remote Walking numbers to be automatically DISA)
COS through recognised as PBX extensions
DISA without when calling through DISA,
PIN (Activation and to use the Walking COS
Key Required) features without entering a
PIN.
DISA Intercept— Selects how DISA calls are Busy Tone, Enable, Busy
Intercept when handled if the destination sets Message
destination DND, and disables Idle
through DISA Extension Hunting.
sets DND
DISA Intercept— Selects how DISA calls are to Operator, to AA-0, to
Intercept when handled if all DISA ports are AA-9, Disable (Busy
all DISA ports currently in use. Tone)
are busy
DISA Intercept— Selects how DISA calls are to Operator, to AA-0, to
Intercept when handled if the caller does not AA-9, Disable (Reorder
No Dial after select any option from the Tone)
DISA answers menu.

PC Programming Manual 485

13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System

Name Description Value Range Links

CO-CO with Specifies whether the DISA Disable (Release DISA): PC Programming
DISA—DISA to port is released when a trunk- The DISA port is Manual References
Public CO to-public trunk call using DISA released when a trunk- 13.3.1 PBX
is established. To enable this to-public trunk call using Configuration—[5-3-1]
setting, "CO-CO with DISA— DISA is established. Optional Device—
Fwd/Transfer to Public CO" Enable: DISA stays Voice Message—DISA
on this screen should be set to connected for the System—Option 1—
"Enable". duration of the call, to CO-CO with DISA—
Setting this to "Disable" will allow detection of the Fwd/Transfer to Public
free up DISA ports faster, but end of the call. CO
prevent DISA being used to
detect the end of a call and
disconnect the trunk quickly.
CO-CO with Specifies whether the DISA Disable (Release DISA): PC Programming
DISA—DISA to port is released when a trunk- The DISA port is Manual References
Private Network to-private trunk call using DISA released when a trunk- 13.3.1 PBX
is established. to-private trunk call using Configuration—[5-3-1]
To enable this setting, "CO-CO DISA is established. Optional Device—
with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Enable: DISA stays Voice Message—DISA
Private Network" on this connected for the System—Option 1—
screen should be set to duration of the call, to CO-CO with DISA—
"Enable". allow detection of the Fwd/Transfer to Private
Setting this to "Disable" will end of the call. Network
free up DISA ports faster, but
prevent DISA being used to
detect the end of a call and
disconnect the trunk quickly.
CO-CO with Enables trunk-to-public trunk Disable: Trunk-to-public PC Programming
DISA—Fwd/ calls to be established using trunk calls are Manual References
Transfer to DISA. established without using 13.3.1 PBX
Public CO DISA. Configuration—[5-3-1]
Enable (Get DISA): Optional Device—
Trunk-to-public trunk Voice Message—DISA
calls are established System—Option 1—
using DISA, and DISA CO-CO with DISA—
can be used to detect the DISA to Public CO
end of the call.
CO-CO with Enables trunk-to-private trunk Disable: Trunk-to-private PC Programming
DISA—Fwd/ calls to be established using trunk calls are Manual References
Transfer to DISA. established without using 13.3.1 PBX
Private Network DISA. Configuration—[5-3-1]
Enable (Get DISA): Optional Device—
Trunk-to-private trunk Voice Message—DISA
calls are established System—Option 1—
using DISA, and DISA CO-CO with DISA—
can be used to detect the DISA to Private
end of the call. Network

486 PC Programming Manual

 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System

Name Description Value Range Links

CO-CO with Specifies whether an outside Disable: "#" is ignored if
DISA—Transfer party such as a cellular phone dialled.
by DTMF "#" can transfer a trunk call to an Enable (as "Flash"): The
(Activation Key extension within the PBX by current trunk call will be
Required) dialling "#" + extension placed on hold, then
number. transferred to the
extension whose number
is entered.
CO-CO with Enables a trunk caller to return Disable, Enable
DISA—Return to to the DISA top menu by
DISA Top Menu pressing " " while hearing a
by DTMF "*" ringback, reorder, or busy tone.
If disabled, retrying the call is
possible by pressing " ".

Option 2
Name Description Value Range Links
DISA Cyclic Selects the cyclic tone Fixed: The number of times of a tone pattern
Tone detection mode. (a set of tone-on and tone-off) that the PBX
Detection Cyclic tone detection receives is fixed to 4 times in the ranges of:
is used to determine
A C C C
the end of a call for a
DISA trunk-to-trunk
conversation B D D D
established through
an analogue trunk. , = 100–1300 ms, = 90 ms, =
This setting is only 90 ms
available when DPS Option: The tone pattern that the PBX
cards are not receives is optional as specified in DISA
installed. Cyclic Tone Option on this screen.
DISA Cyclic Specifies the 10 × n (n=11–400) ms
Tone maximum duration of
Option— the cyclic tone that will
Tone on be recognised by the
Maximum PBX. When the tone
Time (ms) sent from the
telephone company is
shorter than the value
set here, the PBX
recognises it as a
tone-on.
Note that this option
can only be set when
DISA Cyclic Tone
Detection on this
screen is set to
"Option".

PC Programming Manual 487

13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System

Name Description Value Range Links

DISA Cyclic Specifies the 10 × n (n=11–400) ms
Tone maximum time that
Option— the PBX waits for a
Tone off cyclic tone to be sent
Maximum from the telephone
Time (ms) company before
recognising it as a
tone-off. When no
tone is detected within
the time set here, the
PBX recognises it as
a tone-off.
Note that this option
can only be set when
DISA Cyclic Tone
Detection on this
screen is set to
"Option".
DISA Cyclic Specifies the number 3–16
Tone of times the tone
Option— pattern (a set of tone-
Repeating on and tone-off) must
Times of be received to
ON/OFF for establish reception of
Detection the cyclic tone. This
determines the end of
call.
Note that this option
can only be set when
DISA Cyclic Tone
Detection on this
screen is set to
"Option".
Timed Specifies the pre- None, 1–64 PC
Reminder recorded message to Programming
Message— play when a Timed Manual
Day, Lunch, Reminder call is References
Break, answered in each time
13.3.2 PBX
Night mode.
Configuration—
[5-3-2] Optional
Device—Voice
Message—DISA
Message
Feature
Manual
References
2.24.4 Timed
Reminder

488 PC Programming Manual

 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message

13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice

Message—DISA Message
Outgoing messages (OGM) for DISA calls can be specified. A maximum of 64 OGMs can be programmed.
To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 6.5 Tool—
Extension List View). To assign AA destinations easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension
Number Setting).
Name Description Value Range Links
Floating Specifies the floating Max. 5 digits Feature Manual References
Extension extension number of the (consisting of 0– 2.30.2 Outgoing Message (OGM)
Number OGM. 9) 2.16.1 Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)
5.5.8 Floating Extension
Name Specifies the name of the Max. 20 Feature Manual References
OGM. characters 2.30.2 Outgoing Message (OGM)
2.16.1 Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)
1 Digit AA Specifies the destination for Max. 5 digits Feature Manual References
Destination each DISA Automated (consisting of 0– 2.30.2 Outgoing Message (OGM)
(Extension Attendant (AA) number. After 9, *, and #) 2.16.1 Direct Inward System
Number)—Dial listening to an OGM, the Access (DISA)
0–9 caller can be directed to the
destination by dialling a 1-
digit DISA AA number.
Busy / DND Selects the OGM to be None, 1–64 PC Programming Manual
Message No. played for the caller when the References
destination party is busy or 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—
sets DND. [5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice
Message—DISA System
Feature Manual References
2.16.1 Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)
Fax Extension Specifies the extension Max. 5 digits Feature Manual References
number to which to transfer a (consisting of 0– 2.16.2 Automatic Fax Transfer
call when a fax signal is 9)
detected.

13.3.3 PBX Configuration—[5-3-3] Optional Device—Voice

Message—SVM
Settings related to Built-in Simplified Voice Message feature can be specified. This feature can be accessed
via the MPR card.

PC Programming Manual 489

13.3.3 PBX Configuration—[5-3-3] Optional Device—Voice Message—SVM

Name Description Value Range Links

SVM—Floating Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Extension number used to access the SVM (consisting of References
Number feature. 0–9) 2.16.3 Built-in Simplified
Voice Message (SVM)
SVM—SVM Specifies the name of the card, for Max. 20 Feature Manual
Name programming reference. characters References
2.16.3 Built-in Simplified
Voice Message (SVM)
Remote Selects whether the Walking COS Disable, PC Programming Manual
Access feature can be used while listening to Enable References
a greeting message from the SVM 12.1.8 PBX Configuration—
feature. Using Walking COS, a user [4-1-8] Extension—Wired
can access his or her message box Extension—Simplified Voice
remotely. Message
12.2.6 PBX Configuration—
[4-2-6] Extension—Portable
Station—Simplified Voice
Message
Feature Manual
References
2.16.3 Built-in Simplified
Voice Message (SVM)
SVM Cyclic Specifies the SVM cyclic tone Fixed, Option Feature Manual
Tone Detection detection mode. References
2.16.3 Built-in Simplified
Voice Message (SVM)
SVM Cyclic Specifies the maximum duration of 20 x n (n=6– PC Programming Manual
Tone Option— the cyclic tone that will be recognised 200) ms References
Tone On by the PBX. When the tone sent from 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Maximum Time the telephone company is shorter Configuration—Slot
than the value set here, the PBX
recognises it as a tone-on. Feature Manual
Note that this option can only be set References
when SVM Cyclic Tone Detection on 2.16.3 Built-in Simplified
this screen is set to "Option". Voice Message (SVM)
SVM Cyclic Specifies the maximum time that the 20 x n (n=6– PC Programming Manual
Tone Option— PBX waits for a cyclic tone to be sent 200) ms References
Tone Off from the telephone company before 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Maximum Time recognising it as a tone-off. When no Configuration—Slot
tone is detected within the time set
here, the PBX recognises it as a Feature Manual
tone-off. References
2.16.3 Built-in Simplified
Voice Message (SVM)

490 PC Programming Manual

 13.3.3 PBX Configuration—[5-3-3] Optional Device—Voice Message—SVM

Name Description Value Range Links

SVM Cyclic Specifies the number of times the 3-16 Feature Manual
Tone Option— tone pattern (a set of tone-on and References
Repeating tone-off) must be received to 2.16.3 Built-in Simplified
Times of establish reception of the cyclic tone. Voice Message (SVM)
ON/OFF for This determines the end of call.
Detection Note that this option can only be set
when SVM Cyclic Tone Detection on
this screen is set to "Option".
SLT Dial "*" Specifies the SLT dial "*" operation Enable, Feature Manual
Operation mode to avoid wrong DTMF signal Disable References
Mode detection from the SLT. If "Enable" is 2.16.3 Built-in Simplified
selected, you need to dial "*" before Voice Message (SVM)
dialling.

PC Programming Manual 491

13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay

13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—

External Relay
Settings related to external relays can be programmed.
Before programming these settings, For Output - Device Type must be set to "Relay" in the DOORPHONE
card’s property settings. (→ 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—
DOORPHONE Card)
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
External Indicates the number of the 1–8 Feature Manual References
Relay No. external relay (reference 2.18.4 External Relay Control
only).
Name Specifies the relay name. Max. 20 Feature Manual References
characters 2.18.4 External Relay Control
Relay Specifies the length of time 1–7 s Feature Manual References
Activate that the relay stays on when 2.18.4 External Relay Control
Time activated.
COS Specifies the Class of 1–64 PC Programming Manual
Number Service (COS) number. COS References
programming determines the 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1]
extensions that are able to System—Class of Service—COS
activate relays. Settings—Optional Device & Other
Extensions—External Relay Access
Feature Manual References
2.1.2.2 Internal Call Block
2.18.4 External Relay Control

492 PC Programming Manual

 13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor

13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—

External Sensor
Settings related to external sensors can be programmed.
To assign destinations for sensor calls easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number
Setting).
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
External Sensor Indicates the number of the 1–8 Feature Manual
No. external sensor (reference References
only). 2.18.3 External Sensor
Name Specifies the sensor name. Max. 20 Feature Manual
characters References
2.18.3 External Sensor
Destination— Specifies the destination Max. 32 digits Feature Manual
Day, Lunch, number of sensor calls for each (consisting of 0– References
Break, Night port in each time mode. 9, *, #, [ ] 2.18.3 External Sensor
[Secret], and P
[Pause])
Tenant No. Specifies the tenant to which 1–8 PC Programming Manual
the sensor belongs, to References
determine the Time Table for 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4]
the sensor. (The tenant number System—Week Table
corresponds to the Time Table
number.) Feature Manual
References
2.18.3 External Sensor
5.1.3 Tenant Service
Sensor Alarm— Enables e-mail notification Enable, Disable Feature Manual
Email when the sensor detects an References
Notification alarm. 2.18.3 External Sensor
5.1.3 Tenant Service
Sensor Alarm— Specifies the e-mail address Max.128 Feature Manual
Email Address that will receive a notification characters References
when the sensor detects an 2.18.3 External Sensor
alarm. 5.1.3 Tenant Service
Sensor Alarm— Specifies comments in the e- Max.256 Feature Manual
Email Comment mail received when the sensor characters References
detects an alarm. 2.18.3 External Sensor
5.1.3 Tenant Service

PC Programming Manual 493

13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor

494 PC Programming Manual

 Section 14
PBX Configuration—[6] Feature

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Feature menu of the PBX Configuration menu of
the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 495

14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial

14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System

Speed Dial
The System Speed Dialling Table is used to store frequently dialled numbers as well as callers who should
be automatically routed to certain extensions when they call (Calling Line Identification [CLI] distribution).
The System Speed Dialling Table is available for all extension users when making or receiving a call.
In Basic Memory, a maximum of 1000 System Speed Dialling numbers (e.g., telephone numbers, feature
numbers) can be programmed with other related parameters. 100 numbers are displayed at a time. To
display other sets of numbers, click the applicable tab.
Name Description Value Range Links
Select Table Selects the System Speed System: the PC Programming Manual
Dialling Table to be standard table References
programmed. Whether a tenant Expansion for 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6]
uses the basic System Speed Tenant 1-8: Feature—Tenant—System Speed
Dialling Table or the additional additional tables Dial
table depends on the setting of
System Speed Dial in Feature Manual References
14.6 PBX Configuration— 2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/
[6-6] Feature—Tenant. System
2.19.1 Caller ID
5.1.3 Tenant Service
Name Specifies a name for the Max. 20 Feature Manual References
System Speed Dialling number. characters 2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/
System
2.19.1 Caller ID
CO Line Specifies the telephone number Max. 32 digits Feature Manual References
Access (including the Trunk Access (consisting of 0– 2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/
Number + number) or feature number 9, *, #, T System
Telephone assigned to the System Speed [Transfer], [ ] 2.19.1 Caller ID
Number Dialling number. [Secret], P
[Pause], and F
[Flash])
CLI Specifies the CLI destination Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Destination (extension) to which incoming (consisting of 0– References
calls from the programmed 9) 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO
telephone number are routed. If & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port
a Caller ID Modification Table is Settings—CLI for DIL—CLI Ring for
being used, the modified DIL—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
number must match the 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO
telephone number above (CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table
Line Access Number + —CLI Ring for DDI/DID—Day,
Telephone Number) in order Lunch, Break, Night
for the call to be routed
correctly. Feature Manual References
2.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification
(CLI) Distribution
2.19.1 Caller ID

496 PC Programming Manual

 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge

14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel &

Charge
Various settings related to the hospitality features of the PBX can be set.

Main
Name Description Value Range Links
Hotel Operator— Specifies the numbers of the Max. 5 digits Feature Manual References
Extension 1–4 extensions designated as (consisting of 2.23.1 Hospitality Features—
hotel operators. 0–9) SUMMARY
2.23.2 Room Status Control
SMDR for External Selects whether check-in and No Print, Print PC Programming Manual
Hotel Application 1 check-out data is output on References
—Room Status SMDR. 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1]
Control Maintenance—Main
Feature Manual References
2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR)
2.23.2 Room Status Control
SMDR for External Selects whether Timed No Print, Print PC Programming Manual
Hotel Application 1 Reminder data is output on References
—Timed Reminder SMDR. 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1]
(Wake-up Call) Maintenance—Main
Feature Manual References
2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR)
2.24.4 Timed Reminder
SMDR for External Specifies the text of the Max. 16 PC Programming Manual
Hotel Application 2 message output on SMDR characters References
—Printing when this Printing Message 11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4]
Message 1–8 is selected from an Group—Trunk Group—Dialling
extension. Plan—Charge
The "%" character can be 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1]
used in a message, and Maintenance—Main
requires a number to be
entered in its place when the Feature Manual References
message is selected from an 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
extension. This character can Recording (SMDR)
be used a maximum of seven 2.22.2 Printing Message
times in a Printing Message. 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room
Timed Reminder Specifies the message Max. 20 Feature Manual References
Message for SIP- displayed on a SIP-MLT or characters 2.24.4 Timed Reminder
MLT / Standard Standard SIP Phone LCD
SIP Phone— screen for the Timed
Message Reminder feature.

PC Programming Manual 497

14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge

Bill
Name Description Value Range Links
Checkout Billing— Activates call billing features OFF, ON PC Programming Manual
Billing for Guest for the PBX. References
9.2.2 PBX Configuration—
[1-1] Configuration—Slot—
System Property—Site
Feature Manual
References
2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest
Room
Checkout Billing— Specifies the name of charge Max. 12 Feature Manual
LCD for "Telephone" item 1 as shown on the display characters References
of the hotel operator extension 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest
when entering room charges. Room
Checkout Billing— Specifies the name of charge Max. 12 Feature Manual
LCD for "Minibar" item 2 as shown on the display characters References
of the hotel operator extension 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest
when entering room charges. Room
Checkout Billing— Specifies the name of charge Max. 12 Feature Manual
LCD for "Others" item 3 as shown on the display characters References
of the hotel operator extension 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest
when entering room charges. Room
Checkout Billing—Bill Specifies the name of charge Max. 12 Feature Manual
(SMDR) for item 1 as printed on the guest characters References
"Telephone" bill. 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest
Room
Checkout Billing—Bill Specifies the name of charge Max. 12 Feature Manual
(SMDR) for "Minibar" item 2 as printed on the guest characters References
bill. 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest
Room
Checkout Billing—Bill Specifies the name of charge Max. 12 Feature Manual
(SMDR) for "Others" item 3 as printed on the guest characters References
bill. 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest
Room
SMDR for External Specifies the language used Language 1– Feature Manual
Hotel Application— for standard items shown on Language 5 References
Language for Bill guest bills printed out using the 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest
(SMDR) Call Billing feature. Room
SMDR for External Specifies the text printed at the Max. 80 Feature Manual
Hotel Application— top of the guest bill. characters References
Header 1–3 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest
Room

498 PC Programming Manual

 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge

Name Description Value Range Links

SMDR for External Specifies the text printed at the Max. 80 Feature Manual
Hotel Application— bottom of the guest bill. characters References
Footer 1–3 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest
Room

Charge
Name Description Value Range Links
Margin & Tax— Specifies the 0.00–99.99 % Feature Manual References
Margin Rate for percentage margin to 2.22.3 Call Charge Services
"Telephone" (%) be added to telephone 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room
charges displayed on
the guest bill.
Margin & Tax— Specifies the 0.00–99.99 % Feature Manual References
Tax Rate for percentage tax rate to 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room
"Telephone" (%) be used when
calculating guest
telephone charges.
Margin & Tax— Specifies the 0.00–99.99 % Feature Manual References
Tax Rate for percentage tax rate to 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room
"Minibar" (%) be used when
calculating guest
charges for charge
item 2.
Margin & Tax— Specifies the 0.00–99.99 % Feature Manual References
Tax Rate for percentage tax rate to 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room
"Others" (%) be used when
calculating guest
charges for charge
item 3.
Charge Options Specifies the number 0–6 PC Programming Manual
—Digits After of digits to display after References
Decimal Point the decimal point for 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
the currency in use. Extension—Wired Extension—
Extension Settings—Option 3—Charge
Limit
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—
Extension Settings—Option 3—Charge
Limit
14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature
—Verification Code—Budget
Management
Feature Manual References
2.21.4 Display Information
2.22.3 Call Charge Services
2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

PC Programming Manual 499

14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge

Name Description Value Range Links

Charge Options Specifies the currency Max. 3 PC Programming Manual
—Currency characters shown on characters References
the display of the 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
extension and the Extension—Wired Extension—
SMDR. Extension Settings—Option 3—Charge
Limit
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—
Extension Settings—Option 3—Charge
Limit
14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature
—Verification Code—Budget
Management
Feature Manual References
2.21.4 Display Information
2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR)
2.22.3 Call Charge Services
2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room
Charge Options Specifies whether the Head, Tail PC Programming Manual
—Currency currency characters References
Display Position are displayed before or 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
after the call charge. Extension—Wired Extension—
Extension Settings—Option 3—Charge
Limit
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—
Extension Settings—Option 3—Charge
Limit
14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature
—Verification Code—Budget
Management
Feature Manual References
2.22.3 Call Charge Services
Charge Options Selects what happens Alarm: Only a PC Programming Manual
—Action at when the amount of warning tone is References
Charge Limit the call charge heard. 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
reaches the pre- Alarm + Extension—Wired Extension—
programmed limit Disconnect: A Extension Settings—Option 3—Charge
during a conversation. warning tone is Limit
heard, and then 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
the call is Extension—Portable Station—
disconnected. Extension Settings—Option 3—Charge
Limit
Feature Manual References
2.7.2 Budget Management

500 PC Programming Manual

 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge

Name Description Value Range Links

Charge Options Enables the PBX to Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual
—Meter Start on start counting the call References
Answer charge when the 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1]
Detection answer signal from the Extension—Wired Extension—
telephone company is Extension Settings—Option 3—Charge
detected. Limit
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1]
Extension—Portable Station—
Extension Settings—Option 3—Charge
Limit
Feature Manual References
2.22.3 Call Charge Services

PC Programming Manual 501

14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code

14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification

Code
A verification code is used to override the Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) of the extension in
use to make a certain trunk call, or to identify the call for accounting and billing purposes.
A maximum of 1000 verification codes can be programmed with other related parameters. 100 codes are
displayed at a time. To display other sets of codes, click the applicable tab.
Name Description Value Range Links
Verification Specifies the verification code. Max. 4 digits Feature Manual
Code (consisting of References
0–9, *, and #) 2.7.6 Verification Code
Entry
User Name Specifies the user name assigned to the Max. 20 Feature Manual
verification code. characters References
2.7.6 Verification Code
Entry
Verification Specifies the PIN to be entered when Max. 10 digits Feature Manual
Code PIN making a trunk call with the verification (consisting of References
code. 0–9) 2.7.6 Verification Code
Entry
CAUTION
There is a risk that fraudulent
telephone calls will be made if a third
party discovers a personal
identification number (PIN)
(verification code PIN or extension
PIN) of the PBX.
The cost of such calls will be billed to
the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of
fraudulent use, we strongly
recommend:
a. Keeping PINs secret.
b. Selecting complex, random
PINs that cannot be easily
guessed.
c. Changing PINs frequently.

502 PC Programming Manual

 14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code

Name Description Value Range Links

COS Number Specifies the COS that applies when 1–64 PC Programming
making a trunk call with the verification Manual References
code. 10.7.1 PBX Configuration
—[2-7-1] System—Class
of Service—COS Settings
Feature Manual
References
2.7.6 Verification Code
Entry
5.1.1 Class of Service
(COS)
Itemised Specifies the itemised billing code used Max. 10 digits PC Programming
Billing Code by the ARS feature for identifying calls (consisting of Manual References
for ARS made with a verification code for 0–9, *, and #) 16.5 PBX Configuration—
accounting and billing purposes. [8-5] ARS—Carrier
Feature Manual
References
2.8.1 Automatic Route
Selection (ARS)
Budget Specifies the limit of the call charge that 0–9999999 Feature Manual
Management will be counted on the verification code. References
The number of decimal places that can 2.7.2 Budget
be specified here depends on the value Management
set in Charge Options—Digits After
Decimal Point in 14.2 PBX
Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel &
Charge.

PC Programming Manual 503

14.4 PBX Configuration—[6-4] Feature—Second Dial Tone

14.4 PBX Configuration—[6-4] Feature—Second

Dial Tone
A programmed Pause time can be inserted automatically between the Second Dial Tone Waiting code and
the following digits. When a programmed Second Dial Tone Waiting code is dialled after seizing a trunk, a
pre-programmed number of pauses are inserted after the code.
A maximum of 100 Second Dial Tone Waiting codes can be programmed. 20 codes are displayed at a time.
To display other sets of codes, click the applicable tab.
Name Description Value Range Links
Second Dial Tone Specifies the Second Dial Tone Max. 4 digits Feature Manual
Waiting Code Waiting code. (consisting of 0–9, *, References
and #) 2.5.4.7 Pause Insertion
Pause Repeating Specifies the number of pauses 0–20 Feature Manual
Counter to be inserted when waiting for References
the second dial tone. 2.5.4.7 Pause Insertion

504 PC Programming Manual

 14.5 PBX Configuration—[6-5] Feature—Absent Message

14.5 PBX Configuration—[6-5] Feature—Absent

Message
When a display PT user calls an extension, a message is shown on the caller’s telephone display describing
the reason for absence. A maximum of 8 Absent Messages can be programmed, and any extension user
can select one of them.

Note
When using this feature in conjunction with the Unified Messaging (UM) system, changing a message
here will create a difference between the displayed message and the UM’s pre-recorded greeting that
corresponds to the absent message. To use both features in synchronisation, you must record a
corresponding greeting for each absent message changed. For details about changing UM system
prompts, see 7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation.
Name Description Value Range Links
Absent Message Specifies the message for Max. 16 characters Feature Manual References
display. 2.20.2 Absent Message

PC Programming Manual 505

14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant

14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant

A maximum of 8 tenants can share the PBX. Each tenant is composed of specified extension user groups.
The PBX offers each tenant its own Time Table and system resources.
To assign extensions as operators easily, click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number
Setting).
Name Description Value Range Links
Music On Specifies the audio Same as System Setting, PC Programming Manual
Hold source to be used for BGM1, BGM2, BGM3, BGM4, References
Music on Hold. BGM5, BGM6, BGM7, BGM8, 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2]
Tone System—Operator & BGM
Feature Manual
References
2.13.4 Music on Hold
5.1.3 Tenant Service
Operator Specifies the extension Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0– PC Programming Manual
(Extension number or the floating 9) References
Number) extension number of an 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2]
incoming call System—Operator & BGM
distribution group to be
designated as the Feature Manual
tenant operator. When References
this parameter is left 5.1.3 Tenant Service
unspecified, the PBX 5.1.5 Operator Features
operator serves as the
tenant operator.
ARS Mode Specifies the ARS Off: ARS is disabled. PC Programming Manual
mode used when On for Local Access References
making a trunk call. Operation: ARS operates 16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1]
when an extension user ARS—System Setting
makes a call using any Idle
Line Access method. Feature Manual
On for Any CO Access References
Operation: ARS operates 2.8.1 Automatic Route
when an extension user Selection (ARS)
makes a call using any Trunk 5.1.3 Tenant Service
Access method.
Same as System Setting: The
setting specified in ARS
Mode in 16.1 PBX
Configuration—[8-1] ARS—
System Setting is applied.

506 PC Programming Manual

 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant

Name Description Value Range Links

System Specifies which system Same as System Setting: PC Programming Manual
Speed Dial speed dialling table is PBX common system speed References
used by the tenant. dialling numbers are used. 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1]
Tenant Exclusive: Individual Feature—System Speed Dial
tenant system speed dialling
numbers are used. Feature Manual
References
2.6.4 Speed Dialling—
Personal/System
5.1.3 Tenant Service
Extension Specifies whether the System: All system Speed Feature Manual
Directory display for the Speed Dialling numbers are References
Dialling numbers is for displayed. 2.6.4 Speed Dialling—
the entire system, or Tenant: Only the extensions of Personal/System
only for the extensions the tenant group that the 5.1.3 Tenant Service
of the tenant group that extension belongs to are
the extension belongs displayed.
to.

PC Programming Manual 507

14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant

508 PC Programming Manual

 Section 15
PBX Configuration—[7] TRS

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the TRS menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the
Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 509

15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied Code

15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied Code

Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. Each
time mode of every COS is assigned one of the seven TRS/Barring levels. TRS/Barring level 7 provides the
maximum restriction (all trunk calls are prohibited) and level 1 provides the minimum (all trunk calls are
allowed). TRS/Barring levels 2–6 are used to restrict calls according to the combination of denied codes
here and excepted codes in 15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception Code. If the leading digits of
the dialled number are not found in the applicable Denied Code tables, the call is made.
A maximum of 100 denied codes can be programmed for each level. 20 codes are displayed at a time. To
display other sets of codes, click the applicable tab.
Name Description Value Range Links
Level 2– Specifies the Max. 16 digits PC Programming Manual References
Level 6 leading digits of toll (consisting of 0–9, 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—
restricted numbers *, #, and X) Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—TRS
for each level. Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception
Code
Feature Manual References
2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring
(Barring)

510 PC Programming Manual

 15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception Code

15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception

Code
Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. Each
time mode of every COS is assigned one of the seven TRS/Barring levels. TRS/Barring level 7 provides the
maximum restriction (all trunk calls are prohibited) and level 1 provides the minimum (all trunk calls are
allowed). TRS/Barring levels 2–6 are used to restrict calls according to the combination of denied codes in
15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied Code and excepted codes here. A call denied by the
applicable Denied Code tables is checked against the applicable Exception Code tables, and if a match is
found, the call is made.
A maximum of 100 exception codes can be programmed for each level. 20 codes are displayed at a time. To
display other sets of codes, click the applicable tab.
Name Description Value Range Links
Level 2– Specifies the leading Max. 16 digits PC Programming Manual References
Level 6 digits of the numbers to (consisting of 0–9, 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—
be exempted from toll *, #, and X) Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—
restriction/call barring TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
for each level. 15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied
Code
Feature Manual References
2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring
(Barring)

PC Programming Manual 511

15.3 PBX Configuration—[7-3] TRS—Special Carrier

15.3 PBX Configuration—[7-3] TRS—Special

Carrier
If the PBX has access to multiple telephone companies, a Special Carrier Access Code is required each
time a trunk call is made. By programming these Special Carrier Access Codes here, Toll Restriction (TRS)/
Call Barring (Barring) can restrict or allow calls to be made by ignoring the codes and looking at the
telephone number only. If a Special Carrier Access Code is found in the dialled number, TRS/Barring will
look only at the following digits.
A maximum of 20 Special Carrier Access Codes can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
Special Specifies a Special Carrier Max. 16 digits Feature Manual
Carrier Access Code. Special Carrier (consisting of 0–9, *, References
Access Access Codes and Host PBX and #) 2.5.4.9 Special Carrier
Code Access codes should be Access Code
unique. 2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/
Call Barring (Barring)

512 PC Programming Manual

 15.4 PBX Configuration—[7-4] TRS—Emergency Dial

15.4 PBX Configuration—[7-4] TRS—Emergency

Dial
Any extension user can dial the programmed emergency numbers at any time after seizing a trunk. The
restrictions imposed on the extension, such as Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring), Account Code—
Forced mode, and Extension Dial Lock are disregarded.
A maximum of 10 emergency numbers can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
Emergency Specifies the numbers used for Max. 32 digits (consisting of Feature Manual
Number making emergency calls. It is not 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], P References
necessary to start the emergency [Pause], and F [Flash]) 2.5.4.2 Emergency
number with a Trunk Access Call
number.

PC Programming Manual 513

15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous

15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous

Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. The
following optional settings can be programmed to activate a TRS/Barring check, override TRS/Barring, or
switch between TRS/Barring methods.
Name Description Value Range Links
TRS Override Enables an outgoing trunk call Disable, Enable PC Programming
by System to override TRS/Barring when Manual References
Speed Dialling the call is made using System 14.1 PBX Configuration—
Speed Dialling. [6-1] Feature—System
Speed Dial
Feature Manual
References
2.7.1 Toll Restriction
(TRS)/Call Barring
(Barring)
TRS Check for Enables a TRS/Barring check No Check, Check Feature Manual
Dial " * # " for the user-dialled " " and References
"#". This is useful in preventing 2.7.1 Toll Restriction
unauthorised calls which could (TRS)/Call Barring
possibly be made through (Barring)
certain telephone company
exchanges.
Mode when Selects whether a trunk is Disconnect: The trunk PC Programming
Dial Time-out disconnected if the TRS/ is disconnected as soon Manual References
before TRS Barring check has not been as the timer expires. 10.3 PBX Configuration—
Check completed when the trunk Keep: The TRS/Barring [2-3] System—Timers &
Inter-digit timer expires. check is performed Counters
when the timer expires.
Feature Manual
References
2.7.1 Toll Restriction
(TRS)/Call Barring
(Barring)
Dial Digits Specifies a limit to be placed None, 1–7 Feature Manual
Limitation After on the number of digits which References
Answering— can be dialled after an 2.7.1 Toll Restriction
Dial Digits extension user receives a (TRS)/Call Barring
trunk call. If the number of (Barring)
dialled digits exceeds the 2.11.8 Trunk Call
programmed limit, the line will Limitation
be disconnected.
TRS Check Enables TRS/Barring to check Disable, Enable Feature Manual
after EFA the digits dialled after External References
Feature Access (EFA) during a 2.7.1 Toll Restriction
trunk call. (TRS)/Call Barring
(Barring)
2.11.7 External Feature
Access (EFA)

514 PC Programming Manual

 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous

Name Description Value Range Links

TRS Table Selects the method of TRS/ Deny Table 2_N + Feature Manual
Mode for Level Barring to be used for Except Table N_6: The References
N (N=2_6) restricting calls. The level of Denied Code Tables for 2.7.1 Toll Restriction
TRS/Barring is determined by the higher levels are (TRS)/Call Barring
the telephone codes set in the applied to all levels (Barring)
Denied Code Tables and below it, and the
Exception Code Tables. Exception Code Tables
for the lower levels are
applied to all levels
above it.
Deny Table N + Except
Table N: Each level has
its own separate set of
denied codes and
exception codes, which
are only applied to that
level.

PC Programming Manual 515

15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous

516 PC Programming Manual

 Section 16
PBX Configuration—[8] ARS

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the ARS menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the
Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 517

16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting

16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System

Setting
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) automatically selects the appropriate carrier at the time a trunk call is
made, according to the programmed settings. The user-dialled number will be checked and modified in
order to connect it to the appropriate carrier.
Name Description Value Range Links
ARS Mode Selects the condition to Off: ARS is disabled. Feature Manual
determine when to On for Local Access Operation: References
operate ARS. ARS operates when an extension 2.5.5.3 Trunk
user makes a call using Idle Line Access
Access method. 2.8.1 Automatic
On for Any CO Access Operation: Route Selection
ARS operates when an extension (ARS)
user makes a call using Idle Line
Access, Trunk Access, or S-CO
Line Access method.
Mode When Any Selects what happens Disconnect: the line will be Feature Manual
Carrier is not when the dialled number disconnected. References
programmed for is not found in Leading Local Access: the dialled number 2.8.1 Automatic
the Dial Number in 16.2 PBX will be handled by Idle Line Access Route Selection
Configuration—[8-2] method. (ARS)
ARS—Leading
Number.

518 PC Programming Manual

 16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number

16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading

Number
Specifies the area codes and/or telephone numbers as leading numbers that will be routed by the ARS
feature. A maximum of 1000 different leading numbers can be programmed, and each leading number can
select a Routing Plan Table number, which determines the ARS procedure.
The additional (remaining) number of digits can also be specified for each leading number. The additional
(remaining) number of digits must be specified only when "#", for example, is needed after the dialled
number. The "#" will be added after the programmed number of digits of the user-dialled number (excluding
the leading number).
100 leading numbers are displayed at a time. To display other sets of leading numbers, click the applicable
tab.
Name Description Value Range Links
Leading Specifies the leading Max. 16 digits Feature Manual
Number number. (consisting of 0–9, *, References
#, and X) 2.8.1 Automatic Route
Selection (ARS)
Additional Specifies the additional 0–15 Feature Manual
Number of (remaining) number of digits References
Digits following each leading 2.8.1 Automatic Route
number. Selection (ARS)
Routing Plan Specifies the Routing Plan 1–48 Feature Manual
Number Table number used for each References
leading number. 2.8.1 Automatic Route
Selection (ARS)

PC Programming Manual 519

16.3 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time

16.3 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan

Time
The start and end times of a maximum of 4 different time blocks are shown for each day of the week. There
are 48 Routing Plan Tables, and each Routing Plan Table can have its own time blocks. Select the desired
Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list.
• To adjust the currently displayed Routing Plan, click and drag the divisions between two time periods.
• To programme the time blocks of the currently displayed Routing Plan, including adding or deleting time
blocks, click Time Setting.

16.3.1 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time—Time

Setting
The start times of a maximum of 4 different time blocks can be programmed for each day of the week, for
the selected Routing Plan. Each time block automatically ends when the subsequent block begins.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Time-A–D— Enables the setting of the start time for each time Disable, Feature Manual
Setting block. Enable References
2.8.1 Automatic
Route Selection
(ARS)
Time-A–D— Specifies the start time for each time block. 00:00– Feature Manual
Hour, 23:59 References
Minute Note
2.8.1 Automatic
Time-A must be the earliest block in the day, Route Selection
and the following blocks must be set in (ARS)
chronological order.

Correct programming example:

Time-A: 8:00
Time-B: 17:00
Time-C: 21:00

Incorrect programming example:

Time-A: 8:00
Time-B: 13:00
Time-C: 11:30
Time-D: 17:00

520 PC Programming Manual

 16.4 PBX Configuration—[8-4] ARS—Routing Plan Priority

16.4 PBX Configuration—[8-4] ARS—Routing Plan

Priority
The carrier priority (1 through 6) in a Routing Plan Table can be programmed for each time zone of each day
of the week. Select the desired Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list. Select the desired
day of the week by clicking the applicable tab.
Name Description Value Range Links
Time-A–Time-D Specifies the carrier to be given None, 1–48 Feature Manual
priority for each time zone. References
2.8.1 Automatic Route
Selection (ARS)

PC Programming Manual 521

16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier

16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier

Carrier
It is possible to specify how user-dialled numbers are modified for connecting to the appropriate carrier. A
maximum of 48 different carriers can be programmed to be used with the ARS feature.
Name Description Value Range Links
Carrier Name Specifies the carrier name. Max. 20 Feature Manual
characters References
2.8.1 Automatic Route
Selection (ARS)
Removed Specifies the number of leading digits to 0–15 Feature Manual
Number of remove from the user-dialled number. References
Digits 2.8.1 Automatic Route
Selection (ARS)
Modify Specifies the commands to modify the Max. 16 Feature Manual
Command user-dialled number to access the characters References
carrier. For details of each command, (consisting of 0–9, 2.8.1 Automatic Route
see the Feature Manual. *, #, C, P, A, G, I Selection (ARS)
and H)
CLIP Table Sets the CLIP numbers established for 1–8 Feature Manual
No. each extension (wired/wireless) of a References
carrier. The CLIP IDs for each CLIP 2.8.1 Automatic Route
number are set in 12.1.7 PBX Selection (ARS)
Configuration—[4-1-7] Extension—
Wired Extension—CLIP ID Table and
12.2.5 PBX Configuration—[4-2-5]
Extension—Portable Station—CLIP
ID Table.
Carrier Specifies the carrier access code. The Max. 32 digits Feature Manual
Access Code carrier access code can be added to the (consisting of 0–9, References
user-dialled number by specifying "C" in *, #, and P 2.8.1 Automatic Route
Modify Command on this screen. [Pause]) Selection (ARS)

TRG Priority
Selects the order in which trunk groups are seized when making calls via each carrier.
Name Description Value Range Links
Trunk Group— Specifies which trunk group is None, 1–64 Feature Manual
Priority 1–Priority 4 seized in the order of priority 1 to References
priority 4. 2.8.1 Automatic Route
Selection (ARS)

TRG 01–TRG 64
Selects the trunk groups that connect to the carrier.

522 PC Programming Manual

 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier

Name Description Value Range Links

TRG 01– Enables each trunk group for each carrier. OFF (white), ON Feature Manual
TRG 64 If a cell is highlighted in blue, that trunk (blue) References
group is enabled for use with that carrier. 2.8.1 Automatic Route
Selection (ARS)

Authorisation Code for Tenant

Specifies an Authorisation code for each tenant. The Authorisation codes can be added to the user-dialled
number by specifying "A" command in Modify Command on the Carrier tab.
Name Description Value Range Links
Authorisation Code for Specifies the Max. 16 digits Feature Manual
Tenant—Tenant 1– Authorisation code of (consisting of 0–9, *, References
Tenant 8 each carrier for each and #) 2.8.1 Automatic Route
tenant. Selection (ARS)
5.1.3 Tenant Service

PC Programming Manual 523

16.6 PBX Configuration—[8-6] ARS—Leading Number Exception

16.6 PBX Configuration—[8-6] ARS—Leading

Number Exception
Specifies telephone numbers that will not be connected using the ARS feature. When the user-dialled
number includes a leading number exception, the PBX sends the number to a trunk by the Idle Line Access
method if ARS Mode in 16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting is "on".
A maximum of 200 different leading number exceptions can be programmed. 20 leading number exception
entries are displayed on the screen at a time. To display other sets, click the applicable tab.
Name Description Value Range Links
Leading Specifies the leading Max. 16 digits (consisting of Feature Manual
Number number exception. 0–9, *, #, and X) References
Exception 2.8.1 Automatic Route
Selection (ARS)

524 PC Programming Manual

 16.7 PBX Configuration—[8-7] ARS—Authorisation Code for TRG

16.7 PBX Configuration—[8-7] ARS—Authorisation

Code for TRG
An Authorisation code can be specified for each trunk group. The Authorisation codes entered here can be
added to user-dialled numbers by adding "G" to the Modify Command specified on the Carrier tab of
screen 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier.
8 trunk groups are displayed on the screen at a time. To display other groups, click the applicable tab.
Name Description Value Range Links
TRG—TRG Specifies the Max. 10 digits PC Programming Manual
01–TRG 64 Authorisation code of (consisting of 0–9, *, References
each carrier for each and #) 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—
trunk group. Carrier—Carrier—Modify Command
Feature Manual References
2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

PC Programming Manual 525

16.7 PBX Configuration—[8-7] ARS—Authorisation Code for TRG

526 PC Programming Manual

 Section 17
PBX Configuration—[9] Private Network

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Private Network menu of the PBX Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 527

17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table

17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—

TIE Table
A TIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs, which provides cost effective
communications between company members at different locations.
A maximum of 32 TIE Line Routing and Modification Tables can be programmed. It is necessary to make
unified tables with all PBXs at different locations in a TIE line network in order to identify the trunk route to
be used when an extension makes or receives a TIE line call.
There are two types of routing methods: the Extension Number Method, where all extensions in the network
are given a unique extension number; and the PBX Code Method, where each PBX is given a unique code,
which is dialled before the extension number to call an extension at another PBX.
Two priority sets (from a total of 8) are displayed at a time. To display other priority sets, click the applicable
tab.
Using a private network, up to 8 PBXs can share one voice mail system (centralised VM) connected to
another PBX. This can provide voice mail for extensions attached to any of the PBXs in the network.
Name Description Value Range Links
Own PBX Specifies the PBX code of the local PBX, Max. 7 digits Feature Manual
Code when using PBX Code Method numbering on (consisting of 0–9) References
a TIE line network. If this cell is left empty, 4.3.1 TIE Line
the Extension Number Method is used. Service

Priority 1–Priority 8
Name Description Value Range Links
Leading Specifies the leading number for Max. 3 digits Feature Manual
Number other PBX extension numbers or the (consisting of 0–9, *, References
PBX code of others in the TIE line and #) 4.3.1 TIE Line Service
network.
Removed Specifies the number of leading digits 0–15 Feature Manual
Number of of the dialled number to be removed References
Digits for each priority. 4.3.1 TIE Line Service
Added Specifies the number to be added to Max. 32 digits Feature Manual
Number the dialled number in place of the (consisting of 0–9, *, References
removed digits for each priority. #, and P [Pause]) 4.3.1 TIE Line Service
Trunk Group Specifies the trunk group to be used None, 1–64 Feature Manual
for TIE line calls for each priority. References
4.3.1 TIE Line Service

Enhanced QSIG
Name Description Value Range Links
Leading Number Specifies the leading number for other Max. 3 digits Feature Manual
PBX extension numbers or the PBX (consisting of 0–9, References
code of other PBXs in the TIE line *, and #) 4.3.5 QSIG Enhanced
network. Features

528 PC Programming Manual

 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table

Name Description Value Range Links

Enhanced QSIG Enables Network Message Waiting Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Call Information information to be sent from the PBX to References
(Activation Key which the voice mail system is attached 4.3.5 QSIG Enhanced
Required) to extensions connected to other PBXs Features
in the network.

PC Programming Manual 529

17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission

17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—

Network Data Transmission
Settings related to the transmission of extension BLF (Busy Line Field) data or Message Waiting
notifications over a network of PBXs can be programmed.
Extension BLF data is used to show the status of a monitored extension attached to another PBX on a
Network DSS (NDSS) button. Network Message Waiting notifications are used for the Centralised VM
feature, and a voice mail system can send notifications to extensions connected to any PBX in the network.
Name Description Value Range Links
Network Data Specifies the Network ID of the 0: The PBX Feature Manual
Transmission for PBX, for Network Direct retransmits References
Centralised Station Selection (NDSS). This BLF data sent 4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station
Operator Feature— parameter must be set in by other Selection (NDSS)
Network PBX ID correspondence with the PBXs.
Network IDs assigned to other 1: The PBX
PBXs in the network. receives BLF
Network IDs 1-8 can only be data sent by
assigned to one PBX each other PBXs.
within a network. Assigning the 2–8: The PBX
same Network ID to two PBXs transmits BLF
will cause network data data over the
transmission problems. network.
Changing this value in On-line
mode will automatically clear
any NDSS Link Data.
Network Data Selects whether to re-send Disable, PC Programming Manual
Transmission for BLF data received from a VoIP Enable References
Centralised port through any ISDN ports 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Operator Feature— that are set to transmit BLF Configuration—Slot—Port
Data Transmission data. Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO
VoIP->ISDN —Networking Data Transfer
9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Port
Property - PRI Port—CO
Setting—Networking Data
Transfer
Feature Manual
References
4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station
Selection (NDSS)

530 PC Programming Manual

 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission

Name Description Value Range Links

Network Data Selects whether to re-send Disable, PC Programming Manual
Transmission for BLF data received from an Enable References
Centralised ISDN port through any VoIP 17.3 PBX Configuration—[9-3]
Operator Feature— ports that are set to transmit Private Network—Network
Data Transmission BLF data. Operator (VoIP)—IP-GW Card
ISDN->VoIP Slot No. to notify BLF data to
Network Operator
Feature Manual
References
4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station
Selection (NDSS)
Network Data Specifies the maximum 1–63 Feature Manual
Transmission for number of "hops", or References
Centralised transmissions between two 4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station
Operator Feature— PBXs, before a packet of BLF Selection (NDSS)
Data Transmission data is discarded.
Counter
Network Data Specifies the frequency of BLF 100 × n (n=0– Feature Manual
Transmission for data transmission. The PBX 30) ms References
Centralised will send data over the network 4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station
Operator Feature— periodically according to the Selection (NDSS)
Data Broadcasting interval specified here.
Interval Timer
Network MSW Data Specifies the number of times 0–10 PC Programming Manual
Transmission for re-transmission of network References
Centralised VM message waiting notifications 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1]
Feature—Data Re- is repeated before being Private Network—TIE Table—
transmission : cancelled. Enhanced QSIG Call
Repeat Counter Information (Activation Key
Required)
Feature Manual
References
4.3.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail
Network MSW Data Specifies the length of time 10–240 s PC Programming Manual
Transmission for between repeated re- References
Centralised VM transmission of network 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1]
Feature—Data Re- message waiting notifications. Private Network—TIE Table—
transmission : Enhanced QSIG Call
Repeat Timer Information (Activation Key
Required)
Feature Manual
References
4.3.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail

PC Programming Manual 531

17.3 PBX Configuration—[9-3] Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP)

17.3 PBX Configuration—[9-3] Private Network—

Network Operator (VoIP)
This screen allows network operators to be programmed. A network operator is an extension at a remote
PBX that will monitor other PBX extensions using Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS). The settings on
this screen should be programmed at the PBX that is to be monitored (Network Data Transmission for
Centralised Operator Feature—Network PBX ID 2–8). Up to 8 network operators can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
Network Specifies the number of an Max. 16 digits PC Programming Manual
Operator extension at the monitor PBX (consisting of 0–9, *, References
Extension (the PBX whose Network Data and #) 17.2 PBX Configuration—
No. Transmission for Centralised [9-2] Private Network—
Operator Feature—Network Network Data Transmission
PBX ID is set to 1 in 17.2 PBX —Network Data
Configuration—[9-2] Private Transmission for Centralised
Network—Network Data Operator Feature—Network
Transmission). Any extension PBX ID
at the monitor PBX can be
specified here. Feature Manual
References
4.3.5.1 Network Direct
Station Selection (NDSS)
IP-GW Card Specifies the slot number of the Undefined, 1 – 4, 1 – PC Programming Manual
Slot No. to card used to send extension 5, 2 – 2, 2 – 3, 3 – 2, References
notify BLF status data. This setting is only 3 – 3, 4 – 2, 4 – 3, 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
data to required when using VoIP to Virtual – 1, Virtual – Configuration—Slot
Network transmit data. 2, Virtual – 3, Virtual
Operator –4 Feature Manual
References
4.3.5.1 Network Direct
Station Selection (NDSS)

532 PC Programming Manual

 17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4] Private Network—NDSS Key Table

17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4] Private Network—

NDSS Key Table
Extensions at up to 7 other PBXs that will be monitored using Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) can
be registered. A maximum of 250 extensions can be registered. To create an NDSS button to monitor an
extension, the extension must be registered here first.
To clear NDSS link data, click the NDSS Clear button. The NDSS Clear button can be used only in On-line
mode.
Note that the parameters on this screen can only be set when the Network Data Transmission for
Centralised Operator Feature—Network PBX ID is set to 1 in the 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private
Network—Network Data Transmission screen.
Name Description Value Range Links
Network Specifies the number of the Max. 16 digits Feature Manual References
Extension No. remote extension (attached to (consisting of 4.1 Public Network Features—
another PBX) that will be 0–9, *, and #) 4.3.1 TIE Line Service
monitored. The number input 4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station
here can use either Extension Selection (NDSS)
Number Method or PBX Code
Method.
Network Specifies the name of the Max. 20 Feature Manual References
Extension Name network extension. This name characters 4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station
for Programming is only shown here, not on the Selection (NDSS)
Reference displays of extensions.
Network PBX ID Indicates the Network Data None, 1–8 PC Programming Manual
of Network Transmission for Centralised References
Extension to be Operator Feature—Network 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2]
monitored PBX ID of the PBX that the Private Network—Network Data
extension is connected to Transmission—Network Data
(reference only). Transmission for Centralised
Operator Feature—Network
PBX ID
Feature Manual References
4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station
Selection (NDSS)

PC Programming Manual 533

17.5 PBX Configuration—[9-5] Private Network—Centralised UM/VM Unit

17.5 PBX Configuration—[9-5] Private Network—

Centralised UM/VM Unit
View and programme settings for using the Unified Messaging system and VPSs in a private network. To
view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 6.5 Tool—
Extension List View).
Name Description Value Range Links
Unit No. Indicates the unit number of the UM system or VM unit, Unit No.
as assigned by the PBX (reference only).
Floating Specifies the floating extension number of the Max. 8 digits
Extension No. centralised UM or VM (VPS) group. This floating (consisting of 0–9)
(TIE) extension number must start with the number used to
access a TIE line or the extensions of another PBX.
Group Name (20 Specifies the name of the centralised UM or VM (VPS) Max. 20
characters) group, which will be shown on the display of Characters
extensions that call it.

534 PC Programming Manual

 Section 18
PBX Configuration—[10] CO & Incoming Call

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the CO & Incoming Call menu of the PBX
Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 535

18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call

—CO Line Settings
Trunks can be assigned a name, and grouped into a maximum of 64 trunk groups.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Card Type Indicates the type of card to which the trunk is Card type
connected (reference only).
CO Name Specifies the trunk name which is shown on the Max. 20 Feature Manual
extension’s display when receiving a call from characters References
the trunk. 2.21.4 Display
Information
Trunk Specifies the trunk group number to which the 1–64 Feature Manual
Group trunk belongs. References
Number When a V-IPGW card is installed, the value is 5.1.2 Group
automatically set to "7" for the corresponding
trunks.

536 PC Programming Manual

 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call

—DIL Table & Port Settings
Direct In Line (DIL) or Direct Dialling In (DDI)/Direct Inward Dialling (DID) can be selected for each trunk as
the method of distributing incoming trunk calls to certain destinations. For each trunk to which DIL
distribution is set, different destinations can be programmed depending on the time mode (day/lunch/break/
night). If desired, Calling Line Identification (CLI) distribution can be used in conjunction with DIL distribution.

DIL
For each trunk to which DIL distribution is set, different DIL destinations can be programmed depending on
the time mode (day/lunch/break/night). Generally, DIL distribution is used for trunk calls from analogue
trunks. Tenant number and service group number can also be programmed for each trunk.
To assign DIL destination numbers, enter directly or click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension
Number Setting).
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Card Type Indicates the trunk card type Card type Feature Manual
(reference only). References
2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call
Features—SUMMARY
Trunk Indicates the networking type of Public, Feature Manual
Property each trunk (reference only). Private(TIE), VPN References
2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call
Features—SUMMARY
4.3.1 TIE Line Service
4.3.3 ISDN Virtual Private
Network (ISDN-VPN)
Distribution Selects the distribution method DIL: Distribution Feature Manual
Method for incoming trunk calls. The depends on the References
value range of this setting trunk through 2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call
depends on the card type and which the calls Features—SUMMARY
Trunk Property assigned for arrive
each trunk. DDI/DID:
Distribution
depends on the
DDI/DID number of
the calls
MSN: Distribution
depends on the
MSN of the calls

PC Programming Manual 537

18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

DIL Specifies the DIL destination in Max. 5 digits PC Programming
Destination— each time mode. (consisting of 0–9) Manual References
Day, Lunch, 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—
Break, Night [2-6-1] System—Numbering
Plan—Main
Feature Manual
References
2.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)
4.3.1 TIE Line Service
Tenant Specifies the tenant number, to 1–8 Feature Manual
Number determine the Time Table by References
which calls are distributed 2.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)
depending on the time of day. 5.1.3 Tenant Service
5.1.4 Time Service
UM Service Specifies the Service Group None, 1–64 Feature Manual
Group No. number sent to the Unified References
Messaging system when the 2.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)
incoming call destination is the 3.2.1 System Features—
floating extension number of a 3.2.1.39 Service Group
UM group.
The Service Group number is
used to allow the Unified
Messaging system to send the
applicable greeting message to
the caller.
VM Trunk Specifies the number of the VM 1–48
Group No. trunk group sent to the VPS when
the incoming call destination is
the floating extension number of a
VM (DPT) Group. The VM trunk
group number is used to allow the
VPS to send the applicable
greeting message to the caller.

CLI for DIL

When CLI distribution is enabled for a trunk to which DIL distribution is set, incoming trunk calls will be
distributed to the CLI destinations (instead of the DIL destinations) if the caller’s identification number is
found in the System Speed Dialling Table.
CLI distribution can be enabled or disabled for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) on a trunk basis.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Card Type Indicates the trunk card Card type Feature Manual
type (reference only). References
2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call
Features—SUMMARY

538 PC Programming Manual

 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Trunk Property Indicates the networking Public, Private(TIE), Feature Manual
type of each trunk VPN References
(reference only). 2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call
Features—SUMMARY
4.3.1 TIE Line Service
4.3.3 ISDN Virtual Private
Network (ISDN-VPN)
Distribution Selects the distribution DIL: Distribution Feature Manual
Method method for incoming trunk depends on the trunk References
calls. The value range of through which the calls 2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call
this setting depends on the arrive Features—SUMMARY
card type and Trunk DDI/DID: Distribution
Property assigned for depends on the
each trunk. DDI/DID number of the
calls
MSN: Distribution
depends on the MSN of
the calls
CLI Ring for Enables CLI distribution in Disable, Enable Feature Manual
DIL—Day, each time mode. References
Lunch, Break, 2.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)
Night 2.1.1.5 Calling Line
Identification (CLI)
Distribution

DDI / DID / TIE / MSN

For each trunk to which DDI/DID distribution is set, or for each trunk whose Trunk Property on this screen
is Private (TIE), modification parameters for DDI/DID number and TIE line call numbers can be
programmed.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Card Type Indicates the trunk card Card type Feature Manual References
type (reference only). 2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call
Features—SUMMARY
Trunk Indicates the networking Public, Private(TIE), Feature Manual References
Property type of each trunk VPN 2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call
(reference only). Features—SUMMARY
4.3.1 TIE Line Service
4.3.3 ISDN Virtual Private
Network (ISDN-VPN)

PC Programming Manual 539

18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Distribution Selects the distribution DIL: Distribution Feature Manual References
Method method for incoming trunk depends on the 2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call
calls. The value range of trunk through which Features—SUMMARY
this setting depends on the the calls arrive 2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling
card type and Trunk DDI/DID: Distribution (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
Property assigned for each depends on the 2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber
trunk. DDI/DID number of Number (MSN) Ringing Service
the calls
MSN: Distribution
depends on the
MSN of the calls
DDI/DID/TIE/ Specifies the number of 0–15 Feature Manual References
MSN— leading digits to be 2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling
Remove Digit removed from the incoming (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
called number for DDI/DID 2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber
distribution or for TIE line Number (MSN) Ringing Service
service. 4.3.1 TIE Line Service
DDI/DID/TIE/ Specifies the number to be Max. 8 digits Feature Manual References
MSN— added to the incoming (consisting of 0–9, *, 2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling
Additional Dial called number in the place and #) (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
of the removed digits for 2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber
DDI/DID distribution or for Number (MSN) Ringing Service
TIE line service. 4.3.1 TIE Line Service

540 PC Programming Manual

 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call

—DDI / DID Table
Incoming trunk calls with DDI/DID numbers can be distributed to specific destinations. Each DDI/DID
number has a destination programmed for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night).
When CLI distribution is enabled for a DDI/DID number, incoming trunk calls with that DDI/DID number will
be distributed to the CLI destinations (instead of the DDI/DID destinations) if the caller’s identification
number is found in the System Speed Dialling Table, which is used as the Caller ID Table. CLI distribution
can be enabled or disabled for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) on a DDI/DID number basis.
A maximum of 1000 DDI/DID numbers can be programmed with other related parameters. 100 numbers are
displayed at a time. To display other sets of numbers, click the applicable tab.
To assign DDI/DID destination numbers, enter directly or click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension
Number Setting). It is possible to programme DDI/DID numbers and DDI/DID destinations in each time
mode (day/lunch/break/night) for a set of locations in series at once by clicking Automatic Registration, or
to programme DDI/DID names for a set of locations in series at once by clicking Name Generate.
Name Description Value Range Links
DDI / DID Specifies the DDI/DID number. Max. 32 digits PC Programming Manual
Number (consisting of References
0–9, *, and #) 18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO
& Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—
Automatic Registration
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/
Direct Dialling In (DDI)
DDI / DID Specifies the name for the Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
Name DDI/DID number which is characters References
shown on the extension’s 18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO
display when receiving a call & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—
with the DDI/DID number. The Name Generate
name of the DDI/DID number 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1]
can be printed out on SMDR. Maintenance—Main—SMDR Options
—SMDR Options
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/
Direct Dialling In (DDI)
DDI / DID Specifies the DDI/DID Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Destination— destination in each time mode. (consisting of References
Day, Lunch, 0–9) 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1]
Break, Night System—Numbering Plan—Main
18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO
& Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—
Automatic Registration
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/
Direct Dialling In (DDI)
4.3.1 TIE Line Service

PC Programming Manual 541

18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Automatic Registration

Name Description Value Range Links

Tenant Specifies the tenant number, 1–8 PC Programming Manual
Number to determine the Time Table References
by which calls are distributed 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4]
depending on the time of day. System—Week Table
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/
Direct Dialling In (DDI)
UM Service Specifies the Service Group None, 1–64 Feature Manual References
Group No. number sent to the Unified 2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/
Messaging system when the Direct Dialling In (DDI)
incoming call destination is the 3.1.1 Unified Messaging System
floating extension number of a Overview
UM group.
The Service Group number is
used to allow the Unified
Messaging system to send the
applicable greeting message
to the caller.
VM Trunk Specifies the number of the 1–48
Group No. VM trunk group sent to the
VPS when the incoming call
destination is the floating
extension number of a VM
(DPT) Group. The VM trunk
group number is used to allow
the VPS to send the
applicable greeting message
to the caller.
CLI Ring for Enables CLI distribution in Disable, PC Programming Manual
DDI/DID— each time mode. Enable References
Day, Lunch, 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1]
Break, Night Feature—System Speed Dial
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/
Direct Dialling In (DDI)
2.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification
(CLI) Distribution

18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID

Table—Automatic Registration
Automatic Registration allows DDI/DID numbers and DDI/DID destinations in each time mode (day/lunch/
break/night) to be programmed at once for a set of locations in series.

542 PC Programming Manual

 18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Name Generate

Name Description Value Range Links

Beginning Specifies the number of the first 1–1000 PC Programming Manual
Entry Location location to be programmed. References
18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3]
CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID
Table
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling
(DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
Generate Specifies the DID number of the Max. 32 PC Programming Manual
DDI/DID first location to be programmed. digits References
Number DDI/DID numbers for subsequent (consisting of 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3]
(From) locations will be generated 0–9) CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID
automatically, by adding one to Table
the value of the previous location.
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling
(DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
Number of Specifies the number of locations 1–1000 PC Programming Manual
Registration to be programmed. References
18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3]
CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID
Table
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling
(DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
Destination— Specifies the number of the Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Day, Lunch, DDI/DID destination in each time (consisting of References
Break, Night mode for the first location to be 0–9) 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3]
programmed. If the same CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID
destination is to be used for all Table
locations for a certain time mode,
click the appropriate Same all Feature Manual References
check box. If the Same all check 2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling
box for a certain time mode is not (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
clicked, the destination numbers
for subsequent locations will be
generated automatically, by
adding one to the value of the
previous location for that time
mode.

18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID

Table—Name Generate
Name Generate allows DDI/DID names to be programmed at once for a set of locations in series.
If a name generated here is longer than 20 characters, the additional characters will be discarded.

PC Programming Manual 543

18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Name Generate

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Beginning Specifies the number of 1–1000 PC Programming Manual References
Entry the first location to be 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO &
Location programmed. Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct
Dialling In (DDI)
Number to Specifies the number of 1–1000 PC Programming Manual References
Generate locations to be 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO &
programmed. Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct
Dialling In (DDI)
No. of Digits Specifies the number of 0–32 PC Programming Manual References
to Delete digits to be deleted from 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO &
the start of a DDI/DID Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table
number when using it as
part of the DDI/DID name. Feature Manual References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct
Dialling In (DDI)
Name Prefix Specifies the text to be Max. 20 PC Programming Manual References
included at the start of characters 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO &
each DDI/DID name. Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct
Dialling In (DDI)
Name Suffix Specifies the text to be Max. 20 PC Programming Manual References
included at the end of each characters 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO &
DDI/DID name. Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct
Dialling In (DDI)

544 PC Programming Manual

 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table

18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call

—MSN Table
Incoming ISDN-BRI (Basic Rate Interface) line calls with Multiple Subscriber Numbers (MSNs) can be
distributed to a certain destination. Each MSN has a destination programmed for each time mode (day/
lunch/break/night).
A maximum of 10 MSNs can be programmed for each ISDN-BRI port.
To use this feature, Access Mode in 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property
- BRI Port must be set to P-MP.

MSN
To assign MSN destination numbers, enter directly or click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension
Number Setting).
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
MSN Number Specifies the MSN. Max. 16 digits PC Programming Manual
(consisting of References
0–9, *, and #) 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Port Property -
BRI Port
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number
(MSN) Ringing Service
MSN Name Specifies the name for the MSN Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
which is shown on the characters References
extension’s display when 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
receiving a call with the MSN. Configuration—Slot—Port Property -
BRI Port
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number
(MSN) Ringing Service
MSN Specifies the MSN destination Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Destination— in each time mode. (consisting of References
Day, Lunch, 0–9) 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Break, Night Configuration—Slot—Port Property -
BRI Port
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number
(MSN) Ringing Service

PC Programming Manual 545

18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table

Name Description Value Range Links

Tenant Specifies the tenant number, to 1–8 PC Programming Manual
Number determine the Time Table by References
which calls are distributed 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
depending on the time of day. Configuration—Slot—Port Property -
BRI Port
10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4]
System—Week Table
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number
(MSN) Ringing Service
VM Trunk Specifies the number of the VM 1–48
Group No. trunk group sent to the VPS
when the incoming call
destination is the floating
extension number of a VM
(DPT) Group. The VM trunk
group number is used to allow
the VPS to send the applicable
greeting message to the caller.
UM Service Specifies the Service Group None, 1–64 PC Programming Manual
Group No. number sent to the Unified References
Messaging system when the 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
incoming call destination is the Configuration—Slot—Port Property -
floating extension number of a BRI Port
UM group.
The Service Group number is Feature Manual References
used to allow the Unified 2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number
Messaging system to send the (MSN) Ringing Service
applicable greeting message to
the caller.

CLI for MSN

When CLI distribution is enabled for an ISDN-BRI line to which MSN distribution is set, incoming trunk calls
will be distributed to the CLI destinations (instead of the MSN destinations) if the caller’s identification
number is found in the System Speed Dialling Table.
CLI distribution can be enabled or disabled for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) on a trunk basis.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
CLI Ring for Enables CLI Disable, PC Programming Manual References
MSN—Day, distribution in each Enable 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—
Lunch, Break, time mode. Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Night
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN)
Ringing Service
2.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI)
Distribution

546 PC Programming Manual

 18.5 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous

18.5 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call

—Miscellaneous
The Intercept Routing feature can activate when the destination of an incoming call is unavailable, or when
there is no destination for the call, to reroute the call to an alternate destination.
Name Description Value Range Links
Intercept—Intercept Enables the Intercept Disable (Busy Tone): Sends a Feature Manual
Routing - DND Routing—DND feature busy tone to the caller. References
(Destination sets to activate when the (However, a call through an 2.1.1.6 Intercept
DND.) original destination is in LCOT card will ring at the Routing
DND mode. original destination while the 2.3.3 Do Not Disturb
caller hears a ringback tone.) (DND)
Enable: Redirects the call to
the intercept destination
Intercept—Routing to Enables the Intercept Disable (Reorder Tone): Feature Manual
Operator - No Routing—No Sends a reorder tone to the References
Destination Destination feature to caller. (However, a call 2.1.1.7 Intercept
(Destination is not activate when there is through an LCOT card will ring Routing—No
programmed.) no destination for the at the original destination Destination
call. while the caller hears a
ringback tone.)
Enable: Redirects the call to
an operator
Intercept—Intercept Enables the Intercept Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Routing for Routing feature to References
Extension Call operate for extension 2.1.1.7 Intercept
calls. Routing—No
Destination

PC Programming Manual 547

18.5 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous

548 PC Programming Manual

 Section 19
PBX Configuration—[11] Maintenance

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Maintenance menu of the PBX Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 549

19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main

19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main

SMDR
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) automatically records detailed information about incoming and
outgoing calls.
Name Description Value Range Links
SMDR Format— Selects the format of Type A: 80 digits Feature Manual References
Type SMDR output. without call charge 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
information Recording (SMDR)
Type B: 80 digits
with call charge
information
Type C: 120 digits
SMDR Format— Selects the Serial Interface None, Feature Manual References
Port port that is used to output LAN(TELNET) 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
the SMDR data. Recording (SMDR)
SMDR Format— Specifies the number of No Print, 4–99 Feature Manual References
Page Length lines on a page of output 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
(Number of paper. Match the SMDR Recording (SMDR)
Lines) output to the paper size
being used in the printer.
SMDR Format— Specifies the number of 0–95 Feature Manual References
Blank Footer lines to be skipped at the 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
Length (Number end of every page. The Recording (SMDR)
of Lines) number of lines for the skip
perforation should be
shorter than the page
length.
SMDR Format— Selects the printed date MM-DD-YY, DD- Feature Manual References
Date Format format. MM-YY, YY-MM- 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
DD, YY-DD-MM Recording (SMDR)
SMDR Format— Selects whether times are 12H, 24H Feature Manual References
Time Format displayed using the 12- or 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
(12H / 24H) 24-hour format. Recording (SMDR)
Print Information Specifies whether the No Print, Print PC Programming Manual
—Outgoing Call dialled digits of outgoing References
trunk calls are printed. 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
Class of Service (COS) [2-7-1] System—Class of
programming determines Service—COS Settings—CO &
the printable records. SMDR—Outgoing CO Call
Printout (SMDR)
Feature Manual References
2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR)

550 PC Programming Manual

 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Print Information Specifies whether the No Print, Print Feature Manual References
—Incoming Call information relating to 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
incoming trunk calls, such Recording (SMDR)
as caller’s identification
name and number, is
printed.
Print Information Specifies whether the No Print, Print Feature Manual References
—Intercom Call dialled digits of outgoing 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
intercom calls are printed. Recording (SMDR)
Print Information Specifies whether the log- No Print, Print Feature Manual References
—Log-in / Log- in/log-out status is printed. 2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-out
out 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR)
Print Information Selects whether check-in No Print, Print PC Programming Manual
—Hotel Room and check-out data is References
Status output on SMDR. 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2]
Feature—Hotel & Charge
Feature Manual References
2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR)
2.23.2 Room Status Control
Print Information Selects whether Timed No Print, Print PC Programming Manual
—Timed Reminder data is output on References
Reminder SMDR. 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2]
(Wake-up Call) Feature—Hotel & Charge
Feature Manual References
2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR)
2.24.4 Timed Reminder
Print Information Specifies whether PBX No Print, Print Feature Manual References
—Error Log error log information is 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
output to SMDR. Recording (SMDR)
5.6.4 Local Alarm Information

PC Programming Manual 551

19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main

SMDR Options
Name Description Value Range Links
Option—ARS Selects the type of the dialled Dial before ARS Feature Manual
Dial number to be printed for a call Modification: The References
with the ARS feature. user-dialled number 2.5.4.8 Host PBX Access
Dial after ARS Code (Access Code to the
Modification: The Telephone Company from a
ARS modified Host PBX)
number 2.8 Automatic Route
Selection (ARS) Features
2.22.1.1 Station Message
Detail Recording (SMDR)
Option—Caller Selects the printing format of None, Number, Feature Manual
ID Number & caller identifications for Name, Name + References
Name incoming trunk calls. Number 2.22.1.1 Station Message
Detail Recording (SMDR)
Option— Selects the printing format of None, Number, Feature Manual
DDI/DID incoming trunk calls with a Name, Name + References
Number & DDI/DID number. Number 2.22.1.1 Station Message
Name Detail Recording (SMDR)
Option—Secret Selects the printing format of Print "...." (Secret), Feature Manual
Dial calls with a secret dial. The Print Dialled Number References
secret dial conceals all or part 2.6.1 Memory Dialling
of the dialled number. Note Features—SUMMARY
that selecting Dial before 2.22.1.1 Station Message
ARS Modification in Option Detail Recording (SMDR)
—ARS Dial on this screen
indicates the dialled numbers
as dots regardless of this
setting.

552 PC Programming Manual

 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Option— Selects whether private Print Dialled PC Programming
Privacy Mode dialling is enabled or disabled, Number: Disables Manual References
and how many digits to hide private dialling; all 19.1 PBX Configuration—
when enabled. dialled numbers [11-1] Maintenance—Main—
To enable this setting, Print (including additional SMDR—Print Information—
Information—Outgoing Call digits dialled after Outgoing Call
on the SMDR tab should be connection) are
set to Print. shown on SMDR. Feature Manual
No Print: No References
additional digits 2.22.1.1 Station Message
dialled after Detail Recording (SMDR)
connection will be
shown on SMDR.
Print "X", Print "XX",
Print "XXX", Print
"XXXX": The
selected number of
digits at the end of
dialled telephone
numbers, and any
additional digits
dialled after
connection, are
shown on SMDR as
"X".
Option— Specifies whether the time of No Print, Print Feature Manual
Condition Code receiving an incoming trunk References
"RC" call is printed. 2.22.1.1 Station Message
Detail Recording (SMDR)
Option— Specifies whether the time of No Print, Print Feature Manual
Condition Code answering an incoming trunk References
"AN" call is printed. 2.22.1.1 Station Message
Detail Recording (SMDR)
Option—Caller Specifies whether Caller ID Before Modification, PC Programming
ID Modification numbers are recorded on After Modification Manual References
SMDR as received (before 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—
being modified by the PBX) or [3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group
after being modified. —Caller ID Modification
Feature Manual
References
2.22.1.1 Station Message
Detail Recording (SMDR)
Emergency Call Specifies if an emergency call End of Call, Start Feature Manual
Notification is recorded on SMDR only and End of Call References
when the call is completed, or 2.22.1.1 Station Message
when the call is initially dialled Detail Recording (SMDR)
as well.

PC Programming Manual 553

19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

LAN—SMDR Specifies the port number 1–65535 Feature Manual
Port Number used to output SMDR data via References
the LAN. 2.22.1.1 Station Message
Detail Recording (SMDR)
LAN—SMDR Specifies the password used Max. 10 characters Feature Manual
Password to output the SMDR data via References
the LAN. 2.22.1.1 Station Message
Detail Recording (SMDR)
LAN—New Line Specifies the new line code for CR + LF, CR Feature Manual
Code for Telnet a terminal emulator. References
If the terminal emulator 2.22.1.1 Station Message
automatically feeds lines with Detail Recording (SMDR)
a carriage return, select CR
(Carriage Return).
If not, select CR + LF (Line
Feed).

Maintenance
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Local Alarm Specifies the extension numbers of Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Display— PTs that will be notified by the PBX (consisting References
Extension 1, about local alarms. When the PBX of 0–9) 5.6.4 Local Alarm
Extension 2 detects a PBX error, the System Information
Alarm button on the PT turns on red.
When this button is pressed, the
display will show the error number,
and the button light will turn off
automatically.
Daily Test Start Enables the daily self check of the Disable, Feature Manual
Time—Set PBX for local alarm and error log. Enable References
5.6.4 Local Alarm
Information
Daily Test Start Specifies the hour of the PBX daily 0–23 Feature Manual
Time—Hour self check start time. References
5.6.4 Local Alarm
Information
Daily Test Start Specifies the minute of the PBX daily 0–59 Feature Manual
Time—Minute self check start time. References
5.6.4 Local Alarm
Information

554 PC Programming Manual

 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Error Log for UM Enables error information to be Disable, PC Programming
Port Busy— logged in the PBX if UM ports were Enable Manual References
Detection of All all busy specified in Detection of All 7.3.2 Utility—Log—Syslog
UM Port Busy UM Port Busy. This item is recorded
by Syslog. If this Log is frequently
recorded in your customer, it
indicates insufficiency of UM port.
Recommend to purchase Activation
Keys for expand UM port.
Error Log for UM Enables error information to be 3-300 (sec) PC Programming
Port Busy— logged in the PBX if UM ports were Manual References
Detection Busy all busy time specified in Detection 7.3.2 Utility—Log—Syslog
Threshold Time Busy Threshold Time. This item is
recorded by Syslog. If this Log is
frequently recorded in your customer,
it indicates insufficiency of UM port.
Recommend to purchase Activation
Keys for expand UM port.
Error Log for Enables error information to be Disable, PC Programming
Centralised VM— logged in the PBX if network Enable Manual References
Network MSW message waiting information is 17.1 PBX Configuration—
Transmission deleted after re-transmission is [9-1] Private Network—TIE
(Counter) repeated for the number of times Table—Enhanced QSIG
specified in Network MSW Data Call Information (Activation
Transmission for Centralised VM Key Required)
Feature—Data Re-transmission : 17.2 PBX Configuration—
Repeat Counter in 17.2 PBX [9-2] Private Network—
Configuration—[9-2] Private Network Data Transmission
Network—Network Data —Network MSW Data
Transmission. Transmission for
Centralised VM Feature—
Data Re-transmission :
Repeat Counter
Feature Manual
References
4.3.5.2 Centralised Voice
Mail

PC Programming Manual 555

19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Error Log for Enables error information to be Disable, PC Programming
Centralised VM— logged in the PBX if the quantity of Enable Manual References
Network MSW network message waiting information 17.1 PBX Configuration—
Transmission being re-transmitted is larger than the [9-1] Private Network—TIE
(Buffer) transmission buffer. Table—Enhanced QSIG
Call Information (Activation
Key Required)
Feature Manual
References
4.3.5.2 Centralised Voice
Mail

Remote
Name Description Value Range Links
Remote—Analogue Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Remote (Modem) number for analogue remote (consisting of 0– References
Floating Extension maintenance. To enable this setting, 9) 5.5.2 PC
Number an RMT card must be installed, and Programming
Remote—Remote Programming on
this screen must be enabled.
Remote—ISDN Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Remote Floating number for ISDN remote (consisting of 0– References
Extension Number maintenance. To enable this setting, 9) 5.5.2 PC
Remote—Remote Programming on Programming
this screen must be enabled.
Remote—Remote Enables system programming, Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Programming diagnosis, and data upload from a References
remote location. 5.5.2 PC
Programming
Remote—Password Specifies the number of successive None, 1–15 Feature Manual
Lock Counter for incorrect password entries allowed References
Remote before remote access is locked. 5.5.2 PC
Programming Programming
Remote—Remote Specifies the telephone number of Max. 32 digits Feature Manual
Maintenance Dial the PBX used to access the PBX (consisting of 0– References
Number (Own from a remote location for 9, *, and #) 5.5.2 PC
Telephone number maintenance purposes. This number Programming
for reference) can be specified by Quick Setup.

Password
Passwords authorise the user to programme the extension and the PBX by a PT or a personal computer.

556 PC Programming Manual

 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

System Password - PT Specifies the System 4–10 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Programming—Prog **: password to authorise the PT of 0–9, *, and #) References
User Level user to access User Level 5.5.2 PC
programming. Programming
System Password - PT Specifies the System 4–10 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Programming—Prog *#: password to authorise the PT of 0–9, *, and #) References
Administrator Level user to access User Level 5.5.2 PC
programming. Programming
Manager Password - Specifies the manager 4–10 digits (consisting Feature Manual
PT Programming—Prog password to authorise the PT of 0–9, *, and #) References
*1 user to access manager 5.1.6 Manager
programming. Features

PC Programming Manual 557

19.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2] Maintenance—PT Programming Access

19.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2] Maintenance—PT

Programming Access
The programming items accessible at User and Administrator level can be specified. 100 programming item
numbers are displayed at a time. To display other sets of numbers, click the applicable tab.
Name Description Value Range Links
Program Indicates the programming item 000–999 Feature Manual
Number number (reference only). References
5.5.3 PT Programming
PROG ** Selects whether User Level PT users Disable, Feature Manual
can access each system programming Enable References
item. 5.5.3 PT Programming
PROG *# Selects whether Administrator Level Disable, Feature Manual
PT users can access each system Enable References
programming item. 5.5.3 PT Programming

558 PC Programming Manual

 19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation

19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—CS

Synchronisation
19.3.1 PBX Configuration—[11-3-1] Maintenance—CS
Synchronisation—Air Synchronisation
You can programme and view settings for Air Synchronisation Groups.
Select an Air Synchronisation Group (1-4) to programme from the Air Synchronisation Group Number
drop-down list.
It is possible to synchronise CSs with each other within the air synchronisation group.
Click Sort to reorder CSs with traditional CSs first, followed by IP-CSs.
To open the screen described in 7.4.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—Air Sync Group, click
CS Status Monitor.
Air Synchronisation Groups can be programmed only in On-line mode.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Adding CSs
Follow the steps below to add CSs to the air synchronisation group.
1. Connect the CS to be registered to the network and, if necessary, the power supply.
2. Click Add.
A dialogue box will appear. Non-registered (available) CSs are displayed on the left.
3. Highlight CSs and click the right arrow to select them for addition.
4. Click OK.

Deleting CSs
Follow the steps below to delete CSs from the air synchronisation group.
1. Click Delete.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered CSs are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight CSs and click the right arrow to select them for deletion.
3. Click OK.
Name Description Value Range Links
Air Synchronisation Select the air synchronisation group to 1–4
Group Number programme.
Index Indicates the CS number (reference 1–16
only).
CS Name Indicates the name of the CS (reference Max. 20 characters
only).
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is in service.
status of the port, click the desired cell OUS: The port is out of
in the column, and then select INS or service.
OUS for the port. Fault: The port is not
communicating with the
network.
Status Indicates whether a certain CS is -, Registered
registered (reference only).

PC Programming Manual 559

19.3.2 PBX Configuration—[11-3-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Synchronisation

Name Description Value Range Links

CS Class Specifies the classification of each CS. Sync Master CS1, Sync
This parameter can only be modified Master CS2, Sync Slave
when Connection on this screen is set CS
to OUS.
Primary CS—Index Specifies the number of the primary CS. 1–16
Primary CS—Shelf Indicates the shelf number (reference 1: Main unit
only). 2–4: Expansion Unit
Virtual: Virtual card
Primary CS—Slot Indicates the slot position of the primary Slot number
CS (reference only).
Primary CS—Port Indicates the port number of the primary Port number
CS (reference only).
Primary CS—CS Name Indicates the name of the primary CS Max. 20 characters
(reference only).
Secondary CS—Index Specifies the number of the secondary 1–16
CS.
Secondary CS—Shelf Indicates the shelf number (reference 1: Main unit
only). 2–4: Expansion Unit
Virtual: Virtual card
Secondary CS—Slot Indicates the slot position of the Slot number
secondary CS (reference only).
Secondary CS—Port Indicates the port number of the Port number
secondary CS (reference only).
Secondary CS—CS Indicates the name of the secondary CS Max. 20 characters
Name (reference only).

19.3.2 PBX Configuration—[11-3-2] Maintenance—CS

Synchronisation—LAN Synchronisation
You can programme and view settings for LAN Synchronisation Groups.
Select a LAN Synchronisation Group (1-4) to programme from the LAN Synchronisation Group Number
drop-down list.
It is possible to synchronise CSs with each other within the LAN synchronisation group.
Click Sort to reorder CSs.
To open the screen described in 7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—LAN Sync Group,
click CS Status Monitor.
LAN Synchronisation Groups can be programmed only in On-line mode.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Note
Only KX-NS0154 IP-CSs can be added to a LAN synchronisation group.

Adding CSs
Follow the steps below to add CSs to the LAN synchronisation group.
1. Connect the CS to be registered to the network and, if necessary, the power supply.

560 PC Programming Manual

 19.3.2 PBX Configuration—[11-3-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Synchronisation

2. Click Add.
A dialogue box will appear. Non-registered (available) CSs are displayed on the left.
3. Highlight CSs and click the right arrow to select them for addition.
4. Click OK.

Deleting CSs
Follow the steps below to delete CSs from the LAN synchronisation group.
1. Click Delete.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered CSs are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight CSs and click the right arrow to select them for deletion.
3. Click OK.
Name Description Value Range Links
LAN Select the LAN synchronisation 1–4 PC
Synchronisation group to programme. Programming
Group Number Manual
Note References
You must specify a LAN
19.3.1 PBX
synchronisation group number
Configuration—
or an air synchronisation
[11-3-1]
group number for each IP-CS.
Maintenance—
Do not leave both of these
CS
settings unspecified.
Synchronisation
—Air
Synchronisation
—Air
Synchronisation
Group Number
IP Address for Specifies the IP address for the 239.0.0.0–
Group Control group. This is the same value 239.255.255.255
specified in Group Control
Setting—IP Address for Group
Control in 19.3.3 PBX
Configuration—[11-3-3]
Maintenance—CS
Synchronisation—LAN Sync
Group Setting.
Index Indicates the CS number 1–32
(reference only).
CS Name Indicates the name of the CS Max. 20 characters
(reference only).
Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in service.
change the status of the port, click OUS: The port is out of
the desired cell in the column, and service.
then select INS or OUS for the Fault: The port is not
port. communicating with the
network.
Status Indicates whether a certain CS is -, Registered
registered (reference only).

PC Programming Manual 561

19.3.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Sync Group Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

CS Class Specifies the classification of each Sync Master CS1, Sync
CS. This parameter can only be Master CS2-1, Sync
modified when Connection on Master CS2-2, Sync Slave
this screen is set to OUS.
Note
Sync Master CS1,
Sync Master CS2-1
and Sync Master
CS2-2 can each be
assigned to only 1
IP-CS in the same
LAN synchronisation
group.
MAC Address Indicates the MAC address of the 00:00:00:00:00:00–
IP-CS (reference only). FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF
Current IP Indicates the current IP address of 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Address the IP-CS (reference only).

19.3.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3-3] Maintenance—CS

Synchronisation—LAN Sync Group Setting
You can programme the settings for a LAN synchronisation group.
Name Description Value Range Links
LAN Synchronisation Group Select the LAN synchronisation 1–4
Number group to programme.
Group Control Setting—Type of Select the method for performing Multicast, Broadcast
Control Packet LAN synchronisation.
Group Control Setting—IP Specifies the IP address of the 239.0.0.1–
Address for Group Control group. 239.255.255.255
If Broadcast is selected for Group
Control Setting—Type of Control
Packet, this setting is greyed out.
Synchronisation Level Setting— Specifies the threshold for 0–8192 ns
Level of Synchronisation establishing LAN synchronisation.
Establish (ns)
Synchronisation Level Setting— Specifies the limit for determining 0–8192 ns
Limit level of Synchronisation synchronisation holding.
holding (ns)
Synchronisation Level Setting— Specifies the maximum duration for 0–256 s
Maximum duration of synchronisation holding.
Synchronisation holding (s)
Synchronisation Level Setting— Specifies the level at which re- 0–32768 ns
Level of Synchronisations Lost synchronisation is performed.
and Restart (ns)

562 PC Programming Manual

 19.3.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Sync Group Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Synchronisation Monitoring Specifies the number of hours 2–168 hours
Report Setting—Long Term between performing in-operation
Diagnosis Monitoring timer (h) monitoring (long term).

PC Programming Manual 563

19.3.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Sync Group Setting

564 PC Programming Manual

 Section 20
UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Mailbox Settings menu of the UM Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 565

20.1 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings

20.1 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings

A maximum of 500 subscriber mailboxes can be created. Although the System Manager can use a
telephone to create or edit mailboxes, the System Administrator can create several mailboxes at once using
Web Maintenance Console. Each mailbox can be edited based upon the needs of the subscriber.
Click each tab on the Mailbox Settings screen to specify the desired parameters.

Adding Mailboxes
1. Click the icon.
2. Edit each parameter in the "Mailbox" dialogue box.
3. Click OK.
A range of mailboxes can be added that use the default mailbox settings.
1. Click the icon.
2. Specify the range of mailboxes to add in From and To. Check Use the same number for Mailbox
and Extension to assign each mailbox to the same number extension.
3. Enter the number of mailboxes to create in Number Of Mailboxes:. To edit the default settings to be
used for each new mailbox, click Edit Default Mailboxes and make changes as necessary.
4. When all settings have been made, click OK to create the range of mailboxes.

Editing Mailboxes
To edit a specific mailbox, select the desired mailbox, then click the icon. You can also edit specific
parameters directly from the Mailbox Settings screen.

Deleting Mailboxes
1. Select a mailbox.
2. Click the icon.
3. Click OK.

20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-1] Mailbox Settings—Quick Setting

With Quick Settings, you can set the necessary minimum settings for Unified Messaging mailboxes. This
setting is available at the User (Administrator) level.
Name Description Value Range Links
Mailbox Specifies the subscriber’s mailbox 2–[the value PC Programming Manual
Number number. The maximum number of digits set in References
that can be used for mailbox numbers is Mailbox No. 10.9 PBX Configuration—
set in 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] Max. Length [2-9] System—System
System Parameters—Parameters— (3-8)] digits Options—Option 9
Mailbox—Mailbox No. Max. Length
(3-8), or when you initialise the system. Feature Manual
References
Note 3.1.1 Unified Messaging
The mailbox number can only be set System Overview
when adding a mailbox; when editing 3.2.2 Subscriber Features—
a mailbox, you cannot change the 3.2.2.17 Mailbox
assigned mailbox number.

566 PC Programming Manual

 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Specifies the extension number of the 2–8 digits PC Programming Manual
mailbox’s subscriber. Any valid extension References
number including an Extension Group 10.9 PBX Configuration—
number can be assigned. [2-9] System—System
Options—Option 9
Note
If an Extension Group number is Feature Manual
assigned to a mailbox, all group References
members are able to access the 3.1.1 Unified Messaging
messages stored in the mailbox. System Overview
3.2.2 Subscriber Features—
3.2.2.17 Mailbox
First Name Specifies the first name of the subscriber. Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
If there are non-alphabetical characters in characters References
the first 4 letters of the first name, the 21.1 UM Configuration—[2]
mailbox is not included in the directory. Class of Service—Directory
Listing
Feature Manual
References
3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name
Last Name Specifies the last name of the subscriber. Max. 20
If there are non-alphabetical characters in characters
the first 4 letters of the first name, the
mailbox is not included in the directory.

20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Mailbox Parameters
Name Description Value Range Links
Mailbox Specifies the subscriber’s mailbox 2–[the value set in PC Programming
Number number. The maximum number of Mailbox No. Max. Length Manual
digits that can be used for mailbox (3-8)] digits References
numbers is set in 24.4 UM
10.9 PBX
Configuration—[5-4] System
Configuration—[2-9]
Parameters—Parameters—
System—System
Mailbox—Mailbox No. Max.
Options—Option 9
Length (3-8), or when you initialise
the system. Feature Manual
References
Note
3.1.1 Unified
The mailbox number can only Messaging System
be set when adding a mailbox; Overview
when editing a mailbox, you 3.2.2 Subscriber
cannot change the assigned Features—3.2.2.17
mailbox number. Mailbox

PC Programming Manual 567

20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Specifies the extension number of 2–8 digits PC Programming
the mailbox’s subscriber. Any valid Manual
extension number including an References
Extension Group number can be
10.9 PBX
assigned.
Configuration—[2-9]
Note System—System
Options—Option 9
If an Extension Group number
is assigned to a mailbox, all Feature Manual
group members are able to References
access the messages stored in 3.1.1 Unified
the mailbox. Messaging System
Overview
3.2.2.17 Mailbox
First Name Specifies the first name of the Max. 20 characters PC Programming
subscriber. If there are non- Manual
alphabetical characters in the first 4 References
letters of the first name, the mailbox
21.1 UM
is not included in the directory.
Configuration—[2]
Class of Service—
Directory Listing
Feature Manual
References
3.2.1.16 Dialling by
Name
Last Name Specifies the last name of the Max. 20 characters PC Programming
subscriber. If there are non- Manual
alphabetical characters in the first 4 References
letters of the first name, the mailbox
21.1 UM
is not included in the directory.
Configuration—[2]
Class of Service—
Directory Listing
Feature Manual
References
3.2.1.16 Dialling by
Name

568 PC Programming Manual

 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Mailbox Specifies the password needed to Max. 16 digits PC Programming
Password access the mailbox. If a default Manual
password is programmed by an References
administrator, that password will be
26.1 UM
assigned automatically when
Configuration—[7]
creating all mailboxes.
System Security—
Administrators can change and
Subscriber
delete the password.
To change a password for a Feature Manual
mailbox: References
1. On the Mailbox Parameters 3.1.2.4 Password
Screen, click Edit under Administration
Mailbox Password for the
mailbox extension to change.
2. In the window that appears,
enter the new password and
then enter it again to confirm
it.
3. Click OK.
Mailbox Specifies the password needed to 4–16 characters (A–Z, a– PC Programming
Password access the mailbox when using a z, 0–9) Manual
(Message client software programme. If a References
Client) default password is programmed by
26.1 UM
an administrator, that password will
Configuration—[7]
be assigned automatically when
System Security—
creating all mailboxes.
Subscriber
Administrators can change and
delete the password. Feature Manual
To change a password for a References
mailbox: 3.1.2.4 Password
1. On the Mailbox Parameters Administration
Screen, click Edit under
Mailbox Password (Message
Client) for the mailbox
extension to change.
2. In the window that appears,
enter the new password and
then enter it again to confirm
it.
3. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual 569

20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Class of Determines the set of services COS No. 1–66 PC Programming
Service available to the subscriber. Manual
(Mailbox) References
Note
10.9 PBX
• We recommend that Configuration—[2-9]
parameters for each COS System—System
number be defined before Options—Option 9
assigning a Class of Service 21.1 UM
(COS) to each mailbox or Configuration—[2]
creating new mailboxes. Class of Service
• COS No. 65 and 66 are Feature Manual
assigned by default to the References
Message Manager and to the
System Manager, 3.1.1 Unified
respectively. No other Messaging System
mailboxes can be assigned Overview
to COS No. 65 and 66. 3.2.1.11 Class of
Service (COS)
Covering Forwards calls to a second 1–8 digits Feature Manual
Extension extension when the first extension’s References
subscriber is not available to take 3.2.1.14 Covering
the call. The Covering Extension is Extension
one of the Incomplete Call Handling
options that can be enabled or
disabled by the subscriber. The
caller can also be transferred the
Covering Extension by pressing [0]
while a Personal Greeting is being
played, or while leaving a message.

Note
Extension Groups or Logical
Extensions (extensions whose
calls are set to always be
directed their mailboxes) cannot
be assigned as covering
extensions.
Interview Assigns an interview mailbox to the 2–[the value set in Feature Manual
Mailbox subscriber’s mailbox. In order for it Mailbox No. Max. Length References
to function properly, the interview (3-8)] digits 3.2.1.24 Interview
mailbox number must not be the Service
same number as an existing
mailbox and an existing mailbox
group.

Note
Each caller’s replies to an
interview session are saved as
one message.

570 PC Programming Manual

 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

All Calls If this parameter is set to "Yes", the No, Yes Feature Manual
Transfer to extension is considered to be a References
Mailbox Logical Extension and therefore 3.2.1.3 Automated
calls directed to the extension via Attendant (AA)
Automated Attendant service are
automatically forwarded to the
extension mailbox. The extension
does not ring when a call is
received.
Call Specifies the method for the Call System, Other PC Programming
Transfer Transfer Sequence used by the Manual
Sequence mailbox. Allows each mailbox to be Note References
(Selection) assigned its own Call Transfer When "System" is 24.4 UM
Sequence (Personal Transfer selected, the Unified Configuration—[5-4]
Sequence). Messaging system System Parameters—
uses the extension Parameters—PBX
Note transfer sequence pre- Parameters—PBX
This sequence has higher programmed in Environment—
priority than the alternate 24.4 UM Extension Transfer
extension transfer sequence Configuration—[5-4] Sequence (Up to 16
specified in 24.4 UM System Parameters digits / [0-9 * # D R F
Configuration—[5-4] System —Parameters—PBX T X , ;])
Parameters—Parameters— Parameters—PBX
PBX Parameters—PBX Environment— Feature Manual
Environment—Alternate Extension Transfer References
Extension Transfer Sequence Sequence (Up to 16 3.2.2.7 Call Transfer
(Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D R F digits / [0-9 * # D R F Status
T X , ;]). T X , ;]).
Call Specifies the Call Transfer Enter a maximum of 16 Feature Manual
Transfer Sequence used by the mailbox. characters consisting of 0– References
Sequence Only specified if Call Transfer 9, , # and special codes: 3.2.2.7 Call Transfer
(Other) Sequence (Selection) is set to D: Disconnecting Status
"Other". F: Flash (Recall)
R: Ringback Tone
Detection
T: Dial Tone Detection
, : Dial Pause (default 1 s)
; : Dial Pause (default 3 s)
X: Extension Dialling
0–9, , #: Dial Code

PC Programming Manual 571

20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

No Answer Specifies the length of time that the System, Other (If "Other" PC Programming
Time Unified Messaging system waits is selected, specify 10–60 Manual
(Selection/ before handling unanswered calls s) References
Other) to the extension.
24.4 UM
Note Configuration—[5-4]
System Parameters—
When "System" is selected, the Parameters—Dialling
Unified Messaging system uses Parameters/MSW
the time pre-programmed in Notification—Dialling
24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] Parameters—Call
System Parameters— Transfer No Answer
Parameters—Dialling Time (10-60 s)
Parameters/MSW Notification
—Dialling Parameters—Call
Transfer No Answer Time
(10-60 s).
Call Determines how the Unified None: Rings the Feature Manual
Transfer Messaging system handles a call subscriber’s extension. References
Status when it reaches the subscriber’s Call blocking: Handles 3.2.2.7 Call Transfer
extension. Click Edit for the the call according to the Status
extension to change, programme Incomplete Call Handling
the settings, and click OK to finish. for No Answer setting for
the subscriber’s extension.
Note The subscriber’s extension
This setting can be changed by will not ring.
subscribers. Call screening: The caller
is prompted to record his
or her name. The Unified
Messaging system then
calls the subscriber and
plays back the caller
name. The subscriber can
choose whether to answer
the call.
Intercom Paging: Pages
the subscriber by
intercom.
Transfer to Mailbox:
Transfers the caller to the
mailbox.
Transfer to specified
Custom Service Menu:
Transfers the caller to the
specified Custom Service.
Transfer to specified
telephone number 1–5:
Transfers the caller to one
of the specified telephone
numbers in numerical
order of priority.

572 PC Programming Manual

 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Incomplete Specifies how the Unified Leave a Message: Allows Feature Manual
Call Messaging system handles a call the caller to record a References
Handling for when there is no answer. Click Edit message. 3.2.2.15 Incomplete
No Answer for the extension to change, Transfer to a covering Call Handling Service
programme the settings, and click extension: Transfers the
OK to finish. caller to a covering
extension.
Note Page the mailbox owner
• This setting can be changed by intercom paging:
by subscribers. Pages the subscriber by
intercom.
• More than one option can be Transfer to operator:
selected. Transfers the caller to an
operator.
Return to top menu: Lets
the caller return to top
menu and try another
extension.
Transfer to specified
Custom Service Menu:
Transfers the caller to the
specified Custom Service.
Incomplete Specifies how the Unified Leave a Message: Allows Feature Manual
Call Messaging system handles a call the caller to record a References
Handling for when the extension is busy. Click message. 3.2.2.15 Incomplete
Busy Edit for the extension to change, Transfer to a covering Call Handling Service
programme the settings, and click extension: Transfers the
OK to finish. caller to a covering
extension.
Note Page the mailbox owner
• This setting can be changed by intercom paging:
by subscribers. Pages the subscriber by
intercom.
• More than one option can be Transfer to operator:
selected. Transfers the caller to an
operator.
Return to top menu: Lets
the caller return to top
menu and try another
extension.
Transfer to specified
Custom Service Menu:
Transfers the caller to the
specified Custom Service.
Call Specifies whether callers can input Enable, Disable
Transfer an extension number to transfer
Anytime in their call while the Automated
Incomplete Attendant service is playing an
Handling Incomplete Call Handling menu.
Menu

PC Programming Manual 573

20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Notification Parameters
The Unified Messaging system is able to notify a subscriber when a new message is recorded in his or her
mailbox. There are 3 methods the system can use for notification:
– Lighting the Message Waiting Lamp on the subscriber’s extension telephone.
– Calling a pre-programmed device (external telephone, etc.). A maximum of 3 devices (Device 1, 2, 3) can
be programmed per mailbox.
– Sending an e-mail to a designated address.
Name Description Value Range Links
Message If set to "Enable", the Message Waiting Lamp of Disable, Enable Feature
Waiting Lamp the subscriber’s telephone turns on when a new Manual
message is recorded. References
3.2.1.29
Message
Waiting
Notification—
Lamp
Telephone Specifies the Message Waiting Notification Feature
Device schedule for each device. The following Manual
parameters can be specified for devices 1, 2, References
and 3. Click Edit for the extension to change,
3.2.1.30
set Device Notification for Unreceived
Message
Message to "Yes", and programme the settings,
Waiting
then click OK to finish.
Notification—
Telephone
Device
Telephone Specifies if notifications will be sent only for Yes, No Feature
Device— messages designated as urgent. Manual
Device No. 1, References
2, 3—Only
3.2.1.30
Urgent
Message
Messages
Waiting
Notification—
Telephone
Device

574 PC Programming Manual

 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Telephone Assigns a telephone number to Device 1, 2, or Max. 32 digits Feature
Device— 3. The subscriber can also specify the number consisting of 0–9, Manual
Device No. 1, to be dialled by entering it from his or her , # and special References
2, 3—Dial telephone, allowing the subscriber to set this codes:
3.2.1.30
Number [0-9 * feature on a case by case basis. , : Dial Pause
Message
# T X , ;] (default 1 s)
Note Waiting
; : Dial Pause
Notification—
When the Unified Messaging system calls a (default 3 s)
Telephone
trunk via the PRI card, be sure to add "#" T: Dial Tone
Device
after the telephone number (1112223333 in Detection
the example here): X: Callback
9P1112223333#PP123PP456PPX# (P: Dial Number Entry
Pause) Code
"X" is either the Caller ID information that 0–9, , #: Dial
was received when the message was Code
recorded or the value of System Callback
No. if no Caller ID information was received.
Telephone Specifies the number of times the Unified 0–9 times Feature
Device— Messaging system will try to send notification if Manual
Device No. 1, the device is busy or if there is no answer. References
2, 3—No. of
3.2.1.30
Retries
Message
Waiting
Notification—
Telephone
Device
Telephone Specifies the time (in minutes) the Unified 0–120 min Feature
Device— Messaging system waits before retrying Manual
Device No. 1, message notification when the called device is References
2, 3—Busy busy.
3.2.1.30
Delay Time
Message
(min)
Waiting
Notification—
Telephone
Device
Telephone Specifies the time (in minutes) the Unified 1–120 min Feature
Device— Messaging system waits before retrying Manual
Device No. 1, message notification when the called device References
2, 3—No does not answer.
3.2.1.30
Answer Delay
Message
Time (min)
Waiting
Notification—
Telephone
Device

PC Programming Manual 575

20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Telephone Specifies if and how each device is used for Not use: The Feature
Device— message notification. The subscriber can also selected device is Manual
Device No. 1, specify the use mode from his or her telephone. not used for References
2, 3—Use Schedule: If Scheduled is selected here, follow message
3.2.1.30
Mode the steps below to specify the time frame: notification.
Message
Continuously:
1. Select a day from the Day drop-down list Waiting
The device is
(Sunday – Saturday). Notification—
called whenever
2. Click Enable Time Frame No. 1 or 2. Telephone
a message is
Device
3. Enter the start and end times in the Start recorded in the
At (HH:MM) and End At (HH:MM) fields. mailbox. If Only
Urgent
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 for each day to be Messages is set
programmed, and then click OK. to "Yes", the
device is called
whenever an
urgent message
is recorded in the
mailbox.
Scheduled: The
selected device is
called only during
the selected
times.
Telephone Specifies the length of time the system waits 0–120 min Feature
Device— after a new message is received before sending Manual
Device message waiting notification. References
Notification
3.2.1.30
Timer—
Message
Device Start
Waiting
Delay Time
Notification—
(0-120 min)
Telephone
Device
Telephone Specifies how long the PBX waits after sending 0–120 min Feature
Device— Message Waiting Notification to Device 1, 2, or Manual
Device 3 before sending notification to the next device. References
Notification
3.2.1.30
Timer—
Message
Device
Waiting
Interval Time
Notification—
between
Telephone
Device 1, 2, 3
Device
and Next
Device

576 PC Programming Manual

 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

E-mail/Text Specifies the name of the user of the device. Max. 64 Feature
Message characters Manual
Device— References
Device No. 1,
3.2.1.28
2, 3—User
Message
Name
Waiting
Notification—E-
mail Device
E-mail/Text Specifies the e-mail address of the device. Max. 128 Feature
Message characters Manual
Device— Note References
Device No. 1, • In the mailbox user’s profile (See 3.2.1.28
2, 3—E-mail 8.1 Users—User Profiles) if Email 1–3 is Message
Address input in the Contact tab, and Automatic Waiting
copy to UM message notification is Notification—E-
checked, the e-mail address(es) will be mail Device
copied to this setting and overwrite any
previously input data here.
E-mail/Text Specifies if Message Waiting Notifications will Yes, No Feature
Message be sent only for urgent messages. Manual
Device— References
Device No. 1,
3.2.1.28
2, 3—Only
Message
Urgent
Waiting
Messages
Notification—E-
mail Device
E-mail/Text Specifies the format of the title of the Title-ID-Name, Feature
Message notification. Title-Name-ID, Manual
Device— ID-Title-Name, References
Device No. 1, Name-Title-ID,
3.2.1.28
2, 3—Title ID-Name-Title,
Message
Order Name-ID-Title
Waiting
Notification—E-
mail Device
E-mail/Text Specifies the text string to be included as part of Max. 30 Feature
Message the title of the notification. characters Manual
Device— References
Device No. 1,
3.2.1.28
2, 3—Title
Message
String
Waiting
Notification—E-
mail Device

PC Programming Manual 577

20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

E-mail/Text Specifies the callback number to be included in Max. 32 digits (0– Feature
Message the notification. 9, , #) Manual
Device— References
Device No. 1,
3.2.1.28
2, 3—
Message
Callback
Waiting
Number
Notification—E-
mail Device
E-mail/Text Specifies the delay between the message being 0–120 min Feature
Message left and the sending of the Message Waiting Manual
Device— Notification. References
Device No. 1,
3.2.1.28
2, 3—Send
Message
Wait Time
Waiting
[0-120 min]
Notification—E-
mail Device
E-mail/Text Specifies whether to attach a voice file of the Yes, No Feature
Message voice message to the notification e-mail. Manual
Device— References
Device No. 1,
3.2.1.28
2, 3—Attach
Message
Voice File
Waiting
Notification—E-
mail Device
E-mail/Text Specifies if and how each device is used for Not use: The Feature
Message message notification. selected device is Manual
Device— If Scheduled is selected here, follow the steps not used for References
Device No. 1, below to specify the time frame: message
3.2.1.28
2, 3—Use notification.
1. Click a day (Sunday – Saturday) tab. Message
Mode Continuously:
2. Click Enable Time Frame No. 1 or 2. Waiting
The device is
Notification—E-
3. Enter the start and end times in the Start called whenever
mail Device
At (HH:MM) and End At (HH:MM) fields. a message is
recorded in the
4. To specify if sent voice message is deleted mailbox. If Only
from the Unified Message system after Urgent
they are sent by e-mail, select "Yes" for Messages is set
Delete After Send (Voice File). to "Yes", the
5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 for each day to be device is called
programmed, and then click OK. whenever an
urgent message
Note is recorded in the
If voice message or fax image files are set mailbox.
to be deleted after they are sent by e-mail, Scheduled: The
be aware that a deleted file cannot be selected device is
recovered in the event that the e-mail is not called only during
sent successfully. the selected
times.

578 PC Programming Manual

 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/Personal Custom Serv

This tab contains programming items for External Message Delivery, Auto Forwarding, and Personal
Custom Service settings.
Name Description Value Range Links
External If set to "Yes", subscribers are able to utilise the No, Yes Feature
Message External Message Delivery feature. Manual
Delivery References
Active
3.2.2.12 External
Message Delivery
Service
External When an external message is delivered, the Primary, PC
Message receiver will be greeted by the system in the Selective, Programming
Delivery specified language. If set to "Primary", the default Guidance No. Manual
Prompt language will be used. If set to "Selective", the 1–8 References
Mode receiver has a choice of prompts. See related
22.1 UM
explanation in 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM
Configuration—
Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group—
[3-1] UM
Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Incoming
Extension / Trunk
Call Service Prompt.
Service—Service
Note Group—Day,
Night, Lunch, and
If set to "Selective" and the receiver uses a
Break Mode -
rotary telephone, the no-entry selection is
Incoming Call
specified by 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1]
Service Prompt
UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service
Group—Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode Feature
- Prompt for No DTMF Input Callers. Manual
References
3.2.1.41 System
Prompts
Auto If set to "Yes", the Unified Messaging system No, Yes Feature
Forwarding automatically forwards messages that have not Manual
Active been played for a specified length of time to References
another mailbox.
3.2.1.2 Auto
Forwarding
Auto Specifies the mailbox to which the messages will 2–[the value set Feature
Forwarding be forwarded. in Mailbox No. Manual
Mailbox Max. Length References
Number Note (3-8)] digits
3.2.1.2 Auto
A Mailbox Group number cannot be specified Forwarding
as a destination.

PC Programming Manual 579

20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Auto Specifies the length of time in hours and minutes 00:00–99:59 Feature
Forwarding that the system waits before forwarding unplayed Manual
Delay Time messages. The maximum delay time is 99 h, 59 References
min.
3.2.1.2 Auto
Note Forwarding
The delay time must be shorter than the New
Message Retention Time, or else messages
will be deleted before being forwarded.
Auto Specifies whether only urgent messages are Yes, No Feature
Forwarding forwarded. Manual
Message References
Type
3.2.1.2 Auto
Urgent
Forwarding
Auto Specifies if forwarded messages are to be retained Copy, Move Feature
Forwarding in the original mailbox. When set to "Copy", copies Manual
Mode of the messages are retained in the original References
mailbox after forwarding. When set to "Move",
3.2.1.2 Auto
messages are forwarded to the receiving mailbox
Forwarding
and are not retained in the original mailbox.
Auto Specifies if the forwarded messages remain Yes, No Feature
Forwarding marked as new. This setting is available only when Manual
Mode - Auto Forwarding Mode is set to "Copy". References
Message
3.2.1.2 Auto
Remains
Forwarding
New
Auto Specifies the date and time of day for when Date and time Feature
Forwarding forwarding of messages will expire. Manual
Expires References
3.2.1.2 Auto
Forwarding

580 PC Programming Manual

 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Personal Specifies the Personal Custom Service. The • Transfer to Feature
Custom System Administrator can assign an operation to specified Manual
Service each key. mailbox: 2– References
[the value set
Note 3.2.2.21 Personal
in Mailbox
Custom Service
• These settings can be changed by No. Max.
subscribers. Length (3-8)]
digits
• Make sure to add a trunk access number
when you store an outside telephone • Transfer to
number. specified
extension:
• When the Unified Messaging system calls a 2–8 digits
trunk via the PRI card, be sure to add "#"
after the telephone number (1112223333 in • Transfer to
the example here): specified
9P1112223333#PP123PP456PPX# (P: Dial Custom
Pause) Service
Follow the steps below to edit a Personal Custom Menu: 1–200
Service. • Transfer to
1. Click Edit. outside
(specified
2. For each Key, specify an Assigned number):
Operation. Outside
3. For each Assigned Operation that is Number 1–4
specified, specify a Value
4. Click OK when finished.

PC Programming Manual 581

20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Assigned Operation
• Transfer to specified mailbox: Allow the caller
to leave messages in a specified mailbox.
• Transfer to specified extension: Transfers the
caller to a specified extension.
• Transfer to Voice Mail Service: Allows the
caller to access Voice Mail Service.
• Transfer to Automated Attendant Service:
Allows the caller to access Automated Attendant
Service.
• Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu:
Transfers the caller to the Custom Service
specified here.
• Transfer to operator: Connects the caller to an
operator.
• Transfer to outside (specified number):
Transfers the caller to a specified outside
telephone number. Enter a number from the
Outside Numbers list (1–4).
• Page the party: Pages the subscriber.
• Repeat greeting: Repeats the greeting.
• None: No operation assigned.
Outside Specifies the outside telephone numbers that can Outside Feature
Numbers be used for the "Transfer to outside (specified Number #1–#4: Manual
number)" operation in the Custom Service Max. 32 digits References
settings. Click OK when finished. consisting of 0–
3.2.2.21 Personal
9, , #, and
Custom Service
special codes
T: Dial Tone
Detection
, : Dial Pause
(default 1 s)
; : Dial Pause
(default 3 s)
0–9, , #: Dial
Code

582 PC Programming Manual

 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

No DTMF Specifies the operation taken when no DTMF input Recording: Feature
Input (a caller does not dial anything) is received after The caller will Manual
Operation the Personal Greeting. be guided to References
leave a
3.2.2.21 Personal
message.
Custom Service
Disconnect
(All Day): The
line will be
disconnected,
regardless of
the time of day.
Disconnect
(Only After
Hours): The
line will be
disconnected
only after hours.
No DTMF Specifies the duration of time to wait for DTMF 0–10 s Feature
Input input before the action set in No DTMF Input Manual
Operation Operation is performed. References
Wait Time
3.2.2.21 Personal
Custom Service

Personal Distribution List

Personal Distribution Lists are used to send the same messages to several mailboxes in a single operation.
A maximum of 4 lists can be maintained with each list containing a maximum of 40 mailboxes.
Name Description Value Range Links
List 1 Name– Specifies a list name. Max. 32 Feature Manual
List 4 Name characters References
3.2.2.14 Group
Distribution Lists

PC Programming Manual 583

20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

List 1 Specifies the mailbox numbers that belong to the Max. 40 Feature Manual
Members–List list. mailboxes References
4 Members Follow the steps below to edit list members. per list 3.2.2.14 Group
1. Click Edit for a List Members item. Distribution Lists
2. Under Subscribers To Add, click the
checkbox in No. for each mailbox to add,
referring to the mailbox numbers and mailbox
owners’ names.
3. Click Add.
4. Click OK.
Follow the steps below to remove members from a
list.
1. Click Edit for Personal Distribution Lists (1–4)
Members item.
2. Under Distribution, click the checkbox in No.
for each mailbox to add, referring to the
mailbox numbers and mailbox owners’
names.
3. Click Delete.
4. Click OK.

Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct Service

This tab contains programming items for Remote Call Forwarding, Automatic Login, and Direct Service
settings.
Name Description Value Range Links
Remote Call Specifies the telephone numbers Max. 32 digits (consisting PC Programming
Telephone of destinations to which callers are of 0–9 and " ") Manual
Number 1, 2 forwarded when the subscriber References
sets Remote Call Forwarding. 2
21.1 UM
telephone numbers can be
Configuration—[2]
specified per mailbox. Telephone
Class of Service—
numbers can contain the digits "0–
Call Transfer to
9" and " ". These telephone
Outside
numbers should begin with a trunk
access number. Feature Manual
References
Note
3.2.2.26 Remote
Class of Service programming Call Forwarding Set
determines if the subscriber is
able to use this feature.

584 PC Programming Manual

 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Auto Login When this item is set to "Enable", Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Extension subscribers are able to access References
their mailbox directly without 3.2.2.2 Automatic
entering the mailbox number. Login
Subscribers can automatically log
in from their extensions, by calling
from an outside telephone whose
number is stored as a Caller ID
number, or by dialling a telephone
number assigned to a specified
DID number or trunk. When
logging in from outside
telephones, the Toll Saver feature
is also available.
Auto Login Specifies if a password is required Yes, No Feature Manual
Extension for the Automatic Login Extension References
Password feature. 3.2.2.2 Automatic
Entry Login
Requirement Notice
If this is set to "No", ensure
that unauthorised third-parties
are not allowed access to that
mailbox.
Auto Login Specifies the telephone number Max. 20 digits Feature Manual
Caller ID 1, 2 from which the subscriber can References
automatically be logged in from. 3.2.2.2 Automatic
When Caller ID information is Login
received that matches one of
these numbers, the caller
(subscriber) is automatically
logged in to the mailbox. Note that
this telephone number must be
unique for each mailbox.
Auto Login Specifies if a password is required Yes, No Feature Manual
Caller ID for entry when automatic login is References
Password performed using the Caller ID of Notice
3.2.2.2 Automatic
Entry the number set in Auto Login If this is set to "No", Login
Requirement Caller ID 1 or Auto Login Caller ensure that
ID 2. unauthorised third-
parties are not allowed
access to that mailbox
using the number
assigned to Auto
Login Caller ID 1 or
Auto Login Caller ID
2.

PC Programming Manual 585

20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Auto Login Specifies the DDI/DID number for Max. 20 digits Feature Manual
DDI/DID Automatic Login. When the References
Unified Messaging system 3.2.2.2 Automatic
receives this DDI/DID number Login
from the PBX, the caller
(subscriber) is automatically
logged in to the mailbox. Note that
this number must be unique for
each mailbox.
Auto Login Specifies the trunk number for 1–64 Feature Manual
TRG No. Automatic Login. When the References
Unified Messaging system 3.2.2.2 Automatic
receives a call on this trunk, the Login
caller (subscriber) is automatically
logged in to the mailbox. Note that
this number must be unique for
each mailbox.
Auto Login Specifies if a password is required Yes, No Feature Manual
DDI/DID, TRG for entry when automatic login is References
No. Password performed using the trunk group Notice
3.2.2.2 Automatic
Entry number or the DID number. If this is set to "No", Login
Requirement ensure that
unauthorised third-
parties are not allowed
access to any
extensions using the
specified trunk group
number.
Auto Login Toll Allows subscribers to call the Disable: Disables the Toll Feature Manual
Saver Unified Messaging system and Saver feature. References
know whether or not new DID: Toll Saver functions 3.2.2.29 Toll Saver
messages have been recorded in when the system receives
their mailboxes by the number of the pre-programmed DID
rings they hear before the Unified number from the PBX.
Messaging system answers their Caller ID: Toll Saver
calls. Toll Saver is available under functions when Caller ID
the same conditions as Automatic information is received that
Login; subscribers can use Toll matches one of the pre-
Saver when calling from an programmed numbers
outside telephone whose number (Caller ID 1 or 2).
is stored as a Caller ID number, or Trunk: Toll Saver functions
by dialling a telephone number when the system receives
assigned to a specified DID a call on the pre-
number or trunk. programmed trunk.

586 PC Programming Manual

 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Direct Service Specifies which features can be Record No Answer PC Programming
UM Extension directly accessed by dialling a Greeting: The subscriber Manual
Unified Messaging extension can record the greeting References
number. This setting can only be played when there is no
9.6 PBX
specified for Unified Messaging answer.
Configuration—[1-1]
extension numbers. Record Busy Greeting:
Configuration—Slot
The subscriber can record
Note —UM Port Property
the greeting played when
20.1.2 UM
Automatic Login must be their extension is busy.
Configuration—[1-2]
enabled for extensions to use Record After Hours
Mailbox Settings—
this feature. Greeting: The subscriber
Full Setting—
can record the greeting
Remote Call/
played when the system is
Automatic Login/
in night mode.
Direct Service—
Record Temporary
Auto Login
Greeting: The subscriber
Extension
can record a greeting that
is used exclusively until the Feature Manual
subscriber disables it. References
3.2.2.11 Direct
Service Access
Change Day Main Menu:
The subscriber can change
the Day Main Menu
greeting. Only the
Message Manager may
make this change.
Change Night Main
Menu: The subscriber can
change the Night Main
Menu greeting. Only the
Message Manager may
make this change.
Change Emergency
Greeting: The subscriber
can change the
Emergency Greeting. Only
the Message Manager
may make this change.

Announce Number of Messages

Name Description Value Range Links
Subscriber Service - Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the Yes, No
All New Messages number of only new messages in their mailbox when
the subscriber logs in.
Subscriber Service - Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the Yes, No
All Messages number of all messages in their mailbox when the
subscriber logs in.

PC Programming Manual 587

20.1.3 UM Configuration—[1-3] Mailbox Settings—Auto Configuration

Name Description Value Range Links

Subscriber Service - Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the Yes, No
New Voice Messages number of only new voice messages in their mailbox
when the subscriber logs in.
Subscriber Service - Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the Yes, No
New Urgent number of only new messages marked as urgent in
Messages their mailbox when the subscriber logs in.
Receiving Message Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the Yes, No
Service - All New number of only new messages in their mailbox when
Messages the subscriber has selected to listen to messages.
Receiving Message Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the Yes, No
Service - All number of all messages in their mailbox when the
Messages subscriber has selected to listen to messages.
Receiving Message Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the Yes, No
Service - New Voice number of only new voice messages in their mailbox
Messages when the subscriber has selected to listen to
messages.
Receiving Message Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the Yes, No
Service - New Urgent number of only new urgent messages in their
Messages mailbox when the subscriber has selected to listen
to messages.
Message Client Specifies the language of information generated by English, French,
Display Language the UM system for the mail (IMAP) client. German, Italian,
Dutch, Spanish,
Portuguese,
Russian

Quick Menu and Greeting Recording

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Quick Menu When this setting is enabled for the Message Enable, PC Programming
and Greeting Manager mailbox, the following features are Disable Manual References
Recording enabled for the Message Manager to access 23.3 UM Configuration—
greeting and recording management menus [4-3] Service Settings—
quickly. Custom Service
• Custom Service Menu messages for Custom
Feature Manual
Service 1 and 2 can be recorded and
changed from the Top Menu. References
3.2.1.17 Emergency
• Company Greeting No. 1 can be recorded Greeting
and changed from the Top Menu. This is
useful for recording the Emergency Greeting.

20.1.3 UM Configuration—[1-3] Mailbox Settings—Auto

Configuration
Auto Configuration automatically associates extension numbers and mailboxes in bulk. This feature is
available at the Installer level only.

588 PC Programming Manual

 20.1.3 UM Configuration—[1-3] Mailbox Settings—Auto Configuration

Name Description Value Range Links

Select the Specifies Auto configuration mode from the Create Installation
following following. mailboxes Manual
options Re-create all References
Note mailboxes
5.11 Automatic
In Re-create all mailboxes mode, all voice Configuration of
data is deleted, including data that is recorded Mailboxes
in mailboxes. It is strongly recommended that
you backup the voice data that has been Feature Manual
recorded in mailboxes. References
Backed up voice data can be restored as 3.1.2.1 Automatic
sound data on a PC by using special software Configuration of
tools. For details, consult the seller where you Mailboxes
purchased this PBX.

PC Programming Manual 589

20.1.3 UM Configuration—[1-3] Mailbox Settings—Auto Configuration

590 PC Programming Manual

 Section 21
UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Class of Service menu of the UM Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 591

21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

Each mailbox is assigned a Class of Service (COS) that determines the set of services that are available to
its subscriber. There are 66 classes. Mailboxes can be assigned to their own or to the same COS as
needed. COS No. 65 and 66 are assigned by default to the Message Manager and to the System Manager,
respectively.
No other mailboxes can be assigned to COS No. 65 and 66.

General
Name Description Value Range Links
Class Of Specifies the Class of Service’s name. Max. 32 Feature Manual
Service characters References
Name 3.2.1.11 Class of Service
(COS)
Prompt Mode Specifies the language used for system Primary, PC Programming
prompts played for the subscriber Guidance No. 1– Manual References
during Subscriber Service. If set to 8 24.4 UM Configuration—
"Primary", the default language which [5-4] System Parameters
is selected from all installed languages —Parameters—Prompt
will be used. Setting—Primary
Language
Feature Manual
References
3.2.1.41 System Prompts
Directory If set to "Yes", the subscriber’s name No, Yes Feature Manual
Listing and extension number will be listed in References
the directory (Dialling by Name). 3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name
Note
This setting is not available for COS
66 (System Manager).

592 PC Programming Manual

 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

Name Description Value Range Links

Tutorial The tutorial is a series of voice prompts Normal: A Feature Manual
for setting up the mailbox that is played navigation voice References
to subscribers when they first log in to menu is given for 3.2.2.27 Subscriber
their mailbox. This item specifies if each step. Tutorial
subscribers in the Class of Service Simplified: Only
hear a normal tutorial, a simplified direct prompts
tutorial, or no tutorial when they first log are given for
in to their mailbox. making each
In the tutorial, subscribers are asked to setting. For
provide: Personal
Greetings, only a
– A password
No Answer
– The mailbox owner’s name Greeting can be
– Personal Greetings (No Answer set.
Greeting, Busy Signal Greeting, After None: No tutorial
Hours Greeting) is played and
settings for the
mailbox must be
made manually.
Call-through Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Yes, No Feature Manual
Service Service can make outside calls by References
accessing the subscriber service menu 3.2.2.5 Call-through
(from an outside telephone) and dialling Service
an outside destination.
Remote Call Select if subscribers in the Class of Yes, No Feature Manual
Forward to Service can perform a Remote Call References
CO Forward to CO. 3.2.2.26 Remote Call
Forwarding Set
E-mail Option Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Yes, No Feature Manual
Service can receive notifications by e- References
mail when they have a new message 3.2.1.28 Message Waiting
waiting. Notification—E-mail
Device
Desktop Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Yes, No Feature Manual
Messaging Service can access the contents of References
their mailboxes with an e-mail 3.3.1 Integration with
application using IMAP. This includes Microsoft Outlook
the Microsoft Outlook® e-mail client
plug-in.
System Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Yes, No Feature Manual
Manager Service have access to the Unified References
Authority Messaging system as a System 3.1.1 Unified Messaging
Manager. System Overview
Message Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Yes, No Feature Manual
Manager Service have access to the Unified References
Authority Messaging system as a Message 3.1.1 Unified Messaging
Manager. System Overview

PC Programming Manual 593

21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

Name Description Value Range Links

Remote Call Select if subscribers in the Class of Yes, No Feature Manual
Forward to Service have allowed to do Remote References
CO Call Forward to CO. 3.1.1 Unified Messaging
System Overview

Mailbox
Name Description Value Range Links
Personal Greeting Defines the maximum length (in seconds) of 1–360 s Feature
Length (s) Personal Greetings for subscribers in the Manual
Class of Service. References
Note 3.2.2.22
Personal
This setting is not available for COS 65 Greetings
(Message Manager) and COS 66 (System
Manager).
Message Length Specifies if the length of messages left for Unlimited,
(Selection) subscribers in the Class of Service are Limited
unlimited in duration or have a specified time
limit. If set to "Unlimited", the maximum
recording time is 60 minutes, and the
maximum recording time for two-way
conversations (Two-way Record and Two-way
Transfer) is unlimited.
Message Length Specifies the maximum recording time for 1–60 min
(Limited) (min) messages left to subscribers in the Class of
Service. Only specified if Message Length
(Selection) is set to "Limited".
Mailbox Capacity Specifies if a maximum limit is applied to the Unlimited,
Maximum total amount of messages (new and saved) for Limited
Message Time mailboxes of subscribers in the Class of
(Selection) Service.
Mailbox Capacity Specifies the total number of available minutes 1–600 min
Maximum for storing messages (both new and saved) for
Message Time mailboxes of subscribers in the Class of
(Limited) (min) Service. Only specified if Mailbox Capacity
Maximum Message Time (Selection) is set to
"Limited".
New Message Specifies if a retention time limit is applied to Unlimited,
Retention Time new messages in mailboxes of subscribers in Limited
(Selection) the Class of Service. If "Unlimited" is selected,
new messages will remain in the mailbox until
erased by the subscriber.

594 PC Programming Manual

 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

Name Description Value Range Links

New Message Defines the number of days that new 1–30 days
Retention Time messages will remain in mailboxes for
(Limited) (days) subscribers in the Class of Service. The
storage period begins the day after the
message reception. Only specified if New
Message Retention Time (Selection) is set to
"Limited".
Saved Message Specifies if a retention time limit is applied to Unlimited,
Retention Time saved messages in mailboxes of subscribers Limited
(Selection) in the Class of Service. If "Unlimited" is
selected, saved messages will remain in the
mailbox until erased by the subscriber.
Saved Message Defines the number of days that saved 1–30 days
Retention Time messages will remain in mailboxes for
(Limited) (days) subscribers in the Class of Service. Only
specified if Saved Message Retention Time
(Selection) is set to "Limited".
Message Retrieval Specifies the order in which messages will be LIFO:
Order retrieved for subscribers in the Class of Messages are
Service (played back for listening). retrieved
starting with
the most
recent (Last In
First Out).
FIFO:
Messages are
retrieved
starting with
the oldest
(First In First
Out).
Number of CIDs Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service None, Other
for Caller Name can assign telephone numbers for the
Announcement Personal Caller Name Announcement feature.
(Selection)
Note
This setting is not available for COS 65
(Message Manager) and COS 66 (System
Manager).
Number of CIDs Specifies the maximum number of telephone 1–30
for Caller Name numbers that subscribers in the Class of
Announcement Service can assign for the Personal Caller
(Other) Name Announcement feature. Only specified if
Number of CIDs for Caller Name
Announcement (Selection) is set to "Other".

PC Programming Manual 595

21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

Name Description Value Range Links

Message Specifies when message envelopes (message Before: The
Envelope Setting date and time, name of the person who system
recorded or transferred the message, announces the
telephone number of the caller) are message
announced. envelope
before playing
the recorded
message.
After: The
system
announces the
message
envelope after
playing the
recorded
message.
Require: The
system
announces the
message
envelope
when the user
presses the
appropriate
dial key as
prompted
when listening
to the
message.
Mailbox Capacity Specifies if the system alerts mailbox None, Other
Warning subscribers in the Class of Service that the
(Selection) programmed recording time for their mailboxes
is reaching its set amount of message storage
time. If set to "None", the warning will not be
announced.
Mailbox Capacity Specifies when the system alerts mailbox 1–60 min
Warning (Other) subscribers in the Class of Service that the
(min) programmed recording time for mailboxes is
reaching its set amount of message storage
time. The setting indicates the remaining
recording time capacity threshold for when the
announcement is heard. Only specified if
Mailbox Capacity Warning (Selection) is set
to "Other".

596 PC Programming Manual

 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

Name Description Value Range Links

Play System If set to "Yes", directions for recording a No, Yes
Prompt after message are given to the caller immediately
Personal Greeting after the personal greeting of the subscriber in
the Class of Service has been played.

Note
This setting is not available for COS 65
(Message Manager) and COS 66 (System
Manager).
Message Cancel If set to "Yes", the caller’s message will be No, Yes Feature
for Live Call deleted when a subscriber in the Class of Manual
Screening Service answers a call via Live Call Screening References
while the caller is leaving a message.
3.2.2.16 Live
Note Call Screening
(LCS)
This setting is not available for COS 66
(System Manager).
Delete Message If set to "Yes", the system requests No, Yes
Confirmation confirmation from subscribers in the Class of
Service before erasing a message in the
mailbox. If set to "No", the message is erased
immediately.
Personal Greeting If set to "Yes", subscribers in the Class of No, Yes Feature
for Caller ID Service can record personal greetings that are Manual
played for specific callers only (Personal References
Greeting for Caller ID).
3.2.2.22
Note Personal
Greetings
This setting is not available for COS 65
(Message Manager) and COS 66 (System
Manager).
Caller ID Callback If set to "Yes", subscribers in the Class of No, Yes Feature
Service can call the caller back while listening Manual
to the caller’s message (Caller ID Callback). References
3.2.2.9 Caller
ID Callback
Auto Receipt If set to "Yes", subscribers in the Class of No, Yes Feature
Service can request to receive confirmation Manual
when their message has been listened to by References
the message recipient.
3.2.2.1 Auto
Receipt
Autoplay New If set to "Yes", the system plays new messages No, Yes
Message automatically when subscribers in the Class of
Service log into their mailboxes.

PC Programming Manual 597

21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

Name Description Value Range Links

Play New If set to "Yes", the system plays all new No, Yes
Messages messages for subscribers in the Class of
Sequentially Service sequentially without system prompts.
The subscriber’s Service Top Menu will be
heard after all of the messages are played.
This feature is only available when Autoplay
New Message is set to "Yes".
First Playback If set to "Yes", the system plays urgent No, Yes Feature
Urgent Message messages before regular messages for Manual
subscribers in the Class of Service. References
3.2.2.31 Urgent
Message
Announce If set to "Yes", the system plays the information No, Yes
Message of transferred messages to subscribers in the
Transferred Class of Service before playing the messages.
Information
Caller ID Number Specifies whether or not the system No, Yes
Announcement announces the Caller ID number when a
subscriber in the Class of Service plays a
message left by a caller, if their name has not
been recorded for the Caller Name
Announcement feature. If the name has been
recorded, it will be announced regardless of
this setting.

Note
If "Caller ID Callback" is set to "Yes", Caller
ID numbers will be announced regardless
of this setting (see 21.1 UM Configuration
—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox—Caller
ID Callback).
Announce Option If set to "Yes", the system plays the option No, Yes
Menu after menu after erasing a message for subscribers
Erasing Message in the Class of Service. If set to "No", the
system plays the next message automatically
without playing the option menu.
New Message If set to "Yes", the system announces the total No, Yes
Length length of new messages when the number of
Announcement new messages is announced for subscribers in
the Class of Service.
Password Expiry Specifies if the mailbox passwords for Disable, Other Feature
Period (Selection) subscribers in the Class of Service will expire Manual
after a set time. References
3.1.2.4
Password
Administration

598 PC Programming Manual

 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

Name Description Value Range Links

Password Expiry Specifies the number of days a set mailbox 5–200 days Feature
Period (Other) password will be used before it expires and the Manual
system prompts the subscriber for a new References
password. This feature is only available when
3.1.2.4
Password Expiry Period (Selection) is set to
Password
"Other".
Administration
Two-way Specifies whether two-way recording sessions Save as Old, Feature
Recorded are saved in the mailboxes of subscribers in Save as New Manual
Message Save the Class of Service as "old" or "new" References
Mode messages.
3.2.2.30 Two-
way Record/
Two-way
Transfer

Call Transfer
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Intercom Specifies the Intercom Paging group number 1–32 PC Programming
Paging available to subscribers in the Class of Service. Manual References
Group 24.4 UM Configuration
Note
—[5-4] System
This setting is not available for COS 65 Parameters—
(Message Manager). Parameters—Intercom
Paging Parameters
Use Call If set to "Yes", the system signals subscribers in No, Yes
Waiting on the Class of Service when they are on a call and
Busy another call is received.

Note
This setting is not available for COS 65
(Message Manager).
Caller ID If set to "Yes", subscribers in the Class of Service No, Yes Feature Manual
Screen can hear the pre-recorded names of callers when References
they receive calls (Caller ID Screening). 3.2.1 System Features
—3.2.1.9 Caller ID
Note
Screening
This setting is not available for COS 65
(Message Manager).
Notify of If set to "Yes", subscribers in the Class of Service No, Yes
Transfer will hear "You have a call." when they answer
transferred calls.

PC Programming Manual 599

21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Call Transfer If set to "Yes", the system allows calls to be No, Yes Feature Manual
to Outside transferred to a trunk via the following features: References
Custom Service, Caller ID Callback, Call Transfer 3.2.1.7 Call Transfer to
Service, Personal Custom Service, Call-through Outside
Service.

Note
This setting is not available for COS 65
(Message Manager).

Hospitality Mode
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Hospitality Specifies whether subscribers in the Class of No, Yes Feature Manual
Mode Service have the Hospitality Mode enabled. References
(For use with extensions for hotel rooms, etc.) 3.2.1.21 Hospitality Mode
This setting must be set to "Yes" to enable
other Hospitality Mode settings. When this
item is set to "Yes", only the following options
are made available to subscribers:
• Listen to Messages
• Password
• Personal Greetings
• Owner Name
Password Specifies if subscribers in the Class of No, Yes PC Programming
Service are given a voice prompt selection to Manual References
change their password when accessing their 20.1.2 UM Configuration—
mailbox. [1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full
Setting—Mailbox Password
Feature Manual
References
3.2.1.21 Hospitality Mode
Personal Specifies if subscribers in the Class of No, Yes Feature Manual
Greeting Service are given a voice prompt selection to References
change their Personal Greeting when 3.2.1.21 Hospitality Mode
accessing their mailbox. 3.2.2.22 Personal Greetings
Note
For the Personal Greeting of subscribers
in a Class of Service with Hospitality
mode enabled, only No Answer and Busy
greetings can be set.

600 PC Programming Manual

 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Owner Name Specifies if subscribers in the Class of No, Yes Feature Manual
Service are given a voice prompt selection to References
change the mailbox owner’s name when 3.2.1.21 Hospitality Mode
accessing their mailbox.
Erase When Specifies if the password of the subscriber in No, Yes Feature Manual
Check Out - the Class of Service is erased when the References
Password subscriber’s extension is set to the "Check 2.23.1 Hospitality Features
Out" status. —SUMMARY
3.2.1.21 Hospitality Mode
Erase When Specifies if the Personal Greeting of the No, Yes Feature Manual
Check Out - subscriber in the Class of Service is erased References
Personal when the subscriber’s extension is set to the 2.23.1 Hospitality Features
Greeting "Check Out" status. —SUMMARY
3.2.1.21 Hospitality Mode
Erase When Specifies if the Owner Name of the subscriber No, Yes Feature Manual
Check Out - in the Class of Service is erased when the References
Owner Name subscriber’s extension is set to the "Check 2.23.1 Hospitality Features
Out" status. —SUMMARY
3.2.1.21 Hospitality Mode

PC Programming Manual 601

21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

602 PC Programming Manual

 Section 22
UM Configuration—[3] UM Extension / Trunk
Service

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Port/Trunk Service menu of the UM
Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 603

22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group

22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk

Service—Service Group
The parameters of Service Groups determine how calls are handled throughout the day. Each Service
Group (therefore each port) can have a different call service for each time mode (day, night, lunch, break).
One of 5 incoming call services (Voice Mail, Automated Attendant, Interview, Custom Service or Transfer to
Mailbox) can be assigned to each call service.
Once one or more service groups are set, you can assign the service groups to each UM port in 22.2 UM
Configuration—[3-2] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Port Assignment.
Name Description Value Range Links
Day, Night, Specifies the greeting to be heard by None, System, Feature Manual
Lunch, and Break callers, the System Greeting, another Other References
Mode - Company message, or no greeting. The System 3.2.1.12 Company
Greeting No. Greeting is "Good morning/Good Greeting
(Selection) afternoon/Good evening. Welcome to
the Unified Messaging System.". Each
call service can have its own setting.
Day, Night, Specifies the number of the greeting 1–32 Feature Manual
Lunch, and Break message to use when "Other" is References
Mode - Company specified for the greeting selection. 3.2.1.12 Company
Greeting No. Greeting
(Other)
Day, Night, Specifies the incoming call service Voice Mail
Lunch, and Break used to handle calls. Service,
Mode - Incoming Automated
Call Service Attendant,
Interview Mailbox,
Custom Service,
Transfer to
Mailbox
Day, Night, Specifies the parameter for the type of Interview
Lunch, and Break Incoming Call Service specified. This Mailbox: Mailbox
Mode - Incoming is disabled if "Voice Mail Service" or number
Call Service "Automated Attendant" is selected for Custom Service:
Parameter the Incoming Call Service. Custom Service
number (1–200)
Transfer to
Mailbox: Mailbox
number

Note
Mailbox
numbers are
between 2
digits and the
value set in
Mailbox No.
Max. Length
(3-8).

604 PC Programming Manual

 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group

Name Description Value Range Links

Day, Night, Specifies the language of system Primary, PC Programming
Lunch, and Break prompts used by this call service. If Selective, Manual
Mode - Incoming set to "Primary", the default language Guidance No. 1–8 References
Call Service which is selected from all installed
24.4 UM
Prompt languages will be used. When set to
Configuration—[5-4]
"Selective", the caller can select the
System Parameters—
language of his or her choice,
Parameters—Prompt
provided the System Administrator or
Setting—Primary
the Message Manager has recorded
Language
the Multilingual Selection Menu. To
specify a Prompt Selection Number, Feature Manual
see 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] References
System Parameters—Parameters— 3.2.1.41 System
Prompt Setting. Prompts
Note
If "Selective" is specified, you will
need to select a prompt available
for callers that cannot input DTMF
signals, such as rotary phone
callers. See "Prompt for No DTMF
Input Callers" below.
Day, Night, Specifies which language is used Primary, Guidance PC Programming
Lunch, and Break when a caller cannot enter any digits No. 1–8 Manual
Mode - Prompt to select a language after the References
for No DTMF Multilingual Selection Menu has been
24.4 UM
Input Callers played. If set to "Primary", the default
Configuration—[5-4]
language which is selected from all
System Parameters—
installed languages will be used.
Parameters—Prompt
Setting—Primary
Language
Feature Manual
References
3.2.1.41 System
Prompts
Day, Night, Specifies whether the Unified 0–60 s
Lunch, and Break Messaging system answers calls on
Mode - Delayed the port or trunk immediately (0) or
Answer Time after a delay (1 s–60 s).

PC Programming Manual 605

22.2 UM Configuration—[3-2] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Port Assignment

22.2 UM Configuration—[3-2] UM Extension / Trunk

Service—Port Assignment
You can assign a Service Group created in 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service
—Service Group to each UM port.
1. For each UM port number, select a Service Group number (1–64) from the Service Group drop-down
list.
2. Click OK when finished.

606 PC Programming Manual

 Section 23
UM Configuration—[4] Service Settings

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Service Settings menu of the UM Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 607

23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing

23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—

Caller ID / PIN Call Routing
A maximum of 200 Caller ID/PIN numbers can be assigned so that callers are automatically forwarded to a
pre-programmed destination. A different destination can be set for each time mode (day, night, lunch,
break). For Mode, select Caller-ID Mode or PIN Mode from the drop-down list, and then click the button
to assign a routing destination. PIN Call Routing is only available when the Call Transfer Anytime of a
Custom Service is set to "PIN".

Wild card input for Caller IDs/PINs

• The wild card, " ", can be used as a substitute for any numbers in the following ways.
1. When Caller ID/PIN numbers include one " ":
" " matches any number, regardless of the actual numbers of digits. For example, registering " "
by itself matches all numbers, and registering "201 " matches any number that starts with "201".
2. When Caller ID/PIN numbers include more than one " ":
Each " " matches a single digit. For example, registering " " matches any 10-
digit number, and registering "201 " matches any 10-digit number that starts with "201".

Note
• If Automatic Login or Holiday Service is used, these will take priority over Caller ID Call Routing
settings. Also note that Caller ID Call Routing takes priority over the Trunk Service and Port Service.
• Received Caller ID/PIN numbers are searched for in each service setting table in order from the first
registered number to last. When programming Caller ID/PIN routing, note the order of registration,
and remember that wild card entries should be entered after any specific routing entries.

Caller-ID Mode
Name Description Value Range Links
Caller ID No. Specifies the Caller ID number setting so Private, Out of Feature Manual
(Selection) that callers are automatically forwarded to Area, Long References
a pre-programmed destination. Distance, Others 3.2.1.8 Caller ID
Call Routing
Caller ID No. Specifies a Caller ID number (or range of 0–9, (Max. 20 Feature Manual
(Other) numbers using the wild card, " ") for digits) References
callers from a specific number or range of 3.2.1.8 Caller ID
numbers that are to be automatically Call Routing
forwarded to a pre-programmed
destination. Only specified if Caller ID No.
(Selection) is set to "Others".
Description Specifies a name and/or description of the Max. 20 characters Feature Manual
Caller ID number. References
3.2.1.8 Caller ID
Note
Call Routing
When no data is specified in this
parameter, the caller’s name will be
automatically entered here if the
caller’s name is received from the
telephone company.

608 PC Programming Manual

 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing

Name Description Value Range Links

Call Transfer Specifies the destination to which the call None: disables this Feature Manual
for Day, Night, from an assigned Caller ID number is feature. References
Lunch, and automatically forwarded. A destination can Custom Service 3.2.1.8 Caller ID
Break service be set for each time mode. To disable the Menu: forwards Call Routing
setting, select "None". A Mailbox Group callers to the
number can be entered here instead of a specified Custom
mailbox number. Service menu.
Extension:
forwards callers to
the specified
extension.
Mailbox: forwards
callers to the
specified mailbox.

PIN Mode
Name Description Value Range Links
PIN No. Specifies a PIN number (or range of PIN 0–9, (Max. 20 Feature Manual
numbers using the wild card, " ") for digits) References
callers from a specific number or range 3.2.1.35 PIN Call
of numbers that are to be automatically Routing
forwarded to a pre-programmed
destination. For more information on
using " " with pin numbers, refer to Wild
card input for Caller IDs/PINs.
Description Specifies a name and/or description of Max. 20 characters Feature Manual
the PIN number. References
3.2.1.35 PIN Call
Routing
Call Transfer Specifies the destination to which the call None: disables this Feature Manual
for Day, Night, using an assigned PIN number is feature. References
Lunch, and automatically forwarded. A destination Custom Service 3.2.1.35 PIN Call
Break service can be set for each time mode. To Menu: forwards Routing
disable the setting, select "None". A callers to the
Mailbox Group number can be entered specified Custom
here instead of a mailbox number. Service menu.
Extension: forwards
callers to the
specified extension.
Mailbox: forwards
callers to the
specified mailbox.

PC Programming Manual 609

23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters

23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—

Parameters
Automated Attendant
Name Description Value Range Links
Wait Time for Specifies the length of time the 0–20 s
First Digit (0-20 system waits for the caller to dial a
s) digit before assuming the caller
cannot input a DTMF signal and
therefore activates No DTMF Input
Call Coverage
Menu Repeat Specifies the number of times the 1–5 times Feature Manual
Cycle (1-5 times) system will play the Automated References
Attendant top menu if the caller does 3.2.1.3 Automated
not make a selection. Attendant (AA)
Play Owner’s Determines whether "Transferring you Enable, Disable Feature Manual
Name during to (name)" is announced to the caller References
Transfer before transferring the caller to an 3.2.1.3 Automated
extension. Attendant (AA)
Operator Service When operator calls are made, calls Operator Service for PC Programming
are connected to the lowest- Day, Operator Manual
numbered operator that is available. Service for Night, References
To enable/disable the operator setting Operator Service for
10.2 PBX
for each time mode, check/uncheck it. Lunch, Operator
Configuration—[2-2]
Service for Break
Note System—Operator &
BGM—PBX
• The extension assigned as Operator—Day,
Operator 1 for day mode is Lunch, Break, Night
automatically designated as the
Message Manager. Because Feature Manual
the extension number assigned References
for Operator Service No. 1 in 3.2.1.34 Operator
the Day Mode is for the Service
Message Manager, you cannot
assign this extension to any
other mailbox.
• Extensions assigned as
operators can be called by
dialling [0], however, when
setting features such as
Message Waiting Notification
and Remote Call Forwarding,
the extension number (not "0")
must be specified.

610 PC Programming Manual

 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Operator Service Specifies the extension number for 1–8 digits Feature Manual
—Operator’s Operator 1, 2, and 3 for the checked References
Extension time setting. 3.2.1.34 Operator
Service
Note
• The default extension number
of Operator 1 in day mode
cannot be used with the
Message Waiting Notification
Lamp feature.
• Since the extension number
assigned as Operator Service
No. 1 for Day is automatically
designated as the Message
Manager (mailbox number
998), do not assign an
individual mailbox to this
extension number. Assigning
an individual mailbox to this
extension will result in the
following operations:
– Any messages recorded for
the extension will be sent to
the Message Manager
mailbox instead of the
extension’s assigned
mailbox.
– The Message Manager COS
(65) will be applied to call
transfers, etc., instead of the
COS of the assigned
mailbox.
– If the extension user tries to
access their mailbox using
the Automatic Login feature,
the user will access the
Message Manager mailbox
instead of the assigned
mailbox.
Operator Service Specifies the mailbox number for 2–8 digits Feature Manual
—Operator’s Operator 1, 2, and 3. Callers to References
Mailbox Operator 1, 2, or 3 are prompted to 3.2.1.34 Operator
leave a message in this mailbox Service
depending upon how the Busy
Coverage Mode or No Answer
Coverage Mode is set.

PC Programming Manual 611

23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Operator Service Specifies how to handle calls when Hold: Automatically Feature Manual
—Busy the operator is busy. places the caller on References
Coverage Mode hold and the 3.2.1.34 Operator
operator is called Service
again.
No Answer
Coverage: Offers
the option specified
by the No Answer
Coverage Mode to
the caller.
Call Waiting:
Signals the operator
when another call is
waiting using the
Call Waiting feature
of PBX.
Disconnect
Message:
Disconnects the
caller after playing
"Thank you for
calling".

612 PC Programming Manual

 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Operator Service Specifies how to handle operator calls Caller Select: PC Programming
—No Answer when they are not answered within Allows the caller to Manual
Coverage Mode the time period set in Operator leave a message or References
Service—Operator No Answer Time call another
20.1.2 UM
(10-60 s). extension. In the
Configuration—[1-2]
following cases, the
Mailbox Settings—
caller cannot call
Full Setting—No
another extension:
DTMF Input
1. No input to Operation
Automated
Attendant. Feature Manual
References
2. When the No
3.2.1.34 Operator
DTMF Input
Service
Operation
setting of a
Custom Service
is set to
"Operator".
Leave Message:
Instructs the caller to
leave a message in
the operator’s
mailbox.
Disconnect
Message:
Disconnects the
caller after playing
"Thank you for
calling.".
Next Operator:
Transfers the caller
to the next operator.
Operator Service When a call to an operator is not 10–60 s Feature Manual
—Operator No answered within the time set, the References
Answer Time system will offer other options as 3.2.1.34 Operator
(10-60 s) defined by Operator Service—No Service
Answer Coverage Mode.

Note
• This time applies to Operator 1,
2, and 3.
• If more than one operator is
assigned, we recommend
setting this value to 15 s.

PC Programming Manual 613

23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Call Hold Mode If Call Hold Mode is checked, the Enable (checked), Feature Manual
system gives callers the option of Disable (unchecked) References
either holding for a specific extension 3.2.1.3 Automated
or selecting one of several Incomplete Attendant (AA)
Call Handling Service options. While
on hold, the system periodically gives
callers the choice to either continue to
hold or select one of the Incomplete
Call Handling Service options. If Call
Hold Mode is not checked, the
system immediately offers callers the
Incomplete Call Handling Service and
callers are not put on hold.
Call Hold Mode If set to "Enable", callers on hold are Enable, Disable Feature Manual
—Call Queuing informed of their current position in References
Announcement the call hold queue. 3.2.1.3 Automated
Mode Example: "One other person is Attendant (AA)
waiting to connect."
Call Hold Mode Specifies the interval between the 1–30 s Feature Manual
—Call Retrieval voice guidance message that asks References
Announcement whether or not calls are to be 3.2.1.3 Automated
Timing (1-30 s) retrieved during call holding. Attendant (AA)
Example: "To cancel holding, press 2
now. Otherwise, I’ll try your party
again."

614 PC Programming Manual

 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Alternate Specifies extensions that require a Max. 32 extensions PC Programming
Extension different transfer sequence than (max. 5 digits per Manual
normal. Calls to these extensions will extension) References
be transferred according with the
24.4 UM
setting for 24.4 UM Configuration—
Configuration—[5-4]
[5-4] System Parameters—
System Parameters
Parameters—PBX Environment—
—Parameters—PBX
Alternate Extension Transfer
Environment—
Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * #
Alternate Extension
D R F T X , ;]).Click Edit and follow
Transfer Sequence
the steps below to edit an alternate
(Up to 16 digits /
extension.
[0-9 * # D R F T
Adding an Alternate Extension X , ;])
1. Click New. Feature Manual
2. Enter an extension number. References
3. Click OK. 3.2.1.3 Automated
Attendant (AA)
Editing an Alternate Extension
1. Select the desired alternate
extension.
2. Click Edit.
3. Edit the extension number.
4. Click OK.
Deleting an Alternate Extension
1. Select the desired alternate
extension.
2. Click Delete.
3. Click Yes.
Changing the order of Alternate
Extensions
Select an extension and click Move
up or Move down to change its order
in the list. Alternate extensions will be
dialled in order from top to bottom.

Note
Extension Groups and Logical
Extensions cannot be assigned.
List All Names If set to "Enable", callers can listen to Enable, Disable Feature Manual
all subscriber names and extension References
numbers in the Automated Attendant 3.2.1.3 Automated
service or Custom Service. Attendant (AA)
Operator Specifies the timing of the operator Transfer Feature Manual
Transfer Mode transfer. immediately, Do not References
transfer immediately 3.2.1.3 Automated
Attendant (AA)

PC Programming Manual 615

23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters

No DTMF Input Operation

Name Description Value Range Links
No DTMF Input Specifies where a caller will G.D.M.: The caller is Feature Manual
Call Coverage for be transferred when there is transferred to the General References
Day, Night, Lunch, no DTMF input in response Delivery Mailbox. 3.2.1.32 No DTMF
and Break to system guidance (for Operator: The caller is Input Operation
(Selection) example, the caller is using a transferred to an operator.
rotary phone) for each time Mailbox: The caller is
mode. transferred to the designated
mailbox extension.
Extension: The caller is
transferred to the designated
extension.
No DTMF Input Specifies the transfer 2–8 digits (for extensions) Feature Manual
Call Coverage for destination if "Mailbox" or 2–[the value set in Mailbox References
Day, Night, Lunch, "Extension" is selected for No. Max. Length (3-8)] 3.2.1.32 No DTMF
and Break No DTMF Input Call digits (for mailboxes) Input Operation
(Parameter) Coverage for Day, Night,
Lunch, and Break
(Selection).

Name Entry
Name Description Value Range Links
Number of Specifies the number of digits (letters) that 3–4 digits Feature Manual
Digits to must be entered when using the Dial by Name References
Entry Name feature, which allows callers to connect 3.2.1.16 Dialling by
(3-4 digits) themselves with the desired party by entering Name
the first 3 or 4 letters of the party’s name.
Name Entry Specifies the length of time that the system 1–10 s Feature Manual
Time Out waits for the caller to enter the first 3 or 4 References
(1-10 s) digits (letters) of the desired party’s name. If 3.2.1.16 Dialling by
the required number of digits are not dialled Name
within this time, the previous menu will be
played again for the caller.
Key Mode Specifies the standard used for keypad text North American Feature Manual
entry. If set to use the North American Standard, References
Standard, press [7] for "Q" and [9] for "Z", If Australasian 3.2.1.16 Dialling by
set to use the Australasian Standard, press [1] Standard Name
for "Q" and "Z".
Name Specifies one of Last Name, First Name, or Last, First, Both Feature Manual
Directory Both to be used when entering the name. References
Mode 3.2.1.16 Dialling by
Name

616 PC Programming Manual

 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters

Toll Saver
Name Description Value Range Links
Delayed Answer Time Specifies the time period before the 5–60 s
for New Message (5-60 system answers the call when there are
s) new messages.
Delayed Answer Time Specifies the time period before the 5–60 s Feature Manual
for No New Message system answers the call when there are References
(5-60 s) no new messages. 3.2.2.29 Toll Saver

PC Programming Manual 617

23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service

23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—

Custom Service
A Custom Service allows callers to perform specific functions by pressing dial buttons on their telephones
while listening to voice guidance (Custom Service Menu). Custom Services allow callers to connect
themselves to an extension, mailbox, Mailbox Group, operator, fax machine, etc., without the assistance of
an operator. A Custom Service Menu ("Press 1 for Sales, press 2 for Service", etc.) can be recorded by the
System Manager or the Message Manager, and can be recorded in several languages if needed. The
System Manager can create a maximum of 200 Custom Services.
Common uses for Custom Services include:
– callers press a button to connect themselves with the desired destination
– callers press buttons to navigate through a series of other Custom Services before being connected with
the desired destination
– callers enter PIN numbers to connect themselves with the desired destination (PIN Call Routing)
– callers enter the first few letters of the desired parties (Dial by Name) to connect themselves with the
desired destination

Custom Service Builder

The Custom Service Builder is a utility that allows the System Administrator to create Custom Services
visually. Each Custom Service and its functions can be edited, arranged using a familiar drag-and-drop
interface. The following Custom Service types are available:
– Menu & Transfer
– Date Control
– Time Control
– Day Control
– Password

Creating a Custom Service

1. Select a custom service sheet.
2. Click the desired Custom Service type under Custom Service Type.
3. Click on an area within the workspace to the right of the menu to place the Custom Service (it can be
moved later).
4. Double-click the Custom Service icon you placed in the grid.
5. Edit the parameters in the Custom Service parameters dialogue box.
6. Click OK.

Note
If you are using Windows Internet Explorer, and you become unable to create new Custom Services with
the Custom Service Builder, click the browser’s Refresh button.

Editing a Custom Service

Custom Services parameters can be connected to other Custom Services. To connect a parameter to
another Custom Service, click and hold the parameter’s blue handle, drag it to the desired Custom Service,
then release the mouse button.
You can edit each Custom Service in the following ways.

618 PC Programming Manual

 23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service

[From the Custom Service List]

1. Select a custom service sheet.
2. Enter the desired Custom Service number under Quick Search and click Edit Custom Service.
3. Edit the parameters in the Custom Service parameters dialogue box.
4. Click OK.

[From the Custom Service Diagram]

1. Select a custom service sheet.
2. Double-click the desired Custom Service icon in the diagram, or right-click on the desired icon and
select Edit.
3. Edit the parameters in the Custom Service parameters dialogue box.
4. Click OK.
Example: Setting "Menu & Transfer"
1. Click Menu & Transfer under Custom Service Type and drag it to the right side of the screen.
2. Drop Menu & Transfer on to a position of your choice in the Custom Service diagram. The parameters
dialogue box for the Custom Service opens.
3. Enter or select a value for each item.
For each parameter, refer to the description in the following section.
4. Click Record A Prompt For This Custom Service.
This feature is only available when setting "Menu & Transfer" or "Password". You can also skip this step,
and go to step 7.
5. Select Record from extension or Import from recorded file.
When Record from extension is selected:
a. Specify the extension number of the telephone used for recording, then click Connect.
b. When the specified extension rings, go off-hook.
c. Click Record, Play, or Stop to record or play a voice label through the extension.
d. Click Disconnect.
e. Click OK.
When Import from recorded file is selected:
a. Click the folder icon.
The Open dialogue box appears.
b. Navigate to the folder containing the WAV files you want to open.
WAV files must meet the following specifications:
– G.711 PCM codec
– 8 kHz, 8-bit sampling rate
– Monaural
– A-law or µ-law encoding
c. Select the desired WAV file.
d. Click Open.
6. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual 619

23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer

7. Click OK.

23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom

Service—Menu & Transfer
The below parameters are set for the Menu Transfer Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder.
This Custom Service type guides callers to press certain buttons to connect themselves with the designated
party. The prompt for this service can be recorded in the CS No. dialogue box.
Custom Service prompts can be recorded only in On-line mode.
Name Description Value Range Links
Description The information typed in this field Max. 32 characters Feature Manual
is for reference only. References
3.2.1.15 Custom
Service
Prompt Specifies the language for None, Primary, Guidance No. PC
Mode prompts used by this Custom 1-8 Programming
Service. Manual
References
Note
22.1 UM
• This parameter overrides a Configuration—
set "Incoming Call Service [3-1] UM
Prompt". Extension / Trunk
• If "Primary" is selected, the Service—Service
default language which is Group—Day,
selected from all installed Night, Lunch, and
languages will be used. Break Mode -
Incoming Call
• If "None" is selected, the Service Prompt
prompt mode of previous
process will be continued, Feature Manual
or "Primary" language will References
be selected. 3.2.1.15 Custom
Service
Menu Specifies the number of times the 1–3 times Feature Manual
Repeat Custom Service menu message References
Cycle (1-3) will be repeated for the caller. 3.2.1.15 Custom
Service

620 PC Programming Manual

 23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer

Name Description Value Range Links

Call Specifies the type of dialling that Extn: enables callers to be Feature Manual
Transfer the system accepts during the transferred directly to their References
Anytime Custom Service in addition to the intended party by dialling the 3.2.1.15 Custom
single-digit Custom Service extension number. Service
options. This setting allows Mbx: enables callers to leave
callers to dial numbers to connect messages in a mailbox by
themselves to an extension or entering the mailbox number.
mailbox or enter a PIN. PIN: enables callers to be
transferred directly to the
Note specified party according to the
If you only need to allow setting for PIN Call Routing
callers to dial single-digit Service by dialling a PIN.
Custom Service option No: disables extension transfer
numbers, set this parameter and mailbox transfer; only 1-
to "No". When set to a value digit entries will function
other than "No", the system (following the Custom Service
always waits for the amount menu)
determined by the Wait for
Second Digit (1-5 s) setting
before handling the call. This
will cause a delay between
the time the caller dials a
single-digit Custom Service
option number and when the
call is actually handled.
Wait for Specifies the length of time that 0–10 s Feature Manual
First Digit the system waits for the caller to References
(0-10 s) dial the first digit after a Custom 3.2.1.15 Custom
Service menu is played for the Service
caller. If this time expires, the No
DTMF Operation settings
determines how the call is then
handled. If this parameter is set
to "0", No DTMF Input Operation
handles the call immediately after
the menu is played for the caller.

PC Programming Manual 621

23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer

Name Description Value Range Links

Wait for This parameter is only valid when 1–5 s Feature Manual
Second Call Transfer Anytime is set to a References
Digit (1-5 s) value other than "No". After the 3.2.1.15 Custom
caller dials a digit (the first digit) Service
after listening to a Custom
Service menu, the system waits
for a second digit to be dialled.
This gives the caller time to
continue dialling a mailbox
number, extension number, or
PIN. If this time expires without a
second digit being entered, the
system assumes the caller has
selected a Custom Service menu
option and handles the call
according to the digit dialled by
the caller.
No DTMF Determines how calls are Trf to Mbx: Allows the caller to Feature Manual
Input handled when callers do not dial leave messages in a specified References
Operation any numbers after listening to the mailbox. 3.2.1.15 Custom
menu message (most likely Trf to Ext: Transfers the caller Service
because they are using rotary to a specified extension.
telephones) The default setting is Operator: Connects the caller
"Operator", which allows the to an operator.
caller to be automatically Trf to Out: Transfers the caller
connected to an operator after to a specified outside telephone
the menu message plays back number. Enter the trunk access
("Press the desired number, or number of the PBX then the
stay on the line to be connected destination telephone number.
to an operator."). Exit: Plays the Custom Service
exit prompt and disconnects
the caller.
Prev Menu: Returns the caller
to the previous menu (if there
was a previous menu).
CS: Transfers the caller to the
Custom Service specified here.
Key – Any of the 16 operations listed Trf to Mbx: Allows the caller to Feature Manual
Assigned below can be assigned to the 0 leave messages in a specified References
Operation: through 9, , and # keys on the mailbox. 3.2.1.15 Custom
0–9, *, # telephone keypad. Callers are Trf to Ext: Transfers the caller Service
able to access these operations to a specified extension.
by pressing the corresponding Operator: Connects the caller
keys on their telephones. to an operator.
Trf to Out: Transfers the caller
to a specified outside telephone
number. Enter the trunk access
number of the PBX then the
destination telephone number.
Exit: Plays the Custom Service
exit prompt and disconnects
the caller.

622 PC Programming Manual

 23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer

Name Description Value Range Links

Prev Menu: Returns the caller
to the previous menu (not
available if there was no
previous menu).
CS: Transfers the caller to the
Custom Service specified here.
VM Serv: Allows the caller to
access Voice Mail Service.
Call Trf Serv: Allows the caller
to access Automated Attendant
Service.
Subscriber Serv: Allows the
caller to access the Subscriber
Service. The caller needs to
press the assigned key
followed by the mailbox number
that he or she wants to log in. If
this option is enabled, it is
strongly recommended that
each subscriber set a password
for his or her mailbox; this will
prevent unauthorised callers
from accidentally or
intentionally accessing
subscribers’ mailboxes.

PC Programming Manual 623

23.3.2 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Date Control

Name Description Value Range Links

Dial by Name: Requests the
caller to enter the first 3 or 4
letters of a first or last name of
the person the caller wishes to
reach, then transfers the caller
to the corresponding extension.
Repeat Menu: Repeats the
Custom Service menu.
Main Menu: Returns the caller
to the Custom Service top
menu.
Trf to Fax Extn: Allows the
caller to send fax messages to
an extension specified as the
fax extension.
List All Names: The system
will announce the names and
extensions numbers of all
subscribers (except those
whose Class of Service
Directory Listing parameter is
set to "No").
None: No operation assigned.
Example: Assigning key [1]
to transfer to extension 101
1. Click the check box next
to key [1].
2. Select "Trf to Ext" in the
"Assigned Operation"
column.
3. Enter "101" in the "Value"
column.
Example: Cancelling the
setting for key [1]
1. Clear the check box next
to key [1].

23.3.2 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom

Service—Date Control
The below parameters are set for the Date Control Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder.
This service allows you to assign a different operation for up to 5 time periods. The caller makes no
selection and no menu is announced.

624 PC Programming Manual

 23.3.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Time Control

Name Description Value Range Links

Description The information typed in Max. 32 characters Feature
this field is for reference Manual
only. References
3.2.1.15 Custom
Service
Period 1–5, Period 1–5: Period 1–5: Feature
Outside Specifies the name of Name: Max. 16 characters Manual
date period for From/To: Select the check box, and then References
reference, start and end click the input field to select a date (month
3.2.1.15 Custom
date, and an operation. and day) from the calendar. You can
Service
specify a beginning date (From), ending
Outside: date (To), or both for each period.
Allows you to specify an Assigned Operation: Trf to Mbx, Trf to Ext,
operation that is Operator, Trf to Out, Exit, Prev Menu, CS,
enabled on all other VM Serv, Call Trf Serv, Subscriber Serv,
dates not included in the Dial by Name, Repeat Menu, Main Menu,
set periods. Trf to Fax Extn, List All Names, None (see
23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service
Settings—Custom Service—Menu &
Transfer—Key – Assigned Operation:
0–9, *, #)

Outside:
Name: Max. 16 characters
Assigned Operation: Trf to Mbx, Trf to Ext,
Operator, Trf to Out, Exit, Prev Menu, CS,
VM Serv, Call Trf Serv, Subscriber Serv,
Dial by Name, Repeat Menu, Main Menu,
Trf to Fax Extn, List All Names, None (see
23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service
Settings—Custom Service—Menu &
Transfer—Key – Assigned Operation:
0–9, *, #)

23.3.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom

Service—Time Control
The below parameters are set for the Time Control Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder.
This service allows you to assign a different operation for up to 5 blocks of time during the day. The caller
makes no selection and no menu is announced.
Name Description Value Range Links
Description The information typed in Max. 32 characters Feature
this field is for reference Manual
only. References
3.2.1.15 Custom
Service

PC Programming Manual 625

23.3.4 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Day Control

Name Description Value Range Links

Period 1–5, Period 1–5: Period 1–5: Feature
Outside Specifies the name of time Name: Max. 16 characters Manual
period for reference, start From/To: Select the check box, click the References
and end time, and an input field, and then specify a time (hour
3.2.1.15 Custom
operation. and minute). You can specify a
Service
beginning time (From), ending time
Note (To), or both for each period.
When the start time is Assigned Operation: Trf to Mbx, Trf to
specified and the end Ext, Operator, Trf to Out, Exit, Prev
time is "None", the Menu, CS, VM Serv, Call Trf Serv,
period will end at Subscriber Serv, Dial by Name, Repeat
"00:00". Menu, Main Menu, Trf to Fax Extn, List
All Names, None (see 23.3.1 UM
Outside: Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings
Allows you to specify an —Custom Service—Menu & Transfer
operation that is enabled for —Key – Assigned Operation: 0–9, *,
all other times not included #)
in the set time periods.
Outside:
Name: Max. 16 characters
Assigned Operation: Trf to Mbx, Trf to
Ext, Operator, Trf to Out, Exit, Prev
Menu, CS, VM Serv, Call Trf Serv,
Subscriber Serv, Dial by Name, Repeat
Menu, Main Menu, Trf to Fax Extn, List
All Names, None (see 23.3.1 UM
Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings
—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer
—Key – Assigned Operation: 0–9, *,
#)

23.3.4 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom

Service—Day Control
The below parameters are set for the Menu Transfer Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder.
This service allows you to assign a different operation for each day of the week, and for all holidays. The
caller makes no selection and no menu is announced.
Name Description Value Range Links
Description The information typed in this field is for Max. 32 characters Feature
reference only. Manual
References
3.2.1.15
Custom Service

626 PC Programming Manual

 23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Password

Name Description Value Range Links

Sunday– Specifies a service for each day of the Assigned Operation: Trf Feature
Saturday, week and for all holidays. to Mbx, Trf to Ext, Manual
Holiday Operator, Trf to Out, Exit, References
Note Prev Menu, CS, VM
3.2.1.15
If an operation is assigned to "Holiday" Serv, Call Trf Serv,
Custom Service
here, either one of the following Subscriber Serv, Dial by
settings is required in order to activate Name, Repeat Menu,
the operation for the "Holiday" Custom Main Menu, Trf to Fax
Service: Extn, List All Names,
None (see 23.3.1 UM
1. In the Holiday Table, select
Configuration—[4-3]
"Custom Service Menu" and
Service Settings—
specify the number of this Date
Custom Service—Menu
Control—"Holiday" Custom
& Transfer—Key –
Service, or the number of its
Assigned Operation: 0–
higher layered Custom Service
9, *, #)
(see 23.4 UM Configuration—
[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday
Table).
2. Assign the desired Date Control
—"Holiday" Custom Service or its
higher layered Custom Service to
the desired Port/Trunk (see
22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1]
UM Extension / Trunk Service—
Service Group).
For "Port Affected/Trunk Affected",
exclude the Port/Trunk numbers
that are assigned to the Date
Control—"Holiday" Custom
Service or the number of its higher
layered Custom Service.

23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom

Service—Password
The below parameters are set for the Password Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder.
This service requires that callers enter a password, followed by "#". Each password is assigned an
operation. If a password is entered correctly, the caller is handled by the password’s pre-programmed
operation. The prompt for this service can be recorded in the CS No. dialogue box.
Custom Service prompts can be recorded only in On-line mode.
Name Description Value Range Links
Description The information typed in this Max. 32 characters Feature Manual
field is for reference only. References
3.2.1.15 Custom
Service

PC Programming Manual 627

23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Password

Name Description Value Range Links

Menu Repeat Specifies the number of times 1–3 times Feature Manual
Cycle (1-3) the Custom Service menu References
message will be repeated to 3.2.1.15 Custom
the caller. Service
Wait for First Specifies the length of time 1–10 s Feature Manual
Digit (0-10 s) that the system waits for the References
caller to dial the first digit after 3.2.1.15 Custom
a Custom Service menu is Service
played for the caller. If this
time expires, the No DTMF
Operation setting determines
how the call is then handled.
Maximum Specifies the number of times 1–10 times Feature Manual
Number of an invalid password is entered References
Invalid Entry before the operation assigned 3.2.1.15 Custom
(1-10) for Entry Failure is executed. Service
No DTMF Determines how calls are Trf to Mbx, Trf to Ext, Operator, Trf Feature Manual
Input handled when callers do not to Out, Exit, Prev Menu, CS (see References
Operation dial any numbers in response 23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] 3.2.1.15 Custom
to system guidance (often Service Settings—Custom Service
because they are rotary Service—Menu & Transfer—No
telephone users). The default DTMF Input Operation)
setting is "Operator", which
allows the caller to be
automatically connected to an
operator after the message is
played.
Entry Failure Determines what operation is Trf to Mbx, Trf to Ext, Operator, Trf Feature Manual
activated when a caller enters to Out, Exit, Prev Menu, CS, VM References
an invalid password X times. Serv, Call Trf Serv, Subscriber 3.2.1.15 Custom
(X= the value set for Serv, Dial by Name, Repeat Service
Maximum Number of Invalid Menu, Main Menu, Trf to Fax Extn,
Entry (1-10)) List All Names (see 23.3.1 UM
Configuration—[4-3] Service
Settings—Custom Service—
Menu & Transfer—Key –
Assigned Operation: 0–9, *, #)

628 PC Programming Manual

 23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Password

Name Description Value Range Links

Pass1–5, Pass1–5: Pass1–5: Feature Manual
Cancel Specifies a password and an Password: Max. 12 digits References
operation for the specified Assigned Operation: Trf to Mbx, 3.2.1.15 Custom
password. Trf to Ext, Operator, Trf to Out, Service
Exit, Prev Menu, CS, VM Serv,
Cancel: Call Trf Serv, Subscriber Serv,
Determines the operation that Dial by Name, Repeat Menu, Main
is activated when a caller Menu, Trf to Fax Extn, List All
presses "#" to cancel Names, None (see 23.3.1 UM
password entry. Configuration—[4-3] Service
Settings—Custom Service—
Menu & Transfer—Key –
Assigned Operation: 0–9, *, #)

Cancel:
Assigned Operation: Trf to Mbx,
Trf to Ext, Operator, Trf to Out,
Exit, Prev Menu, CS, VM Serv,
Call Trf Serv, Subscriber Serv,
Dial by Name, Repeat Menu, Main
Menu, Trf to Fax Extn, List All
Names, None (see 23.3.1 UM
Configuration—[4-3] Service
Settings—Custom Service—
Menu & Transfer—Key –
Assigned Operation: 0–9, *, #)

PC Programming Manual 629

23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table

23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—

Holiday Table
Holidays can be set for and assigned to service groups and Unified Messaging ports. When a call is
received from a certain service group or by a certain subscriber during the time frame set for an assigned
holiday, the call handling settings for that holiday will be used. This screen is similar to the table found in
10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table. You can also access the PBX Holiday Table
directly by clicking the PBX Holiday Table tab. A maximum of 24 different holidays can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
Setting Enables the setting of the holiday. Enable, Disable PC Programming
This setting synchronises with the Manual References
PBX’s Holiday Table. 10.5 PBX Configuration—
[2-5] System—Holiday
Table—Holiday Table—
Setting
Feature Manual
References
3.2.1.20 Holiday Service
Name of Specifies the name of the holiday Max. 32 Feature Manual
Holiday setting for later reference. Characters References
3.2.1.20 Holiday Service
Start Date Specifies the month and day of the Month and Day PC Programming
(Month holiday start date. Click the cell to Manual References
Day) display a calendar. Select a month 10.5 PBX Configuration—
using the arrow buttons, and click on [2-5] System—Holiday
a day for the selected month. This Table
setting synchronises with the PBX’s
Holiday Table. → Holiday Table—Start
Date—Month
→ Holiday Table—Start
Date—Day
Feature Manual
References
3.2.1.20 Holiday Service
Start Time Specifies the time of day on the Hour and Minute PC Programming
specified date at which to begin the Manual References
holiday service. Click the cell to 10.5 PBX Configuration—
display an array of hours and minutes. [2-5] System—Holiday
Select an hour of the day and a Table—Start Time
minute of the hour to set the time.
Feature Manual
References
3.2.1.20 Holiday Service

630 PC Programming Manual

 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table

Name Description Value Range Links

End Date Specifies the month and day of the Month and Day PC Programming
(Month holiday end date. Click the cell to Manual References
Day) display a calendar. Select a month 10.5 PBX Configuration—
using the arrow buttons, and click on [2-5] System—Holiday
a day for the selected month. This Table
setting synchronises with the PBX’s
Holiday Table. → Holiday Table—End Date
—Month
→ Holiday Table—End Date
—Day
Feature Manual
References
3.2.1.20 Holiday Service
End Time Specifies the time of day on the Hour and Minute PC Programming
specified date at which to end the Manual References
holiday service. Click the cell to 10.5 PBX Configuration—
display an array of hours and minutes. [2-5] System—Holiday
Select an hour of the day and a Table—End Time
minute of the hour to set the time.
Feature Manual
References
3.2.1.20 Holiday Service
Retain If "Yes" is selected, the holiday will not No, Yes PC Programming
Holiday end regardless of the end time Manual References
setting. To end the holiday setting 10.5 PBX Configuration—
when "Yes" is selected and the end [2-5] System—Holiday
time has already passed, set Setting Table—Retain Holiday
to "Disable" or re-programme the
settings for the holiday. Feature Manual
References
3.2.1.20 Holiday Service
Company Specify the greeting callers hear when None (do not Feature Manual
Greeting calling the affected trunks or ports playback): No References
No. during the holiday. greeting is heard. 3.2.1.20 Holiday Service
No. 1–32: The
selected company
greeting is heard.
System Greeting:
The following
greeting is heard:
"Good morning/
Good afternoon/
Good evening.
Welcome to the
Unified Messaging
System".

PC Programming Manual 631

23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table

Name Description Value Range Links

Service One of 4 incoming call services (Voice Voice Mail Feature Manual
Mail, Automated Attendant, Interview, Service: The caller References
or Custom Service) can be assigned is transferred to 3.2.1.20 Holiday Service
to each holiday. After a greeting is the Voice Mail
played (if specified), the call will be Service.
transferred to the selected service. Automated
Attendant
Service: The caller
is transferred to
the Automated
Attendant Service.
Interview
Mailbox: The
caller is transferred
to an Interview
Mailbox.
Custom Service
Menu: The caller
is transferred to a
Custom Service
Menu.
Interview If "Interview Mailbox" or "Custom Interview Mailbox Feature Manual
Mailbox/ Service Menu" was selected for number, Custom References
Custom Service, specify the Interview Mailbox Service number 3.2.1.20 Holiday Service
Service or Custom Service here.
Menu
Trunk In this screen, trunk number means Trunk No. 1–64, All Feature Manual
Affected service group number. Specify which References
service groups will be subject to the 3.2.1.20 Holiday Service
holiday setting. Click Edit, and then
select the check boxes for the service
groups to be subject to the holiday
setting, or select the All check box to
apply the holiday to all service groups.
Click OK to finish.
Port Specify which UM ports will be subject Port No. 1–24, All Feature Manual
Affected to the holiday setting. Click Edit, and References
then select the check boxes for the 3.2.1.20 Holiday Service
UM ports to be subject to the holiday
setting, or select the All check box to
apply the holiday to all UM ports. Click
OK to finish.

632 PC Programming Manual

 Section 24
UM Configuration—[5] System Parameters

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the System Parameters menu of the UM
Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 633

24.1 UM Configuration—[5-1] System Parameters—Mailbox Group

24.1 UM Configuration—[5-1] System Parameters—

Mailbox Group
Also called System Group Distribution Lists. Mailbox Groups allow a caller or subscriber to record a
message and have it sent to several mailboxes. Messages sent to a Mailbox Group are sent to all
subscribers in the group. The system can maintain a maximum of 20 Mailbox Groups. Each group can have
a maximum of 200 members. For Personal Group Distribution Lists, see 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2]
Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Personal Distribution List.
Follow the steps below to create or edit a Mailbox Group.

Adding Mailbox Groups

1. Specify the Group List No. and Group Name for each Mailbox Group to be used.
2. Click OK.

Editing Mailboxes
To edit a mailbox group, select the desired mailbox group, then click the icon. You can also edit specific
parameters directly from the Mailbox Group list.

Deleting Mailboxes
1. Select a mailbox group.
2. Click the icon.
3. Click Yes.

Adding Mailboxes to a Group

1. In the Group Members column, click the Edit button of the group to add mailboxes to.
2. In the Subscribers To Add column, select the check boxes for the mailbox numbers to add to the
group.
3. Click Add.
4. Click OK.
5. Click OK.

Recording a Name for the Group in the Edit Mailbox Group dialogue box
1. Select the desired Mailbox Group and click the icon.

Note
Before you can record, confirm that there is at least 1 member in the group and that you have
clicked Apply since adding members to the group.
2. Select "Record from extension" or "Import from recorded file". When "Record from extension" is
selected:
1. Specify the extension number of the telephone used for recording, then click Connect.
2. When the specified extension rings, go off-hook.
3. Click Record, Play, or Stop to record or play a voice label through the extension.
4. Click Disconnect.
5. Click OK.
When "Import from recorded file" is selected:
1. Click the folder icon.

634 PC Programming Manual

 24.1 UM Configuration—[5-1] System Parameters—Mailbox Group

The Open dialogue box appears.

2. Navigate to the folder containing the WAV files you want to open.
WAV files must meet the following specifications:
– G.711 PCM codec
– 8 kHz, 8-bit sampling rate
– Monaural
– A-law or µ-law encoding
3. Select the desired WAV file.
4. Click Open to import the file.
3. Click OK.
Name Description Value Range Links
Group Specifies the Mailbox Group number. This 2–[the value set in Feature Manual
List No. number is similar to a mailbox number Mailbox No. Max. References
and is used to send a message to all Length (3-8)] digits 3.2.2.14 Group
subscribers of the group. It must be a Distribution Lists
unique number; no other group or mailbox
can be assigned this number.
Group Specifies the group name. Max. 32 characters Feature Manual
Name References
3.2.2.14 Group
Distribution Lists

PC Programming Manual 635

24.2 UM Configuration—[5-2] System Parameters—Extension Group

24.2 UM Configuration—[5-2] System Parameters—

Extension Group
An Extension Group is a group of extensions that share a common mailbox. Each group has an Extension
Group number. If the group number is assigned as the owner of a mailbox, then all members cannot be
assigned their own personal mailboxes.
Up to 20 Extension Groups can be created, and each group can consist of 100 extensions (members). You
can add, delete, and review the extensions. Members of an Extension Group are able to share the same
mailbox and be notified by the Message Waiting Notification feature when a message is received.
Follow the steps below to edit an Extension Group.

Adding Extension Groups

1. Click the icon.
2. Specify the Group List No. and Group Name for the Extension Group.
3. Click OK.

Editing Extension Groups

To edit Extension Group settings, select the desired Group, then click the icon. You can also edit specific
parameters directly from the Extension Group list.

Deleting Extension Groups

1. Select an Extension Group.
2. Click the icon.
3. Click Yes.

Editing Extension Group Members

1. In the Extension No. column, click the Click To Edit.. button to open the Group Members window.
2. Click the icon.
3. Enter the extension to add in Extension, and click OK.
4. Click OK.
The table on this screen will list any extensions that cannot be added, as well as the reason that extension
cannot be added to the group (i.e. it is already in another extension group, etc.).
Name Description Value Range Links
Group Specifies the Extension Group number. 2–8 digits Feature Manual
List No. References
Note
3.2.1.18 Extension
In order to configure an Extension Group, Group
set a group number here, then assign the
group number as the owner of a mailbox.
The Extension Group number is effectively
the extension number that is the owner of
the group’s mailbox.
Group Specifies the group name. Max. 32 Feature Manual
Name characters References
3.2.1.18 Extension
Group

636 PC Programming Manual

 24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement

24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—

System Caller Name Announcement
Allows the System Administrator to store a maximum of 200 telephone numbers and record a caller name
for each telephone number. The caller name is announced when playing a message in their mailbox from
one of the pre-programmed callers, when the system transfers a call to the subscriber from one of the pre-
programmed callers (Caller ID Screening), and when the system pages the subscriber by intercom
(Intercom Paging).
Caller ID Screening feature is only available when the Caller ID Screen parameter of the subscriber’s Class
of Service is set to "Yes". This feature is also enabled when subscribers select "Call screening" as the Call
Transfer method (see "3.2.2 Subscriber Features—3.2.2.7 Call Transfer Status" in the Feature Manual).
The Intercom Paging feature is enabled by selecting "Intercom Paging" as the Call Transfer method (see
"3.2.2 Subscriber Features—3.2.2.7 Call Transfer Status" and/or "3.2.2 Subscriber Features—3.2.2.15
Incomplete Call Handling Service" in the Feature Manual).
Follow the steps below to edit System Caller Name Announcements.

Adding a Caller Extension and Description

1. Specify the Caller-ID No. and Description for each entry that will be used.
2. Click OK.

Editing Caller ID Entries

To edit an entry, select the desired mailbox group, then click the icon. You can also edit specific
parameters directly from the list.

Deleting Mailboxes
1. Select an entry.
2. Click the icon.
3. Click Yes.

Recording a Name for the extension in the Caller Information dialogue box
1. Select the desired Caller ID number and click the icon.

Note
Before you can record, confirm that you have clicked Apply since you added the Caller ID No.
2. Select "Record from extension" or "Import from recorded file".
When "Record from extension" is selected:
1. Specify the extension number of the telephone used for recording, then click Connect.
2. When the specified extension rings, go off-hook.
3. Click Record, Play, or Stop to record or play a voice label through the extension.
4. Click Disconnect.
5. Click OK.
When "Import from recorded file" is selected:
1. Click the folder icon.
The Open dialogue box appears.
2. Navigate to the folder containing the WAV files you want to open.
WAV files must meet the following specifications:
– G.711 PCM codec

PC Programming Manual 637

24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement

– 8 kHz, 8-bit sampling rate

– Monaural
– A-law or µ-law encoding
3. Select the desired WAV file.
4. Click Open to import the file.
3. Click OK.
Name Description Value Range Links
Caller-ID No. Assigns the telephone number for Max. 20 digits Feature Manual
which the system announces the consisting of 0–9 References
pre-recorded caller name to 3.2.1.10 Caller Name
extension users. Announcement
Description Enters a name and/or description Max. 20 characters Feature Manual
of the Caller ID number. References
3.2.1.10 Caller Name
Announcement

638 PC Programming Manual

 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—

Parameters
Daily Hours Setting
Name Description Value Range Links
Clock Format Specifies the time format (12-hour or 24- 12 H, 24 H
hour).

Note
The selected time format (12-hour or
24-hour) affects the time format of
reports as well as the time that
appears in e-mail notifications for new
messages.
Morning Hours Specifies the starting time of the morning HH:MM (HH: Feature Manual
Start Time greeting. Hour, MM: References
(HH:MM) Minute) 3.2.1.12 Company
Greeting
Afternoon Hours Specifies the starting time of the afternoon HH:MM (HH: Feature Manual
Start Time greeting. Hour, MM: References
(HH:MM) Minute) 3.2.1.12 Company
Greeting
Evening Hours Specifies the starting time of the evening HH:MM (HH: Feature Manual
Start Time greeting. Hour, MM: References
(HH:MM) Minute) 3.2.1.12 Company
Greeting

Prompt Setting
These settings are required when Multilingual Service is enabled.
Name Description Value Range Links
Primary Language Specifies the default language Guidance No. 1–8 Feature Manual
to be used when another References
language is not selected in the 3.2.1.31 Multilingual
Multilingual Selection Menu. Service
3.2.1.41 System
Prompts

PC Programming Manual 639

24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Language 1–5— Assigns a selection number (1– Language 1–5 PC Programming
Language (1–5) 9) to each language. Callers use Manual References
the numbers to select the 22.1 UM Configuration
desired languages for their —[3-1] UM Extension /
message prompts. This setting Trunk Service—
is required when either one or Service Group Day,
both of the following parameters Night, Lunch, and
are set to "Selective": Break Mode - Prompt
a. Day, Night, Lunch, and for No DTMF Input
Break Mode - Incoming Callers
Call Service Prompt 24.4 UM Configuration
—[5-4] System
b. External Message
Parameters—
Delivery Prompt Mode
Parameters—External
For each selection of this
Message Delivery
setting, related items within
"Language 1–5" can be set. Feature Manual
References
3.2.1.31 Multilingual
Service
3.2.1.41 System
Prompts
Language 1–5— Specifies the language for the None, Guidance No. Feature Manual
Language current language selection 1–8 References
number. 3.2.1.31 Multilingual
Service
3.2.1.41 System
Prompts
Language 1–5— Specifies the number to be input None, 1–9 Feature Manual
DTMF to select the language set for References
the current language selection 3.2.1.31 Multilingual
number. Service
3.2.1.41 System
Prompts
Selection Menu Specifies the length of time that 0–20 s Feature Manual
Wait Time (0-20 s) the system waits for the caller to References
select a language by pressing 3.2.1.41 System
the appropriate dial key. If this Prompts
time period expires without the
selection number being entered,
the system uses the Primary
Language.
Selection Menu Specifies the number of times 1–3 Feature Manual
Repeat Cycle (1-3 the system will play the References
times) Multilingual Selection Menu. 3.2.1.31 Multilingual
Service

640 PC Programming Manual

 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Delay Time After Specifies the length of time (in 0–10 s Feature Manual
Connected seconds) that the system waits References
Received for after the line is connected for 3.2.1.41 System
Incoming (0-10 s) incoming calls before playing Prompts
the prompt.
Delay Time After Specifies the length of time (in 0–10 s Feature Manual
Connected seconds) that the system waits References
Received for after the line is connected for 3.2.1.41 System
Outgoing (0-10 s) outgoing calls before playing the Prompts
prompt.
System Guidance— Specifies the parameters which Guidance No. 1–8 PC Programming
System Guidance vary depending on the language Manual References
assigned as the System 24.4 UM Configuration
Guidance language. For each —[5-4] System
selection of this setting, related Parameters—
items within "System Guidance Parameters—Prompt
1–8" can be set. Setting—Primary
Language
System Guidance— Specifies the position of the Before: the system
Select Language— "AM/PM" announcement. announces "AM/PM"
Position of "AM/PM" before the time,
in Time Stamp such as P.M. 3:42.
After: the system
announces "AM/PM"
after the time, such
as 3:42 P.M.
24-h: the system
announces the time
in 24-h format, such
as 15:42.
System Guidance— Specifies when and if "O’clock" When at :00: the
Select Language— is announced. system announces
O’clock Prompt "O’clock" only on the
hour, such "one
o’clock".
Always: the system
announces "O’clock"
always.
None: No
announcement
System Guidance— Specifies the order of the month MM:DD: Month and
Select Language— and day for date Day
Month/Day Prompt announcements. DD:MM: Day and
Month
System Guidance— Specifies the way of POUND, HASH
Select Language—# announcement for the "#"
Announcement character when "US-English" or
Mode "English (UK)" is selected as
System Guidance.

PC Programming Manual 641

24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

PBX Parameters
Specifies how the system will initiate and control call transfers, setup outgoing calls, and control message
waiting lamps on extensions.
Name Description Value Range Links
PBX Environment— Specifies the Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9, ,#
Operator Transfer sequence for and special codes
Sequence (Up to 16 transferring calls D: Disconnecting
digits / [0-9 * # D R F to an operator’s F: Flash (Recall)
T X , ;]) extension. R: Ringback Tone Detection
T: Dial Tone Detection
, : Dial Pause (default 1 s)
; : Dial Pause (default 3 s)
X: Extension Dialling
0–9, , #: Dial Code
PBX Environment— Specifies the Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9, ,#
Extension Transfer sequence for and special codes
Sequence (Up to 16 transferring calls D: Disconnecting
digits / [0-9 * # D R F to any extension F: Flash (Recall)
T X , ;]) except an R: Ringback Tone Detection
operator’s T: Dial Tone Detection
extension. , : Dial Pause (default 1 s)
; : Dial Pause (default 3 s)
X: Extension Dialling
0–9, , #: Dial Code
PBX Environment— Specifies the Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9, ,# Feature
Alternate Extension sequence for and special codes Manual
Transfer Sequence transferring calls D: Disconnecting References
(Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * to extensions in F: Flash (Recall)
3.2.1.1
# D R F T X , ;]) the Alternate R: Ringback Tone Detection
Alternate
Extension Group. T: Dial Tone Detection
Extension
, : Dial Pause (default 1 s)
Group
; : Dial Pause (default 3 s)
X: Extension Dialling
0–9, , #: Dial Code

642 PC Programming Manual

 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

Dialling Parameters/MSW Notification

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Dialling Parameters Specifies the length of time that the 10–60 s PC Programming
—Call Transfer No system waits before retrieving the Manual References
Answer Time (10-60 transferred call when there is no answer 12.1 PBX
s) at the destination extension. Configuration—[4-1]
Extension—Wired
Note
Extension—FWD No
Make sure that the duration of Call Answer Time
Transfer No Answer Time is longer 12.2 PBX
than the duration of Call Forwarding Configuration—[4-2]
No Answer Time at the PBX. Extension—Portable
Otherwise, the PBX may forward the Station—FWD No
call immediately to the extension’s Answer Time
Intercept Routing destination
according to PBX programming, rather
than return the call to the system.
Dialling Parameters Specifies the length of time that the 10–90 s
—Outgoing Call No system waits before concluding that there
Answer Time (10-90 is no answer at the outside number called.
s)
Dialling Parameters Specifies the pause time for "," used in 100–9900
—Pause Time for "," call sequences. ms, in
(100-9900 ms, *100 units of
ms) 100 ms
Dialling Parameters Specifies the pause time for ";" used in 100–9900
—Pause Time for ";" call sequences. ms, in
(100-9900 ms, *100 units of
ms) 100 ms
Message Waiting Specifies a callback number to be Max. 32 Feature Manual
Notification— displayed with text reports of messages digits References
System Callback waiting notifications. The system callback 3.2.1.30 Message
No. (Up to 32 digits) number is displayed when no Caller ID Waiting Notification—
information was received when the Telephone Device
message was recorded.

External Message Delivery

Determines how essential External Message Delivery features are carried out.
Name Description Value Range Links
Retry Times Specifies the number of times the 0–3 times Feature Manual
(times) system will attempt to deliver an (E/NE: 0–4 References
external message when the times, NZ: 0–5 3.2.2.12 External
destination is busy or does not answer. times, C: 0–9 Message Delivery
times, Taiwan/ Service
Malaysia: 0–2
times)

PC Programming Manual 643

24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Busy Delay Specifies the length of time (in 1–60 min Feature Manual
(min) minutes) the system waits to try to (Malaysia: 2– References
deliver an external message again 120 min) 3.2.2.12 External
when the destination is busy. Message Delivery
Service
No Answer Specifies the length of time (in 60–120 min Feature Manual
Delay (min) minutes) the system waits to try to References
deliver an external message again 3.2.2.12 External
when the destination is not answering. Message Delivery
Service
Outgoing Call Specifies the Unified Messaging UM port PC Programming
UM Extensions extensions for the External Message extension Manual References
Delivery feature. number 9.6 PBX Configuration—
[1-1] Configuration—Slot
—UM Port Property
Feature Manual
References
3.2.2.12 External
Message Delivery
Service
Message Specifies the maximum length (in 1–6 min Feature Manual
Length (1-6 minutes) of messages recorded for the References
min) External Delivery Message. 3.2.2.12 External
Message Delivery
Service
Max. Messages Specifies the maximum number of 1–100 Feature Manual
for Mailboxes External Delivery Messages that can References
(1-100 msgs) be stored in one mailbox. 3.2.2.12 External
Message Delivery
Service
System Specifies the maximum length of 1–9 min Feature Manual
External External Message Delivery calls. The References
Message timer begins counting when the called 3.2.2.12 External
Delivery party answers the call, and if the called Message Delivery
Duration Time party has not pressed the appropriate Service
(1-9 min) dial key to initiate message playback,
the system terminates the call when
this timer expires.
Company Specifies the company’s telephone Max. 32 digits
Telephone No. number. When the recipient has failed
(Up to 32 digits) to retrieve the sender’s message
because of he or she did not enter the
correct password, the system
announces the company’s telephone
number to the caller. The caller can
later call the company for assistance
or to speak to the message sender.

644 PC Programming Manual

 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

Intercom Paging Parameters

Unified Messaging Intercom Paging functions in conjunction with the Intercom Paging feature of the PBX. It
allows the system to page the called party (announce the caller’s name, line number, etc.) while the caller is
placed on hold. To utilise this feature, Intercom Paging must be available for the PBX, and the Unified
Messaging system must be properly programmed.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
No Answer Time for Specifies the length of time (in 1–30 s Feature Manual
Intercom Paging seconds) the system waits before References
(1-30 s) concluding Intercom Paging when 3.2.1.23 Intercom Paging
there is no answer. The system will
return to the caller if the paged party
does not respond before this timer
expires.
Announcement Specifies the number of times the 1–3 times Feature Manual
Repeat Cycle (1-3 system announces the page. References
times) 3.2.1.23 Intercom Paging
Example:
"I have a call for (name)".
Intercom Paging Specifies the number of times to retry 1–10 PC Programming
Retry (1-10 times) paging when the called subscriber times Manual References
has set Incomplete Call Handling 20.1.2 UM Configuration—
for No Answer/Incomplete Call [1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full
Handling for Busy to "Page the Setting—Incomplete Call
mailbox owner by intercom paging" Handling for No Answer
and the subscriber is busy or if there 20.1.2 UM Configuration—
is no answer. [1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full
Setting—Incomplete Call
Handling for Busy
Feature Manual
References
3.2.1.23 Intercom Paging
Caller Recorded Determines whether or not the Disable, Feature Manual
Name Announce system announces the caller’s name Enable References
Mode during paging. (In order for the name 3.2.1.23 Intercom Paging
to be announced, it must be recorded
beforehand.)

Fax Management
You can programme the system to automatically detect incoming fax calls and forward those calls to a fax
extension. You can specify a maximum of 2 fax extensions as the destination for faxes; if the main fax
extension is not available to receive a fax, the system will forward the fax call to the alternate fax extension.

PC Programming Manual 645

24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Automatic Specifies the detection and destination of Disable, Transfer to Fax
Transfer of incoming fax calls. Extension
Incoming Fax
Call Note
The system can detect incoming fax
signals during the first 30 seconds after it
answers incoming calls.
Main Fax Specifies the extension number of the main fax 1–8 digits
Extension No. machine.
(1-8 digits)
Alternate Fax Specifies the extension number of the 1–8 digits
Extension No. alternate fax machine. When the main fax
(1-8 digits) extension is busy or does not answer within
the time specified under Fax No Answer Time
(5-60s), the system forwards the fax call to the
alternate fax extension.
Fax No Specifies the length of time (in seconds) that 5–60 s
Answer Time the system waits for the main or alternate fax
(5-60s) extension to answer a fax call before taking
other action, such as notifying the Fax
Manager that the fax could not be received.
Fax Manager Specifies the mailbox number of the Fax 2–[the value set in Mailbox
Mailbox No. Manager. The system will notify the Fax No. Max. Length (3-8)] digits
Manager of the status of fax calls depending
upon the settings of the Fax No Answer
Coverage Mode and Fax Notification Mode
parameters.
Fax No Determines what action the system takes No: The system will not
Answer when an incoming fax call could not be notify the Fax Manager when
Coverage answered by the main or alternate fax fax calls were not answered.
Mode extension. The system can announce to the Mbx: The system will
Fax Manager the number of unanswered fax announce the number of
calls. The number announced is the number of unanswered fax calls to the
unanswered fax calls since the last time the Fax Manager when the Fax
system notified the Fax Manager. This Manager logs in to his or her
announcement is heard when the Fax mailbox.
Manager logs in to his or her mailbox. Ext: The system will
announce the number of
unanswered fax calls to the
Fax Manager by calling the
Fax Manager’s extension.

646 PC Programming Manual

 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Fax Determines what action the system takes No: The system will not
Notification when an incoming fax call is successfully notify the Fax Manager when
Mode received by the main or alternate fax fax calls are answered.
extension. The system can announce to the Mbx: The system will
Fax Manager the number of received fax calls. announce the number of
The number announced is the number of successfully received fax
received fax calls since the last time the calls to the Fax Manager
system notified the Fax Manager. when the Fax Manager logs
in to his or her mailbox.
Ext: The system will
announce the number of
successfully received fax
calls to the Fax Manager by
calling the Fax Manager’s
extension.

Disconnect Parameters
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Maximum Silence Specifies the length of silence detected by the system 0–60 s
Time (0-60 s) before the system disconnects the call.
Maximum Specifies the length of time the system waits when a 0–60 s
Continuous Tone continuous tone is detected before it disconnects the
Time (0-60 s) call.
Maximum Cyclic Specifies the length of time the system waits when a 0–60 s
Tone Time (0-60 s) cyclic tone is detected before it disconnects the call.
Maximum Call Specifies the maximum duration of calls. If the system 0–60 min
Duration (0-60 min) detects no DTMF signals for the specified amount of
time, it terminates the call. Calls will not be terminated
while playing or recording messages. If this setting is set
to "0", calls will not be terminated.

Transfer to Outside
These parameters determine how the system will transfer calls to a trunk via the following features: Call
Transfer Service, Custom Service, Personal Custom Service, Caller ID Callback, Call-through Service.
Name Description Value Range Links
Outside Transfer Specifies the sequence the Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9, Feature
Sequence—Call system uses to transfer calls , # and special codes Manual
Transfer to to trunks. D: Disconnecting References
Outside Sequence F: Flash (Recall)
3.2.1.7 Call
(Up to 16 digits / R: Ringback Tone Detection
Transfer to
[0-9 * # D F R T , ; T: Dial Tone Detection
Outside
N]) , : Dial Pause for 1 s (default)
; : Dial Pause for 3 s (default)
N: Telephone Number Dialling
0–9, , #: Dial Code

PC Programming Manual 647

24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Outside Transfer Specifies the sequence the Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9,
Sequence—EFA system uses to transfer calls , # and special codes
Transfer to trunks using EFA (External D: Disconnecting
Sequence (Up to Feature Access). This setting F: Flash (Recall)
16 digits / [0-9 * # should match the settings of R: Ringback Tone Detection
D F R T , ; N A]) the PBX. T: Dial Tone Detection
, : Dial Pause for 1 s (default)
; : Dial Pause for 3 s (default)
N: Telephone Number Dialling
A: Feature Access Code
0–9, , #: Dial Code
Outside Transfer Specifies the sequence the Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9,
Sequence—EFA system uses to reconnect the , # and special codes
Transfer line when the party transferred D: Disconnecting
Reconnect with EFA (External Feature F: Flash (Recall)
Sequence on Access) is busy. This setting R: Ringback Tone Detection
Busy (Up to 16 should match the settings of T: Dial Tone Detection
digits / [0-9 * # D the PBX. , : Dial Pause for 1 s (default)
F R T , ; N A]) ; : Dial Pause for 3 s (default)
N: Telephone Number Dialling
A: Feature Access Code
0–9, , #: Dial Code
Outside Transfer Specifies the sequence the Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9,
Sequence—EFA system uses to reconnect the , # and special codes
Transfer line when the party transferred D: Disconnecting
Reconnect with EFA (External Feature F: Flash (Recall)
Sequence on No Access) does not answer. This R: Ringback Tone Detection
Answer (Up to 16 setting should match the T: Dial Tone Detection
digits / [0-9 * # D settings of the PBX. , : Dial Pause for 1 s (default)
F R T , ; N A]) ; : Dial Pause for 3 s (default)
N: Telephone Number Dialling
A: Feature Access Code
0–9, , #: Dial Code

648 PC Programming Manual

 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Outside Transfer Specifies the answering Guidance: The system plays the Feature
Sequence—Call method the system uses to following guidance before Manual
Transfer to detect whether the destination connecting the line to the References
Outside Answer party has answered the destination party: "You have a
3.2.1.7 Call
Mode transferred trunk call. call. To answer the call, press [1].
Transfer to
Otherwise, press [2] and hang
Outside
up." If the destination party
presses "1", he or she will be
able to answer the transferred
trunk call. The system continues
playing this guidance for the time
specified in Dialling Parameters
—Outgoing Call No Answer
Time (10-90 s) in Dialling
Parameters/MSW Notification.
If the transferred party does not
answer the call within this time,
the system considers it as a No
Answer call.
Analyze: The system monitors
the status of the trunk,
recognises that the destination
party goes off-hook, and
connects the line.
Trunk Group (1– Specifies a trunk group for 1–64
64)—Trunk Group making settings for EFA
No. Transfer, Caller ID Callback,
and Outside Line Access
Sequence for Caller ID
Callback. Selecting different
trunk groups from this drop-
down list allows settings to be
made for each trunk group.
Trunk Group (1– Specifies whether or not the Enable, Disable
64)—EFA system uses EFA (External
Transfer Feature Access) when
transferring incoming trunk
calls to another trunk. If set to
"Enable", the system transfers
incoming trunk calls to another
trunk according to "EFA
Transfer Sequence" specified
in "Transfer to Outside". If set
to "Disable", the system
transfers incoming trunks calls
to another trunk according to
Outside Transfer Sequence
—Call Transfer to Outside
Sequence (Up to 16 digits /
[0-9 * # D F R T , ; N])
specified in Transfer to
Outside.

PC Programming Manual 649

24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Trunk Group (1– Specifies whether or not the Enable, Disable
64)—Caller ID system allows a subscriber to
Callback call back the party who left a
message in his or her mailbox
by using the caller ID
information sent from the PBX.
This setting applies to the
trunk number used when the
message with Caller ID
information was left in his or
her mailbox.
Trunk Group (1– Specifies the sequence of Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9,
64)—Outside Line trunk access numbers for , # and special codes
Access Sequence Caller ID Callback. This D: Disconnecting
for Caller ID parameter is available when F: Flash (Recall)
Callback (Up to 16 the system executes Caller ID R: Ringback Tone Detection
digits / [0-9 * # D Callback without using EFA. T: Dial Tone Detection
F R T , ; ]) , : Dial Pause for 1 s (default)
; : Dial Pause for 3 s (default)
0–9, , #: Dial Code
Number of Digits Specifies the number of digits 1–20
in Telephone for local area telephone
Number (1-20) numbers. According to this
parameter, telephone numbers
dialled by the system can be
distinguished as either local
calls or long distance calls.

E-mail Option
E-mail Integration allows the system to send new message notification or to send recorded voice messages
as file attachments to subscribers via e-mail. The following settings must be made in order for the system to
use E-mail Integration features.
Name Description Value Range Links
Mail Address (Up Specifies the mail address of the Max. 128 Feature Manual
to 128 ASCII Unified Messaging system. characters References
characters) 3.2.1.28 Message Waiting
Notification—E-mail
Device
Full Name (Up to Specifies the full name that will Max. 64 Feature Manual
64 ASCII appear in e-mail messages sent by characters References
characters) the Unified Messaging system. 3.2.1.28 Message Waiting
Notification—E-mail
Device
Maximum Specifies whether voice messages Unlimited, Feature Manual
Message Length sent as e-mail attachments will have Other References
(Selection) a limit to their length. 3.2.1.28 Message Waiting
Notification—E-mail
Device

650 PC Programming Manual

 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Maximum Specifies the maximum length of 1–30 min Feature Manual
Message Length voice messages sent as e-mail References
(Other) (1-30 min) attachments. 3.2.1.28 Message Waiting
Notification—E-mail
Note
Device
If you attach a voice message
that is longer than this setting,
surplus parts of the message
may be discarded when sending
the e-mail.

Message Client
Name Description Value Range Links
Password Lockup Specifies the amount of time access will be locked after 5–60 min
Time (5-60 min) a password has been incorrectly entered 3 consecutive
times.

Mailbox
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Mailbox No. Specifies the maximum allowed number of digits for a mailbox 3–8 digits
Max. Length number.
(3-8)
Note
This setting cannot be changed to a smaller value if mailboxes
exist with a number of digits greater than that smaller value.
Those mailboxes must be re-numbered or deleted before this
setting can be changed to a smaller value.

PC Programming Manual 651

24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

652 PC Programming Manual

 Section 25
UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the H/W Settings menu of the UM Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 653

25.1 UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings

25.1 UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings

Global Parameters
Global parameters define the settings that affect integration with other PBX operations.
Name Description Value Range Links
Maximum Time to Wait Specifies the length of time that the system waits 5–200 (× 100
for Dial Tone (500-20000 for dial tone detection. ms)
ms, *100 ms)
Delay After Dialling Specifies the length of time that the system waits 0–250 s
Before Onhook (0-250 s) for an answer when making an outside call. If no
answer is detected, the system disconnects the
call.
DTMF Cut Length (0-500 Specifies the length of time for DTMF to be 0–500 ms
ms) deleted when it is detected while recording.
Minimum Message Specifies the minimum message recording length. 0–9 s
Length (0-9 s) Messages shorter than the specified minimum
recording length are discarded from the mailbox.

654 PC Programming Manual

 Section 26
UM Configuration—[7] System Security

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the System Security menu of the UM Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 655

26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security

26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security

Manager
Name Description Value Range Links
Login Failures before Specifies the number of times an 1–99 times
Disconnection (1-99 invalid password can be entered,
times) when the System Manager or
Message Manager tries to log in to the
system using a telephone, before the
call is disconnected.
System Manager Enables or disables access to the Disable, Enable
Access from Unified Messaging system from the
Telephone System Manager’s telephone.
Password for System If "Enable" is selected in System Max. 16 digits Feature Manual
Manager (Up to 16 Manager Access from Telephone, References
numeric digits) assign a numerical password here for 3.1.2.7 System
the System Manager to login to the Security
system.
Password for System Specifies the password for the System 4–16 characters Feature Manual
Manager (Message Manager for accessing the Unified (A–Z, a–z, 1–9) References
Client) Messaging system from the 3.1.2.7 System
messaging client. Security
Message Manager Enables or disables access to the Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Access from system from the Message Manager’s References
Telephone telephone. 3.1.2.7 System
Security
Password for If "Enable" is selected in Message Max. 16 digits Feature Manual
Message Manager Manager Access from Telephone, References
(Up to 16 numeric assign a numerical password here for 3.1.2.7 System
digits) the Message Manager to login to the Security
system.
Password for Specifies the password for the 4–16 characters Feature Manual
Message Manager Message Manager for accessing the (A–Z, a–z, 1–9) References
(Message Client) Unified Messaging system from the 3.1.2.7 System
messaging client. Security

Subscriber
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Minimum Password Specifies the minimum length (number of digits) 0–16
Length (0-16 digits) of mailbox passwords.
Enable Login Failure Specifies whether the system disconnects a call Disable,
Disconnection when the subscriber enters an invalid password Enable
n times. (n=the value specified under Login
Failures before Disconnection (1-99 times))

656 PC Programming Manual

 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Login Failures before Specifies the number of times an invalid 1–99 times
Disconnection (1-99 password can be entered before the system
times) disconnects the call. In order to use this feature,
Enable Login Failure Disconnection must be
set to "Enable".
Default Password for Specifies whether the default password is Disable, Feature
New Mailboxes assigned to new mailboxes automatically when Enable Manual
they are created. References
3.1.2.7
System
Security
Default Password— Select this option to specify a fixed password for Max. 16
Fix digit (which length all new mailboxes. The number of digits in the digits
is minimum password password must be equal or greater than the
length) value specified in Minimum Password Length
(0-16 digits).
Default Password— Select this option to specify default mailbox 1 digit: 0–9
Prefix (1 or 2 digits) + passwords using a prefix pattern. The value 2 digits: 00–
Mailbox No entered here will be combined with the mailbox 99
number to become the default password. For
example, if "55" is entered here, and then
mailbox 101 is created, its default password will
be "55101". 1 digit or 2 digits can be used as
the prefix.

PC Programming Manual 657

26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security

658 PC Programming Manual

 Section 27
Network Service

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Network Service menu of the Setup screen of
Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 659

27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports

27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports

Basic Settings
Name Description Value Range Links
LAN Setting—DHCP Specifies the port number of the 68, 1024–65535
Port Number DHCP client. This parameter is only
available for entering values when
Obtain an IP address
automatically is selected.
LAN Setting—Obtain Specifies whether to enable the Obtain an IP address Feature
an IP address DHCP server to assign IP address automatically, Use the Manual
automatically/Use the information automatically to the following IP address References
following IP address mother board, or to enter the
5.6.6 Dynamic
information manually.
Host
Configuration
Protocol
(DHCP)
Assignment
LAN Setting—IP Specifies the IP address of the 1.0.0.1–
Address mother board. This parameter is 223.255.255.254
only available for entering values
when Use the following IP
address is selected.
LAN Setting—MAC Indicates the MAC address of the 00:00:00:00:00:00–
Address mother board (reference only). FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF
LAN Setting—Subnet Specifies the network mask address 0–255.0–255.0–255.0–
Mask of the mother board. This parameter 255 (except 0.0.0.0 and
is only available for entering values 255.255.255.255)
when Use the following IP
address is selected.
LAN Setting—Default Specifies the IP address of the 1.0.0.1–
Gateway default gateway for the network. 223.255.255.254
This parameter is only available for
entering values when Use the
following IP address is selected.
DNS Setting—Port Specifies the port number of the 53, 1024–65535
Number DNS server. This parameter is only
available for entering values when
Obtain DNS server address
automatically is selected.

660 PC Programming Manual

 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports

Name Description Value Range Links

DNS Setting—Obtain Specifies whether to enable the Obtain DNS server Feature
DNS server address DHCP server to assign DNS server address automatically, Manual
automatically/Use the address information automatically to Use the following DNS References
following DNS server the mother board, or to enter the server address
5.6.6 Dynamic
address information manually.
Host
Configuration
Protocol
(DHCP)
Assignment
DNS Setting— Specifies the preferred IP address 1.0.0.0–
Preferred DNS IP for the DNS server. This parameter 223.255.255.255
Address is only available for entering values
when Use the following DNS
server address is selected.
DNS Setting— Specifies the alternative IP address 1.0.0.0–
Alternative DNS IP for the DNS server. This parameter 223.255.255.255
Address is only available for entering values
when Use the following DNS
server address is selected.
DSP IP Setting— Specifies whether the DHCP server Obtain DSP IP address
Obtain DSP IP assigns IP address information automatically, Use the
address automatically to the DSP card(s), or following DSP IP
automatically/Use the to enter the information manually. address
following DSP IP
address
DSP IP Setting— Specifies the IP address of the DSP 1.0.0.1–
DSP Card-1/DSP card. This parameter is only 223.255.255.254
Card-2—IP Address available for entering values when
Use the following DSP IP address
is selected.
DSP IP Setting— Indicates the MAC address of the 00:00:00:00:00:00–
DSP Card-1/DSP DSP card (reference only). FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF
Card-2—MAC
Address

Advanced Settings
Name Description Value Range Links
LAN Port—Speed Specifies the connection mode of the Auto: Automatic mode selection
& Duplex main port. The connection is made in 100M-Full: 100 Mbps/full duplex
100Mbps/half duplex when Auto 100M-Half: 100 Mbps/half duplex
negotiation fails. 10M-Full: 10 Mbps/full duplex
10M-Half: 10 Mbps/half duplex
LAN Port—MDI/ Specifies the cable type connected to Auto, MDI, MDIX
MDIX the LAN port.

PC Programming Manual 661

27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports

Reference
The items displayed in this tab are the settings obtained from a DHCP server by the DHCP client of the
PBX. They are for reference only.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Assigned IP Address—IP Indicates the assigned IP address of the mother
Address board (reference only).
Assigned IP Address—MAC Indicates the MAC address of the mother board
Address (reference only).
Assigned IP Address—Subnet Indicates the network mask address of the mother
Mask board (reference only).
Assigned IP Address—Default Indicates the assigned IP address of the default
Gateway gateway for the network (reference only).
DSP Card-1/DSP Card-2—IP Indicates the IP address assigned for an installed
Address optional DSP card (reference only).
DSP Card-1/DSP Card-2— Indicates the MAC address of the DSP card
MAC Address (reference only).
DSP Card-1/DSP Card-2— Indicates the Subnet Mask address of the DSP card
Subnet Mask (reference only).
DSP Card-1/DSP Card-2— Indicates the Default Gateway address of the DSP
Default Gateway card (reference only).

662 PC Programming Manual

 27.2 Network Service—[2] Server Feature

27.2 Network Service—[2] Server Feature

27.2.1 Network Service—[2-1] Server Feature—DHCP
Settings for the DHCP Server can be programmed.

DHCP Server
Name Description Value Range Links
DHCP Server Specifies if the DHCP server functions of the PBX are Disable, Enable
enabled or not.
Port Number Specifies the port number used for the DHCP server. 67, 1024–65535

IP address auto assignment

Name Description Value Range Links
Starting IP address Specifies the starting IP address for the 1.0.0.0–
assignable range of IP addresses. 223.255.255.255
Ending IP address Specifies the ending IP address for the 1.0.0.0–
assignable range of IP addresses. 223.255.255.255
Lease interval (h) Specifies the duration in hours of the DHCP 1–168 (hours)
allocation lease. Setting "0" specifies an
unlimited lease duration.
Auto assignment Up to 16 IP Addresses can be specified that will 1.0.0.0–
exclusions not be automatically assigned. 223.255.255.255

IP Address Static Assignment

Name Description Value Range Links
MAC Specifies the MAC addresses of the MAC 00:00:00:00:00:00–
Address address/IP address pairs to be subject to static FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF
DHCP allocation.
IP Address Specifies the IP addresses of the MAC address/IP 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
address pairs to be subject to static DHCP
allocation.

IP Address Assignment List

Name Description Value Range Links
MAC Address Specifies MAC addresses currently 00:00:00:00:00:00–
specified by the system. FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF
IP Address Specifies IP addresses currently assigned 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
by the system.
Remaining lease Specifies the remaining lease time for the 1–85777 s
time MAC address/IP address pair.

27.2.2 Network Service—[2-2] Server Feature—FTP

Settings for FTP server connections can be programmed.

PC Programming Manual 663

27.2.3 Network Service—[2-4] Server Feature—HTTP

Name Description Value Range Links

Connection Control Specifies the port number for connecting 21, 990, 1024–65535
—Control Port to the PBX’s FTP server.
number
Data Transfer Port Specifies the minimum port number for 1024–65535
—Port number FTP data transfer.
(Minimum)
Data Transfer Port Specifies the maximum port number for 1024–65535
—Port number FTP data transfer.
(Maximum)
User Information— Specifies the user name for the PBX’s Max. 24 characters (a–z, 0–
User Name FTP server authentication. 9, [hyphen], [underscore])

Note Note
Be sure to change the user name from The first character must
its initial, default value. Also, for be a letter (a–z).
security reasons, change the user
name regularly.
User Information— Specifies the password for the PBX’s FTP Max. 24 characters (A–Z, a–
Password server authentication. z, 0–9, [hyphen],
[underscore])
Note
Be sure to change the password from Note
its initial, default value. Also, for The first character must
security reasons, change the be a letter or number.
password regularly.

27.2.3 Network Service—[2-4] Server Feature—HTTP

HTTP server settings can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
HTTP (LAN)—Port Specifies the port number for HTTP connections using 80, 1024–65535
Number the LAN ports. This port is used for accessing the
PBX for Web Maintenance Console programming.
HTTPs (LAN)— Enables or disables HTTPs for connections to the Disable, Enable
HTTPs server LAN ports using the PBX’s HTTP server function.
HTTPs (LAN)— Specifies the port number for HTTPs connections. 443, 1024–65535
Port Number This port is used for accessing the PBX for Web
Maintenance Console programming when using a
TLS connection.
Automatic logout Specifies the amount of time required to elapse before 5, 10, 30, 60×n
Timer (min) logging off an inactive connection from the HTTP (n=1–24)
server. (minutes)

27.2.4 Network Service—[2-5] Server Feature—NTP

NTP server settings for use with KX-UT series SIP phones can be programmed.

664 PC Programming Manual

 27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP

Value
Name Description Links
Range
NTP Enables or disables NTP service with the Disable, PC Programming Manual
server PBX’s NTP server for connected KX-UT Enable References
series SIP phones. 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2]
When this feature is enabled, the PBX System—Date & Time—SNTP /
will report to connected KX-UT series Daylight Saving—SNTP—SNTP Server
SIP phones the information obtained —IP Address
from the SNTP server specified in 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2]
10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP /
System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—SNTP—SNTP Server
Daylight Saving. —Port Number
If this feature is disabled, connected 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2]
KX-UT series SIP phones will use their System—Date & Time—SNTP /
individually programmed time settings. Daylight Saving—SNTP—Time Zone—
Time Zone

27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP

Name Description Value Range Links
Mail Receiving—SMTP Specifies if SMTP authentication is Enable, Disable
Authentication enabled for mail receiving.
Mail Receiving—SMTP over Specifies whether mail receiving uses Enable, Disable
TLS Transport Layer Security for SMTP.
Mail Receiving—Receive Port Specifies the receiving port number 25, 465, 587,
number (SMTPs) when using SMTPs. 1024–65535
Mail Receiving—Receive Port Specifies the receiving port number 25, 465, 587,
number (SMTP) when using SMTP. 1024–65535

27.2.6 Network Service—[2-7] Server Feature—IMAP4

Settings for IMAP4 server functions for the PBX can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
IMAP4—IMAP4 server Specifies whether to enable the IMAP4 server Enable, Disable
functions of the PBX.
IMAP4—Port Number Specifies a port number for the IMAP server. 143, 1024–
The default value is 143. 65535
IMAP4 over TLS—IMAP4 Specifies whether to enable TLS encryption for Enable, Disable
over TLS the IMAP4 server functions of the PBX.
IMAP4 over TLS—Port Specifies a port number for the IMAP server 993, 1024–
Number when using TLS encryption. The default value 65535
is 993.
CAPABILITY command— Specifies whether the IMAP4 server will Enable, Disable
Supporting IDLE response respond to IDLE commands sent by clients.
Authenticated Connection Specifies the amount of time of no activity that 1, 2, 3, 5, 10,
Timeout—Authenticated is required before an authenticated connection 15, 20, 25, 30,
Connection Timeout (min) to the IMAP4 server will be disconnected. 60 (min)

PC Programming Manual 665

27.3 Network Service—[3] Client Feature

27.3 Network Service—[3] Client Feature

27.3.1 Network Service—[3-1] Client Feature—FTP
FTP client connection settings can be programmed. Up to 5 FTP sites can be specified for connections.

Connection 1—Connection 5
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Specifies the name of the connection to Max. 64 characters
Name use for programming in other items.
IP Address Specifies the IP address of the FTP 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
site. Click the IP Address radio button
when this is used.
Name Specifies the name of the FTP site. FTP site name (max. 253
Click the Name radio button when this characters)
is used.
Server Port Specifies the port number used to 21, 990, 1024–65535
Number connect to the FTP site.
User name Specifies the user name required to log Max. 24 characters (a–z, 0–9, $,
in to the FTP site. [hyphen], [underscore])

Note
• The first character must be a
letter or number.
• $ may only be used as the
final character.
Password Specifies the password for the user Max. 24 characters (A–Z, a–z, 0–9,
name required to log in to the FTP site. =, [hyphen], [underscore])

Note
The first character must be a
letter, number, or =.
Protocol Specifies the communication protocol FTP, FTPS (Explicit), FTPS (Implicit)
for the FTP connection.

27.3.2 Network Service—[3-2] Client Feature—Syslog

Settings can be programmed for a Syslog client connection.
Name Description Value Range Links
Remote Syslog Specifies whether an external Syslog Enable, Disable
server will be used with the PBX.
Remote Syslog Specifies the IP address or host name 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 (IP
server—IP of the external Syslog server. address), Max. 253 characters
Address / Host (host name)
name

666 PC Programming Manual

 27.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent

Name Description Value Range Links

Port Specifies the connection port for the 514, 1024–65535
remote Syslog server.

27.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent

Using SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol), it is possible for a PC assigned as an SNMP
manager to manage and receive PBX system status information, such as alarm information and general
system activity. The related PBX system settings can be programmed.
This option is only available at Installer level.
Name Description Value Range Links
SNMP agent Enables the PBX to use its Disable, Enable Feature Manual
SNMP agent function. References
5.6.5 Simple Network
Management Protocol
(SNMP) System Monitor
SNMP version Specifies the version of the SNMP V1, SNMP Feature Manual
SNMP protocol to use. V2c References
5.6.5 Simple Network
Management Protocol
(SNMP) System Monitor
SNMP manager Specifies the SNMP 161, 1024–65535 Feature Manual
port manager port. References
5.6.5 Simple Network
Management Protocol
(SNMP) System Monitor
MIB info— Specifies the name and Max. 255 characters Feature Manual
SysContact contact information of the References
system administrator. 5.6.5 Simple Network
Management Protocol
(SNMP) System Monitor
MIB info— Specifies the administrative Max. 255 characters Feature Manual
SysName name for the system. References
5.6.5 Simple Network
Management Protocol
(SNMP) System Monitor
MIB info— Specifies the physical Max. 255 characters Feature Manual
SysLocation location for the system. References
5.6.5 Simple Network
Management Protocol
(SNMP) System Monitor

SNMP Manager #1 / SNMP Manager #2

It is possible to assign up to two PCs as SNMP managers. The settings related to SNMP manager activity
can be programmed for each SNMP manager, indicated as No.1 and No.2 on the screen.
This option is only available at Installer level.

PC Programming Manual 667

27.3.4 Network Service—[3-4] Client Feature—HTTP

Name Description Value Range Links

IP Address Specifies the IP address of 1.0.0.0– Feature Manual
an SNMP manager. Click the 223.255.255.255 References
button next to IP Address 5.6.5 Simple Network
and enter the address. Management Protocol
(SNMP) System Monitor
Host name Specifies the host name of Max. 253 characters Feature Manual
an SNMP manager. Click the (host name) References
button next to Host Name 5.6.5 Simple Network
and enter a name. Management Protocol
(SNMP) System Monitor
Trap port Specifies a port number 162, 1024–65535 Feature Manual
used to send trap messages References
from the agent to an SNMP 5.6.5 Simple Network
manager. Management Protocol
(SNMP) System Monitor
Community name Specifies a community name Max. 32 characters Feature Manual
of an SNMP manager. References
5.6.5 Simple Network
Management Protocol
(SNMP) System Monitor
TRAP filtering— Selects whether the PBX Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Standard TRAP sends standard trap References
messages to an SNMP 5.6.5 Simple Network
manager or not. Management Protocol
(SNMP) System Monitor
TRAP filtering— Selects whether the PBX Disable, Enable Feature Manual
enterpriseSpecific sends Major Alarm trap References
(Major) messages to an SNMP 5.6.5 Simple Network
manager or not. Management Protocol
(SNMP) System Monitor
TRAP filtering— Selects whether the PBX Disable, Enable Feature Manual
enterpriseSpecific sends Minor Alarm trap References
(Minor) messages to an SNMP 5.6.5 Simple Network
manager or not. Management Protocol
(SNMP) System Monitor

27.3.4 Network Service—[3-4] Client Feature—HTTP

Proxy server settings for the HTTP client can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
Proxy Connection Selects whether to enable Disable, Enable
connection to a proxy server.
Proxy Address Selects the type of proxy IP Address, Name
address.

668 PC Programming Manual

 27.3.5 Network Service—[3-5] Client Feature—Remote Maintenance

Name Description Value Range Links

Proxy Address—IP Specifies the IP address of Valid IP address
Address the proxy server.
Proxy Address— Specifies the host name of Valid host name
Name the proxy server.
Port Number Specifies the port number for 1–65535
the proxy connection.
Authentication Selects whether to enable Disable, Enable
authentication to the proxy
server.
Authentication Specifies the user name for Max. 64 characters
User name authentication for the proxy
connection.
Authentication Specifies the password for Max. 64 characters
Password authentication for the proxy
connection.

27.3.5 Network Service—[3-5] Client Feature—Remote

Maintenance
Remote maintenance settings can be programmed.

PC Programming Manual 669

27.3.5 Network Service—[3-5] Client Feature—Remote Maintenance

Name Description Value Range Links

Remote Displays the connection No Connect: In
Maintenance status with the remote standby mode
Server Connection maintenance server. Connecting (try N
Status times)*1: Attempting
connection (N times)
Connected:
Connection is
normal
Failed
(Authentication
Error): Connection
authentication failed
in client certificate
authentication
system
Failed (Password
Error): Connection
authentication failed
in password
authentication
system
Failed (Proxy
Error): Proxy server
connection failed
Disconnected:
Connection is
stopped
Unexpected Error:
Other, unexpected
error
Update Client Install a client certificate file
Certification—File for client certification.
for Client
1. Click Browse to open
Certification
the file dialogue.
2. Select a client
certificate file.
3. Click Import to import
the file.
Update Client Click Export to create a
Certification—CSR CSR file for client
file for Client certification.
Certification
Remote Access Displays whether permission Selected: Accepted
Acceptance— for remote access is granted Not selected: Not
INSTALLER for the INSTALLER account. Accepted

*1 "(try N times)" is displayed only from the second attempted connection.

670 PC Programming Manual

 27.3.6 Network Service—[3-6] Client Feature—SMTP

27.3.6 Network Service—[3-6] Client Feature—SMTP

Settings for SMTP for sending e-mail for PBX functions can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
Mail sender information Specifies the name to be used as the Max. 64 characters
name sender of the e-mails from the PBX.
Mail address Specifies the sending e-mail address for Max. 128 characters
messages sent from the PBX. This
address, for example, could be set as
the e-mail address of an administrator.
SMTP server for relay— Specifies the IP address of the SMTP 1.0.0.0–
SMTP server address—IP server to be used to send e-mails. 223.255.255.255
Address
SMTP server for relay— Specifies the host name of the SMTP Max. 128 characters
SMTP server address— server to be used to send e-mails.
Name
SMTP server for relay— Specifies the port number of the SMTP 1-65535
SMTP server Port number server to be used to send e-mails.
SMTP server for relay— Specifies whether the SMTP server uses Enable, Disable
SMTP over TLS Transport Layer Security.
Note
When Enable is
selected, the
encryption method
used is
STARTTLS.
SMTP Authentication— Specifies whether authentication on the Enable, Disable
SMTP Authentication SMTP server is enabled.
SMTP Authentication— Specifies the user name required to Max. 64 characters
User Name access the SMTP server.
SMTP Authentication— Specifies the password required to Max. 64 characters
Password access the SMTP server.
POP Before SMTP—POP Specifies whether POP before SMTP is Enable, Disable
before SMTP enabled on the SMTP server.
POP Before SMTP—POP Specifies the IP address of the POP 1.0.0.0–
server address—IP server when POP before SMTP is 223.255.255.255
Address enabled.
POP Before SMTP—POP Specifies the host name of the POP Max. 128 characters
server address—Name server when POP before SMTP is
enabled.
POP Before SMTP—POP Specifies the port number of the POP 1-65535
server Port number server when POP before SMTP is
enabled.
POP Before SMTP—User Specifies the user name for the POP Max. 64 characters
Name server when POP before SMTP is
enabled.

PC Programming Manual 671

27.3.6 Network Service—[3-6] Client Feature—SMTP

Name Description Value Range Links

POP Before SMTP— Specifies the password for the POP Max. 64 characters
Password server when POP before SMTP is
enabled.

672 PC Programming Manual

 27.4 Network Service—[4] Other

27.4 Network Service—[4] Other

27.4.1 Network Service—[4-1] Other—Security
Network security settings can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
ICMP Echo Reply—LAN Specifies if the LAN port will send ICMP Enable, Disable
Port echo-replies to incoming ICMP echo-
requests.
ICMP Echo Reply—Log Specifies if the PBX logs ICMP echo- Enable, Disable
Output replies.
TLS—Encryption Suite Specifies the method of encryption AES256-SHA, DES-
used for TLS. CBC3-SHA, AES128-
SHA, DES-CBC-SHA,
AES128-SHA2, AES256-
SHA2

27.4.2 Network Service—[4-2] Other—NAS

NAS settings can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
NAS Status Displays/changes the connection Connected, Disconnected
status of the NAS. To change the connection status of
the NAS, perform the following:
• Click Disconnect to set the
NAS to disconnect status.
• Click Connect to set the NAS to
connect status.
NAS Setting— Specifies the communication NFS, CIFS
Protocol protocol for the NAS connection.
NAS Setting—NAS Specifies the IP address of the 1.0.0.1–223.255.255.254
Address—IP NAS.
Address
NAS Setting—NAS Specifies the Name of the NAS. Max. 253 characters
Address—Name
NAS Setting—Port Specifies the NAS using port 445, 1024–65535
No. number.
NAS Setting—Mount Specifies the NAS mount directory. Max. 128 characters (multi-byte
directory characters allowed)
CIFS Setting—User Specifies the NAS connection user Max. 24 characters (multi-byte
Name name when NAS Setting— characters allowed)
Protocol is set to CIFS.
CIFS Setting— Specifies the NAS connection Max. 24 characters (multi-byte
Password password when NAS Setting— characters allowed)
Protocol is set to CIFS.

PC Programming Manual 673

27.4.2 Network Service—[4-2] Other—NAS

674 PC Programming Manual

 Section 28
Appendix

PC Programming Manual 675

28.1 Revision History

28.1 Revision History

28.1.1 PFMPR Software File Version 004.1xxxx
New Contents
• 6.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration
• 7.4.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—Air Sync Group
• 7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—LAN Sync Group
• 7.4.9 Utility—Monitor/Trace—TCP Trace
• 7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information
• 8.4.1 Users—Call Management—Group Monitor—Options—Highlighted Display Settings—Full Screen
Display (pixels)
• 8.4.3 Users—Call Management—ACD Scheduled Export
• 8.4.4 Users—Call Management—ACD Export History
• 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-IPCS—CS Repeater Mode
• 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPCS—Main—Channel expansion
• 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPCS—Main—LAN Sync Group
No.
• 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPCS—Option—Announce Mode
• 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPCS—Remote Place
• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Main—Line Coding
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Main—Frame Sequence
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting—Loopback
Test started by Network
• 9.36 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option—New Card Installation—ISDN Standard Mode for
PRI23 Card
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Call Pickup Group Monitor—LCD Display
Duration (s)
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—CF (MSN)
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4—Display Information from Mobile
Extension (MEX)—when using Automatic Walking COS
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 5—ISDN Option—Calling Party Name
Presentation to PRI23
• 11.3.1 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group—All Setting—Main—Call Pickup Group
Monitor Feature
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—
Miscellaneous—Status of FWD for Virtual PS
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—Call
Pickup Group Monitoring
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—FWD / DND—
Remote FWD COS

676 PC Programming Manual

 28.1.1 PFMPR Software File Version 004.1xxxx

• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—FWD / DND—

Remote FWD COS
• 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table
• 19.3.2 PBX Configuration—[11-3-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Synchronisation
• 19.3.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Sync Group Setting

Changed Contents
• Introduction
• 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console
• 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode
• 2.1.2 Access Levels
• 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
• 3.1 Home Screen
• 4.1.3 Status—Equipment Status—PS Information
• 5.1 System Control—Program Update
• 5.1.3 System Control—Program Update—Plug and Update
• 5.2.1 System Control—MOH—Install
• 6.4 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group
• 6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup
• 6.14 Tool—UT Option Setting
• 7.1.1 Utility—Diagnosis—Card Diagnosis
• 7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log
• 7.4.1 Utility—Monitor/Trace—ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace
• 7.5.2 Utility—Report—IP Extension Statistical Information
• 7.6 Utility—Activation Key Installation
• 7.7.1 Utility—Email Notification—Alert
• 8.4.2 Users—Call Management—ACD Report
• 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot
• 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—Main
• 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—Port Number
• 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—Media Relay
• 9.2.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Slot Summary—Physical Shelf
• 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status
• 9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Port Type View
• 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW—Main
• 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW—Register
• 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW—Option
• 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW—Called Party
• 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW—Voice/FAX

PC Programming Manual 677

28.1.2 PFMPR Software File Version 004.2xxxx

• 9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-IPEXT

• 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT—Option
• 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-IPCS
• 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPCS—Main
• 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
• 9.36 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option
• 9.37 PBX Configuration—[1-4] Configuration—Clock Priority
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 1
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 2
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 3
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 9
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 2
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
• 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console
• 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission
• 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL
• 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—CLI for DIL
• 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—DDI / DID / TIE / MSN
• 19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation
• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/
Personal Custom Serv
• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Call Transfer
• 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports—Advanced Settings
• 27.2.2 Network Service—[2-2] Server Feature—FTP
• 27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP

28.1.2 PFMPR Software File Version 004.2xxxx

New Contents
• 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
– Use Quick Dial for CO rerouting during "Break" Mode.
– Use quick dial for rerouting to public CO when TIE line does not work.
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous—Options—
Call Log for Built-in ACD Report—ICD Group Unanswered Call Log

678 PC Programming Manual

 28.1.3 PFMPR Software File Version 004.3xxxx

Changed Contents
• 5.3 System Control—System Reset
• 8.4.2 Users—Call Management—ACD Report—Call—Call—View Report
• 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status—Activated Feature
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—Telephone
Type
• 15.3 PBX Configuration—[7-3] TRS—Special Carrier

28.1.3 PFMPR Software File Version 004.3xxxx

New Contents
• 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPGW—Ringback Tone to Outside
Caller

Changed Contents
• Introduction—NOTES
• 7.7.1 Utility—Email Notification—Alert
• 8.4.1 Users—Call Management—Group Monitor—Start Monitor
• 8.4.2 Users—Call Management—ACD Report—Group
• 8.4.2 Users—Call Management—ACD Report—Agent
• 8.4.2 Users—Call Management—ACD Report—Call
• 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—Media Relay—SIP
Extension / UT Extension—NAT - SIP Proxy Server Port No.
• 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—SIP Extension—Setting
parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP Proxy Server Port No.
• 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status
• 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status—Activated Feature
• 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-UTEXT—Main—Echo
Cancellation Ability
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—SIP Refer(Blind)
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

28.1.4 PFMPR Software File Version 004.4xxxx

Changed Contents
• 8.4.2 Users—Call Management—ACD Report—Group—Group—View Report
• 8.4.2 Users—Call Management—ACD Report—Agent—Agent—View Report
• 9.4.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—VoIP Property—VoIP (Trunk) Setting
– Account Setting—User Name (64 characters)
– Account Setting—Authentication ID (64 characters)
– Account Setting—Authentication Password (32 characters)
• 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW—Account

PC Programming Manual 679

28.1.5 PFMPR Software File Version 004.6xxxx

– User Name
– Authentication ID
– Authentication Password
• 9.38.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting
– Services—VoIP (G.711)
– Services—Unified message
– Services—Free resources (G.711)
• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters—Telephone
Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Dial Number [0-9 * # T X , ;]
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Dialling Parameters/MSW Notification
—Message Waiting Notification—System Callback No. (Up to 32 digits)

28.1.5 PFMPR Software File Version 004.6xxxx

New Contents
• 6.17 Tool—P-SIP Option
• 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site
– Port Number—TLS Port No. for SIP Extension Server
– Port Number—FOS Interface Port Number
– Media Relay—SIP Extension / UT Extension—NAT - SIP TLS Server Port No.
– SIP Extension—SIP-TLS
• 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT
– Forced De-registration
– Main—SIP Phone Type
– Remote Place (Location / P2P)—Panasonic SIP Phone only
• 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table
– Holiday Table—Start Time
– Holiday Table—End Time
– Holiday Table—Retain Holiday
• 27.3.4 Network Service—[3-4] Client Feature—HTTP
• 27.3.5 Network Service—[3-5] Client Feature—Remote Maintenance

Changed Contents
• 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode—Uploading Programmed Settings to the PBX
• 6.1.2 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to NAS
• 7.7.1 Utility—Email Notification—Alert
• 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User—Contact
• 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User—Unified Message—Mailbox Password (Message Client)
• 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site
– Port Number—CTI Port Number

680 PC Programming Manual

 28.1.6 PFMPR Software File Version 006.0xxxx

– Port Number—Built-in Communication Assistant Server

– Media Relay—SIP Extension / UT Extension—NAT - SIP Proxy Server Port No.
• 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status
• 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT
– Main—Extension Number (SIP Username)
– Option—Extension Number (SIP Username)
– Remote Place (Location / P2P)—Extension Number (SIP Username)
– FAX/T.38—Extension Number (SIP Username)
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 5—SLT—Message Waiting Lamp
Pattern
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8—SLT
MW Mode
• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters—Mailbox Password
(Message Client)
• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters—E-mail/Text
Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—E-mail Address
• 23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service
• 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security—Manager
– Password for System Manager (Message Client)
– Password for Message Manager (Message Client)
• 27.4.1 Network Service—[4-1] Other—Security—TLS—Encryption Suite

28.1.6 PFMPR Software File Version 006.0xxxx

New Contents
• 27.3.6 Network Service—[3-6] Client Feature—SMTP

Changed Contents
• Introduction
• 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console
• 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode
• 7.1.1 Utility—Diagnosis—Card Diagnosis
• 7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer PBX to PC
• 8.4 Users—Call Management
• 8.4.1 Users—Call Management—Group Monitor
• 8.4.2 Users—Call Management—ACD Report
• 8.4.3 Users—Call Management—ACD Scheduled Export
• 8.4.4 Users—Call Management—ACD Export History
• 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status
• 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—Extension Type
• 11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan

PC Programming Manual 681

28.1.7 PFMPR Software File Version 007.xxxxx

• 11.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan—Auto Assign

• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
• 11.5.4 PBX Configuration–[3-5-4] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—ACD Supervisor
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge
• 20.1.3 UM Configuration—[1-3] Mailbox Settings—Auto Configuration
• 27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—SMTP
• Feature Programming References—Supervisory Feature (ACD)

28.1.7 PFMPR Software File Version 007.xxxxx

Changed Contents
• 5.1 System Control—Program Update
• 5.4 System Control—System Shutdown
• 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site
• 9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-SIPGW
• 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW
• 9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-IPEXT
• 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT
• 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

682 PC Programming Manual

Feature Programming References

PC Programming Manual 683

Feature Programming References

Absent Message
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Absent Message Set /
Cancel
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—Absent
Message
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—Absent
Message
• 14.5 PBX Configuration—[6-5] Feature—Absent Message

Feature Manual References

2.20.2 Absent Message

Account Code Entry

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Account Code Entry
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—Account
Code Mode

Feature Manual References

2.5.4.3 Account Code Entry

Advice of Charge (AOC)

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911,
3PTY

Feature Manual References

4.1.2.3 Advice of Charge (AOC)

Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Automatic Callback
Busy Cancel
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature—Automatic
Callback Busy

Feature Manual References

2.10.1 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)

Automatic Extension Release

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone
– Dial—Extension First Digit (s)
– Dial—Extension Inter-digit (s)
– Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Handset (s)
– Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free (s)

Feature Manual References

684 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

2.5.2 Automatic Extension Release

Automatic Fax Transfer

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—DISA—Intercept Timer—Day (s), Lunch (s),
Break (s), Night (s)
• 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message—Fax Extension

Feature Manual References

2.16.2 Automatic Fax Transfer

Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

• 6.6 Tool—Import
– ARS - Leading Digit
– ARS - Except Code
– ARS - Routing Plan
• 6.7 Tool—Export
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial—
Extension Inter-digit (s)
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 3—Dial Tone—Dial Tone for ARS
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—ARS
Itemised Code
• 12.1.7 PBX Configuration—[4-1-7] Extension—Wired Extension—CLIP ID Table
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—ARS
Itemised Code
• 12.2.5 PBX Configuration—[4-2-5] Extension—Portable Station—CLIP ID Table
• 14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code—Itemised Billing Code for ARS
• 16 PBX Configuration—[8] ARS
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main—SMDR Options—Option—ARS Dial

Feature Manual References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Automatic Setup
• 6.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration
• 10.1.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-1] System—Date & Time—Date & Time Setting
• 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Automatic Time
Adjustment
• 10.1.2.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving
• 27.2.4 Network Service—[2-5] Server Feature—NTP—NTP server

Feature Manual References

5.5.5 Automatic Setup

PC Programming Manual 685

Feature Programming References

Background Music (BGM)

• 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– External BGM On / Off
– BGM Set / Cancel
• 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
– Internal MOH—MOH1-2 (Music On Hold 1-2)
• 13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—External Pager

Feature Manual References

2.30.1 Background Music (BGM)

Budget Management
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—Charge
Limit
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—Charge
Limit
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge—Charge—Charge Options—Action at Charge
Limit
• 14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code—Budget Management

Feature Manual References

2.7.2 Budget Management

Built-in FOS Interface

• 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—Port Number

Feature Manual References

2.23.4 Built-in FOS Interface

Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

• 6.16.1 Tool—SVM (Simplified Voice Message)—Delete All Recording
• 6.16.2 Tool—SVM (Simplified Voice Message)—Check Current Usage
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous
– SVM—Recording Time (s)
– SVM—Dial Tone Continuous Time (s)
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Simplified Voice
Message Access
• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Tone Detection
– DISA Tone Detection—Silence
– DISA Tone Detection—Continuous
– DISA Tone Detection—Cyclic
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 6—Display
Lock/SVM Lock

686 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

• 12.1.8 PBX Configuration—[4-1-8] Extension—Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message

• 12.2.6 PBX Configuration—[4-2-6] Extension—Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
• 13.3.3 PBX Configuration—[5-3-3] Optional Device—Voice Message—SVM

Feature Manual References

2.16.3 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

CA (Communication Assistant)
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CA
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 6 (CTI)
→ Built-in Communication Assistant—System status retry interval timer
→ Built-in Communication Assistant—System status retry counter
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 9—Built-in
Communication Assistant
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 9—Built-in
Communication Assistant

Feature Manual References

2.26.2 CA (Communication Assistant)

Call Billing for Guest Room

• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—Extension
PIN
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge—Checkout Billing—LCD for "Telephone"
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge—Charge
– Margin & Tax—Margin Rate for "Telephone" (%)
– Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Telephone" (%)
– Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Minibar" (%)
– Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Others" (%)

Feature Manual References

2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Call Charge Services

• 11.1.5 PBX Configuration—[3-1-5] Group—Trunk Group—Charge Rate
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Type
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge—Charge
– Margin & Tax—Margin Rate for "Telephone" (%)
– Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Telephone" (%)
– Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point
– Charge Options—Currency
– Charge Options—Currency Display Position

PC Programming Manual 687

Feature Programming References

– Charge Options—Action at Charge Limit

– Charge Options—Meter Start on Answer Detection

Feature Manual References

2.22.3 Call Charge Services

Call Distribution Port Group

• 9.11.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW—Hunt Pattern—Hunt
Pattern 1–16—Leading Number
• 9.11.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW—Hunt Pattern—Hunt
Pattern 1–16—Call Distribution Port Group—1st–16th
• 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPGW—Call Distribution Port
Group

Feature Manual References

4.3.2.3 Call Distribution Port Group

Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP)

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—ISDN-FWD (MSN) Set /
Cancel / Confirm
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—CF (MSN)

Feature Manual References

4.1.2.4 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP)

Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911,
3PTY
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—ISDN-FWD (MSN) Set /
Cancel / Confirm
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—CF (MSN)

Feature Manual References

4.1.2.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)

Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911,
3PTY

Feature Manual References

4.3.4.3 Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG

688 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Call Forwarding (FWD)

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—FWD No Answer Timer
Set
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings
– CO & SMDR—Call Forward to CO
– Manager—Group Forward Set
– Optional Device & Other Extensions—Remote Operation by Other Extension
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 1—PT Fwd / DND—Extension Status
of Mobile Integration (FWD NA to CO)
• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main
– CO-CO Duration Time (*60s)
– Extension-CO Duration Time (*60s)
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Group
Log / Group FWD
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous—Options—
2nd line LCD display information for ICD Group redirected call
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—FWD / DND
• 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—FWD / DND
• 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Manual References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Call Hold
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone
– Recall—Hold Recall (s)
– Recall—Disconnect after Recall (x60s)
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Call Hold / Call Hold Retrieve
– Call Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Holding Extension Number
– Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Held CO Line Number
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
– Option 1—PT Operation—Automatic Hold by ICM / CO / ICD Group Key
– Option 1—PT Operation—Hold key mode
– Option 5—SLT—SLT Hold Mode

Feature Manual References

2.13.1 Call Hold

Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—ISDN Hold

PC Programming Manual 689

Feature Programming References

• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type

• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Type

Feature Manual References

4.1.2.6 Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN

Call Monitor
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature—Call Monitor
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Executive—Call Monitor
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Option 2—Data Mode
– Option 3—Executive Override Deny
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—
Executive Override Deny

Feature Manual References

2.10.3 Call Monitor

Call Park
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters
– Recall—Call Park Recall (s)
– Recall—Disconnect after Recall (x60s)
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Call Park / Call Park
Retrieve
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
– Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
– Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)

Feature Manual References

2.13.2 Call Park

Call Pickup
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Group Call Pickup
– Directed Call Pickup
– Call Pickup Deny Set / Cancel
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4
• 11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group

690 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—Call

Pickup Deny
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—Call
Pickup Deny

Feature Manual References

2.4.3 Call Pickup

Call Transfer
• 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM—BGM and Music on Hold—Sound on Transfer
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Recall—
Transfer Recall (s)
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings
– CO & SMDR—Transfer to CO
– Assistant—Transfer to busy Extension w/o BSS Operation
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4—DSS Key—Automatic Transfer for
Extension Call
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—
Transfer Recall Destination
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—Transfer
Recall Destination

Feature Manual References

2.12.1 Call Transfer

Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911,
3PTY

Feature Manual References

4.1.2.7 Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN

Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911,
3PTY

Feature Manual References

4.3.4.4 Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG

PC Programming Manual 691

Feature Programming References

Call Waiting
• 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type—Caller ID—Caller ID
Signalling
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Manual Call Waiting for Extension Call
– Automatic Call Waiting
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 5—Call Waiting—Automatic Call
Waiting for Extension Call
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Option 2—Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
– Option 2—Automatic C. Waiting
– Option 4—Call Waiting Tone Type
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
– Option 2—Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
– Option 2—Automatic C. Waiting
– Option 4—Call Waiting Tone Type

Feature Manual References

2.1.3.3 Call Waiting

Call Waiting Tone

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Caller ID—Visual Caller ID
Display (s)
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Option 2—Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
– Option 2—Automatic C. Waiting
– Option 4—Call Waiting Tone Type
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
– Option 2—Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
– Option 2—Automatic C. Waiting
– Option 4—Call Waiting Tone Type

Feature Manual References

2.10.4.2 Call Waiting Tone

692 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Caller ID
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous
– Caller ID—Waiting to receive (s)
– Caller ID—Visual Caller ID Display (s)
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4—Private Network—Public Call
through Private Network—Minimum Public Caller ID Digits
• 10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings
• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main—Caller ID Modification
Table
• 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8
– Extension Caller ID Sending
– Incoming Call Wait Timer for Extension Caller ID
• 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial

Feature Manual References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution

• 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial
– Name
– CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number
– CLI Destination
• 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—CLI for DIL—CLI Ring
for DIL—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—CLI Ring for DDI/DID—Day,
Lunch, Break, Night
• 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table—CLI Ring for MSN—Day, Lunch,
Break, Night

Feature Manual References

2.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution

Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection

• 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—CPC Signal Detection
Time—Outgoing, Incoming

Feature Manual References

2.11.9 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection

Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
– ISDN CO—Subscriber Number

PC Programming Manual 693

Feature Programming References

– Supplementary Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT,
CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
– CO Setting—Subscriber Number
– Supplementary Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT,
CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911, 3PTY
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– COLR Set / Cancel
– CLIR Set / Cancel
– Switch CLIP of CO Line / Extension
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4
– Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is transferred to CO (CLIP of Held Party)
– Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is forwarded to CO
– Send CLIP of Extension Caller—when call is forwarded to CO
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main—
CLIP on ICD Group Button
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Main—Extension Number
– CLIP—CLIP ID
– CLIP—CLIP on Extension/CO
– CLIP—CLIR
– CLIP—COLR
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
– CLIP—CLIP ID
– CLIP—CLIP on Extension/CO
– CLIP—CLIR
– CLIP—COLR
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Type

Feature Manual References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected Name

Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG
• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911,
3PTY
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– COLR Set / Cancel

694 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

– CLIR Set / Cancel

• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main
– Extension Number
– Extension Name
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main
– Extension Number
– Extension Name

Feature Manual References

4.3.4.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected Name
Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG

Centralised Voice Mail

• 9.36 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option—New Card Installation—ISDN Standard Mode for
PRI23 Card
• 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table—Enhanced QSIG
• 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission
– Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat
Counter
– Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat Timer
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main—Maintenance
– Error Log for Centralised VM—Network MSW Transmission (Counter)
– Error Log for Centralised VM—Network MSW Transmission (Buffer)

Feature Manual References

4.3.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail

Class of Service (COS)

• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS

Feature Manual References

5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)

Common Extension Numbering for 2 PBXs

• 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table

Feature Manual References

4.3.1.4 Common Extension Numbering for 2 PBXs

Common Extension Numbering for Multiple PBXs

• 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table
• 18.5 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous—Intercept—Routing to Operator -
No Destination (Destination is not programmed.)

PC Programming Manual 695

Feature Programming References

Feature Manual References

4.3.2.2 Common Extension Numbering for Multiple PBXs

Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—CCBS Option
– CCBS Type
– CCBS Delete Digits
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service
– COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911,
3PTY
– CCBS Type
– CCBS Delete Digits

Feature Manual References

4.1.2.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)

Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by QSIG

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911,
3PTY

Feature Manual References

4.3.4.5 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by QSIG

Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Dial Information (CTI)
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 6 (CTI)

Feature Manual References

2.26.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

Conference
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
– Unattended Conference—Recall Start Timer (x60s)
– Unattended Conference—Warning Tone Start Timer (s)
– Unattended Conference—Disconnect Timer (s)
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—Transfer to
CO
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 2—CO - CO Call Limitation—After
Conference

696 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 3

– Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-1 : Start Conference
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-2 : Finish Conference
– Echo Cancel—Conference
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 8—Conference Group—Maximum
Number of Speakers During a Conference Group Call
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Type

Feature Manual References

2.14.2 Conference

Conference Group Call

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Conference Group Call—
Ring Duration (s)
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Conference Group Call
Operation
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Miscellaneous—
Conference Group Call Operation
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 8—Conference Group—Maximum
Number of Speakers During a Conference Group Call
• 11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group
• 11.9.1 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group—Member List

Feature Manual References

2.15.1 Conference Group Call

Confirmation Tone
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 3
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 1 : Called by Voice
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-1 : Start Talking after Making Call / Call from DOORPHONE
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-2 : Start Talking after Answering Call
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-1 : Start Conference
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-2 : Finish Conference
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 5 : Hold

Feature Manual References

2.25.2 Confirmation Tone

Data Line Security

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Data Line Security Set /
Cancel

PC Programming Manual 697

Feature Programming References

• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2—Data

Mode

Feature Manual References

2.11.5 Data Line Security

Dial Tone
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 3
– Dial Tone—Distinctive Dial Tone
– Dial Tone—Dial Tone for Extension
– Dial Tone—Dial Tone for ARS

Feature Manual References

2.25.1 Dial Tone

Dial Tone Transfer

• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)

Feature Manual References

2.7.4 Dial Tone Transfer

Dial Type Selection

• 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
– Dialling Mode
– DTMF Width
– Pulse Speed

Feature Manual References

2.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection

Direct In Line (DIL)

• 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL
– DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
– Tenant Number
– UM Service Group No.
– VM Trunk Group No.

Feature Manual References

2.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)

698 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Incoming Call Inter-digit
Timer—DDI / DID (s)
• 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—DDI / DID / TIE / MSN
– Distribution Method
– DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Remove Digit
– DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Additional Dial
• 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

Feature Manual References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
– DISA—Delayed Answer Timer (s)
– DISA—Mute & OGM Start Timer after answering (s)
– DISA—No Dial Intercept Timer (s)
– DISA—2nd Dial Timer for AA (s)
– DISA—Intercept Timer—Day (s), Lunch (s), Break (s), Night (s)
– DISA—Disconnect Timer after Intercept (s)
– DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Counter
– DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Time (x60s)
– DISA—Progress Tone Continuation Time before Recording Message (s)
– DISA—Reorder Tone Duration (s)
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Extension PIN—Lock
Counter
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other
Extensions—Accept the Call from DISA
• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Tone Detection
– DISA Tone Detection—Silence
– DISA Tone Detection—Continuous
– DISA Tone Detection—Cyclic
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept
Destination—Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept
Destination—Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System
• 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message

Feature Manual References

2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

PC Programming Manual 699

Feature Programming References

Direct SIP Connection

• 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site
• 9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-SIPGW
• 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW

Feature Manual References

4.1.1.2 Direct SIP Connection

Display Information
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 5—PT Feature Access—No. 1–8
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 5
– Display Language
– Incoming Call Display
– Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 5
– Display Language
– Incoming Call Display
– Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge—Charge
– Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point
– Charge Options—Currency
– Charge Options—Currency Display Position
• 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings—CO Name

Feature Manual References

2.21.4 Display Information

Distribution Order
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous—Options—
ICD Group Distribution order

Feature Manual References

2.2.2.5 Distribution Order

Do Not Disturb (DND)

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Tone Length—
Busy Tone / DND Tone (s)
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Assistant—DND Override
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—FWD / DND

700 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

• 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—[4-1-2] Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND

• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—FWD / DND
• 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—[4-2-2] Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Manual References

2.3.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)

Door Open
• 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—DOORPHONE Card
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf—
Doorphone—Open Duration (s)
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Door Open
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other
Extensions—Door Unlock

Feature Manual References

2.18.2 Door Open

Doorphone Call
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
– Doorphone—Call Ring Duration (x10s)
– Doorphone—Call Duration (x10s)
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—DOORPHONE Call
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—TRS Level—Day,
Lunch, Break, Night
• 10.8.2 PBX Configuration—[2-8-2] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from DOORPHONE
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 3—Confirmation Tone—Tone 1 : Called
by Voice
• 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone

Feature Manual References

2.18.1 Doorphone Call

DSP Resource Reservation

• 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—DSP Conference—DSP
Conference Priority
• 9.38 PBX Configuration—[1-5] Configuration—DSP Resource

Feature Manual References

5.5.4.1 DSP Resource Reservation

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Assignment

• 27.2.1 Network Service—[2-1] Server Feature—DHCP

Feature Manual References

5.6.6 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Assignment

PC Programming Manual 701

Feature Programming References

E-mail Notification for Extension Users

• 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User
• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters—E-mail/Text
Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—E-mail Address
• 27.3.6 Network Service—[3-6] Client Feature—SMTP

Feature Manual References

5.4.1 E-mail Notification for Extension Users

E-mail Notification for Manager

• 7.5.4 Utility—Report—E-mail Report
• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—User Name
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—E-mail Address
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Only Urgent Messages
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Title Order
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Title String
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Callback Number
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Send Wait Time [0-120 min]
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Attach Voice File
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Use Mode
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—E-mail Option

Feature Manual References

5.4.4 E-mail Notification for Manager

E-mail Notification of System-level Events

• 5.1 System Control—Program Update
• 7.7 Utility—Email Notification
• 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User
• 27.3.6 Network Service—[3-6] Client Feature—SMTP

Feature Manual References

5.4.2 E-mail Notification of System-level Events

Emergency Call
• 15.4 PBX Configuration—[7-4] TRS—Emergency Dial

Feature Manual References

2.5.4.2 Emergency Call

Enhanced Walking Extension

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Walking Extension

702 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Feature Manual References

2.24.3.2 Enhanced Walking Extension

Executive Busy Override

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Executive Override
Deny Set / Cancel
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature—Executive Busy
Override
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Executive
– Executive Busy Override
– Executive Busy Override Deny
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 1—PT Operation—One-touch Busy
Override by SCO key
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—
Executive Override Deny
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—
Executive Override Deny

Feature Manual References

2.10.2 Executive Busy Override

Extension Dial Lock

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Extension Dial Lock Set / Cancel
– Remote Extension Dial Lock Off
– Remote Extension Dial Lock On
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—TRS Level on
Extension Lock

Feature Manual References

2.7.3 Extension Dial Lock

Extension Feature Clear

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Extension Feature
Clear
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 2
– Extension Clear—Call Waiting
– Extension Clear—Fwd/DND
– Extension Clear—Hot Line (Pick-up Dial)

Feature Manual References

2.24.2 Extension Feature Clear

PC Programming Manual 703

Feature Programming References

Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Extension PIN—Lock
Counter
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Extension PIN Set /
Cancel
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 1—PT LCD—Password / PIN Display
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—Extension
PIN
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—Extension
PIN

Feature Manual References

2.24.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)

External Feature Access (EFA)

• 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Flash Time
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—External Feature
Access
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 7—Flash
Mode during CO Conversation
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7—Flash
Mode during CO Conversation
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Type
• 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous—TRS Check after EFA

Feature Manual References

2.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)

External Relay Control

• 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—DOORPHONE Card
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—External Relay Access
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other
Extensions—External Relay Access
• 13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay

Feature Manual References

2.18.4 External Relay Control

External Sensor
• 9.34 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—DOORPHONE Card
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—External Sensor—Ring
Duration (s)
• 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others—External Sensor—
Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8

704 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

• 13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor

Feature Manual References

2.18.3 External Sensor

Flash/Recall/Terminate
• 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Disconnect Time
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 7—Flash
Mode during CO Conversation
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7—Flash
Mode during CO Conversation
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Type

Feature Manual References

2.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate

Flexible Buttons
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—PT Display—PT Last
Display Duration in Idle Mode (s)
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
• 12.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data
copy
• 12.1.5 PBX Configuration—[4-1-5] Extension—Wired Extension—PF Button
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Feature Manual References

2.21.2 Flexible Buttons

Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main
– Extension
– Features
– Other PBX Extension
• 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature

Feature Manual References

5.5.7 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering

Floating Extension
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Extension
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main
– Floating Extension Number
– Group Name

PC Programming Manual 705

Feature Programming References

• 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings—Floating Extension No.

• 11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group—Floating Extension Number
• 13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—External Pager—Floating Extension Number
• 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message—Floating
Extension Number

Feature Manual References

5.5.8 Floating Extension

FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension
– FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO
– FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from Extension
– Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension
– Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO
– Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from Extension
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 1
– PT Fwd / DND—Fwd LED
– PT Fwd / DND—DND LED
– PT Fwd / DND—Fwd/DND key mode when Idle
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—FWD / DND
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Both))
– Extension Number (for Group Fwd (External))
– Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Internal))
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—FWD / DND
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Both))
– Extension Number (for Group Fwd (External))
– Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Internal))

Feature Manual References

2.3.4 FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button

Group
• 11 PBX Configuration—[3] Group

Feature Manual References

5.1.2 Group

706 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Group Call Distribution

• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main—Line Hunting Order
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
– Main—Distribution Method
– Main—Call Waiting Distribution
– Miscellaneous—Extension No Answer Redirection Time
– Miscellaneous—Maximum No. of Busy Extension
• 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member
List—Delayed Ring
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
– Options—Wrap-up Timer based on
– Options—Longest Idle Distribution
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8—Wrap-
up Timer
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 8—Wrap-
up Timer

Feature Manual References

2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution

Hands-free Answerback
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Tone Length—
Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free (s)
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Assistant—Automatic
Answer (Caller)
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
– Option 1—PT Operation—Automatic Answer for Call from CO after
– Option 3—Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer
– Option 4—Transfer—Automatic Answer for Transferred Call
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Option 5—Automatic Answer for CO Call
– Option 6—Forced Automatic Answer

Feature Manual References

2.4.4 Hands-free Answerback

Hands-free Operation
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Tone Length—
Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free (s)
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4—LCS
Answer Mode

Feature Manual References

2.11.1 Hands-free Operation

PC Programming Manual 707

Feature Programming References

Headset Operation
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type

Feature Manual References

2.11.4 Headset Operation

Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Host PBX Access Code
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main—SMDR Options—Option—ARS Dial

Feature Manual References

2.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)

Hot Line
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial—Hot Line
(Pickup Dial) Start (s)
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Hot Line (Pickup Dial)
Program Set / Cancel
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2
– Pickup Dial Set
– Pickup Dial No.
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 2
– Pickup Dial Set
– Pickup Dial No.

Feature Manual References

2.6.6 Hot Line

Idle Extension Hunting

• 11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group
• 11.6.1 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group—Member List

Feature Manual References

2.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting

Incoming Call Distribution Group Features

• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
– Main
– Overflow Queuing Busy
– Overflow No Answer
– Miscellaneous
• 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member
List
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous

708 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Feature Manual References

2.2.2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features

Incoming Call Log

• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 7
– Incoming Call Log—Busy/Intercept (when Called Party is Busy)
– Incoming Call Log—Fwd All/Fwd Busy
– Incoming Call Log—Call Pickup
– Incoming Call Log—Extension / TIE Call
– Outgoing Call Log—Extension Call
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—
Miscellaneous—Supervisor Extension Number
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Option 5—Incoming Call Display
– Option 6—Display Lock/SVM Lock
– Option 7—Incoming Call Log Memory
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
– Option 5—Incoming Call Display
– Option 7—Incoming Call Log Memory

Feature Manual References

2.19.2 Incoming Call Log

Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features

• 6.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration
• 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial—
Extension Inter-digit (s)
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 2—ISDN en Bloc Dial—[#] as End of
Dial for en Bloc mode
• 11.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan—Auto Assign
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Main—Extension Number
– Option 7—ISDN Bearer
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7—ISDN
Bearer

Feature Manual References

4.1.2 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features

PC Programming Manual 709

Feature Programming References

Intercept Routing
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Intercept
Routing No Answer (IRNA)—Day (s), Lunch (s), Break (s), Night (s)
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf—DISA—
Intercept Timer—Day (s), Lunch (s), Break (s), Night (s)
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Overflow
No Answer—Time out & Manual Queue Redirection—Destination-Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Intercept Destination
– Intercept No Answer Time
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
– Intercept Destination
– Intercept No Answer Time
• 18.5 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous

Feature Manual References

2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

Intercept Routing—No Destination

• 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM—PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 18.5 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous—Intercept—Routing to Operator -
No Destination (Destination is not programmed.)

Feature Manual References

2.1.1.7 Intercept Routing—No Destination

Intercom Call
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature—Alternate
Calling - Ring / Voice
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Main—Extension Number
– Main—Extension Name
– Option 3—Intercom Call by Voice
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main
– Extension Number
– Extension Name

Feature Manual References

2.5.3 Intercom Call

Internal Call Block

• 10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3] System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block—COS Number of the
Extension Which Receive the Call from Other Extension 1–64

710 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main—

COS
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS
• 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone—COS
• 13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay—COS Number

Feature Manual References

2.1.2.2 Internal Call Block

Internal Call Features

• 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone—Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Feature Manual References

2.1.2 Internal Call Features

IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

• 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—Main—IP Terminal
Registration Mode
• 9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-IPEXT
• 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT

Feature Manual References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

IP-CS (KX-NS0154)
• 7.4.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—Air Sync Group
• 7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—LAN Sync Group
• 7.5.5 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information
• 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—Main
– LLDP Packet Sending Ability
– IP-CS Registration Mode
• 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—Port Number—Firmware
Update Port No. for IP-PT/IP-CS (Media Relay)
• 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—Media Relay
– IP Extension / IP-CS—NAT - MGCP Server Port No. for IP-CS
– IP Extension / IP-CS—Keep Alive Packet Type for IP-CS
– IP Extension / IP-CS—NAT - FTP Server Port No.
• 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-IPCS
• 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPCS
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Air Synchronisation—
Watching Degeneracy (x60s)
• 19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation

PC Programming Manual 711

Feature Programming References

Feature Manual References

5.2.7 IP-CS (KX-NS0154)

ISDN Extension
• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN Extension
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Extension Setting

Feature Manual References

5.2.5.1 ISDN Extension

ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol

• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Dial (for ISDN Service)
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Dial (for ISDN Service)

Feature Manual References

4.1.2.11 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol

ISDN Virtual Private Network (ISDN-VPN)

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Network Numbering Plan
—Trunk Property
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Network Numbering Plan
—Trunk Property
• 16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number—Leading Number
• 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table
– Leading Number
– Removed Number of Digits
– Added Number

Feature Manual References

4.3.3 ISDN Virtual Private Network (ISDN-VPN)

KX-UT Series SIP Phones

• 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-UTEXT
• 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-UTEXT
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Feature Manual References

5.2.2.1 KX-UT Series SIP Phones

Last Number Redial

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone

712 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

– Automatic Redial—Repeat Counter

– Automatic Redial—Repeat Interval (x10s)
– Automatic Redial—Redial Call Ring Duration (x10s)
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Redial
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 2
– Redial—Automatic Redial when No Answer (ISDN)
– Redial—Save Dial After Connection to Redial Memory
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 7
– Outgoing Call Log—Extension Call
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 7—
Outgoing Call Log Memory
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7—
Outgoing Call Log Memory

Feature Manual References

2.6.3 Last Number Redial

LED Indication
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
– Option 1—PT Fwd / DND—Fwd LED
– Option 1—PT Fwd / DND—DND LED

Feature Manual References

2.21.3 LED Indication

Legacy Device Connection

• 9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Expansion Unit1/Expansion Unit2/Expansion Unit3

Feature Manual References

5.3 Legacy Device Connection

Line Preference—Incoming
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4—
Incoming Preferred Line
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4—
Incoming Preferred Line

Feature Manual References

2.4.2 Line Preference—Incoming

Line Preference—Outgoing
• 10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—External Call Block
• 11.1.2 PBX Configuration—[3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4—
Outgoing Preferred Line

PC Programming Manual 713

Feature Programming References

• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4—

Outgoing Preferred Line

Feature Manual References

2.5.5.2 Line Preference—Outgoing

Local Alarm Information

• 7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Type
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main
– SMDR—Print Information—Error Log
– Maintenance—Local Alarm Display—Extension 1, Extension 2
– Maintenance—Daily Test Start Time—Set
– Maintenance—Daily Test Start Time—Hour
– Maintenance—Daily Test Start Time—Minute

Feature Manual References

5.6.4 Local Alarm Information

Log-in/Log-out
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Log-in / Log-out
– Not Ready (Manual Wrap-up) Mode On / Off
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—
Miscellaneous
– No. of Unanswered Calls for Automatic Log-out
– Last Extension Log-out
• 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member
List—Wrap-up Timer
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous—Options—
Wrap-up Timer based on
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8—Wrap-
up Timer
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)
– Extension Number (for Log-in/Log-out)
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 8—Wrap-
up Timer
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)

714 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

– Extension Number (for Log-in/Log-out)

• 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main—SMDR—Print Information—Log-in / Log-out

Feature Manual References

2.2.2.8 Log-in/Log-out

Making a TIE Line Call

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—TIE Line Access
• 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table—Own PBX Code

Feature Manual References

4.3.1.1 Making a TIE Line Call

Malicious Call Identification (MCID)

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—MCID

Feature Manual References

4.1.2.9 Malicious Call Identification (MCID)

Manager Features
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager—Manager
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main—Password—Manager Password - PT Programming
—Prog *1

Feature Manual References

5.1.6 Manager Features

Message Waiting
• 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Message Waiting Set /
Cancel / Call Back
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature—Message
Waiting Set
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
– Option 3—Dial Tone—Distinctive Dial Tone
– Option 5—SLT—Message Waiting Lamp Pattern
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8—SLT
MW Mode
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Type

Feature Manual References

2.20.1 Message Waiting

Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

• 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—DDI / DID / TIE / MSN

PC Programming Manual 715

Feature Programming References

– Distribution Method
– DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Remove Digit
– DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Additional Dial
• 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table

Feature Manual References

2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

Music on Hold
• 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM
• 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
– Internal MOH—MOH1-2 (Music On Hold 1-2)

Feature Manual References

2.13.4 Music on Hold

Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO—Networking
Data Transfer
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting—Networking
Data Transfer
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager—Manager
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Dial (for NDSS)
• 12.1.6 PBX Configuration—[4-1-6] Extension—Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Dial (for NDSS)
• 12.2.4 PBX Configuration—[4-2-4] Extension—Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send
• 17.2 PBX Configuration—[9-2] Private Network—Network Data Transmission
• 17.3 PBX Configuration—[9-3] Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP)
• 17.4 PBX Configuration—[9-4] Private Network—NDSS Key Table

Feature Manual References

4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Network ICD Group

• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4
– Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is forwarded to CO
– Send CLIP of Extension Caller—when call is forwarded to CO

Feature Manual References

4.3.6 Network ICD Group

716 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA)

• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Assistant—OHCA /
Whisper OHCA

Feature Manual References

2.10.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA)

Off-hook Monitor
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 1—PT Operation—Off Hook Monitor

Feature Manual References

2.11.2 Off-hook Monitor

One-numbered Extension
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Parallel Telephone
(Ring) Mode Set / Cancel
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Option 1—Wireless XDP / Shared Extension

Feature Manual References

2.11.11 One-numbered Extension

One-touch Dialling
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 6—Flexible
Button Programming Mode
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Dial (for One-touch)
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 6—Flexible
Button Programming Mode
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Dial (for One-touch)

Feature Manual References

2.6.2 One-touch Dialling

Operator Features
• 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM—PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant—Operator (Extension Number)

Feature Manual References

5.1.5 Operator Features

PC Programming Manual 717

Feature Programming References

Outgoing Message (OGM)

• 7.2.5 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PC to PBX
• 7.2.6 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PBX to PC
• 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf—DISA—
Progress Tone Continuation Time before Recording Message (s)
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—OGM Record / Clear /
Playback
• 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member
List—Delayed Ring
• 11.5.2 PBX Configuration—[3-5-2] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table—
Queuing Sequence—Sequence 01–16
• 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message—Floating
Extension Number

Feature Manual References

2.30.2 Outgoing Message (OGM)

Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group

• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4
– Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is forwarded to CO
– Send CLIP of Extension Caller—when call is forwarded to CO

Feature Manual References

2.2.2.3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group

Overflow Feature
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
– Overflow Queuing Busy
– Overflow No Answer
• 11.5.2 PBX Configuration—[3-5-2] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous—Options—
Overflow immediately when All Logout

Feature Manual References

2.2.2.7 Overflow Feature

Paging
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Group Paging
– Group Paging Answer
– Paging Deny Set / Cancel
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
– Option 1—PT Fwd / DND—Paging to DND Extension

718 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

– Option 3—Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer

• 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
– Paging—EPG 1-6 (External Pager 1-6)
– Paging—Paging Level from PT Speaker
• 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group
• 11.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—All Setting
• 11.4.2 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—External Pager
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 6—Paging
Deny

Feature Manual References

2.17.1 Paging

Panasonic SIP Phones (P-SIP)

• 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-SIPEXT
• 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT

Feature Manual References

5.2.2.4 Panasonic SIP Phones (P-SIP)

Pause Insertion
• 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Pause Time
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—During Conversation—
Pause Signal Time (s)
• 14.4 PBX Configuration—[6-4] Feature—Second Dial Tone

Feature Manual References

2.5.4.7 Pause Insertion

PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension

• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—PDN/SDN
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
– Option 4—System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD
– Option 6 (CTI)—CTI Hold—Forced Idle when Hold by PDN/SDN Key
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for SDN)
– Extension Number (for SDN)
– Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, ICD Group,
SDN)
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for SDN)

PC Programming Manual 719

Feature Programming References

– Extension Number (for SDN)

• 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console

Feature Manual References

2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection

• 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT—P2P Group
• 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 8
– P2P Group—Priority Voice 1/Priority Voice 2/Priority Voice 3
– P2P Group—Video Conference
• 11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group
Feature Manual References
5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection

Ping
• 7.1.2 Utility—Diagnosis—Ping

Feature Manual References

5.6.7 PING Confirmation

Portable Station (PS) Connection

• 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station

Feature Manual References

5.2.4.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection

Power Failure Transfer

Feature Manual References

5.6.2 Power Failure Transfer

Printing Message
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Printing Message
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge—Main—SMDR for External Hotel Application 2
—Printing Message 1–8

Feature Manual References

2.22.2 Printing Message

Privacy Release
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 1—PT Operation—Privacy Release by
SCO key
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Type

720 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Feature Manual References

2.14.3 Privacy Release

PS Directory
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—Extension
Name
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—Extension
Name
• 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial
– Name
– CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number

Feature Manual References

5.2.4.3 PS Directory

PS Ring Group
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main—
Distribution Method
• 11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group
• 11.8.1 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group—Member List

Feature Manual References

5.2.4.2 PS Ring Group

PS Roaming by Network ICD Group

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—System Wireless—PS Out
of Range Timer (s)
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4—System Wireless—Out of Range
Registration

Feature Manual References

4.3.6.1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group

PT Programming
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager—PT
Programming Mode Level
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main—Password
– Manager Password - PT Programming—Prog *1

Feature Manual References

5.5.3 PT Programming

QSIG Enhanced Features

• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 2—CO - CO Call Limitation—After
Conference
• 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table—Enhanced QSIG

PC Programming Manual 721

Feature Programming References

Feature Manual References

4.3.5 QSIG Enhanced Features

Queuing Feature
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Incoming Call Queue
Monitor
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
– Overflow Queuing Busy
– Overflow No Answer
– Queuing Time Table
– Miscellaneous—Extension No Answer Redirection Time
– Miscellaneous—Maximum No. of Busy Extension
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
• 11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings—Call Waiting on UM Group
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Extension Number (for Hurry-up)
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Extension Number (for Hurry-up)

Feature Manual References

2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

Quick Dialling
• 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial

Feature Manual References

2.6.5 Quick Dialling

Reverse Circuit
• 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Reverse Detection

Feature Manual References

2.5.4.5 Reverse Circuit

Ring Tone Pattern Selection

• 10.8.1 PBX Configuration—[2-8-1] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO—Ring Tone Pattern Plan
1–8
• 10.8.2 PBX Configuration—[2-8-2] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from DOORPHONE—Ring Tone
Pattern Plan 1–8
• 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others—Extension—Ring
Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 1—PT Operation—PT Ring Off Setting

722 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—Ring

Pattern Table
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—Ring
Pattern Table

Feature Manual References

2.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection

Room Status Control

• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge
– Main—Hotel Operator—Extension 1–4
– Bill—Checkout Billing—Billing for Guest

Feature Manual References

2.23.2 Room Status Control

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor

• 27.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent

Feature Manual References

5.6.5 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor

Simple Remote Connection

• 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main—SIP Extension
– Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - CWMP Server IP Address
– Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTP) Port No.
– Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTPS) Port No.
– Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP-MLT Data Download Server (HTTP) Port
No.
– Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP-MLT Data Download Server (HTTPS)
Port No.
– Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP Proxy Server IP Address
– Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP Proxy Server Port No.
– Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - NTP Server IP Address
– Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - NTP Server Port No.
– Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - Keep Alive Packet Type
– Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - Keep Alive Packet Sending Interval Time (s)
– Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - SIP Register Expire Time (s)
– Setting parameters for Networking Survivability, assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - CWMP Server
IP Address
– Setting parameters for Networking Survivability, assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - CWMP Server
(HTTP) Port No.

PC Programming Manual 723

Feature Programming References

– Setting parameters for Networking Survivability, assigned to Remote SIP-MLT—NAT - CWMP Server
(HTTPS) Port No.
– Control Condition of Remote SIP-MLT—PERIODIC Ability
– Control Condition of Remote SIP-MLT—PERIODIC Packet Sending Interval Time (s)
• 9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main—Media Relay
– Common—NAT - External IP Address
– IP Extension / IP-CS—NAT - MGCP Server Port No.
– IP Extension / IP-CS—NAT - MGCP Server Port No. for IP-CS
– IP Extension / IP-CS—Keep Alive Packet Type
– IP Extension / IP-CS—Keep Alive Packet Type for IP-CS
– IP Extension / IP-CS—Keep Alive Packet Sending Interval Time (s)
– IP Extension / IP-CS—NAT - FTP Server Port No.
– SIP Extension / UT Extension—NAT - SIP Proxy Server Port No.
– UT Extension—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTP) Port No.
– UT Extension—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTPS) Port No.
– UT Extension—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTP) Port No. for Network Survivability
– UT Extension—NAT - CWMP Server (HTTPS) Port No. for Network Survivability
– UT Extension—NAT - SIP-MLT Data Download Server (HTTP) Port No.
– UT Extension—NAT - SIP-MLT Data Download Server (HTTPS) Port No.
– UT Extension—NAT - NTP Server Port No.
– UT Extension—Keep Alive Packet Type
– UT Extension—Keep Alive Packet Sending Interval Time (s)
– UT Extension—SIP Register Expire Time (s)
– UT Extension—PERIODIC Ability
– UT Extension—PERIODIC Packet Sending Interval Time (s)
– Option—NAT - RTP IP Address
– Option—NAT - SIP Proxy Server IP Address
– Option—NAT - CWMP Server IP Address
– Option—NAT - CWMP Server IP Address for Network Survivability
– Option—NAT - NTP Server IP Address
• 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—Port Number—Firmware
Update Port No. for IP-PT/IP-CS (Media Relay)
• 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT—Remote Place (Location /
P2P)
• 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT—Remote Place
(Location / P2P)
• 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-UTEXT—Remote Place

Feature Manual References

5.2.2.3 Simple Remote Connection

724 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

• 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-SIPEXT
• 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPEXT

Feature Manual References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Trunk

• 9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-SIPGW
• 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property—V-SIPGW
• 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW

Feature Manual References

4.1.1 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Trunk

SIP Portable Station (S-PS) and SIP Cell Station (SIP-CS)

• 7.12 Utility—CS-Web Connection
• 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-UTEXT—Main—Telephone Type
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—Telephone
Type
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Feature Manual References

5.2.2.2 SIP Portable Station (S-PS) and SIP Cell Station (SIP-CS)

SIP Refer Transfer

• 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW—Supplementary Service
– Blind Transfer(REFER)
– Attended Transfer(REFER)

Feature Manual References

2.12.2 SIP Refer Transfer

SIP-TLS
• 6.17 Tool—P-SIP Option
• 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—Port Number—TLS Port
No. for SIP Extension Server
• 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—Media Relay—SIP
Extension / UT Extension—NAT - SIP TLS Server Port No.
• 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—SIP Extension

Feature Manual References

5.2.2.5 SIP-TLS

Software Upgrading
• 5.1 System Control—Program Update

PC Programming Manual 725

Feature Programming References

Feature Manual References

5.5.9 Software Upgrading

Special Carrier Access Code

• 15.3 PBX Configuration—[7-3] TRS—Special Carrier

Feature Manual References

2.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code

Speed Dialling—Personal/System
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– System Speed Dialling / Personal Speed Dialling
– Personal Speed Dialling - Programming
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—TRS Level for
System Speed Dialling
• 12.1.3 PBX Configuration—[4-1-3] Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial
• 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial
• 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant
– Extension Directory
– System Speed Dial

Feature Manual References

2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/System

Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial—
Analogue CO Call Duration Start (s)
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—Outgoing
CO Call Printout (SMDR)
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge
– Main—SMDR for External Hotel Application 2—Printing Message 1–8
– Charge—Charge Options—Currency
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main
– SMDR
– SMDR Options

Feature Manual References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Supervisory Feature
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Incoming Call Queue
Monitor
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—
Miscellaneous—Supervisor Extension Number

726 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Feature Manual References

2.2.2.9 Supervisory Feature

Supervisory Feature (ACD)

• 8.4 Users—Call Management
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
• 11.5.4 PBX Configuration–[3-5-4] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—ACD Supervisor

Feature Manual References

2.2.2.10 Supervisory Feature (ACD)

Syslog Record Management

• 27.3.2 Network Service—[3-2] Client Feature—Syslog

Feature Manual References

2.22.1.2 Syslog Record Management

Tenant Service
• 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM
– PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
– BGM and Music on Hold—Music on Hold
• 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table
• 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table
• 10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3] System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block
• 11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main—
Tenant Number
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—User Group
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—User Group
• 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone—Tenant Number
• 13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor—Tenant No.
• 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant
• 16 PBX Configuration—[8] ARS
• 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier—Authorisation Code for Tenant
• 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL—Tenant Number
• 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Tenant Number
• 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table—MSN—Tenant Number

Feature Manual References

5.1.3 Tenant Service

PC Programming Manual 727

Feature Programming References

Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911,
3PTY

Feature Manual References

4.1.2.8 Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN

TIE Line Service

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Network Numbering Plan
—Trunk Property
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Network Numbering Plan
—Trunk Property
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Incoming Call Inter-digit
Timer—TIE (s)
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Idle Line Access (Local Access)
– Trunk Group Access
– TIE Line Access
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Other PBX Extension
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—TRS Level—Day,
Lunch, Break, Night
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4—Private Network—TIE Call by
Extension Numbering
• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main—COS
• 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table
• 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings
– DIL—Trunk Property
– DIL—DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
– DDI / DID / TIE / MSN
• 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—DDI / DID Destination—Day,
Lunch, Break, Night

Feature Manual References

4.3.1 TIE Line Service

Time Service
• 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table
• 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Time Service (Day /
Lunch / Break / Night) Switch

728 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager—Time Service

Switch
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
– Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
– Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
– Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
– Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)

Feature Manual References

5.1.4 Time Service

Timed Reminder
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
– Timed Reminder—Repeat Counter
– Timed Reminder—Interval Time (x10s)
– Timed Reminder—Alarm Ringing Duration (x10s)
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Remote Timed Reminder (Remote Wakeup Call)
– Timed Reminder Set / Cancel
• 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others—Timed Reminder—
Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 1—PT LCD—Time Display
• 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System—Timed Reminder
Message—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge—Main—SMDR for External Hotel Application 1
—Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call)
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge—Main—Timed Reminder Message for SIP-
MLT / Standard SIP Phone—Message
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main—SMDR—Print Information—Timed Reminder
(Wake-up Call)

Feature Manual References

2.24.4 Timed Reminder

Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS
– TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
– TRS Level for System Speed Dialling

PC Programming Manual 729

Feature Programming References

• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS

• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
• 15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied Code
• 15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception Code
• 15.3 PBX Configuration—[7-3] TRS—Special Carrier
• 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous

Feature Manual References

2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

Trunk Access
• 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Extension Type—Connection
• 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Connection
• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Idle Line Access (Local Access)
– Trunk Group Access
– Single CO Line Access
• 10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—External Call Block
• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main—Line Hunting Order
• 11.1.2 PBX Configuration—[3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
– Parameter Selection (for Group CO)
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
– Parameter Selection (for Group CO)
• 16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting—ARS Mode
• 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings—CO Name

Feature Manual References

730 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

2.5.5.3 Trunk Access

Trunk Adaptor Connection

• 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-SIPGW
– Trunk Adaptor
– Connection Attribute
– Channel Attribute
• 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPGW
– Trunk Adaptor
– Connection Attribute

Feature Manual References

5.3.1 Trunk Adaptor Connection

Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—TAFAS Answer
• 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
– Paging—EPG 1-6 (External Pager 1-6)
• 13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—External Pager

Feature Manual References

2.17.2 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)

Trunk Busy Out

• 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Busy Out Status
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Busy Out Cancel
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager—Manager
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4—Busy Out—Busy Out for Analogue
CO

Feature Manual References

2.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out

Trunk Call Limitation

• 7.3.5 Utility—Log—Call Control Log
• 9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—Main—Area ID for logical
partition
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—Extension-
CO Line Call Duration Limit
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 2
– Extension - CO Call Limitation—For Incoming Call
– Applying logical partitioning
• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main
– CO-CO Duration Time (*60s)

PC Programming Manual 731

Feature Programming References

– Extension-CO Duration Time (*60s)

• 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous—Dial Digits Limitation After Answering—Dial Digits

Feature Manual References

2.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation

Unified Messaging—Alternate Extension Group

• 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters—Alternate Extension

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.1 Alternate Extension Group

Unified Messaging—Auto Forwarding

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/
Personal Custom Serv
– Auto Forwarding Active
– Auto Forwarding Mailbox Number
– Auto Forwarding Delay Time
– Auto Forwarding Message Type Urgent
– Auto Forwarding Mode
– Auto Forwarding Expires

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.2 Auto Forwarding

Unified Messaging—Auto Receipt

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox—Auto Receipt

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.1 Auto Receipt

Unified Messaging—Automated Attendant (AA)

• 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters
– Wait Time for First Digit (0-20 s)
– Menu Repeat Cycle (1-5 times)
– Play Owner’s Name during Transfer
– Operator Service
– Operator Service—Operator’s Extension
– Operator Service—Operator’s Mailbox
– Operator Service—Busy Coverage Mode
– Operator Service—No Answer Coverage Mode
– Operator Service—Operator No Answer Time (10-60 s)
– Call Hold Mode
– Call Hold Mode—Call Queuing Announcement Mode

732 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

– Call Hold Mode—Call Retrieval Announcement Timing (1-30 s)

– Alternate Extension
– List All Names
– Operator Transfer Mode

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.3 Automated Attendant (AA)

Unified Messaging—Automatic Login

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct
Service
– Auto Login Extension
– Auto Login Extension Password Entry Requirement
– Auto Login Caller ID 1, 2
– Auto Login Caller ID Password Entry Requirement
– Auto Login DDI/DID
– Auto Login TRG No.
– Auto Login DDI/DID, TRG No. Password Entry Requirement
– Auto Login Toll Saver

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.2 Automatic Login

Unified Messaging—Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager

• 7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List
– Internal Call
– External Call
– Supervisor
– Mailbox Number

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager

Unified Messaging—Call Services

• 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group
– Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Incoming Call Service
– Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Incoming Call Service Parameter
– Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Incoming Call Service Prompt

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.6 Call Services

Unified Messaging—Call Transfer Scenario

• 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting

PC Programming Manual 733

Feature Programming References

– Advanced Call Transfer Setting

– Scenario Setting

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.6 Call Transfer Scenario

Unified Messaging—Call Transfer Status

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters—Call Transfer
Status

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.7 Call Transfer Status

Unified Messaging—Call Transfer to Outside

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Call Transfer—Call Transfer to Outside
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Transfer to Outside

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.7 Call Transfer to Outside

Unified Messaging—Call-through Service

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General—Call-through Service
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Transfer to Outside—Outside Transfer
Sequence—Call Transfer to Outside Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D F R T , ; N])

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.5 Call-through Service

Unified Messaging—Caller ID Call Routing

• 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.8 Caller ID Call Routing

Unified Messaging—Caller ID Callback

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox—Caller ID Callback
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Transfer to Outside—Trunk Group (1–
64)—Caller ID Callback

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.9 Caller ID Callback

Unified Messaging—Caller ID Screening

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Call Transfer—Caller ID Screen

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.9 Caller ID Screening

734 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Unified Messaging—Caller Name Announcement

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox—Number of CIDs for Caller Name Announcement
(Selection)
• 24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.10 Caller Name Announcement

Unified Messaging—Company Greeting

• 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group
– Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Company Greeting No. (Selection)
– Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Company Greeting No. (Other)
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Daily Hours Setting

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.12 Company Greeting

Unified Messaging—Covering Extension

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters—Covering
Extension

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.14 Covering Extension

Unified Messaging—Custom Service

• 23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

Unified Messaging—Custom Service Builder

• 23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Custom Service Builder

Feature Manual References

3.1.2.2 Custom Service Builder

Unified Messaging—Default Mailbox Template

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Adding Mailboxes

Feature Manual References

3.1.2.3 Default Mailbox Template

Unified Messaging—Dialling by Name

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters
– First Name
– Last Name
• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General—Directory Listing

PC Programming Manual 735

Feature Programming References

• 23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service

• 23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name

Unified Messaging—Direct Service Access

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct
Service—Direct Service UM Extension

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.11 Direct Service Access

Unified Messaging—Extension Group

• 24.2 UM Configuration—[5-2] System Parameters—Extension Group

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.18 Extension Group

Unified Messaging—External Message Delivery Service

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/
Personal Custom Serv
– External Message Delivery Active
– External Message Delivery Prompt Mode
• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters—Extension
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—External Message Delivery

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.12 External Message Delivery Service

Unified Messaging—Group Distribution Lists

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Personal Distribution List
• 24.1 UM Configuration—[5-1] System Parameters—Mailbox Group

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.14 Group Distribution Lists

Unified Messaging—Hold
• 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing—23.2 UM Configuration—
[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters
– Operator Service—Busy Coverage Mode
– Call Hold Mode
– Call Hold Mode—Call Queuing Announcement Mode
– Call Hold Mode—Call Retrieval Announcement Timing (1-30 s)

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.19 Hold

736 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Unified Messaging—Holiday Service

• 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 9
• 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table

Feature Manual References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview
3.2.1.20 Holiday Service

Unified Messaging—Hospitality Mode

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Hospitality Mode

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.21 Hospitality Mode

Unified Messaging—IMAP Integration

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters—Mailbox Password
(Message Client)
• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General
– Desktop Messaging

Feature Manual References

3.3.2 IMAP Integration

Unified Messaging—Incomplete Call Handling Service

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters
– Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer
– Incomplete Call Handling for Busy

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.15 Incomplete Call Handling Service

Unified Messaging—Intercept Routing to a Mailbox

• 11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings—Intercept to Mailbox for Call to
Extension

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.22 Intercept Routing to a Mailbox

Unified Messaging—Intercom Paging

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Call Transfer
– Intercom Paging Group
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Intercom Paging Parameters

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.23 Intercom Paging

PC Programming Manual 737

Feature Programming References

Unified Messaging—Interview Service

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters—Interview Mailbox

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.24 Interview Service

Unified Messaging—List All Names

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General—Directory Listing

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.25 List All Names

Unified Messaging—Live Call Screening (LCS)

• 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others—Live Call Screening
—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4
– LCS Recording Mode
– LCS Answer Mode
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4—LCS
Recording Mode
• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox—Message Cancel for Live Call Screening

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.16 Live Call Screening (LCS)

Unified Messaging—Logical Extension (All Calls Transfer to Mailbox)

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters—All Calls Transfer
to Mailbox

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.26 Logical Extension (All Calls Transfer to Mailbox)

Unified Messaging—Mailbox
• 7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports
• 20.1 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.17 Mailbox

Unified Messaging—Manager Service Switching

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General
– System Manager Authority
– Message Manager Authority

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.19 Manager Service Switching

738 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Unified Messaging—Message Reception Mode

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters—All Calls Transfer
to Mailbox

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.27 Message Reception Mode

Unified Messaging—Message Transfer

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox—Announce Message Transferred Information

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.20 Message Transfer

Unified Messaging—Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device

• 7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports
• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—User Name
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—E-mail Address
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Only Urgent Messages
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Title Order
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Title String
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Callback Number
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Send Wait Time [0-120 min]
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Attach Voice File
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Use Mode
• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General
– E-mail Option
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—E-mail Option

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.28 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device

Unified Messaging—Message Waiting Notification—Lamp

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters—Message
Waiting Lamp

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.29 Message Waiting Notification—Lamp

Unified Messaging—Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters
– Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Only Urgent Messages
– Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Dial Number [0-9 * # T X , ;]
– Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—No. of Retries

PC Programming Manual 739

Feature Programming References

– Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Busy Delay Time (min)

– Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—No Answer Delay Time (min)
– Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Use Mode
– Telephone Device—Device Notification Timer—Device Start Delay Time (0-120 min)
– Telephone Device—Device Notification Timer—Device Interval Time between Device 1, 2, 3 and Next
Device
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Dialling Parameters/MSW Notification

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.30 Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device

Unified Messaging—Multilingual Service

• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Prompt Setting

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.31 Multilingual Service

Unified Messaging—No DTMF Input Operation

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/
Personal Custom Serv
– No DTMF Input Operation
– No DTMF Input Operation Wait Time

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.32 No DTMF Input Operation

Unified Messaging—On Hold Announcement Menu

• 7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.33 On Hold Announcement Menu

Unified Messaging—Operator Service

• 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing—23.2 UM Configuration—
[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters
– Operator Service
– Operator Service—Operator’s Extension
– Operator Service—Operator’s Mailbox
– Operator Service—Busy Coverage Mode
– Operator Service—No Answer Coverage Mode
– Operator Service—Operator No Answer Time (10-60 s)

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.34 Operator Service

740 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Unified Messaging—Password Administration

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Mailbox Parameters
– Mailbox Password
– Mailbox Password (Message Client)

Feature Manual References

3.1.2.4 Password Administration

Unified Messaging—Personal Custom Service

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/
Personal Custom Serv—Personal Custom Service

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.21 Personal Custom Service

Unified Messaging—Personal Greetings

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox
– Personal Greeting Length (s)
– Personal Greeting for Caller ID

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.22 Personal Greetings

Unified Messaging—PIN Call Routing

• 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing
– PIN No.
– Description
– Call Transfer for Day, Night, Lunch, and Break service

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.35 PIN Call Routing

Unified Messaging—Play System Prompt After Personal Greeting

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox—Play System Prompt after Personal Greeting

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.36 Play System Prompt After Personal Greeting

Unified Messaging—Port Service

• 22 UM Configuration—[3] UM Extension / Trunk Service

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.37 Port Service

Unified Messaging—Remote Call Forwarding Set

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct
Service—Remote Call Telephone Number 1, 2

PC Programming Manual 741

Feature Programming References

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.26 Remote Call Forwarding Set

Unified Messaging—Subscriber Tutorial

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General—Tutorial

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.27 Subscriber Tutorial

Unified Messaging—System Backup/Restore

• 6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup
• 6.10 Tool—UM Data Restore
• 6.11 Tool—UM Backup History

Feature Manual References

3.1.2.5 System Backup/Restore

Unified Messaging—System Prompts

• 7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation
• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General—Prompt Mode
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Prompt Setting

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.41 System Prompts

Unified Messaging—System Reports

• 7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports

Feature Manual References

3.1.2.6 System Reports

Unified Messaging—System Security

• 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security

Feature Manual References

3.1.2.7 System Security

Unified Messaging—Toll Saver

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct
Service
– Auto Login Extension
– Auto Login Extension Password Entry Requirement
– Auto Login Caller ID 1, 2
– Auto Login Caller ID Password Entry Requirement
– Auto Login DDI/DID

742 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

– Auto Login TRG No.

– Auto Login DDI/DID, TRG No. Password Entry Requirement
– Auto Login Toll Saver
• 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing—23.2 UM Configuration—
[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters
– Delayed Answer Time for New Message (5-60 s)
– Delayed Answer Time for No New Message (5-60 s)

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.29 Toll Saver

Unified Messaging—Transfer Recall to a Mailbox

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Recall—
Transfer Recall (s)
• 11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings—Transfer Recall to Mailbox

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.42 Transfer Recall to a Mailbox

Unified Messaging—Trunk Service (Universal Port)

• 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.44 Trunk Service (Universal Port)

Unified Messaging—Two-way Record/Two-way Transfer

• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Two-way
Recording
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Extension Number (for Two-way Record)
– Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer)
– Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Two-way
Recording
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Extension Number (for Two-way Record)
– Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer)
– Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)
• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox—Two-way Recorded Message Save Mode

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.30 Two-way Record/Two-way Transfer

Unified Messaging—Urgent Message

• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Notification Parameters

PC Programming Manual 743

Feature Programming References

– Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Only Urgent Messages

– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Only Urgent Messages
• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/
Personal Custom Serv—Auto Forwarding Message Type Urgent
• 20.1.2 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Full Setting—Announce Number of Messages
– Subscriber Service - New Urgent Messages
– Receiving Message Service - New Urgent Messages
• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox—First Playback Urgent Message

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.31 Urgent Message

Unified Messaging—Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button

• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Extension Number (for
Voice Mail Transfer)
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Extension Number (for
Voice Mail Transfer)

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.32 Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button

Unified Messaging—Voice Mail Service

• 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.45 Voice Mail Service

Unified Messaging—Web Programming

• 20.1 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings
• 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group—Day, Night, Lunch, and
Break Mode - Incoming Call Service Prompt
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Prompt Setting

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.33 Web Programming

User Profiles
• 8 Users
• 12 PBX Configuration—[4] Extension
• 20 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings

Feature Manual References

5.5.1 User Profiles

744 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Verification Code Entry

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Extension PIN—Lock
Counter
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—User Remote
Operation / Walking COS / Verification Code
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Option 1—ARS Itemised Code
– Option 3—Charge Limit
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
– Option 1—ARS Itemised Code
– Option 3—Charge Limit
• 14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code

Feature Manual References

2.7.6 Verification Code Entry

VIP Call
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—
Miscellaneous—VIP Call Mode

Feature Manual References

2.2.2.6 VIP Call

Virtual PS
• 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station—Registration

Feature Manual References

5.2.4.6 Virtual PS

Voice Mail (VM) Group

• 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Extension Type—DPT Type—Type
• 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Extension Type—DPT Type—VM
Unit No.
• 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Extension Type—DPT Type—VM
Port No.
• 11.11.1 PBX Configuration—[3-11-1] Group—VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
• 11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
• 11.12.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-1] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
• 11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
• 11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings
• 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings

Feature Manual References

2.28.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview—UM Ports and the UM Group

PC Programming Manual 745

Feature Programming References

Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Recall—Transfer Recall (s)
• 11.11.1 PBX Configuration—[3-11-1] Group—VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
• 11.11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-11-2] Group—VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4
– LCS Recording Mode
– LCS Answer Mode
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Extension Number (for Two-way Record)
– Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer)
– Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)
– Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4—LCS
Recording Mode
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Extension Number (for Two-way Record)
– Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer)
– Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)
– Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)
• 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console
– Type
– Extension Number (for Two-way Record)
– Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer)
– Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)
– Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)
• 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone—VM Trunk Group No.
• 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL
– Tenant Number
– VM Trunk Group No.
• 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table
– Tenant Number
– VM Trunk Group No.
• 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table—MSN
– Tenant Number
– UM Service Group No.

Feature Manual References

746 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

2.28.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

Voice Mail DTMF Integration

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Voice Mail (Caller from VM
to CO)—On-hook Wait Time (s)
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—
Miscellaneous—Programmed Mailbox No. (16 Digits)
• 11.12.1 PBX Configuration—[3-12-1] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
• 11.12.2 PBX Configuration—[3-12-2] Group—VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—
Programmed Mailbox No.
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—[4-1-4] Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—
Programmed Mailbox No.
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—[4-2-3] Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)
• 12.3 PBX Configuration—[4-3] Extension—DSS Console
– Type
– Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)

Feature Manual References

2.28.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration

Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network

• 27.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports—Basic Settings—DSP IP Setting—DSP Card-1/DSP Card-2
—IP Address

Feature Manual References

4.3.2 Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network

Walking COS
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—User Remote
Operation / Walking COS / Verification Code
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other
Extensions—Remote Operation by Other Extension
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—Extension
PIN
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—Extension
PIN

Feature Manual References

2.7.5 Walking COS

PC Programming Manual 747

Note

Walking Extension Features

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Walking Extension
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—Extension
PIN

Feature Manual References

2.24.3 Walking Extension Features

Walking Extension-Home position control

• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 9—Walking Extension Option—Home
position control

Feature Manual References

2.24.3.3 Walking Extension-Home position control

Whisper OHCA
• 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT—Option—IP Codec Priority
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Assistant—OHCA /
Whisper OHCA
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 5—Whisper OHCA—for SLT

Feature Manual References

2.10.4.4 Whisper OHCA

Wireless XDP Parallel Mode

• 9.35 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station—PS Registration and De-registration
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Wireless XDP Parallel
Mode Set / Cancel
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other
Extensions—Accept Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set by PS
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—
Wireless XDP / Shared Extension

Feature Manual References

5.2.4.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode

748 PC Programming Manual

 Note

PC Programming Manual 749

Note

750 PC Programming Manual

 Note

PC Programming Manual 751

Panasonic Corporation
1006, Oaza Kadoma, Kadoma-shi, Osaka 571-8501, Japan

http://www.panasonic.com/

© Panasonic Corporation 2014

PNQX6305NA CC0114AH11098